GRB200D (6F2S1933 G2A De-Centralized) 0.04 PDF

6F2S1933 (Rev. 0.
04)
Instruction manual
Decentralized Busbar Protection IED
GR200 series (GRB200)
GRB200---
S, G, and T positions
TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION
Notice: This GRB200 manual is issued for 031

or 032 (CU), 032 or 034 (BU) software code,
which you can identify at ’S, G, and T positions’
on Software nameplate.
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read
and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided,
may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property damage.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
ii
6F2S1933 (0.04)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire (Short-bar)
Do not remove the short-wire/short-bar(s) connected to the frame earth (FG) at the terminal
block on the rear of cases.
•Electric wire between #35 - #37 on the power-supply terminal block
Make sure the wire is connected.
(Exception: This wire needs to be detached for performing the dielectric voltage test.)
iii
6F2S1933 (0.04)
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When
disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be punished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems &
Solutions Corporation (Toshiba ESS, Japan).
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
Equipment installation and operation

•Equipment installation
Never remove cables at frame ground terminals (FGs) while the AC/DC power supplies.
•Equipment operation
The user shall have responsibilities to use and install the equipment where the
specifications are designated by the manufacture. Never operate the equipment on the
condition where the manufacture cannot intend. Otherwise, the safety function furnished
into the equipment may not be operated properly.
•Symbols
Symbol Description
Protective conductor terminal
Caution, risk of electric shock
iv
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Liability, copyright and others

•Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the description of this manual against the hardware and software
described, but we cannot guarantee that all deviations have been eliminated from the
description completely; hence, no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions
contained in the information given. We review the information in this manual regularly
and there will be some corrections in subsequent editions. We reserve the right to make
technical improvements without notice.
•Copyright
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2020.
All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
v
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 1
System configuration ...................................................................................................................... 2
Relay applications ........................................................................................................................... 8
General control and Control & monitoring applications .............................................................. 9
Recording function ........................................................................................................................ 10
Metering function .......................................................................................................................... 10
Summary of GRB200 .................................................................................................................... 11
Symbols used in logical diagrams ................................................................................................ 12
Abbreviation .................................................................................................................................. 16
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) .................................................... 18
2 Relay application .................................................................................................................................. 20
Current differential protection (DIF)........................................................................................... 21
2.1.1 DIF principle .......................................................................................................................... 22
2.1.2 Check-zone-protection and discriminating-zone-protection ............................................... 23
2.1.3 Selection of protection-characteristic ................................................................................... 28
2.1.4 Stabilization for CT saturation with through-fault current ............................................... 29
2.1.5 Current transformer requirements ...................................................................................... 31
2.1.6 DIF slope settings .................................................................................................................. 33
2.1.7 Current differential protection for respective zones (DIFCH, DIFZA-ZH) ....................... 35
2.1.8 Blind zone protection ............................................................................................................. 41
2.1.9 CT circuit failure detection (CTF)......................................................................................... 43
2.1.10 Supervision of differential current (DIF-IdSV) ................................................................... 47
2.1.11 DIF settings ............................................................................................................................ 49
2.1.12 DIF signals (Data ID) ............................................................................................................ 50
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) ..................................................................................... 66
2.2.1 Circuit breaker failure detection .......................................................................................... 67
2.2.2 CBF protection scheme .......................................................................................................... 68
2.2.3 Scheme logic and setting ....................................................................................................... 71
2.2.4 CBF operation by faults occurrence...................................................................................... 77
2.2.5 CBF settings ........................................................................................................................... 81
2.2.6 CBF signals (Data ID) ........................................................................................................... 82
Fail safe (FS).................................................................................................................................. 85
2.3.1 Undervoltage element for phase-to-earth voltage (UVFS) ................................................. 86
2.3.2 Undervoltage element for phase-to-phase voltage (UVSFS) .............................................. 86
2.3.3 Undervoltage change detection element (UVDFS) .............................................................. 86
2.3.4 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 86
2.3.5 FS settings .............................................................................................................................. 89
vi
6F2S1933 (0.04)
2.3.6 FS signals (Data ID) .............................................................................................................. 90

Command trip function (COMTP)................................................................................................ 94
2.4.1 Operation of command trip (Com-trip) ................................................................................. 95
2.4.2 Operation of command transfer trip (Com-Transfer-trip) .................................................. 95
2.4.3 Scheme logic and setting ....................................................................................................... 95
2.4.4 Operation example of Com-Transfer-trip ............................................................................. 98
2.4.5 COMTP settings ..................................................................................................................... 99
2.4.6 COMTP signals (Data ID) ................................................................................................... 100
End fault protection (EFP) ......................................................................................................... 102
2.5.1 EFP operation scheme ......................................................................................................... 103
2.5.2 Scheme logic and setting ..................................................................................................... 105
2.5.3 EFP settings ......................................................................................................................... 108
2.5.4 EFP signals (Data ID).......................................................................................................... 109
Non-directional overcurrent protection (OC) .............................................................................111
2.6.1 Characteristic of non-directional element .......................................................................... 112
2.6.2 IDMT and DT characteristics ............................................................................................. 112
2.6.3 Threshold value .................................................................................................................... 120
2.6.4 Reset ratio............................................................................................................................. 121
2.6.5 Miscellaneous functions....................................................................................................... 121
2.6.6 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 122
2.6.7 OC settings ........................................................................................................................... 123
2.6.8 OC signals (Data ID)............................................................................................................ 126
Non-directional earth fault protection (EF) .............................................................................. 127
2.7.1 Characteristic of non-directional element .......................................................................... 128
2.7.2 IDMT and DT characteristices............................................................................................ 128
2.7.3 Threshold value .................................................................................................................... 134
2.7.4 Reset Ratio............................................................................................................................ 134
2.7.5 Miscellaneous functions....................................................................................................... 134
2.7.6 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 135
2.7.7 EF settings............................................................................................................................ 136
2.7.8 EF signals (Data ID) ............................................................................................................ 139
Protection common (PROT_COMM) .......................................................................................... 140
2.8.1 CB contact supervision ........................................................................................................ 141
2.8.2 DS contact supervision ........................................................................................................ 142
2.8.3 Busbar-bridge monitoring ................................................................................................... 142
2.8.4 Dead line detection .............................................................................................................. 143
2.8.5 PROT_COMM settings ........................................................................................................ 144
2.8.6 PROT_COMM signals (Data ID) ........................................................................................ 145
Trip circuit (TRC) ........................................................................................................................ 146
vii
6F2S1933 (0.04)
2.9.1 Operation mode and scheme logic ...................................................................................... 147

2.9.2 TRC settings ......................................................................................................................... 149
2.9.3 TRC signals (Data ID) ......................................................................................................... 150
BU out of service (BUOUT) ........................................................................................................ 152
2.10.1 BUOUT settings ................................................................................................................... 153
2.10.2 BUOUT signals (Data ID) ................................................................................................... 154
3 General control function .................................................................................................................... 156
Control scheme ............................................................................................................................ 157
Control mode................................................................................................................................ 160
3.2.1 Select-before-operation mode (SBO) ................................................................................... 160
3.2.2 Direct-operation mode (DIR) ............................................................................................... 161
Control hierarchy ........................................................................................................................ 163
3.3.1 Control level and control point............................................................................................ 164
3.3.2 Selector switches and bay operations ................................................................................. 164
3.3.3 Programming of control-right distributions ....................................................................... 164
Common controls (CMNCTRL) .................................................................................................. 166
3.4.1 Double command blocking (DCB) ....................................................................................... 166
3.4.2 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal ............................................................................................. 168
3.4.3 Provision of selected status ................................................................................................. 169
3.4.4 Miscellaneous settings ......................................................................................................... 169
3.4.5 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 171
3.4.6 Signals (DataID) .................................................................................................................. 172
Local, remote and PLC control ................................................................................................... 176
3.5.1 Local control ......................................................................................................................... 177
3.5.2 Remote control...................................................................................................................... 177
3.5.3 Programmable logic control (PLC)...................................................................................... 177
3.5.4 Signal for Local/Remote control .......................................................................................... 178
3.5.5 Signals (DataID for CU and BU) ........................................................................................ 179
LED reset function (LEDR) ........................................................................................................ 180
3.6.1 Selecting logic for resetting LEDs ...................................................................................... 180
3.6.2 Canceling logic (SBO mode) ................................................................................................ 182
3.6.3 Operating logic (SBO/DIR mode) ........................................................................................ 184
3.6.4 Settings in LED logics ......................................................................................................... 185
3.6.5 Signal mapping for IEC61850 communication .................................................................. 187
3.6.6 LEDR settings ...................................................................................................................... 191
3.6.7 LEDR signals (DatID).......................................................................................................... 191
Counter function for the general (GCNT) ................................................................................. 192
3.7.1 Counter setting for signal .................................................................................................... 192
3.7.1 Selecting logic (SBO/DIR modes) ........................................................................................ 195
viii
6F2S1933 (0.04)

3.7.3 Operating logic (SBO/DIR modes) ...................................................................................... 202
3.7.5 GCNT settings ...................................................................................................................... 209
3.7.6 GCNT signals (DataID) ....................................................................................................... 210
Mode control function (MDCTRL).............................................................................................. 212
3.8.1 Function ................................................................................................................................ 212
3.8.2 Mapping for IEC61850 communication.............................................................................. 213
3.8.3 MDCTRL settings ................................................................................................................ 217
3.8.4 MDCTRL signals (DataID) .................................................................................................. 218
4 Control application (CU) .................................................................................................................... 220
Software switch controller function (SOFTSW) ........................................................................ 221
4.1.1 SOFTSW controlling ............................................................................................................ 221
4.1.2 Control logics for SBO/DIR modes ...................................................................................... 223
4.1.3 Cancel logic for SBO mode .................................................................................................. 232
4.1.4 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes....................................................................................... 232
4.1.5 Mapping for IEC 61850 communication............................................................................. 239
4.1.6 SOFTSW settings ................................................................................................................. 243
4.1.7 SOFTSW signals (DataID) .................................................................................................. 244
5 Control and monitoring application (BU) ......................................................................................... 250
Single position device function (SPOS)...................................................................................... 251
5.1.4 Setup for BIO module .......................................................................................................... 286
5.1.6 SPOS settings ....................................................................................................................... 298
5.1.7 SPOS signals (DataID) ........................................................................................................ 299
Software switch controller function (SOFTSW) ........................................................................ 302
5.2.1 SOFTSW types ..................................................................................................................... 303
5.2.2 Control logics (SBO/DIR modes) ......................................................................................... 305
5.2.3 Cancelling logic (SBO mode) ............................................................................................... 314
5.2.5 Signal mapping for IEC 61850 communication ................................................................. 322
5.2.6 SOFTSW settings ................................................................................................................. 326
5.2.7 SOFTSW signals (DataID) .................................................................................................. 327
Operation time reset function (OPTR)....................................................................................... 335
5.3.2 Cancelling logic (SBO mode) ............................................................................................... 340
ix
6F2S1933 (0.04)

5.3.5 OPTR settings ...................................................................................................................... 347
5.3.6 OPTR signals (DataID) ........................................................................................................ 348
Total time measurement function (TOTALTIM) ....................................................................... 349
5.4.1 Operating feature................................................................................................................. 349
5.4.2 Preparation for the operation.............................................................................................. 351
5.4.4 TOTALTIM settings ............................................................................................................. 356
5.4.5 TOTALTIM signals (DataID) .............................................................................................. 357
Software interlock function (ILK) .............................................................................................. 361
5.5.1 ILK specification .................................................................................................................. 362
5.5.2 Interlock-check formula ....................................................................................................... 363
5.5.3 Interlock-check method ....................................................................................................... 365
5.5.4 Configuration of Interlock formulae ................................................................................... 371
5.5.5 ILK signals (DataID) ........................................................................................................... 372
Double position device function (DPOS) .................................................................................... 378
5.6.4 Operation counter ................................................................................................................ 418
5.6.5 Measurement about operation intervals ............................................................................ 422
5.6.8 DPOS settings ...................................................................................................................... 439
5.6.9 DPOS signals (DataID)........................................................................................................ 441
Three position device function (TPOS) ...................................................................................... 444
5.7.4 Operation counter ................................................................................................................ 494
5.7.5 Measurement about operation Intervals ............................................................................ 498
5.7.7 Mapped for IEC61850 commination ................................................................................... 511
5.7.8 TPOS settings....................................................................................................................... 516
5.7.9 TPOS signals (DataID) ........................................................................................................ 518
Event detection function for general BIs (GENBI) ................................................................... 523
5.8.1 Operation features ............................................................................................................... 523
x
6F2S1933 (0.04)
5.8.3 GENBI settings .................................................................................................................... 529

5.8.4 GENBI signals (DataID) ..................................................................................................... 530
Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ) ........................................................................... 532
5.9.1 Function setup...................................................................................................................... 532
5.9.2 Preparation of the operation ............................................................................................... 534
5.9.3 Example of automatic sequence operation ......................................................................... 534
5.9.4 Control hierarchy ................................................................................................................. 537
5.9.5 Input for emergency stop ..................................................................................................... 537
5.9.7 ASEQ settings ...................................................................................................................... 542
5.9.8 ASEQ signals (DataID)........................................................................................................ 543
6 Technical description (CU) ................................................................................................................. 545
IED case and module slot ........................................................................................................... 546
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)....................................................................... 548
6.2.1 VCT21B................................................................................................................................. 549
6.2.2 Constitution of VCT ............................................................................................................. 551
6.2.3 Setting VT ratios .................................................................................................................. 552
Signal processing and communication module (CPU) .............................................................. 553
6.3.1 Signal processing ................................................................................................................. 554
6.3.2 Communication modules for LAN, RS485, and IRIG........................................................ 555
6.3.3 Location for LAN, RS485, and IRIG modules .................................................................... 559
CU-BU communication module (FEP module) ......................................................................... 561
Binary IO Module (BI, BO, and BIO) ........................................................................................ 563
6.5.1 Binary input feature ............................................................................................................ 564
6.5.2 Binary input circuit ............................................................................................................. 565
6.5.3 Binary output feature .......................................................................................................... 574
6.5.4 Binary output circuit ........................................................................................................... 576
6.5.5 Structure of binary IO Module ............................................................................................ 581
6.5.6 Settings of binary input circuits in CU .............................................................................. 587
6.5.7 Data IDs of binary input circuits in CU ............................................................................. 589
6.5.8 Settings of binary output circuits in CU ............................................................................ 591
6.5.9 Data IDs of binary output circuits in CU ........................................................................... 593
Power supply module (PWS) ...................................................................................................... 595
Human Machine Interface (HMI) .............................................................................................. 598
6.7.1 Outlook.................................................................................................................................. 598
6.7.2 LED Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 599
6.7.3 Function keys with LEDs .................................................................................................... 604
6.7.4 Monitoring jacks................................................................................................................... 609
6.7.5 Operation keys ..................................................................................................................... 611
xi
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Clock function (Date and time) .................................................................................................. 612

6.8.1 Clock setting ......................................................................................................................... 612
6.8.2 Selection of date and time formats ..................................................................................... 612
6.8.3 Time Synchronization .......................................................................................................... 613
6.8.4 Setting time zone ................................................................................................................. 617
6.8.5 DST setting (Summer time setting).................................................................................... 618
6.8.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 620
Grouping relay settings (Group1–8) .......................................................................................... 621
Recording function ...................................................................................................................... 624
6.10.1 Fault recorder ....................................................................................................................... 624
6.10.2 Event recorder ...................................................................................................................... 630
6.10.3 Disturbance recorder ........................................................................................................... 637
6.10.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 643
6.10.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................... 645
Metering function ........................................................................................................................ 646
6.11.1 Metering data (Metering group) ......................................................................................... 646
6.11.2 Metering information on the screen ................................................................................... 647
6.11.3 Setting for measurements ................................................................................................... 648
6.11.4 Statistics data (Counter group)........................................................................................... 650
6.11.5 Statistics data (Accumulated time) .................................................................................... 650
6.11.6 Monitoring for miscellaneous functions ............................................................................. 651
6.11.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 652
6.11.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 653
User interface (Front panel) ....................................................................................................... 667
6.12.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................. 667
6.12.2 HMI operation ...................................................................................................................... 671
6.12.3 Record sub-menu .................................................................................................................. 674
6.12.4 Monitoring sub-menu .......................................................................................................... 681
6.12.5 Setting sub-menu ................................................................................................................. 688
6.12.6 I/O setting sub-menu ........................................................................................................... 702
6.12.7 Time sub-menu ..................................................................................................................... 708
6.12.8 Test sub-menu ...................................................................................................................... 715
6.12.9 Information sub-menu ......................................................................................................... 721
6.12.10 Security setting sub-menu ............................................................................................... 722
6.12.11 Control sub-menu ............................................................................................................. 724
7 Technical description (BU) ................................................................................................................. 725
IED case and module slot ........................................................................................................... 726
7.1.1 1/2 size case .......................................................................................................................... 726
7.1.2 1/3 size case .......................................................................................................................... 728
xii
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)....................................................................... 730

7.2.1 VCT22B................................................................................................................................. 731
7.2.2 VCT32B................................................................................................................................. 732
7.2.3 Constitution of VCT ............................................................................................................. 733
7.2.4 Setting VCT ratio ................................................................................................................. 734
7.2.5 Sifting VCT rated current ................................................................................................... 735
Signal processing and communication module (CPU) .............................................................. 739
7.3.1 Signal processing ................................................................................................................. 739
7.3.2 Configuration switch............................................................................................................ 740
7.3.3 Communication module for maintenance PC .................................................................... 741
7.3.4 CU-BU communication module .......................................................................................... 741
7.3.5 Location of communication modules................................................................................... 742
Binary IO Module (BI, BO, and BIO) ........................................................................................ 743
7.4.1 Features and circuits ........................................................................................................... 743
7.4.2 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 744
7.4.3 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 746
Power supply module (PWS) ...................................................................................................... 750
Human Machine Interface (HMI) .............................................................................................. 751
Clock function (Date and time) .................................................................................................. 752
Grouping relay settings (Group1–8) .......................................................................................... 753
Recording function ...................................................................................................................... 755
7.9.1 Fault recorder ....................................................................................................................... 755
7.9.2 Event recorder ...................................................................................................................... 757
7.9.3 Disturbance recorder ........................................................................................................... 761
7.9.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 763
7.9.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................... 765
Metering function ........................................................................................................................ 767
7.10.1 Metering data (Metering group) ......................................................................................... 767
7.10.2 Metering screen .................................................................................................................... 767
7.10.3 Statistics data (Counter group)........................................................................................... 769
7.10.4 Statistics data (Accumulated time) .................................................................................... 769
7.10.5 Statistics data (Total time group) ....................................................................................... 769
7.10.6 Monitoring for miscellaneous functions ............................................................................. 771
7.10.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 772
7.10.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 772
User interface (Front panel) ....................................................................................................... 773
7.11.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................. 773
7.11.2 Record sub-menu .................................................................................................................. 775
7.11.3 Monitoring sub-menu .......................................................................................................... 775
xiii
6F2S1933 (0.04)
7.11.4 Setting sub-menu ................................................................................................................. 776

7.11.5 I/O setting sub-menu ........................................................................................................... 776
7.11.6 Time sub-menu ..................................................................................................................... 777
7.11.7 Test sub-menu ...................................................................................................................... 777
7.11.8 Information sub-menu ......................................................................................................... 777
7.11.9 Security setting sub-menu................................................................................................... 777
7.11.10 Control sub-menu ............................................................................................................. 777
8 Engineering tool.................................................................................................................................. 779
Overview of GR-TIEMS .............................................................................................................. 780
Connection ................................................................................................................................... 781
Common tools .............................................................................................................................. 781
Monitoring tools........................................................................................................................... 782
Record tools .................................................................................................................................. 782
Generic configuration tools ......................................................................................................... 783
IEC 61850 configuration tool...................................................................................................... 783
IEC 60870-5-103 configuration tool ........................................................................................... 783
Busbar configuration tools .......................................................................................................... 784
MIMIC configuration tool ........................................................................................................... 784
9 PLC function ....................................................................................................................................... 785
Overview of PLC function ........................................................................................................... 786
PLC data error ............................................................................................................................. 786
PLC driver.................................................................................................................................... 787
9.3.1 Monitoring point for PLC driver ......................................................................................... 787
Timer variable settings using PLC drivers ............................................................................... 791
10 Communication protocol ................................................................................................................. 796
Interface setting and protocol selection ..................................................................................... 797
LAN operation ............................................................................................................................. 798
10.2.1 LAN address (IP address).................................................................................................... 798
10.2.2 Redundant LAN (Hot-standby) ........................................................................................... 799
10.2.3 Redundant LAN (PRP/HSR operation) .............................................................................. 806
10.2.4 Redundant LAN (RSTP operation) ..................................................................................... 810
10.2.5 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 812
10.2.6 Signals (DataID) .................................................................................................................. 814
IEC 61850 communication.......................................................................................................... 816
10.3.1 About protocol ...................................................................................................................... 818
10.3.2 Communication service ....................................................................................................... 821
10.3.3 How to manage engineering work ...................................................................................... 824
10.3.4 Settings for 61850 communications .................................................................................... 843
10.3.5 Selection of IEC61850 protocol among IED embedded protocols ..................................... 845
xiv
6F2S1933 (0.04)
10.3.6 How to supervise in 61850 communications ...................................................................... 845

10.3.7 Quality signal of IEC 61850 communication ..................................................................... 846
10.3.8 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication............................................................ 848
10.3.9 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option................................................................................. 849
10.3.10 Setting ............................................................................................................................... 850
10.3.11 Signal (Data ID) ............................................................................................................... 851
IEC 60870-5-103 communication ............................................................................................... 867
10.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 868
10.4.2 Requirements in the Master station................................................................................... 870
10.4.3 Interoperability .................................................................................................................... 871
10.4.4 Communication interface in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard ............................................ 872
10.4.5 Editing data of the configuration ........................................................................................ 873
10.4.6 Protocol selection.................................................................................................................. 894
10.4.7 Tips for settings.................................................................................................................... 895
10.4.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 896
10.4.9 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................... 897
USB communication.................................................................................................................... 898
RS485 communication ................................................................................................................ 899
11 Automatic supervision .................................................................................................................... 900
Outline of automatic supervision ............................................................................................... 901
Supervision tasks ........................................................................................................................ 904
11.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error) ............................................ 906
11.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error) ..................................................................... 907
11.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) ....................................................................................... 908
11.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) ..................................................................... 909
11.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) .......................................................................................... 910
11.2.6 Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error)..................................................................................... 911
11.2.7 Monitoring FEP running (FEP stopped error)................................................................... 912
11.2.8 Monitoring FEP interface (FEP_IF error).......................................................................... 913
11.2.9 Monitoring FEP I/O interface (FEPIO error)..................................................................... 914
11.2.10 Monitoring fatal error in FEP (FEP FAIL) ..................................................................... 915
11.2.11 Monitoring minor error in FEP (FEP ALM) ................................................................... 916
11.2.12 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) ..................................................................... 917
11.2.13 Supervision of task operation (RUN error) .................................................................... 918
11.2.14 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) ............................................................. 919
11.2.15 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) .................................................................. 920
11.2.16 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) ..................................................................... 921
11.2.17 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) ..................................................................... 922
11.2.18 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error) ........................................... 923
xv
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.19 Supervision of the A/D accuracy of BU (BUACC) .......................................................... 924

11.2.20 Current transformer failure (CT fail) ............................................................................. 925
11.2.21 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (V2 error) ................................................ 926
11.2.22 Supervision of voltage in zero-sequence (V0 error)........................................................ 927
11.2.23 Supervision of current in zero-sequence (I0 error) ........................................................ 928
11.2.24 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) ........................................................ 929
11.2.27 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) .................................................. 932
11.2.28 Supervision of power supply module (Power error) ....................................................... 933
11.2.29 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error) .................................................. 934
11.2.30 Supervision of error differential current with DIF (Id error) ....................................... 936
11.2.31 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) ................................................................ 937
11.2.32 Supervision of circuit breaker contacts (CB1 fail) ......................................................... 938
11.2.33 Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail) ............................................................... 939
11.2.34 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error) .......................................................................... 940
11.2.35 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) ........................................................... 941
11.2.36 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) ......................................................... 942
11.2.37 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error) ............................................... 943
11.2.38 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) .............................................. 945
11.2.39 Aux. contacts monitoring (DOPS/TOPS faulty or undefined) ....................................... 946
11.2.40 Loss of receiving signal (CURX error) ............................................................................ 948
11.2.41 Transmission failure (CUTX error) ................................................................................. 949
11.2.42 Operation failure (BUFAIL) ............................................................................................ 950
11.2.43 Warning in BU (BUALM) ................................................................................................ 951
11.2.44 Irregular BU address (BUADR erro-r) ........................................................................... 952
11.2.45 Loss of BU receiving signal (BURX error) ...................................................................... 953
11.2.46 Transmission BU failure (BUTX error) .......................................................................... 954
11.2.47 Information of CU fatal error (Recv CUFAIL) ............................................................... 955
11.2.48 Information of CU minor error (Recv CUALM) ............................................................. 956
11.2.49 Check for BU bridge condition (Bridge alarm)............................................................... 957
11.2.50 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 958
11.2.51 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 964
12 Installation and setting .................................................................................................................. 972
Caution for storage ...................................................................................................................... 973
Handling precautions .................................................................................................................. 973
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software (CU) .......................................................... 974
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software (BU) .......................................................... 977
Changing rated current (BU) ..................................................................................................... 983
xvi
6F2S1933 (0.04)
PWS alarm threshold setting (CU and BU) .............................................................................. 988

13 Commissioning and maintenance .................................................................................................. 989
Scope of required test .................................................................................................................. 990
Cautions ....................................................................................................................................... 991
Preparations ................................................................................................................................ 991
Test operations............................................................................................................................. 993
13.4.1 Test for communication ....................................................................................................... 994
13.4.2 Test for relay application ..................................................................................................... 995
13.4.3 Test for BI and BO circuits .................................................................................................. 995
13.4.4 Test for mode change (MDCTRL)........................................................................................ 996
13.4.5 Signal monitor ...................................................................................................................... 996
13.4.6 LED light test ....................................................................................................................... 996
Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 997
Signal ........................................................................................................................................... 999
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function .................................................................................... 1000
Appendix 2 Case outline .................................................................................................................... 1007
Appendix 3 Typical external connection ........................................................................................... 1013
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS .................................................................... 1017
Appendix 5 IEC60870-5-103 interoperability .................................................................................. 1069
Appendix 6 Ordering .......................................................................................................................... 1089
Appendix 7 Technical data ................................................................................................................. 1102
Appendix 8 Manufacture setting ........................................................................................................1113
Appendix 9 Notes for the dielectric voltage test ...............................................................................1116
Appendix 10 CU-BU communication information ..............................................................................1118
Appendix 11 Engineering exercise ...................................................................................................... 1146
xvii
6F2S1933 (0.04)
1 Introduction
Contents Page
Abbreviation 18 Metering function 10
Control and monitoring 9 Summary of GRB200 11
Function identifies and signals (FB) 18
Hardware overview 4
Recording function 10
Protection functions 8
Symbols used in logical diagrams 12 Reference Appendixes:
→Signal list for common function 1000
Reference chapters: →Case outline 1007
→Relay application 20 →Typical external connection 1013
→General control function 156 →IEC 61850 1017
→Control application (CU) 220 →Ordering 1089
→Control and monitoring application (BU) 250 →Technical data 1102
→Technical description (CU) 545 →Manufacture setting 1113
→Technical description (BU) 725 →Note for dielectric voltage test 1116
→Engineering tool 779 →Engineering exercise 1146
→PLC function 785 →IEC 60870-5-103 1069
→Communication protocol 796
→Automatic supervision 900 Reference separate manuals
→Installation and setting 972 →Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)
→Commissioning and maintenance 989 →Installation handbook (6F2S1954)
Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

- 1 -
CU
Chapter 1.1: Introduction
––––––––System configuration
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
GRB200 is a low impedance differential relay for bus-bar protection; and it has been designed
to provide very reliable, high speed and selective protection for various types of bus-bar system.
GRB200 can be applied for various bus-bar systems:
 Single bus-bars with/without transfer bus-bar
 Double bus-bars with/without transfer bus-bar
 Ring bus-bars with/without transfer bus-bar
 One and a half bus-bar
GRB200 can detect phase and earth faults on the protected bus-bar by employing a phase
segregated current differential scheme. A maximum of 64 three-phase currents can be input
from feeders, sections and bus-couplers, which can correctly distinguish between internal and
external faults even in the event of CT saturation.
 Circuit breaker failure protection, end zone protection and blind zone protection are also
available.
 Backup overcurrent and earth fault protections are provided as options in each bay.
System configuration
Figure 1.1-1 shows the system configuration of the GRB200. The left side of the figure shows
the Bus-bar line-diagram and the right side of the figure shows the configuration of the
GRB200 unit. A single central unit (CU) and bay units (BUs) are provided. The CU performs
current differential protection. The BU is a terminal used to acquire analog quantities from
each CT; these quantities are converted to digital data for transmission to the CU via optical
fiber for the differential protection. The BU also receives the trip command from the CU and
performs tripping of the circuit breaker. A voltage check element can be provided as an option
within the CU.

-2-
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Bus-bar DS CU
VT
Bus-bar DS
VT
DS DS DS DS
Voltage
Voltage
……
BU #n
Monitoring
signal
Optical fiber
BU #n−1
CB CB
Monitoring
CT CT signal
Control signal
Current
BU #1
Monitoring signal
Control signal
Feeder Feeder
Current
Figure 1.1-1 Example of system configuration
Optical fibers are used to connect the CU to each BU.

- 3 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) CU hardware
Figure 1.1-2 shows the module implemented in the CU case. The case width of the CU is 19
inches 1/1 size. The Transformer module (VCT), Signal processing and communication module
(CPU), Front-end-processing module, Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and Power supply
module (PWS) are arranged as shown. By using two VCTs, a maximum of eight zones can be
protected using GRB200. FEP module is used for optical communication with each BU.
Additionally, it is possible to implement two binary IO modules to control external devices.
Binary IO
FEP modules (×2)
VCT#2 VCT#1 CPU PWS
Figure 1.1-2 CU in 1/1 case (Front view, removed the front panel)
Figure 1.1-3 shows a block diagram of the CU. A Human machine interface (HMI) is
mounted on the front of the IED. The user can monitor and configure setting items and other
actions through the HMI. Configuration of the module depends on the order. For the actual
configuration module (and the number of modules), refer to the external connection diagram
(See Appendix: Typical external connection).

- 4 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
VCT#1, #2 CPU
MPU LAN Network

LAN I/F
Filter A/D
AC analog
input
V VT
HMI
Screen
FEP To/From BU
LEDs module
Operation keys
Monitoring jacks
BI, BO or BIO
Function Key
Binary output
circuit×n Binary output
USB
Maintenance I/F
PC Binary input
circuit×n Binary input
Power supply
PWS
Figure 1.1-3 CU Hardware Block Diagram
(ii) BU hardware
Figure 1.1-4 and Figure 1.1-5 shows modules implemented in the BU 1/2 case and 1/3 case.
Case width is selected from either a 1/2 case or 1/3 case. PWS, binary IO modules, VCT, and
CPU are provided. The Remote communication card (Remote Comm.), which is mounted on
CPU1, is used to connect with the CU.
1Note: For “1/3 case”, one binary IO module is used. For “1/2 case”, up to three binary IO
modules are used.
2Note: “1/2 case” is half of 19″ rack and “1/3 case” is one third of 19″ rack.

- 5 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
VCT CPU Binary IO modules PWS
Figure 1.1-4 BU in 1/2 case (Front view, with front panel removed)
VCT CPU BIO PWS
Figure 1.1-5 BU in 1/3 case (Front view, with front panel removed)
Figure 1.1-6 shows a block diagram of the BU. Similar to the CU, the HMI is mounted on the
front of the BU. The user can monitor and configure through the HMI. Configuration of the
module depends on the order. (See Appendix: Typical external connection).

- 6 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
VCT CPU
Filter A/D
AC analog
input MPU LAN I/F Maintenance
PC
I CT×m
CU/BU I/F
From/To CU
HMI
BO
Screen Binary output
LEDs
BI
Operation keys Binary input
Monitoring jacks
Binary output
Function Key
BIO
USB Binary input

I/F
Local PC
Power
supply PWS
Figure 1.1-6 BU Hardware Block Diagram
(iii) Common hardware

HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for settings or viewing of stored data.
- A standard LCD or a large LCD (MIMIC) screen, LEDs, function keys and operation keys
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
- RS485 or Fiber Optic for Substation control (SAS) with IEC60870-5-103 protocol
- 100/1000BASE-TX, -FX,-LX for SAS with IEC61850 protocol
- 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T for Local PC connection
- IRIG-B000 for Clock
Module circuits and others:

- Binary input circuits and binary output circuits with configurable features
- AC inputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording and others
- Automatic supervision

- 7 -
CU
––––––––Relay applications
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Relay applications
[DIF] Current differential protection is applied for each individual bus-bar zone, which are sectioned
by the bus section and bus-coupler switches (discriminating zone protection), as well as for the
overall bus-bar system (check zone protection)
[CBF] Circuit breaker failure (CBF) function is phase-segregated breaker failure protection. It is
provided for each bay and can be initiated by either an internal or an external signal.
[EFP] End fault protection (EFP) function is provided to cater for circumstances when a dead zone or
blind zone is created between the CB and the associated CT.
[FS] Fail safe is one of the safety design to enhance security against false tripping due to a failure
in a CT or CT secondary circuits, the voltage check function is incorporated as fail safe feature.
[COMPT] Command trip protection (COMTP) function; Each BU receives the trip command from the
CU and performs tripping of the CB.
[OC/EF] Backup overcurrent and earth fault protection (OC/EF) are provided in each bay for backup.
Each provides two stage overcurrent and earth fault protection respectively, and can be set to
either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic.

- 8 -
CU
––––––––General control and Control & monitoring applications
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
General control and Control & monitoring applications

The control functions are provided for circuit breakers and isolators, other switchgear and
transformers. The user can operate the functions using the human machine interface. Whereas
the functions can operate together with such as automatic sequence control (ASEQ) and/or
interlocking safeguard function (ILK).
[L/R] Remote/Local control function

When control of the object device is required, this function allows the selection of the control
command for either local or remote, (dispatch site/control centre) operation.
[SPOS] Single position device function

The SPOS function is used to operate a device including a single-position switch. The SPOS
function consists of (1) status detection, (2) control, (3) event detection, and (4) response check.
[DPOS] Double position device function

The DPOS function is used operate a device including a double-position switch. The DPOS
function is the same as the SPOS one; the DPOS function also has contact inconsistency
detection, which the SPOS function does not include.
[TPOS] Triple position device function

The TPOS function is the same as the DPOS one, which is used to operate a device including
three-position switch.
[SOFTSW] Software switch function

The SOFTSW function can provide scheme switches created by the software.
[ASEQ] Automatic sequence control function

The ASEQ function is used together with a logic that is programmed by the user using PLC
function.
[LRST] LED reset function

The LRST function can turn off a LED when the LED is lit by tripping.
[OPTR] Operation time reset controller

The OPTR can reset the time values measured in DPOS and TPOS functions.
[L/R] Remote/Local control function

When control of the object device is required, this function allows the selection of the control
command for either local or remote, (dispatch site/control centre) operation.
[GCNT] General pulse counter function

This function can observe a signal, for example the output of a PLC function and counts the
number of pulses for the signal. The total number of pulses counted is recorded.
[TOTALTIM] Total time measurement function

The TOTALTIM can measure ‘operating time’ (i.e., a device-running-time, closing-time,
switching-ON-time, etc.) with a binary signal.

- 9 -
CU
––––––––Recording function
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
[MDCTRL] Mode control function

This function enables an interface for test function block (TSET-FB). With this interface, a
mode change command is made within the IED for the TEST-FB.
[ILK] Software interlock function

The ILK function is provided to latch the operation of control function that is connected to a
primary device.
[GENBI] Event detection function with a binary input signal

The GENBI can detect a state of external device with a binary input signal; and it can verify
the signal coming from the external device.
Recording function
Fault record: The state of a fault can be recorded when the trip command is issued. It also
memorizes the fault data. On the screen, the user can see fault data with date & time, fault
phase, tripping phase, tripping mode, fault location, operating mode and power system
quantities.
Event record: can provide recording feature that memorizes any event occurred in the IED.
Disturbance record: is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform
recorded by this function using GR-TIEMS.
Metering function
The following power system data is measured continuously and can be displayed on the IED
screen, and on a local or remotely connected PC.
 Differential currents in three-phases in every zone
 Restraint currents in three-phases in every zone
 Voltages in three-phases and phase-to-phase in every zone
 Currents in three-phases in every CH
 Voltages and currents in symmetrical component form
 Frequency

- 10 -
CU
––––––––Summary of GRB200
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Summary of GRB200
The summary of descriptions in this chapter is provided in Table 1.6-1. The module
specification in GRB200 can be divided into common features and specific features. Refer to
Chapters “Technical description (CU feature)” and “Technical description (BU feature)” for the
specifications of the module.
Table 1.6-1 CU and BUs structure and their module configuration

Case and
CU configuration BU configuration
Module type
Protection DIF, CTF, CBF, EFP, COMTP, FS
functions† (N/A) OC, EF, TRC, PROT_COMM
Control and
Local or remote control, LED reset, Test mode control, counter functions etc.
monitoring
Case 1/1 case 1/2 case or 1/3 case
VCT21B: VCT22B(used for 1/2 case) or
Can input four three-phase VCT32B(used for 1/3 case):
VCT voltages in one module. Can input a three-phase current and a
zero-phase current in one module.
Two COM ports: One COM port:

Can be provided for the network. Can be provide for the local PC.
COM LAN for Local PC: One CU-communication port:
Can be provided for local PC Can be used to connect with CU.
engineering.
Multiple modules are used to （Not applicable）
FEP module
communicate between CU-BU.
Maximum of two BIO modules can 1/2 case size :
be used for monitoring and control.Maximum of three BIO module can be used
for monitoring and control.
BI, BO 1/3 case size :
BIO Maximum of one BIO module can be used
for monitoring and control.
Modules are decided based on the number of input and output contacts.
PWS One module can be used One module can be used

HMI Mounted on the front surface of CU Mounted on the front surface of BU
†Note:Embedding the relay applications depends of the choice of the ordering code. See
Appendix: Ordering.

- 11 -
CU
––––––––Symbols used in logical diagrams
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Symbols used in logical diagrams

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

Mapping point
1. Marked with : Relay elements
2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number
Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

A binary output (BO) circuit
A LED circuit
Like in the BO and LED circuits, it can also be connected or mapped to what follows:
A PLC connection point
The IEC 61850 logical node (LN) to send a signal for the SAS
An alternative point (discussed in Chapter PLC function) is provided in place of the

signal-monitoring point for starting the user-programmed logic.
3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Signal No.) Signal name corresponding to Element or Signal No.(Data ID)
Note that the symbol can be used for the reception point coming from the output of PLC
logics.
4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Signal No. (Data ID) and its name
Signal number (Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Signal No. (Data ID)
1Note that the symbol can be used as a signal reception-point coming from the SAS. The
reception point is mapped to the LN of the IEC61850.

- 12 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Timer symbol

 Delay timer
Delayed pick-up timer
t 0 Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
 One-shot timer
A Output A
XXX - YYY Output

XXX - YYY: Setting range

- 13 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) Logic symbol

 AND gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
 OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0

- 14 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) Flip-flop symbol

A B Output
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
(v) Scheme switch

A Switch Output
1 On 1
A Output
On 1 Off 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0

- 15 -
CU
––––––––Abbreviation
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
BCU Bay Control Unit
BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit
BI Binary Input module or circuit
BO Binary Output module or circuit
BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit
CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Signal processing and communication module
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation
GPS Global Positioning System
GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
LCP Local Panel for Controlling
LED Light Emitting Diode
MIMIC Touchscreen operation configured by user’s program to operate control application
NA Not Applicable
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance
N/C Normally Closed
N/O Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation in the substation
PC Personal Computer for maintenance
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RCC Remote Control Centre
SAS Substation Automation System
SC Station Computer
SCMS Substation Control and Monitoring System
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol

- 16 -
CU
––––––––Abbreviation
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Abbreviation Description
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
SyncSrc Synchronization Source
VT Voltage Transformer
VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs
43 Selector device or selector switch

- 17 -
CU
––––––––Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID)

(i) Signal symbols
Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for protections,
controls and communications. The function ID is unique ID described by six digits in
hexadecimal; each function ID represents each FB. Signal number (or Data ID) is the logical
address of the input and output data of the FB. The signal number (Data ID) consists of a
function ID and an element ID. The function ID is common within the FB; accordingly the
element ID will be shown to make description simple. The element ID is 10 hexadecimal and
it has the element ID name for easy to read. Figure 1.9-1 exemplifies the symbols, the function
ID, and the element ID. The table below shows the structure of the signal.
Function ID Element ID Note
Format (Hex) FFFFFF XXXXXXXXXX Content

Signal example 123456 80000xxxx0 XX relay in phase-A is operated.
Element ID
FB (Function ID=123456)
80000xxxx0 8000xxxxxx
A & ≥1 XX1_OPT
81000xxxx1
XX1 B &
82000xxxx2
C
&
Element ID Signal name
&
8000011xxx0 XX_BLOCK 1
3. PLC connection point† 1. Relay element 2. Signal monitoring point

Figure 1.9-1 Example of symbols and others
†Note that a PLC connection point can be shown with the function ID (123456) plus
element ID (8000011xxx0) expressed in 16 delights in hexadecimal, in some scheme
logics. The ‘PLC connection point’ could be found to search the letter ‘E’ of element ID
(i.e., ‘8000011Exx0’).
(ii) Data length (bit length of Data ID)

The user can read data length of a Data ID by seeing the seventh and eighth number of the
Data ID. Table 1.9-1 shows examples of 1~32-bits data.
Table 1.9-1 How to identify a Data length by seeing Element ID
Data Example Example
Identifier texts Note
length Function ID Element ID
1-bit 400001 8000001B6F 8 (the beginning # of Element ID)
8-bits 400001 2000001B6F 20 (First and second # of Element ID)

- 18 -
CU
––––––––Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Data Example Example

Identifier texts Note
length Function ID Element ID
32-bits 400001 4200001B6F 42 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 32
64-bits 400001 4300001B6F 43 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 64

- 19 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
2 Relay application
Contents Pages Pages
Current differential protection (DIF) 21 BU out of service 152
-Blind-zone protection 41
-Check-zone-protection (DIFCH) 24 Fail safe (FS) 85
-CT saturation countermeasure 29 -Under-voltage relay (UVFS/UVSFS) 86
-CT requirement 31 -Under-voltage change relay (UVDFS) 86
-CT failure detection (CTF) 43
-Discriminating-zone (DIFZA, etc.) 26
-Supervision of DIF current (IdSV) 47 Non-direct. overcurrent protection (OC) 111
-IDMT characteristic 114
Circuit breaker failure (CBF) 66 -DT characteristic 114
-Protection scheme 68
-Operation examples 77 Non-direct. earth fault protection (EF) 127
-IDMT characteristic 128
Command trip (COMTP) 94 -DT characteristic 128
-Command trip operation (Com-Trip) 95
-Transfer operation (Com-Transfer-Trip) 95 Trip circuit (TRC) 146
-Transfer trip example 98
Protection common (PROT_COMM) 140
End fault protection (EFP) 102 -Busbar-bridge monitoring 142
-Zone trip operation 103 -CB contact supervision (Contact SV) 141
-Transfer trip operation 104 -DS contact supervision (Contact SV) 142
-Dead line detection 143
Reference chapters: Reference Appendixes:

→Technical description (BU) 725 →Ordering 1089
→PLC function 785
→Automatic supervision 900

- 20 -
CU
Chapter 2.1: Relay application 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Current differential protection (DIF) BU
Current differential protection (DIF)

The current differential scheme is applied to protect the busbar system sectionalized into each
zone ensures a very reliable protection for various types of busbar system.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.1-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature W/O Voltage relay W/ Voltage relay
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)
– DIF main features    
2.1.9 DIF-CTF NA NA  NA
2.1.10 DIF monitor    
: Applicable NA: Not applicable

- 21 -
CU
2.1.1 DIF principle

Current differential protection (DIF) calculates a differential current (Id) and a restraining
current (Ir) using both the incoming current and outgoing current for the protection zone. The
DIF calculation is performed on a per-phase basis.
As shown in Figure 2.1-1, Id is the vector sum of the incoming and outgoing currents and
Ir is the sum of the absolute or scalar value of the incoming and outgoing currents.
𝐼𝑑 = |𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + ⋯ + In| (2.1-1)
𝐼𝑟 = |𝐼1| + |𝐼2| + ⋯ + |In| (2.1-2)
Bus-bar
I1 I2 I3 In
87
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
Feeder 3
… Feeder n
Figure 2.1-1 Currents in bus-bar system

Id is zero when there is either a no-fault condition or a through-fault condition and
represents the fault current in the case of internal faults. This applies strictly to the primary
circuit of the CT; it does not apply to the secondary circuit of the CT mainly due to CT
measurement error.
Figure 2.1-2 shows a percentage restraining differential protection, which has a non-
restraint characteristic and a restraint characteristic to cope with the erroneous differential
current caused by a through-fault current. The user can set the minimum operating current
(minDIF-I) and restraining factor (k) by means of the settings provided.
Id=Ir
(Id)
Differential current
Operate
Id=k×Ir
minDIF-I
Restraining current (Ir)
Figure 2.1-2 Percentage restraining characteristic for DIF function

- 22 -
CU
2.1.2 Check-zone-protection and discriminating-zone-protection

The DIF function is provided for the overall bus-bar system (described hereafter as check-zone-
protection), as well as for each individual bus-bar zone, which is sectioned by the bus-section
and bus-coupler switches (described hereafter as discriminating-zone-protection).
The elements used for the check-zone-protection (DIFCH) and the discriminating-zone-
protection (DIFZA to DIFZH) are based on the DIF principle; they have a differential
characteristic for the small current region, and a percentage restraint characteristic for the
large current region to cope with erroneous differential current caused by a through-fault
current.
The characteristics are shown in Figure 2.1-3(a) and (b); and the respective elements for
each phase (phase-A,-B,-C of DIFCH and DIFZA to H) have percentage restraint
characteristics, respectively.
Id=Ir Id=Ir
Id Id
Differential
Differential
current
current
Operate Operate
Id=[DIFCH-Slope]×Ir
Id=[DIFDZ-Slope]×Ir
Setting [DIFCH-I] Setting [DIFDZ-I]
Restraining current Ir Restraining current Ir
a. DIFCH characteristic configured by settings [DIFCH-Slope] and [DIFCH-I] b. DIFZA to DIFZH characteristics configured by setting [DIFDZ-I] and [DIFDZ-Slope]
Figure 2.1-3 Restraint characteristics for DIFCH and DIFDZ
The minimum operating current (minDIF-I) and the percent slope (k) shown in Figure
2.1-3; they are set by settings [DIFCH-I]/[DIFCH-Slope] in DIFCH; likewise, by settings [DIFDZ-
I]/[DIFDZ-Slope] in DIFZA to DIFZH.
Figure 2.1-4 shows an example for a double-bus-bar system protected by DIF. Two
discriminating zone-protections (Zone A and Zone B) overlap the bus-coupler circuit breaker.

- 23 -
CU
Check-zone
Discriminating-zone A
CB CB CB CB CB CB
Bus-bar A
Zone A protected by DIFZA
CB
Discriminating-zone B
Bus-bar B
CB CB CB CB CB CB
Zone B protected by DIFZB
Check-zone protected by DIFCH
Figure 2.1-4 Check zone and discriminating zone protections in double bus-
bar
(i) Check-zone-protection (DIFCH)

The currents from all feeder bays and transformer bays are input to the check-zone protection
which protects the entire bus-bar system. Since check zone-protection does not need DS signals,
it is more secure against false operation during no-fault and through-fault conditions than
discriminating-zone-protection.
The user can also utilize the DIFCH element when applying the busbar protection in
unusual operational circumstances. The characteristic of the check-zone-protection (Figure
2.1-5(a)) can be modified to that of a non-restraint characteristic1 (as shown in Figure 2.1-5 a
and b) when a signal is applied to PLC connection point “DIFCH-CHARA2”. As a result using
characteristic b., the DIFCH element can be used to accommodate the bus-bar configuration
shown in Fig 1.1-6. This configuration may result in a large restraining current flow and as a
consequence the DIF protection may be unable to operate with the normal DIFCH element
characteristic shown in (a). However, the characteristic of the DIFCH element can be modified
to that of the non-restraint characteristic shown in (b) thus enabling dependable operation of
DIFCH for internal faults despite the unusual operational busbar arrangement.

- 24 -
CU
Id=Ir Id=Ir
Id Id
Operate Operate
Id=[DIFCH-Slope] Ir
Id=0.15Ir
Setting[DIFCH-I] Setting[DIFCH-I]
Ir Ir
a. DIFCH characteristic in normal b. DIFCH characteristic modified to non-restrained characteristic
Figure 2.1-5 Transformation from normal to non-restrained DIFCH char.

1Note The value of slope (=0.15) is defined in Equation (2.1-3)
2Note “DIFCH-CHARA” and others are listed in Data ID tables. (See section 2.1.12 )
Figure 2.1-63 shows an unusual operational arrangement of bus-bar configuration; a

check-zone-protection with the normal restraint characteristic will not operate if a fault occurs
in Zone B. This is because the outgoing current can be over half of the incoming current
depending upon load and fault current conditions. When two out of four DSs (representing the
two bus-sections and two bus-couplers) are opened, the normal restraint characteristic is
modified to a non-restraint characteristic. As a result, the check-zone-protection can operate
correctly.
Zone A Zone C
Bus
Load Section 1
“Closed”
No.1 Bus
Bus Bus
Coupler 1 Coupler 2
“Open” “Closed”
No.2 Bus
Fault Check Zone Protection
Bus
Section 2 Load
“Open”
Zone B Zone D
DS signals acquired by BIs Characteristic for of check-zone-protection

Id=Ir Id=Ir
Id Id
Output signal
Coupler1 d
open
Section1 800100EBC0 DIFCH-CHAR Operate
closed 2 out of 4 A Operate
Coupler2 logic
closed
Section2 Setting[DIFCH-I] Setting[DIFCH-I]
open
Ir Ir
Restraint characteristic Non-restraint characteristic
“2 out of 4 logic” is configured by the The Restraint characteristic is modified to a Non-restraint characteristic
PLC function. by application of the PLC signal “DIFCH-CHARA”
Figure 2.1-6 Example of check-zone-protection under extraordinary operational conditions

3Note: The above bus-bar arrangement is provided only by way of example in order to
facilitate the discussion of unusual operational circumstances.

- 25 -
CU
(ii) Discriminating-zone-protection (DIFZA to DIFZH)

In discriminating-zone-protection, the input signals are currents and the disconnector-
open/close-status (DS) signals from feeder bays, transformer bays, bus-sections, and bus-
couplers that correspond to the protection zone. The Discriminating-zone-protection issues trip
commands to all circuit breakers (CBs) within its protection-zone.
The protection-zone covered by the discriminating-zone-protection depends upon the bus-

bar configuration; the boundary of each discriminating-zone-protection is determined using
the DS signals. The user can utilize a replica setting which identifies which circuit connects to
which protection-zone; and the boundary of the zone-protection mimics the changes in bus-bar
configuration throughout the operation of the bus-bar. Up to eight protection-zones are
available using the relevant input currents and DS signals.
For example, Figure 2.1-7 illustrates BUs having input currents and DS contacts from
their respective feeders. Firstly, replica evaluation in the BU generates protection-zone-
information using the DS contact status information. Both the current data and the protection-
zone-information in the BU are sent to the CU. Using the protection-zone-information received
from each BU, the CU determines which the current data should be used with which DIF
protection-zones (DIFCH, DIFZA to DIFZH) in the DIF relay computation.

- 26 -
CU
Busbar A
Busbar B
DS DS DS DS DS DS DS DS
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
BU1 BU2 BU3 BU n
Current Current Current Current
CU
Currents used in DIF computation
BU1 DIFCH DIFZA DIFZB
Current data Current data
Current input
Protection zone
information Zone A Zone A &
DS11 contact Replica
evaluation
Zone B Zone B &
DS12 contact
BU2
Current input
Protection zone
evaluation
Zone B Zone B &
DS12 contact
BU3
Current input
Protection zone
evaluation
Zone B Zone B &
DS12 contact
BU n
Current input
Protection zone
evaluation
Zone B Zone B &
DS12 contact
Figure 2.1-7 Determination of Current data for DIF relay computation
Under normal bus-bar configuration, the operation of a DS may turn a load current into
a false differential current for a transient period and a discriminating-zone-protection may
operate if the operation time or reset time between the DS main-contact and the DS auxiliary
contact is not coordinated. However, the user does not need to consider time coordination
between the DS main-contact and DS auxiliary-contact because the selective discriminating-
zone-protection can be used in combination with the check-zone-protection1.
1Note: Time coordination between the DS main-contact and DS auxiliary-contact is

difficult in practice. Therefore, operation of the discriminating-zone-protection is
used in conjunction with the operation of a check-zone-protection.

- 27 -
CU
2.1.3 Selection of protection-characteristic

The DIF function has three protection-characteristics and one of them is selected by scheme
switch [DIFTP-FORM] under replica setting1.
 Check-zone and discriminating-zone -protection

A bus-bar is protected by both a “check-zone-protection” and a “discriminating-zone-
protection”; a CU transmits the tripping command to BUs in the faulted zone when both
protections operate.
Having a “Check-zone” and a “discriminating-zone-protection” is recommended for all
bus-bar systems and this provides a very secure and selective protection.
 Check-zone-protection
A bus-bar is protected by a “check-zone-protection”; a CU transmits a tripping command to all
BUs within the Check-zone.
A “Check-zone-protection” can be applied alone in the case of a single bus-bar system with
a single zone; the setting of the ‘Discriminating-zone-protection’ is not available when the
scheme ‘Check-zone-protection’ is used alone in DIF.
 Discriminating zone protection

A bus-bar is protected by a “discriminating-zone-protection”; the CU transmits a tripping
command to all BUs that correspond to the faulted zone.
1Note: Replica setting is discussed separately. (See Replica setting procedure for
Decentralized Busbar protection IED (6F2S1902)). Generally, the system
integrator will perform the replica setting before shipment to the end user.
2Note: Both a ‘Check-zone-protection’ and ‘Discriminating-zone-protection’ are used when
two IEDs are used to protect a duplicated bus-bar protection system; the user
should set one IED for the scheme ‘Check zone protection’ and the other IED for
the scheme ‘Discriminating zone protection’.
Table 2.1-2 DIF scheme selection switch in replica setting

Switch Mode / range Unit Contents Default
[DIFTP-FORM] CH&DZ / CH / DZ – DIF trip circuit formation CH&DZ

- 28 -
CU
2.1.4 Stabilization for CT saturation with through-fault current

For current the differential protection of bus-bars, a counter measure against CT saturation is
essential. If any CTs saturate due to a large through-fault current, an apparent differential
current is generated in the differential circuit and can cause false operation of the differential
protection.
(i) Principle of Operation

Even when CTs become saturated due to very large primary currents, the waveform of the
saturated CT secondary current has two periods in each cycle: a non-saturation period and a
saturation period. This phenomenon is utilized to provide very secure operation for external
faults with a large through-fault current.
Figure 2.1-8 shows the block diagram for the CT saturation countermeasure (CTSC).
CTSC has a waveform discriminating element (WDE) and a starting element (SE). The WDE
will operate if a change in the instantaneous value of the differential current is less than a
specified percentage corresponding change in the instantaneous value of the restraining
current. For through-fault currents, during the CT non-saturation period, the differential
current is theoretically zero and hence, this element will operate during this period.
An evolving fault detection element (EVD) is included to monitor the no-change period of
differential current, and will reset the CTSC function in the case of an evolving fault i.e. in
this case a fault that evolves from an external fault to an internal fault.
Current
Input Differential Element
(DIFCH, DIFDZ) Tripping
& Output
Waveform Discriminating
Element (WDE) 0 t
& & &
3 cycles
Starting Element (SE)

CTSC
Starter
Evolving fault detection t 0
element (EVD)
1 cycle
EVD
CTSC*-EN On
Figure 2.1-8 Differential element with CT saturation countermeasure

The algorithm used in this element is given by Equations (2.1-3) and (2.1-5):
∆Id < 0.15 × (∆Ip + ∆In) (2.1-3)
∆Id = |𝐼𝑑𝑚 − 𝐼𝑑𝑚−1 | + |𝐼𝑑𝑚−1 − 𝐼𝑑𝑚−2 | (2.1-4)
∆𝐼𝑝 + ∆𝐼𝑛 = |𝐼𝑝𝑚 − 𝐼𝑝𝑚−1 | + |𝐼𝑝𝑚−1 − 𝐼𝑝𝑚−2 |
(2.1-5)
+|𝐼𝑛𝑚 − 𝐼𝑛𝑚−1 | + |𝐼𝑛𝑚−1 − 𝐼𝑛𝑚−2 |

- 29 -
CU
where,
ΔId: Change in the differential current Id
(ΔIp + ΔIn): Change in the restraining current in the positive and negative half cycles
Id: Differential current
Ip: Sum of positive input currents
In: Sum of negative input currents
m, m-1, m-2: Sampling timing
The SE will operate when the sum of the absolute values of the difference between the
instantaneous values of current data at each BU from one cycle is greater than a specified
percentage of minDIF-I.
𝑛
∑|𝐼𝑗𝑚 − 𝐼𝑗(𝑚−24) | > 0.5 × min DIF– I (2.1-6)

𝑗=1
where,
Ij: Current from BUj
minDIF-I: Value of settings [DIFCH-I] and [DIFZ-I]
n: Number of BUs
The SE discriminates a faulted state in the power system from that of the normal service
state and blocks the output of the WDE which otherwise may operate under normal service
conditions.
(ii) CT secondary current waveforms

Figure 2.1-9 shows the current waveforms for the incoming and outgoing terminals in the
secondary circuit of the CTs; the differential current for an external fault with saturation of
the CT at the outgoing terminal is also shown.

- 30 -
CU
Incoming
terminal current
Outgoing
terminal current
Differential
current
No change period
Figure 2.1-9 Waveform for CT saturation
2.1.5 Current transformer requirements

The user is not required to use dedicated CTs or CTs with an identical ratio. The busbar
protection IED can share CTs with other protections and different CT ratios can be
accommodated by setting.
The general CT requirements are dictated by through-fault stability, which is the

parameter of interest when CTs saturate under very large through-fault currents. To ensure
correct operation of the IED for such through-fault currents, the factor Ks for each CT is
required to satisfy the following conditions:
Ks ≥ 1 when Tc ≤ 200ms
or
Ks ≥ 2 when Tc ≤ 250ms
where,
Tc = d.c. time constant of primary circuit
Ks = Ratio of CT knee point voltage to CT secondary probable voltage under the

maximum through-fault current
𝑉𝑘
= (2.1-7)
𝐼𝐹𝑚𝑎𝑥
(𝑅𝐶𝑇 + 𝑅𝐿 + 𝑅𝐵 + 𝑅𝑂 ) ×
𝐶𝑇 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜
Vk = CT knee point voltage
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance

RL: loop resistance of cable between the CT and relay
RB: ohmic load of BU (i.e. 0.1 ohm for 1A rating and 0.012 ohm for 5A rating)
RO: ohmic load of other series-connected relays (if any)
IFmax: maximum through-fault current

- 31 -
CU
Example:
If the following parameters are given, the value of Ks is obtained by equation (2.1-7). That
is,
Vk = 800 V, CT ratio = 1200/1, RCT = 5.0 ohm, RL = 3.0 ohm, RB = 0.1 ohm,
RO = 0 ohm (i.e. no series-connected IEDs) and IFmax = 40kA
Then the factor Ks is calculated as follows:
Ks = 800 / {(5.0 + 3.0 + 0.1)×(40,000/1,200)}
= 800/270
= 3.0
This shows that the DIF element will operate correctly for all faults under the condition
that the d.c. time constant of the primary circuit is less than 250ms.

- 32 -
CU
2.1.6 DIF slope settings

As shown in Figure 2.1-3, the user is able to program a slope factor (k) arbitrary using the
settings [DIFCH-Slope] and [DIFDZ-Slope], but the values are recommended to set 30%
generally. Table 2.1-3 illustrates the reason. The user has to note the operation performance
can get worse when the setting value is less than 30% in the same circumstances.
Table 2.1-3 Choice of the slope factor [DIF*-Slope] in DIF characteristic

Choice of slope factor (k) Operation effects in DIF computation
Depending busbar arrangements or CB operating conditions, the
Lager than 30%
DIF is unable to detect a ‘half current-leaving fault’.
The detection to detect CT saturation is degraded; as a result, the
Smaller than 30 %
CT requirement can be decayed.
(i) Operation for half-current leaving fault

When a leaving current (=1) is a half of entering currents (=2) (that is, half current-leaving
fault), the DIF operation is pointed at the black circle in Figure 2.1-10. In accordance with the
Id-Ir characteristic, the fault can be detected with the setting [DIF**-Slope]†=30% because of
the ratio of Id/Ir = 1/3.
Id
Operating area
Half current-leaving fault

(Id/Ir=1/3) Id＝1
CB Closed
) Ir＝3 CB Open
CB Closed
3
Setting[DIFCH-I]
CB Closed
Half current-leaving fault

10 Ir
Figure 2.1-10 DIF operation on half current-leaving fault
(ii) Factor for no-change period

As CT saturation detection is discussed in section 2.1.4(i), the detection ratio of the no-change-
period (i.e., CT saturation detection performance) can be defined under CT requirements and
the conditions of external faults. Detection ratio (i.e., 15% fixed in Equation (2.1-3)) is applied
to determine the current transfer requirements (section 2.1.5).
Note: 20% or larger value has to be chosen for the setting [DIF**-Slope], so that the DIF
function is able to operate maintaining the CT saturation detection performance.
If a small value (i.e., less than 20%) is chosen, the DIF function may fail to operate
correctly for fault occurrences. This is because; an overlap area can be raised for
blocking CT saturation detection.

- 33 -
CU
The user has to make the coordination between the setting [DIF**-Slope] and CT
characteristics operating in the busbar. As shown in Figure 2.1-11, the switch [CTSC**-EN]† is
provided for blocking the DIF relay operation by CTSC. The user can halt the blocking the DIF
operation by CTSC using the [CTSC**-EN]=Off. The switch can be also available to test the
ratio of DIF characteristic.
DIF relay operating signal without blocking
DIF Relay characteristic
by CTSC.
This signal can be used for testing.
Id DIFCH-A,B,C-TH
DIFZA-A,B,C-TH,
DIFZB-A,B,C-TH,
|
DIFZH-A,B,C-TH,
Operating area
DIF relay operating signal

DIFCH-A,B,C
Slope ratio＝30% & DIFZA-A,B,C
Setting[DIF**-I] DIFZB-A,B,C
|
DIFZH-A,B,C
Ir
CTSC characteristic
Id
&
Slope ratio＝15%
Setting[DIF**-I]
Operating area
Ir
CTSC**-EN
On
Figure 2.1-11 Configuration to block the DIF relay operation by CTSC

†Note:Asterisks (**) in settings here represent the general terms of “Check zone
protection (CH)” and “Discriminating zone protection (DZ)”.

- 34 -
CU
2.1.7 Current differential protection for respective zones (DIFCH, DIFZA-ZH)

(i) DIF scheme logic in CU
Discriminating Zone DIF.ZA-OPT denoted
8000101C20 with “8000101B61” To each BU
8000101B62
DIFZA A DIF.TP-ZA
& & 8100101B63 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1
8100101C21 8001101BB0
B
8200101C22 & & 8200101B64
C
& &
CTFZA-NO-BLK
800110EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZA
&
IDSVZA-NO-BLK
800010EBB0 DIFZA_BLOCK 1 DIF.ZB-OPT denoted

8400201C20 with “8100201B61”
8400201B62 ”
DIFZB A DIF.TP-ZB
& & ≥1 ≥1 ≥1
8500201C21 8500201B63 8101201BB0
B
8600201C22 & & 8600201B64
C
& &
810120EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZB
CTFZA-NO-BLK
&
IDSVZA-NO-BLK
810020EBB0 DIFZB_BLOCK 1
DIF.ZH-OPT denoted
with “8700801B61”
8C00801C20 8C00801B62
DIFZH A DIF.TP-ZH
8D00801C21 & & ≥1 ” ≥1 ≥1
8D00801B63 8701801BB0
B
8E00801C22 & & 8E00801B64
C
& &
CTFZH-NO-BLK 870180EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZH
&
IDSVZH-NO-BLK
≥1
870080EBB0 DIFZH_BLOCK 1
≥1
≥1
Check Zone DIFCH-OPT denoted
with “8E00F01B61”
8000F01C20 8000F01B62
DIFCH A
& ≥1 ” &
8100F01C21 8100F01B63
B
8200F01C22 & 8200F01B64
C
&
CTFCH-NO-BLK &
IDSVCH-NO-BLK
8E0000EBB0 DIFCH_BLOCK 1
8F0000EBB1 DIF_BLOCK 1
&
DIF-EN On
≥1
≥1
DZ
CH
DIFTP-FORM CH&DZ
8001101BB0
8101201BB0
8701801BB0
Figure 2.1-12 Discriminating zone and check zone protection in CU
The user must set scheme switch [DIF-EN] On to enable the operation of the DIF protection.
As cited earlier, CT fail detection and differential current monitoring are provided; they are
used for blocking DIF operation in the scheme logic. Figure 2.1-13 illustrates that the DIF
operation signals for the individual phases of the respective zones are sent to each BU after

- 35 -
CU
being rationalized using OR logic.
To augment to generate the trip commands, PLC connection points are provided in
respective zones. For instance of the zone A, the PLC connection point “ADD.DIF.TP-ZA” is
provided in front of the issuing stage of the signal “DIF-TP-ZA”. Accordingly, if the trip
command “DIF-TP-ZA” should be generated upon occurrence of the trip command “DIF-TP-
ZB”, it is possible to issue the one when the user programs to connect the trip command “DIF-
TP-ZB” with the PLC connection point “ADD.DIF.TP-ZA”.
For the operation of the “check zone and discriminating zone protection”, it is required
that there are no failures in both CT circuits and for differential current monitoring. (For more
information of CTF and IDSV, see section 2.1.9 and 2.1.10)
8000101B6B To each BU
≥1
DIFCH-OPT-A & DIF.OPPH-A
DIFCH-OPT-B
DIFCH-OPT-C
8100201B6B
≥1 DIF.OPPH-B
&
8200301B6B
≥1
& DIF.OPPH-C
[DIFTP-FORM] = CH
DIF.ZA-OPT-A
DIF.ZA-OPT-B
DIF.ZA-OPT-C
DIF.ZB-OPT-A
8000001B6D
DIF.ZB-OPT-B &
DIF.OPPH-ABC
DIF.ZB-OPT-C
DIF.ZH-OPT-A
DIF.ZH-OPT-B
DIF.ZH-OPT-C
Figure 2.1-13 DIF operation signals generated in CU
Figure 2.1-14 shows the BU has a DIF trip function and a DIF Transfer-trip function.
As shown in Figure 2.1-14, the logic for the differential transfer trip requires permissive
signals from the fail-safe (FS3) function. The BU receives the FS signals transmitted by the
CU. The fail-safe function monitors the system voltages in the CU and issues a permissive
signal on the detection of a fault. The user should also note that a fault is detected when either
an under voltage occurs (phase-phase/phase-neutral faults) or an over voltage occurs in the
residual monitored voltage (phase-earth fault).

- 36 -
CU
DIF trip (to each

8300001B60
From DIF.TP-ZA & ≥1 DIF-TRIP

DIF operation
DIF.TP-ZB
in CU &
DIF.TP-ZH &
From BU_PROT-ZA
Protection zone evaluation
for in Replica topology in BU BU_PROT-ZB
BU_PROT-ZH
BU_TR-ZA
BU_TR-ZB
BU_TR-ZH
From Replica evaluation in BU
Setting [Bay Device] = Coupler; and

Coupler for bus-bar-bridge is in protection zone. 1
&
From CU
Setting [CoupTpBlk]＝Block
From BU_FSOP-ZA ≥1
FS operation
BU_FSOP-ZB ≥1
in BU
BU_FSOP-ZH ≥1
From CU DIF Transfer-trip

Setting [DIFTP-FS]＝Off
8600001B61
& ≥1 DIF-TR_TRIP
&
&
Figure 2.1-14 Received DIF trip command in BU

1Note: Scheme switch [BayDevice] provided in Replica setting for BU. (See Replica
setting procedure for Distributed Busbar protection IED (6F2S1902))
2Note: Scheme switch [CoupTpBlk] provided in Replica setting for CU.
3Note: The fail-safe function (FS) is discussed separately. For more information, see
Chapter Relay application: Fail-safe. The user can fulfill fail-safe operation with
scheme switch [DIFTP-FS] On.
(ii) DIF setting in CU

Table 2.1-4 shows the setting elements necessary for DIF together with the respective setting
ranges.

- 37 -
CU
Table 2.1-4 DIF setting switch

Setting item Mode / range Unit Contents Default
DIF-EN Off / On – DIF protection enable On
Minimum operating current for
DIFCH-I 10 – 20000 A 2000
DIFCH
Id-Ir characteristic percentage slope of
DIFCH-Slope 0 – 90 % 30
DIFCH
CTSCCH-EN Off / On – CTSC enable in DIFCH On
Minimum operating current for
DIFDZ-I 10 – 20000 A 2000
DIFDZ(DIFZA,DIFZB, and others)
Id-Ir characteristic percentage slope of
DIFDZ-Slope 0 – 90 % 30
DIFDZ(DIFZA,DIFZB, and others)
CTSCDZ-EN Off / On – CTSC enable in DIFDZ On
DIFTP-FORM CH&DZ/CH/DZ – DIF trip circuit formation CH&DZ
DIFTP-FS Off / On – Fail safe for DIF trip enable Off
As cited earlier, the discriminating-zone-protection can have up to eight protection-zones,

but the setting of the minimum operating current (minDIF-I) is common to each protection-
zone. The user can set minDIF-I using the setting [DIFCH-I] and [DIFDZ-I].
(iii) Point for deciding about [DIF**-I] setting value

To seek the [DIF**-I] setting value, the user should follow on the Step1 to the Step4:
Step 1: Minimum fault current (IFmin)

The DIF operation should be ruled to be less than a minimum fault current multiplied by 0.8.
As a result, the DIF relay is able to operate on the minimum fault current. Equation (2.1-8)
illustrates the relation between the IFmin and the [DIFCH-I] and [DIFDZ-I].
Setting [DIF**-I] ≤ 0.8 × IFmin (2.1-8)
The DIF relay operates faster when the large fault current flows. Therefore, the value of
the IFmin should be considered to be more than 300% of setting [DIF**-I], as shown in Equation
(2.1-9):
𝐼 (2.1-9)
Setting [DIF**-I] ≤ 𝐹𝑚𝑖𝑛⁄3
Step 2: Operation accuracy in the DIF relay

The operation accuracy depends on the primary value of the CT. The user should note that the
operation accuracy gets worse when the operating value in the DIF relay is small and the CT
primary value is large. That is, the accuracy deteriorates when
Setting [DIF**-I]
⁄CT primary value is small, as shown in Figure 2.1-15; the operation accuracy
depends on the number of BUs.

- 38 -
CU
10
9 64 BUs
48 BUs
8 32 BUs
24 BUs
7
Operation accuracy (%)
16 BUs
6 8 BUs
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Setting [DIF**-I]
CT primary value
Figure 2.1-15 Operation accuracy depending on CT primary and DIF setting
Figure 2.1-15 also shows that the DIF operating value should be larger than the CT
primary value multiplied by α so that the operation accuracy is able to be within 5%. Equation
(2.1-10) shows this relationship:
Setting [DIF**-I]
≥ α → Setting[DIF**-I] ≥ Maximum CT primary value ×
Maximum CT primary value (2.1-10)
α
Table 2.1-5 shows the choice of ‘α’ value depending the number of BUs.
Table 2.1-5 Coefficient of operation accuracy
Number of BUs α
8 0.226
16 0.320
24 0.392
32 0.453
48 0.554
64 0640

- 39 -
CU
Step 3: Operating range affected by maximum fault current (IFmax)

The DIF computation cannot be achieved if the DIF relay operates out of the dynamic rage.
That is, in the DIF relay, the determination is not carried out correctly when the fault current
IFmax
is so large, and the CT primary is small, and the ⁄CT primary value is larger than 65.653.
Make sure that the maximum fault current (IFmax) and the ‘Minimum CT primary value’ are
satisfied in Equation (2.1-11):
IFmax
Minimum CT primary value
≤ 65.6536 → IFmax ≤ Minimum CT primary value × 65.536 (2.1-11)
Step 4: Conclusion
The user can select a value arbitrarily, but the user should check that the value is appropriate
enough in equations. The user also should check the value using Equations (2.1-9) and (2.1-10)
in order that the DIF relay operates speedy and accurately. Finally, the user should examine
the DIF operation using Equation (2.1-11).

- 40 -
CU
2.1.8 Blind zone protection

(i) Protection in blind zone
In bus-coupler and bus-section bays, it is normal to arrange two CTs, one on either side of the
breaker, so that the discriminating zone protections overlap.
Bus-A Bus-B
Coupler
Ic2 Ic1
CB
Figure 2.1-16 Normal CT arrangement in Bus-coupler or Bus-section
If CTs are arranged on one side of the breaker, or one CT is used for both zones, the
protection zones do not overlap; so the zone between the CTs and the breaker remains as a
blind zone. One of the discriminating zone protections (DIFZA in the example shown below)
operates for the fault in the blind zone, but the other (DIFZB) does not; the fault is not cleared.
Bus-A Bus-B
I1 I3
Ic2 Ic1
I2 I4
DIFZA
DIFZB
Figure 2.1-17 CT arrangement leaving blind zone
Differential current(Id) of DIFZA: Id -ZA = |I1+I2+Ic1| ≠ 0 DIFZA operates (2.1-12)

Differential current(Id) of DIFZB: Id -ZB = |I3+I4+Ic2| ≈ 0 DIFZB does not operate (2.1-13)
The DIF function provides a countermeasure for blind zone faults. It controls the current
of the bus-coupler/section to zero ampere in the discriminating zone protection after the
breaker is tripped, which ensures that the protection of the other zone operates. This counter
measure is called “Zero ampere control function”.
Since Zero ampere control function is controlled by the position of the circuit breaker, it
is necessary to connect an auxiliary contact to the GRB200 relay. If an auxiliary contact is not
connected, the function is disabled.
Id -ZB = |I3+I4+Ic2(*)| ≠ 0 DIFZB operates (2.1-14)
(*)Ie2 controlled to 0A by CB open
(ii) Protection in operating busbar with coupler/section CB open
If the busbar is operated with a bus-coupler/section CB open, as shown in Figure 2.1-18, DIFZA

- 41 -
CU
will operate unnecessarily for a fault between the breaker and the CT. To avoid this, Zero
ampere control is effective. As the coupler/section CB is open, DIFZA will not operate due to
Zero ampere control, which sets current to 0A.
Bus-A Bus-B
I1 Coupler I3
CB open
Ic1
Ic2
I2 I4
DIFZA
DIFZB
Figure 2.1-18 Operation with bus-coupler CB open
Differential current(Id) of DIFZA: Id -ZA = |I1+I2+Ic1(*)| ≠ 0 DIFZA does not operate (2.1-15)
Differential current(Id) of DIFZB: Id -ZB = |I3+I4+Ic2(*)| ≈ 0 DIFZB operates (2.1-16)
(*)Ie1 and Ie2 controlled to 0A by CB open

- 42 -
CU
2.1.9 CT circuit failure detection (CTF)

If a failure occurs in a CT circuit, the DIF elements may operate incorrectly. Therefore, CT
circuit failure detection is provided in the DIF function. The DIF function determines that a
failure has occurred in the CT circuit when the following two criteria are observed: (i) the
differential current (Id) is introduced and (ii) the voltage changes are not observed.
To operate the CTF detection function, the user should set scheme switch [CTF-EN] On.
Consequently if a CT circuit failure is detected in the respective protection-zones (DIFCH and
DIFZA to DIFZH), the DIF operation can be blocked. The information of the CTF detection is
transferred to the automatic supervision function†.
†Note:For more information about the supervision function, see Chapter Automatic
supervision function.
(i) Detection of the differential current

Figure 1.1-14 shows the CTF logic; the DIF-CTF relay in each protection-zone is used to
monitor the differential current. If a differential current (Id) is observed, each DIF-CTF
element will operate. Setting [DIF-CTF] is provided to configure the detection level.
(ii) Observation of the voltage-being-unchanged

The voltage relays (UVD-CTF and UV-CTF) are used to monitor the voltage in each protection-
zone. The outputs from the UVD-CTF and UV-CTF relay are used to confirm that a power
system fault has occurred, as shown in Figure 1.1-14. Thereby, the absence of a voltage change
is included in the criterion for CTF detection. Settings [UVD-CTF] and [UV-CTF] are provided
to configure the detection level of the voltage-change.
(iii) Introduction of external CT circuit failure detection and blocking CT

failure detection function by PLC signal
As mentioned above, a failure in the CT circuit can induce a mal-operation in the DIF function.
If the user wishes to use a signal provided by an external CT circuit failure detection function†
to prevent mal-operation of the DIF function for the detection of a CT circuit failure, the user
can utilize the external signal using PLC connection point “EXTERNAL CTF”.
On the other hand, a PLC connection point “CTF_BLOCK” is also provided when the user
wishes to disable the CT circuit failure detection function. To disable the CTF function, the
user should connect a signal to “CTF_BLOCK” using the PLC function.
†Note:The external CT circuit failure detection function is assumed to be a
device/function outside the GRB200. The user can connect the DIF function with
the outside signal using the PLC function.

- 43 -
CU
(iv) Scheme logic and setting for CT circuit failure detection

Figure 2.1-19 and Figure 2.1-20 show the CTF detection logic1 and alarms generated by the
CTF function for DIFCH and DIFZA.
Discriminating Zone
8000101B65
8000101C24 CTFZA-DET
DIF-CTF A CTFZA_DETECT
ZA 8100101C25 ≥1 & ≥1
B
8200101C26
C
8000101C28, 81000101C29,
82000101C2A
UVD-CTF ZA 1
8000111C20, 8100111C21, ≥1 Decision logic
8200111C22 to block
UV-CTF ZA CTF detection
CTFZA-DET
8700801B65
8C00801C24 CTFZH-DET
DIF-CTF A CTFZH_DETECT
ZH 8D0080CC25 ≥1 & ≥1
B
8E00801C26
C
8C00801C28, 8D00801C29,
8E00801C2A
UVD-CTF ZH 1
8C00811C20, 8D0081C21, ≥1 Decision logic
8E00811C22 to block
UV-CTF ZH CTF detection
CTFZH-DET
Check Zone
8E00F01B65
8000F01C24 CTFCH-DET
DIF-CTF A ≥1 CTFCH_DETECT
CH 8100F01C25 ≥1 &
B
8200F01C26
C
UVD-CTF (ZA to ZH) 1

≥1 Decision logic
to block
UV-CTF (ZA to ZH) CTF detection
CTFCH-DET
Off
8F00001B65
On
≥1 CTF_DETECT
CTF-EN OPT-On ≥1 &
DIF_BLOCK 1
≥1
800000EBB2 CTF_BLOCK
810000EBB3 EXTERNAL CTF
Figure 2.1-19 CTF detection logic for DIFCH and DIFDZ in CU
Discriminating Zone
8000101B66
t 0
CTFZA_DETECT CTFZA_ALARM
10s
8700801B66
t 0
CTFZH_DETECT CTFZH_ALARM
10s
Check Zone 8E00F01B66
t 0
CTFCH_DETECT CTFCH_ALARM
10s 8F00001B66
≥1
CTF_ALARM
Figure 2.1-20 Alarm signals generated in CTF detection logic

- 44 -
CU
(v) Scheme logic for blocking DIF operation

If a failure in the CT circuit is detected, the DIF trip command can be blocked. Figure 2.1-21
shows the logic for the generation of no-block signals. When no failures are detected in the CT
circuit, the DIF trip command is un-blocked by the signals CTFCH-NO-BLK or CTFZA-NO-
BLK to CTFZH-NO-BLK for the respective zones.
The user can select a mode for blocking using scheme switch [DIF-CTFBlk]. When Block-
PZ is set, and a failure occurs in the CT circuit, the DIF trip command will be blocked for the
respective protection zones as well as DIFCH. On the other hand, when Block-AZ is set, the
DIF trip command is blocked for all protection zones. The user should note that the DIF trip
command is not blocked when Non is set. The settings and scheme switches for the CT circuit
failure detection function are summarized in Table 2.1-6.
Discriminating Zone
to block DIFZA operation
CTFZA_DETECT 1 CTFZA-NO-BLK
& ≥1
SV
to block DIFZH operation
CTFZH_DETECT 1 CTFZH-NO-BLK
& ≥1
Check Zone to block DIFCH operation
CTFCH_DETECT 1 CTFCH-NO-BLK
& ≥1
CTF_DETECT
&
Non
Block-PZ
DIF-CTFBlk Block-AZ
Figure 2.1-21 No-Block signals generated in CTF detection logic

- 45 -
CU
Table 2.1-6 CTF setting switch in CU

Off – CTF operation is disabled.
CTF operation enabled. If a CTF
condition is detected it will not reset
On – even if under-voltage element-CTF
CTF-EN (UVCTF) or under-voltage-differential Off
element-CTF (UVDCTF) have operated
CTF operation enabled. Following CTF
detection, the CTF function will reset if
OPT-On –
the UVCTF or UVDCTF elements have
operated.
DIF relay for CTF detection; operating
DIF-CTF2 10 – 20000 A 200
value user setting.
UV relay for CTF blocking; operating
UV-CTF2 5.0 – 130.0 V 46.0
value user setting.
UVD relay for CTF blocking; operating
UVD-CTF2 1 – 20 V 5
value user setting.
Non – DIF trip is not blocked
DIF trip is blocked for respective DIFCH
DIF-CTFBlk Block-PZ – Off
and DIFZA to DIFZH
DIF trip is blocked for DIFCH and
Block-AZ –
DIFZA to DIFZH
1Note: The logic for zone B to zone H is similar to zone A.
2Note: The user must set the value of current in terms of the primary current in the CT
circuit. However, the user should set voltage values in terms of the secondary
voltage of the VT circuit.

- 46 -
CU
2.1.10 Supervision of differential current (DIF-IdSV)

The differential current is monitored to check the health of the CT circuit by the differential
current supervision function (DIF-IdSV). The supervision function† detects the erroneous
differential current that appears in the case of a CT circuit failure. The supervision function is
available in all zones (DIFCH and DIFZA to DIFZH); it has a non-restraint current
characteristic. The supervising relay element is operated when On is set for scheme switch
[DIF-IdSV-EN].
PLC connection point “DIFSV_BLOCK” is provided when the user wishes to disable the
supervision function. To disable this function, the user can connect a signal to the
“DIFSV_BLOCK” using the PLC function.
†Note:For more information about the supervision function, see Chapter Automatic
supervision function.
(i) Supervision of differential current

In order to detect an erroneous differential current in the DIF function, supervising elements
are provided for the check zone (DIFSVCH) and discriminating zones A to H (DIFSVZA to
DIFSVZH). The user can set an operating value for these supervision elements using the
setting [DIF-IdSV].
(ii) Blocking of DIF operation

If the supervising element detects an erroneous differential current, a DIF trip command can
be blocked (either for all zones or individually for each protection zone).
To block the differential trip, the user can select the mode for blocking using scheme
switch [DIF-IdSVBLK]. When Block-PZ is set, and an erroneous differential current occurs, the
DIF trip command will be blocked for the respective protection zones as well as DIFCH. When
Block-AZ is set, the DIF trip command is blocked for all protection zones. Table 2.1-7
summarizes the settings in the DIF-IdSV function.
Table 2.1-7 DIF-IdSV setting in CU
Operating value of DIF relay for
DIF-IdSV 10 – 20000 A 200
Id-SV
TDIF-IdSV 0 – 300 s Detection time for Id-SV 10
Differential current monitoring
DIF-IdSV-EN Off /On – Off
enable
Non / Block-PZ
DIF-IdSVBlk – DIF operation block by IdSV Non
/ Block-AZ

- 47 -
CU
(iii) Scheme logic and setting for supervision

Figure 2.1-22 and Figure 2.1-23 show the DIF-IdSV logic. DIFSVZ* are used for Zone A to Zone
H in the discriminating-zone-protection; whereas DIFSVCH is used for all zones.
Discriminating Zone
TDIF-IdSV 8000101B68 8000101B67
8000111C24
DIFSV A t 0 DIFZA-IDSV-A
DIFZA-IDSV
ZA 8100111C25 & 8100101B69 ≥1
B t 0 DIFZA-IDSV-B
8200111C26 & 8200101B6A
C t 0 DIFZA-IDSV-C
&
0-300s
TDIF-IdSV 8100201B67
8400211C24 840201B68
DIFSV A t 0 DIFZB-IDSV-A
DIFZB-IDSV
ZB 8500111C25 & 8500201B69 ≥1
B t 0 DIFZB-IDSV-B
8600111C26 & 8600201B6A
C t 0 DIFZB-IDSV-C
&
0-300s
TDIF-IdSV 8C00801B68 8700801B67

84C00811C24
DIFSV A t 0 DIFZH-IDSV-A
≥1
DIFZH-IDSV
ZH 8D00811C25 & 8D00801B69
B t 0 DIFZH-IDSV-B
8D00811C26 & 8E00801B6A
C t 0 DIFZH-IDSV-C
&
0-300s
Check Zone
TDIF-IdSV 8000F01B68 8E00F01B67
8000F11C24
DIFSV A t 0 DIFCH-IDSV-A
DIFCH-IDSV
CH 8100F11C25 & 8100F01B69 ≥1
B t 0 DIFCH-IDSV-B
8200F11C26 & 8200F01B6A
C t 0 DIFCH-IDSV-C
&
0-300s 8F00001B67
DIF_BLOCK 1 DIF-IDSV
≥1 & ≥1
800000EBB4 DIFSV_BLOCK
DIF-IdSV-EN On
Figure 2.1-22 DIF-IdSV logic in CU
Discriminating Zone
to block
the DIFZA operation
DIFZA-IDSV 1 IDSVZA-NO-BLK
& ≥1 to block
the DIFZB operation
DIFZB-IDSV 1 IDSVZB-NO-BLK
& ≥1
to block
the DIFZH operation
DIFZH-IDSV 1 IDSVZH-NO-BLK
& ≥1
Check Zone
to block
the DIFCH operation
DIFCH-IDSV 1 IDSVCH-NO-BLK
& ≥1
DIF-IDSV
&
Non
Block-PZ
DIF-IdSVBlk Block-AZ
Figure 2.1-23 No-block signals generated by DIF-IdSV logic

- 48 -
CU
2.1.11 DIF settings

(i) CU
DBP_DIF_CU (Function ID: 412001)
Range Default
Setting items Unit Contents Note
1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A
DIF-EN Off / On - DIF protection enable On
DIF DIFCH-I 10 - 20000 A Minimum operating current of DIFCH 2000
DIFCH-Slope 0 - 90 % Id-Ir characteristic percent slope of DIFCH 30
CTSCCH-EN Off / On - Enable switch of CTSC for DIFCH On
Minimum operating current of
DIFDZ-I 10 - 20000 A DIFZA,DIFZB.DIFZC,DIFZD,DIFZE,DIFZF. 2000
DIFZG and DIFZH
Id-Ir characteristic percent slope of
DIFDZ-Slope 0 - 90 % DIFZA,DIFZB.DIFZC,DIFZD,DIFZE,DIFZF. 30
DIFZG and DIFZH
CTSCDZ-EN Off / On - Enable switch of CTSC for DIFDZ On
DIFTP-FORM CH&DZ / CH / DZ - DIF trip circuit formation CH&DZ
Non / Block-PZ /
DIF-CTFBlk - DIF operation block by CTF Non
Block-AZ
Non / Block-PZ /
DIF-IdSVBlk - DIF operation block by IdSV Non
Block-AZ
DIFTP-FS Off / On - Fail safe for DIF trip enable Off
CTF CTF-EN Off / On / OPT-On - CTF detection enable Off
DIF-CTF 10 - 20000 A DIF relay for CTF detection, operating value 200
UV-CTF 5.0 - 130.0 V UV relay for CTF blocking, operating value 46.0
UVD-CTF 1 - 20 V UVD relay for CTF blocking, operating value 5
DIF-IdSV-EN Off / On - Differential current monitoring enable Off
DIF-IdSV DIF-IdSV 10 - 20000 A Operating value of DIF relay for Id-SV 200
TDIF-IdSV 0 - 300 s Detection time of Id-SV 10
TDIF-Ctsat 72 - Delay time of DIF Block Off
(ii) BU
(No setting items exist in the BU)

- 49 -
CU
2.1.12 DIF signals (Data ID)

(i) CU
 Signal monitoring point
Element ID Name Description
8001101BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZA Additional DIFZA trip command
8101201BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZB Additional DIFZB trip command
8201301BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZC Additional DIFZC trip command
8301401BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZD Additional DIFZD trip command
8401501BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZE Additional DIFZE trip command
8501601BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZF Additional DIFZF trip command
8601701BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZG Additional DIFZG trip command
8701801BB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZH Additional DIFZH trip command
8F00001B66 CTF_ALARM CT failure alarm
8000001BB1 CTF_BLOCK CTF detection block command
8F00001B65 CTF_DETECT CT failure detection
8E00F01B66 CTFCH_ALARM CT failure alarm
8E00F01B65 CTFCH_DETECT CT failure detection
8000101B66 CTFZA_ALARM CT failure alarm
8000101B65 CTFZA_DETECT CT failure detection
8100201B66 CTFZB_ALARM CT failure alarm
8100201B65 CTFZB_DETECT CT failure detection
8200301B66 CTFZC_ALARM CT failure alarm
8200301B65 CTFZC_DETECT CT failure detection
8300401B66 CTFZD_ALARM CT failure alarm
8300401B65 CTFZD_DETECT CT failure detection
8400501B66 CTFZE_ALARM CT failure alarm
8400501B65 CTFZE_DETECT CT failure detection
8500601B66 CTFZF_ALARM CT failure alarm
8500601B65 CTFZF_DETECT CT failure detection
8600701B66 CTFZG_ALARM CT failure alarm
8600701B65 CTFZG_DETECT CT failure detection
8700801B66 CTFZH_ALARM CT failure alarm
8700801B65 CTFZH_DETECT CT failure detection
8000001C60 DIF-FS=OFF Fail safe off command
8F00001B67 DIF-IDSV Differential current monitoring
8000101B6B DIF.OPPH-A DIF protection operated(Phase-A)
8000001B6D DIF.OPPH-ABC DIF protection operated(Phase-ABC)
8100201B6B DIF.OPPH-B DIF protection operated(Phase-B)
8200301B6B DIF.OPPH-C DIF protection operated(Phase-C)
8F00001BB0 DIF_BLOCK DIF protection block command
8000F01C20 DIFCH-A DIFCH relay element operated (phase-A)
8800021A6A DIFCH-A-CTSC DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)
8800011A62 DIFCH-A-CTSC-1 DIFCH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500021A68 DIFCH-A-DELTA DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)
8500011A60 DIFCH-A-DELTA-1 DIFCH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900021A6B DIFCH-A-EVD DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)

- 50 -
CU

8900011A63 DIFCH-A-EVD-1 DIFCH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00021A6C DIFCH-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)
8B00011A64 DIFCH-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFCH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200021A66 DIFCH-A-H DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)
8000021A65 DIFCH-A-T DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)
8300021A67 DIFCH-A-TH DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)
8600021A69 DIFCH-A-WDE DIFCH-A-FLAG(m)
8600011A61 DIFCH-A-WDE-1 DIFCH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8100F01C21 DIFCH-B DIFCH relay element operated (phase-B)
8800041A6A DIFCH-B-CTSC DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8800031A62 DIFCH-B-CTSC-1 DIFCH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500041A68 DIFCH-B-DELTA DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8500031A60 DIFCH-B-DELTA-1 DIFCH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900041A6B DIFCH-B-EVD DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8900031A63 DIFCH-B-EVD-1 DIFCH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00041A6C DIFCH-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8B00031A64 DIFCH-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFCH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200041A66 DIFCH-B-H DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8000041A65 DIFCH-B-T DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8300041A67 DIFCH-B-TH DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8600041A69 DIFCH-B-WDE DIFCH-B-FLAG(m)
8600031A61 DIFCH-B-WDE-1 DIFCH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200F01C22 DIFCH-C DIFCH relay element operated (phase-C)
8800061A6A DIFCH-C-CTSC DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8800051A62 DIFCH-C-CTSC-1 DIFCH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500061A68 DIFCH-C-DELTA DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8500051A60 DIFCH-C-DELTA-1 DIFCH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900061A6B DIFCH-C-EVD DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8900051A63 DIFCH-C-EVD-1 DIFCH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00061A6C DIFCH-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8B00051A64 DIFCH-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFCH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200061A66 DIFCH-C-H DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8000061A65 DIFCH-C-T DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8300061A67 DIFCH-C-TH DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8600061A69 DIFCH-C-WDE DIFCH-C-FLAG(m)
8600051A61 DIFCH-C-WDE-1 DIFCH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8E00F01B67 DIFCH-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-CH
8000F01B68 DIFCH-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-CH (phase-A)
8100F01B69 DIFCH-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-CH (phase-B)
8200F01B6A DIFCH-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-CH (phase-C)
8E00F01B61 DIFCH-OPT DIFCH protection operated
8000F01B62 DIFCH-OPT-A DIFCH protection operated (phase-A)
8100F01B63 DIFCH-OPT-B DIFCH protection operated (phase-B)
8200F01B64 DIFCH-OPT-C DIFCH protection operated (phase-C)

- 51 -
CU

8E00F01B60 DIFCH-OR DIFCH relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8E00F01BB0 DIFCH_BLOCK DIFCH trip block command
8000F01C24 DIFCTFCH-A DIFCTFCH relay element operated (phase-A)
8100F01C25 DIFCTFCH-B DIFCTFCH relay element operated (phase-B)
8200F01C26 DIFCTFCH-C DIFCTFCH relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 DIFCTFZA-A DIFCTFZA relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C25 DIFCTFZA-B DIFCTFZA relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C26 DIFCTFZA-C DIFCTFZA relay element operated (phase-C)
8400201C24 DIFCTFZB-A DIFCTFZB relay element operated (phase-A)
8500201C25 DIFCTFZB-B DIFCTFZB relay element operated (phase-B)
8600201C26 DIFCTFZB-C DIFCTFZB relay element operated (phase-C)
8800301C24 DIFCTFZC-A DIFCTFZC relay element operated (phase-A)
8900301C25 DIFCTFZC-B DIFCTFZC relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00301C26 DIFCTFZC-C DIFCTFZC relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C24 DIFCTFZD-A DIFCTFZD relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C25 DIFCTFZD-B DIFCTFZD relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C26 DIFCTFZD-C DIFCTFZD relay element operated (phase-C)
8000501C24 DIFCTFZE-A DIFCTFZE relay element operated (phase-A)
8100501C25 DIFCTFZE-B DIFCTFZE relay element operated (phase-B)
8200501C26 DIFCTFZE-C DIFCTFZE relay element operated (phase-C)
8400601C24 DIFCTFZF-A DIFCTFZF relay element operated (phase-A)
8500601C25 DIFCTFZF-B DIFCTFZF relay element operated (phase-B)
8600601C26 DIFCTFZF-C DIFCTFZF relay element operated (phase-C)
8800701C24 DIFCTFZG-A DIFCTFZG relay element operated (phase-A)
8900701C25 DIFCTFZG-B DIFCTFZG relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00701C26 DIFCTFZG-C DIFCTFZG relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00801C24 DIFCTFZH-A DIFCTFZH relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00801C25 DIFCTFZH-B DIFCTFZH relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00801C26 DIFCTFZH-C DIFCTFZH relay element operated (phase-C)
8200001BB3 DIFSV_BLOCK Differential current monitoring block command
8000F11C24 DIFSVCH-A DIFSVCH relay element operated (phase-A)
8100F11C25 DIFSVCH-B DIFSVCH relay element operated (phase-B)
8200F11C26 DIFSVCH-C DIFSVCH relay element operated (phase-C)
8000111C24 DIFSVZA-A DIFSVZA relay element operated (phase-A)
8100111C25 DIFSVZA-B DIFSVZA relay element operated (phase-B)
8200111C26 DIFSVZA-C DIFSVZA relay element operated (phase-C)
8400211C24 DIFSVZB-A DIFSVZB relay element operated (phase-A)
8500211C25 DIFSVZB-B DIFSVZB relay element operated (phase-B)
8600211C26 DIFSVZB-C DIFSVZB relay element operated (phase-C)
8800311C24 DIFSVZC-A DIFSVZC relay element operated (phase-A)
8900311C25 DIFSVZC-B DIFSVZC relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00311C26 DIFSVZC-C DIFSVZC relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00411C24 DIFSVZD-A DIFSVZD relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00411C25 DIFSVZD-B DIFSVZD relay element operated (phase-B)

- 52 -
CU

8E00411C26 DIFSVZD-C DIFSVZD relay element operated (phase-C)
8000511C24 DIFSVZE-A DIFSVZE relay element operated (phase-A)
8100511C25 DIFSVZE-B DIFSVZE relay element operated (phase-B)
8200511C26 DIFSVZE-C DIFSVZE relay element operated (phase-C)
8400611C24 DIFSVZF-A DIFSVZF relay element operated (phase-A)
8500611C25 DIFSVZF-B DIFSVZF relay element operated (phase-B)
8600611C26 DIFSVZF-C DIFSVZF relay element operated (phase-C)
8800711C24 DIFSVZG-A DIFSVZG relay element operated (phase-A)
8900711C25 DIFSVZG-B DIFSVZG relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00711C26 DIFSVZG-C DIFSVZG relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00811C24 DIFSVZH-A DIFSVZH relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00811C25 DIFSVZH-B DIFSVZH relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00811C26 DIFSVZH-C DIFSVZH relay element operated (phase-C)
8100001C61 DIFTP-FORM=CH Setting [DIFTP-FORM]=CH
8000101C20 DIFZA-A DIFZA relay element operated (phase-A)
8800121A6A DIFZA-A-CTSC DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8800111A62 DIFZA-A-CTSC-1 DIFZA-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500121A68 DIFZA-A-DELTA DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8500111A60 DIFZA-A-DELTA-1 DIFZA-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900121A6B DIFZA-A-EVD DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8900111A63 DIFZA-A-EVD-1 DIFZA-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00121A6C DIFZA-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8B00111A64 DIFZA-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZA-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200121A66 DIFZA-A-H DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8000121A65 DIFZA-A-T DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8300121A67 DIFZA-A-TH DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8600121A69 DIFZA-A-WDE DIFZA-A-FLAG(m)
8600111A61 DIFZA-A-WDE-1 DIFZA-A-FLAG(m-1)
8100101C21 DIFZA-B DIFZA relay element operated (phase-B)
8800141A6A DIFZA-B-CTSC DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8800131A62 DIFZA-B-CTSC-1 DIFZA-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500141A68 DIFZA-B-DELTA DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8500131A60 DIFZA-B-DELTA-1 DIFZA-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900141A6B DIFZA-B-EVD DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8900131A63 DIFZA-B-EVD-1 DIFZA-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00141A6C DIFZA-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8B00131A64 DIFZA-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZA-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200141A66 DIFZA-B-H DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8000141A65 DIFZA-B-T DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8300141A67 DIFZA-B-TH DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8600141A69 DIFZA-B-WDE DIFZA-B-FLAG(m)
8600131A61 DIFZA-B-WDE-1 DIFZA-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200101C22 DIFZA-C DIFZA relay element operated (phase-C)
8800161A6A DIFZA-C-CTSC DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)

- 53 -
CU

8800151A62 DIFZA-C-CTSC-1 DIFZA-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500161A68 DIFZA-C-DELTA DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)
8500151A60 DIFZA-C-DELTA-1 DIFZA-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900161A6B DIFZA-C-EVD DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)
8900151A63 DIFZA-C-EVD-1 DIFZA-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00161A6C DIFZA-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)
8B00151A64 DIFZA-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZA-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200161A66 DIFZA-C-H DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)
8000161A65 DIFZA-C-T DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)
8300161A67 DIFZA-C-TH DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)
8600161A69 DIFZA-C-WDE DIFZA-C-FLAG(m)
8600151A61 DIFZA-C-WDE-1 DIFZA-C-FLAG(m-1)
8000101B67 DIFZA-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-A
8000101B68 DIFZA-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-A (phase-A)
8100101B69 DIFZA-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-A (phase-B)
8200101B6A DIFZA-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-A (phase-C)
8000101B61 DIFZA-OPT DIFZA protection operated
8000101B62 DIFZA-OPT-A DIFZA protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 DIFZA-OPT-B DIFZA protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 DIFZA-OPT-C DIFZA protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B60 DIFZA-OR DIFZA relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101BB0 DIFZA_BLOCK DIFZA trip block command
8400201C20 DIFZB-A DIFZB relay element operated (phase-A)
8800221A6A DIFZB-A-CTSC DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8800211A62 DIFZB-A-CTSC-1 DIFZB-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500221A68 DIFZB-A-DELTA DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8500211A60 DIFZB-A-DELTA-1 DIFZB-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900221A6B DIFZB-A-EVD DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8900211A63 DIFZB-A-EVD-1 DIFZB-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00221A6C DIFZB-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8B00211A64 DIFZB-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZB-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200221A66 DIFZB-A-H DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8000221A65 DIFZB-A-T DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8300221A67 DIFZB-A-TH DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8600221A69 DIFZB-A-WDE DIFZB-A-FLAG(m)
8600211A61 DIFZB-A-WDE-1 DIFZB-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500201C21 DIFZB-B DIFZB relay element operated (phase-B)
8800241A6A DIFZB-B-CTSC DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)
8800231A62 DIFZB-B-CTSC-1 DIFZB-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500241A68 DIFZB-B-DELTA DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)
8500231A60 DIFZB-B-DELTA-1 DIFZB-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900241A6B DIFZB-B-EVD DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)
8900231A63 DIFZB-B-EVD-1 DIFZB-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00241A6C DIFZB-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)

- 54 -
CU

8B00231A64 DIFZB-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZB-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200241A66 DIFZB-B-H DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)
8000241A65 DIFZB-B-T DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)
8300241A67 DIFZB-B-TH DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)
8600241A69 DIFZB-B-WDE DIFZB-B-FLAG(m)
8600231A61 DIFZB-B-WDE-1 DIFZB-B-FLAG(m-1)
8600201C22 DIFZB-C DIFZB relay element operated (phase-C)
8800261A6A DIFZB-C-CTSC DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8800251A62 DIFZB-C-CTSC-1 DIFZB-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500261A68 DIFZB-C-DELTA DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8500251A60 DIFZB-C-DELTA-1 DIFZB-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900261A6B DIFZB-C-EVD DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8900251A63 DIFZB-C-EVD-1 DIFZB-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00261A6C DIFZB-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8B00251A64 DIFZB-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZB-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200261A66 DIFZB-C-H DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8000261A65 DIFZB-C-T DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8300261A67 DIFZB-C-TH DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8600261A69 DIFZB-C-WDE DIFZB-C-FLAG(m)
8600251A61 DIFZB-C-WDE-1 DIFZB-C-FLAG(m-1)
8100201B67 DIFZB-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-B
8400201B68 DIFZB-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-B (phase-A)
8500201B69 DIFZB-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-B (phase-B)
8600201B6A DIFZB-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-B (phase-C)
8100201B61 DIFZB-OPT DIFZB protection operated
8400201B62 DIFZB-OPT-A DIFZB protection operated (phase-A)
8500201B63 DIFZB-OPT-B DIFZB protection operated (phase-B)
8600201B64 DIFZB-OPT-C DIFZB protection operated (phase-C)
8100201B60 DIFZB-OR DIFZB relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8100201BB0 DIFZB_BLOCK DIFZB trip block command
8800301C20 DIFZC-A DIFZC relay element operated (phase-A)
8800321A6A DIFZC-A-CTSC DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8800311A62 DIFZC-A-CTSC-1 DIFZC-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500321A68 DIFZC-A-DELTA DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8500311A60 DIFZC-A-DELTA-1 DIFZC-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900321A6B DIFZC-A-EVD DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8900311A63 DIFZC-A-EVD-1 DIFZC-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00321A6C DIFZC-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8B00311A64 DIFZC-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZC-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200321A66 DIFZC-A-H DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8000321A65 DIFZC-A-T DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8300321A67 DIFZC-A-TH DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8600321A69 DIFZC-A-WDE DIFZC-A-FLAG(m)
8600311A61 DIFZC-A-WDE-1 DIFZC-A-FLAG(m-1)

- 55 -
CU

8900301C21 DIFZC-B DIFZC relay element operated (phase-B)
8800341A6A DIFZC-B-CTSC DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8800331A62 DIFZC-B-CTSC-1 DIFZC-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500341A68 DIFZC-B-DELTA DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8500331A60 DIFZC-B-DELTA-1 DIFZC-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900341A6B DIFZC-B-EVD DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8900331A63 DIFZC-B-EVD-1 DIFZC-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00341A6C DIFZC-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8B00331A64 DIFZC-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZC-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200341A66 DIFZC-B-H DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8000341A65 DIFZC-B-T DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8300341A67 DIFZC-B-TH DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8600341A69 DIFZC-B-WDE DIFZC-B-FLAG(m)
8600331A61 DIFZC-B-WDE-1 DIFZC-B-FLAG(m-1)
8A00301C22 DIFZC-C DIFZC relay element operated (phase-C)
8800361A6A DIFZC-C-CTSC DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8800351A62 DIFZC-C-CTSC-1 DIFZC-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500361A68 DIFZC-C-DELTA DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8500351A60 DIFZC-C-DELTA-1 DIFZC-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900361A6B DIFZC-C-EVD DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8900351A63 DIFZC-C-EVD-1 DIFZC-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00361A6C DIFZC-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8B00351A64 DIFZC-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZC-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200361A66 DIFZC-C-H DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8000361A65 DIFZC-C-T DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8300361A67 DIFZC-C-TH DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8600361A69 DIFZC-C-WDE DIFZC-C-FLAG(m)
8600351A61 DIFZC-C-WDE-1 DIFZC-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200301B67 DIFZC-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-C
8800301B68 DIFZC-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-C (phase-A)
8900301B69 DIFZC-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-C (phase-B)
8A00301B6A DIFZC-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-C (phase-C)
8200301B61 DIFZC-OPT DIFZC protection operated
8800301B62 DIFZC-OPT-A DIFZC protection operated (phase-A)
8900301B63 DIFZC-OPT-B DIFZC protection operated (phase-B)
8A00301B64 DIFZC-OPT-C DIFZC protection operated (phase-C)
8200301B60 DIFZC-OR DIFZC relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8200301BB0 DIFZC_BLOCK DIFZC trip block command
8C00401C20 DIFZD-A DIFZD relay element operated (phase-A)
8800421A6A DIFZD-A-CTSC DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)
8800411A62 DIFZD-A-CTSC-1 DIFZD-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500421A68 DIFZD-A-DELTA DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)
8500411A60 DIFZD-A-DELTA-1 DIFZD-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900421A6B DIFZD-A-EVD DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)

- 56 -
CU

8900411A63 DIFZD-A-EVD-1 DIFZD-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00421A6C DIFZD-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)
8B00411A64 DIFZD-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZD-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200421A66 DIFZD-A-H DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)
8000421A65 DIFZD-A-T DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)
8300421A67 DIFZD-A-TH DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)
8600421A69 DIFZD-A-WDE DIFZD-A-FLAG(m)
8600411A61 DIFZD-A-WDE-1 DIFZD-A-FLAG(m-1)
8D00401C21 DIFZD-B DIFZD relay element operated (phase-B)
8800441A6A DIFZD-B-CTSC DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8800431A62 DIFZD-B-CTSC-1 DIFZD-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500441A68 DIFZD-B-DELTA DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8500431A60 DIFZD-B-DELTA-1 DIFZD-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900441A6B DIFZD-B-EVD DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8900431A63 DIFZD-B-EVD-1 DIFZD-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00441A6C DIFZD-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8B00431A64 DIFZD-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZD-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200441A66 DIFZD-B-H DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8000441A65 DIFZD-B-T DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8300441A67 DIFZD-B-TH DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8600441A69 DIFZD-B-WDE DIFZD-B-FLAG(m)
8600431A61 DIFZD-B-WDE-1 DIFZD-B-FLAG(m-1)
8E00401C22 DIFZD-C DIFZD relay element operated (phase-C)
8800461A6A DIFZD-C-CTSC DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8800451A62 DIFZD-C-CTSC-1 DIFZD-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500461A68 DIFZD-C-DELTA DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8500451A60 DIFZD-C-DELTA-1 DIFZD-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900461A6B DIFZD-C-EVD DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8900451A63 DIFZD-C-EVD-1 DIFZD-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00461A6C DIFZD-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8B00451A64 DIFZD-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZD-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200461A66 DIFZD-C-H DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8000461A65 DIFZD-C-T DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8300461A67 DIFZD-C-TH DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8600461A69 DIFZD-C-WDE DIFZD-C-FLAG(m)
8600451A61 DIFZD-C-WDE-1 DIFZD-C-FLAG(m-1)
8300401B67 DIFZD-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-D
8C00401B68 DIFZD-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-D (phase-A)
8D00401B69 DIFZD-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-D (phase-B)
8E00401B6A DIFZD-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-D (phase-C)
8300401B61 DIFZD-OPT DIFZD protection operated
8C00401B62 DIFZD-OPT-A DIFZD protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 DIFZD-OPT-B DIFZD protection operated (phase-B)
8E00401B64 DIFZD-OPT-C DIFZD protection operated (phase-C)

- 57 -
CU

8300401B60 DIFZD-OR DIFZD relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8300401BB0 DIFZD_BLOCK DIFZD trip block command
8000501C20 DIFZE-A DIFZE relay element operated (phase-A)
8800521A6A DIFZE-A-CTSC DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8800511A62 DIFZE-A-CTSC-1 DIFZE-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500521A68 DIFZE-A-DELTA DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8500511A60 DIFZE-A-DELTA-1 DIFZE-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900521A6B DIFZE-A-EVD DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8900511A63 DIFZE-A-EVD-1 DIFZE-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00521A6C DIFZE-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8B00511A64 DIFZE-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZE-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200521A66 DIFZE-A-H DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8000521A65 DIFZE-A-T DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8300521A67 DIFZE-A-TH DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8600521A69 DIFZE-A-WDE DIFZE-A-FLAG(m)
8600511A61 DIFZE-A-WDE-1 DIFZE-A-FLAG(m-1)
8100501C21 DIFZE-B DIFZE relay element operated (phase-B)
8800541A6A DIFZE-B-CTSC DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8800531A62 DIFZE-B-CTSC-1 DIFZE-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500541A68 DIFZE-B-DELTA DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8500531A60 DIFZE-B-DELTA-1 DIFZE-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900541A6B DIFZE-B-EVD DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8900531A63 DIFZE-B-EVD-1 DIFZE-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00541A6C DIFZE-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8B00531A64 DIFZE-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZE-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200541A66 DIFZE-B-H DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8000541A65 DIFZE-B-T DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8300541A67 DIFZE-B-TH DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8600541A69 DIFZE-B-WDE DIFZE-B-FLAG(m)
8600531A61 DIFZE-B-WDE-1 DIFZE-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200501C22 DIFZE-C DIFZE relay element operated (phase-C)
8800561A6A DIFZE-C-CTSC DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8800551A62 DIFZE-C-CTSC-1 DIFZE-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500561A68 DIFZE-C-DELTA DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8500551A60 DIFZE-C-DELTA-1 DIFZE-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900561A6B DIFZE-C-EVD DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8900551A63 DIFZE-C-EVD-1 DIFZE-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00561A6C DIFZE-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8B00551A64 DIFZE-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZE-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200561A66 DIFZE-C-H DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8000561A65 DIFZE-C-T DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8300561A67 DIFZE-C-TH DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8600561A69 DIFZE-C-WDE DIFZE-C-FLAG(m)
8600551A61 DIFZE-C-WDE-1 DIFZE-C-FLAG(m-1)

- 58 -
CU

8400501B67 DIFZE-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-E
8000501B68 DIFZE-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-E (phase-A)
8100501B69 DIFZE-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-E (phase-B)
8200501B6A DIFZE-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-E (phase-C)
8400501B61 DIFZE-OPT DIFZE protection operated
8000501B62 DIFZE-OPT-A DIFZE protection operated (phase-A)
8100501B63 DIFZE-OPT-B DIFZE protection operated (phase-B)
8200501B64 DIFZE-OPT-C DIFZE protection operated (phase-C)
8400501B60 DIFZE-OR DIFZE relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8400501BB0 DIFZE_BLOCK DIFZE trip block command
8400601C20 DIFZF-A DIFZF relay element operated (phase-A)
8800621A6A DIFZF-A-CTSC DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8800611A62 DIFZF-A-CTSC-1 DIFZF-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500621A68 DIFZF-A-DELTA DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8500611A60 DIFZF-A-DELTA-1 DIFZF-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900621A6B DIFZF-A-EVD DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8900611A63 DIFZF-A-EVD-1 DIFZF-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00621A6C DIFZF-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8B00611A64 DIFZF-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZF-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200621A66 DIFZF-A-H DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8000621A65 DIFZF-A-T DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8300621A67 DIFZF-A-TH DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8600621A69 DIFZF-A-WDE DIFZF-A-FLAG(m)
8600611A61 DIFZF-A-WDE-1 DIFZF-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500601C21 DIFZF-B DIFZF relay element operated (phase-B)
8800641A6A DIFZF-B-CTSC DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8800631A62 DIFZF-B-CTSC-1 DIFZF-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500641A68 DIFZF-B-DELTA DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8500631A60 DIFZF-B-DELTA-1 DIFZF-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900641A6B DIFZF-B-EVD DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8900631A63 DIFZF-B-EVD-1 DIFZF-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00641A6C DIFZF-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8B00631A64 DIFZF-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZF-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200641A66 DIFZF-B-H DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8000641A65 DIFZF-B-T DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8300641A67 DIFZF-B-TH DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8600641A69 DIFZF-B-WDE DIFZF-B-FLAG(m)
8600631A61 DIFZF-B-WDE-1 DIFZF-B-FLAG(m-1)
8600601C22 DIFZF-C DIFZF relay element operated (phase-C)
8800661A6A DIFZF-C-CTSC DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)
8800651A62 DIFZF-C-CTSC-1 DIFZF-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500661A68 DIFZF-C-DELTA DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)
8500651A60 DIFZF-C-DELTA-1 DIFZF-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900661A6B DIFZF-C-EVD DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)

- 59 -
CU

8900651A63 DIFZF-C-EVD-1 DIFZF-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00661A6C DIFZF-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)
8B00651A64 DIFZF-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZF-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200661A66 DIFZF-C-H DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)
8000661A65 DIFZF-C-T DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)
8300661A67 DIFZF-C-TH DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)
8600661A69 DIFZF-C-WDE DIFZF-C-FLAG(m)
8600651A61 DIFZF-C-WDE-1 DIFZF-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500601B67 DIFZF-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-F
8400601B68 DIFZF-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-F (phase-A)
8500601B69 DIFZF-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-F (phase-B)
8600601B6A DIFZF-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-F (phase-C)
8500601B61 DIFZF-OPT DIFZF protection operated
8400601B62 DIFZF-OPT-A DIFZF protection operated (phase-A)
8500601B63 DIFZF-OPT-B DIFZF protection operated (phase-B)
8600601B64 DIFZF-OPT-C DIFZF protection operated (phase-C)
8500601B60 DIFZF-OR DIFZF relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8500601BB0 DIFZF_BLOCK DIFZF trip block command
8800701C20 DIFZG-A DIFZG relay element operated (phase-A)
8800721A6A DIFZG-A-CTSC DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8800711A62 DIFZG-A-CTSC-1 DIFZG-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500721A68 DIFZG-A-DELTA DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8500711A60 DIFZG-A-DELTA-1 DIFZG-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900721A6B DIFZG-A-EVD DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8900711A63 DIFZG-A-EVD-1 DIFZG-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00721A6C DIFZG-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8B00711A64 DIFZG-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZG-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200721A66 DIFZG-A-H DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8000721A65 DIFZG-A-T DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8300721A67 DIFZG-A-TH DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8600721A69 DIFZG-A-WDE DIFZG-A-FLAG(m)
8600711A61 DIFZG-A-WDE-1 DIFZG-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900701C21 DIFZG-B DIFZG relay element operated (phase-B)
8800741A6A DIFZG-B-CTSC DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)
8800731A62 DIFZG-B-CTSC-1 DIFZG-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500741A68 DIFZG-B-DELTA DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)
8500731A60 DIFZG-B-DELTA-1 DIFZG-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900741A6B DIFZG-B-EVD DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)
8900731A63 DIFZG-B-EVD-1 DIFZG-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00741A6C DIFZG-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)
8B00731A64 DIFZG-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZG-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200741A66 DIFZG-B-H DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)
8000741A65 DIFZG-B-T DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)
8300741A67 DIFZG-B-TH DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)

- 60 -
CU

8600741A69 DIFZG-B-WDE DIFZG-B-FLAG(m)
8600731A61 DIFZG-B-WDE-1 DIFZG-B-FLAG(m-1)
8A00701C22 DIFZG-C DIFZG relay element operated (phase-C)
8800761A6A DIFZG-C-CTSC DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8800751A62 DIFZG-C-CTSC-1 DIFZG-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500761A68 DIFZG-C-DELTA DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8500751A60 DIFZG-C-DELTA-1 DIFZG-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900761A6B DIFZG-C-EVD DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8900751A63 DIFZG-C-EVD-1 DIFZG-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00761A6C DIFZG-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8B00751A64 DIFZG-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZG-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200761A66 DIFZG-C-H DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8000761A65 DIFZG-C-T DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8300761A67 DIFZG-C-TH DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8600761A69 DIFZG-C-WDE DIFZG-C-FLAG(m)
8600751A61 DIFZG-C-WDE-1 DIFZG-C-FLAG(m-1)
8600701B67 DIFZG-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-G
8800701B68 DIFZG-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-G (phase-A)
8900701B69 DIFZG-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-G (phase-B)
8A00701B6A DIFZG-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-G (phase-C)
8600701B61 DIFZG-OPT DIFZG protection operated
8800701B62 DIFZG-OPT-A DIFZG protection operated (phase-A)
8900701B63 DIFZG-OPT-B DIFZG protection operated (phase-B)
8A00701B64 DIFZG-OPT-C DIFZG protection operated (phase-C)
8600701B60 DIFZG-OR DIFZG relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8600701BB0 DIFZG_BLOCK DIFZG trip block command
8C00801C20 DIFZH-A DIFZH relay element operated (phase-A)
8800821A6A DIFZH-A-CTSC DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8800811A62 DIFZH-A-CTSC-1 DIFZH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8500821A68 DIFZH-A-DELTA DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8500811A60 DIFZH-A-DELTA-1 DIFZH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8900821A6B DIFZH-A-EVD DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8900811A63 DIFZH-A-EVD-1 DIFZH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8B00821A6C DIFZH-A-EVD-1SHOT DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8B00811A64 DIFZH-A-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8200821A66 DIFZH-A-H DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8000821A65 DIFZH-A-T DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8300821A67 DIFZH-A-TH DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8600821A69 DIFZH-A-WDE DIFZH-A-FLAG(m)
8600811A61 DIFZH-A-WDE-1 DIFZH-A-FLAG(m-1)
8D00801C21 DIFZH-B DIFZH relay element operated (phase-B)
8800841A6A DIFZH-B-CTSC DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)
8800831A62 DIFZH-B-CTSC-1 DIFZH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8500841A68 DIFZH-B-DELTA DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)

- 61 -
CU

8500831A60 DIFZH-B-DELTA-1 DIFZH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8900841A6B DIFZH-B-EVD DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)
8900831A63 DIFZH-B-EVD-1 DIFZH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8B00841A6C DIFZH-B-EVD-1SHOT DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)
8B00831A64 DIFZH-B-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8200841A66 DIFZH-B-H DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)
8000841A65 DIFZH-B-T DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)
8300841A67 DIFZH-B-TH DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)
8600841A69 DIFZH-B-WDE DIFZH-B-FLAG(m)
8600831A61 DIFZH-B-WDE-1 DIFZH-B-FLAG(m-1)
8E00801C22 DIFZH-C DIFZH relay element operated (phase-C)
8800861A6A DIFZH-C-CTSC DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8800851A62 DIFZH-C-CTSC-1 DIFZH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8500861A68 DIFZH-C-DELTA DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8500851A60 DIFZH-C-DELTA-1 DIFZH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8900861A6B DIFZH-C-EVD DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8900851A63 DIFZH-C-EVD-1 DIFZH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8B00861A6C DIFZH-C-EVD-1SHOT DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8B00851A64 DIFZH-C-EVD-1SHOT-1 DIFZH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8200861A66 DIFZH-C-H DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8000861A65 DIFZH-C-T DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8300861A67 DIFZH-C-TH DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8600861A69 DIFZH-C-WDE DIFZH-C-FLAG(m)
8600851A61 DIFZH-C-WDE-1 DIFZH-C-FLAG(m-1)
8700801B67 DIFZH-IDSV Differential current monitoring of Zone-H
8C00801B68 DIFZH-IDSV-A Differential current monitoring of Zone-H (phase-A)
8D00801B69 DIFZH-IDSV-B Differential current monitoring of Zone-H (phase-B)
8E00801B6A DIFZH-IDSV-C Differential current monitoring of Zone-H (phase-C)
8700801B61 DIFZH-OPT DIFZH protection operated
8C00801B62 DIFZH-OPT-A DIFZH protection operated (phase-A)
8D00801B63 DIFZH-OPT-B DIFZH protection operated (phase-B)
8E00801B64 DIFZH-OPT-C DIFZH protection operated (phase-C)
8700801B60 DIFZH-OR DIFZH relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8700801BB0 DIFZH_BLOCK DIFZH trip block command
8100001BB2 EXTERNAL CTF External CTF detection
8000111C20 UVCTFZA-A UVCTFZA relay element operated (phase-A)
8100111C21 UVCTFZA-B UVCTFZA relay element operated (phase-B)
8200111C22 UVCTFZA-C UVCTFZA relay element operated (phase-C)
8400211C20 UVCTFZB-A UVCTFZB relay element operated (phase-A)
8500211C21 UVCTFZB-B UVCTFZB relay element operated (phase-B)
8600211C22 UVCTFZB-C UVCTFZB relay element operated (phase-C)
8800311C20 UVCTFZC-A UVCTFZC relay element operated (phase-A)
8900311C21 UVCTFZC-B UVCTFZC relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00311C22 UVCTFZC-C UVCTFZC relay element operated (phase-C)

- 62 -
CU

8C00411C20 UVCTFZD-A UVCTFZD relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00411C21 UVCTFZD-B UVCTFZD relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00411C22 UVCTFZD-C UVCTFZD relay element operated (phase-C)
8000511C20 UVCTFZE-A UVCTFZE relay element operated (phase-A)
8100511C21 UVCTFZE-B UVCTFZE relay element operated (phase-B)
8200511C22 UVCTFZE-C UVCTFZE relay element operated (phase-C)
8400611C20 UVCTFZF-A UVCTFZF relay element operated (phase-A)
8500611C21 UVCTFZF-B UVCTFZF relay element operated (phase-B)
8600611C22 UVCTFZF-C UVCTFZF relay element operated (phase-C)
8800711C20 UVCTFZG-A UVCTFZG relay element operated (phase-A)
8900711C21 UVCTFZG-B UVCTFZG relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00711C22 UVCTFZG-C UVCTFZG relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00811C20 UVCTFZH-A UVCTFZH relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00811C21 UVCTFZH-B UVCTFZH relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00811C22 UVCTFZH-C UVCTFZH relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C28 UVDCTFZA-A UVDCTFZA relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C29 UVDCTFZA-B UVDCTFZA relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C2A UVDCTFZA-C UVDCTFZA relay element operated (phase-C)
8400201C28 UVDCTFZB-A UVDCTFZB relay element operated (phase-A)
8500201C29 UVDCTFZB-B UVDCTFZB relay element operated (phase-B)
8600201C2A UVDCTFZB-C UVDCTFZB relay element operated (phase-C)
8800301C28 UVDCTFZC-A UVDCTFZC relay element operated (phase-A)
8900301C29 UVDCTFZC-B UVDCTFZC relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00301C2A UVDCTFZC-C UVDCTFZC relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C28 UVDCTFZD-A UVDCTFZD relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C29 UVDCTFZD-B UVDCTFZD relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C2A UVDCTFZD-C UVDCTFZD relay element operated (phase-C)
8000501C28 UVDCTFZE-A UVDCTFZE relay element operated (phase-A)
8100501C29 UVDCTFZE-B UVDCTFZE relay element operated (phase-B)
8200501C2A UVDCTFZE-C UVDCTFZE relay element operated (phase-C)
8400601C28 UVDCTFZF-A UVDCTFZF relay element operated (phase-A)
8500601C29 UVDCTFZF-B UVDCTFZF relay element operated (phase-B)
8600601C2A UVDCTFZF-C UVDCTFZF relay element operated (phase-C)
8800701C28 UVDCTFZG-A UVDCTFZG relay element operated (phase-A)
8900701C29 UVDCTFZG-B UVDCTFZG relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00701C2A UVDCTFZG-C UVDCTFZG relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00801C28 UVDCTFZH-A UVDCTFZH relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00801C29 UVDCTFZH-B UVDCTFZH relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00801C2A UVDCTFZH-C UVDCTFZH relay element operated (phase-C)

- 63 -
CU
 Connection point in PLC logic

800110EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZA Additional DIFZA trip command
810120EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZB Additional DIFZB trip command
820130EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZC Additional DIFZC trip command
830140EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZD Additional DIFZD trip command
840150EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZE Additional DIFZE trip command
850160EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZF Additional DIFZF trip command
860170EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZG Additional DIFZG trip command
870180EBB0 ADD.DIF.TP-ZH Additional DIFZH trip command
800000EBB2 CTF_BLOCK CTF detect block
8F0000EBB1 DIF_BLOCK Differential block
800100EBC0 DIFCH-CHARA DIFCH-CHARA
8E0000EBB0 DIFCH_BLOCK DIFCH trip block command
820000EBB4 DIFSV_BLOCK Differential current monitoring block
800010EBB0 DIFZA_BLOCK DIFZA trip block command
810020EBB0 DIFZB_BLOCK DIFZB trip block command
820030EBB0 DIFZC_BLOCK DIFZC trip block command
830040EBB0 DIFZD_BLOCK DIFZD trip block command
840050EBB0 DIFZE_BLOCK DIFZE trip block command
850060EBB0 DIFZF_BLOCK DIFZF trip block command
860070EBB0 DIFZG_BLOCK DIFZG trip block command
870080EBB0 DIFZH_BLOCK DIFZH trip block command
810000EBB3 EXTERNAL CTF External CTF condition

- 64 -
CU
(ii) BU
DBP_DIF_BU (Function ID: 412A01)
8800001B62 DIF-OPT-AR DIF protection operation (phase-A)
8900001B63 DIF-OPT-BR DIF protection operation (phase-B)
8A00001B64 DIF-OPT-CR DIF protection operation (phase-C)
8600001B61 DIF-OPT-TR Transfer trip signal by DIF protection operation
8300001B60 DIF-TRIP Trip signal by DIF protection operation
8E00001B6D DIFCH-TRIP DIFCH trip operated
8000001B65 DIFZA-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-A
8100001B66 DIFZB-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-B
8200001B67 DIFZC-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-C
8300001B68 DIFZD-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-D
8400001B69 DIFZE-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-E
8500001B6A DIFZF-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-F
8600001B6B DIFZG-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-G
8700001B6C DIFZH-TRIP DIF trip operation in zone-H

- 65 -
CU
––––––––Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) BU
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF)

If a fault is not removed due to the failure of a circuit breaker (target CB), then the circuit-
breaker-failure protection (CBF) will remove the fault by tripping adjacent CBs at the local
terminal and/or by tripping an adjacent CB at the remote terminal.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)
– Main features    

- 66 -
CU
2.2.1 Circuit breaker failure detection

If current continues to flow for a pre-determined duration following the issuance of a trip
command, the CBF function will determine that a CB failure has occurred. The existence of
the current is detected by an overcurrent relay (OCCBF) provided in each phase of the primary
circuit of the CT. The user can set the detection level of the OCCCB element using the setting
[OCCBF].
The characteristic of the OCCBF relay is a circle that has a center at the origin, as shown
in Figure 2.2-1. The circle shows the threshold value of the OCCBF relay, which is set with
[OCCBF]. The hatched area shows the operational area of the OCCBF relay.
I
OCCBF
0
I
Operation
Figure 2.2-1 Characteristic of OCCBF
The OCCBF relay monitors the current; if the current is above the threshold value, the
OCCBF relay is activated. If the current falls below 80% of the threshold value, the OCCBF
relay is reset.

- 67 -
CU
2.2.2 CBF protection scheme

Three protection schemes are available with the CBF function; CBF uses the arrangements
provided by these schemes to remove the fault from the power system. Three schemes are
provided:
1) CBF re-trip scheme: the IED issues a further trip command to the target CB that has
failed.
2) CBF Zone-trip scheme: the IED issues trip commands to all adjacent CBs within the
protection-zone.
3) CBF Transfer-trip scheme: If a failure occurs in the target CB at the local terminal,
the IED will issue a trip command to the adjacent CB
at the remote terminal.
Several CBF protection schemes are provided; examples describing Re-trip, Zone-trip and
Transfer-trip for the removal of faults following the failure of the target circuit breaker are
explained on the next page using the procedures introduced above.

- 68 -
CU
(i) Example of CBF zone trip

External fault outside of the bus-bar and circuit-breaker-failure condition on the
Line CB
Table 2.2-2 Operation example #1 of CBF

Incident Trip issuing and CBF Operation Comment
Step1 Fault occurrence on the line A fault occurs on the line;
this fault exists outside of
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
the bus-bar and thus
Remote
end CB11 CB21
external to the busbar
protection zone.
CB12 CB22
CBC
Step2 Operation of Line protection The target Line CB at the

remote-terminal trips, but
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
target CB (CB11) fails to
Remote
end CB11 CB21
trip.
CB12 CB22
CBC
Step3 Operation of CBF Re-trip A CBF re-trip command is

issued to target CB (CB11)
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
by the CBF protection. If
Remote
end CB11 CB21
target CB (CB11) trips
successfully using the re-
CB12 CB22 trip command, then the
CBC
tripping operation of the
CBF protection is complete.
Step4 Operation of CBF Zone-trip If the target CB (CB11)

fails to trip at Step 3, a CBF
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
Zone-trip command is
Remote
end CB11 CB21
issued to all adjacent CBs
connected to zone A of the
CB12 CB22 bus-bar protection. Thus,
CBC
the fault is removed by
tripping all adjacent CBs
connected to bus-bar zone
Note: CB11 is connected to bus-bar zone A. A.
Failure of CB
CB closed
CB open
CBF re-trip
CBF trip

- 69 -
CU
Internal fault on the bus-bar and existence of a circuit-breaker-failure condition on

the bus-coupler CB (CBC)

Step1 Fault occurrence in zone A of the bus-bar A fault occurs in zone A.
Busbar Busbar
Zone A Zone B
Remote
end CB11 CB21
CB12 CB22
CBC
Step2 Operation of Bus-bar protection All CBs connected to zone A

of the bus-bar are tripped.
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
However, the bus-coupler
Remote
end CB11 CB21
CB (CBC) fails to trip.
CB12 CB22
CBC
Step3 Operation of CBF Re-trip A CBF Re-trip command is

issued to the target CB
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
(CBC) by the CBF
Remote
end CB11 CB21
protection. If tripping by the
target CB (CBC) is
CB12 CB22 successful using the CBF
CBC Re-trip command, then
operation of CBF protection
is complete.
Step4 Operation of CBF Zone-trip If the target CB (CBC) fails
to trip at Step 3, a CBF
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
Zone-trip command is
Remote
end CB11 CB21
issued to all adjacent CBs
connected to zone A and
CB12 CB22 zone B of the bus-bar
CBC protection. Thus, the fault is
removed by tripping all
adjacent CBs connected to
Note: CBC is connected to zone A and zone B of the bus-bars zone A and
zone B.
the bus-bar.
Failure of CB
CB closed
CB open
CBF re-trip
CBF trip

- 70 -
CU
(ii) Example of CBF Transfer-trip

Internal fault on the bus-bar and circuit breaker failure condition on the Line CB

Step1 Fault occurrence in zone A of bus-bar A fault occurs in zone A.
Busbar Busbar
Zone A Zone B
Remote
end CB11 CB21
CB12 CB22
CBC
Step2 Operation of Bus-bar protection All CBs connected to zone A

of the bus-bar are tripped.
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
However, CB11 fails to trip.
Remote
end CB11 CB21
CB12 CB22
CBC
Step3 Operation of CBF Re-trip A CBF Re-trip command is

issued to target CB (CB11).
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
If tripping of the target CB
Remote
end CB11 CB21
(CB11) is successful using
the CBF Re-trip command,
CB12 CB22 then operation of the CBF
CBC
protection is complete.
Step4 Operation of CBF Transfer-trip If tripping of the target CB

(CB11) is unsuccessful at
Busbar
Zone A
Busbar
Zone B
Step 3, a CBF Transfer-trip
Remote
end CB11 CB21
command is issued to trip
the adjacent CB (in this case
CB12 CB22 the CB at the remote
CBC
terminal). Thus, the fault is
successfully removed by
tripping the adjacent CB.
Note: CB11 is connected to zone A of the bus-bar.
Failure of CB
CB closed
CB open
CBF re-trip
CBF trip
2.2.3 Scheme logic and setting

The following figures show the scheme logic for CBF protection. CBF Re-trip, CBF Zone-trip
and CBF Transfer-trip are initiated by either an internal CBF signal or an external CBF signal.
External CBF signals originate from external protection IEDs used to protect lines, bus-

- 71 -
CU
couplers and so on. Internal CBF signals originate from busbar protection functions.
800000EBB0 EXT.CBF_START-A Re-Trip start-up-A

≥1
810000EBB1 EXT.CBF_START-B
≥1 ≥1
Re-Trip start-up-B
820000EBB2 EXT.CBF_START-C Re-Trip start-up-C

≥1
830000EBB3 EXT.CBF_START
Zone-Trip start-up-A
≥1 Zone-Trip start-up-B
&
≥1 Zone-Trip start-up-C
CBF-GEN.TRIP
≥1 &
840000EBB4 INT.CBF_START
Tr-Trip start-up-A
Tr-Trip start-up-B
& ≥1
Tr-Trip start-up-C
&
≥1
Replica evaluation in
BU Feeder
Coupler
≧1
EndSection
BayDevice Se
Custom
Se
Figure 2.2-2 CBF trip logic in BU
CBF is performed on a per-phase basis and is initiated by a signal “CBF-GEN.TRIP”1,

PLC signals “EXT.CBF_START”2 or a PLC signal “INT.CBF START”3. These PLC signals must
be present for as long as the fault persists.
Re-Trip, Zone-Trip, Tr-Trip start-up signals are determined by the setting of scheme
switch [BayDevice]4 and conditions (signal appearances of “EXT.CBF_START” or “INT.CBF
START”).
1Note: The PLC signal “CBF.GEN-TRIP” originates from the trip circuit (TRC). (See
section 2.9)
2Note: The PLC signal “EXT.CBF_START” originates from external protection devices,
such as line protections, bus-bar coupler protection and others.
3Note: The PLC signal “INT.CBF_START” originates from internal bus-bar protection
functions..
4Note: Scheme switch [BayDevice] enables the user to select the configuration of the bay
unit and the type of bay device from Feeder, Coupler, EndSection or Custom5 is
selected as shown in Figure 2.2-2 (CBF trip logic). Scheme switch [BayDevice] is
discussed separately. (See Replica setting procedure for Distributed Busbar
protection IED (6F2S1902)).

- 72 -
CU
Table 2.2-5 CBF activation signal issued by start conditions and setting [BayDevice]
Start condition [BayDevice] in Replica setting
(Signal appearance) Feeder Coupler EndSection CustomParticular4
EXT.CBF_START2 START-ZTP START-ZTP START-TRTP
CBF-GEN.TRIP1 START-TRTP START-ZTP START-TRTP
4Note: The setting Custom may be used for a feeder when it is required to start a CBF
Transfer-trip for an internal or external fault (for example, when a feeder is
connected to a transfer bus).
The scheme switch [CBF-Retrip] is used to select the re-trip operation modes (Off / On /
On-T).
In the [CBF-Retrip]=On, the re-trip signal is generated when the OCCBF relay operates
or when substitution signal is generated for the OCCBF relay operation. The substitution
signal can be obtained at PLC connection point “CBF-SUB.OCCBF”.
However, in the setting [CBF-Retrip]=On-T, the re-trip signal can be generated with
absence of the OCCBF relay operation or the generation of the substitution signal.
PLC signal “CBF-RE_INST_OP” is used for the instantaneous operation of CBF Re-trip.
The PLC signal “CBF_BLOCK” will block to issue the ‘Re-trip’ signals.
When a delay time is needed for a CBF re-trip, the user can apply a timer setting using
[TCBF-RE]. A setting time is chosen between 0.000 to 300.000 sec; and the time should be
evaluated together with the response time of the CB.
The scheme switch [CBF-Trip] controls the operation of the CBF Zone-trip and CBF
Transfer-trip. If [CBF-Trip] = On, both CBF Zone-trip and CBF Transfer-trip will operate
regardless of the CBF Re-trip operation. (See section 2.2.4(i) to (iii))
If [CBF-Trip] = On-AfteRe, CBF Zone-trip and CBF Transfer-trip will operate only after
the operation of the CBF Re-trip. (See section 2.2.4(iv))

- 73 -
CU
CBF Re-trip OCCBF-A

OCCBF-B
OCCBF-C
TCBF-RE
8000001C20
OCCBF A t 0
CBF_RE.TP-A
8100001C21 ≥1 & ≥1 ≥1
B t 0
CBF_RE.TP-B
8200001C22 ≥1 & ≥1 ≥1
C t 0
CBF_RE.TP-C
≥1 & ≥1 ≥1
0.000-300.000s
800000EBBA CBF-SUB.OCCBF-A
≥1
&
810000EBBB CBF-SUB.OCCBF-B
≥1
&
820000EBBC CBF-SUB.OCCBF-C
≥1
&
830000EBBD CBF-SUB.OCCBF
Re-Trip start-up-A
&
Re-Trip start-up-B
&
Re-Trip start-up-C
&
Off
On
CBF-Retrip On-T
800000EBB5 CBF_BLOCK 1 CBF NO BLOCK
810000EBB6 CBF-RE_INST_OP
CBF Zone-trip
CBF.TP_ACT TCBF-ZONE
OCCBF-A t 0
BU-CBF_ZONE.TP
& & ≧1 ≧1
t 0 (to CU)
OCCBF-B
& & ≧1
t 0
OCCBF-C
& & ≧1
0.000-300.000s
Zone-Trip start-up-A
&
Zone-Trip start-up-B
Zone-Trip start-up-C &
&
820000EBB7 CBF-ZONE_INST
_OP
CBF Transfer-trip TCBF-TR

t 0
CBF_TR.TP
& & ≧1 ≧1
t 0
& & ≧1
t 0
& & ≧1
0.000-300.000s
Tr-Trip start-up-A
&
Tr-Trip start-up-B
Tr-Trip start-up-C &
&
CBF NO BLCOK
&
830000EBB8 CBF-TR_INST_OP
CBF_RE.TRIP-A
≧1
CBF_RE.TRIP-B
≧1
CBF_RE.TRIP-C ≧1
Off ≧1
On
CBF-Trip On-AftRe
1
Figure 2.2-3 CBF start evaluation in BU

- 74 -
CU
Figure 2.2-4 shows how the CBF Zone-trip commands are generated by signals from the
BUs and the Replica evaluation function in the CU.
CBF Zone-trip
From BU1
BU1-CBF_ZONE.TP
8000001B60 To each BU
From Replica evaluation BU1_PROT-ZA CBF_ZONE-A.TP
in CU & ≥1
8100001B61 ≥1
BU1_PROT-ZB ≥1 ≥1 CBF_ZONE-B.TP
&
8700001B67
BU1_PROT-ZH ≥1 ≥1 CBF_ZONE-H.TP
&
From BU2
BU2-CBF_ZONE.TP
BU2_PROT-ZA &
From Replica evaluation
in CU
BU2_PROT-ZB &
BU2_PROT-ZH &
From BU64
BU64-CBF_ZONE.TP
From Replica evaluation BU64_PROT-ZA

&
in CU BU64_PROT-ZB &
BU64_PROT-ZH &
8000101BB0
800010EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZA
8000101BB0
810020EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZB
8700801BB0
870080EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZH
Figure 2.2-4 Zone trip operation evaluation in CU
As shown in Figure 2.2-5, the user can select the mode of CBF Re-trip using scheme
switch [CBFRe-TPMD]: for phase segregated trip (1P) or 3-phase trip operation (3P). Scheme
switches [CBFRe-Output] and [CBFZ-Output] enable trip signals to Binary outputs (BOs).
Scheme switch [CBFTP-FS] enables or disables fail-safe operation, which is furnished

separately in the bus-bar protection. (See section 2.3)

- 75 -
CU
CBF Zone-trip 8400001B23

From CU CBF_ZONE-A.TP CBF-ZONE.TRIP
& ≥1 &
CBF_ZONE-B.TP CBFZ-Output Trip
&
CBF_ZONE-H.TP
&
From Replica BU_PROT-ZA
evaluation BU_PROT-ZB
in BU
BU_PROT-ZH
From FS BU_FSOP-ZA ≥1
in BU
BU_FSOP-ZB ≥1
BU_FSOP-ZH ≥1
CBF.TP_ACT
Replica evaluation in BU
&
Setting [BayDevice]＝Coupler and

protection zones of the Coupler in busbar 1
&
bridge.
(from CU)
Setting[CoupTpBlk]＝Block
CBF Re-trip
8000001B6C
CBF_RE.TP-A CBF_RE.TRIP-A
& 8100001B6D ≥1 &
CBF_RE.TP-B CBF_RE.TRIP-B
& 8200001B6E ≥1 &
CBF_RE.TP-C CBF_RE.TRIP-C
& ≥1 &
8300001B6F CBFRe-Output Trip
≥1 &
CBFRe-TPMD 3P
CBF Transfer-trip
8600001B76
CBF_TR.TP CBF_TR.TRIP
& ≥1
From FS
in BU BU_FSOP
≧1
( FailSafe opeartion)
CBF Transfer-trip output functions according to CBF Zone-trip
CBF_ZONE-A.TP
& ≥1
From CU
CBF_ZONE-B.TP
&
CBF_ZONE-H.TP
&
BU_TR-ZA
From
Replica BU_TR-ZB
evaluation in
BU
BU_TR-ZH
BU_FSOP-ZA ≥1
From FS
BU_FSOP-ZB ≥1
in BU
BU_FSOP-ZH ≥1
CBFTP-FS
Off
CBF.TP_ACT
Figure 2.2-5 Signal trip generation in BU

- 76 -
CU
2.2.4 CBF operation by faults occurrence

(i) Target CB tripped normally
Figure 2.2-6 shows a timing chart for the operation of the CBF protection when the target CB
† trips normally. Timers TCBF-RE and TCBF-ZONE are initiated by the trip command
following the occurrence of a fault, however a CBF re-trip and a CBF Zone-trip will not occur
because the OCCBF relay is reset before timers CBF re-trip and CBF Zone-trip time out.
Fault
Fault current
Closed
Adjacent CB
Open
Closed
Target CB TCB
Open
Trip
OCCBF relay
TOC
TCBF-RE OCCBF resets before TCBF-RE timer elapses

CBF re-trip
TCBF-ZONE OCCBF resets before TCBF-ZONE timer elapses

CBF Zone-trip
TCB: operating time of the target CB

TOC: reset time of the OCCBF element
Figure 2.2-6 Timing chart of CBF (Target CB tripped normally)

†Note:For example, the target CB is “CB11” when the CBF function is introduced in
Table 2.2-2. and the adjacent CBs are “CB12” and “CBC” in Table 2.2-2.

- 77 -
CU
(ii) Target CB tripped by CBF re-trip

Figure 2.2-7 shows a CBF re-trip of the target CB. If the OCCBF relay continues to operate a
CBF re-trip command is issued to the target CB if the setting time of [TCBF-RE] has elapsed.
Unless the CB fails to operate, the OCCBF relay is reset by the CBF re-trip. This may happen
when the CBF function is started by mistake, for example by personnel error during relay
testing, if the bay protection is used to initiate the CBF there is a risk that test personnel may
forget to isolate the start signal to the CBF. If the protection under test trips and there is
sufficient load current flowing through the circuit breaker, there is a risk of a back-trip
command being issued to trip all back-up (adjacent) circuit breakers. This may cause a severe
disturbance. With the re-trip function the consequence of such an error will be limited to the
tripping of only one circuit breaker.
The CBF Zone-trip timer does not time out and the CBF function is reset.
Fault
Fault current
Closed
Adjacent CB
Open
Unsuccessful
Closed
Target CB TCB
Open
Trip
OCCBF relay
TOC
CBF re-trip TCBF-RE
TCBF-ZONE OCCBF resets before TCBF-ZONE timer elapses

CBF Zone-trip

Figure 2.2-7 Timing chart (Target CB tripped by CBF re-trip)

- 78 -
CU
(iii) Adjacent CB(s) tripped by CBF Zone-trip

Figure 2.2-8 shows a CBF Zone-trip command of the adjacent CB(s). If the target CB has failed
to clear a fault following operation of a trip relay and if the subsequent re-trip has been
unsuccessful – if this optional feature was selected – the OCCBF relay will continue to operate.
As a result, after expiration of the CBF Zone-trip time delay a CBF Zone-trip command is
issued to initiate the tripping of all other circuit breakers connected to the same busbar; the
CBF Zone-trip is completed by tripping the adjacent CB(s). Issue of the back-trip command
and the receipt of back-tripping signals by individual circuit breakers is executed through the
busbar replica. Where the protection system is associated with a feeder circuit breaker, an
initiation may also be provided to send an intertrip signal to directly connected remote circuit
breakers(s).
Fault
Fault current
Closed
Adjacent CB TCB
Open
Closed
Unsuccessful Unsuccessful
Target CB
Open
Trip
OCCBF relay
TOC
CBF re-trip TCBF-RE
CBF Zone-trip TCBF-ZONE

Figure 2.2-8 Timing chart (Adjacent CB(s) tripped by CBF Zone-trip)

- 79 -
CU
(iv) CBF re-trip and CBF Zone-trip in series initiation

The CBF re-trip and the Zone-trip can be initiated in series using scheme switch [CBF-Trip]
setting On-AftRe.
For series initiation, the timers settings using [TCBF-RE] and [TCBF-ZONE] are initiated
in series from a trip signal, as shown in Figure 2.2-9.
If the target CB has failed to clear a fault following operation of a trip relay and if the
subsequent re-trip has been unsuccessful the OCCBF relay will continue to operate. As a result,
after expiration of the CBF Zone-trip time delay a CBF Zone-trip command is issued to initiate
the tripping of all other circuit breakers connected to the same busbar; the CBF Zone-trip is
completed by tripping the adjacent CB(s). Issue of the back-trip command and the receipt of
back-tripping signals by individual circuit breakers is executed through the busbar replica.
Where the protection system is associated with a feeder circuit breaker, an initiation may also
be provided to send an intertrip signal to directly connected remote circuit breakers(s).
The timer setting using [TCBF-ZONE] starts after the set time [TCBF-RE] has elapsed,
and the CBF Zone-trip command is issued.
Fault
Fault current
Closed
Adjacent CB TCB
Open
Closed
Unsuccessful Unsuccessful
Target CB
Open
Trip
OCCBF relay
TOC
CBF re-trip TCBF-RE
CBF Zone-trip TCBF-ZONE
Figure 2.2-9 Timing chart in series mode (Adjacent CB(s) tripped by CBF re-
trip and zone-trip)

- 80 -
CU
2.2.5 CBF settings

(i) CU
(No setting items exist in the CU)
(ii) BU
Setting of DBP_CBF_BU (Function ID: 456A01)
Range Default
OCCBF 0.10 – 0.50 – OCCBF relay operating level (Current flow
A 1.00 5.00
5.00 25.00 judgment)
CBFTP-FS Off / On - Fail safe for CBF trip enable Off
ReTrip CBF-Retrip Off / On / On-T - CBF re-trip operation mode On
TCBF-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF re-trip timer 0.150
CBFRe-TPMD - CBF re-trip mode, phase segregated trip or 3-phase
1P / 3P 3P
trip
CBFRe-Output Trip / BO - CBF re-trip signal output position Trip
Zone, TRtrip CBF-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF trip operation mode On
TCBF-ZONE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF zone-trip timer 0.200
CBFZ-Output Trip / BO - CBF zone-trip signal output position Trip
TCBF-TR 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF transfer-trip timer 0.200

- 81 -
CU
2.2.6 CBF signals (Data ID)

(i) CU
DBP_CBF_CU (Function ID: 456001)
8000101BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZA Additional CBF zone-A trip command
8100201BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZB Additional CBF zone-B trip command
8200301BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZC Additional CBF zone-C trip command
8300401BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZD Additional CBF zone-D trip command
8400501BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZE Additional CBF zone-E trip command
8500601BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZF Additional CBF zone-F trip command
8600701BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZG Additional CBF zone-G trip command
8700801BB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZH Additional CBF zone-H trip command
8000001BB0 CBF_BLOCK-CU CBF protection block command
8000001B60 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZA CBF zone-A trip
8100001B61 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZB CBF zone-B trip
8200001B62 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZC CBF zone-C trip
8300001B63 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZD CBF zone-D trip
8400001B64 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZE CBF zone-E trip
8500001B65 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZF CBF zone-F trip
8600001B66 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZG CBF zone-G trip
8700001B67 CBF_ZONE.TP-ZH CBF zone-H trip

DBP_CBF_CU (Function ID: 456001)
800010EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZA Additional CBF zone-A trip command
810020EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZB Additional CBF zone-B trip command
820030EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZC Additional CBF zone-C trip command
830040EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZD Additional CBF zone-D trip command
840050EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZE Additional CBF zone-E trip command
850060EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZF Additional CBF zone-F trip command
860070EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZG Additional CBF zone-G trip command
870080EBB0 ADD.CBF_ZONE.TP-ZH Additional CBF zone-H trip command
800000EBB0 CBF_BLOCK-CU CBF protection block command
(ii) BU
DBP_CBF_BU (Function ID: 456A01)
8300001B67 BU-CBF_ZONE.TP BU-CBF_ZONE.TP protection operated
8000001B64 BU-CBF_ZONE.TP-A BU-CBF_ZONE.TP protection operated (phase-A)
8100001B65 BU-CBF_ZONE.TP-B BU-CBF_ZONE.TP protection operated (phase-B)
8200001B66 BU-CBF_ZONE.TP-C BU-CBF_ZONE.TP protection operated (phase-C)
8800001B78 CBF-OPT-AR CBF protection operated (phase-A)
8900001B79 CBF-OPT-BR CBF protection operated (phase-B)

- 82 -
CU

8A00001B7A CBF-OPT-CR CBF protection operated (phase-C)
8100001BB6 CBF-RE_INST CBF re-trip instant operation command
8300001BBD CBF-SUB.OCCBF Substitution of OCCBF relay operation
8000001BBA CBF-SUB.OCCBF-A Substitution of OCCBF relay operation (phase-A)
8100001BBB CBF-SUB.OCCBF-B Substitution of OCCBF relay operation (phase-B)
8200001BBC CBF-SUB.OCCBF-C Substitution of OCCBF relay operation (phase-C)
8600001B76 CBF-TR.TRIP CBF_TR.TRIP protection operated
8300001BB8 CBF-TR_INST CBF transfer-trip instant operation command
8400001B23 CBF-ZONE.OPT CBF-ZONE protection operated
8300001B75 CBF-ZONE.TRIP CBF-ZONE.TRIP protection operated
8200001BB7 CBF-ZONE_INST CBF zone-trip instant operation command
8000001BB5 CBF_BLOCK CBF protection block command
8400001BB9 CBF_INST_OP CBF protection instant operation command
8300001B6F CBF_RE.OPT CBF_RE.OPT protection operated
8000001B6C CBF_RE.OPT-A CBF_RE.OPT protection operated (phase-A)
8100001B6D CBF_RE.OPT-B CBF_RE.OPT protection operated (phase-B)
8200001B6E CBF_RE.OPT-C CBF_RE.OPT protection operated (phase-C)
8300001B63 CBF_RE.TP CBF_RE.TP protection operated
8000001B60 CBF_RE.TP-A CBF_RE.TP protection operated (phase-A)
8100001B61 CBF_RE.TP-B CBF_RE.TP protection operated (phase-B)
8200001B62 CBF_RE.TP-C CBF_RE.TP protection operated (phase-C)
8000001B73 CBF_RE.TRIP CBF_RE.TRIP protection operated
8000001B70 CBF_RE.TRIP-A CBF_RE.TRIP protection operated (phase-A)
8100001B71 CBF_RE.TRIP-B CBF_RE.TRIP protection operated (phase-B)
8200001B72 CBF_RE.TRIP-C CBF_RE.TRIP protection operated (phase-C)
8300001B6B CBF_TR.TP CBF_TR.TP protection operated
8000001B68 CBF_TR.TP-A CBF_TR.TP protection operated (phase-A)
8100001B69 CBF_TR.TP-B CBF_TR.TP protection operated (phase-B)
8200001B6A CBF_TR.TP-C CBF_TR.TP protection operated (phase-C)
8300001BB3 EXT.CBF_START External CBF start command
8000001BB0 EXT.CBF_START-A External CBF start command (phase-A)
8100001BB1 EXT.CBF_START-B External CBF start command (phase-B)
8200001BB2 EXT.CBF_START-C External CBF start command (phase-C)
8400001BB4 INT.CBF_START External CBF start command in the case of busbar fault
8000001C20 OCCBF-A OCCBF relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001C21 OCCBF-B OCCBF relay element operated (phase-B)
8200001C22 OCCBF-C OCCBF relay element operated (phase-C)

810000EBB6 CBF-RE_INST CBF re-trip instant operation command
830000EBBD CBF-SUB.OCCBF Substitution of OCCBF relay operation
800000EBBA CBF-SUB.OCCBF-A Substitution of OCCBF relay operation (phase-A)

- 83 -
CU

810000EBBB CBF-SUB.OCCBF-B Substitution of OCCBF relay operation (phase-B)
820000EBBC CBF-SUB.OCCBF-C Substitution of OCCBF relay operation (phase-C)
830000EBB8 CBF-TR_INST CBF transfer-trip instant operation command
820000EBB7 CBF-ZONE_INST CBF zone-trip instant operation command
800000EBB5 CBF_BLOCK CBF protection block command
840000EBB9 CBF_INST_OP CBF protection instant operation command
830000EBB3 EXT.CBF_START External CBF start command
800000EBB0 EXT.CBF_START-A External CBF start command (phase-A)
810000EBB1 EXT.CBF_START-B External CBF start command (phase-B)
820000EBB2 EXT.CBF_START-C External CBF start command (phase-C)
840000EBB4 INT.CBF_START External CBF start command in the case of busbar fault

- 84 -
CU
––––––––Fail safe (FS) BU
Fail safe (FS)

A trip signal is issued when respective protection functions are activated by faults. High
reliability is required for the issue of trip signals. Hence, a fail-safe (FS) function can be
introduced to ensure that the protection functions issue the trip signals securely; such that the
trip signal can be issued when the trip conditions are established.
The FS function includes the following elements: an under-voltage element for phase-to-
earth faults (UVFS), an under-voltage element for phase-to-phase faults (UVSFS), and an
under-voltage change detection element (UVDFS). These elements operate in all eight busbar
protection zones. Each element has a scheme switch, and the scheme switch enables/disables
the element independently. That is, zone A to zone H and common settings are provided in the
setting list.
Note: The User should input the value of the VT secondary circuit voltage when setting.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)
– Main features NA NA  

- 85 -
CU
2.3.1 Undervoltage element for phase-to-earth voltage (UVFS)

The UVFS measures a phase-to-earth voltage and its sensitivity is set with setting [UVFS].
The operation of the UVFS is initiated when the phase-to-earth voltage drops below the setting
and the On setting is selected for the scheme switch [UVFS-EN].
2.3.2 Undervoltage element for phase-to-phase voltage (UVSFS)

The UVSFS measures a phase-to-phase voltage and if the value is below setting [UVSFS],
UVSFS is initiated. The setting [UVSFS] is enabled when the On setting is selected for the
scheme switch [UVSFS-EN].
2.3.3 Undervoltage change detection element (UVDFS)

This element operates if the voltage drops below a setting voltage compared to that of the
previous cycle. The sensitivity of the UVDFS is configured by setting [UVDFS]. In addition, the
UVDFS has off-delay timers and setting [TUVDFS] is provided to set the timers. The On setting
is selected for the scheme switch [UVDFS-EN].
2.3.4 Scheme logic

Figure 2.3-1 and Figure 2.3-2 show the scheme logic for FS in the CU and BU respectively. As
described earlier, each element has a scheme switch that can either enable or disable operation.
All of the elements are enabled/disabled using their respective scheme switches ([UVFS-EN],
[UVSFS-EN], [UVDFS-EN], [UVGFS-EN]).

- 86 -
CU
8000101B63 To each BU
UVFS A FS.OP-ZONE-A
≥1 & ≥1 ≥1
ZA B
C
UVSFS AB
≥1 &
ZA BC
CA
TUVDFS
UVDFS A 0 t
ZA ≥1 &
B 0 t
C 0 t
0.00-300.00s
8100201B63
UVFS A FS.OP-ZONE-B
≥1 & ≥1 ≥1
ZB B
C
UVSFS AB
≥1 &
ZB BC
CA
TUVDFS
UVDFS A 0 t
ZB ≥1 &
B 0 t
C 0 t
0.00-300.00s
8700801B63
UVFS A ≥1 FS.OP-ZONE-H
≥1 & ≥1
ZH B
C
UVSFS AB
≥1 &
ZH BC
CA
TUVDFS
≥1 8000001B64
UVDFS A 0 t
FS.OP-OR
ZH ≥1 &
B 0 t
C 0 t
0.00-300.00s
UVFS-EN On
UVSFS-EN On
UVDFS-EN On
8000101BB0
800010EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZA
8100201BB0
810020EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZB
8700801BB0
870080EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZH
Figure 2.3-1 Scheme logic for FS in CU

- 87 -
CU
To
8000001B60 respective protection
functions
8100001B61 BU_FSOP-ZA
BU_FSOP-ZB
8700001B67
BU_FSOP-ZH
FS_OP-ZONE-A
From & ≥1
8F00001B6F
“Fail safe operation” FS_OP-ZONE-B
of FS in CU & BU_FSOP
FS_OP-ZONE-H
&
FS-BU_PROT-ZA
From
FS-BU_PROT-ZB
“Protection-zone evaluation”
of Replica topology in BU
FS-BU_PROT-ZH
From FS-NODIF-ZA 1
“Protection-zone setting”
FS-NODIF-ZB 1
for Replica topology in BU
FS-NODIF-ZH 1
Figure 2.3-2 Scheme logic for FS in BU

- 88 -
CU
2.3.5 FS settings
(i) CU
DBP_FS_CU (Function ID: 48C001)
Range Default
UVFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVFS enable On
UVFS 5.0 - 130.0 V UVFS relay operating value 46.0
UVSFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVSFS enable On
UVSFS 5.0 - 130.0 V UVSFS relay operating value 80.0
UVDFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVDFS enable On
UVDFS 1 - 20 V UVDFS relay operating value 5
TUVDFS 0.00 - 300.00 s Extended time of UVDFS operating 10.10
(ii) BU
(No setting items exist in BU)

- 89 -
CU
2.3.6 FS signals (Data ID)

(i) CU
8000101BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZA Additional failsafe in zone-A operated
8100201BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZB Additional failsafe in zone-B operated
8200301BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZC Additional failsafe in zone-C operated
8300401BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZD Additional failsafe in zone-D operated
8400501BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZE Additional failsafe in zone-E operated
8500601BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZF Additional failsafe in zone-F operated
8600701BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZG Additional failsafe in zone-G operated
8700801BB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZH Additional failsafe in zone-H operated
8000001B64 FS.OP-OR Failsafe operated
8000101B63 FS.OP-ZA Failsafe in zone-A operated
8100201B63 FS.OP-ZB Failsafe in zone-B operated
8200301B63 FS.OP-ZC Failsafe in zone-C operated
8300401B63 FS.OP-ZD Failsafe in zone-D operated
8400501B63 FS.OP-ZE Failsafe in zone-E operated
8500601B63 FS.OP-ZF Failsafe in zone-F operated
8600701B63 FS.OP-ZG Failsafe in zone-G operated
8700801B63 FS.OP-ZH Failsafe in zone-H operated
8000101C28 UVDFSZA-A UVDFSZA relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C29 UVDFSZA-B UVDFSZA relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C2A UVDFSZA-C UVDFSZA relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101B62 UVDFSZA-OR UVDFSZA relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8400201C28 UVDFSZB-A UVDFSZB relay element operated (phase-A)
8500201C29 UVDFSZB-B UVDFSZB relay element operated (phase-B)
8600201C2A UVDFSZB-C UVDFSZB relay element operated (phase-C)
8100201B62 UVDFSZB-OR UVDFSZB relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8800301C28 UVDFSZC-A UVDFSZC relay element operated (phase-A)
8900301C29 UVDFSZC-B UVDFSZC relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00301C2A UVDFSZC-C UVDFSZC relay element operated (phase-C)
8200301B62 UVDFSZC-OR UVDFSZC relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8C00401C28 UVDFSZD-A UVDFSZD relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C29 UVDFSZD-B UVDFSZD relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C2A UVDFSZD-C UVDFSZD relay element operated (phase-C)
8300401B62 UVDFSZD-OR UVDFSZD relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8000501C28 UVDFSZE-A UVDFSZE relay element operated (phase-A)
8100501C29 UVDFSZE-B UVDFSZE relay element operated (phase-B)
8200501C2A UVDFSZE-C UVDFSZE relay element operated (phase-C)
8400501B62 UVDFSZE-OR UVDFSZE relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8400601C28 UVDFSZF-A UVDFSZF relay element operated (phase-A)
8500601C29 UVDFSZF-B UVDFSZF relay element operated (phase-B)
8600601C2A UVDFSZF-C UVDFSZF relay element operated (phase-C)
8500601B62 UVDFSZF-OR UVDFSZF relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8800701C28 UVDFSZG-A UVDFSZG relay element operated (phase-A)

- 90 -
CU

8900701C29 UVDFSZG-B UVDFSZG relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00701C2A UVDFSZG-C UVDFSZG relay element operated (phase-C)
8600701B62 UVDFSZG-OR UVDFSZG relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8C00801C28 UVDFSZH-A UVDFSZH relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00801C29 UVDFSZH-B UVDFSZH relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00801C2A UVDFSZH-C UVDFSZH relay element operated (phase-C)
8700801B62 UVDFSZH-OR UVDFSZH relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8000101C20 UVFSZA-A UVFSZA relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 UVFSZA-B UVFSZA relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 UVFSZA-C UVFSZA relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101B60 UVFSZA-OR UVFSZA relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8400201C20 UVFSZB-A UVFSZB relay element operated (phase-A)
8500201C21 UVFSZB-B UVFSZB relay element operated (phase-B)
8600201C22 UVFSZB-C UVFSZB relay element operated (phase-C)
8100201B60 UVFSZB-OR UVFSZB relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8800301C20 UVFSZC-A UVFSZC relay element operated (phase-A)
8900301C21 UVFSZC-B UVFSZC relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00301C22 UVFSZC-C UVFSZC relay element operated (phase-C)
8200301B60 UVFSZC-OR UVFSZC relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8C00401C20 UVFSZD-A UVFSZD relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 UVFSZD-B UVFSZD relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 UVFSZD-C UVFSZD relay element operated (phase-C)
8300401B60 UVFSZD-OR UVFSZD relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8000501C20 UVFSZE-A UVFSZE relay element operated (phase-A)
8100501C21 UVFSZE-B UVFSZE relay element operated (phase-B)
8200501C22 UVFSZE-C UVFSZE relay element operated (phase-C)
8400501B60 UVFSZE-OR UVFSZE relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8400601C20 UVFSZF-A UVFSZF relay element operated (phase-A)
8500601C21 UVFSZF-B UVFSZF relay element operated (phase-B)
8600601C22 UVFSZF-C UVFSZF relay element operated (phase-C)
8500601B60 UVFSZF-OR UVFSZF relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8800701C20 UVFSZG-A UVFSZG relay element operated (phase-A)
8900701C21 UVFSZG-B UVFSZG relay element operated (phase-B)
8A00701C22 UVFSZG-C UVFSZG relay element operated (phase-C)
8600701B60 UVFSZG-OR UVFSZG relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8C00801C20 UVFSZH-A UVFSZH relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00801C21 UVFSZH-B UVFSZH relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00801C22 UVFSZH-C UVFSZH relay element operated (phase-C)
8700801B60 UVFSZH-OR UVFSZH relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8000101C24 UVSFSZA-AB UVSFSZA relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100101C25 UVSFSZA-BC UVSFSZA relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200101C26 UVSFSZA-CA UVSFSZA relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000101B61 UVSFSZA-OR UVSFSZA relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8400201C24 UVSFSZB-AB UVSFSZB relay element operated (phase-AB)

- 91 -
CU

8500201C25 UVSFSZB-BC UVSFSZB relay element operated (phase-BC)
8600201C26 UVSFSZB-CA UVSFSZB relay element operated (phase-CA)
8100201B61 UVSFSZB-OR UVSFSZB relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8800301C24 UVSFSZC-AB UVSFSZC relay element operated (phase-AB)
8900301C25 UVSFSZC-BC UVSFSZC relay element operated (phase-BC)
8A00301C26 UVSFSZC-CA UVSFSZC relay element operated (phase-CA)
8200301B61 UVSFSZC-OR UVSFSZC relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8C00401C24 UVSFSZD-AB UVSFSZD relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00401C25 UVSFSZD-BC UVSFSZD relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00401C26 UVSFSZD-CA UVSFSZD relay element operated (phase-CA)
8300401B61 UVSFSZD-OR UVSFSZD relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8000501C24 UVSFSZE-AB UVSFSZE relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100501C25 UVSFSZE-BC UVSFSZE relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200501C26 UVSFSZE-CA UVSFSZE relay element operated (phase-CA)
8400501B61 UVSFSZE-OR UVSFSZE relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8400601C24 UVSFSZF-AB UVSFSZF relay element operated (phase-AB)
8500601C25 UVSFSZF-BC UVSFSZF relay element operated (phase-BC)
8600601C26 UVSFSZF-CA UVSFSZF relay element operated (phase-CA)
8500601B61 UVSFSZF-OR UVSFSZF relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8800701C24 UVSFSZG-AB UVSFSZG relay element operated (phase-AB)
8900701C25 UVSFSZG-BC UVSFSZG relay element operated (phase-BC)
8A00701C26 UVSFSZG-CA UVSFSZG relay element operated (phase-CA)
8600701B61 UVSFSZG-OR UVSFSZG relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)
8C00801C24 UVSFSZH-AB UVSFSZH relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00801C25 UVSFSZH-BC UVSFSZH relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00801C26 UVSFSZH-CA UVSFSZH relay element operated (phase-CA)
8700801B61 UVSFSZH-OR UVSFSZH relay element operated (Three-phases ORed)

800010EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZA Additional failsafe in zone-A operated
810020EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZB Additional failsafe in zone-B operated
820030EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZC Additional failsafe in zone-C operated
830040EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZD Additional failsafe in zone-D operated
840050EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZE Additional failsafe in zone-E operated
850060EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZF Additional failsafe in zone-F operated
860070EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZG Additional failsafe in zone-G operated
870080EBB0 ADD.FS_OP-ZH Additional failsafe in zone-H operated

- 92 -
CU
(ii) BU
DBP_FS_BU(Function ID: 48CA01)
8000001B60 BU_FSOP-ZA Failsafe in zone-A operated
8100001B61 BU_FSOP-ZB Failsafe in zone-B operated
8200001B62 BU_FSOP-ZC Failsafe in zone-C operated
8300001B63 BU_FSOP-ZD Failsafe in zone-D operated
8400001B64 BU_FSOP-ZE Failsafe in zone-E operated
8500001B65 BU_FSOP-ZF Failsafe in zone-F operated
8600001B66 BU_FSOP-ZG Failsafe in zone-G operated
8700001B67 BU_FSOP-ZH Failsafe in zone-H operated
8F00001B6F BU_FSOP Failsafe operation

- 93 -
CU
––––––––Command trip function (COMTP) BU
Command trip function (COMTP)

If a CB is required to trip under a particular condition, the user can use the command trip
(COMTP) function to generate a command trip signal. For example, if COMTP receives a trip
signal sent from an external IED, COMTP will enable tripping of the CBs within a
corresponding protection zone. A binary circuit input (BI) is provided to receive the trip signal
and the user can connect the BI1 with the COMTP logic using the PLC connection point
“COMTP_INIT2”. (Hereafter, this operation is referred to as “Com-trip”)
1Note: Binary input circuits are discussed in Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module. Connection to the COMPT logic is performed using the PLC function,
which is discussed in Chapter PLC function.
2Note: The PLC connection point “COMPT_INIT” exists in the COMPT logic, as shown in
Figure 2.4-2.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)

- 94 -
CU
2.4.1 Operation of command trip (Com-trip)

An example (Figure 2.4-1) shows how the initiation of Com-trip is triggered by falling gas-
pressure; in this example, a bus-bar protection is configured using several BUs, and a falling
gas-pressure signal is sent to BU#1. In this case, the Replica evaluation1 function determines
which protection-zones and BUs are appropriate to Com-trip; COMTP generates the signal
Com-trip for BUs in protection-zone A. As a result, a trip signal is issued to BU1, BU2, BU4,
and BU6, and the CBs associated with protection-zone A are tripped.
1Note: For more information, see Replica setting procedure for Decentralized Busbar
protection IED (6F2S1902))
BU6 Zone C Zone D BU8
BU5 BU7
Gas pressure Zone A Zone B

BU1 drop BU9
BU2 BU10
BU3 BU4
Trip signal generated by the signal of Com-trip sent by COMTP
Trip signal not generated
Figure 2.4-1 Example of command trip initiated by BU#1
2.4.2 Operation of command transfer trip (Com-Transfer-trip)

COMTP can also send a transfer-trip signal to the CB at the remote terminal. (For application
of the Com-Transfer-trip function, see section 2.4.4)

Figure 2.4-2 and Figure 2.4-3 show the scheme logic for COMTP in the CU and BU respectively.
Scheme switch [COMTP-EN] setting On will enable the command trip operation. PLC signal
COMTP_INST_OP is used for instantaneous trip operation. PLC signal COMTP_BLOCK will
block the command trip operation.

- 95 -
CU
8000001B60 To Trip zone evaluation in CU

TCOMTP
800000EBB0 COMTP_INIT t 0 BU-COM.TP

& ≥1
0.00-300.00s
&
COMTP-EN
On
COM-TRIP_ACT
&
800000EBB1 COMTP_BLOCK 1
810000EBB2 COMTP_INST_OP
Figure 2.4-2 Start-up signal of COMPT in BU
From COMTP in BU1

BU-COM.TP 8000001B60 To trip signal generation in each BU
BU1-PROT.ZONE-A
& ≥1 8000001B61 ≥1 COM_ZONE-A.TP
BU1-PROT.ZONE-B
in CU & ≥1 ≥1 COM_ZONE-B.TP
BU1-PROT.ZONE-H &
From COMTP in BU2

BU-COM.TP 8000001B67
≥1 ≥1 COM_ZONE-H.TP
BU2-PROT.ZONE-A &
BU2-PROT.ZONE-B &
in CU
BU2-PROT.ZONE-H &
From COMTP in BU64

BU-COM.TP
BU64-PROT.ZONE-A &
BU64-PROT.ZONE-B &
in CU
BU64-PROT.ZONE-H &
8001101BB0
800110EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZA
8101201BB0
810120EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZB
8701801BB0
870180EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZH
Figure 2.4-3 Trip zone evaluation in CU
The BU has Com-trip and Com-Transfer-trip logic as shown in Figure 2.4-4. If the setting
[BayDevice] = Coupler and the coupler is bridged, then signal COM_TRIP is blocked by the
setting [CoupTpBlk] = Block in CU.
Fail-safe (FS1) operation is performed in the BU based upon the input signals from the
CU. Fail-safe operation is performed by monitoring the system voltages in the CU; the FS
function will issue a signal upon fault detection.

- 96 -
CU
Scheme switch [COMTP-Output] is used to select either the output of a trip signal (Trip)
or a signal output from a binary output circuit (BO2). The user should set scheme switch setting
[COMTP-EN] On to initiate COMTP operation,
1Note: FS is operated when either the under voltage (phase-to-phase/phase-to-earth) or

over voltage is measured in the residual monitored voltage. For more information,
see section 2.3.
2Note: Binary output circuits are discussed in Chapter Technical description (BU):
Binary IO module.
Trip
BO
COM_ZONE-A.TP COMTP-Output
Com-trip
From COM_ZONE-B.TP &
“Trip zone evaluation” 8400001B23
8300001B61 To TRC
in COMTP of CU
≥1 & COM.TRIP
& (COM-OPT-TRIP)
&
COM_ZONE-H.TP
&
BU_PROT-ZA
BU_PROT-ZB
From
“Protection zone evaluation”
in Replica topology of BU BU_PROT-ZH
BU_TR-ZA
BU_TR-ZB
BU_TR-ZH
COMTP-FS Off
BU_FSOP-ZA ≥1
BU_FSOP-ZB ≥1
From Fail-safe in BU
BU_FSOP-ZH ≥1
Com Transfer-trip
8600001B63 To TRC
≥1
& COM-TR.TRIP
&
(COM-OPT-TR)
&
&
COM.TRIP_ACT
Figure 2.4-4 Trip signal generation in BU

- 97 -
CU
2.4.4 Operation example of Com-Transfer-trip

Figure 2.4-5 shows a double busbar substation with a transfer bus-bar; Feeder #4 is being
operated as the transfer bus. Let us suppose BU6 receives an external signal using the PLC
connection point “COMTP_INIT” (Step 1) similar to that described in section 2.4.1. COMTP
can generate signals Com-trip for protection-zone A and protection-zone C. That is, these
command signals are sent to BU1, BU3, and both BU5 and BU6. (Step 2) If it is required that
BU4 generates the command signal transfer-trip for the tripping of the remote CB beyond
Feeder 4, COMTP will also enable the generation of a command transfer-trip (Com-Transfer-
trip) to the CB when the following feeder configuration is observed in the Replica evaluation.
(Step 3)
Zone A
Zone B
Zone C
(Transfer Bus)
Step1
)
CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 BU6
CBC
BU5 DS closed
BU1 BU2 BU3 BU4 DS opened
Coupler
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder 4
Transfer-trip
CB closed
CB opened
Step3
Com
CB opened
Step2 CB being
beyond Feeder 4
Step3 CB Tripped
Figure 2.4-5 Example of transfer trip initiated by BU6

- 98 -
CU
2.4.5 COMTP settings

(i) CU
(ii) BU
Setting of DBP_COMTP_BU (Function ID: 486A01)
Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note
COMTP-EN Off / On - Command trip enable Off

TCOMTP 0.00 - 300.00 s Command trip delay time 0.00
COMTP-FS Off / On - Fail safe for command trip enable Off
COMTP-Output Trip / BO - Command trip signal output position Trip

- 99 -
CU
2.4.6 COMTP signals (Data ID)

(i) CU
DBP_COMTP_CU (Function ID: 486001)
8001101BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZA Additional Command-Trip-ZA trip
8101201BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZB Additional Command-Trip-ZB trip
8201301BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZC Additional Command-Trip-ZC trip
8301401BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZD Additional Command-Trip-ZD trip
8401501BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZE Additional Command-Trip-ZE trip
8501601BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZF Additional Command-Trip-ZF trip
8601701BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZG Additional Command-Trip-ZG trip
8701801BB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZH Additional Command-Trip-ZH trip
8000001B60 COM_ZONE.TP-ZA COM zone-A trip
8100001B61 COM_ZONE.TP-ZB COM zone-B trip
8200001B62 COM_ZONE.TP-ZC COM zone-C trip
8300001B63 COM_ZONE.TP-ZD COM zone-D trip
8400001B64 COM_ZONE.TP-ZE COM zone-E trip
8500001B65 COM_ZONE.TP-ZF COM zone-F trip
8600001B66 COM_ZONE.TP-ZG COM zone-G trip
8700001B67 COM_ZONE.TP-ZH COM zone-H trip
8000001BB0 COMTP_BLOCK-CU COMTP protection block command

DBP_COMTP_CU (Function ID: 486001)
800110EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZA Additional Command-Trip-ZA trip
810120EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZB Additional Command-Trip-ZB trip
820130EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZC Additional Command-Trip-ZC trip
830140EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZD Additional Command-Trip-ZD trip
840150EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZE Additional Command-Trip-ZE trip
850160EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZF Additional Command-Trip-ZF trip
860170EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZG Additional Command-Trip-ZG trip
870180EBB0 ADD.COM_ZONE.TP-ZH Additional Command-Trip-ZH trip
800000EBB0 COMTP_BLOCK-CU COMTP protection block command
(ii) BU
DBP_COMTP_BU (Function ID: 486A01)
8000001B60 BU-COM.TP Command trip
8400001B23 COM.OPT COM protection operated
8300001B61 COM.TRIP COM.TRIP protection operated
8600001B63 COM-OPT-TR COM_TR.TP protection operated
8000001BB0 COMTP_INIT COMTP initiation command
8000001BB1 COMTP_BLOCK COMTP protection block command

- 100 -
CU

8100001BB2 COMTP_INST_OP COMTP protection instantaneous operation command

800000EBB0 COMTP_INIT COMTP initiation command
800000EBB1 COMTP_BLOCK COMTP protection block command
810000EBB2 COMTP_INST_OP COMTP protection instantaneous operation command

- 101 -
CU
––––––––End fault protection (EFP) BU
End fault protection (EFP)

End fault protection (EFP) is used to protect the zone between Current Transformer (CT) and
Circuit Breaker (CB) while the CB is open.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)

- 102 -
CU
2.5.1 EFP operation scheme

Based on the placement of CT and CB, the operation of EFP is divided into two schemes: (i)
EFP zone trip (Mode 1), and (ii) EFP transfer trip (Mode 2†). The user enables these schemes
using scheme switches [EFPZ-EN] and [EFPTr-EN].
†Note:Mode 2 is recommended in EFP operation together with both operation of
Discriminating-zone-protection and Check-zone-protection, which are furnished in
current differential protection (DIF). (See section 2.1)
(i) EFP Zone trip (Mode 1)1

Suppose a CB (CB-A) is placed at the line side and the bus-bar is operated while CB-A is in the
open position, as shown in Figure 2.5-1.
Remote Busbar Busbar

end Fault Zone A Zone B
Line CB-A
CT
CB-B
CBC
Figure 2.5-1 Fault occurrence and current flow before tripping

Remote Busbar Busbar
end Fault Zone A Zone B
Line CB-A
CT
CB-B
CBC
Figure 2.5-2 Tripping CB-B and CBC by EFP

CB closed
CB open
CB tripped
DS closed
DS open
BU
CT
If a fault occurs at the left side i.e. line side of the CT, the bus-bar protection DIF relay
will not generate a trip command. Thus, a trip command is output by the BU after the BU
examines the operation of OC element (OCEFP) and the open state of the CB. As a result, CB-
B and CBC are tripped by the EFP, as shown in Figure 2.5-2. The dead line condition will be
provided by the protection common function (PROT-COMM).

- 103 -
CU
(ii) EFP Transfer-trip (Mode 2) 1

Figure 2.5-3 shows the CT used in the bus-bar protection with the CB (CB-A) located at the
busbar side of the CT; in this case the bus-bar will operate despite CB-A being open. If a fault
occurs between the CT and CB-A, the bus-bar protection DIF relay may operate because the
fault exists in its zone of protection. In this case, the operation of the DIF relay is not required2;
hence, fault clearance should be achieved by tripping the CB at the remote-terminal. Therefore,
a transfer-trip command is sent to CB-D at the remote-terminal following the operation of
OCEFP and the examination of the open state of CB-A are complete.
Busbar Busbar
Remote
IX Zone A Zone B
end Fault
Line CT
CB-D CB-A
BUX
CB-B
CBC
Figure 2.5-3 Fault occurrence and current flow before tripping

Busbar Busbar
Remote
Zone A Zone B
end Fault
Line
CB-D CT CB-A
BUX
EFP Transfer-trip CB-B

CBC
Figure 2.5-4 Tripping CB-B by EFP transfer-trip

1Note: The BUX can treat the bay current (IX) as zero while CB-A is open. Such a
function is termed “Zero-ampere current-control”. The operation of the
discriminating-zone-protection in DIF can be blocked using “Zero-ampere current-
control” when a fault occurs. However, the operation of the check-zone-protection
cannot be blocked because the check-zone-protection does not have such a
function. That is, the check-zone-protection will still operate when a fault occurs
but will not result in tripping of the CB because the discriminating zone
protection is blocked using the “zero-ampere control” function. Hence, the user
should take note that unwanted tripping may occur if only the check-zone-
protection is engaged in the DIF relay.
2Note: The operation of the DIF relay results in tripping of CB-B and CBC in Figure
2.5-3.

- 104 -
CU

As shown in Figure 2.5-5, the trip initiation signals for BU-EFP_ZONE.TP and EFP_TR.TP
are generated based on the operation of the OCEFP element and the PLC signal
DEAD_LINE_DETECT. PLC signals EFP-ZONE_INST and EFP-TR_INST are used for
instantaneous trip operation. Setting of the OCEPF element is performed with setting
[OCEFP].
EFP Zone-trip
8300001B63 To trip-zone
8000001C20 TEFP-ZONE evaluation in CU
A t 0 BU-EFP_ZONE.TP
8100001C21 & ≥1 ≥1
OCEFP B t 0
8200001C22 & ≥1
C t 0
& ≥1
0.00-300.00s
BU-EFP_ZONE.TP-A
&
BU-EFP_ZONE.TP-B
&
BU-EFP_ZONE.TP-C
&
EFP Transfer-trip
8300001B67
TEFP-TR
t 0 EFP_TR.TP
& ≥1 ≥1
t 0
& ≥1
t 0
& ≥1
0.00-300.00s
From EFP_ZONE.TP-A
PROT_COMM in BU DEAD_LINE_DETECT &
& EFP_ZONE.TP-B
&
800000EBB4 EFP-Z_ADD.COND
EFP_ZONE.TP-C
&
&
810000EBB5 EFP-TR_ADD.COND
EFPZ-EN On &
EFP_ZONE.TP_ACT
EFPTr-E On
N EFP_TR.TP_ACT
&
800000EBB0 EFP_BLOCK 1
800000EBB1 EFP-Z_INST &
810000EBB2 EFP-TR_INST
&
820000EBB3 EFP_INST_OP
Figure 2.5-5 Start-up signal of EFP in BU
Figure 2.5-6 illustrates how the trip-zone of the EFP is determined using the BU-
EFP_ZONE.TP signal from the decision signals provided by the Replica evaluation1function.
The BU has EFP Zone-trip and EFP Transfer-trip functions, as shown in Figure 2.5-7.
The PLC signal EFP_ZONE.TRIP will not appear when setting [BayDevice] = Coupler and
when the coupler is bridged, and when setting [CoupTpBlk] = Block.1 Fail-safe (FS2) signals
from the CU can also be selected to determine the signaling of the EFP Zone-trip and EFP
Transfer-trip.

- 105 -
CU
1Note: For more information on the Replica evaluation function, see Replica setting
procedure for Decentralized Busbar protection IED (6F2S1902))
2Note: For more information on the Fail-safe function, see section 2.3.
From EFP in BU1

To Trip-signal generation
BU-EFP_ZONE.TP 8000001B60 in each BU
From BU1-PROT.ZONE-A EFP_ZONE.TP-ZA
& ≥1
8100001B61
Replica evaluation
in CU BU1-PROT.ZONE-B EFP_ZONE.TP-ZB
& ≥1
BU1-PROT.ZONE-H &
From EFP in BU2

BU-EFP_ZONE.TP 8700001B67
≥1 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZH
From BU2-PROT.ZONE-A &
Replica evaluation
in CU BU2-PROT.ZONE-B
&
BU2-PROT.ZONE-H &
From EFP in BU64

BU-EFP_ZONE.TP
From BU64-PROT.ZONE-A &

Replica evaluation
in CU BU64-PROT.ZONE-B &
BU64-PROT.ZONE-H &
Figure 2.5-6 Trip-zone evaluation in CU

- 106 -
CU
Trip
BO
EFP_ZONE.TP-ZA EFP-Output
EFP Zone-trip
From Trip evaluation in &
EFP_ZONE.TP-ZB
EFP of CU 8400001B23 8300001B61
≥1 & EFP-ZONE.TRIP
&
&
EFP_ZONE.TP-ZH
&
BU_PROT-ZA
BU_PROT-ZB
From
“Protection zone evaluation”
in Replica evaluation of BU BU_PROT-ZH
BU_TR-ZA
BU_TR-ZB
BU_TR-ZH
EFP-ZONE.TP_ACT
EFP-FS Off
BU_FSOP-ZA ≥1
BU_FSOP-ZB ≥1
From Fail-safe in BU
BU_FSOP-ZH ≥1
EFP Transfer-trip
8600001B63
≥1
& EFP-TR.TRIP
&
&
&
EFP-TR.TP_ACT
Figure 2.5-7 Trip signal generation in BU

- 107 -
CU
2.5.3 EFP settings

(i) CU
(ii) BU
Setting of DBP_EFP_BU (Function ID: 457A01)
Range Default
0.10 - 0.50 - -
COMTP-EN OCEFP relay operating level 1.00 5.00
5.00 25.00
Zone-trip EFPZ-EN Off / On EFP zone-trip enable Off
TEFP-ZONE 0.00 - 300.00 EFP zone-trip timer 0.00
EFPZ-Output Trip / BO EFP zone-trip signal output position Trip
EFPTr-EN Off / On EFP transfer-trip enable Off
Transfer-trip TEFP-TR 0.00 - 300.00 EFP transfer-trip timer 0.00
EFPTP-FS Off / On Failsafe for EFP trip Off

- 108 -
CU
2.5.4 EFP signals (Data ID)

(i) CU
DBP_EFP_CU (Function ID: 457001)
8000001BB0 EFP_BLOCK-CU EFP protection block command
8000001B60 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZA EFP zone-A trip
8100001B61 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZB EFP zone-B trip
8200001B62 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZC EFP zone-C trip
8300001B63 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZD EFP zone-D trip
8400001B64 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZE EFP zone-E trip
8500001B65 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZF EFP zone-F trip
8600001B66 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZG EFP zone-G trip
8700001B67 EFP_ZONE.TP-ZH EFP zone-H trip

DBP_EFP_CU (Function ID: 457001)
800000EBB0 EFP_BLOCK-CU EFP protection block command
(ii) BU
DBP_EFP_BU (Function ID: 457A01)
8300001B63 BU-EFP_ZONE.TP EFP zone-trip command
8000001B60 BU-EFP_ZONE.TP-A EFP zone-trip command (phase-A)
8100001B61 BU-EFP_ZONE.TP-B EFP zone-trip command (phase-B)
8200001B62 BU-EFP_ZONE.TP-C EFP zone-trip command (phase-C)
8800001B6B EFP-OPT-AR EFP protection operated (phase-A)
8900001B6C EFP-OPT-BR EFP protection operated (phase-B)
8A00001B6D EFP-OPT-CR EFP protection operated (phase-C)
8600001B6A EFP-TR.TRIP EFP_TR.TP protection operated
8100001BB5 EFP-TR_ADD.COND Additional condition to enable EFP transfer-trip
8100001BB2 EFP-TR_INST EFP transfer-trip instant operation command
8000001BB4 EFP-Z_ADD.COND Additional condition to enable EFP zone-trip
8000001BB1 EFP-Z_INST EFP zone-trip instant operation command
8300001B68 EFP-ZONE.TRIP EFP-ZONE.TRIP protection operated
8000001BB0 EFP_BLOCK EFP protection block command
8200001BB3 EFP_INST_OP EFP protection instant operation command
8300001B67 EFP_TR.TP EFP_TR.TP protection operated
8000001B64 EFP_TR.TP-A EFP_TR.TP protection operated (phase-A)
8100001B65 EFP_TR.TP-B EFP_TR.TP protection operated (phase-B)
8200001B66 EFP_TR.TP-C EFP_TR.TP protection operated (phase-C)
8400001B23 EFP_ZONE.OPT EFP-ZONE protection operated
8000001C20 OCEFP-A OCEFP relay element operated (phase-A)
8100001C21 OCEFP-B OCEFP relay element operated (phase-B)

- 109 -
CU

8200001C22 OCEFP-C OCEFP relay element operated (phase-C)

810000EBB5 EFP-TR_ADD.COND Additional condition to enable EFP transfer-trip
810000EBB2 EFP-TR_INST EFP transfer-trip instant operation command
800000EBB4 EFP-Z_ADD.COND Additional condition to enable EFP zone-trip
800000EBB1 EFP-Z_INST EFP zone-trip instant operation command
800000EBB0 EFP_BLOCK EFP protection block command
820000EBB3 EFP_INST_OP EFP protection instant operation command

- 110 -
CU
Chapter 2.6: Relay application
6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Non-directional overcurrent protection (OC)
BU
Non-directional overcurrent protection (OC)

The overcurrent protection relay function (hereafter referred to as OC) detects
overcurrent conditions and operates accordingly. The OC feature has two stages (elements),
OC1 and OC2, which operate independently. To simplify the description, only OC1 is discussed
but is applicable to OC2; hence, read the expression for OC1 as OC2 for the OC2 stage unless
a special explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)
– Main features NA   

- 111 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
2.6.1 Characteristic of non-directional element

The characteristic of the non-directional type OC element is a circle that has a center at the
origin, as shown in Figure 2.6-1. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the non-directional
OC element and the hatched area shows the operational area of the non-directional OC.
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 2.6-1 Non-directional OC characteristic
2.6.2 IDMT and DT characteristics
The OC element monitors the currents; when one of the currents is beyond the threshold of
operation, the OC element will operate within a period that is defined by the time
characteristic feature. The user can choose the OC operate time delay characteristics, either
dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e., IDMT) or independent (definite) time
characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of the IDMT depends upon the level of the
energizing current, and the operate time in the DT is a constant.
For the reset-time-delay in the IDMT, either inverse (dependent)-time-reset or definite

(independent)-time-reset is characterized by setting.
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OC element
by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switch later.
(i) Operation principle

Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)
The inverse time OC element has an inverse time feature for both operation and resetting; for
resetting, both definite time and dependent time resetting are available.
With inverse time operation, provided that the fault current has the magnitude required
to enable the determination of the location of the fault and provided that the fluctuation in the
impedance of the power source does not affect the correct determination, an inverse time OC
function provides an effective protection. With regard to the inverse time characteristic, for

- 112 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
example, the function can provide a fast trip for close-in faults, but will enable a delayed trip
for remote faults. The characteristic curve of the inverse time element can be selected from
among 10 characteristic curves† in conformance with IEC, IEEE, US, and UK standards.
†Note: A user-defined ‘Original’ curve can also be applied in addition to the 10

predefined characteristics provided.
With dependent time resetting selected, if during the resetting period the energizing
current exceeds the threshold current of the OC element, then the OC element will pick-up.
The OC element will reset later in a period determined by the characteristics of dependent
time resetting. In other words, the user can choose the behavior of the OC element for either
faults that are repetitive intermittent or faults that occur in rapid succession. The
characteristic for dependent time resetting is selectable from five dependent time
characteristics in conformance with IEEE and US standards.
When definite time resetting is selected with the operation of the inverse time OC
selection and the reset time set to zero (instantaneous), no intentional delay is added for the
resetting: that is, when the energizing current falls below the reset threshold of the OC element,
the OC element returns to its reset condition. If a value is set to the reset time in seconds, the
resetting of the OC element is delayed by the reset time.
Definite time delay (independent time characteristic)

In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal relative to the location of the
fault, definite time overcurrent protection is usually applied. Because the fault current does
not change greatly with respect to fault position the previous advantages described with regard
to the inverse time function are not applicable. Therefore, the definite time OC element is used
instead of the inverse time OC element. The definite time OC element has a fixed operating
time regardless of the magnitude of the fault current.
The operating time of the definite time OC element is set depending on the distance from
the power source and should be set shorter for relays furthest from the power source. Definite
time OC protection provides selectivity dependent on the difference between relay operating
times. It is limited to use in networks with a power source at one side only i.e. in radial
networks. The threshold values can be set identically at each terminal, but preferably, the
threshold value is reduced, little-by-little to provide a margin in terms of the current sensitivity
of the OC element. Moreover, a higher sensitivity of threshold current is required for a
protective relay that is located remote from the power source, that is, the threshold of the
definite time OC element is required to be lower than the ordinary threshold.

- 113 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
The operate time of the definite time OC element is constant irrespective of the
magnitude of the fault current and the threshold level of operation of the definite time OC
element with an on-delay timer provides a selective protection. As a result, the circuit breaker
(CB) at the remote terminal far from the power source can be tripped in the shortest time. The
on-delay timer, which generates a delay in starting the operation of the OC element, provides
a time grading margin (Tc); Tc is discussed later.
Definite time resetting as well as the on-delay starting setting of the definite time OC
element is provided. The operate time for the on-delay timer for starting and for the resetting
time is set using the OC element settings.
(ii) DT characteristic
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the
level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in in sections (vi) and (vii).
(iii) IDMT characteristic

The operate time in the IDMT characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the fault
current. The user can determine the operate time from a preset curve. Ten characteristic curves
are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard
characteristic curves and one original (user programmable) characteristic curve for which the
user can set the equation parameters. The IDMT curve equation and parameters will be
explained in section (iv).
The reset time in the IDMT is user-selectable; either inverse-time-reset or definite-time-

reset is selected. For the inverse-time-reset, the user can choose the reset time for the preset
characteristic from six characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five pre-installed
characteristic curves and one user original characteristic curve where the user can set the
equation parameters. The inverse-time-reset curve equation and parameters will be discussed
in section (vi).
(iv) Operate time of IDMT

The operate time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (2.6-1). (ref. IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × {[ α ] + 𝑐} (2.6-1)
(𝐼⁄𝐼 ) − 1
𝑠
where:
t = operate time with constant current I (seconds),

- 114 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
I = operate (energizing) current (amperes),

Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting number,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 2.6-1. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each OC stage. Figure 2.6-2 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switch [OC1-Timer]. (“IEC-NI" is for IEC Normal Inverse
characteristic; “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse; “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse; “UK-LTI” for
UK Long Time Inverse; “IEEE-MI” for IEEE Moderately Inverse; “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very
Inverse; “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse; “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse; “US-CO2” for
US CO2 Short Time Inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT, the user can also program the characteristic using time-multiplier-setting
(TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC characteristic is selected, the
user can set the TMS value using the setting [OC1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the default value
for the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [OC1-TMS-UK], [OC1-TMS-
IEEE], [OC1-TMS-US] and [OC1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.6-1 Constants for IDMT
Curve type k c
Curve Description α
(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694

- 115 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Figure 2.6-2 IDMT characteristic curves
(v) Operate time of DT

The operate time in the DT is a constant.
Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switches [OC1-Timer]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TOC1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
Instantaneous activation
The operate time of instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOC1].
(vi) Reset time of IDMT

Programming the reset time characteristic is available in the IEEE, US standards. It is also
allowed in original (user-programmable) inverse-time-reset characteristic. To get this
characteristic, the user should set DEP for setting [OC1-Rtimer]†. The following equation
defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic. (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
t(I) = RTMS × [ β
] (2.6-2)
1 − (𝐼⁄𝐼 )
𝑠

- 116 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
where,
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = threshold setting (amperes),
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting,
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero (seconds),
β = constants defining curve.
For the IEEE standard, the user should use the setting [OC1-RTMS-IEEE] (incidentally,
the default value is 1.000). For the US standard and the original, settings [OC1-RTMS-US] and
[OC1-RTMS-ORG] are provided, respectively (For more information w.r.t the value for kr and
β, see Table 2.6-2; Figure 2.6-3 shows the characteristic curves).
†Note: To select the inverse-time-reset characteristic, set [OC1-Rtimer]=DEP.

Conversely set [OC1-Rtimer]=DEF to select definite-time-reset characteristic,.
Note: For the setting [OC1-Rtimer]=DEP (inverse-time-reset), the integrated value will
be reduced in accordance to the magnitude of an energized current, when the
energized current is smaller than the setting [OC1]. The reducing degree will be
determined with the reset curve characteristics defined in the standards.
Note: For the setting [OC1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value shall
be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [OC1], when the
small energized current is continued for timer setting [TOC1R]. The integrated
value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small for the
setting [TOC1R]. DEF is allowed to set in the IEEE, US, and ORG. DEF is set
unconditionally in the IEC and UK (see Table 2.6-4).
Table 2.6-2 Constants for inverse-time-reset characteristics

Curve Type kr
Curve Description Β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) N/A N/A
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2

- 117 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Figure 2.6-3 Inverse-time-reset characteristics curves
Figure 2.6-4 illustrates that an integrating value will be influenced dependent on the
DEP or DEF setting. An energized quantity (I), where I is greater than a threshold setting
[OC1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the
energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [OC1], the element operation will
return to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (2.6-2).

- 118 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Time 
Energizing current
Energizing current
cleared by tripping
Pickup threshold in relay [OC1] threshold
Measuring quantity 0A
Inverse-time-reset characteristic
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEP
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration will be deceased depending on the

[OC1-RTMS-*] reset characteristics.
Definite-time-reset characteristic
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEF
Integrator
Trip signal
Reset time
Integration will be kept in timer [TOC1R].
The integration will start again when the energizing current The integration will be reset when the energizing current
becomes larger than [OC1] within [TOC1R]. does not become larger than [OC1] in [TOC1R].
Figure 2.6-4 Inverse-time-reset characteristics
(vii) Reset time of DT

In the DT characteristic, the reset time is designed to be instant.
Table 2.6-3 OC settings in each BU

Setting items Mode / range Unit Contents Default
OC*-EN Off / On – Protection enable Off
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-
EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
OC*-Timer – Delay type DT
IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / US-
CO2 / US-CO8 /Original
Threshold in DT mode (multiple of
OC* (DT mode) 0.02 - 50.00 1.00
CT secondary rating)
Threshold in IDMT mode (multiple
OC* (IDMT mode) 0.02 - 5.00 1.00
of CT secondary rating)
OC*-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/Pick-up ratio 100
TOC* 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
OC*-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OC*-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
Time multiplier in IEEE inverse
OC*-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OC*-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
Time multiplier in Original inverse
OC*-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
curve
OC*-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type DEF

- 119 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting items Mode / range Unit Contents Default

TOC*R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OC*-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC*-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
US inverse curve
OC*-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OC*-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC*-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC*-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC*-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC*-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
(viii) Summary of OC operation

Table 2.6-4 shows the summary of OC operation in each BU.
Table 2.6-4 Type and standard board (Ticks show selectable functions)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI UK-LTI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8 Original
DT 
IEC-NI ✓
Scheme switch [OC*-Timer]
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[OC*-Rtimer]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
2.6.3 Threshold value

Threshold values at which OC elements will pick-up in each BU are configured by settings
[OC1] and [OC2]. The elements can have IDMT or DT characteristic. Note that the threshold
settings can have distinct values in the respective OC elements in each BU. Rated current for
the input is defined either 1A or 5A; it is defined on a VCT. (For more information about the
VCT, see Chapter Technical description (BU): Transformer module for AC analogue input).

- 120 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
2.6.4 Reset ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for pick-up to reset is applied using a setting; for example,
in BU1, the ratio of OC1 element is set using setting [OC1-DPR]. Each BU can have the reset
settings.
2.6.5 Miscellaneous functions

(i) Trip mode
Every OC element has a selectable tripping mode; the mode is selected using a scheme switch.
For the OC1 element, for example, a scheme switch [OC1-OPMD] is provided. When a trip is
required for any faults that are detected, 3POR (a fault occurs in one or more phases) is set for
the scheme switch [OC1-OPMD]. Conversely, when a trip is only required for faults that occur
in two or more phases, 2OUTOF3 (a fault occurs in two or more phases) is set for the scheme
switch [OC1-OPMD].
Table 2.6-5 Fault type and tripping mode
Fault type Setting [OC1-OPMD]
Phase-A Phase-B Phase-C 3POR 2OUTOF3
X – – ✓ No trip
– X – ✓ No trip
– – X ✓ No trip
X X – ✓ ✓
– X X ✓ ✓
X – X ✓ ✓
X X X ✓ ✓
Note: A tick (✓) indicates that a trip is issued when faults are detected.
A mark (X) indicates the occurrence of a fault on a particular phase. A mark
shown thus (–) indicates that no fault has occurred on that particular phase.
(ii) Signal of OC trip

When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm
for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor] for
the normal trip operation.
(iii) OC operation accompanying FS signal

Scheme switch [OCTP-FS] enables or disenables fail-safe operation, which is furnished
separately in the bus-bar protection (see section 2.3).

- 121 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
2.6.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic for the non-directional OC1 function is illustrated below. Each element of the
OC1 function determines if a pickup current has exceeded the setting threshold, subsequently
trip signals are issued to the trip circuit (TRC).
TOC1
8000011B23
8000011C20
OC1 A t 0 OC1-OPT
≧1
OC1-TRIP
8100011C21 & & ≧1 ≧1 & &
B t 0
8200011C22 & & ≧1
C t 0
≧1 OC1-UseFor Trip
& &
0.00-300.00s
2 out of 3
& &
& 3POR
OC1-OPMD 2OUTOF3
&
8000011C24
≧1 &
OC1 A
PU 8100011C25 & & ≧1
B &
8200011C26 & & ≧1
C &
& &
8000011BB0 OC1_BLOCK 1 OC1_ACT

3100002B60 OC-BU_FSOP-Z &
OC1-TP.EN On
8000011BB1 OC1_INST_OP
DT
OC1-Type IEC-NI, IEC-VI,・・・
Figure 2.6-5 Scheme logic for OC1

Note: OC1 PU is overcurrent stage 1 on pick up.

- 122 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
2.6.7 OC settings
(i) CU
(ii) BU
Setting of DBP_OC_BU (Function ID: 458A01)
Range Default
OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection scheme switch Off
OC2-EN Off / On - OC2 protection scheme switch Off
OCTP-FS Off / On - Fail safe for OC trip enable Off
OC1 DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI /
IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
OC1-Timer IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI / - OC1 delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
DT 0.02 - 0.10 -
OC1 A OC1 threshold (in DT mode) 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
OC1-DPR 10 - 100 % OC1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
IEC 0.02 - 0.10 -
OC1 A OC1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 1.00 5.00
5.00 25.00
OC1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000
TOC1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 definite time reset delay 0.00
UK 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000
IEEE 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC1-TMS-
0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000
IEEE
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type of IEEE DEF
OC1-RTMS- OC1 dependent reset time multiplier in IEEE
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
US 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay DEF
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier in US
OC1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
ORG 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of ORG inverse curve 1.000
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type DEF
OC1-RTMS- OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of ORG
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
ORG inverse curve

- 123 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Range Default
OC1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
Output OC1-OPMD 3POR / 2OUTOF3 - OC1 operation mode 3POR
OC1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - OC1 used for trip or alarm Trip
OC2 DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI /
IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
OC2-Timer IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI / - OC2 delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
DT 0.02 - 0.10 -
OC2 A OC2 threshold (in DT mode) 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
TOC2 0.00 - 300.00 s OC2 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
IEC 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OC2 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000
UK 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OC2 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000
IEEE 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC2-TMS-
0.010 - 50.000 - OC2 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000
IEEE
OC2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC2 reset delay type of IEEE DEF
OC2-RTMS- OC2 dependent reset time multiplier of IEEE
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
US 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OC2 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000
OC2 dependent reset time multiplier in US
OC2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
ORG 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
OC2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - OC2 time multiplier of ORG inverse curve 1.000
OC2-RTMS- OC2 dependent reset time multiplier in ORG
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
ORG inverse curve
OC2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000

- 124 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Range Default
OC2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
Output OC2-OPMD 3POR / 2OUTOF3 - OC2 operation mode 3POR
OC2-UseFor Trip / Alarm - OC2 used for trip or alarm Trip

- 125 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
2.6.8 OC signals (Data ID)

(i) BU
DBP_OC_BU (Function ID: 458A01)
8000011C20 OC1-A OC1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OC1-B OC1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OC1-C OC1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B23 OC1-OPT OC1 protection operated
8000011B62 OC1-OPT-A OC1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100011B63 OC1-OPT-B OC1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200011B64 OC1-OPT-C OC1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 OC1-OR OC1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011C24 OC1PU-A OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100011C25 OC1PU-B OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200011C26 OC1PU-C OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000011B61 OC1PU-OR OC1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8400021C20 OC2-A OC2 relay element operated (phase-A)
8500021C21 OC2-B OC2 relay element operated (phase-B)
8600021C22 OC2-C OC2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8100021B23 OC2-OPT OC2 protection operated
8400021B62 OC2-OPT-A OC2 protection operated (phase-A)
8500021B63 OC2-OPT-B OC2 protection operated (phase-B)
8600021B64 OC2-OPT-C OC2 protection operated (phase-C)
8100021B60 OC2-OR OC2 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8400021C24 OC2PU-A OC2 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8500021C25 OC2PU-B OC2 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8600021C26 OC2PU-C OC2 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8100021B61 OC2PU-OR OC2 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)

DBP_OC_BU (Function ID: 458A01)
800001EBB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command
810002EBB0 OC2_BLOCK OC2 protection block command
800001EBB1 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instantaneous operation command
810002EBB1 OC2_INST_OP OC2 protection instantaneous operation command

- 126 -
CU
––––––––Non-directional earth fault protection (EF)
BU
Non-directional earth fault protection (EF)

The Earth fault protection function (hereafter referred to as EF) is used to detect earth faults
and will operate accordingly. The EF function has two stages (elements), EF1 and EF2, which
operate independently. To simplify the description, only EF1 is discussed, but is applicable to
EF2; hence read the expression for EF1 as EF2 for the EF2 stage unless a special explanation
or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)
– Main features NA  NA 

- 127 -
CU
BU
2.7.1 Characteristic of non-directional element

The characteristic of the non-directional type EF element is a circle that has a center at the
origin, as shown in Figure 2.7-1. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the non-directional
EF element and the hatched area shows the operational area of the non-directional EF.
3I0
Stage1
0 I
Figure 2.7-1 Characteristic of non-directional EF1
2.7.2 IDMT and DT characteristices

(i) DT characteristic
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the
level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in section (iv).
(ii) IDMT characteristic

The operate time in the IDMT characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the fault
current. The user can choose the operate time from a preset curve. Ten characteristic curves
are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard
characteristic curves and one original (user programmable) characteristic curve for which the
user can set the equation parameters. The IDMT curve equation and parameters will be
explained in section (iii).
The reset time of the IDMT is user selectable; either inverse-time-reset or definite-time-
reset is selected. For the inverse-time-rest, the user can choose the reset time for the preset
characteristic from six characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five pre-installed
characteristic curves and one user original characteristic carver where the user can set the
equation parameters. The inverse-time-reset curve equation and parameters will be discussed
in section (v).
(iii) Operate time of IDMT

The dependent time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (2.7-1). (ref IEC 60255-151):

- 128 -
CU
BU
k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (2.7-1)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are defined in Table 2.7-2. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each EF stage. Figure 2.7-2 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switches [EF1-Timer]. (That is, “IEC-NI” is for IEC Normal
Inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK
Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse,
“IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8” for
US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT operation, the user can also program the characteristic using time-
multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, the IEC characteristic is
selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [EF1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the
default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [EF1-TMS-UK],
[EF1-TMS-IEEE], [EF1-TMS-US] and [EF1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.7-2 Constants for IDMT
Curve type
Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151)
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694

- 129 -
CU
BU
Figure 2.7-2 IDMT Characteristics curves
(iv) Operate time of DT

The operate time in the DT is a constant.
Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [EF1-Timer]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
Instantaneous activation
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEF1], but the
instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)” is programmed to be
injected at the PLC connection point “EF1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time for IDMT

Programming the reset time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard, US standard
and original (user-programmable) inverse-time-reset characteristic†. In the IEEE standard,
for example, the user can set DEP for the scheme switch [EF1-Rtimer]. The following equation

- 130 -
CU
BU
defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
𝑡(I) = 𝑅𝑇𝑀𝑆 × [ β
] (2.7-2)
I
1 − ( ⁄I )
s
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
Is = threshold setting (amperes),
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
β = constants defining curve.
For setting RTMS for the IEEE standard, the user can use setting [EF1-RTMS-IEEE]
(incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings [EF1-RTMS-US] and [EF1-RTMS-
ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original, respectively (For more information
w.r.t the values for the kr and β, see Table 2.7-3; Figure 2.7-3 shows the characteristic curves).
Table 2.7-3 Constants for inverse-time-reset characteristics
Curve Type kr
Curve Description β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI‡) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI‡) N/A N/A
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI‡) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI‡) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2
†Note: To select the inverse-time-reset characteristic, set [EF1-Rtimer]=DEP. Conversely

set [EF1-Rtimer]=DEF to select definite-time-reset characteristic,.
Note: For the setting [EF1-Rtimer]=DEP (inverse-time-reset), the integrated value will
be reduced in accordance to the magnitude of an energized current, when the
energized current is smaller than the setting [EF1]. The reducing degree will be
determined with the reset curve characteristics defined in the standards.
Note: For the setting [EF1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value shall
be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [EF1], when the
small energized current is continued for timer setting [TEF1R]. The integrated
value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small for the
setting [TEF1R]. DEF is allowed to set in the IEEE, US, and ORG. DEF is set
unconditionally in the IEC and UK.

- 131 -
CU
BU
Figure 2.7-3 Inverse-time-reset characteristics curves
Figure 2.7-4 illustrates that an integrating value will be influenced dependent on the
DEP or DEF setting. An energized quantity (I), where I is greater than a threshold setting
[EF1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the
energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [EF1], the element operation will return
to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (2.7-2).
Time 
Energizing current
Energizing current
cleared by tripping
Pickup threshold in relay [EF1] threshold
Measuring quantity 0A
Inverse-time-reset characteristic
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEP
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration will be deceased depending on the

[EF1-RTMS-*] reset characteristics.
Definite-time-reset characteristic
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEF
Integrator
Trip signal
Reset time
Integration will be kept in timer [TEF1R].
The integration will start again when the energizing current The integration will be reset when the energizing current
becomes larger than [EF1] within [TEF1R]. does not become larger than [EF1] in [TEF1R].
Figure 2.7-4 Inverse-time-reset characteristics

- 132 -
CU
BU
(vi) Reset time of DT

In the DT characteristic, the reset time is designed to be instant.
(vii) Summary of EF operation

Table 2.7-4 shows a summary for EF operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in
IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†).
Table 2.7-4 Type and standard board in the EF (A tick represents a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI UK-LTI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8 Original
DT 
✓
Scheme switch [EF1-Timer]
IEC-NI
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[EF1-Rtimer]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓

- 133 -
CU
BU
2.7.3 Threshold value

The value of threshold current at which the EF (IEF) element will pick-up is configured by a
setting; the setting [EF1] is provided for both the IDMT and the DT characteristic. Note that
the settings of the threshold levels are allowed to have distinct values in the respective EF
elements. A rating current for the input is defined either 1A or 5A; the input rating is defined
on a VCT. (For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description (BU):
Transformer module for AC analogue input).
2.7.4 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for pick-up to reset is applied using a setting; for example,
in BU1, the ratio for the EF1 element is set using the setting [EF1-DPR]. Each BU can have
reset settings.
2.7.5 Miscellaneous functions

(i) Signal of EF trip
When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm for the
scheme switch [EF1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [EF1-UseFor] for the normal
trip operation.
(ii) EF operation accompanying FS signal

Scheme switch [EFTP-FS] enables or disenables fail-safe operation, which is furnished
separately in the bus-bar protection (see section 2.3).

- 134 -
CU
BU
2.7.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic for the non-directional EF1 function is illustrated in Figure 2.7-5. The EF1
signal is generated when the pickup current exceeds the setting threshold, subsequently trip
signals are issued to the trip circuit (TRC), which is discussed separately.
8000011C23 TEF1
8000011B23
EF1 t 0 EF1-OPT
EF1-TRIP
& & ≧1 &
0.00-300.00s
EF1-UseFor Trip
&
8000011C27
≧1 &
EF1 PU
& &
8000011BB0 EF1_BLOCK 1 EF1_ACT

&
EF1-TP.EN On
8000011BB1 EF1_INST_OP
DT
EF1-Type IEC-NI, IEC-VI,・・・
Figure 2.7-5 Scheme logic for EF1

- 135 -
CU
BU
2.7.7 EF settings
(i) CU
(ii) BU
Setting of DBP_EF_BU(Function ID: 459A01)
Range Default
EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection scheme switch Off
EF2-EN Off / On - EF2 protection scheme switch Off
EFTP-FS Off / On - Fail safe for EF trip enable Off
EF1 DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI /
IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
EF1-Timer IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI / - EF1 delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
DT 0.02 - 0.10 -
EF1 A EF1 threshold (in DT mode) 0.30 1.50
50.00 250.00
EF1-DPR 10 - 100 % EF1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
IEC 0.02 - 0.10 -
EF1 A EF1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.30 1.50
5.00 25.00
EF1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000
TEF1R 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 definite time reset delay 0.00
UK 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000
IEEE 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF1-TMS-
0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000
IEEE
EF1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type of IEEE DEF
EF1-RTMS- EF1 dependent reset time multiplier of IEEE
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
US 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000
EF4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type DEF
EF1 dependent reset time multiplier of US
EF1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
ORG 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000
EF1-RTMS- EF1 dependent reset time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
ORG Original inverse curve

- 136 -
CU
BU

Range Default
EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
Output EF1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - EF1 used for trip or alarm Trip
EF2 DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI /
IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
EF2-Timer IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI / - EF2 delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
DT 0.02 - 0.10 -
EF2 A EF2 threshold (in DT mode) 0.30 1.50
50.00 250.00
TEF2 0.00 - 300.00 s EF2 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
IEC 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - EF2 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000
UK 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - EF2 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000
IEEE 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF2-TMS-
0.010 - 50.000 - EF2 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000
IEEE
EF2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF2 reset delay type of IEEE DEF
EF2-RTMS- EF2 dependent reset time multiplier of IEEE
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
US 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - EF2 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000
EF2 dependent reset time multiplier of US
EF2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
ORG 0.02 - 0.10 -
5.00 25.00
EF2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - EF2 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000
EF2-RTMS- EF2 dependent reset time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
ORG Original inverse curve
EF2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000

- 137 -
CU
BU

Range Default
EF2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF2 user original curve coefficient 0.00000
Output EF2-UseFor Trip / Alarm - EF2 used for trip or alarm Trip

- 138 -
CU
BU
2.7.8 EF signals (Data ID)

(i) BU
DBP_EF_BU (Function ID: 459A01)
8000011C23 EF1 EF1 relay element operated
8000011B23 EF1-OPT EF1 protection operated
8100021C23 EF2 EF2 relay element operated
8100021B23 EF2-OPT EF2 protection operated

DBP_EF_BU(Function ID: 459A01)
800001EBB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
800001EBB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command
810002EBB0 EF2_BLOCK EF2 protection block command
810002EBB1 EF2_INST_OP EF2 protection instant operation command

- 139 -
CU
––––––––Protection common (PROT_COMM)
BU
Protection common (PROT_COMM)

The Protection common function (PROT_COMM) is used to supervise the integrity of the CB
and DS contacts. This function also examines the bus-bar bridging and dead line condition.
Note: To supervise and monitor the CB and DS auxiliary switch contacts using
PROT_COMM, several signals are issued from the “Replica-evaluation” logic,
which is furnished in the Replica evaluation function. (For more information, see
Replica setting procedure for Decentralized Busbar protection IED (6F2S1902))
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)

- 140 -
CU
BU
2.8.1 CB contact supervision

Table 2.8-2 shows the relationship between the main-contact and the auxiliary-contact in the
CB. Generally, when the CB main-contact is “Open”, N/O and N/C contacts of the auxiliary-
contact are represented as “Open” and “Closed”, respectively. However, if both N/O and N/C
are represented as “Open”, the status information for the CB is incorrect. (Likewise, if both are
represented as “Closed”, the status information is incorrect.) The function outputs the signal
“CB_FAIL†” if the evaluation of the CB position is represented as “Undefined” when it is
determined by the “CB, DS position-evaluation” function in the BU.
Table 2.8-2 Main-contact and Auxiliary-contact in CB and their state

Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contact Output signal
CB Position Evaluation
(N/O Contact) (N/C Contact) from the
(Main-Contact)
supervision
Open Closed Open N/A
Closed Open Closed N/A
Open Open Undefined CB_FAIL
Closed Closed Undefined CB_FAIL
Set On using the scheme switch [CB-SV] when contact supervision is required. Enter the
timer supervision setting TCBSV. The supervision period must be set between 0 to 100 seconds.
8F00001B6B
TCBSV
CB_UDEFINED t 0 CB_FAIL
From Replica & 0-100s
CB-SV On
evaluation
in BU
Figure 2.8-1 Monitoring logic for CB contact in BU
†Note:Do not confuse signal “CB_FAIL” with the circuit breaker failure protection (CBF),
which is discussed separately.

- 141 -
CU
BU
2.8.2 DS contact supervision

The PROT_COMMON can examine the behavior and state of the DS. The signal configuration
and settings of the DS are similar to that of the CB. Set On using the scheme switch [DS-SV]
when contact supervision is required. The supervision period must be set between 0 to 100
seconds for the setting [TDSSV].
TDSSV 8000001B60
DS11_UNDEFINED t 0 DS11_FAIL
&
From Replica 8100001B61
evaluation in BU DS12_UNDEFINED t 0 DS12_FAIL
&
8200001B62
DS13_UNDEFINED & t 0 DS13_FAIL
8300001B63
DS14_UNDEFINED & t 0 DS14_FAIL
DS21_UNDEFINED 8400001B64
& t 0 DS21_FAIL
& t 0 DS22_FAIL
&
t 0 DS23_FAIL
& t 0 DS24_FAIL
& t 0 DS31_FAIL
& t 0 DS41_FAIL
DS-SV On 0-100s
8E00001B6A
≥1
DS_FAIL
Figure 2.8-2 Monitoring logic for DS contact in BU
2.8.3 Busbar-bridge monitoring

The PROT_COMMON can examine the behaviour and state of the Busbar-bridge. Set On using
the scheme switch [BRIDGE-SV] when the supervision of a Busbar-bridge condition is required.
The supervision period is set between 0 to 100 seconds using setting [TBRDG].
TBRDG 8000001B6D
From Replica judgment LOCAL-BRIDGE t 0 BRIDGE_ALARM
in BU
BRIDGE-SV On & 0-100s
Figure 2.8-3 Monitoring logic for Busbar-bridge in BU

- 142 -
CU
BU
2.8.4 Dead line detection

The purpose of dead line detection (DLD) is to determine whether or not the line is out-of-
service. If the line CB is open, then a dead line is detected after a set time delay and this is
used in the end fault protection.
8000001B6E
From Replica evaluation TDLD
in BU CB_CLOSE t 0 DEAD_LINE_DETECT
1
0-100s
Figure 2.8-4 Detection logic for dead line in BU

- 143 -
CU
BU
2.8.5 PROT_COMM settings

(i) CU
(ii) BU
Setting of DBP_PROTCOM_BU (Function ID: 48DA01)
DS-SV Off / On - DS contact super visor Off

TDSSV 0 - 100 1 DS contact super visor time 60
CB-SV Off / On - CB contact supervisor Off
TCBSV 0 - 100 1 CB contact supervisor time 10
BRIDGE-SV Off / On - Busbar bridge condition supervisor Off
TBRDG 0 - 100 1 Busbar bridge monitoring time 60
TDLD 0.00 - 300.00 s Dead line detection timer 10.00

- 144 -
CU
BU
2.8.6 PROT_COMM signals (Data ID)

(i) BU
DBP_PROTCOM_BU (Function ID: 48DA01)
8000001B6D BRIDGE_ALARM Bridge condition is being established for the time set with [TBRDG].
8F00001B6B CB_FAIL CB contact fail
8000001B6E DEAD_LINE_DETECT Dead line detection
8000001B60 DS11_FAIL DS11 contact fail
8E00001B6A DS_FAIL DS contact fail

- 145 -
CU
––––––––Trip circuit (TRC)
BU
Trip circuit (TRC)

The Trip function (TRC) is used to generate the trip signal upon receiving the trip commands
from each protection function. The selection of either single-phase trip or three-phase trip is
possible with TRC.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)

- 146 -
CU
BU
2.9.1 Operation mode and scheme logic

TRC has scheme switches1 [TP1-MODE] and [TP2-MODE] to determine the trip mode; hence,
the user can select either single-phase trip mode (1-Phase) or three-phase trip mode (3-Phase)
or per-phase trip mode (Per-Phase) using these switches. Table 2.9-2 illustrates the results for
TRC operation when a trip command2 is provided by the protection functions.
Table 2.9-2 Result of TRC operation when TRC receives trip commands
Scheme switch [TP1-MODE] and [TP2-MODE]
Phase
“1-PHASE” mode “3-PHASE” mode “PER-PHASE” mode
A Tripping phase-A Tripping phase-A
B Tripping phase-B Tripping phase-B
C Tripping phase-C Tripping phase-C
Trip
A&B Tripping three- Tripping phase-A and phase-B
commands
B&C phase Tripping phase-B and phase-C
provided
C&A Tripping three-phase Tripping phase-C and phase-A
A&B&
Tripping three-phase
C
1Note: “2 out of 3 logic” is used to select the phases to be tripped. As shown in Figure
2.9-1, TRC has two “2 out of 3 logic”; the respective modes will be selected when
the user sets scheme switches [TP1-MODE] and [TP2-MODE]. However, scheme
switch [TP2-MODE] is only available because no signal is connected with “2 out of
3 logic (#1)”.
2Note: This operation mode holds true when a trip command per-phase is provided by the
protection function. Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) can provide per-phase
trip commands; so the mode selection is applicable. A function, such as current
differential protection (DIF) and others, can only provide a three-phase trip
command; hence, the mode selections are not available in functions other than
CBF.
Figure 2.9-1 shows the TRC logic; the trip commands, which are provided by each
protection function, generate the trip signals using binary output circuits (BO). The BOs are
discussed in Chapter Technical description (BU): Binary IO module.

- 147 -
CU
BU
8000101B64
≥1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP1-A
2 out of 3 8100101B65
(No signal is connected) ≥1 #1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP1-B
8200101B66
≥1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP1-C
8300101B67
DIF-OPT.TRIP ≥1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP1
EFP-OPT.TRIP
COM-OPT.TRIP
OC-OPT.TRIP
EF-OPT.TRIP
8000201B64
CBF-RE.TRIP-A ≥1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP2-A
2 out of 3
8100201B65
CBF-RE.TRIP-B ≥1 #2 ≥1
GEN.TRIP2-B
CBF-RE.TRIP-C 8200201B66
≥1 ≥1
GEN.TRIP2-C
CBF-ZONE.TRIP 8300201B67
(CBF-OPT-TRIP) ≥1 GEN.TRIP2
8000001B60
DIF-TR.TRIP ≥1
CBF-TR.TRIP ≥1 GEN.TRIP-A
8000001B61
COM-TR.TRIP
≥1 GEN.TRIP-B
EFR-TR.TRIP
8000001B62
≥1
DIF-OPT-AR ≥1 GEN.TRIP-C
EFP-OPT -AR
OC-OPT -AR
≥1 8000001B63
CBF-OPT -AR
GEN.TRIP
CBF-RE.OPT-AR
8600001B64
DIF-OPT -BR ≥1
EFP-OPT -BR GEN.TR.TRIP
OC-OPT -BR
CBF-OPT -BR 8000001B66
CBF-RE.OPT -BR
OPT.PHASE-A
8000001B67
DIF-OPT -CR ≥1 OPT.PHASE-B
EFP-OPT -CR 8000001B68
OC-OPT -CR OPT.PHASE-C
CBF-OPT -CR
CBF-RE.OPT -CR
Figure 2.9-1 Trip circuit logic in BU

Figure 2.9-2 shows “2 out of 3 logic” for #1 and #2. The User can select the phases to be tripped
when scheme switch [TP*-MODE] is set.
≥1 ≥1
≥1 ≥1
≥1 ≥1
& ≥1 & & ≥1 &

& &
& &
≥1
Per-Phase & ≥1
Per-Phase &
1-Phase 1-Phase
TP1-MODE TP2-MODE
3-Phase 3-Phase
≥1 ≥1
810010EBB4 TP1-MODE_3PH 810020EBB4 TP2-MODE_3PH
(a) 2 out of 3 logic (#1) (b) 2 out of 3 logic (#2)
Figure 2.9-2 Detailed logic for “2 out of 3” for #1 and #2

- 148 -
CU
BU
2.9.2 TRC settings

(i) CU
(ii) BU
Setting of DBP_TRC_BU (Function ID: 4A2A01)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
TP1-MODE 1-Phase / 3-Phase / Per-Phase - Trip mode selection for Trip-1 Per-Phase
TP2-MODE 1-Phase / 3-Phase / Per-Phase - Trip mode selection for Trip-2 Per-Phase

- 149 -
CU
BU
2.9.3 TRC signals (Data ID)

(i) BU
DBP_TRC_BU (Function ID: 4A2A01)
8600001B64 GEN.TR.TRIP General transfer trip
8300001B63 GEN.TRIP General trip
8000001B60 GEN.TRIP-A General trip (Phase-A)
8100001B61 GEN.TRIP-B General trip (Phase-B)
8200001B62 GEN.TRIP-C General trip (Phase-C)
8300101B67 GEN.TRIP1 General trip
8000101B64 GEN.TRIP1-A General trip (Phase-A)
8100101B65 GEN.TRIP1-B General trip (Phase-B)
8200101B66 GEN.TRIP1-C General trip (Phase-C)
8300201B67 GEN.TRIP2 General trip

8000201B64 GEN.TRIP2-A General trip (Phase-A)
8100201B65 GEN.TRIP2-B General trip (Phase-B)
8200201B66 GEN.TRIP2-C General trip (Phase-C)
8300101B63 OPT-TRIP1 operation (trip)
8000101B60 OPT-TRIP1-A operation (phase-A)
8100101B61 OPT-TRIP1-B operation (phase-B)
8200101B62 OPT-TRIP1-C operation (phase-C)
8300201B63 OPT-TRIP2 operation (trip)
8000201B60 OPT-TRIP2-A operation (phase-A)
8100201B61 OPT-TRIP2-B operation (phase-B)
8200201B62 OPT-TRIP2-C operation (phase-C)
8800001BB1 OPT.P-A_ADD Additional operated phase-A command
8900001BB2 OPT.P-B_ADD Additional operated phase-B command
8A00001BB3 OPT.P-C_ADD Additional operated phase-C command
8000001B66 OPT.PHASE-A Operating phase-A
8100001B67 OPT.PHASE-B Operating phase-B
8200001B68 OPT.PHASE-C Operating phase-C
8000101BB4 TP1MODE_3PH 3-phases trip1 permissive command
8100201BB4 TP2MODE_3PH 3-phases trip2 permissive command
8600001BB0 TR.TRIP_ADD Additional transfer trip command
8000101BB0 TRIP1-A_ADD Additional A-phase trip command
8100101BB1 TRIP1-B_ADD Additional B-phase trip command
8200101BB2 TRIP1-C_ADD Additional C-phase trip command
8300101BB3 TRIP1_ADD Additional trip command
8000201BB0 TRIP2-A_ADD Additional A-phase trip command
8100201BB1 TRIP2-B_ADD Additional B-phase trip command
8200201BB2 TRIP2-C_ADD Additional C-phase trip command
8300201BB3 TRIP2_ADD Additional trip command

- 150 -
CU
BU

DBP_TRC_BU (Function ID: 4A2A01)
880000EBB1 OPT.P-A_ADD Additional operated phase-A command
890000EBB2 OPT.P-B_ADD Additional operated phase-B command
8A0000EBB3 OPT.P-C_ADD Additional operated phase-C command
800010EBB4 TP1MODE_3PH Permissive command for Trip1 in Three-phases
810020EBB4 TP2MODE_3PH Permissive command for Trip2 in Three-phases
860000EBB0 TR.TRIP_ADD Additional transfer trip command
800010EBB0 TRIP1-A_ADD Additional A-phase trip command
810010EBB1 TRIP1-B_ADD Additional B-phase trip command
820010EBB2 TRIP1-C_ADD Additional C-phase trip command
830010EBB3 TRIP1_ADD Additional trip command
800020EBB0 TRIP2-A_ADD Additional A-phase trip command
810020EBB1 TRIP2-B_ADD Additional B-phase trip command
820020EBB2 TRIP2-C_ADD Additional C-phase trip command
830020EBB3 TRIP2_ADD Additional trip command

- 151 -
CU
––––––––BU out of service (BUOUT)
BU
BU out of service (BUOUT)

BU out of service function is provided, so that replacement of BUs is possible if there are BU
failures in busbar protection system. That BUs can be excluded from the protection system,
when the user performs ‘settings of test switch’ in the CU and BUs and creates ‘PLC logic for
the exclusion’ in the BUs, as shown in Table 2.10-1.
Table 2.10-1 BUOUT settings and PLC logics required in CU and BUs
Units Test settings on LCD screen menus Creations of PLC logics
Settings [BU1/2/~64_Exclusion] = On
CU (Not required to create a logic)
where maintenances are required at BUs.
Creating PLC logic is required so that
Settting [BU_Exclusion] = ON where a
BUs the BU is excluded from the
maintenance is required in the BU.
protection system.
Figure 2.10-1 illustrates the BUOUT schemes with step1 to step3, after the settings and PLC
logics for the exclusions are done in the CU and BUs.
BU1 CU
A command that
BU1 is excluded. Current information at BU1
○
3
○
1
8001001110 8000001B61
Exclusion activated t 0 Success of
4F4A01 800000EBB0 BU__EXCLUSION
≥1 F/F ≧1 exclusion of BU1
BI1
1s
BU-Exclusion Inactivated t 0
IO_SLOT1 (200B01) On 1
≧1
○
2 1s
Other binary signals in BU1
BU1-Exclusion On
Other Binary Signals
8000001BB0
BU excluded
Figure 2.10-1 BUOUT schemes in CU and BUs

Step○
1 (in the CU):
 The CU does not receive current information from the BUs that are excluded.
Step○
2 (in the excluded BU):
 Binary signals from the CU are not received, except the signal ‘BU1-EXCLUSION’.
 Binary signals of the BU are not sent, except its own exclusion signal
‘BU_EXCLUSION’.
Step○
3 (between CU and excluded BUs):
 The signals are not communicated between the CU and excluded BUs, but errors or
alarms do not appear.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
hardware and the configuration of functions. Check the order number for the “G&T position”
whilst referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
31(CU) 32(BU) 32(CU) 34(BU)

- 152 -
CU
BU
2.10.1 BUOUT settings

(i) CU
Setting of DBP_BUOUT_CU (Function ID: 4F4001)
BU1_Exclusion Off / On - To exclude BU1 Off

BU2_Exclusion To exclude BU2
BU3_Exclusion To exclude BU3
…. ….
BU64_Exclusion Off / On To exclude BU64 Off
(ii) BU
Setting of TEST (Function ID: 201301)
BU_Exclusion Off / On - To exclude self BU Off

- 153 -
CU
BU
2.10.2 BUOUT signals (Data ID)

(i) CU
DBP_BUOUT_CU (Function ID: 4F4001)
8000001B60 BU1-EXCLUSION Status : BU1 is excluded
8000001B6A BU11-EXCLUSION Status : BU11 is excluded
8000001B6B BU12-EXCLUSION Status : BU12 is excluded
8000001B6C BU13-EXCLUSION Status : BU13 is excluded
8000001B6D BU14-EXCLUSION Status : BU14 is excluded
8000001B6E BU15-EXCLUSION Status : BU15 is excluded
8000001B6F BU16-EXCLUSION Status : BU16 is excluded

- 154 -
CU
BU

DBP_BUOUT_CU (Function ID: 4F4001)
(ii) BU
DBP_BUOUT_BU (Function ID: 4F4A01)
8000001B60 BUOUT_ACT Command to CU : not to exclude self BU
8100001B61 BUOUT_INACT Command to CU : to exclude self BU
8000001B62 BUOUT_CONDITION Status : Self BU is excluded
8000001BB0 BU_EXCLUSION To exclude self BU

DBP_BUOUT_BU (Function ID: 4F4A01)
800000EBB0 BU_EXCLUSION To exclude self BU

- 155 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
3 General control function

Contents Pages Reference contents Pages
Common controls (CMNCTRL) 166 →Single position control (SPOS) 251
Control hierarchy 163 →Switch control (CU: SOFTSW) 302
Control level and control point 164 →Switch control (BU: SOFTSW) 302
Control scheme 157 →Operation time reset (OPTM) 335
Counter function for the general (GCNT) 192 →Total time measurement (TOTALTIM) 349
Direct-operation mode (DIR) 161 →Interlock with software (ILK) 361
Double command blocking (DCB) 166 →Double position control (DPOS) 378
LED reset function (LEDR) 180 →Three position control (TPOS) 444
Local control 177 →Event detection using BIs (GENBI) 523
Mode control function (MDCTRL) 212 →Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) 532
Select-before-operation mode (SBO) 160 →User interface (CU) 667
Programmable logic control (PLC) 177 →User interface (BU) 773
Remote control 177
Reference chapters:
→Engineering tool 779
→Control application (CU) 220
→Control and monitoring application (BU) 250
→Technical description (CU) 545
→Technical description (BU) 725

- 156 -
CU
Chapter 3.1: General control function
––––––––Control scheme
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Control scheme
Figure 3.1-1 shows the control overview for the control function; there are two control stages:
“Wait for a command” and “Receiving commands”. The function will wait for a command from
the server in the first stage. During the receiving stage, the function will respond to “Select”,
“Cancel”, and “Operate” commands. Specific logic is provided for each command for each
receiving stage. A decision is required from each logic block to move to the next step (i.e., ‘Failed’
or ‘Success’). When a ‘success’ decision is determined in the operate logic, the respective
command is issued to the relevant device; the device commences with its operation (for example,
a 43-switch is changed to “ON” from “OFF”). The waiting and receiving stages loop around at
the receipt of every command.
Wait for a command
Waiting stage
Selection stage Failed
Receiving “select command” Select logic Wait for next command

Success
Failed (Do nothing)
Receiving “cancel command” Cancel logic

Success Cancel of “Select command”
Failed
Receiving “operate command” Operate logic Operation completed

Success
Figure 3.1-1 Stages in control function
The type of control can be categorized in accordance with its origin, (Remote/Local/PLC)
and modes (SBO/DIR). That is, the respective control scheme should respond to the respective
origin and mode. The user should be aware of the context of the control action, “On (or Closing)
control” and “Off (or Open) control” in relationship to its origin and mode†.
†Note:The user can find “On control” and “Off control” in SPOS and other functions. For
more information, see chapter Control application (CU) or chapter Control and
monitoring application (BU).

- 157 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) Command reception in SBO mode

In the SBO receiving stage shown in Figure 3.1-1 we can find three processes: select, cancel,
and operate command flows.
Reception of “select command”

Figure 3.1-2 shows a schematic process flow diagram when receiving a “select command”
following the “Wait for a command”. The receipt “select command” is divided into “select
command ‘On’ (Closing)” and “select command ‘Off ’ (Open)”. The select command is carried out
based on its origin: “Remote”, “Local”, and “PLC”. If the “select command” is successful, the
process will wait for the receipt of the next command.
Wait for a command
Receiving “Select command”

Failed
When On is issued Select logic F/S Waiting for a next
Success
from the remote-end “Remote-On-control” “operate command”
or
“cancel command”
When Off is issued Select logic
from the remote-end “Remote-OFF-control”
When On is issued Select logic

from the local-end “Local-On-control”
When Off is issued Select logic

from the local-end “Local-OFF-control”
When On is issued by Select logic

the PLC function “PLC-On-control”
When Off is issued by Select logic

the PLC function “PLC-OFF-control”
Figure 3.1-2 Schemes for “Select command”
Reception of “cancel command”

If the “select command” proceeds successfully following the receiving stage, the function can
subsequently receive a “cancel command”. Figure 3.1-3 shows the reception of a “cancel
command”. If the “cancel command” is successful, the “select command” is discarded and the
function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage (i.e., the initial stage). In other words, the
function waits for a new “select command” so that the other control functions can receive a
command.

- 158 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Wait for a command
Receiving “Cancel command”

Success Discarding of Return to “Wait
Cancel logic F/S
When Cancel is issued “select command” for a command”
from the remote-end “Remote-cancel”
Failed
When Cancel is issued Cancel logic Do nothing
from the local-end “Local-cancel”
Figure 3.1-3 Scheme “Cancel command”
Reception of “operate command”

Following successful completion of the “select command”, the control function is ready to
receive an “operate command” in order to control a device. The receipt of “operate command”
is divided into “Operate command ‘On’ (Closing)” and “Control command ‘Off ’ (Open)”; each of
the two commands is carried out based upon its origin i.e. “Remote”, “Local”, and “PLC”. If the
“operate command” is completed, the “select command” can be released; then a new “Wait for
a command” stage can commence for receipt of a new “select command”.
Wait for a command Failed
Receiving “Select command” Receiving “Operate command”

Failed
Return to “Wait
Release of
F/S for a command”
Select logic Operate logic Success “select command”
“Remote-On-control” “Remote-On-control”
Select logic Operate logic

“Remote-OFF-control “Remote-OFF-control
” ”
“Local-On-control” “Local-On-control”

“Local-OFF-control” “Local-OFF-control”

“PLC-On-control” “PLC-On-control”

“PLC-OFF-control” “PLC-OFF-control”
Figure 3.1-4 Scheme “Operate command”
(ii) Command reception in DIR mode

In DIR mode, issuing an “operate command” is possible without the reception of the “select
command”. Thus, the reception of an “operation command” only features in the control scheme†.
We shall see the DIR mode later.
†Note:We can encompass the operation of the “select command” being performed
internally in the control scheme. Thus, the user is not required to take account of
the reception of the “select command”.

- 159 -
CU
––––––––Control mode
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Control mode
Either Select-Before-operation (SBO) or Direct-Operate-control (DIR) is provided as a control
mode for the device. The user can select the preferred control mode.
3.2.1 Select-before-operation mode (SBO)

The user should be aware that in the SBO mode a signal is returned from the target device in
the form of a response signal, (answer). When the target device sends a response to the IED
after receiving a command, the server (and the IED) can send another command to the target
device if the criterion of the response (answer) is satisfied. A safe SBO operation (SBOns) is
normally utilized; however, the user can opt to select an enhanced-security SBO operation
(SBOes), if additional safety is deemed necessary.
(i) SBO with enhanced security (SBOes)

In the SBOes, an operation process (Oper) commences after the completion of a selection
process (SBOw). Figure 3.2-1 exemplifies the exchange of commands and responses; the server
receives a response (answer#1) from the IED with regard to a SBOw command. Then, provided
that the response, (answer#1) received from the IED is satisfied, the server can send an Oper
request to the IED to control the device. If the target device completes the operation
successfully, the server will receive an operation result. Figure 3.2-1 shows the communication
flow between the server (remote-end) and the IED, note that the user will also see the same
process flow when using the IED-front-panel key-operations. That is, the IED-front-panel
(local-end) takes the place of the server (remote-end).
Server IE D
Process (SAS) (Control function) Target device
SBOw
Selection Command
Answer#1 R esponse
Oper. Command
Operation
Answer#2 R esponse
Device status changed

Operation result Command
R esult termination
Figure 3.2-1 SBO with enhanced security
(ii) SBO with normal security (SBOns)

Figure 3.2-2 shows normal SBOns control. The difference between the SBOes and the SBOns
is that the IED does not send an operation result in response to the request Oper.

- 160 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Process Server IE D
(SAS) (Control function) Target device
Selection SBOw
Command
Answer Response
Oper.
Operation
Command
Answer
Response
Figure 3.2-2 SBO with normal security
3.2.2 Direct-operation mode (DIR)

In the DIR mode, a target device is controlled without the reception of the select command. An
enhanced security mode (DOes) is also provided when the user wishes to control a device with
additional security rather than the normal level of security experienced with mode (DOns) .
(i) DIR with enhanced security (DOes)

Figure 3.2-3 illustrates the server sending the Oper request to the IED; the server receives a
response, (answer#1) from the IED. The result is notified when the operation of the target
device is complete. The result includes status information; it informs whether the target device
has operated normally or not. Note that the control start of the target device is initiated
regardless of the state of the target device.
Process SAS IE D
(Server) (Control function) Target device
Oper.
Operation Command
Answer#1 R esponse
Device status changed
Answer#2 Command
termination
R esult
Figure 3.2-3 Direct control with enhanced security
(ii) DIR with normal security (DOns)

A response (answer#2) from the target device is not sent to the SAS in DOns, as shown in
Figure 3.2-4.

- 161 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
SAS IE D
Process
(Server) Control function Target device
Operation
Control
Command
Answer#1
Response
Figure 3.2-4 Direct control with normal security

- 162 -
CU
––––––––Control hierarchy
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Control hierarchy
It is important that the user understand the meaning of the terms ‘control-right’ and ‘control-
hierarchy’ in connection with the functioning of general control functions in the sub-station
automation system (SAS) and the sub-station control and monitoring system (SCMS). Figure
3.3-1 depicts control-hierarchies about CU and each BU. The hierarchies are structured on
three control-levels (Network, Station, and Bay), selector-switches ( L | R key on the IED front
panel), and three control-points (RCC, OWS/EWS, and 43BCU). A control command is
permitted so that the other commands generated at other point/levels are not allowed in the
system. On this account, no collision of control-points exists within the control system.
Control-point in RCC
Network level
Control-point in OWS/EWS
Communication
EWS OWS
Selector switch
(43R) RCC EWS/OWS
Station level
Control-point at CU Control-point at BU1

Control-point at BU2
Control-point at BU64
Selector switch (43BCU‡ ) Remote (R) Local (L)

L Operation
Remote (R) Local (L)
R KEY
Bay level
Control-right for CU Control-right for BUs
Control levels Selector switches Control points and positions of selector switches
Figure 3.3-1 Control hierarchy and selector switches

‡Note: The user can use L|R key for 43BCU switch. L|R key has been
programmed by manufacture before shipment, but the user can program it.
§Note: The user shall construct the control hierarchy using PLC programing, the
feature of which can be found in Chapter PLC function.

- 163 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.3.1 Control level and control point

As shown in Figure 3.3-1, the control hierarchy is distributed across three levels; the network
level having a remote-control center (RCC); the station level having operator and engineering
work stations (OWS/EWS); and the bay level† having an IED equipped with an LCD screen.
One of the three control-points (RCC, OWS/EWS, and LCD) is available to issue a control-
command.
†Note:We, hereafter, discuss only the operations at the bay level; that is, we focus only
on operations made from the bay level. The scope of this discussion does not
include operations from either the remote control center or the network levels.
3.3.2 Selector switches and bay operations

At the bay level, the 43BCU switch opens a path to permit the flow of the control-right.
(i) LCD operation

When the user sets the 43BCU switch to “Local (L)”, the issuing of a control-command from
the LCD is possible for the device.
(ii) RCC, EWS, or OWS operation

Alternatively, suppose that the position “Remote (R)” is selected at the 43BCU switch. In this
case, the issuing of the control-command from the LCD is not possible.
3.3.3 Programming of control-right distributions

Figure 3.3-2 illustrates that the PLC function provides the means to distribute the control-
right for the control functions.
The part ○
1 and ○
2 logics are programmed so that, the control-right signal can be
distributed to the respective control applications. With regard to the SPOS01 function, PLC
connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28” has been programmed using DOUT_BOOL feature (for
example). Therefore, the control-right signal is transferred to the select and operate-condition
logic‡ when the user connects the control-hierarchy with the SPOS01 function using
“SPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
‡Note:The select-condition and operate-condition logic are used to decide upon the
execution of a select command or an operate command in the SPOS01 function.
For more detail about SPOS, see Chapter Control and monitoring application
(BU): Selecting or Operating logics. The user can find similar logics in DPOS and
TPOS functions. The user shall the above connection for the operation.

- 164 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
○
1 Checking the bay level ○
3 Distribution of the control-rights
SPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT for Control & Monitoring
RemoteLocalKey_43BCU
From LOCMT DOUT_BOOL application
DIN_UNIT UNIT_TO_BOOL FID ST
LRSW01_LR_ST FID DO
DTYPE
(530001 3109001001) DTYPE ST
DID
DID
DI
To SPOS01
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
SPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL
Operate
FID ST
condition logic
DTYPE
○
2 Distribution of the control-right DID
DI
LEDR_CTRL_RIGHT
for General control To SPOS02
DOUT_BOOL 510001 820102ED50 SPOS02IN_TMP_28 Select
FID ST
condition logic
DTYPE
DID Operate
condition logic
DI
To LEDR
DPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT Select DOUT_BOOL
condition logic FID ST
DTYPE
Operate
condition logic DID
GCNT_CTRL_RIGHT
DI
DOUT_BOOL To DPOS01
FID ST
DTYPE 512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28 Select
DID condition logic
DI DPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT Operate
To GCNT DOUT_BOOL condition logic
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT01IN_TMP_51 FID ST
Select
DTYPE
condition logic
DID
Operate
DI
condition logic To DPOS02
512001 820302ED50 DPOS02IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
Operate
condition logic
TPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL
FID ST
DTYPE
DID
DI
To TPOS02
513001 810401ED50 TPOS02IN_TMP_21 Select
condition logic
TPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT Operate
DOUT_BOOL condition logic
FID ST
DTYPE
DID
DI
To TPOS02
513001 810402ED50 TPOS02IN_TMP_21 Select
condition logic
Operate
condition logic
To other control functions
Figure 3.3-2 Control-right programmed

- 165 -
CU
––––––––Common controls (CMNCTRL)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Common controls (CMNCTRL)

The CMNCTRL function consists of two parts. The former part (CMNCTRL1) is used to
prevent double-commands, which are forbidden, by the use of select-states for the respective
control functions. The latter part (CMNCTRL2) is served as a mediator to provide a bridge
between functions.
3.4.1 Double command blocking (DCB)

For control functions, the operating principle is that priority is given to the first command
received and shall be executed first. In other words, successive commands received do not have
the right to run until the first command received has failed to complete its operation (that is,
the principle of double command blocking (DCB) is established). The principle is significant for
protection and control devices in the sub-station†. Figure 3.4-1 illustrates how each control
function generates a SLD_RPT signal; the aggregation of SLD_RPT signals is performed in the
CMNCTRL1 function. The resultant signal is output at PLC connection point “DCB SND OR”.
The resultant signal is returned to the respective control function as feedback.

- 166 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“From 61850 CMNCTRL1 function

communication 510001 0001011001 DCB RCV OR
“stVal” message 2
SPOS function
SPOS01 function
To 61850
Reception of “DCB”
communication
Output of “StSeld” SPOS01_STD_RPT DCB SND OR “stVal” message 1
SPOS02 function SPOS02_STD_RPT To control functions

(510001 0008001F42) in its own
SPOS03 function SPOS03_STD_RPT
SPOS20 function
SPOS20_STD_RPT
DPOS function
≥1
Reception of “DCB”
Output of “StSeld” DPOS01_STD_RPT
DPOS01 function
DPOS72 function
DPOS72_STD_RPT
TPOS function
SOFTSW function
Figure 3.4-1 DCB operation in CMNCTRL1 function at IED

†Note:Let us assume that CB is controlled by IED-1 at BU1 (see Figure 3.4-2). IED-2
and others (BU2 to BU10) are not allowed to close/open their CBs until IED-1 has
completed the CB operation at BU1. Closing/opening CBs at IED-2–IED-10 are
also forbidden when Automatic sequence controlling function (ASEQ) is running
at IED-1. We will discuss ASEQ function, which is described in Chapter Control
and monitoring application (BU).
In Figure 3.4-1, the CMNCTRL1 function generates a message denoted with the number
1; Figure 3.4-2 exemplifies that the IED-1 generates the “stVal” message 1. In addition, IEDs-
2 to -10 are also required to receive message 1, this is denoted with the number 2. For
IEC61850 communication, the “stVal” messages 1 and 2 are carried by GOOSE publish and
GOOSE subscribe. Thus, for all IEDs (i.e., IED-1 to IED-10 of Figure 3.4-2), it is required to
set the GOOSE publish destination corresponding to the message.

- 167 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Ring LAN network constructed for the SAS

stVal message
1 2 2 2
IED-1 IED-2 IED-3 IED-10
CB at BU1 CB at BU2 CB at BU3 CB at BU10
Figure 3.4-2 Sending and reception of stVal message
Figure 3.4-3 demonstrates how the GOOSE publish destination is set with regard to the
DCB message. The user is required to set the destination for each respective IED by selecting
the signal “DCB SND OR”, corresponding to the GOOSE publish, this must be performed at
the respective screens in GR-TIEMS†. That is, the user should select the “stVal” item for each
IED. After setting, the user should write the setting date for each respective IED.
○
1 Selected IED
○2 Required settings in
the respective IEDs.
Figure 3.4-3 Example of DCB setting for IED-1 using GR-TIEMS

†Note:For more operation information on GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
3.4.2 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal

The control and monitoring functions are mutually interconnected within the IED; hence,
cascading features are provided to transfer information between them so that the user does
not need to check the interconnections. Approximately 1500 signals are included to facilitate
the internal connection of the control and monitoring functions; their signals are distributed
into BIT, UNIT, BOOLEAN types, which are listed later. Figure 3.4-4 exemplifies the
“PLC_BIT_0201” signal, which may be used for recording events and other purposes.

- 168 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
CMNCTRL2
function
PLC_O_BIT_0201 For
・Event record function
5A0101 800200EF40 PLC_BIT_0201 (5A0101 8002001F40)
・Communication (required mapping)
Information ・LEDs
cascaded§ ・IED screen display
・Binary output module
etc…
Figure 3.4-4 Cascading information using signal “PLC_BIT_0201”
3.4.3 Provision of selected status

Let us assume that a select-command is sent for an IED to control a target-device by the
substation automation system (SAS†), but the target-device is not ready to be controlled. The
unready condition might be due to the target-device already being in operation (e.g., CB
tripping) or a failure of the device may have occurred; thus, the IED has to drop the select-
command. If this occurs, the IED is required to send a message stating the reason to the SAS†.
Table 3.4-1 lists the messages generated in the CMNCTRL1 function describing the failure.
Table 3.4-1 Reason messages due to the release of the select-command
Signal Number Signal Name Description
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
5A0001 2008001008 SCS_ORCAT
5A0001 2208001001 SCS_ADDCAUSE Reason codes for the SAS†
5A0001 6A08001009 SCS_ORIDENT
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
†Note:The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for
operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba.
3.4.4 Miscellaneous settings

The CMNCTRL1 function has the following five common settings:
1. Control direction: The [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of the SPOS,
DPOS and TPOS functions. If required these functions can be in the
same control direction, set On for the scheme switch [SDCEN].
2. Return value: When the number of the counter reaches its maximum value (in case
of the default setting, 999,999), it can return and begin
incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set with
[CNTRV].
3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made, but the control operation
of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined time
limit, the selection is canceled. The time limit can be set using
[TSC]; the range is between 30 and 300sec. having a 1sec. step.
4. Time out: When the selection of the target device and its control execution is
made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting

- 169 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from
the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300sec. in 1
sec. steps.
5. Counter limit: The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and
2,147,483,647 using [CNTVALMAX]. The default setting is 999,999.
6. Quality signal: If “q” or “Quality” information shall not be taken for controlling, set
On for setting [QBLK]. The QBLK clears the content of quality
information, so that control operation can be achieved with the
absence of quality information.

- 170 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.4.5 Settings
CMNCTRL (FunctionID:5A0001)
SDCEN Off / On - Setting of the control to the same direction Off

CNTRV 0-1 - Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX] level 0
TSC 30 - 300 - Selection cancel time-out timer 30
EXEWAIT 30 - 300 - Waiting execute operation time-out timer 30
CNTVALMAX 9 - 2147483647 - Upper limit level of the counter 999999
QBLK Off / On - Behavior of quality for DCB Off
TRV-BLK Off / On - To block non-selectable behavior on TRAVELLING Off

- 171 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.4.6 Signals (DataID)

 PLC connection points
CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001)
800800EDE1 ADD_DCB_SND Additional condition for double command blocking
800800EFB7 LAN_CONN_FAIL_IN
800800EF40 PLC_I_001 PLC event information 1
… …. …
800800EFA2 PLC_I_099 PLC event information 99
800800EFA3 PLC_I_100 PLC event information 100
800800EFB8 TIME_SYN_FAIL_IN
800800EDE0 TRAVELLING_PLC travelling signal for PLC
 PLC monitoring point

0008001F45 AUTO SEL LOCK OR SEL Lock OR for AUTOSEQ
0008001F43 CNT CTRL OR CNT CTRL OR for Event Message
0008001F41 DCB RCV OR DCB RCV OR for SEL Lock
0008001F42 DCB SND OR DCB SND OR for GOOSE
8008001FB7 LAN_CONN_FAIL
0008001F44 OPE_TIME RST OR Operation Time RST OR for Event Message
0008001F46 RELAYTRIP EXTENSION Relay Trip signal
2208001001 SCS_ADDCAUSE Self-cancellation signal(AddCause)
8008001FB8 TIME_SYN_FAIL
0008001F40 TRAVELING OR Traveling OR for SEL Lock
0008001F50 PLC_O_001 PLC event output 1
… …. …
0008001FB2 PLC_O_099 PLC event output 99

- 172 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

0008001FB3 PLC_O_100 PLC event output 100

CMNCTRL 2(Function ID: 5A0101)
320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal1
320001EF43 CHK_ROMRAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal2
320002EF43 CHK_SUM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal3
320003EF43 CHK_PROGRAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal4
320004EF43 CHK_RAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal5
320005EF43 CHK_ECC_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal6
320006EF43 CHK_SAMPLING_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal7
320007EF43 CHK_ACC1_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal8
320010EF43 CHK_GOOSERCV_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal11
320011EF43 CHK_PING1_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal12
320012EF43 CHK_PING2_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal13
320013EF43 CHK_CMLV_DAT_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal14
800000EF40 PLC_BIT_0001 PLC event bit information 1
…. …. ….
000000EF42 PLC_BOOL_1 PLC event bool information 1

- 173 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

320014EF43 PLC_UINT32_15 PLC event uint32 information 15
310000EF41 PLC_UINT_1 PLC event unit information 1
310015EF41 PLC_UINT_16 PLC event uint32 information 16

0000001F42 PLC_O_BOOL_1 PLC event bool output 1

- 174 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

8000001F40 PLC_O_BIT_001 PLC event bit output 1
…. …. ….

- 175 -
CU
––––––––Local, remote and PLC control
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Local, remote and PLC control

The user can select either local or remote control by pressing the L│R key on the front
panel of the IED. Selection is executed within the LOCRMT function. Control logic is provided
by default, but the user can customize each application using the PLC function and PLC
connection points. Generally, the LOCRMT function is applied within all IEDs. Figure 3.5-1
shows the LOCRMT logic. Note that the LOCRMT function changes for the remote control
unconditionally if the operation/function keys on the front panel are not touched within 35
minutes in the local control.
From KEYINPUT function
LOCRMT function (Function ID: 530001) LRSW01_LR_ST
L/R CHG (530001 3109001001)
Remote to local S
(240001 31000A1735)
LRSW01_CH_LR_LCD & 1≥
R
Local to remote
&
1≥
If the user does not touch the
operation/function keys on the front panel &
within 35 min. in the local control, the IED
will be changed for the remote control
unconditionally.
530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01

Disable default logic
530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02
Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
Figure 3.5-1 LOCRMT logic

- 176 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.5.1 Local control

Local control refers to control operation from the front panel of the IED. Either the DIR or the
SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user.
3.5.2 Remote control

Remote control refers to control operation from a remote control center or the SAS server.
Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the
user. Note that the parameters used in the control commands are defined in international
standards†. The parameter details are provided in the communication profiles. See Chapter
Communication protocol or Appendices.
†Note:As a rule, the control commands have parameters. For example, the “Off to On”
and “On to Off” control directions that are used in commands are pre-configured
as parameters in the communication protocol. Note that the parameters vary
depending upon the respective protocol used, such as IEC61850 and others. For
IEC61850, Table 3.5-1 shows the parameters defined: the rule for control direction
can be found in “ctlVal”, the command publisher is recognized using the parameter
“origin”. For more information about the parameters, see Appendix IEC61850
MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS.
Table 3.5-1 Defined command parameters in IEC61850-7-2

Parameter Types Descriptions
ctlVal Control direction (On or Off)
origin Indicates the command publisher
ctlNum Sequential Number
T Time that the command is sent
Test Test information (Test/On)
Check Interlock synchronizing
3.5.3 Programmable logic control (PLC)

PLC function should be used in order that user can have preferred control schemes. The user
can find several connection points to control applications in the functions. Automatic sequence
control (ASEQ) function is required in order that the user-preferred control scheme will start,
as shown in Figure 3.5-2.

- 177 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
ASEQ User’s PLC SPOS User’s PLC DPOS

logic logic
PLC monitoring point PLC connection point
Figure 3.5-2 Example of user-preferred control scheme using PLC user logic
Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in
the DIR mode.
3.5.4 Signal for Local/Remote control

Note: The following references are used in the column “M/O” in Table 3.5-2 and Table
3.5-3:
“O” means the signal is optional.
“M” means the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user
may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” means that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 3.5-2 PLC connection point (Input point for LOCRMT)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
240001 31000A1735 L/R CHG [L/R] key “push” N/A
530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 Disable condition by PLC O
530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 User configurable condition by PLC O
Table 3.5-3 Mapping points for LOCRMT

530001 3009011008 LRSW01_LR_ORCAT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A
530001 6A09011009 LRSW01_LR_ORIDENT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A
Table 3.5-4 PLC monitoring point (LOCRMT)

530001 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST Local(T) / Remote(F) status (single bit expression)
530001 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT Local(0x40) / Remote(0x80) status (double bit expression)

- 178 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.5.5 Signals (DataID for CU and BU)

 Signal monitoring points
LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST S43BCU state
 Connection points in PLC logic

LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 PLC signal 1(PLC use)
800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 PLC signal 2(change mode LOCAL or REMOTE)

- 179 -
CU
––––––––LED reset function (LEDR)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
LED reset function (LEDR)

A number of LEDs are lined on the IED front panel. For example, “TRIP” LED is lit when a
tripping command is issued for the CB. “TRIP” LED is being illuminated until the user can
confirm the tripped CB; hence, the user can reliably determine that tripping CB has been
initiated by inspection. The following operations are possible to resetting the LED by the LED
reset (LEDR) function, which is furnished in the IED:
1 Pushing “CLEAR” key1
2 Operation by GR-TIEMS2
3 Operation by the SAS
1Note: For the operation, see Chapter Technical description (CU or BU): User interface:
Outline. Note that pressing “CLEAR” key causes the Reset of the LEDs.
2Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
3.6.1 Selecting logic for resetting LEDs

The user should set scheme switch [LEDDR1] to On prior to the LEDR operation. Figure 3.6-1
shows selection logic in the LEDR function.
Wait for a command
Wait for a next command

Select logic
Cancel logic
Resetting LED by remote-SAS Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Signal reception Select
Selection logic Signal output
IEC61850 decision Success
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.6-1 Outline of selection command for resetting LEDs
(i) Input signal required mapping

Figure 3.6-2 shows the select logic when a “Select command (reset)” signal is applied to the
LEDR function. The logic has an input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception;
the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850 communication. The function will fail to operate
if mapping is not performed correctly. We will discuss how to map the input points for the
IEC61850 communication in section 3.6.5.

- 180 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Selection logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001)

LEDR01_FSE_RCV
Command “Reset”
For SBO operation (528001 8007011F42)
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Selection
command & 1≥
&
For DIR operation
Operation
command &
LEDR01_NSD_CSF
To “Wait for a next command”
(528001 8307011F41)
0 t
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operation 528001 0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) 0.2s
In DIR operate
Select condition‡
0 t
Failed
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE))
0.3s
Figure 3.6-2 Selection logic for resetting LEDs

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 3.6-8.
*Note:The LEDR function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a
“ctlmodel” signal when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The LEDR function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“LEDR01_NSD_CSF”, when the LEDR function determines that the input signal “Select
command (reset)” is true. If the LEDR function determines that the “LEDR01_NSD_CSF” is
not true, the LEDR function returns to the “Wait for a next command” stage.
(iii) Select condition

Figure 3.6-3 shows the select condition logic in the LEDR function.
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE)) To selection logic

1≥ & Select condition
Other devices traveling detected*1

Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *2

Users must setup this condition correctly
Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point) *3
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 3.6-3 Select condition logic in LEDR

*1Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is

- 181 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.6-1.

*2Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
*3Note: The user needs to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic
using the connection point “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”. For more information, see
section 3.3. In Table 3.6-2, signal “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT” is provided.
Table 3.6-1 Input signals for condition logic

5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
Table 3.6-2 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic)
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LED Reset control hierarchy M
Table 3.6-3 Setting of LEDR
Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
LEDDR1_EN Activate LED reset control On Off / On
3.6.2 Canceling logic (SBO mode)

In the SBO mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are
satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation
returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 3.6-4 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
Cancel by the remote-end

Success
Command Reset from the Signal reception in Cancel

Cancel logic Do nothing
remote-end IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.6-4 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
(ii) Input signal required mapping

Figure 3.6-6 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is

- 182 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same the
same as that for the signal as shown in Figure 3.6-2.
Input Cancel logic in LEDR Output

Command “Cancel”
Cancel command
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
&
Unmatched condition To “Wait for a command”

detected† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 3.6-5 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end

†Note:The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.

- 183 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.6.3 Operating logic (SBO/DIR mode)

Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic is applied to reset LEDs.
Resetting LEDs is executed when the operate conditions are satisfied.
Wait for a command
LED resetting by the remote-end

LED resetting from the Success
Operation
remote-end Signal reception in Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
LED resetting by the local-end

Success
Operation
Pushing “CLEAR” key Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 3.6-6 Outline of operation command for resetting LEDs

†Note: For more information, see Chapter Technical description (CU or BU): User
interface.
(i) Mapping required Input signal

Figure 3.6-7 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operation command (reset)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the “Operation command (reset)” signal. Pressing “CLEAR” key or the operation
on GR-TIEMS will reset LEDs.
Input Select logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001) To LED3–LED26†

Command “Operating reset”
Operation
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ 528001 3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
command & ≥
Operate condition‡
From KEYINPUT
240001 31000E1730
LEDR_KEY_CLEAR
CLEAR
From TOOL_COM (GR-TIMES) 1≥

201501 3101001001
LEDR_TOOL_CLEAR
LED_RESET_TOOL
Figure 3.6-7 Operation logic for resetting LEDs
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The operation logic issues a “LED_RST_COM” signal to clear the LEDs†. The signal
“LED_RST_COM” is also transferred to the remote-end, when signal mapping is executed in

- 184 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
IEC61850 communication. (See section 3.6.5)
†Note:Although the “LED_RST_COM” signal is connected previously with several LEDs,

by the manufacturer, user can reconnect the signal with the LEDs. See section
3.6.4 for how to connect.
(iii) Operate condition

Figure 3.6-8 shows the operate condition logic of the LEDR function, which is used to determine
a reset-condition for the operation.
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE)) To operate logic

1≥ & Operate condition


528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 3.6-8 Operate condition logic in LEDR

*1Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.6-1.
*2Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
*3Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user must connect that to the select condition logic using the connection point
“LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”, as shown in Table 3.6-2. For more information, see
section 3.3.
3.6.4 Settings in LED logics

The user can program the status and the signal of the LED, so that the LEDs are possible to
switch off upon occurrence of the reset. As shown in the logic relating to the LED†, each logic
has a timer and a setting; accordingly, setting Latch should be set for the operation of the
LEDR function. Additionally, the user should connect the signal LED_RST_CMD with the LED
logic.
†Note:For more information on LED logics, see Chapter Technical description (CU or
BU): Human machine interface: LED indicators.

- 185 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) Settings using GR-TIEMS

Figure 3.6-9 shows how to connect the reset signal LED_RST_CMD for the LED-03 logic. The
user can assign a reset signal for the respective LED logics by the drag and drop operation.
The user should also select Latch for the behavior from the pull-down menu.
Set [Behavior] to Latch

Choose the signal
LED_RST_CMD for the
LED-03 logic
Figure 3.6-9 Settings for LED-03 circuit provided by “Setting I/O menu” of GR-TIEMS
(ii) Settings using IED screen

The user is able to set the LED on the LCD screen. See chapter Technical description (CU or
BU): User interface: I/O setting sub-menu.

- 186 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.6.5 Signal mapping for IEC61850 communication

The user can operate the LEDR function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the LEDR function is designed for “LEDRs” in the IEC 61850
standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed
below:
Step1: Editing Logical Node
Step2: Mapping output data
Step3: Mapping input data
(i) Editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the LEDR function. Figure 3.6-10
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “logical node zero (LLN0)” is chosen for the LERD
function. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode should be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 3.6-10 Defining “LEDRs” object in LLN0 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.6-11 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as “LLN0”. In the SBO mode, the user
should select the following items in the “LLN0$LEDRs” using GR-TIEMS:

- 187 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Figure 3.6-11 LN editing for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 3.6-12 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as LLN0. In the DIR mode, the following
three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 3.6-12 LN editing for DIR mode (for example)
(ii) Mapping output data

The user should group the LEDR signals with regard to GOOSE and Report; the user should
map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 3.6-13 illustrates how to
map a signal for IEC61850 communication; it indicates that the signals for the LEDR function

- 188 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
are required to be mapped for IEC 61850 communication

Table 3.6-4 Mapping signals for SPC object
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orCat orCategory ST 5280013107011008 LEDR01_ORCAT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5280016A07011009 LEDR01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stVal BOOLEAN ST 5280013107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5280010007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Figure 3.6-13 orCat attribute mapped for LEDRs object of LLN0
(iii) Mapping input data

The LEDR function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
3.6-5 shows the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs”; the user should map the input-point to the Object references having
attributes CO and CF†. Figure 3.6-14 shows how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).

- 189 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 3.6-5 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check CO 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Figure 3.6-14 Input-point mapped for LLN0

- 190 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.6.6 LEDR settings

TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001)
Default setting
value
LEDDR1-EN Off / On - LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off
3.6.7 LEDR signals (DatID)

8007011D53 LEDR01_SC Select command
0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD The controllable data is in the status selected (StSeld)
3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD LEDR reset command output
8007011D57 LEDR01_EC Execute command
8007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS Execute command by OWS(HMI)
8007011D56 LEDR01_EC_RCC Execute command by RCC
8007011D51 LEDR01_SC_OWS Select command by OWS(HMI)
8007011D52 LEDR01_SC_RCC Select command by RCC
8E07011F47 LEDR01_SLD_TM0 Signal after MCTLEDR_SC001
8607011F46 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC001
8307011F41 LEDR01_NSD_CSF Signal after KC_LEDR_SA001
8607011F45 LEDR01_TMP3 Signal after KC_LEDR_SC001
8007011F42 LEDR01_FSE_RCV Signal before LC_LEDR_SA002
8B07011F44 LEDR01_CTR_SGU Signal before KC_LEDR_SC001
8207011F40 LEDR01_TMP1 Signal before KC_LEDR_SA001
8707011F48 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC002
8F07011F49 LEDR01_EX_CMP_TM0 Signal after MCTLEDR_SC002
8607011F43 LEDR01_TMP2 Signal after KC_LEDR_SA002

820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LEDR01 control right from PLC
 Mapping point
7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Dev01 control request

- 191 -
CU
––––––––Counter function for the general (GCNT)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Counter function for the general (GCNT)

When a signal is generated externally and the signal is received by generic counter function
(GCNT), the GCNT function can count their signal transitions. Figure 3.7-1 shows signals are
generated repeatedly. For example, if the number of generated signals should be reported, the
GCNT function counts the number of the signal transitions; the function can report them. A
binary input-circuit (BI) is used to receive the signal, when a device (external object) reports
its state.
Closed/Open signals
GCNT01_ CNT_ VAL
Inputs 320E 011D20
Changes in device status
(e.g., operations of 43S) BI 540001 800E 01E DE 0 GCNT01_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT01
Operations at the local or Control commands GCNT06_ CNT_ VAL

remote-end 320E 061D20
540001 800E 06E DE 0 GCNT06_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT06
(e.g., issuing commands)
Changes in a function Status signals GCNT32_ CNT_ VAL

status 320E 201D20
(e.g., function operations)
540001 800E 20E DE 0 GCNT32_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT32
Count objects Signals generated GCNT functions
Figure 3.7-1 Reception of signals at GCNT functions
Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the
acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are
provided in the GCNT functions. Thirty-two independent GCNT counters are available. That
is, counters GCNT01 to GCNT32 can operate simultaneously. The values counted are stored
in the non-volatile memory so that they are not erased if the power supply to the IED is
interrupted.
For simplicity, only the GCNT01 function is discussed; the features in the remaining GCNT02–
GCNT32 functions are identical to the GCNT01 function.
3.7.1 Counter setting for signal

(i) GCNT: setting for count timing
In the GCNT01 function count timing is grouped into three, as shown in Figure 3.7-2 (a, b, and
c). When the user wishes to count the On(Closed), set On for the scheme switch [GCNT01-
CNTS]; conversely, set Off for the scheme switch when the Off(Open) is to be counted.
Additionally, OnOff is provided for counting the number of pulses. If the GCNT01 function is
not required, set NA for the scheme switch.

- 192 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
a. On (Closed) signals
“On” is counted on the rising edge of the pulse
Counter 1 2 … n …
b. Off (Open) signals
“Off” is counted on the falling edge of the pulse
c. OnOff (Closed-Open) signals
“OnOff” is counted in response to pulses.
Figure 3.7-2 Count types
(ii) GCNT: setting the maximum value

The GCNT01 function is able to count to 2147483647 (=231−1). When the count-value reaches
the value “2147483647”, the count-value returns to an initial-value. If the user wishes to set a
different maximum number in place of “2147483647”, the user can use the setting [GCNT01-
CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum number
from 9 to 2147483647.
(iii) GCNT: setting the initial-value

The counter returns to an initial-value when the counter reaches the maximum value;
generally, the initial-value is set to either zero or one (0 or 1); hence, the number is re-counted
from either “0 (or 1)” following the maximum value. If the user wishes to set an alternative
initial number, setting [GCNT01-CNTRV] can be used. Note that the user can select the initial-
value from zero (0) to 999999.
Counter
Max set by [GCNT01-CNTMAX]
Initial-value set by [GCNT01-CNTRV]

0
Time
Figure 3.7-3 Maximum-value and initial-value

- 193 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) GCNT: setting for the report (Dead band)

The counter-value can be reported to the remote-end; the user can set the report-timing using
the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. For example, if the counter-value is to be reported for every change,
the user should set 0 for the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. When five(5) is set for the [GCNT01-SDB],
reporting is performed when the counter has incremented by six(6) following the previously
reported counter-value.
Counter Counter Counter
10 10 10
5 5 5
0 Time 0 Time 0 Time
Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting Reporting
a. 0 set for [GCNT01-SDB] b. 1 set for [GCNT01-SDB] c. 5 set for [GCNT01-SDB]
Figure 3.7-4 Counter value and report timing

- 194 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.7.1 Selecting logic (SBO/DIR modes)

The user should set scheme switch [GCNT01-EN] to On prior to counting.
(i) GCNT: “Select command Reset” received from remote-end

Figure 3.7-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage Wait for a next command
Select command Reset from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Signal Cancel command

Select
reception Select logic Signal output
decision Success
IEC61850
Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.7-5 Outline of Select command ‘Reset’
Input point required mapping

Figure 3.7-6 shows the select logic when a “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”
signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The logic has an input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”
for the reception of the select command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850
communication. The function will fail to operate if mapping is not performed correctly. We will
discuss how to map the input-points for IEC61850 communication in section 3.7.4.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Complete” signal at the output point
“GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”, when the GCNT01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Reset-Control” is true. If the GCNT01 function determines that the “Remote-Reset-
Control” is not true, the GCNTS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 195 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Select logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 54001)

Command “Remote-Reset-Control”
For SBO operation
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation command”
To BO connection
Operate command
& “GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”
(540001 8A0E011E76)
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” 0 t

In SBO operate Complete
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*)
0.2s
In DIR operate
To “Wait for a command”
“GCNT01_SLF_CSCN”
Select condition‡ (540001 8B0E011E7B)
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress 0 t
Select “Failed”
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
0.3s
Figure 3.7-6 Select ‘Reset’ in GCNT01††

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition logic. For more
§Note:Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for
automatic control. The GCNT01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when
it is in operation. For more information about ASEQ, see Chapter Control and
monitoring application (BU).
*Note:The GNCT01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode” using
a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using IEC61850.
To use this signal, the user should map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other GCNT02–GCNT32 logics, see
Table 3.7-1 for the inputs and Table 3.7-4 for the outputs.

- 196 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) GCNT: selecting condition

Figure 3.7-8 shows the select condition logic in the GCNT01 function. The GCNT01 function
checks the condition for the select command using the signal “S4301_STATE” and other signals.
When resetting the counter is performed from the “Statics sub-menu” in the HMI operation†,
the user should set On for scheme switch [GCNT01-HMI].
†Note: The user can see the HMI operation in Chapter Technical description: User
interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
From SOTFSW*1 GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001)

Command blocking*1(S4301 defines ”Blocked”)
S4301_STATE To select logic
Double Command Blocking detected*2
DCB RCV OR

Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
From Control hierarchy *5
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51

&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 3.7-7 Select condition logic for Reset in GCNT01

1Note: “Command blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “command
blocking” is initiated by the status of “S4301” in a software switch controller
function (SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as
“CmdBlk”. For more information about the SOFTSW “S4301”, see Chapter Control
and monitoring application. It is denoted as “S4301_STATE” in Table 3.7-2.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used to
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB
operating signal is denoted as “DCB RCB OR” in Table 3.7-2.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any
device for the duration that the event is detected. The detected signal is denoted
as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.7-2.
4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
5Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
using the connection pint “GCNT00IN_TMP_51” (see Table 3.7-3). For more
information, see section 3.3.

- 197 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) GCNT: selection signal names and numbers

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for
each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for optional use.
“M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are
used.
“N/A” indicates that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 3.7-1 Mapping points for the reception of control command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data) M
… … …
Table 3.7-2 Input signals to condition logic

522001 000A011001 S4301_STATE Command Blocking status ( Off / Blocked) N/A
523001 000D001F40 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Automatic sequence control is in progress. N/A
5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking(DCB) is in progress. N/A
Table 3.7-3 PLC Connection point (Input signals from the control hierarchy logic)
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 Control hierarchy for GCNT01–32 M
Table 3.7-4 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “select complete/ failed” for BIO)
540001 8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 Selection completed (Mapping)
… … …
5400018B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select failed
…. … …
Table 3.7-5 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “stSeld” for BIO)

540001 000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS

- 198 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
(iv) GCNT: selection setting names
Table 3.7-6 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT32

GCNTxx-EN Activation of the GCNTxx function On Off / On
GCNTxx- Counter is used for the HMI operation in the GCNTxx function Off Off / On
HMI

- 199 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied; accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the
operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) GCNT: “Cancel” received from remote-end

remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logics Wait for a next command
Cancel from the remote-end

Select command Success
Reset from the
Signal reception Cancel
remote-end Cancel logic Do nothing
in IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is the same as that
for the signal “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”, when the GCNT01 function has determined that the signal “Remote-
cancel” is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued if the function is able to determine
that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.
Input Cancel logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) To “Wait for a command”

Command “Remote-cancel”
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”
Cancel command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ (540001 840E011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Unmatched condition detected *1 &
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 3.7-9 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in GCNT01

1Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in

- 200 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
(ii) GCNT: cancel signal names and numbers

Table 3.7-7 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ logic)
540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
… … …

- 201 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.7.3 Operating logic (SBO/DIR modes)

After the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to clear the counters.
(i) GCNT: “Operate command Reset” received from remote-end

Figure 3.7-10 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
Signal reception Operate logic Signal output
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 3.7-10 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
Mapping required for Input point

Figure 3.7-11 illustrates the operation logic when an “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-
Control)” signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function, in Figure 3.7-11, can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”,
when the GCNT01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Reset-Control” is true.
Input Operate logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) “GCNT01_EC_OK_CSC”

Command “Remote-Reset-Control” (540001 820E011E84)
Operate Cmd.
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
& 1≥
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Statics-counter
Figure 3.7-11 Operate ‘On’ from the remote-end ††

§Note:The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the GCNT02–32 logics, see Table
3.7-1 for the mapping points, Table 3.7-8 for the outputs.
(ii) GCNT: “Operate command Reset” received from local-end

Figure 3.7-12 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the local-end.

- 202 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 3.7-12 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
New counter value

Figure 3.7-13 shows that the user can set a new value for the counter using the statics sub-
menu†. The new value is applied into “Statics counter” point in Figure 3.7-11.
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
0
0
Figure 3.7-13 Counter menu in the statics sub-menu

†Note: See Chapter Technical description: User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”, when the new
value applied from the sub-menu is appropriate.

- 203 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) GCNT: selecting condition

Similar to the select condition (see sec.3.7.1(ii)), the GCNT01 function has an operate-condition
logic. Figure 3.7-14 shows the operate-condition logic.
From SOTFSW*1 GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001)
Command blocking*1(S4301 defines ”Blocked”)
S4301_STATE To operate logic
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51

&
From CMNCTRL
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 3.7-14 Operate condition logic for GCNT01

1–5Note: The signals and settings in Figure 3.7-14 are same as the signals shown in
Figure 3.7-7.
(iv) CCNT: selection signal names and numbers

Table 3.7-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for BIO)
540001 820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
…. …. ….

- 204 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user can operate the GCNT function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the GCNT function is designed for the class of “Integer Status
Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
steps, each of which is discussed below:
(i) GCNT: editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the GCNT01 function. Figure 3.7-15
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Integer Status controller (ISCSO)” is chosen for the
GCNT01 function. After the user has defined an object “ISCSO”, the GCNT01 logical node can
be saved with the name “GIGO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object “ISCSO”
in the GGIO logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing
for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 3.7-15 Defining “ISCSO” object in GIGO3302 logic node

- 205 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.7-16 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as “GIGO3302”; in the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GIGO3302$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Figure 3.7-16 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 3.7-17 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as save as “GIGO3302”; in the DIR
mode, the following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS.
 Oper
 Origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 3.7-17 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)

- 206 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) GCNT: mapping output data

The user should group the GCNT01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS (Figure 3.7-18 illustrates
how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the GCNT01 function are required to
map the IEC 61850 communications.
Table 3.7-9 Mapping signals required for GIGO3302 object in GCNT01 function
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 540001300e011D23 GCNT01_CNT_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5400016A0e011FA7 GCNT01_CNT_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 540001320e011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 540001000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Drag and drop
Figure 3.7-18 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO object of GIGO3302
(iii) GCNT: mapping input data

The GCNT01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”. Table 3.7-10 shows the input-point
“GCNT01_CMM_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GIGO3302$ISCSO1”; the user should map
the input-point to the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC†. Figure 3.7-19 shows
how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” in the
functional constraint (FC).

- 207 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 3.7-10 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 3.7-19 Input-point mapped for GIGO3302

- 208 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.7.5 GCNT settings

GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
Default setting
Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
G_CNT CNT1 GCNT01-EN Off / On Counter1 Enable Off
GCNT01-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter1 Sending Dead

GCNT01-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
Return value at counter roll
GCNT01-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT01-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT01-HMI Off/On Counter1 for HMI Off
CNT2 GCNT02-EN Off / On Counter2 Enable Off
GCNT02-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter2 Sending Dead

GCNT02-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
GCNT02-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT02-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT02-HMI Off/On Counter2 for HMI Off
…… ………………….. ………………….. ………………….. …………………..
CNTxx GCNTxx-EN Off / On Counter xx Enable Off
GCNTxx-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter xx Sending Dead

GCNTxx-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
GCNTxx-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNTxx-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNTxx-HMI Off/On Counter xx for HMI Off
Note: The number of counters in the GCNT depends on IED model. We omit the setting
tables of GCNT03 etc. because the setting items are the same except the device
number.

- 209 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.7.6 GCNT signals (DataID)

 Connection points in PLC logics in GCNT01
800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 GCNT00IN_TMP_51
800E01EDE0 GCNT01_PLC_SGNL GCNT01 plc signal
 Signal monitoring points in GCNT01

000E001F41 GCNT00_CCTRL_COUNTER GCNT00 cmnctrl counter correction summarize
800E001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD
800E001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC
800E001D60 GCNT00_CH_EC_RMT GCNT00 count change execute command by Remote
800E001D54 GCNT00_CH_SC_LCD GCNT00 count change select command by LCD
800E001D5B GCNT00_CH_SC_OWS GCNT00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5C GCNT00_CH_SC_RCC GCNT00 count change select command by RCC
800E001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RMT GCNT00 count change select command by Remote
840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
310E011D21 GCNT01_CNT_QLT GCNT01 count quality
320E011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL GCNT01 count value
000E011F42 GCNT01_CORR_INS GCNT01 correction instruction
890E011EA2 GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN GCNT01 control logic stage(under selection)
830E011E8B GCNT01_EC_F_CSCN GCNT01 execute command fail condition signal
820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 selected condition signal
8B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select fail condition signal
000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
 Mapping point in GCNT01

700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data)
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the GCNT function. We
have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN” point
for the 2nd device, use the description of “GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” in place

- 210 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
of “GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN”. The user can obtain the ID value of

“GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN (i.e.,
“890E011EA2”)
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “890E021EA2” of
“GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN”) The ID is expressed in
hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must change the
device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal
notation.

- 211 -
CU
––––––––Mode control function (MDCTRL)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Mode control function (MDCTRL)

For the user, mode control (MDCTRL) function can provide test function (TEST-FB) interface,
which is a command to change the mode in the function. MDCTRL function consists of two
parts: (1) On-mode or Test-mode sensing in IED and (2) interface between IED and SAS.
3.8.1 Function
(i) Mode sensor
MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED. To use
this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to
operation. During the operation, a select signal and an operate signal are provided for the
TEST-FB when the SAS provides a test command for the IED; hence, the MDCTRL function
comes with two time-out timers. Setting [MDCTRL-SELRST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling a select command; setting [MDCTRL-EXERST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling an operate command.
(ii) Interface for IEC61850

MDCTRL function can fulfil the two operation modes (On and Test) specified in the IEC 61850
communication, as shown in Table 3.8-1; it can carry a signal to change the TEST-FB; the
signal is generated in the select and control logics in the MDCTRL function. The change signal
is initiated by the mode change command that is received at the communication interface. Note
that control operations from SAS is only taken account.
Table 3.8-1 Values of mode and behavior in IEC 61850

Value Mode Definition in IEC 61850
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
1 On
services work and get updated values.
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
services work and get updated values. Data objects will be transmitted
with quality “test”. Control commands with quality test will be
3 Test
accepted only by LNs in “test” or “test-blocked” mode. “Processed as
valid” means that the application should react in the manner what is
foreseen for “test”.
(iii) Input signal from control hierarchy

Note PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition” is required to operate the MDCTRL function; the
user should notice that the connection with the Control hierarchy is made using the connection
point “MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28” (see Table 3.8-2). For more information, see section 3.3.
Table 3.8-2 PLC connection point (Input signal for select condition logic)
550001 821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL control hierarchy condition M

- 212 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.8.2 Mapping for IEC61850 communication

The user can operate the MDCTRL function over the IEC61850 communication after the
mapping using GR-TIEMS. The user should follow steps,
(i) MDCTRL: editing Logical Node

The user should make a logical node (LN) for the MDCTRL function. Figure 3.8-1exemplifies
LN editing; the LN “LLNO” is chosen for the MDCTRL01 for IEC61850 communication. After
the user defining an object “MOD”, the MDCTRL01 logical node can be saved with the name
“LLNO”. Make a definition of the object “MOD” in MDCTRL01 logical node. Either the SBO
mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing.
Figure 3.8-1 Defining “MOD” object in LLNO logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.8-2 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the SBO mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“LLNO$MOD” using the GR-TIEMS;

- 213 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )

Defining DIR mode
Figure 3.8-3 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the DIR mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using the
GR-TIEMS:
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
(ii) MCTRL: mapping output data

The user should group the MDCTRL01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for the IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 3.8-3 shows the required mapping signals in MDCTRL01 function to the IEC 61850
communications. Figure below shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.

- 214 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 3.8-3 Mapping signals for MOD object.

System/LLN0$Mod$origin orCat orCategory ST 5500013013011000 MDCTRL01_ORCAT
System/LLN0$Mod$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5500016A13011009 MDCTRL01_ORIDENT
System/LLN0$Mod stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5500010013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 3.8-4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO
(iii) MDCTRL: mapping input data

The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 3.8-4 shows the input-
point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “System/LLN0$Mod$”; the user
should map the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC to the input-point. Note that
the user should map the input-point to all attributes having CO and CF. Figure below shows

- 215 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 3.8-4 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Check Check CO 5500017013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod ctlModel ctlModel CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboTimeout INT32U CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboClass sboClass CF
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control”
and “CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
Figure 3.8-5 Input-point mapped for LLNO

- 216 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.8.3 MDCTRL settings

MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)
Default setting
value
MDCTRL-EN Off/On Switch for operation Off

MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out timer 30

- 217 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
3.8.4 MDCTRL signals (DataID)

MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC
8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote
8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D52 MDCTRL01_SC_RCC MDCTRL01 select command by RCC
8013011D53 MDCTRL01_SC_RMT MDCTRL01 select command by Remote
8313011E9C MODE01_CCF_FCT_CS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail factor condition signal
8713011E96 MODE01_CC_FS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail signal
8613011E95 MODE01_CC_SS MDCTRL01 cancel command success signal
8813011E9B MODE01_CC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 cancel command mode err
8313011E9D MODE01_CTR_SGN MDCTRL01 control logic stage(unselected)
8B13011EA2 MODE01_CTR_SGU MDCTRL01 control logic stage(under selection)
8113011E9A MODE01_ECF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 execute command fail factor signal check
8013011F55 MODE01_EC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 execute command mode err
8013011E93 MODE01_EX_CMP MDCTRL01 execute complete signal
8F13011F58 MODE01_EX_CMP_TMO MDCTRL01 timeout after execute completion
8913011F6C MODE01_EX_CS01 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 01
8A13011F6D MODE01_EX_CS02 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 02
8B13011F6E MODE01_EX_CS03 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 03
8613011E91 MODE01_EX_FFL MDCTRL01 execute fail signal
8213011F44 MODE01_EX_OUT MDCTRL01 execute output signal
8513011E8F MODE01_EX_SFL MDCTRL01 execute success signal
8213011E88 MODE01_FEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command fail condition signal
8013011E81 MODE01_FEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command OK condition signal
8D13011F42 MODE01_FSD_CSF MDCTRL01 On direction selected condition signal
8513011F60 MODE01_FSL_CS19 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 19
8A13011F61 MODE01_FSL_CS20 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 20
8113011F64 MODE01_FSL_CS21 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 21
8313011F41 MODE01_NSD_CSF MDCTRL01 no direction selected condition signal
8013011F56 MODE01_NSL_CS06 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 06
8613011F5E MODE01_NSL_CS07 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 07
8213011F5F MODE01_NSL_CS10 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 10
8313011E89 MODE01_OEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command fail condition signal
8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal
8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal
8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40
8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41
8513011F5B MODE01_OSL_CS42 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 42
8013011F54 MODE01_SC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 select command mode err
8013011E76 MODE01_SLD_CS MDCTRL01 selected condition signal
8013011F66 MODE01_SLD_CS04 MDCTRL01 selected condition signal 04
8E13011F57 MODE01_SLD_TMO MDCTRL01 time out after selected
8113011E7B MODE01_SLF_CS MDCTRL01 select fail condition signal

- 218 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

8713011E98 MODE01_SLF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal
8613011F62 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8813011F6B MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 07
8013011E7D MODE01_SLR_CS MDCTRL01 select release condition signal
0013011F75 MDCTRL01_SE_RCV MDCTRL01 select or execute command received
0013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT MDCTRL01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
0013011F52 MDCTRL01_TRA MDCTRL01 travelling info
0013011F53 MDCTRL01_TRA_CTR MDCTRL01 travelling info for control
2013011001 MDCTRL01_MODE MDCTRL01 mode
3113011D80 MDCTRL01_TMP_06 MDCTRL01 control event data (selected)
3113011D81 MDCTRL01_TMP_07 MDCTRL01 control event data (select fail)
3113011D82 MDCTRL01_TMP_08 MDCTRL01 control event data (select release)
3113011D83 MDCTRL01_TMP_09 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute output on)
3113011D84 MDCTRL01_TMP_10 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute command ng)
3113011D86 MDCTRL01_TMP_11 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute fail)

821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28
 Mapping point
7013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL01 correction request from cmm

- 219 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
4 Control application (CU)

Switch control by software (SOFTSW) 302 →User interface (CU) 667
→Control hierarchy 163
→Common controls 166
→Bianry IO module (CU) 563
→Monitoring function: Counter 650
→Accumulated time 650
Reference chapters:
→Control application (CU) 220
→Technical description (CU features) 545

- 220 -
CU
Chapter 4.1: Control application (CU) 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Software switch controller function (SOFTSW) BU
Software switch controller function (SOFTSW)

Sixty-three software-switches (CBK, and S43-01 to -61) are provided in the IED memory as
virtual switches; they are used to determine the operation of internal processes in the IED.
Either the criteria “Enable (On)” or “Disable (Off)” may be applied for each software switch,
S43. One software switch has already been defined for a special purpose; it is used to blocking
command (CBK) functions. The other switches, S43-01 to S43-61, are provided for general-
purpose usage.
Figure 4.1-1 shows the eight switches and their controller functions. The statuses of the S43
switches are stored in the IED non-volatile memory; hence, the IED can retrieve their status
while power is not being supplied to the IED.
Switches for
CMDBLK special purposes
(CBK)
SOFTSW1 SOFTSW2 SOFTSW3 SOFTSW61 General purpose

(S43-01) (S43-02) (S43-03) (S43-61) switches
Figure 4.1-1 Software switches (S43s) and their controller
The SOFTSW function can control a number of S43 software switches separately. To
simplify the explanation provided below only the SOFTSW1 function is discussed. The features
provided in CBK, and SOFTSW2–61 switches are similar to the SOFTSW1 switch.
Tips: The user can operate CBK without user programming. Jump to section 4.1.5
where we discuss how to map their signals for IEC61850 communication. When
the user wishes to program the SOFTSW functions using the S43-01–S43-61
switches, the user is required to read from section 4.1.2 onwards.
4.1.1 SOFTSW controlling

(i) Command blocking (CBK)
When the user wishes to avoid the control of devices by mistake during test and maintenance,
the user can use the command blocking function so that mal-operation can be avoided. The
execution of command blocking is available from the IED front panel. Additionally, the IEC
61850 standard provides command blocking (CmdBlk) for remote operation and the CBK
function is defined at the logical node (LN) given in IEC 61850-7-1 (Edition 2.0). Thus, the IED
can override all commands received when the command blocking function is engaged from the
local-end and the remote-end. With regard to the command “CmdBlk” from the remote-end,
the command is received at the input point “CBK_CONROL_REQ”, as shown in Table 4.1-1.

- 221 -
CU
For SOFTSW1 operation, the user should set the scheme switch [CBK-EN] to On.
Input CBK logic Output
To “Select condition logic” and

Reception of CMDBLK “Operate condition logic” †
CBK_STATE
All control commands must be blocked simultaneously
Blocking of all commands is (522001 000A011001)
522001 700A016D08 CBK__CONTROL_REQ
performed.
Figure 4.1-2 Logic “CBK” and response “CBK_STATE”

†Note:The user is required to map a communication signal to the input-point. For
mapping, see section 4.1.5. The “CBK_STATE” signal is used in control
applications so that control applications can determine their operational
conditions. (See control and operation logic for the respective control applications.)
(ii) S43-01 to S43-61 controlling provided by SOFTSW1 to SOFTSW61†

The SOFTSW1 to SOFTSW61 functions are provided for control of the S43-01 to S43-61
switches, as described previously. For example, Figure 4.1-3 shows the SOFTSW1 function
controlling the S43-01 switch; control of the S43-01 switch is enabled when the user sets the
scheme switch [S4301-EN]† to On. Likewise, the user is required to set On for scheme switches
[S4302-EN] to [S4361-EN] with regard to the SOFTSW2–61 operations, respectively.
Input SOFTSW1 logic Output
To user-programmed logic
Command reception in S4301 S4301_STATE
Command provided by the PLC function
Software switch operation is (522001 000A041001)
522001 700A046D08 S4301__CONTROL_REQ performed.
Figure 4.1-3 Logic “SOFTSW1” and response “S4301_STATE”
(iii) SOFTSW output-status

Table 4.1-1 shows the list of output signals of the SOFTSW functions.
Table 4.1-1 Output signals of SOFTSW function
522001 000A011001 CBK_STATE CBK status ( Off / Blocked)
522001 000A041001 S4301_STATE S43-01 switch status
…. …. ….

- 222 -
CU
4.1.2 Control logics for SBO/DIR modes

For example, the user should set scheme switch [S4301-EN] to On when the SOFTSW1
function is required to be operated. Table 4.1-9 shows all scheme switches for the SOFTSW
functions.
(i) Receiving “select command for On operation” from the remote-end

Figure 4.1-4 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-ON-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 function. The logic has an input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” for the
reception of the select command. That is, the input-point should be mapped for the IEC61850
communication. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is significant for the SOFTSW1
operation; hence, an operation failure in the IED is indicated if mapping is not performed
correctly. Section 4.1.5 discusses how to map the information of the IEC61850 to the input-
510001 7001016D08
points.
Input Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output
SOTFSW1 function (Function ID: 522001)

Command “Remote-On-Control”
For SBO operation
522001_700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
For DIR operation

For monitoring
Operate command
& “S4301_OSD_CSF”
(522001_8F0A041F49)
0 t Select “success”
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operate

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 4.1-4 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.1-5 and Table 4.1-8.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided from select condition scheme. For more
*Note:The SOFTSW1 function can run on either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use the signal “ctlmodel” in the IEC61850 communication.
Output signal for monitoring

The user can monitor a “Select success” signal at the output point “S4301_OSL_CSF”, when
the SOFTSW1 function determines that the received “Remote-ON-Control” signal is true. If

- 223 -
CU
the SOFTSW1 function determines that the “Remote-ON-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1
function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(ii) Receiving “select command for Off operation” from the remote end
Figure 4.1-5 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is applied
at the SOFTSW1 function. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the reception
of the select command (Remote-OFF-Control).
SOFTSW1 function (Function ID: 522001)

Command “Remote-Off-Control”
For SBO operation
& 1≥ &
For DIR operation

For monitoring
Operate command
& “S4301_FSD_CSF”
(522001_8D0A041F45)
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 4.1-5 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
4.1-5 and Table 4.1-8.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided in Figure 4.1-10.

The SOFTSW1 function, in Figure 4.1-5, can issue a “Select success” signal at output point
“S4301_FSL_CSF” when the SOFTSW1 function determines that the input signal “Select
command (Remote-OFF-Control)” is true. If the SOFTSW1 function determines that the
“Remote-OFF-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.
(iii) Receiving “Selection command for On operation” from the front

panel
Input signal
Figure 4.1-6 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is applied to
the SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when “On” key is pressed on the IED

- 224 -
CU
front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped. Note that the user should set scheme
switch [S4301-CTRAHMI] to SBO when the operation from the IED front panel is performed;
chapter User interface: Control sub-menu discusses how to operate.

For SBO operation
Command “Local-On-Control” Select command
& 1≥ &
For DIR operation SBO
Operate command For monitoring
(522001_8F0A041F49)
DIR
0 t
Select “success”
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
Figure 4.1-6 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.1-8.
‡Note:Signal “select condition” is provided. See Figure 4.1-10.

When the state of “select condition” is true, the SOFTSW1 function can issue an output signal
“Select success” at the output-point “S4301_OSD_CSF”.
Note: The signal “S4301_OSD_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure 4.1-4. If the
input signal “Local-ON-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to the
“Wait for a command” stage.
(iv) Receiving “Select command for Off operation” from the front panel
Input signal
Figure 4.1-7 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when the user presses “OFF” key on the
IED front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped.

- 225 -
CU

For SBO operation
Command “Local-Off-Control” Select command
& 1≥ &
(522001_8D0A041F45)
DIR
0 t
0.1s

0 t Select “Failed”
0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
Figure 4.1-7 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: Figure 4.1-7 is used for the discussion of SOFTSW1 logic. To identify the output
points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.1-8.

When the state of “select condition” is true, the SOFTSW1 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “S4301_FSD_CSF”.
Note: The “S4301_FSD_CSF” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4.1-5.
That is, this signal of the logic appears at the same PLC monitoring point. If the
input signal “Local-OFF-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to
the “Wait for a command” stage.
(v) Receiving “Select command for On operation” using the PLC

function
Input signal required to connect
Figure 4.1-8 shows that the select logic when a “Select command (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC
logic; the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_ON”.

- 226 -
CU
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output

ON-control command
For DIR operation†
(PLC connection point #1)
Operate command
522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON For monitoring
(522001_8F0A411F49)
0.1s

Select condition‡ 0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
Figure 4.1-8 Select logic for ON operation by PLC in SOFTSW1††

†Note:Direct operation mode (DIR) is only available.
‡Note:“select condition” signal is provided. See Figure 4.1-10.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.1-2 and Table 4.1-8.

The SOFTSW1 function shown in Figure 4.1-8, can issue a “Select success” signal at output-
point “S4301_OSD_CSF”.
Note: The signal “S4301_OSD_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4.1-4.
(vi) Receiving “Select command for Off operation” using PLC function
Figure 4.1-9 shows the SOFTSW1 logic for a “Select command (PLC-OFF-Control)” signal. The
input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC logic; the user can connect the
signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_OFF”.
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in SOFTSW1 Output

OFF-control command
Operate command
522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF For monitoring
(522001_8D0A411F45)
0.1s

Select “Failed”
0.6s
Figure 4.1-9 Select logic for OFF operation by PLC in SOFTSW1††

†Note:Direct operation mode (DIR) is available only.
4.1-3 and Table 4.1-8.

- 227 -
CU
Output signal to monitoring

The SOFTSW1 function shown in Figure 4.1-9, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output
point “S4301_FSD_CSF”.
Note: The output point “S4301_FSD_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.1-5.
(vii) Select condition

Figure 4.1-10 shows the select condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function. The SOFTSW1
function can examine an operate-condition using “Command Blocking” signal1.

Command blocking*1 defined as ”CBK”)
To selection logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ Select condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR
Unmatched condition detected *4
Command “ON control” received &

Command “OFF control” received &
received
S4301_STATE
(522001 000A411001)
Same Directional
Controlling Event

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point #3)*5
522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[S4301-EN]
On
Figure 4.1-10 Select condition logic for ‘ON/OFF’ in SOFTSW1

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except its own; see the signal
“CBK_STATE (Table 4.1-1)” as the state of “Command Blocking” in the SOFTSW
function.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB_RCV_OR in Table 4.1-7)” is an operation
philosophy. It can be used to protect a substation. The user can configure it using
GR-TIEMS.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling (Traveling OR in Table 4.1-7)” is detected in the
IED, it indicated that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus,
the IED should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event
is detected.
4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in command is
not identical to “IED test status”.

- 228 -
CU
Control hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be

43R/L; the user can connect it at PLC connection point “S4301_CTRL_RIGHT” of
Table 4.1-4.
(viii) Signal name and number

each table:
used.
Table 4.1-2 PLC connection point #1 (Inputs point for ‘On’ control)
522001 850A01EDE1 CBK_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for CBK O
522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for SOFTSW1 (S43-01) O
…. ….. ….
Table 4.1-3 PLC connection point #2 (Input points for ‘Off’ control)
522001 860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for CBK O
522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for SOFTSW1 (S43-01) O
…. ….. ….
Table 4.1-4 PLC connection point #3 (Input points on select condition logic)
522001 820A01ED50 CBK_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in CBK M
522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) M
…. ….. ….
Table 4.1-5 Mapping points for the command reception in SOFTSWx

522001 700A016D08 CBK_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in CBK M
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) M
…. ….. ….

- 229 -
CU

Table 4.1-6 Mapping points for the output signals of SOFTSWx

522001 000A011D90 CBK_STSELD Selection completed signal in CBK M

522001 000A041D90 S4301_STSELD Selection completed signal in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) M
…. ….. ….

5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking (DCB) is in progress. N/A
5A0001 3108003F40 SDCEN (This is setting of CMNCTRL) N/A
Table 4.1-8 PLC monitoring points (ON and OFF selection completion)
522001 8F0A011F49 CBK_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in CBK
522001 8F0A041F49 S4301_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
…. …. …..
522001 8D0A011F45 CBK_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in CBK
522001 8D0A021F45 ICB_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in ICB
522001 8D0A041F45 S4301_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
…. …. ….
(ix) Setting names
Table 4.1-9 Setting of SOFTSWx control

CBK-EN Function activation in CBK On Off / On
S4301-EN Function activation in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) On Off / On
…. …. … ….
CBK-CTRAHMI HMI activation in CBK On Off / On
ICB-CTRAHMI HMI activation in ICB On Off / On
S4301-CTRAHMI HMI activation in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) On Off / On
…. …. … …

- 230 -
CU


- 231 -
CU
4.1.3 Cancel logic for SBO mode

In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel
conditions are satisfied, accordingly, the function can discard the select command.
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from remote-end

Figure 4.1-11 shows the logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is applied to
the SOFTSW1 function. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as the
“Selection command (Remote-On-Control)”510001
signal.
7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in SOFTSW1 Output

Cancel command
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ
Successes to cancel
&
Operation Failed
Unmatched condition &
detected†
Figure 4.1-11 Cancel logic by the reception of the command from the remote end
†Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
(ii) Receiving “Cancel” from local-end

Figure 4.1-12 shows the logic when a “Cancel command (Local-cancel)” signal is applied to the
SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the user is not required to map it. When the logic receives input “Local-cancel”
signal, the logic is able to output a result signal, provided that the “unmatched condition
detected” checking is satisfied. 510001 7001016D08
Cancel command
Command “Local-cancel”
Successes to cancel
&
Unmatched condition
& Operation Failed
detected†
Figure 4.1-12 Cancel logic by the reception of the command at local end
4.1.4 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes

The user should map the operation command to the operate logic. If the operation conditions
are satisfied, the IED is able to change the state in the SOFWSW1–61 (S43-01 to S43-61).

- 232 -
CU
(i) Receiving “operate command On” from remote-end

Figure 4.1-13 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Remote-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the “Select command (Remote-On-Control)”.
Input Operate logic in SOFTSW1 Output
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (522001_890A041F5A)
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Operate Command

& OFF to ON
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
522001_810A041D03 Operate completed

S4301_ST_ON &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.1-13 ‘ON’ Operation logic by remote end in SOFTSW1†

†Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other SOFTSW logics, see
Table 4.1-5, Table 4.1-7, Table 4.1-10, Table 4.1-13, and Table 4.1-14.
‡Note:“operate condition” signal is provided from operate condition scheme. For more
(ii) Receiving “operate command Off” from remote-end

Figure 4.1-14 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Remote-Off-Control)” signal is
reception of the signal “Operate command (Remote-Off-Control)”.
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-OFF-Control” (522001_8A0A041F5B)

& ON to OFF
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_OFF &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.1-14 ‘OFF’ Operation logic by remote end in SOFTSW1†

†Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.1-5, Table 4.1-11, Table 4.1-12, and Table 4.1-13.

- 233 -
CU
(iii) Receiving “operate command On” from the local end

Figure 4.1-15 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution of On” key is
pressed on the IED front panel.
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
(522001_890A041F5A)
Operate Command
Command “Local-On-Control”
& OFF to ON
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_ON &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.1-15 ‘ON’ Operation logic at local in SOFTSW1†

Table 4.1-10, Table 4.1-12, and Table 4.1-14.
(iv) Receiving “operate command Off” from the local end

Figure 4.1-16 shows the logic when an “Operation command (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution for Off” key is
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
(522001_8A0A041F5B)
Command “Local-Off-Control” Operate Command

& ON to OFF
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_OFF &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.1-16 ‘OFF’ Operation logic at local in SOFTSW1†

4.1-11, Table 4.1-12, and Table 4.1-13.

- 234 -
CU
‡Note: “operate condition” signal is provided from operate condition scheme. For more
(v) Receiving “operate command On” using PLC logic

Figure 4.1-17 shows the logic when an “Operate command (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC logic;
the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_ON”.
ON-control command “S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC”

(PLC connection point #1) (522001_8C0A041F5D)
522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON Operate Command

& OFF to ON
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
S4301_ST_ON &
“S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.1-17 ‘ON’ Operation logic using PLC logic†

(vi) Receiving “operate command Off” using PLC logic

Figure 4.1-18 shows the logic when an “Operation command (PLC-Off-Control)” signal is
logic; the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_OFF”.
ON-control command “S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC”

522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF Operate Command

& ON to OFF
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
S4301_ST_OFF &
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.1-18 ‘Off’ Operation logic using PLC logic†

- 235 -
CU
(vii) Operate condition

Figure 4.1-19 shows the operate condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function. The SOFTSW1

Command blocking*1 (defined as ”CBK”)
To operate logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ operate condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR

received
S4301_STATE
(522001 000A041001)
Same Directional
Controlling Event

522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[S4301-EN]
On
Figure 4.1-19 Operate condition logic for ON/OFF in SOFTSW1*7

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except for itself; See the signal
“S4301_STATE (Table 4.1-1)” as the state of “Command Blocking” in the SOFTSW
function.
philosophy. It can be used to protect the substation. The user can configure it
using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling (Traveling OR in Table 4.1-7)” signifies that
other operators are changing the status of one or more devices. Thus, device
operation by the IED should be inhibited whilst the event is detected.
4Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when the “Test-bit status” in a
5Note: The user must program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control
hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be 43R/L;
the user can connect it with PLC connection point “S4301_CTRL_RIGHT” of
Figure 4.1-19.

- 236 -
CU
6Note: To identify the PLC connection points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.1-4.
(viii) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note the meaning of the following abbreviations as shown in
column “M/O” of each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for the optional use.
user may experience an operational failure if the default settings is used.
Table 4.1-10 Output signals on starting operation “Off to On”
522001 890A011F5A CBK_OEC_CHG “Off to On” operation start in CBK
522001 890A041F5A S4301_OEC_CHG “Off to On” operation start in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… …. ….
Table 4.1-11 Output signals on starting operation “On to Off”

522001 8A0A011F5B CBK_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in CBK
522001 8A0A041F5B S4301_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
522001 8C0A401F5D S4361_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in SOFTSW61 (S43-61)
Table 4.1-12 Success signals of the operation

522001 870A011F62 CBK_EX_SS Operation succeeded in CBK
522001 870A041F62 S4301_EX_SS Operation succeeded in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
Table 4.1-13 OFF status signals on the operation

522001 830A011D02 CBK_ST_OFF “Off” status of CBK
522001 830A041D02 S4301_ST_OFF “Off” status of SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …

- 237 -
CU
Table 4.1-14 ON status signals on the operation

522001 810A011D03 CBK_ST_ON “On” status of CBK
522001 810A041D03 S4301_ST_ON “On” status of SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
Table 4.1-15 Failure signals generated by PLC control

522001 800A011DE0 CBK_PLC_CTRL_FAIL Control failure in CBK
522001 800A041DE0 S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL Control failure in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
Table 4.1-16 Output signals on starting operation “Off to On” by PLC

522001 8B0A011F5C CBK_OEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA022
522001 8B0A041F5C S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFTSW1 signal after KC_S43_SA022
… … …
Table 4.1-17 Output signals on starting operation “On to Off” by PLC

522001 8C0A011F5D CBK_FEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA023
522001 8C0A041F5D S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC SOFTSW1 signal after KC_S43_SA023
… … …

- 238 -
CU
4.1.5 Mapping for IEC 61850 communication

The user can operate the SOFTSW1 function over IEC 61850 communications following
mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the SOFTSW1 function is designed for the class of
“Single Point Controller (SPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should
follow these steps, each of which is discussed below:
(i) Editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the SOFTSW1 function. Figure 4.1-20
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “General Input/Output (GGIO)” is chosen for the
SOFTSW1 function for IEC 61850 communication. After the user has defined an object
“SPCSO”, the SOFTSW1 logical node can be saved with the name “GGIO” plus “LN Instance”.
Create a definition of the object “SPCSO” in SOFTSW1 logical node. Either the SBO mode or
the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.1-20 Defining “SPCSO” object in GGIO701 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.1-21 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO701” when the SBO mode is required for
the SOFTSW1 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“GGIO701$SPCSO” using GR-TIEMS;

- 239 -
CU
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass (choice ”operate-once”)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.1-22 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO701” when the DIR mode is required for
the SOFTSW1 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using
GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
(ii) Mapping output data

The user should group the SOFTSW1 (S4301) signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT;
the user should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.

- 240 -
CU
Table 4.1-18 shows the required mapping signals in SOFTSW1 function to the IEC 61850
communications. Figure 4.1-23 shows how to map a signal.
Table 4.1-18 Mapping signals for SPCSO object.

Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 522001 310A041008 S4301_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 522001 6A0A041009 S4301_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO stVal INT32 ST 522001 000A041001 S4301_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO q Quality ST 522001 310A041005 S4301_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO t Timestamp ST 522001 900A041006 S4301_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 522001 000A041D90 S4301_STSELD
Figure 4.1-23 orCat attribute mapped into SPCSO object of GGIO701
(iii) Mapping input data

The SOFTSW1 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 4.1-19 shows the input-point
“S4301_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO”; the user should map
the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC† to the input-point. Figure 4.1-24 shows

- 241 -
CU
Table 4.1-19 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object in SOFTSW1 function
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 4.1-24 Input-point mapped for GGIO701

- 242 -
CU
4.1.6 SOFTSW settings

SOTFSW(FunctionID:522001)
S4301-EN Off / On - Soft 43 switch1 Enable Off

… …. …. ….
S43 SW1 S4301-SWNAME [Preferred text] - item name of soft 43 switch signal SOFTSW1 !
S4301-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
S4301-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) On !
S4301-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
S4301-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
SW2 S4302-SWNAME [Preferred text] - item name of soft 43 switch signal SOFTSW2 !
… … …. ….
!Note: The user can enter a preferred setting name using GR-TIEMS.

- 243 -
CU
4.1.7 SOFTSW signals (DataID)

SOFTSW(Function ID:522001)
000A041001 S4301_STATE SOFT 43 switch1 status
000A041D90 S4301_STSELD SOFT 43 switch1 the controllable data is in the status
310A041D00 S4301_STS_MIMIC SOFT 43 switch1 status
310A041D01 S4301_STS SOFT 43 switch1 status
800A041D51 S4301_SC_OWS SOFT 43 switch1 select command by OWS(HMI)
800A041D52 S4301_SC_RCC SOFT 43 switch1 select command by RCC
800A041D53 S4301_SC SOFT 43 switch1 select command
800A041D54 S4301_SC_LCD SOFT 43 switch1 select command by LCD
800A041D55 S4301_EC_OWS SOFT 43 switch1 execute command by OWS(HMI)
800A041D56 S4301_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch1 execute command by RCC
800A041D57 S4301_EC SOFT 43 switch1 execute command
800A041D58 S4301_EC_LCD SOFT 43 switch1 execute command by LCD
800A041DE0 S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch1 PLC control fail
800A041F42 S4301_TMP2 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SA002
810A041D03 S4301_ST_ON SOFT 43 switch1 On state
830A041D02 S4301_ST_OFF SOFT 43 switch1 Off state
830A041F41 S4301_NSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA001
850A041F4A S4301_TMP8 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A041F5E S4301_TMP11 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A041F43 S4301_TMP3 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A041F4E S4301_SLF_FCT_FLG01 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A041F50 S4301_SLF_FCT_FLG02 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A041F62 S4301_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch1 signal execute success
880A041F4B S4301_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A041F4D S4301_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A041F5F S4301_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A041F5A S4301_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA011
8A0A041F47 S4301_TMP6 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A041F5B S4301_FEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A041F4C S4301_CTR_SGU SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A041F5C S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A041F5D S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A041F45 S4301_FSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A041F4F S4301_SLD_TM0 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A041F49 S4301_OSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A041F51 S4301_EX_CMP_TM0 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after MCTS43_SC002

- 244 -
CU


- 245 -
CU

…. …. ….
000A3F1001 S4360_STATE SOFT 43 switch60 status
000A3F1D90 S4360_STSELD SOFT 43 switch60 the controllable data is in the status
310A3F1D00 S4360_STS_MIMIC SOFT 43 switch60 status
310A3F1D01 S4360_STS SOFT 43 switch60 status
800A3F1D51 S4360_SC_OWS SOFT 43 switch60 select command by OWS(HMI)
800A3F1D52 S4360_SC_RCC SOFT 43 switch60 select command by RCC

- 246 -
CU

800A3F1D53 S4360_SC SOFT 43 switch60 select command
800A3F1D54 S4360_SC_LCD SOFT 43 switch60 select command by LCD
800A3F1D55 S4360_EC_OWS SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by OWS(HMI)
800A3F1D56 S4360_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by RCC
800A3F1D57 S4360_EC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command
800A3F1D58 S4360_EC_LCD SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by LCD
800A3F1DE0 S4360_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch60 PLC control fail
800A3F1F42 S4360_TMP2 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA002
810A3F1D03 S4360_ST_ON SOFT 43 switch60 On state
830A3F1D02 S4360_ST_OFF SOFT 43 switch60 Off state
830A3F1F41 S4360_NSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA001
850A3F1F4A S4360_TMP8 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A3F1F5E S4360_TMP11 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A3F1F43 S4360_TMP3 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A3F1F4E S4360_SLF_FCT_FLG01 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A3F1F50 S4360_SLF_FCT_FLG02 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A3F1F62 S4360_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch60 signal execute success
880A3F1F4B S4360_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A3F1F4D S4360_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A3F1F5F S4360_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A3F1F5A S4360_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA011
8A0A3F1F47 S4360_TMP6 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A3F1F5B S4360_FEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A3F1F4C S4360_CTR_SGU SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A3F1F5C S4360_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A3F1F5D S4360_FEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A3F1F45 S4360_FSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A3F1F4F S4360_SLD_TM0 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A3F1F49 S4360_OSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A3F1F51 S4360_EX_CMP_TM0 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after MCTS43_SC002

- 247 -
CU


860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF SOFT 43 switch1 change to off
850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON SOFT 43 switch1 change to on
820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT SOFT 43 switch1 control right from PLC

- 248 -
CU

….. …. …..
860A3FEDE0 S4360_CHG_TO_OFF SOFT 43 switch60 change to off
850A3FEDE1 S4360_CHG_TO_ON SOFT 43 switch60 change to on
820A3FED50 S4360_CTRL_RIGHT SOFT 43 switch60 control right from PLC
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SOFTSW function. We
example, when the user wishes to find the “S4301_EC_LCD” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “S4302_EC_LCD” in place of
“S4301_EC_LCD”. The user can obtain the ID value of “S4302_EC_LCD” by
using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for S4301_EC_LCD (i.e.,
“8C00041F45”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8C00051F45” of
“S4302_EC_LCD”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal
notation. Thus, the user must change the device number
from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.

- 249 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
5 Control and monitoring application (BU)

Single position control (SPOS) 251 →Control hierarchy 163

Switch control by software (SOFTSW) 302 →Double command broking (DCB) 166
Operating time reset (OPTIM) 335 →Common controls. 166
Total time measurement (TOTALTIM) 349 →User interface (BU) 773
Interlock with software (ILK) 361 →Control sub-menu 777
Double position control (DPOS) 378 →Monitoring sub-menu 775
Three position control (TPOS) 444 →Total Time sub-menu 776
Event detection using BIs (GENBI) 523 →Binary IO module 743
Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) 532 →Statistics data (Counter group) 769
→Statistics data (Accumulated time) 769
→Statistics data (Total Time) 769
Reference chapters:

- 250 -
CU
Chapter 5.1: Control and monitoring application (BU)
––––––––Single position device function (SPOS)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Single position device function (SPOS)

The single position device function (SPOS) is used when the user wishes to control a device
from On or Off state. When a select command is provided for the IED, the SPOS function can
issue a control command if the SPOS function obtains the response from the device. The SPOS
function also can accept a cancel command after issuing the selection command. In the SPOS
function, issuing and receiving a command and a response are performed via a binary IO
module †; hence, the user should connect the BI and BO circuits with the SPOS function. The
SPOS function includes three logic groups: 1. Select logic, 2. Cancel logic, and 3. Operate logic.
Twenty devices can be controlled separately, i.e. the SPOS function has separate sets of
logic for control (i.e., SPOS01, SPOS02, …, SPOS20 functions). For simplicity, only the SPOS01
function is discussed here; the features in the SPOS02 etc. functions are identical to the
SPOS01 function.
†Note:Binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits (BOs);
the user makes the connection between the SPOS01 function and the binary IO
module using a signal number (is made of a function ID and an “Element ID”).The
signal name and number of the SPOS01 function are listed later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the SPOS function quickly, go to sections 5.1.4 and
5.1.5, where setting of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signals for IEC
61850 communication is described.

- 251 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user should set scheme switch [SPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to SPOS01 operation. Table
5.1-9 shows all of the scheme switches in the SPOS function.
(i) SPOS: “Select command ON” received from remote-end

Figure 5.1-1 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Select command Off from remote-end
Select command On from local-end

Operate logic
Select command Off from local-end
Operate command
Select command On by the PLC function Operate logic
Select command Off by the PLC function
Figure 5.1-1 Outline of select command ‘On’

Figure 5.1-2 shows the select logic when a “Select command ON (Remote-ON-Control)” signal
applied to the SPOS01 function. This logic has the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” for
the reception of the selection command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC 61850

- 252 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
510001 7001016D08
Input Selection logic in SPOS01 Output
SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001)

For SBO operation
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command
with ILK† condition & 1≥ &
command”
For DIR operation
To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(510001_8601011DC6)
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed
SPOS01-On 0 t Selection “success”
For SBO operation 0.1s
Select command &

without ILK† condition
For DIR operation 0 t
Selection “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
510001 8601011DC
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.1-2 Select ON from the remote-end in SPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function can provide the operation criteria for
“On”. The ILK function is discussed in section 5.5, separately; note that the
operation criteria is defined by the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the
condition).
automatic control. The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being
in the operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see section 5.9.
*Note:The SPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using
IEC61850. To use this signal, the user must map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SPOS logics, see Table 5.1-4
and Table 5.1-8.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function can issue an output “Selection success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-
Control” signal received is true. If the SPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-
Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 253 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) SPOS: “Select command Off” received from emote-end

Figure 5.1-3 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ from the remote- end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Select command On from front panel

Operate logic
Select command Off from front panel
Operate command
Select command On by the PLC Operate logic
Select command Off by the PLC
Figure 5.1-3 Outline of select command ‘Off’

Figure 5.1-4 shows the select logic when a “Select command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal
is received at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.
Input Selection logic in SPOS01 Output

For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed (510001_8A01011DC4)
SPOS01-Off 0 t Selection “success”
Select command &

Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.1-4 Select ‘OFF’ from the remote-end in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “Off”.
‡Note:The “select condition” signal is provided. See Figure 5.1-13.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SPOS logics, see Table 5.1-4

- 254 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
and Table 5.1-8.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 5.1-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” when the SPOS01 function determines that the “Select command Off
(Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is true. If the SPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-
OFF-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.
(iii) SPOS: “Select command On” received from local-end

Figure 5.1-5 outlines the reception of the selection command ‘On’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Selection logics Wait for a next command
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from remote-end

Cancel logic

Failed

from the front panel decision Success
Operate logic
Select command Off from front panel Operate command
Figure 5.1-5 Outline of selection command ‘On’
Input signal generated at the local-end.

Figure 5.1-6 shows the select logic when a “Select command On (Local-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SPOS01 function. The signal is provided when an “On” key is pressed on the
IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from the IEC61850 communication.
Note that the user should set the scheme switch [SPOS01-CTRAHMI] to SBO when operation
from the IED front panel is required; we discuss how to set this in Chapter Technical
description (BU): User interface: Control sub-menu.

- 255 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Select logic in SPOS01 Output

For SBO operation
For DIR operation SBO command”
Operate command To BO connection
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
SPOS01-On (510001_8601011DC6)
DIR
ILK† bypassing (“Interlock Bypass”) 1≥ 0 t
Selection “success”
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
0.6s
[SPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.1-6 Select ‘On’ on the front panel in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “On”. For testing, nullifying
the ILK function is possible using “Interlock bypassing”. “Interlock bypassing” is
indicated by the status “ICB” in a software switch controller (SOFTSW).
§Note:The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. The
SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation.
††Note: To identify the output signals of the other SPOS logic, see Table 5.1-8.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the SPOS01 function can issue a “Selection success”
signal at the output-point “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”.
Note: The signal “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
5.1-2. If the “Local-ON-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to

- 256 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) SPOS: “Select command Off” received from local-end

Figure 5.1-7 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from remote-end Cancel command
Cancel logic

Failed

Selection logic Signal output Operate logic
Operate command

Figure 5.1-8 shows the select logic when a “Select command Off (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is
applied to the SPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user presses a “OFF” key on
the IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850 communication.
Input Select logic in SPOS01 Output

For SBO operation
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”

SPOS01-Off (510001_8601011DC6)
DIR
ILK† bypassing (“Interlock Bypass”) 1≥ 0 t
Selection “success”
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t Selection “Failed”
0.6s
[SPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.1-8 Select ‘Off’ on the front panel in SPOS01††

†Note: The software interlocking (ILK) function can provide the operation criteria for
“Off”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is

- 257 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
defined by the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition).
§Note:The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. The
SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation.
††Note: To identify the output signals of the other SPOS logics, see Table 5.1-8.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the SPOS01 function can issue a “Selection success”
signal at the output-point “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”.
1Note: The signal “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
5.1-4. If the “Local-OFF-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns
to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(v) SPOS: “Select command ON” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.1-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by PLC
Failed Operate command
function
PLC logic programmed Select

by the user decision Success
Operate logic
Figure 5.1-9 Outline of select command ‘On’
Input signal required from the PLC function.

Figure 5.1-10 shows the select logic when a “Select command On (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this signal: The
former connection point (PLC#1) is used for the reception of the select-command requiring the
interlock check, the latter connection point (PLC#2) is used for the reception of the select-
command not requiring the interlock check. That is, for the SPOS01 function, when the “select
command ‘On’ (PLC-On-Control) signal generated in the user-programmed logic is applied, and

- 258 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
when the interlock check is required in the select logic, use the connection point (PLC#1; e.g.,
DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required, use the
connection point (PLC#2); e.g., DEV01_CL_COMMAND”. PLC#1 and PLC#2 are shown in
510001 7001016D08
Table 5.1-1.
Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in SPOS01 Output
1≥ &
ON-control command requiring ILK checking† To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC#1 connection point) command”
Operate command
To BO connection
510001 800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK with ILK† condition
& “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(510001_8601011DC6)
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed DIR
SPOS01-On 0 t Selection “success”
0.1s
ON-control command requiring no ILK checking† For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point) 0 t
Operate command Selection “Failed”
510001 800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
DIR
PLC in DIR operate

510001 8601011DC
Select condition‡
Figure 5.1-10 Select ‘On’ using the PLC function in SPOS01††

“On”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
defined in the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition).
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other SPOS logics, see Table 5.1-1
and Table 5.1-8.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 5.1-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The signal “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same as that shown in Figure 5.1-2.

- 259 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vi) SPOS: “Select command Off” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.1-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by the PLC
function Operate command
Select command Off by PLC

Failed
function
Operate logic
Input signal from the PLC function

Figure 5.1-12 shows the select logic when a “Select command Off (PLC-OFF-Control)” signal
is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this signal,
like in the signal “Select command On (PLC-On-Control)” where four are available. That is, if
interlock checking is required, use the connection point (PLC#1:e.g.,
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock-check is not required, use the
connection point (PLC#2; e.g., DEV01_OP_COMMAND). PLC#1 and PLC#2 is shown Table
5.1-2.

- 260 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Signals from user PLC logic Select logic in SPOS01 Output
1≥ &
OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation
(PLC#1 connection point)
510001 800101EE31 Operate command with To BO connection
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK
ILK† condition & “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed (510001_8601011DC6)
SPOS01-Off 0 t Selection “success”
0.1s
OFF-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
0 t
Operate command Selection “Failed”
510001 800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND &
without ILK† condition 0.6s
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 5.1-12 Selection logic for ‘Off’ by PLC in SPOS01††

“Off”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SPOS logic, see Table 5.1-2
for the input (PLC#1 and PLC#2) and Table 5.1-8 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 5.1-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The output point “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure
5.1-4.
(vii) SPOS: selecting condition

Figure 5.1-13 shows the select condition logic in the SPOS01 function. The SPOS01 function
checks the condition for the select command using the signal “SPOS01_STATE” (Table 5.1-24).
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, the following alternatives
are available:
1. The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic.
2. The user can add additional logic to the original logic.
How to add another select condition signal

If adding another condition is required, the user can add a signal to the select condition logic
using the PLC connection point “User Additional condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using SPOS01IN_TMP_31, which is listed as PLC#1 in
Table 5.1-6.

- 261 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
2. Set the scheme switch [SPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to Fixed logic.
How to replace the original logic

If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic completely, the user can replace it using
the PLC connection point “User configurable condition”.
1. Connect the user-customized logic using SPOS01IN_TMP_32, which is listed as
PLC#2 in Table 5.1-6.
2. Set the scheme switch [SPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to PLC.
Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Traveling OR Select condition
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress Unmatched condition detected *5

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Event suppression detected *6
= SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
Tripping *4 (“General trip”)
GEN. TRIP (510001 810101F59)
BI board connection error detected*7
= SPOS01_F_BI_ERR
BI board connect
(510001 820101F5A)
Event supp
Unmatched co
received
SPOS01_STATE
(510001 0001011001)
[SCDEN]*8 Same Directional
Controlling Event
OFF
Additional condition (PLC#1 connection point)
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31
[SPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC #2connection point)
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EE62 SPOS01IN_TMP_32 &

From Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC#3 connection point)*9
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28
&
From CMNCTRL serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[SPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 5.1-13 Select condition logic for ON/OFF in SPOS01*10

1Note: “Command blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “Command
blocking” is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch controller
(SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines command blocking as “CmdBlk”. For
more information on “CBK”, see section 5.2. See the signal “S4301_STAEE of
Table 5.1-5.
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the statuses of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of
any device for the duration that the event is detected. The detecting signal is
donated as “Travelling OR” in Table 5.1-5.

- 262 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
4Note: If the issue of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is
blocked until the trip operation is completed. If an IED includes a relay
application, the trip command is issued at the output point “GEN.TRIP” in Table
5.1-5.
5Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a command
is not identical to “IED test status”.
6Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See section
5.1.4(i)-2)
7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits.
8Note: The common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘On’ and ‘Off”
operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch
(SCDEN), the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same
operation- direction compared with the previous operation direction. (i.e., when
On (Off) is performed sequentially). On the other hand, if On is set for the scheme
switch, the logic is not blocked.
9Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition” The
using the connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see
Chapter General control function: Control hierarchy. See PLC#3 of Table 5.1-6.
10Note: To identify the input point of the other SPOS, see Table 5.1-6 for PLC#1 and
PLC#2.
(viii) SPOS: selection signal names and numbers

each table:
used.
Table 5.1-1 PLC connection points (Input points for command ‘On’)
510001 800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND SPOS01 PLC On-control without checking O
…. …. ….
510001 800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK SPOS01 PLC On-control checking with interlock O

- 263 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

…. …. ….
Table 5.1-2 PLC connection points (Input points for command ‘Off’)
510001 800101EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK SPOS01 PLC Off-control checking with interlock O
…. …. ….
510001 800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND SPOS01 PLC Off-control without checking O
…. …. ….
Table 5.1-3 PLC connection points (Interlock for command ‘On/Off’)

570001 3101011DA0 SPOS01-Off SPOS01 interlock condition for Off control. N/A
…. …. ….
570001 3101011DA2 SPOS01-On SPOS01 interlock condition for On control. N/A
…. …. ….
Table 5.1-4 Mapping points for the reception of control commands

510001 7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ SPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M
…. …. ….

522001 000A011001 CBK_STATE Command Blocking status ( Off / Blocked) N/A
522001 000A021001 ICB_STATE Interlock bypassing status(On / Bypass) N/A
4A2A01 8300001B6F GEN.TRIP General trip N/A

- 264 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.1-6 PLC connection points (Input signal for select condition logic)
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31 SPOS01 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
…. …. ….
510001 810101EE62 SPOS01IN_TMP_32 SPOS01 user configurable select condition (PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 SPOS01 control hierarchy condition (PLC#3) M
…. …. ….
Table 5.1-7 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
510001 8001011F54 SPOS01_SC_ST_ERR SPOS01 select command mode is invalid.
…. …. ….
510001 8101011F59 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS01)
…. …. ….
510001 81010A1F59 SPOS20_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS20)
510001 8201011F5A SPOS01_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(SPOS01)
…. …. ….
Table 5.1-8 PLC monitoring points (On/Off Output-signal)

510001 8601011DC6 SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select (ON) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
510001 8A01011DC4 SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select (OFF) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
(ix) SPOS: selection setting names

Note: The “xx” of “SPOSxx” represents the SPOS function number. (e.g., if the SPOS03

- 265 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented from
“01” to “20”.)
Table 5.1-9 Setting of SBO control in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function in SPOSxx On Off / On
SPOSxx-LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition in SPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
SPOSxx-CTRAHMI Activate local panel control in SPOSxx SBO DIR / SBO

- 266 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

In SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible; the function can discard
the select command when the cancel conditions are satisfied; finally, the operation returns to
the initial stage (i.e., waiting state “Wait for a command”.)
(i) SPOS: “Cancel” received from remote-end

remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end Cancel from remote-end

Success
Select command Off from remote-end Cancel

Signal reception in
IEC61850 decision Failed
Select On from front panel

Cancel from front panel
Select command On by the PLC
function
function
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

applied to the SPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as
that for the signal “Select command On (Remote-On-Control)”.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in SPOS01 Output

Cancel command
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ “SPOS01_ CC_SS” (510001_8601011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Cancel condition† &
“SPOS01_CC_FS” (510001_8701011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 5.1-15 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in SPOS01

†Note: The logic “cancel condition” is shown in Figure 5.1-18
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function can issue an output signal “Success to cancel” at the monitoring point
“SPOS01_CC_SS”, when the SPOS01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel” signal

- 267 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
is true. Another “Operation failed” signal is issued at the monitoring point “SPOS01_CC_FS”
if the SPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal is not true.
(ii) SPOS: “Cancel” received from local-end

Figure 5.1-16 outlines the reception of the cancel command from the local end.
Wait for a command
Cancel from the remote end

Selecting On from remote-end
Selecting Off from remote-end

Cancel from the front panel
Success
Selecting On from front panel
Press cancel Cancel
Selecting Off from front panel Cancel logic Do nothing
command decision Failed
Selecting On by the PLC function
Selecting Off by the PLC function

Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 5.1-16 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the local-end
Input signal generated at the local-end

Figure 5.1-17 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Local-cancel)” signal is applied
to the SPOS01 function. The signal is generated when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping. When the logic receives the
“Local-cancel” signal, the logic is able to output a result signal; provided that the “cancel
condition” checking is satisfied. 510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in SPOS01 Output

Cancel command
Command “Local-cancel” “SPOS01_ CC_SS” (510001_8601011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Cancel condition† & “Do nothing”

“SPOS01_CC_FS” (510001_8701011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 5.1-17 ‘Cancel’ from the front panel
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 5.1-17, is able to issue a “Select to cancel” signal
at the monitoring point “SPOS01_CC_SS”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the
“Local-Cancel” signal is true.

- 268 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) SPOS: cancel condition logic

Figure 5.1-18 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria, “unmatched condition detected”
is connected normally for the cancel logic, set Fixlogic for the scheme switch
[SPOS01_LGCNFFC].
Unmatched condition detected *1 To cancel logic in

& 1≥ SPOS01
[SPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC connection point)
Fixedlogic
510001 800101EE69 SPOS01IN_TMP_46 &
Figure 5.1-18 Logic “Cancel condition” in SPOS01

1Note: The Criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
the cancel command is not identical to the “IED test status”, like in Figure 5.1-13.
2Note: With the exception of the above ‘cancel’ condition logic, there is an operate-
condition logic within the SPOS01 function; the operate-condition logic will always
check conditions. That is, the user is required to set either the “operate-condition”
or the “cancel-condition” logic.
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, it can be replaced
with another logic using the connection point “User Configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic with the “SPOS01IN_TMP_46”.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.
(iv) SPOS: cancel signal names and numbers

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” in
each table:
“M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure using the signal;
otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure for the default
settings.
Table 5.1-10 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
510001 800101EE69 SPOS01IN_TMP_46 SPOS01 user configurable cancel condition O
… … …
Table 5.1-11 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
510001 8601011E95 SPOS01_CC_SS Cancel succeed in SPOS01

- 269 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
510001 8701011E96 SPOS01_CC_FS Cancel failed in SPOS01
… … …
(v) SPOS: cancel setting names

Note: The “xx” within of “SPOSxx” represents the SPOS function number. (e.g., if
SPOS03 is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The numbers used for “xx” can be
represented by “01” to “20”.)
Table 5.1-12 Setting for ‘Cancel’ in SPOSxx
SPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition in SPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 270 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic start to control the device.
(i) SPOS: “Operate command On” received from remote-end

Figure 5.1-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the remote- end.
Wait for a command
On control from remote-end

Success
Select command On from remote-end Operation
Signal reception in Operate logic Signal output
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from remote-end Off control from remote-end
Select command On from front panel On control from front-panel
Select command Off from front panel Off control from front-panel
Select command On by the PLC On control by PLC function

function
Select command Off by the PLC Off control by PLC function
function
Figure 5.1-19 Outline of operate command for ‘On’

Figure 5.1-20 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command On (Remote-ON-
Control)” signal is applied to the SPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”
is used for the reception of the “Operate command On (Remote-On-Control)”.

- 271 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Operate logic in SPOS01 Output
“SPOS01-OEC_OK_CSF”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (510001_8001011E7F)
[SPOS01-CPW]
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed S

&
SPOS01-On R
User configurable condition

S
510001 810101EE57 SPOS01IN_TMP_35 &
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] R
& To BO connection
Fixedlogic
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3) §§
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
(PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ function§” is in progress PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]*
Var To “Wait for a command”
Fix
Latch “SPOS01_EX_FFL”
[SPOS01-RST]
0 t (510001_8601011E91) ††
“SPOS01-EX_CMP”
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
“SPOS01-FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
Figure 5.1-20 Operate ‘On’ logic by remote SAS in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “ON”.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic (see
Figure 5.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “Operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user and
used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic. The
alternative ”Operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point #1 ”User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
*Note:The user can set the type of the output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[SPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
When Latch is set, the output signal is kept issuing until the reception of
“Command Off”.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other SPOS logics, see Table
5.1-13 for PLC#1, Table 5.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 5.1-18, and Table 5.1-19 for
output signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected when
the time set by [SPOS01-RST] has been reached.

- 272 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
§§Note: The “SPOS01_OEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed “signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.1-20. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”,
hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point # 2 “user-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [SPOS01-
LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 5.1-20, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the received signal “Remote-
On-Control” is true.

- 273 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) SPOS: “Operate command Off” received from remote end

Figure 5.1-21 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘Off ’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end On control from remote-end
Off control from remote-end

Success
Operation
Select command Off from remote-end decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Select command On from front panel On control from front-panel

Off control from front-panel
Select command On by the PLC On control by PLC function

function
Select command Off by the PLC Off control by PLC function
function
Figure 5.1-21 Outline of operate command ‘Off’
Mapping required for Input point from communication

Figure 5.1-22 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-
Control)” signal is applied to the SPOS01 logic. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-Control)”.

“SPOS01-FEC_OK_CSF”
(510001_8001011E7F)
[SPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed S
&
SPOS01-Off R
User Configurable condition

510001 800101EE56 SPOS01IN_TMP_34

[SPOS01-LGCTRCON]
&
Fixedlogic To BO connection
Operate condition‡ “SPOS01_FEX_BO” §§

(510001_8101011DD0)
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User Configurable condition
(PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ§ function is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]*
“SPOS01_EX_FFL” † †
Var [SPOS01-RST] (510001_8601011E91)
Fix
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
Figure 5.1-22 Operate ‘Off’ from the remote -end in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “Off”.

- 274 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
‡Note:An “operate condition” is generated in the operate-condition logic( see Figure

5.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch[SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If an
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use SPOS01IN_TMP_34.
the time set by [SPOS01-RST] has been reached.
§§Note: The signal “SPOS01_OEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed “signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.1-20. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”.
Hence, this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point # 2 “user-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [SPOS01-
“Command Off”.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 5.1-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Off-
Control” is true.
(iii) SPOS: “Operate command On” received from local-end

Figure 5.1-23 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘On’ from the local-end.

- 275 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Operate command On from the local-end

Select command On from the local-end Success
Operation
Signal reception from Operate logic Signal output
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
Figure 5.1-23 Outline of operate command ‘On’

Figure 5.1-24 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command On (Local-ON-Control)”
signal is applied to the SPOS01 function. The signal is generated when “Execution of On” is
keyed on the IED front panel.
“SPOS01-OEC_OK_CSF”
(510001_8001011E7F)
Operate Cmd.
Command “Local-On-Control” [SPOS01-CPW]
with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operation Cmd.
SPOS01-On
S
&
ILK† bypassing ( Bypass) 1≥
R
ICB_STATE
User configurable condition (PLC#1 connection point) S

510001 810101EE57 SPOS01IN_TMP_35 &
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] R
&
PLC#1
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3) §§
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User configurable condition (PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ function§” is in progress PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]* To “Wait for a command”

Var
Fix “SPOS01_EX_FFL”
Latch
[SPOS01-RST] (510001_8601011E91) ††
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP”
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s
Operation Failed
“SPOS01-FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
Figure 5.1-24 Operate ‘On’ on the front panel

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “On”.

- 276 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic( see

Figure 5.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If an
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
“Command Off”.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the [SPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “SPOS01_OEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the scheme
logic [SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the logic
programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.1-20, connect the
signal “Operate completed” generated in the user-programmed logic at the
connection point # 2 “user configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 5.1-24, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the signal “Local-On-Control”
is true.

- 277 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) SPOS: “Operate command Off” received from local-end

Figure 5.1-25 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Operate command Off from the local-end

Select command Off from the local-end Success
Operate
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 5.1-25 Outline of operate command ‘Off’

Figure 5.1-26 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Local-OFF-Control)”
signal is applied to the SPOS01 function. The input signal is generated when “Execution for
Off” is keyed on the IED front panel.

- 278 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

“SPOS01-FEC_OK_CSF”
(510001_8001011E7F)
Operate Cmd. [SPOS01-CPW]
Command “Remote-Off-Control” with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed
SPOS01-Off S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥ R
ICB_STATE
User configurable condition (PLC#3 connection point)

510001 800101EE56 SPOS01IN_TMP_34
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON]
&
PLC#3
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”
“510001_8101011DD0 §§
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]* To “Wait for a command”

Var
Fix “SPOS01_EX_FFL”
[SPOS01-RST] “510001_8601011E91 ††
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP
(5A0101_8001011E93)
1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
Figure 5.1-26 Operate ‘Off’ on the front panel in SPOS01††

‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic( see
Figure 5.1-29), when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If
an alternative “Operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user
and used to replace the signal generated by the original operated-condition logic.
The alternative ”Operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set for the scheme switch
“Command Off”.
after reaching the time set by the [SPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “SPOS01_OEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued from

- 279 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”,

point # 2 “user- configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [SPOS01-
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 5.1-26, can issue a signal “Operate” at the output point
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Local-Off-
Control” is true.
(v) SPOS: “Operate command On” generated in PLC function
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Select command Off from remote-end Operate command Off control from remote-end
Select command On from front panel Operate command On control from front-panel
Select command Off from front panel Operate command Off control from front-panel
On control by PLC function

Success
Select command On by the PLC Operate
PLC logic programmed Operate logic Signal output
function decision
by the user
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off by the PLC Operate command Off control

function by PLC function
Figure 5.1-27 Outline of operate command for ‘On’

Figure 5.1-27 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘On’ with the PLC function; it
describes the operate logic when an “Operate command On (PLC-On Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this command signal,
unlike the signal “operate command closing” (PLC-On Control).; the former connection point
(PLC#3) is used for the reception of the operate-command requiring the interlock check, the
latter connection point (PLC#4) is used or the reception of the operate-command not requiring
interlocking check. That is, for the SPOS01 function, when the user wishes to apply for the
operate logic the signal “Operate command On (PLC-On-Control)” generated in the user-
programmed logic and when the interlock check is required in the operate logic, apply the
signal at the connection point (PLC#3; is DEV01_CL_COMMAND). Alternatively, if the
interlock check is not required, apply the signal at the other connection point (PLC#4 i.e.
DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK); The PLC#3 and PLC#4 is denoted as the PLC#1 and PLC#2 in
Table 5.1-1. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON].

- 280 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vi) SPOS: “Operate command Off” generated in PLC logic

Figure 5.1-28 outlines the reception of the operate command for Off using the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the remote-end
Select command On by the PLC Operate command On by the PLC
Operate command Off by the PLC

Success
Select command Off by the PLC Operation
decision
by the user
Failed Do nothing
Figure 5.1-28 Outline of operate command for Off
Figure 5.1-28 depicts the operate logic when a signal “Operate Command Off (PLC-Off-
Control)” is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this
command signal, unlike the signal “Operate Command On (PLC-On-Control)”. That is, if an
inter-lock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3; i.e.,
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). If, on the other hand an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4; i.e., DEV01_OP_COMMAND).
PLC#1 an PLC#2 shown in Table 5.1-2 should be treated as PLC#3 and PLC#4 here.
Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
(vii) SPOS: operation condition logic

In a manner similar to which the conditions have been examined for the select command, the
conditions for an operate command should be understood. Figure 5.1-29 illustrates the logic to
examine an operate condition; the operate condition is determined by signal “SPOS01_STATE”,
if the functionality of the original logic does not meet with user-requirements, the following
alternatives are available:
2. The user can add another signal to the original logic.
Adding another operate condition signal

If the addition of another signal is required, the user can add the signal to the operate condition
logic using connection point “Additional Condition”
1. Add a user-preferred signal using “SPOS01IN_TMP_31”, listed as PLC#1 in Table

- 281 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.1-16.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixedlogic.
Replacing the original logic

If the user wishes to replace the operate condition logic completely, it can be achieved using
PLC connection point “User configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “SPOS01IN_TMP_41”, listed as PLC#2 in
Table 5.1-16.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to PLC.
Note: The user must program PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control
hierarchy condition to be provided with the user-programmed PLC logic may be
43R/L; it may be connected using PLC connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28” in
Figure 5.1-29.
Note: The output of the operate condition logic is provided separately for On-execution
and for Off-execution. To see the outputs, refer to Table 5.1-17.
Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Operate condition
Traveling OR
= SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
(510001 810101F59)
GEN. TRIP
= SPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(510001 820101F5A)
Command “ON-control” received &

received
SPOS01_STATE
(510001 0001011001)
Controlling Event
OFF
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31
[SPOS01- LGEXFFCT]
User configurable operate condition (PLC#2 connection
Fixedlogic
point)510001 810101EE66
SPOS01IN_TMP_41 &
Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point)*9
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28
&
SERI_ERR
[SPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 5.1-29 Operate condition logic for ON/OFF in SPOS01

1Note: “Command blocking” disables any operation except for itself; “Command
Blocking” is implemented as “CBK”in the SOFTSW function.The IEC 61850
standard defines communication blocking as “CmdBlk”. For more information, see

- 282 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
section 5.2. See the signal “CBK_STATE in Table 5.1-5.

protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling signifies that other operators are changing
the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED should be
inhibited whilst ever the events is detected. The detection signal is donated as
“Travelling OR” in Table 5.1-5.
4Note: If an IED is in the process of issuing a trip command, all control operation is
blocked until the trip operation has been completed. If the IED has a relay
application, the trip command is issued at the output point.
5Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a
“GEN.TRIP” in Table 5.1-5 command is not identical to “IED test status”.
6Note: The function “Event suppression” can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See section
5.1.4(i)-2)
8Note: The common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation –
direction of logic. When the user sets off for scheme switch (SCDEN), operation of
the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation – direction
compared with the previous operation direction. Alternatively, if On is set for the
scheme switch, the logic is not blocked.
9Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition” The user
must connect the “Control hierarchy condition” to the select condition logic using
the connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see Chapter
General control function: Control hierarchy condition. See PLC#3 of Table 5.1-6.
Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for both the On and the Off.
(viii) SPOS: operation signal names and numbers

Note: The user should note the meaning of the following abbreviations shown in column
“M/O” of each table:
“O” signifies that the signal is provided for optional use.
“M” signifies that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
“N/A” signifies that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 5.1-13 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 user a configurable condition)
510001 830101EE5B SPOS01IN_TMP_38 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
…. …. ….

- 283 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Table 5.1-14 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#2 user configurable condition)
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O

…. …. ….
Table 5.1-15 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#3 user configurable condition)
510001 800101EE56 SPOS01IN_TMP_34 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
…. …. ….
Table 5.1-16 PLC connection points (Input point PLC#1/#2 of additional and operate
conditions)
… … …
510001 810101EE66 SPOS01IN_TMP_41 SPOS01 user configurable operate condition (PLC#2) O
… … …

510001 8201011DD3 SPOS01_OEX_BO SPOS01 operate (ON) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
510001 8101011DD0 SPOS01_FEX_BO SPOS01 operate (OFF) command for Binary Output.

- 284 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.1-18 PLC monitoring points (signals with in operate logic)

510001 8101011E82 SPOS01_OEC_OK_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command
… …. ….
510001 8001011E81 SPOS01_FEC_OK_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command
… … …
Table 5.1-19 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for response)

510001 8601011E91 SPOS01_EX_FFL SPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
…. …. ….
(ix) SPOS: operation setting names

is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented by either
a “01” to “20”).
Table 5.1-20 Setting of Operate in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-PLSM Method of command output(SPOS01-20) Fix Fix/Var/Latch
SPOSxx-CPW Duration of command output(SPOS01-20) 1.0[sec] 0.1~50.0[sec]
SPOSxx-RST Detection time for terminating control (SPOS01-20) 30.0[sec] 0.1~100.0[sec]
SPOSxx-LGCTRCON Logic selector for operate condition (SPOS01-20) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
SPOSxx-LGCFEXOT Logic selector for command output (SPOS01-20) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
SPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of SPOS01-20 On Off / On
SPOSxx-LGEXFFCT Logic selector for operate condition (SPOS01-20) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 285 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.1.4 Setup for BIO module

The user should connect the SPOS input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits;
subsequently, the SPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. The user should
execute the following four steps below.
i SPOS: setup for BI connection for status-signals
ii SPOS: setup for BO connection for “Select command On/Off”
iii SPOS: setup for BO connection for “Operate command”
iv SPOS: setup for contact health check
Note that the SPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [SPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
(i) SPOS: setup for BI connection for status-signals

Figure 5.1-30 exemplifies the reception of signals at the SPOS01 function; the user can set a
input-point using the setting [SPOS01-NOPSG]†.
†Note:Normally an input-signal corresponding to phase-A is generated using a normally-

open contact (NO). If the signal is generated by the normally-closed contact, the
user is required to set scheme switch [SPOS01-NSOSGI] On in order that the
input-signal should be decided in inversion.
Connection with Binary input circuit

Suppose an input signal is provided on the first BI circuit at IO#1 slot. In this case, the user
should set the input point (200B01 8001001110†) for the setting [SPOS01-NOPSG], otherwise,
the SPOS01 function cannot run correctly.
Signals by Binary input circuits Signal acquisition logic in SPOS01 Output ‡
“SPOS01_STATE”
Event suppression detector (510001_0001011001)
BI signal connected by
setting [SPOS01-NOPSG]
& 1≥
&
[SPOS01-EN] Status before chattering S
R “SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”
On
(510001_8101011F59)
[SPOS01-SPPEN] Chattering detector
On
& To select and operate
condition logics
Figure 5.1-30 Acquisition of binary input signal in SPOS01

†Note: The user should set the actual input-points. For the input points, see Chapter
Technical description (BU): Binary IO module.
‡Note: In Figure 5.1-30 two signals can be issued: “SPOS01_STATE” and
“SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”. One is used in the select condition logic and the operate
condition logic (see Figure 5.1-13 and Figure 5.1-29). Another is used for operation
in the event suppression detector.

- 286 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Event suppression
If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the SPOS function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the SPOS function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created.
[SPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
from device On On On On On On On
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[SPOS-TELD] [SPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 5.1-31 Iterative signals and signals suppressed
Figure 5.1-31 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been
suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the
seventh signal (at Time B). This is because the function can count the iterative number of
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time A, the setting [SPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time B. The setting [SPOS-TELD] is pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time A (e.g., Time A to Time C).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [SPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time D to E).
To initiate event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch [SPOS01-SPPEN].
(ii) SPOS: setup for BO connection for “Select command On/Off”

Figure 5.1-32 exemplifies the connection for the select command On and Off. Suppose that
connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection point
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”†; as a result, the “ Select command On” and the “Select command Off”
signals are issued at the BOI.

- 287 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Terminal and
Selection logic in SPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”
(510001_8501011F76)
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
Select command in “BO1”

Signal designated by Select
SPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112) command
1≥
On/Off
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” & ≥1
Select command OFF in [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
SPOS01 [Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On &
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
PLC connection point in BO1
200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
Figure 5.1-32 Example of select command connection with BO1

†Note: Table 5.1-25 shows the remaining signals with the excepting
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”.
(iii) SPOS: setup for BO connection for “Operate command On/Off”

Figure 5.1-33 exemplifies the connection for operate command On/Off. Suppose that
connections with the BOs are achieved by the PLC function using connection
point ”SPOS01_OEX_BO” and ”SPOS01_FEX_BO” as a result, the “Operate command On” and
the “Operate command Off” signal is issued at BO2 or BO3.
Terminal and
Operate logic in SPOS01 BO2 and BO3 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
“BO2”
Signal designated by Operate
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112) command
“Operate command On
On” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO2-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO2_CPL] On &
Connected by Off
(200B01_8102011113)
“Programming” [Input signal 5]
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“SPOS01_FEX_BO” 200B01 310201E11D BO2_SOURCE
(510001_8101011DD0)
“BO3”
“Operate command Off
Off” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO3-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8202021113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310202E11D BO3_SOURCE
Figure 5.1-33 Example of operate commands connected with BO2 and BO3 at IO#1
†Note:Table 5.1-26 shows the remaining signals excepting “SPOS01_OEX_BO” and
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”.

- 288 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) SPOS: setup for contact health check

The SPOS01 function has contact health check feature for the BO circuits; hence, the user is
able to connect an output signal to the contact health check function when Fixedlogic is set for
scheme switch [SPOS01-LGXFEOT]†. Consequently, the SPOS01 function can determine
whether the signal has been successfully output from the BO. If a failure is reported, the
SPOS01 function determines that the signal has not been output successfully to the BO; then,
the command On or Off is canceled immediately and the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait
for a command” stage.
†Note:Table 5.1-28 shows settings for the health check feature in the other SPOS
functions.
Setting for “Select command On/Off”

For example, the point “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing
of the command, the user can connect point “BO1-RB” with the contact health check function
using the setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]. Do not key the point “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”.
Selection logic in
SPOS01
Contact health check

logic in SPOS01
(510001_8501011F76)
Result of contact
BO1 circuit at & health check in SPOS01 selection
IO_SLOT1
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Signal connected by
setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]
Connection made by the user
Figure 5.1-34 Example of connection of “Select command On” for the health check feature
Setting for “Operate Command On”

Similarly the point “BO2-RB” must be applied for the setting [SPOS01-OEXBORD].
Operate logic in
SPOS01
“SPOS01_OEX_BO” Contact health check

“510001_8201011DD3” logic in SPOS01
Result of contact
BO2 circuit at & Health check
IO_#1
“BO2-RB”
“200B01_8102011113”
Signal designated by
setting [SPOS01-OEXBORD]
Figure 5.1-35 Example connection of “Operate Command On” for the health check

- 289 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Operate-Off command check

Similarly, the point “BO3-RB” must be applied for the setting [SPOS01-FEXBORD].
Operate logic in
SPOS01

“SPOS01_FEX_BO”
logic in SPOS01
“510001_8101011DD0”
Result of contact
BO3 circuit at & health check
IO_#1
“BO3-RB”
“200B01_8102021113”
setting [SPOS01-FEXBORD]
Figure 5.1-36 Example connection of “Operate command off” for the health check feature
Proper setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 5.1-37 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1, BO2 and BO3 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is
working correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table
5.1-21, to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
Table 5.1-21 Setting example for contact health check

Example #1 Health check setting for Example #1
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001113(BO1-RB) set for [SPOS01-SLBORD] OK
“SPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113(BO2-RB) set for [SPOS01-OEXBORD] OK
“SPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO3” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [SPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Remote/Local-end Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
(510001_8501011F76) SW1 driven with
BO1 at IO_SLOT1
Select BO1 SW 1
command ON/OFF
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113) SW 2 On
Command
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW 3 Off
Operate-On BO2 SW2 driven with Command
command BO2 at IO_SLOT1
“BO2-RB”
Minus (−)
(200B01_8102011113)
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
BO3 SW3 driven with
Operate-Off BO3 at IO_SLOT1
command “BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
Figure 5.1-37 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example #1
Setting for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 5.1-38 shows a setting example for an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The

- 290 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
settings are implemented incorrectly, as shown in Table 5.1-22. BO1-RB is not chosen,
instead BO1 is actually chosen. In this case, the setting [SPOS01-SLBORD] is meaningless;
hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.
Table 5.1-22 Erroneous setting example for contact health check

Example #2 Health check setting in example #2
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001112(BO1) set for [SPOS01-SLBORD] NG
BIO module
43SW
Remote/Local-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB) Plus (+)
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” mistakenly chosen with
(510001_8501011F76) “200B01_8002001112” SW1 driven with
BO1at IO_SLOT1
Select BO1 SW 1
Command
ON/OFF
SW 2 On
“SPOS01_OEX_BO” Command
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW 3 Off
Operate-On BO2 SW2 driven with Command
command BO2 at IO_SLOT1
“BO2-RB” designated with Minus (−)
“SPOS01_FEX_BO” “200B01_8102011113”
(510001_8101011DD0)
BO3 SW3 driven with

Operate-Off BO3 at IO_SLOT1
command
“BO3-RB” designated with
“200B01_8202021113”
Figure 5.1-38 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #2
Setting for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 5.1-39 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special example
can issue a select command; which is called “operated by internal select function”. The user
does not need to consider of a BO circuit for a select command, when there are no BO circuits
available.
Table 5.1-23 Extra setting example for contact health check
Example #3 Setting for example #3
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any “BO” “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” set for [SPOS01-SLBORD] OK

- 291 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
BIO module
43SW
Remote/Local end “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” Plus (+)
SW1 is not driven with
(510001_8501011F76) Plus (+)
any BO1
SW 1
Select
command Physical BO is
ON/OFF
virtualized.
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW2 is driven with
BO2 at IO#1
Operate-On BO2 SW 2 On
command Command
“BO2-RB”
“SPOS01_FEX_BO” (200B01_8102011113) SW3 is driven with SW 3 Off
(510001_8101011DD0) BO3 at IO#1 Command
BO3 Minus (−)

Operate-Off
(200B01_8202021113)
Figure 5.1-39 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #3
Table 5.1-24 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in SPOSxx)
510001 0001011001 SPOS01_STATE Status of SPOS01
…. …. ….
…. …. ….
Table 5.1-25 PLC monitoring points (Output of select signal in SPOSxx)

510001 8501011F76 SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG Select command signal in SPOS01
…. …. ….
Table 5.1-26 PLC monitoring points (Output of operate signal in SPOSxx)

… … …
… …. ….

- 292 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(v) SPOS: setup setting names

“01” to “20”.)
Table 5.1-27 Settings for Binary input signals in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-EN Activate monitoring function of SPOS01-20 On Off / On
SPOSxx-NOPSG BI position for SPOS01-20 *none BI signal
SPOSxx-SPPEN Activate event suppression for SPOS01-20 On Off / On
SPOS-NELD Number of change to lock status 10 0~99
SPOS-TELD Time to lock status( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
SPOS-TELR Time to unlock status( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
Table 5.1-28 Settings for health check function in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-SLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user-preferred BO readback signal
SPOSxx-OEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user-preferred BO readback signal
SPOSxx-FEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user-preferred BO readback signal

- 293 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user can operate the SPOS function over IEC 61850 communications† following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the SPOS function is designed for the class of “Single Point
Controller (SPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
steps, each of which is discussed below,
(i) SPOS: editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the SPOS01 function. Figure 5.1-40
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “General Input/output (GGIO)” is chosen for the
SPOS01 function. After the user has defined an object “SPCSO”, the SPOS01 logical node can
be available with the name “GGIO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object
“SPCSO” in the SPOS01 logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in
the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Defining SBO mode

Figure 5.1-41 exemplifies the SPOS01 logic node saved as “GGIO1501”. In the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GGIO1501$SPCSO” using GR-TIEMS:

- 294 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Figure 5.1-41 LN editing screen for SBO (for example)
Defining DIR setting mode

Figure 5.1-42 exemplifies the SPOS01 logic node saved as “GGIO1501”. In the DIR mode, the
following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
(ii) SPOS: mapping output data

The user should group the SPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and Report; the user should
map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 5.1-43 illustrates how to
map a signal; it indicates that the signals for the SPOS01 function are required to be mapped
for IEC 61850 communication.

- 295 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.1-29 Mapping signals for SPCSO object

Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 510001 3001011008 SPOS01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 510001 6A01011009 SPOS01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO stVal BOOLEAN ST 510001 0001011001 SPOS01_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO q Quality ST 510001 3101011005 SPOS01_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO t Timestamp ST 510001 9001011006 SPOS01_TIMESTAMP
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 510001 0001011D90 SPOS01_STD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 5.1-43 ocCat attribute mapped for SPCSO object of GGIO1501
(iii) SPOS: mapping input data

The SPOS01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC 61850 communication. Table
5.1-30 shows the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO”; the user should map the input point to the Object reference having

- 296 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.1-30 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object for GIG01501
5100017 001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Drag and drop
Check “Input”

- 297 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.1.6 SPOS settings

SPOS01 (FunctionID:510001)
Common items SPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

SPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
SPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
SPOS01-EN Off / On - SPOS01 switch for Device01 Off
DEV01 items SPOS01-DEVNAME [Preferred text] - item name of Dev1 SPOS_Dev1 !
SPOS01-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
SPOS01-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) On !
SPOS01-NOPSG [Preferred Signal] - Normally Open Signal of Dev1 Not Assigned
SPOS01-SPPEN Off / On - Automatic event suppression function Off
SPOS01-CTREN Off / On - control mode (control enable) Off
SPOS01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
SPOS01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
SPOS01-SLBORD [Preferred Signal] - select binary output read data(DataID) 5100018501011F76
on direction execute binary output read
SPOS01-OEXBORD [Preferred Signal] - Not Assigned
data(DataID)
off direction execute binary output read
SPOS01-FEXBORD [Preferred Signal] - Not Assigned
data(DataID)
on/off direction execute binary output read
SPOS01-OFEXBORD [Preferred Signal] - Not Assigned
data(DataID)
FixedLogic /
SPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic
PLC
FixedLogic /
SPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
FixedLogic / Change logic about execute command fail
SPOS01-LGEXFFCT - FixedLogic
PLC factor
FixedLogic / Change logic about off direction execute
SPOS01-LGFEXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
FixedLogic /
SPOS01-LGCNFFCT - Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
SPOS01-PLSM Fix / Var / Latch - pulse mode Var
SPOS01-CPW 0.1 - 50.0 s control pulse width 1.0
SPOS01-RST 1.0 - 100.0 s response check timer 30.0
SPOS01-APBD Process / Bay - status change origin Process
Note: The SPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have
omitted the others because their setting tables are the same as the 1st device table
with the exception of the device number.

- 298 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.1.7 SPOS signals (DataID)

 Signal monitoring points in SPOS01
SPOS01(FunctionID:510001)
8001011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL
0001001F74 SPOS_SEL_OR SPOS multi select check signal for Auto sequence
0001011001 SPOS01_STATE SPOS01 state
0001011D90 SPOS01_SLD_RPT SPOS01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
0001011D97 SPOS01_EX_BO_OPOK SPOS01 execute binary output signal for SAS
0001011F52 SPOS01_TRA SPOS01 travelling info
0001011F53 SPOS01_TRA_CTR SPOS01 travelling info for control
0001011F75 SPOS01_SE_RCV SPOS01 select or execute command received
3101011D00 SPOS01_MMC_ST SPOS01 state for MIMIC
3101011D01 SPOS01_LCD_ST SPOS01 state for LCD
3101011D80 SPOS01_TMP_06 SPOS01 control event data (selected)
3101011D81 SPOS01_TMP_07 SPOS01 control event data (select fail)
3101011D82 SPOS01_TMP_08 SPOS01 control event data (select release)
3101011D83 SPOS01_TMP_09 SPOS01 control event data (execute output on)
3101011D84 SPOS01_TMP_10 SPOS01 control event data (execute command ng)
3101011D86 SPOS01_TMP_11 SPOS01 control event data (execute fail)
8001011D02 SPOS01_ST_OFF SPOS01 status Off
8001011D51 SPOS01_SC_OWS SPOS01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D52 SPOS01_SC_RCC SPOS01 select command by RCC
8001011D53 SPOS01_SC_RMT SPOS01 select command by Remote
8001011D54 SPOS01_SC_LCD SPOS01 select command by LCD
8001011D55 SPOS01_EC_OWS SPOS01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D56 SPOS01_EC_RCC SPOS01 execute command by RCC
8001011D57 SPOS01_EC_RMT SPOS01 execute command by Remote
8001011D58 SPOS01_EC_LCD SPOS01 execute command by LCD
8001011D59 SPOS01_EC_PLC SPOS01 execute command by PLC
8001011E76 SPOS01_SLD_CS SPOS01 selected condition signal
8001011E7D SPOS01_SLR_CS SPOS01 select release condition signal
8001011E7E SPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8001011E7F SPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8001011E81 SPOS01_FEC_OK_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal
8001011E93 SPOS01_EX_CMP SPOS01 execute complete signal
8001011F54 SPOS01_SC_ST_ERR SPOS01 select command mode err
8001011F55 SPOS01_EC_ST_ERR SPOS01 execute command mode err
8001011F56 SPOS01_NSL_CS06 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 06
8001011F66 SPOS01_SLD_CS04 SPOS01 selected condition signal 04
8101011D03 SPOS01_ST_ON SPOS01 status On
8101011DD0 SPOS01_FEX_BO SPOS01 off direction execute binary output signal
8101011E7B SPOS01_SLF_CS SPOS01 no direction select fail condition signal
8101011E82 SPOS01_OEC_OK_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal
8101011E85 SPOS01_FEC_F_CSF SPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8101011E86 SPOS01_OEC_F_CSF SPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8101011E9A SPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS SPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8101011F59 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP TEMP31
8101011F64 SPOS01_FSL_CS21 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 21
8201011DD3 SPOS01_OEX_BO SPOS01 on direction execute binary output signal
8201011E88 SPOS01_FEC_F_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal
8201011F5A SPOS01_F_BI_ERR TEMP32
8201011F5F SPOS01_NSL_CS10 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 10
8301011E89 SPOS01_OEC_F_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal
8301011E9C SPOS01_CCF_FCT_CS TEMP21

- 299 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 Signal monitoring points in SPOS01

SPOS01(FunctionID:510001)
8301011E9D SPOS01_CTR_SGN SPOS01 control logic stage(unselected)
8401011F77 SPOS01_OFEX_BO SPOS01 on/off direction execute binary output signal
8501011E8F SPOS01_EX_SFL SPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8501011F5B SPOS01_OSL_CS42 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 42
8501011F60 SPOS01_FSL_CS19 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 19
8501011F65 SPOS01_OSL_CS40 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 40
8501011F76 SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG SPOS01 select binary output signal by fixedlogic
8601011DC6 SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 on direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8601011E91 SPOS01_EX_FFL SPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8601011E95 SPOS01_CC_SS TEMP18
8601011F5C SPOS01_OSL_CS43 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 43
8601011F5E SPOS01_NSL_CS07 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 07
8601011F62 SPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 SPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8701011E96 SPOS01_CC_FS TEMP19
8701011E98 SPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS SPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8801011E9B SPOS01_CC_ST_ERR TEMP20
8801011F5D SPOS01_OSL_CS41 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 41
8801011F6B SPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 SPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 07
8901011DC0 SPOS01_NSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8901011F6C SPOS01_EX_CS01 SPOS01 execute condition signal 01
8A01011DC4 SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 off direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8A01011F61 SPOS01_FSL_CS20 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 20
8A01011F6D SPOS01_EX_CS02 SPOS01 execute condition signal 02
8B01011EA2 SPOS01_CTR_SGU SPOS01 control logic stage(under selection)
8B01011F68 SPOS01_EX_CS05 SPOS01 execute condition signal 05
8B01011F6E SPOS01_EX_CS03 SPOS01 execute condition signal 03
8E01011F57 SPOS01_SLD_TMO SPOS01 time out after selected
8E01011F67 SPOS01_EX_CS04 SPOS01 execute condition signal 04
8F01011F58 SPOS01_EX_CMP_TMO SPOS01 timeout after execute completion

SPOS01(Function ID: 510001)
800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND dev01 close command
800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK dev01 close command with interlock bypass
800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND dev01 open command
800101EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK dev01 open command with interlock bypass
820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 SPOS01IN_TMP_28
800101EE53 SPOS01IN_TMP_29 SPOS01IN_TMP_29
820101EE5A SPOS01IN_TMP_37 SPOS01IN_TMP_37
830101EE5B SPOS01IN_TMP_38 SPOS01IN_TMP_38

- 300 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

SPOS01(Function ID: 510001)
810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42 SPOS01IN_TMP_42
820101EE5E SPOS01IN_TMP_44 SPOS01IN_TMP_44
830101EE5F SPOS01IN_TMP_45 SPOS01IN_TMP_45
 Mapping points in SPOS01

SPOS(FunctionID:510001)
7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ SPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data)
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SPOS function. We
example, when the user wishes to find the “SPOS01_SC_OWS” point for
the 2nd device, use the description of “SPOS01_SC_OWS” in place of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for SPOS01_SC_OWS (i.e.,
“8001011D51”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8001021D51” of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal

- 301 -
CU
––––––––Software switch controller function (SOFTSW)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Software switch controller function (SOFTSW)

Sixty-three software-switches (CBK, and S43-01 to -61) are provided in the IED memory as
virtual switches; they are used to determine the operation of internal processes in the IED.
Either the criteria “Enable (On)” or “Disable (Off)” may be applied for each software switch,
S43. One software switch has already been defined for a special purpose; it is used to blocking
command (CBK) functions. The other switches, S43-01 to S43-61, are provided for general-
purpose usage.

- 302 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Figure 4.1-1 shows the eight switches and their controller functions. The statuses of the S43
switches are stored in the IED non-volatile memory; hence, the IED can retrieve their status
while power is not being supplied to the IED.
Switches for
CMDBLK ILKBYP special purposes
(CBK) (ICB)
SOFTSW1 SOFTSW2 SOFTSW3 SOFTSW61 General purpose

(S43-01) (S43-02) (S43-03) (S43-61) switches
Figure 5.2-1 Software switches (S43s) and their controller
The SOFTSW function can control a number of S43 software switches separately. To
simplify the explanation provided below only the SOFTSW1 function is discussed. The features
provided in CBK, ICB and SOFTSW2–61 switches are similar to the SOFTSW1 switch.
Tips: The user can operate CBK and ICB without user programming. Jump to section
4.1.5 where we discuss how to map their signals for IEC61850 communication.
When the user wishes to program the SOFTSW functions using the S43-01–S43-
61 switches, the user is required to read from section 4.1.2 onwards.
5.2.1 SOFTSW types

(i) SOFTSW: command blocking (CBK)
When the user wishes to avoid the control of devices by mistake during test and maintenance,
the user can use the command blocking function so that mal-operation can be avoided. The
execution of command blocking is available from the IED front panel. Additionally, the IEC
61850 standard provides command blocking (CmdBlk) for remote operation and the CBK
function is defined at the logical node (LN) given in IEC 61850-7-1 (Edition 2.0). Thus, the IED
can override all commands received when the command blocking function is engaged from the
local-end and the remote-end. With regard to the command “CmdBlk” from the remote-end,
the command is received at the input point “CBK_CONROL_REQ”, as shown in Table 4.1-1.
For SOFTSW1 operation, the user should set the scheme switch [CBK-EN] to On.
Input CBK logic Output
To “Select condition logic” and

Reception of CMDBLK “Operate condition logic” †
CBK_STATE
All control commands must be blocked simultaneously
Blocking of all commands is (522001 000A011001)
522001 700A016D08 CBK__CONTROL_REQ
performed.
Figure 5.2-2 Logic “CBK” and response “CBK_STATE”

†Note:The user is required to map a communication signal to the input-point. For
mapping, see section 4.1.5. “CBK_STATE” signal is used in control applications so
that control applications can determine their operational conditions. See Chapter
Control and monitoring application (BU) : Section SPOS (5.1), DPOS (5.6), TPOS

- 303 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(5.7), and OPTR (5.3).
(ii) SOFTSW: interlock blocking (ICB)

When the user executes control applications from the IED front panel, the Interlock bypassing
(ICB) function enables control applications to bypass their interlock conditions if required.
When the ICB is engaged, all control processes, operated from the IED front panel, are able to
bypass their interlock conditions. The user should note that operation of the ICB function is
available for five minutes following its initiation. For operation of the ICB function, the user
should set the scheme switch [ICB-EN] to On.
Input ICB logic Output
To “Select logic” and
Reception of ILKBYP in S4302 ICB_STATE “Operation logic”†
All interlocking condition shall be bypassed Interlock bypassing is (522001 000A021001
on the operation from the IED front panel performed. )
Figure 5.2-3 Logic “ICB” and response “ICB_STATE”

†Note:The ICB_STATE is provided for the “Select logic” and “Operate logic” in the
control applications.
(iii) S43-01 to 61: controlling with SOFTSW1–61 (S43xx)

The SOFTSW1 to SOFTSW61 functions are provided for control of the S43-01 to S43-61
switches, as described previously. For example, Figure 4.1-3 shows the SOFTSW1 function
controlling the S43-01 switch; control of the S43-01 switch is enabled when the user sets the
scheme switch [S4301-EN]† to On. Likewise, the user is required to set On for scheme switches
[S4302-EN] to [S4361-EN] with regard to the SOFTSW2–61 operations, respectively.
Input SOFTSW1 logic Output
To user-programmed logic
Command reception in S4301 S4301_STATE
Command provided by the PLC function
Software switch operation is (522001 000A041001)
522001 700A046D08 S4301__CONTROL_REQ performed.
Figure 5.2-4 Logic “SOFTSW1” and response “S4301_STATE”
(iv) SOFTSW: output-status

Table 4.1-1 shows the list of output signals of the SOFTSW functions.
Table 5.2-1 Output signals of SOFTSW function
522001 000A011001 CBK_STATE CBK status ( Off / Blocked)
522001 000A021001 ICB_STATE IBK switch status
…. …. ….

- 304 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.2.2 Control logics (SBO/DIR modes)

For example, the user should set scheme switch [S4301-EN] to On when the SOFTSW1
function is required to be operated. Table 4.1-9 shows all scheme switches for the SOFTSW
functions.
(i) SOTFSW: “Select command for On operation” received from remote-

end
Figure 4.1-4 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-ON-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 function. The logic has an input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” for the
reception of the select command. That is, the input-point should be mapped for the IEC61850
communication. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is significant for the SOFTSW1
operation; hence, an operation failure in the IED is indicated if mapping is not performed
correctly. Section 4.1.5 discusses how to map the information of the IEC61850 to the input-
510001 7001016D08
points.

For SBO operation
& 1≥ &
For DIR operation

For monitoring
Operate command
(522001_8F0A041F49)
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s

In DIR operate
510001 8601011DC6
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.2-5 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
4.1-5 and Table 4.1-8.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided from select condition scheme. For more
automatic control. The SOFTSW1 function is blocked for the ASEQ function when
it is in operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see section 5.9.
*Note:The SOFTSW1 function can run on either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use the signal “ctlmodel” in the IEC61850 communication.

- 305 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user can monitor a “Select success” signal at the output point “S4301_OSL_CSF”, when
the SOFTSW1 function determines that the received “Remote-ON-Control” signal is true. If
the SOFTSW1 function determines that the “Remote-ON-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1
function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(ii) SOFTSW: “Select command for Off operation” received from remote
end
Figure 4.1-5 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is applied
at the SOFTSW1 function. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the reception
of the select command (Remote-OFF-Control).

For SBO operation
& 1≥ &
For DIR operation

For monitoring
Operate command
(522001_8D0A041F45)
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.2-6 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
4.1-5 and Table 4.1-8.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided in Figure 4.1-10.

The SOFTSW1 function, in Figure 4.1-5, can issue a “Select success” signal at output point
“S4301_FSL_CSF” when the SOFTSW1 function determines that the input signal “Select
command (Remote-OFF-Control)” is true. If the SOFTSW1 function determines that the
“Remote-OFF-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.

- 306 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) SOFTSW: “Select command for On operation” entered on the front

panel
Input signal
Figure 4.1-6 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is applied to
the SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when “On” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped. Note that the user should set scheme
switch [S4301-CTRAHMI] to SBO when the operation from the IED front panel is performed;
we discuss how to operate in Chapter Technical description (BU): User interface: Control sub-
menu.

For SBO operation
& 1≥ &
(522001_8F0A041F49)
DIR
0 t
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.2-7 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.1-8.
§Note:The SOFTSW1 function is blocked when the ASEQ function is in operation.

When the state of “select condition” is true, the SOFTSW1 function can issue an output signal
“Select success” at the output-point “S4301_OSD_CSF”.
Note: The signal “S4301_OSD_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure 4.1-4. If the
input signal “Local-ON-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to the
(iv) SOFTSW: “Select command for Off operation” entered on the front
panel
Input signal
Figure 4.1-7 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is applied

- 307 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when the user presses “OFF” key on the
IED front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped.

For SBO operation
& 1≥ &
(522001_8D0A041F45)
DIR
0 t
0.1s

0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.2-8 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: Figure 4.1-7 is used for the discussion of SOFTSW1 logic. To identify the output
points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.1-8.

When the state of “select condition” is true, the SOFTSW1 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “S4301_FSD_CSF”.
Note: The “S4301_FSD_CSF” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4.1-5.
That is, this signal of the logic appears at the same PLC monitoring point. If the
input signal “Local-OFF-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to
(v) SOFTSW: “Select command for On operation” generated in PLC

function
Figure 4.1-8 shows that the select logic when a “Select command (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is
logic; the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_ON”.

- 308 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output

ON-control command
Operate command
522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON For monitoring
(522001_8F0A411F49)
0.1s

Select “Failed”
0.6s
Figure 5.2-9 Select logic for ON operation by PLC in SOFTSW1††

†Note:Direct operation mode (DIR) is only available.
‡Note:“select condition” signal is provided. See Figure 4.1-10.
4.1-2 and Table 4.1-8.

The SOFTSW1 function shown in Figure 4.1-8, can issue a “Select success” signal at output-
point “S4301_OSD_CSF”.
Note: The signal “S4301_OSD_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4.1-4.
(vi) SOFTSW: “Select command for Off operation” generated in PLC

function
Figure 4.1-9 shows the SOFTSW1 logic for a “Select command (PLC-OFF-Control)” signal. The
input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC logic; the user can connect the
signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_OFF”.
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in SOFTSW1 Output

OFF-control command
Operate command
522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF For monitoring
(522001_8D0A411F45)
0.1s

Select “Failed”
0.6s
Figure 5.2-10 Select logic for OFF operation by PLC in SOFTSW1††

†Note:Direct operation mode (DIR) is available only.

- 309 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
4.1-3 and Table 4.1-8.
Output signal to monitoring

The SOFTSW1 function shown in Figure 4.1-9, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output
point “S4301_FSD_CSF”.
Note: The output point “S4301_FSD_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.1-5.
(vii) SOFTSW: selection condition

Figure 4.1-10 shows the select condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function. The SOFTSW1
Command blocking*1 defined as ”CBK”)
To selection logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ Select condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL

received
S4301_STATE
(522001 000A411001)
Same Directional
Controlling Event

522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[S4301-EN]
On
Figure 5.2-11 Select condition logic for ‘ON/OFF’ in SOFTSW1

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except its own; see the signal
“CBK_STATE (Table 4.1-1)” as the state of “Command Blocking” in the SOFTSW
function.
philosophy. It can be used to protect a substation. The user can configure it using
GR-TIEMS.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling (Traveling OR in Table 4.1-7)” is detected in the
IED, it indicated that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus,
the IED should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event
is detected.
4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in command is
not identical to “IED test status”.

- 310 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Control hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be

43R/L; the user can connect it at PLC connection point “S4301_CTRL_RIGHT” of
Table 4.1-4.
(viii) SOFTSW: selection signal names and numbers

each table:
used.
Table 5.2-2 PLC connection point #1 (Inputs point for ‘On’ control)
522001 850A01EDE1 CBK_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for CBK O
522001 850A02EDE1 ICB_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for ICB O
…. ….. ….
Table 5.2-3 PLC connection point #2 (Input points for ‘Off’ control)
522001 860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for CBK O
522001 860A02EDE0 ICB_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for ICB O
…. ….. ….
Table 5.2-4 PLC connection point #3 (Input points on select condition logic)
522001 820A01ED50 CBK_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in CBK M
522001 820A02ED50 ICB_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in ICB M
…. ….. ….
Table 5.2-5 Mapping points for the command reception in SOFTSWx

522001 700A016D08 CBK_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in CBK M

522001 700A026D08 ICB_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in ICB M

- 311 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

…. ….. ….
Table 5.2-6 Mapping points for the output signals of SOFTSWx

522001 000A011D90 CBK_STSELD Selection completed signal in CBK M
522001 000A021D90 ICB_STSELD Selection completed signal in ICB M
…. ….. ….

Table 5.2-8 PLC monitoring points (ON and OFF selection completion)
522001 8F0A011F49 CBK_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in CBK
522001 8F0A021F49 ICB_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in ICB
…. …. …..
522001 8D0A011F45 CBK_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in CBK
522001 8D0A021F45 ICB_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in ICB
…. …. ….
(ix) SOFTSW: selection setting names
Table 5.2-9 Setting of SOFTSWx control

CBK-EN Function activation in CBK On Off / On

ICB-EN Function activation in ICB On Off / On

- 312 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

…. …. … ….
CBK-CTRAHMI HMI activation in CBK On Off / On
ICB-CTRAHMI HMI activation in ICB On Off / On
…. …. … …

- 313 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.2.3 Cancelling logic (SBO mode)

In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel
conditions are satisfied, accordingly, the function can discard the select command.
(i) SOFTSW: “Cancel” received from remote-end

Figure 4.1-11 shows the logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is applied to
the SOFTSW1 function. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as the
“Selection command (Remote-On-Control)”510001
signal.
7001016D08

Cancel command
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ
Successes to cancel
&
Operation Failed
Unmatched condition &
detected†
Figure 5.2-12 Cancel logic by the reception of the command from the remote end
(ii) SOFTSW: “Cancel” received from local-end

Figure 4.1-12 shows the logic when a “Cancel command (Local-cancel)” signal is applied to the
SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the user is not required to map it. When the logic receives input “Local-cancel”
signal, the logic is able to output a result signal, provided that the “unmatched condition
510001 7001016D08
detected” checking is satisfied.
Cancel command
Successes to cancel
&
Unmatched condition
& Operation Failed
detected†
Figure 5.2-13 Cancel logic by the reception of the command at local end

The user should map the operation command to the operate logic. If the operation conditions
are satisfied, the IED is able to change the state in the SOFWSW1–61 (S43-01 to S43-61).

- 314 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) SOFTSW: “Operate command On” received from remote-end

Figure 4.1-13 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Remote-ON-Control)” signal is
reception of the “Select command (Remote-On-Control)”.
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (522001_890A041F5A)

& OFF to ON
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL “S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_ON &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 5.2-14 ‘ON’ Operation logic by remote end in SOFTSW1†

(ii) SOFTSW: “Operate command Off” received from remote-end

Figure 4.1-14 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Remote-Off-Control)” signal is
reception of the signal “Operate command (Remote-Off-Control)”.
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-OFF-Control” (522001_8A0A041F5B)

& ON to OFF
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_OFF &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 5.2-15 ‘OFF’ Operation logic by remote end in SOFTSW1†


- 315 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

§Note: The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
(iii) SOFTSW: “Operate command On” received from local end

Figure 4.1-15 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution of On” key is
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
(522001_890A041F5A)
Operate Command
Command “Local-On-Control”
& OFF to ON
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_ON &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 5.2-16 ‘ON’ Operation logic at local in SOFTSW1†

Table 4.1-10, Table 4.1-12, and Table 4.1-14.
(iv) SOFTSW: “Operate command Off” received from local end

Figure 4.1-16 shows the logic when an “Operation command (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution for Off” key is
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
(522001_8A0A041F5B)
Command “Local-Off-Control” Operate Command

& ON to OFF
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_OFF &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 5.2-17 ‘OFF’ Operation logic at local in SOFTSW1†

- 316 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
4.1-11, Table 4.1-12, and Table 4.1-13.
‡Note: “operate condition” signal is provided from operate condition scheme. For more
§Note: The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
(v) SOFTSW: “Operate command On” generated in PLC logic

Figure 4.1-17 shows the logic when an “Operate command (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC logic;
the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_ON”.
ON-control command “S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC”

522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON Operate Command

& OFF to ON
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
S4301_ST_ON &
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 5.2-18 ‘ON’ Operation logic using PLC logic†

(vi) SOFTSW: “Operate command Off” generated in PLC logic

Figure 4.1-18 shows the logic when an “Operation command (PLC-Off-Control)” signal is
logic; the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_OFF”.

- 317 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
ON-control command “S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC”

522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF Operate Command

& ON to OFF
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
S4301_ST_OFF &
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 5.2-19 ‘Off’ Operation logic using PLC logic†

(vii) SOFTSW: operation condition

Figure 4.1-19 shows the operate condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function. The SOFTSW1
Command blocking*1 (defined as ”CBK”)
To operate logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ operate condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL

received
S4301_STATE
(522001 000A041001)
Same Directional
Controlling Event

522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[S4301-EN]
On
Figure 5.2-20 Operate condition logic for ON/OFF in SOFTSW1*6

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except for itself; See the signal
“S4301_STATE (Table 4.1-1)” as the state of “Command Blocking” in the SOFTSW
function.

- 318 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
philosophy. It can be used to protect the substation. The user can configure it
using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling (Traveling OR in Table 4.1-7)” signifies that
other operators are changing the status of one or more devices. Thus, device
operation by the IED should be inhibited whilst the event is detected.
4Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when the “Test-bit status” in a
5Note: The user must program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control
hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be 43R/L;
the user can connect it with PLC connection point “S4301_CTRL_RIGHT” of
Figure 4.1-19.
6Note: To identify the PLC connection points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.1-4.
(viii) SOFTSW: operation signal names and numbers

Table 5.2-10 Output signals on starting operation “Off to On”
522001 890A011F5A CBK_OEC_CHG “Off to On” operation start in CBK
522001 890A021F5A ICB_OEC_CHG “Off to On” operation start in ICB
… …. ….
Table 5.2-11 Output signals on starting operation “On to Off”

522001 8A0A011F5B CBK_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in CBK

522001 8A0A021F5B ICB_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in ICB
… … …
522001 8C0A401F5D S4361_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in SOFTSW61 (S43-61)
Table 5.2-12 Success signals of the operation

522001 870A011F62 CBK_EX_SS Operation succeeded in CBK
522001 870A021F62 ICB_EX_SS Operation succeeded in ICB

- 319 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
Table 5.2-13 OFF status signals on the operation

522001 830A011D02 CBK_ST_OFF “Off” status of CBK
522001 830A021D02 ICB_OFF “Off” status of ICB
… … …
Table 5.2-14 ON status signals on the operation

522001 810A011D03 CBK_ST_ON “On” status of CBK
522001 810A021D03 ICB_ST_ON “On” status of ICB
… … …
Table 5.2-15 Failure signals generated by PLC control

522001 800A011DE0 CBK_PLC_CTRL_FAIL Control failure in CBK
522001 800A021DE0 ICB_PLC_CTRL_FAIL Control failure in ICB
… … …
Table 5.2-16 Output signals on starting operation “Off to On” by PLC

522001 8B0A011F5C CBK_OEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA022

522001 8B0A021F5C ICB_OEC_CHG_PLC ICB signal after KC_S43_SA022
… … …
Table 5.2-17 Output signals on starting operation “On to Off” by PLC

522001 8C0A011F5D CBK_FEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA023

- 320 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

522001 8C0A021F5D ICB_FEC_CHG_PLC ICB signal after KC_S43_SA023
… … …

- 321 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.2.5 Signal mapping for IEC 61850 communication

The user can operate the SOFTSW1 function over IEC 61850 communications following
mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the SOFTSW1 function is designed for the class of
“Single Point Controller (SPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should
follow these steps, each of which is discussed below:
(i) SOFTSW: editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the SOFTSW1 function. Figure 4.1-20
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “General Input/Output (GGIO)” is chosen for the
SOFTSW1 function for IEC 61850 communication. After the user has defined an object
“SPCSO”, the SOFTSW1 logical node can be saved with the name “GGIO” plus “LN Instance”.
Create a definition of the object “SPCSO” in SOFTSW1 logical node. Either the SBO mode or
the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Defining SBO mode

the SOFTSW1 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“GGIO701$SPCSO” using GR-TIEMS;

- 322 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass (choice ”operate-once”)
Defining DIR mode

the SOFTSW1 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using
GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
(ii) SOFTSW: mapping output data

The user should group the SOFTSW1 (S4301) signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT;
the user should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.

- 323 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 4.1-18 shows the required mapping signals in SOFTSW1 function to the IEC 61850
communications. Figure 4.1-23 shows how to map a signal.
Table 5.2-18 Mapping signals for SPCSO object.

Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 522001 310A041008 S4301_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 522001 6A0A041009 S4301_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO stVal INT32 ST 522001 000A041001 S4301_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO q Quality ST 522001 310A041005 S4301_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO t Timestamp ST 522001 900A041006 S4301_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 522001 000A041D90 S4301_STSELD
(iii) SOFTSW: mapping input data

The SOFTSW1 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 4.1-19 shows the input-point
“S4301_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO”; the user should map
the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC† to the input-point. Figure 4.1-24 shows

- 324 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.2-19 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object in SOFTSW1 function
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ
Drag and drop
Check “Input”

- 325 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.2.6 SOFTSW settings

SOTFSW(FunctionID:522001)
CBK-EN Off / On - control command block switch Enable Off

ICB-EN Off / On - Interlock check bypass in controlled on LCD Off
… …. …. ….
CBK CBK-NAME [Preferred text] - item name of control command block signal CMDBLK !
CBK-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
CBK-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) Blocked !
CBK-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
CBK-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
ICB ICB-NAME [Preferred text] - item name of interlock bypass signal ILKBYP !
ICB-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
ICB-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) Bypass !
ICB-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
ICB-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
S43 SW1 S4301-SWNAME [Preferred text] - item name of soft 43 switch signal SOFTSW1 !
… … …. ….

- 326 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.2.7 SOFTSW signals (DataID)

000A011001 CBK_STATE CMDBLK status
000A011D90 CBK_STSELD CMDBLK the controllable data is in the status
310A011D00 CBK_STS_MIMIC CMDBLK status
310A011D01 CBK_STS CMDBLK status
800A011D51 CBK_SC_OWS CMDBLK select command by OWS(HMI)
800A011D52 CBK_SC_RCC CMDBLK select command by RCC
800A011D53 CBK_SC CMDBLK select command
800A011D54 CBK_SC_LCD CMDBLK select command by LCD
800A011D55 CBK_EC_OWS CMDBLK execute command by OWS(HMI)
800A011D56 CBK_EC_RCC CMDBLK execute command by RCC
800A011D57 CBK_EC CMDBLK execute command
800A011D58 CBK_EC_LCD CMDBLK execute command by LCD
800A011DE0 CBK_PLC_CTRL_FAIL CMDBLK PLC control fail
800A011F42 CBK_TMP2 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA002
810A011D03 CBK_ST_ON CMDBLK On state
830A011D02 CBK_ST_OFF CMDBLK Off state
830A011F41 CBK_NSD_CSF CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA001
850A011F4A CBK_TMP8 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A011F5E CBK_TMP11 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A011F43 CBK_TMP3 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A011F4E CBK_SLF_FCT_FLG01 CMDBLK signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A011F50 CBK_SLF_FCT_FLG02 CMDBLK signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A011F62 CBK_EX_SS CMDBLK signal execute success
880A011F4B CBK_TMP9 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A011F4D CBK_TMP10 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A011F5F CBK_TMP12 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A011F5A CBK_OEC_CHG CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA011
890A011F61 CBK_TMP14 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA014
8A0A011F47 CBK_TMP6 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A011F5B CBK_FEC_CHG CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A011F4C CBK_CTR_SGU CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A011F5C CBK_OEC_CHG_PLC CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A011F5D CBK_FEC_CHG_PLC CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A011F45 CBK_FSD_CSF CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A011F4F CBK_SLD_TM0 CMDBLK signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A011F49 CBK_OSD_CSF CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A011F51 CBK_EX_CMP_TM0 CMDBLK signal after MCTS43_SC002
000A021001 ICB_STATE ILKBYP status
000A021D90 ICB_STSELD ILKBYP the controllable data is in the status

- 327 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

310A021D00 ICB_STS_MIMIC ILKBYP status
310A021D01 ICB_STS ILKBYP status
800A021D51 ICB_SC_OWS ILKBYP select command by OWS(HMI)
800A021D52 ICB_SC_RCC ILKBYP select command by RCC
800A021D53 ICB_SC ILKBYP select command
800A021D54 ICB_SC_LCD ILKBYP select command by LCD
800A021D55 ICB_EC_OWS ILKBYP execute command by OWS(HMI)
800A021D56 ICB_EC_RCC ILKBYP execute command by RCC
800A021D57 ICB_EC ILKBYP execute command
800A021D58 ICB_EC_LCD ILKBYP execute command by LCD
800A021DE0 ICB_PLC_CTRL_FAIL ILKBYP PLC control fail
800A021F42 ICB_TMP2 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA002
800A021F63 ICB_FLG1 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA015
810A021D03 ICB_ST_ON ILKBYP On state
830A021D02 ICB_ST_OFF ILKBYP Off state
830A021F41 ICB_NSD_CSF ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA001
840A021F65 ICB_RST ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA017
850A021F4A ICB_TMP8 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A021F5E ICB_TMP11 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A021F43 ICB_TMP3 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A021F4E ICB_SLF_FCT_FLG01 ILKBYP signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A021F50 ICB_SLF_FCT_FLG02 ILKBYP signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A021F62 ICB_EX_SS ILKBYP signal execute success
870A021F64 ICB_FLG2 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA016
880A021F4B ICB_TMP9 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A021F4D ICB_TMP10 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A021F5F ICB_TMP12 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A021F5A ICB_OEC_CHG ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA011
890A021F61 ICB_TMP14 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA014
8A0A021F47 ICB_TMP6 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A021F5B ICB_FEC_CHG ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A021F4C ICB_CTR_SGU ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A021F5C ICB_OEC_CHG_PLC ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A021F5D ICB_FEC_CHG_PLC ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A021F45 ICB_FSD_CSF ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A021F4F ICB_SLD_TM0 ILKBYP signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A021F49 ICB_OSD_CSF ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A021F51 ICB_EX_CMP_TM0 ILKBYP signal after MCTS43_SC002

- 328 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 329 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 330 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

…. …. ….
000A3F1001 S4360_STATE SOFT 43 switch60 status
000A3F1D90 S4360_STSELD SOFT 43 switch60 the controllable data is in the status
310A3F1D00 S4360_STS_MIMIC SOFT 43 switch60 status
310A3F1D01 S4360_STS SOFT 43 switch60 status
800A3F1D51 S4360_SC_OWS SOFT 43 switch60 select command by OWS(HMI)
800A3F1D52 S4360_SC_RCC SOFT 43 switch60 select command by RCC
800A3F1D53 S4360_SC SOFT 43 switch60 select command
800A3F1D54 S4360_SC_LCD SOFT 43 switch60 select command by LCD
800A3F1D55 S4360_EC_OWS SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by OWS(HMI)

- 331 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

800A3F1D56 S4360_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by RCC
800A3F1D57 S4360_EC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command
800A3F1D58 S4360_EC_LCD SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by LCD
800A3F1DE0 S4360_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch60 PLC control fail
810A3F1D03 S4360_ST_ON SOFT 43 switch60 On state
830A3F1D02 S4360_ST_OFF SOFT 43 switch60 Off state
830A3F1F41 S4360_NSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA001
850A3F1F4A S4360_TMP8 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A3F1F5E S4360_TMP11 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A3F1F4E S4360_SLF_FCT_FLG01 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A3F1F50 S4360_SLF_FCT_FLG02 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A3F1F62 S4360_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch60 signal execute success
880A3F1F4B S4360_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A3F1F4D S4360_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A3F1F5F S4360_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A3F1F5A S4360_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA011
8A0A3F1F47 S4360_TMP6 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A3F1F5B S4360_FEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A3F1F4C S4360_CTR_SGU SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A3F1F5C S4360_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A3F1F5D S4360_FEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A3F1F45 S4360_FSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A3F1F4F S4360_SLD_TM0 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A3F1F49 S4360_OSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A3F1F51 S4360_EX_CMP_TM0 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after MCTS43_SC002

- 332 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF CMDBLK change to off
850A01EDE1 CBK_CHG_TO_ON CMDBLK change to on
820A01ED50 CBK_CTRL_RIGHT CMDBLK control right from PLC
860A02EDE0 ICB_CHG_TO_OFF ILKBYP change to off
850A02EDE1 ICB_CHG_TO_ON ILKBYP change to on
820A02ED50 ICB_CTRL_RIGHT ILKBYP control right from PLC

- 333 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

….. …. …..
860A3FEDE0 S4360_CHG_TO_OFF SOFT 43 switch60 change to off
850A3FEDE1 S4360_CHG_TO_ON SOFT 43 switch60 change to on
820A3FED50 S4360_CTRL_RIGHT SOFT 43 switch60 control right from PLC
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SOFTSW function. We
example, when the user wishes to find the “S4301_EC_LCD” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “S4302_EC_LCD” in place of
“S4301_EC_LCD”. The user can obtain the ID value of “S4302_EC_LCD” by
using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for S4301_EC_LCD (i.e.,
“8C00041F45”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8C00051F45” of
“S4302_EC_LCD”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal

- 334 -
CU
––––––––Operation time reset function (OPTR)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Operation time reset function (OPTR)

As shown in Figure 5.3-1, all operation-times measured by the DPOS and TPOS functions†
can be cleared when the operation time reset controller (OPTR) function issues a reset
command “OPTR01_RST_CMD”. That is, within the respective functions the measured time
intervals (OT1 and the others‡) are entirely cleared upon occurrence of the reset command.
OPTR function
Sending reset command

“OPTR01_RST_CMD” DPOS01 function
Clearing measured time-intervals
“OT1”, “OT2”, “OT3” and “OT4”
Sending reset
command
“OPTR01_RST_CMD”
TPOS01 function
Clearing measured time-intervals
“OT1”, “OT2”, “OT3” and “OT4”
Figure 5.3-1 Reception of a reset command

†Note:For more information with regard to measurement, refer to the section
“Measurement of operation intervals” for the respective DPOS and TPOS
functions. The user should note that all interval OTs specific to a particular
function are cleared by the OPTR reset command.

- 335 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
‡Note:The measurements in DPOS function are grouped into four intervals in each
respective device. Measurement is possible by sensing the device events. The
measured intervals are accumulated; they are grouped into four intervals (OT1–
OT4), which the user can monitor from the IED screen. Figure 5.3-2 and Figure
5.3-3 exemplify the four intervals upon occurrence of On (Closing)-control event
and Off (Open)-control event, provided that the DPOS function operates.
Issuing Off control
Sensing
intermediate state On Intermediate Off
Device status for “Off”

OT1 OT2
Figure 5.3-2 Two intervals (OT1 and OT2) for Off-control event
Issuing On control
Sensing
intermediate state Off Intermediate On
Device status for “On”

OT3 OT4
Figure 5.3-3 Two intervals (OT3 and OT4) for On-control event
Tips: If the user wishes to implement the OPTR function quickly, go to section 5.3.4,
which discusses how to map signal-points for the IEC 61850 communication.

- 336 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user should set the scheme switch [OPTR01-EN] to On prior to the OPTR operation. Figure
5.3-4 shows select logic in the OPTR function.
Wait for a command

Select logic
Cancel logic
Resetting OTs from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 5.3-4 Outline of select command for resetting
(i) OPTR: input required for mapping

Figure 5.3-5 shows the select logic when a “Select command (Reset)” signal enters the OPTR
function. The logic has the input-point “OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception. That is,
the input-point should be mapped for the IEC61850 communication. The function encounters
an operation failure if mapping is not performed correctly. We discuss how to map the input-
points for the IEC61850 communication in section 5.3.4.
Input Select logic in OPTR Output
OPTR function (Function ID: 529001)

OPTR01_FSE_RCV
Command “Reset”
For SBO operation (529001 800C011F42)
529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Select
command & 1≥
&
For DIR operation
Operate
command &
OPTR01_NSD_CSF
To “Wait for a next command”
(529001 830C011F41)
0 t
529001 000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD
0.2s
0 t
Failed
0.3s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function
(AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.3-5 Select logic for resetting intervals OT1 to OT4

the automatic control. The OPTR operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being
*Note:The OPTR function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a

- 337 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
signal “ctlmodel” when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
(ii) OPTR: output required for mapping mapping

The OPTR function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“OPTR01_NSD_CSF”, when the OPTR function can decide that the input signal “Select
command (Reset)” is true. If the OPTR function decides that the “Select command (Reset)” is
not true, the OPTR function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(iii) OPTR: selecting condition

Figure 5.3-6 shows the select condition logic in the OPTR function.

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE To selection logic
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL

529001 820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[OPTR1_EN]
On
Figure 5.3-6 Select condition logic in the OPTR function*6

*1Note: The “command blocking” disables any operation except for itself: the
“command blocking” is stated with “CBK” in a software controller (SOFTSW). The
IEC61850 defines the “command blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more information on
CBK, see section 5.2. See the signal “CBK_STATE” of Table 5.3-1.
*2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is operation philosophy in the common
control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation. The user
should program it using the GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted as
“DCB RCV_OR in Table 5.3-1. For more information, see Chapter General control
function: Command controls (DCB).
*3Note: If events “device-travelling” are detected in the CMNCTRL function, we can
see that some statuses of the devices are being changed by other operators. Thus,
the IED should stop any operation while the events are being detected. The
detecting signal is denoted by “Traveling OR” in Table 5.3-1.
*4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to “IED test status”.

- 338 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
*5Note: The user should program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user should connect its condition with the select condition logic using the
connection point “OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT”. For more information, see Chapter
General control function: Control hierarchy. Signal “OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT” is
provided in Table 5.3-2.
*6Note: To know the input point of the OPTR function, see Table 5.3-2.
Table 5.3-1 Input signal for condition logic

Table 5.3-2 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic)
529001 820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT OPTR control hierarchy M
Table 5.3-3 Setting of the OPTR function

OPTR01_EN Enabling the OPTR function On Off / On

- 339 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.3.2 Cancelling logic (SBO mode)

In the SBO control mode the reception of the cancel command is possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the
(i) OPTR: “Cancel” received from remote-end

Figure 5.3-7 outlines the reception of the cancel command from the remote end.
Wait for a command
Cancel by the remote-end

Success
Command Reset from the Signal reception in Cancel

remote-end IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 5.3-7 Outline of cancel command from the remote-end
(ii) OPTR: input required for mapping

Figure 5.3-8 shows the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal enters
the OPTR function. The input-point “OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same point of the
510001 7001016D08
Figure 5.3-5.
Input Cancel logic in OPTR Output

Command “Cancel”
Cancel command
529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ
&
Unmatched condition To “Wait for a command”

detected† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 5.3-8 Cancel from the remote-end

†Note:The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when “Test-bit status” in a

- 340 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

After the completion of the operation of the select logic, the operate logic enters to clear all
interval OTs.
Wait for a command
Operate command from the remote-end

Command Reset from the Success
Operation
remote-end Signal reception in Operate logic Resetting OTs
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command from the local-end

Success
Operation
Selecting “Reset All” Operate logic Resetting OTs
decision
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 5.3-9 Outline of operate command for resetting intervals OT1 to OT4
(i) OPTR: input required for mapping

Figure 5.3-10 shows the operate logic when an “Operation command (Reset)” signal enters the
OPTR function. The input-point “OPTR_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the reception of the
“Operation command (Reset)” signal, which is the same point of the select logic.
Input Selection logic in OPTR Output
OPTR01_RST_CMD
Command “Operating reset”
529001 310C011EA1
529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Operate command
& Reset all OTs
≥
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§”
in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
From the operation on the front panel
Reset All
Figure 5.3-10 Operate logic for resetting intervals OT1 to OT4
(ii) OPTR: output required for mapping

The operate logic issues a “OPRT_RST_CMD” signal to clear all intervals OT1 to OT4. The
signal “OTS_RST_CMD” can be transferred to the remote-end, when mapping the signal is
carried out in the IEC61850 communication. (See section 5.3.4)

- 341 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) OPTR: operating condition logic

Figure 5.3-11 shows the operate condition logic, which is used to examine a reset-condition in
the OPTR function.
Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE To operate logic
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
529001 820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[OPTR1_EN]
On
Figure 5.3-11 Operate condition logic in OPTR

*1to5Note: The signals and settings of the Figure 5.3-11 are same as the ones of the
Figure 5.3-6.

- 342 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user can operate the OPTR function over the IEC61850 communication after the mapping
using the GR-TIEMS. Note that the OPTR function is designed for “Single Point Controller
(SPC) class” in the IEC61850 communication. The user should follow steps:
(i) OPTR: editing Logical Node

The user should make a logical node (LN) for the OPTR function. Figure 5.3-12 exemplifies LN
editing; the LN “General Input / Output (GGIO)” is chosen for the OPTR function. After the
user defining an object “SPCSO”, the OPTR logical node can be saved with the name “GIGO”
plus “LN Instance”. Make a definition of the object “SPCSO” in the OPTR logical node. “Either
the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 5.3-12 Defining “SPCSO” object in GIGO3302 logic node

- 343 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Defining SBO mode

Figure 5.3-13 exemplifies the OPTR logic node saved as “GGIO3302”. In the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GGIO3302$SCPSO” using the GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Figure 5.3-13 LN editing for SBO (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 5.3-14 exemplifies the OPTR logic node saved as GGIO3302. In the DIR mode, the
following three items should be selected using the GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
Figure 5.3-14 LN editing for DIR mode (for example)

- 344 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) OPTR: mapping output data

The user should group the OPTR signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user should
map them for the IEC61850 communication using the GR-TIEMS. Figure 5.3-15 shows how to
map a signal; it shows that the signals of the OPTR function are required to map for the
IEC61850 communication.
Table 5.3-4 Mapping signals for SPC object
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$origin orCat orCategory ST 529001 200C011008 OPTR01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 529001 310C01170A OPTR01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 stVal BOOLEAN ST 529001 310C011EA1 OPT_RST_CMD
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 Q Quality ST 301001 3110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 T Timestamp ST 200301 9010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN ST 529001 000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD
(iii) OPTR: mapping input data

The OPTR function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 5.3-5 shows the input-point
“OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GGIO3302$SCPSO”; the user should

- 345 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
map the input-point to the Object references having attributes CO and CF†. Figure 5.3-16 shows
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Table 5.3-5 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object of GGIO3302

Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper Check Check CO 529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
Check “Input”

- 346 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.3.5 OPTR settings

OPTIMRSTCTRL (Function ID: 529001)
OPTR01-EN Off / On - Reset Control Enable in OPTR Off

- 347 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.3.6 OPTR signals (DataID)

8B0C011F44 OPTR01_CTR_SGU OPTR01 signal before KC_OPTR_SC001
800C011D57 OPTR01_EC OPTR01 execute command
800C011D55 OPTR01_EC_OWS OPTR01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
800C011D56 OPTR01_EC_RCC OPTR01 execute command by RCC
8F0C011F49 OPTR01_EX_CMP_TM0 OPTR01 signal after MCTOPTR_SC002
800C011F42 OPTR01_FSE_RCV OPTR01 signal before LC_OPTR_SA002
830C011F41 OPTR01_NSD_CSF OPTR01 signal after KC_OPTR_SA001
310C011EA1 OPTR01_RST_CMD OPTR01 select command output
800C011D53 OPTR01_SC OPTR01 select command
800C011D51 OPTR01_SC_OWS OPTR01 select command by OWS(HMI)
800C011D52 OPTR01_SC_RCC OPTR01 select command by RCC
8E0C011F47 OPTR01_SLD_TM0 OPTR01 signal after MCTOPTR_SC001
860C011F46 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 OPTR01 signal before MCTOPTR_SC001
870C011F48 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 OPTR01 signal before MCTOPTR_SC002
000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD OPTR01 the controllable data is in the status selected (StSeld)
820C011F40 OPTR01_TMP1 OPTR01 signal before KC_OPTR_SA001
860C011F43 OPTR01_TMP2 OPTR01 signal after KC_OPTR_SA002
860C011F45 OPTR01_TMP3 OPTR01 signal after KC_OPTR_SC001

820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT OPTR01 control right from PLC
 Mapping point
700C016D08 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT Control command

- 348 -
CU
––––––––Total time measurement function (TOTALTIM)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Total time measurement function (TOTALTIM)

The total time measurement function (TOTALTIM) can measure ‘operating time’ (i.e., a device-
running-time, closing-time, switching-ON-time, etc.) with a binary signal which may be
collected in the binary input circuits. The TOTALTIM function can keep the operation time in
the memory; the user can recognize it as a statistics data. For more information, see Chapter
Technical description (BU): Metering function: Statics data (Total Time). The TOTALTIM
function can operate 12 schemes at same time (i.e., TTIM01 to TTIM12). For simplicity, the
TTIM01 is only discussed but the other schemes are identical to the TTIM01 scheme.
5.4.1 Operating feature

(i) TOTALTIM: time accumulation process
Figure 5.4-1 outlines the time accumulation process within the TOTALTIM function. The
TOTALTIM function accumulates the time for which the state of the operating signal is in the
“ON” status every second. The accumulation process continues until the maximum
accumulated time reaches 10,000 days (almost 27 years).
Operation
signal
The value returns to zero if the
time counter reaches the
Cumulative maximum value.
time
864,000,000sec
60sec
Operation time
0sec The TOTALTIM function
checks the state of the
operation signal every
second. If the operation
signal is in the “On” state,
TOTALTIM accumulates
TOTALTIM process the “On” time.
Figure 5.4-1 Cumulative time process
(ii) TOTALTIM: acquisition of operation signal

The user should connect the binary input circuit (BI) to the TOTALTIM function.
Figure 5.4-2 illustrates that 12 signals can be accommodated from external devices using
BIs. For example, when binary input circuit BI1 receives operating signal1, provided signal-
monitoring point “BI1” is applied for the acquisition of the signal, the user can make the logic
to connect “BI1” with TT01 of the TOTALTIM function using the PLC function.

- 349 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
IED TOTALTIM
Device
TOTAL12_PLC_SGNL
TT12
PLC
SAS
Device #12 BI12-NC BI12 BI12-CPL
Photo- Filter CPL
Operating signal #12
coupler
TOTAL02_PLC_SGNL
TT02
PLC
Device #2 BI2-NC BI2 BI2-CPL IED

TOTAL01_PLC_SGNL IED
Photo- front
Operating signal #2 Filter CPL screen
coupler screen
TT01
PLC
Device #1 BI1-NC BI1 BI1-CPL
Operating signal #1
Photo- Filter CPL
coupler
Contact-switch Binary IO module (BIO)
Figure 5.4-2 Acquisition of operation signals
(iii) TOTALTIM: setting for reporting (Dead band)

For sending data for the network, the TOTALTIM function will get a new accumulated data
every cycle that is defined with the setting [TTIM*-SDB]. For example, if the user wishes to
report the operation time about the device #1, the user should set ‘1’ to the setting [TTIM01-
SDB], provided the report cycle is required every one second.
Table 5.4-1 Setting for data revision
Scheme switch Set Comment
TTIM01-SDB 1 to 720sec Data revision period for operating signal 1
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted)
(iv) TOTALTIM: data correction

In the TOTALTIM function the user can correct the accumulation time using either IED front
panel operation or GR-TIEMS operation (For IED screen operation, see Chapter Technical
description (BU): User interface: Monitoring sub-menu (Statics).

- 350 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.4.2 Preparation for the operation

The TOTALTIM function is enabled when the user sets [TTIM*-EN] On.
Table 5.4-2 TOTALTIM operation

TTIM01-EN On / Off Operation enable for operating signal #1
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted)

- 351 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user can operate the TTIM01 function using IEC 61850 communications after first
mapping the function using GR-TIEMS. The user should proceed as follows
(i) TOTALTIM: editing Logical Node

The user must make a logical node (LN) for the TTIM01 function. Figure 5.4-3 exemplifies LN
editing; LN “GGIO1301” is selected for the TTIM01 function for IEC 61850 communication.
After the user has defined an object “ISCSO1”, the TTIM01 logical node can be saved with the
name “GGIO1301”. Define the object “ISCSO1” in the TTIM01 logical node. Either the SBO
mode or the DIR mode can be chosen when editing the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 5.4-3 Defining “ISCSO1” object in GGIO1301 logic node
Defining SBO mode

the TTIM01 function. For SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“GGIO1301$ISCSO1” using GR-TIEMS;

- 352 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Defining DIR mode

the TTIM01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using GR-
TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns”)
(ii) TOTALTIM: mapping output data

The user should group the TTIM01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 5.4-3 shows the mapping signals within the TTIM01 function required for IEC
61850 communication. Figure 5.4-6 shows how to map a signal.

- 353 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.4-3 Mapping signals for ISCSO1 object.

Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$origin orCat orCategory ST 5410013015011D23 TTIM01_TIM_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5410016A15011FA7 TTIM01_TIM_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 stVal INT32 ST 5410013215011D20 TTIM01_TIM_SEC_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 q Quality ST 5410013115011D21 TTIM01_TIM_QLT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 t Timestamp ST 5410019015011D22 TTIM01_TIM_TIM
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5410010015011D91 TTIM01_TMP_01
Ctrl/GGIO1301$AnIn1$mag f FLOAT32 MX 5410013215011D20 TTIM01_TIM_SEC_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO1301$AnIn1 q Quality MX 5410013115011D21 TTIM01_TIM_QLT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$AnIn1 t Timestamp MX 5410019015011D22 TTIM01_TIM_TIM
Note: “Status (ST)” and “Measurement (MX)” are defined in the function constraint (FC)
of the IEC 61850 standard.
Drag and drop
Figure 5.4-6 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO1 object of GGIO1301
(iii) TOTALTIM: mapping input data

The TTIM01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the user
will need to map the input-point “TOTAL01_CMM_REQ”. Table 5.4-4 shows the input-point
“TOTAL01_CMM_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$”; the user should
map the input-point to the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC†. Figure 5.4-7
shows how to map a signal.

- 354 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.4-4 Mapping signals required for GGIO1301 object in TTIM01 function
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
5410017015016D08 TOTAL01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop

- 355 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.4.4 TOTALTIM settings

TOTALTIM（Function ID: 541001)
TTIM01-EN Off / On - Switch for total time metering at Dev.01 Off

Dev. 01 TTIM01-SDB 0 - 720 - Sending Dead Band number 0
TTIM01-DEVNAME [Preferred name] - Device name for Total Time1 TOTAL TIME 1 !
02 TTIM02-SDB 0 - 720 - Sending Dead Band number 0

- 356 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.4.5 TOTALTIM signals (DataID)

TOTALTIM(Function ID: 541001)
0015001F41 TTIM00_CCTRL_TIME TTIM00 total time correction summarize
8015001D58 TTIM00_CH_EC_LCD TTIM00 total time change execute command by LCD
8015001D55 TTIM00_CH_EC_OWS TTIM00 total time change execute command by OWS(HMI)
8015001D56 TTIM00_CH_EC_RCC TTIM00 total time change execute command by RCC
8015001D57 TTIM00_CH_EC_RMT TTIM00 total time change execute command by Remote
8015001D54 TTIM00_CH_SC_LCD TTIM00 total time change select command by LCD
8015001D51 TTIM00_CH_SC_OWS TTIM00 total time change select command by OWS(HMI)
8015001D52 TTIM00_CH_SC_RCC TTIM00 total time change select command by RCC
8015001D53 TTIM00_CH_SC_RMT TTIM00 total time change select command by Remote
8415011E95 TTIM01_CC_SS TTIM01 cancel success signal
8915011EA2 TTIM01_CTR_SGU TTIM01 control logic stage(under selection)
8315011E8B TTIM01_EC_F_CN TTIM01 execute command fail condition signal
8215011E84 TTIM01_EC_OK_CS TTIM01 execute command OK condition signal
8A15011E76 TTIM01_SLD_CS TTIM01 selected condition signal
8B15011E7B TTIM01_SLF_CS TTIM01 select fail condition signal
3215011F41 TTIM01_TIM_MIN TTIM01 total time (minutes)
0015011D91 TTIM01_TMP_01 TTIM01 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
8315021E8B TTIM02_EC_F_CS TTIM02 execute command fail condition signal

- 357 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

84150A1E95 TTIM10_CC_SS TTIM10 cancel success signal
89150A1EA2 TTIM10_CTR_SGU TTIM10 control logic stage(under selection)
83150A1E8B TTIM10_EC_F_CS TTIM10 execute command fail condition signal
82150A1E84 TTIM10_EC_OK_CS TTIM10 execute command OK condition signal
8A150A1E76 TTIM10_SLD_CS TTIM10 selected condition signal
8B150A1E7B TTIM10_SLF_CS TTIM10 select fail condition signal

- 358 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

32150A1F41 TTIM10_TIM_MIN TTIM10 total time (minutes)
00150A1D91 TTIM10_TMP_01 TTIM10 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
84150B1E95 TTIM11_CC_SS TTIM11 cancel success signal
89150B1EA2 TTIM11_CTR_SGU TTIM11 control logic stage(under selection)
83150B1E8B TTIM11_EC_F_CS TTIM11 execute command fail condition signal
82150B1E84 TTIM11_EC_OK_CS TTIM11 execute command OK condition signal
8A150B1E76 TTIM11_SLD_CS TTIM11 selected condition signal
8B150B1E7B TTIM11_SLF_CS TTIM11 select fail condition signal
32150B1F41 TTIM11_TIM_MIN TTIM11 total time (minutes)
00150B1D91 TTIM11_TMP_01 TTIM11 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
84150C1E95 TTIM12_CC_SS TTIM12 cancel success signal
89150C1EA2 TTIM12_CTR_SGU TTIM12 control logic stage(under selection)
83150C1E8B TTIM12_EC_F_CS TTIM12 execute command fail condition signal
82150C1E84 TTIM12_EC_OK_CS TTIM12 execute command OK condition signal
8A150C1E76 TTIM12_SLD_CS TTIM12 selected condition signal
8B150C1E7B TTIM12_SLF_CS TTIM12 select fail condition signal
32150C1F41 TTIM12_TIM_MIN TTIM12 total time (minutes)
00150C1D91 TTIM12_TMP_01 TTIM12 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS

801500ED5A TOTAL00IN_TMP_51 TOTAL00IN_TMP_51
801501EDE0 TOTAL01_PLC_SGNL TOTAL01 plc signal
80150AEDE0 TOTAL10_PLC_SGNL TOTAL10 plc signal
80150BEDE0 TOTAL11_PLC_SGNL TOTAL11 plc signal
80150CEDE0 TOTAL12_PLC_SGNL TOTAL12 plc signal
 Mapping point in TTIM01

TOTALTIM (Function ID: 541001)
7015016D08 TOTAL01_CMM_REQ TOTAL01 correction request from cmm

- 359 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 Mapping point in TTIM01

TOTALTIM (Function ID: 541001)
70150A6D08 TOTAL10_CMM_REQ TOTAL10 correction request from cmm
70150B6D08 TOTAL11_CMM_REQ TOTAL11 correction request from cmm
70150C6D08 TOTAL12_CMM_REQ TOTAL12 correction request from cmm

- 360 -
CU
––––––––Software interlock function (ILK)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Software interlock function (ILK)

Devices must be controlled in accordance with the prevailing operational condition of the
electric power system. If a device does not act or behave in accordance with the operational
circumstances, inappropriate device control can result in outages or fatal incidents for the
network. In order to avoid such circumstances, software interlock (ILK) function is provided
that is able to examine the current operational situation and determine whether to permit the
control of a particular device.
When using the ILK function, an interlock-check formula is required. The interlock-check
formula examines the operational conditions for all devices, and is stored in the ILK database.
The ILK function provides an output signal “OK/NG decision information”; the “OK/NG
decision information” is transferred to the control functions†, which control the external
devices. Following which, the control functions can commence with the control of the selected
devices in response to the respective “OK/NG decision information”.
†Note:Details of SPOS, DPOS, and TPOS features are discussed separately in Chapter
Control and monitoring application (BU): Section SPOS (5.1), DPOS (5.6), , and
TPOS (5.7)..

- 361 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Prior to controlling a device, the interlock-check function is used to determine whether the
control of a device is correct or not. If the interlock-check finds that the conditions for device
control have not been satisfied in accordance with the appropriate interlock condition, control
of the device is forbidden. Figure 5.5-1 provides an overview of the interlock-check process.
Formulae for interlock-check are stored in an ILK database; these formulae are used in order
to enable the interlock-check function to output a decision. If the proposed operation of a
particular device is deemed correct then an “OK-decision” is determined by the formulae, and
device control is allowed. However, if the proposed operation of the device is deemed incorrect
then an “NG-decision” is determined by the formulae, and device control is not allowed.
Device IED
Binary
Circuit input Control
breaker Interlock Control
Device status circuits Device status Functions
(CB) Device status Function (ILK)
SPOS
DPOS
Dis- Binary OK/NG decision Interlock
and
connector Output
others
(DS) circuits
Device control Control Database
Other IE Ds
GOOSE GOOSE receiving information
GOOSE subscription
data
transmission
data
PC(GR-TIEMS)
Interlock formulas
Figure 5.5-1 Interlock–check process
5.5.1 ILK specification

(i) ILK: maximum number of interlock-checks
Since the maximum number of interlock-checks is 83, ILK can be used to supervise 83 control
devices. An interlock-check can include up to 500 nodes; an interlock operator and input/output
signals are configured for each node; a node can accept up to 64 input signals. (Nodes are
discussed separately. See section 5.5.3)
(ii) ILK: GOOSE receiving information

When an interlock-check is required to determine an “OK/NG-decision”, the interlock-check
function collects the device status from all of the other IEDs during the interlock-check process.
In this case, GOOSE subscription information is used to acquire the device status required;
configuration of the interlock-check formula, including quality information corresponding to

- 362 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
other IEDs and GOOSE, is necessary.
5.5.2 Interlock-check formula

Figure 5.5-2 shows a device (Q0) in the feeder bay, if a control action to operate (Q0) is required,
an interlock-check will be necessary. To control the device (Q0), the interlock-check must verify
the status of several devices in the busbar and the bay.
Busbar1-A
Busbar2-A
Q1B Q2B Q15 Q25

Q1 Q2
Q52
Q0 Q0B
Q53
Q9 Q8
Q69
F52VT
F27L
Figure 5.5-2 Example of device status and Interlock-check
In accordance with the arrangement of the devices shown in Figure 5.5-2, interlock-check
formulae can be configured from equations (5.5-1) to (5.5-9). The status of respective devices,
(stVal) and interlock operators (“•” and “+”) are placed on the right-hand side of the equations;
and the interlock condition (e.g. Q0(Closing)) is placed on the left-hand side of the equations.
The interlock operators are also shown in Table 5.5-1.
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q2
Q1 = (Q0 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q52
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q15 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q53
̅̅̅̅̅)
(5.5-1)
+ (Q2 ∙ Q0 ∙ Q9 ∙ Q0B ∙ Q1B ∙ Q2B)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q1
Q2 = (Q0 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q52
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q25 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q53
̅̅̅̅̅)
(5.5-2)
+ (Q1 ∙ Q0 ∙ Q9 ∙ Q0B ∙ Q1B ∙ Q2B)
Q9 = (Q0 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q53
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q52 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q8
̅̅̅̅) (5.5-3)
Q0(Closing ‡)
= ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
63QBE ∙ 63GBE
̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅
∙ ((Q1 Q2 ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q9) + ((Q1 + Q2) ∙ Q9)) (5.5-4)
∙ Closing Blocking
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ 63GBE
Q0(Opening‡ ) = 63QBF ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ (5.5-5)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q69 ∙ F27L(No voltage) ∙ F52VT)
Q8 = (Q9 (5.5-6)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q52 = (Q9 Q1 ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q2) (5.5-7)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q1
Q53 = (Q9 ̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q2
̅̅̅̅) (5.5-8)
Q69 = Q8 (5.5-9)
where,

- 363 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Q0: Circuit breaker (CB)†

Q1, Q2, Q9: Disconnecting switch (DS)
Q52, Q53, Q8, Q15, Q25: Earthing switch (ES)
63QBE: OIL Pressure switch (e.g., “Off” state is shown at 270 bar or above.)
63QBF: OIL Pressure switch (e.g., “On” state is shown at 255 bar or below.)
63GBE: GAS Pressure switch (e.g., “On” state is shown at 6.5 bar or below.)
Closing Blocking: State of Protection lockout relay (“Off” state means active.)
F27L: State of under voltage relay (“On” state means no voltage.)
F52VT: State of VT MCB switch
Sign “•”: Interlock operator “AND”
Sign “+”: Interlock operator “OR”
†Note: When CB (𝑄0) is open, logic level of 𝑄0

̅̅̅̅ is “1”. On the other hand, when CB
(𝑄0) is closed, logic level of 𝑄0 is “1”.
‡Note: For example, on the left-hand side of equation (5.5-5), “Opening” reflects the
control direction of CB (𝑄0).
For example in equation (5.5-12), the interlock condition for DS (Q1) is satisfied when CB
(Q0), DS (Q2), ES for the Bus-bar1-A (Q15), ES (Q52) and ES (Q53) are open. In addition, the
interlock condition for DS (Q1) is also satisfied when DS (Q2), CB (Q0), DS (Q9), CB (Q0), DS
(Q1), and DS (Q2) are closed.

- 364 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.5-1 Names of operators used in the Interlock-check formulae

Sign of Example of
Interlock
interlock Description‡ interlock
operator
operator formula†
If both input signals are “1”, the resultant
AND(•) output signal is “1”. If not, the output signal Q1 • Q2
is “0”.
If either input signals is “1”, the resultant
OR(+) output signal is “1”. If not, the output signal Q1 + Q2
is “0”.
If the input signal is “1”, the resultant output
NOT(!) !(Q1)
signal is “0”. If not, the output signal is “1”.
Two input signals are compared. If the input
COMP signals are identical, the output signal is “1”. (Q1) COMP (1)
If not, the output signal is “0”.
†Note: Q1 and Q2 represent controllable objects.
‡Note: For further information, see section 5.5.3(iii).
5.5.3 Interlock-check method

(i) ILK: node and input/output signals
A node is represented by an interlock-operator, input signals (stVal and Quality), and output
signals (stVal and Quality). For example, Figure 5.5-3 shows a node with an “OR” interlock-
operator, input signals, and an output signal. When stVal and ‘Quality’ are applied to the
inputs of the node, the resultant output signal is in accordance with the operation rule of “OR”.
(For details, see 5.5.3(iii)-2)
Node
stVal OR (+)
Input(A)
stVal
Quality Output
Quality
Input(B) stVal
Quality
Figure 5.5-3 Input/output signals

Note: A bold line reflects a signal “stVal”. A thin line reflects a signal “Quality”. The user
should note that the signal format generated by control functions should be
transposed for the stVal format, as shown in Table 5.5-7.

- 365 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) ILK: nodes and formulae for interlock-check

Figure 5.5-4 illustrates that an interlock-check is realized by using a number of nodes. For
each node, the user is required to configure input signals, interlock-operators, and links
between nodes. Following that, an interlock-check can be run.
Node #1
Node #2 Node #7
OR (+) AND(• )
Input A AND(• )
Input B
Output
Input C
Input D Node #4
Node #3
OR (+)
AND(• )
Input E
Input F
Input G
Node #5 Node #6
AND(• )
OR (+)
Input H
Input I
Input J
Users can see signals at signal monitoring Users can see

points using the GR -TIE MS. signals by IED
screens.
Signal monitoring point
Figure 5.5-4 Operation of interlock-check
We can see that equation (5.5-10) is a representation of Figure 5.5-4. This equation is computed
in accordance with the priority order of the interlock-operators: the first is parentheses [()], the
second is AND [•], followed by OR [+].
Output = ((A+B) •C) + (D+E•F) + (G•(H+I) •J) (5.5-10)

- 366 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) ILK: purpose of Quality information in output signals

In the output signal, the quality information will affect the control of the device. Table 5.5-2
shows four types of output signal. When the quality information (Quality) of an output signal
issued by a node is indicated as being “NG”, it signifies that device control is forbidden. On the
other hand, quality information (Quality) “OK” means that that device control is allowed.
Table 5.5-2 Device status, quality information in the output signal

Output signal
Meaning
(stVal–Quality)
0–OK Control forbidden
0–NG Control forbidden
1–OK Control allowed
1–NG Control forbidden
Note: With regard to the value of ‘Quality’, we define “OK” as ‘0’ and “NG” as ‘1’ in the
logic operation.
AND interlock operator

When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “AND”, the “AND”
operator outputs the quality information intact. That is, the output quality information is not
affected by device status (stVal). Table 5.5-3 shows two-input-signals (A, B) and the output
signal for “AND”.
Table 5.5-3 Output signals (stVal–Quality) for AND
Input B (stVal–Quality)
0–OK 0–NG 1–OK 1–NG
0–OK 0–OK – – –
Input A 0–NG 0–OK 0–NG – –
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 0–OK 0–NG 1–OK –
1–NG 0–OK 0–NG 1–NG 1–NG
Figure 5.5-5 shows the logic symbol for the interlock operator “AND” with input signals
and an output signal. Figure 5.5-5 can be represented by equations (5.5-11) and (5.5-12).
stVal = stVa(A) • stVa(B) (5.5-11)
Quality=(Quality(A)+Quality(B))•(stVa(A)+ Quality(A))
(5.5-12)
•(stVa(B)+Quality(B))
For example, when the interlock operator “AND” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it
has to generate a signal (0–OK) using the equations (5.5-11) and (5.5-12). This is because the
quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the AND operator; the AND
operator produces zero (0) which is defined as “OK” in ‘Quality’. A note regarding the values

- 367 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
used for ‘Quality’ can be found immediately below Table 5.5-2.
AND (• )
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B)
Quality
Figure 5.5-5 Logic of interlock operator (AND) and Input/Output signals
OR interlock operator
When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “OR”, the quality
information is affected by device status (stVal). Table 5.5-4 shows two-input-signals (A, B) and
the output signal for “OR”
Table 5.5-4 Output signals (stVal–Quality) of OR
Input B (stVal–Quality)
0–OK 0–NG 1–OK 1–NG
0–OK 0–OK – – –
Input A 0–NG 0–NG 0–NG – –
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 1–OK 1–OK 1–OK –
1–NG 1–NG 1–NG 1–OK 1–NG
As shown in Table 5.5-4, if ‘0’ represents the status value “stVal” for all input signals, and
if the quality information of “NG” is given for an input signal, then the output signal “Quality”
is represented as “NG”. On the other hand, if all input signals “stVal” are represented by “1”,
and if the quality information for the input signals “stVal(1)” is given, then the representation
“OK” can be weighted for the output signal “Quality” . Note that quality information (OK) for
input signals with “stVal(1)” get priority if there are two or more input signals, which are
represented as “stVal(1)”.
Figure 5.5-6 shows the logic symbol for the interlock operator “OR” with input signals and an
output signal, which can be represented by equations (5.5-13) and (5.5-14).
OR (+)
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B) Quality
Figure 5.5-6 Interlock operator (OR) and Input/Output signals

stVal=stVa(A)+stVa(B) (5.5-13)
Quality=!((stVal(A)•!Quality(A))•(stVa(B)•!Quality(B))+
(5.5-14)
!(stVal(A)+Quality(A)+stVal(B)+Quality(B)))

- 368 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
For example, when the interlock operator “OR” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it
has to generate a signal (0–NG) using the equations (5.5-13) and (5.5-14). This is because the
quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the OR operator; the OR
operator produces one (1) which is defined as “NG” in ‘Quality’. A note regarding the values
used for Quality can be found immediately below Table 5.5-2
NOR interlock operator

When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “NOR”, the “NOR”
operator outputs the quality information intact. That is, the “NOR” interlock operator outputs
quality information, which is not influenced by device status (stVal). Table 5.5-5 shows an
input-signal (A) and the output signal for the “NOR” interlock operator.
Table 5.5-5 Output signals (stVal–Quality) of NOT
Output (stVal–Quality)
0–OK 1–OK
Input A 0–NG 1–NG
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 0–OK
1–NG 0–NG
Figure 5.5-7 depicts the logic symbol for the interlock operator “NOT” with input signals
and an output signal, which can be represented by equations (5.5-15) and (5.5-16).
NOT(!)
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B) Quality
Figure 5.5-7 Interlock operator (NOT) and In/Output signals

stVal=!stVa(A) (5.5-15)
Quality=Quality(A) (5.5-16)

- 369 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
COMP interlock operator

When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “COMP”, the “COMP”
operator outputs the original quality information intact. That is, the “COMP” interlock
operator outputs quality information, which is not influenced by device status (stVal). Table
5.5-6 shows two input-signals (A and B) and the output signal for the “COMP” interlock
operator.
Table 5.5-6 Output signals (stVal–Quality) of COMP
Input B (stVal)†
0 1
0–OK 1–OK 0–OK
Input A 0–NG 1–NG 0–NG
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 0–OK 1–OK
1–NG 0–NG 1–NG
Figure 5.5-8 depicts the logic symbol for the interlock operator “COMP” with input signals
and an output signal, which can be represented by equations (5.5-17) and (5.5-18).
stVal=stVa(A) COMP stVa(B) (5.5-17)
Quality=Quality(A) † (5.5-18)
†Note: Input signal (B) does not have quality information because its signal is a
threshold value.
COMP
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
Input(B) stVal
Figure 5.5-8 Interlock operator (COMP) and Input/Output signals
Device status output by control functions transposed

As shown in Figure 5.5-3, a node inputs a value (stVal). The user should be aware that the
node cannot directly read the value of device status generated by the control functions. This is
because each control function generates the device status in a different format. Thus, for the
ILK operation, the device status generated should be transposed to the stVal so that the node
can read the device status. The right-hand column of Table 5.5-7 shows the transposed “stVal”
in each node.

- 370 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.5-7 Signals generated in control functions

Control Device status generated by the control
“stVal” transposed in the node
function function described on the left column
0(off) 0
SPOS
1(on) 1
0x40(Open) 0† 0x40‡ 1§
DPOS 0x80(Close) 1† 0x80‡ 0§
“device status” except “0x40” and “0x80” 0
0x01(P1) 1
0x02(P2) 2
TPOS 0x04(P3) 4
“device status” except “0x01”, “0x02” and
0
“0x04”
BI
0(off) 0
signal
†Note: Values are altered when “AND”, “OR”, or “NOT” is applied as an interlock
operator.
‡Note: Values are altered when “COMP” is applied as an interlock operator.
§Note: Values are altered when the DPOS output is an inverted signal.
5.5.4 Configuration of Interlock formulae

Interlock-check formulae should be stored in the Interlock database, as shown in Figure 5.5-1.
These formulae are configured using GR-TIEMS†, and are uploaded into the ILK interlock
database.
†Note:The user can configure the interlock-check formulae with GR-TIMES. See Chapter
Engineering tool: Interlock configurator.

- 371 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.5.5 ILK signals (DataID)

ILK (Function ID: 570001)
3100A11001 ILK_MID_UPDATING ILK condition number during counting
3101011DA0 SPOS01-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV01
3101011DA2 SPOS01-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV01
31010A1DA0 SPOS10-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV10
31010A1DA2 SPOS10-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV10
31010B1DA0 SPOS11-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV11
31010B1DA2 SPOS11-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV11
31010C1DA0 SPOS12-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV12
31010C1DA2 SPOS12-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV12
31010D1DA0 SPOS13-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV13
31010D1DA2 SPOS13-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV13
31010E1DA0 SPOS14-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV14
31010E1DA2 SPOS14-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV14
31010F1DA0 SPOS15-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV15
31010F1DA2 SPOS15-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV15
3103011DA0 DPOS01-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV01
3103011DA2 DPOS01-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV01

- 372 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

31030A1DA0 DPOS10-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV10
31030A1DA2 DPOS10-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV10
31030B1DA0 DPOS11-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV11
31030B1DA2 DPOS11-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV11
31030C1DA0 DPOS12-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV12
31030C1DA2 DPOS12-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV12
31030D1DA0 DPOS13-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV13
31030D1DA2 DPOS13-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV13
31030E1DA0 DPOS14-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV14
31030E1DA2 DPOS14-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV14
31030F1DA0 DPOS15-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV15
31030F1DA2 DPOS15-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV15

- 373 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 374 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 375 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

3104011DA0 TPOS1-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV01
31040A1DA0 TPOS10-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV10
31040B1DA0 TPOS11-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV11
31040C1DA0 TPOS12-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV12

- 376 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

31040D1DA0 TPOS13-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV13
31040E1DA0 TPOS14-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV14
31040F1DA0 TPOS15-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV15

- 377 -
CU
––––––––Double position device function (DPOS)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Double position device function (DPOS)

The double position device (DPOS) function is used when the user wishes to control a device
having On and Off states, which is equivalent to controlling a device from the “Closed” or “Open”
condition; the device is represented as DS or an ES. The DPOS function provides “Operation
counters” and “Operation time measurement”; these features are used for the examination of
the devices, these features are useful when the user wishes to assess the operating time of the
device, which is performed by counting the state-change of the device. The BO circuits
connected with the DPOS function are used for issuing commands; the BI circuits are used for
receiving responses; hence, the user should connect the BI and BO circuits with the DPOS
function(†). The DPOS function includes three logic groups: 1. Select logic, 2. Cancel logic, and
3. Operate logic.
For simplicity, only the DPOS01 function is discussed here; the features in the other
DPOS02–72 functions are identical to the DPOS01 function.
†Note:A binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits
(BOs); the user makes the connection between the DPOS01 function and the
binary IO module using a signal number (is made of a “Function ID” and an
“Element ID”). The signal name and number of the DPOS01 function are listed
later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the DPOS function quickly, go to sections 5.6.6 and
5.6.7, where setting of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signal-points for
IEC61850 communication is described.

- 378 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user should set scheme switch [DPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to DPOS01 operation. Table
5.6-9 shows all of the scheme switches in the DPOS function.
(i) DPOS: “Select command On” received from remote-end

Figure 5.6-1 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Select command Off from the remote-end
Select command On from the local-end

Operate logic
Select command Off from the local-end
Operate command
Figure 5.6-1 Outline of Select command ‘On’

Figure 5.6-2 shows the Select logic when a “Select command On (Remote-ON-Control)” signal
is applied to the DPOS01 function. The logic has the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”
for the reception of the select command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-
Control” signal is true. If the DPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-Control”
signal is not true, the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 379 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Select logic in DPOS01 Output
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)

For SBO operation
For DIR operation command”
To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(512001_8603011DC6)
DPOS01-Close 0 t
Select on “Success”
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.6-2 Select ‘On’ from the remote-end in DPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function provides the operation criteria for “On”.
The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
defined by the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition). We
discuss the ILK in section 5.5, separately.
automatic control. The DPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being
in operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see section 5.9.
*Note:The DPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode” using
a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using IEC61850.
To use this signal, the user must map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other DPOS logics, see Table 5.6-4
and Table 5.6-8.

- 380 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) DPOS: “Select command Off” received from remote-end

Figure 5.6-3 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Select logic Signal output

Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 5.6-3 Outline of Select command ‘Off’
Input point mapped from the communication

Figure 5.6-4 shows the Select logic when a “Select command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal
is applied at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 5.6-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” when the DPOS01 function determines that the received “Select
command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is true. If the DPOS01 function determines that
the “Remote-OFF-Control” signal is not true, the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.

- 381 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Selection logic in DPOS01 Output

For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed (512001_8A01011DC4)
DPOS01-Open 0 t
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.6-4 Select ‘Off’ from the remote-end in DPOS01††

§Note:ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. The DPOS01
operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation.
††Note: To know the input and output points of the other DPOS logics, see Table 5.6-4
and Table 5.6-8.

- 382 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) DPOS: “Select command On” revived from local-end

Figure 5.6-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘On’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from the remote-end

Cancel logic

Failed

Operate logic
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command

Figure 5.6-6 shows the Select logic when “Select command On (Local-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the DPOS01 function. The signal is provided when an “On” key is pressed on the
IED front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping. Note that the user should
set the scheme switch [DPOS01-CTRAHMI] to SBO when operation from the IED front panel
is required, we discuss how to set this in Chapter Technical description (BU): User interface:
Control sub-menu.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”.
Note: The “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
5.6-2. If the input signal “Local-ON-Control” is not true, the DPOS01 function
returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 383 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

For SBO operation
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed with ILK† condition & “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
DPOS01-Close (512001_8603011DC6)
DIR
ILK† bypassing 1≥ 0 t
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[DPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.6-6 Select ‘On’ on the front panel in DPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criterion for “On”. For testing, nullifying
the ILK function is possible using “Interlock bypassing”. “Interlock bypassing” is
indicated by the status “ICB” in a software switch controller (SOFTSW).
††Note: To identify the output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table 5.6-8.

- 384 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) DPOS: “Select command Off” received from local-end

Figure 5.6-7 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command
Cancel logic

Failed

Select logic Signal output Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 5.6-7 Outline of Select command ‘Off’

Figure 5.6-8 shows the Select logic when a “Select command Off (Local-OFF-Control)” signal
is received is applied to the DPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user presses
the “OFF” key on the IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850
communication.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The signal “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
5.6-4. If the signal “Local-OFF-Control” is not true, the DPOS01 function returns
to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 385 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

For SBO operation
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed with ILK† condition & “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”

DPOS01-Open (512001_8A03011DC4)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0.6s
[DPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.6-8 Select ‘Off’ on the front panel in DPOS01††

††Note: To identify the output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table 5.6-8.

- 386 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(v) DPOS: “Select command On” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.6-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by PLC function

Operate logic

Figure 5.6-10 shows the Select logic when a “select command On (PLC-On-Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this signal: the
former connection point, (PLC#1) is used for the reception of the select-command requiring the
interlock check, the later connection point, (PLC#2) is used for the reception of the select-
command not requiring the interlock check. That is, for the DPOS01 function, when the “Select
command On (PLC-ON-Control)” signal generated in the user-programmed logic is applied for
the select logic and when the interlock check is required in the select logic, use the connection
point (PLC#1: e.g.DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock check is not
required, use the other connection point (PLC# 2: e.g., DEV01_CL_COMMAND) for the
injection. PLC#1 and PLC#2 is shown in Table 5.6-1.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 5.6-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” signal is the same signal as that shown in Figure
5.6-2.

- 387 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output
1≥ &
ON-control command requiring ILK† checking To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC #1 connection point) command”
Operate command
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK To BO connection
& “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(512001_8603011DC6)
DPOS01-Close 0 t
0.1s
ON-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point) 0 t
Operate command Select “Failed”
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 5.6-10 Select ‘On’ using the PLC function in DPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function provides the operation criteria for “On”.
The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
for the inputs (PLC#1 and PLC#2) and Table 5.6-8 for the outputs.

- 388 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vi) DPOS: “Select command Off” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.6-11 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by the PLC function
Operate command

Failed
Operate logic
Figure 5.6-11 Outline of Select command Off

Figure 5.6-12 shows the Select logic when a “select command Off (PLC-Off-Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this signal: like
in signal “select command On (PLC-On-Control): That is, if interlock checking is required, use
the connection point (PLC#1: e.g. DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock
check is not required, use the connection point (PLC# 2: e.g. DEV01_OP_COMMAND). PLC#1
and PLC#2 are shown in Table 5.6-2.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 5.6-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The output point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as that shown in
Figure 5.6-4.

- 389 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Signals from user PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output
1≥ &
OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation
Operate command with To BO connection
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK
ILK† condition & “DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed (512001_8A03011DC4)
DPOS01-Open 0 t
0.1s
OFF-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
0 t
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 5.6-12 Select ‘Off’ by the PLC function in DPOS01††

for the inputs (PLC#1 and PLC#2) and Table 5.6-8 for the outputs.

- 390 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vii) DPOS: selecting condition

Figure 5.6-13 shows the select condition logic in the DPOS01 function. The DPOS01 function
checks the condition for the Select command using the signal “DPOS1_3PH_STATE” (see Table
5.6-31). If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, the following
alternatives are available:
1. The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic,

If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic, the user can replace it using the PLC
connection point “User configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “DPOS01IN_TMP_31”, which is listed as
PLC#2 in Table 5.6-6.
2. Set the scheme switch [DPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to PLC.

If adding another condition is required, the user can add a signal using the PLC connection
point “Additional condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using “DPOS01IN_TMP_32”, which is listed as PLC#1 in
Table 5.6-6.
2. Set the scheme switch [DPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to Fixedlogic.

- 391 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
From SOTFSW*1 DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To select logic
Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *5 Select condition

From TRC*4 = DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
General trip (512001 8103011F5F)
GEN.TRIP
= DPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(512001 8203011F60)

received
DPOS01_3PH_STATE
(512001 3103011001)
[SCDEN]*8 Appearance of the
controls in the same
OFF direction
512001 810301EE62 DPOS01IN_TMP_32
[DPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
Fixedlogic
512001 800301EE61 DPOS01IN_TMP_31 &
From Control hierarchy *9 (PLC#3 connection point)
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28

&
From CMNCTRL
SERI_ERR
[DPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 5.6-13 Select condition logic for ‘ON/OFF’ in DPOS01*10

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “Command
Blocking” is initiated by the status “CBK” in a software switch controller
(SOTFSW). The IEC61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”.
For more information on “CBK”, see section 5.2. See the signal ““CBK_STATE” of
Table 5.6-5.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking” (DCB) is an operation philosophy in the common
can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted as “DCB
RCV OR” in Table 5.6-5. For more information see Chapter General control
function: Common controls (DCB).
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it indicates
that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should
inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The
detected signal is denoted as “Travelling OR” in Table 5.6-5.
4Note: If the issue of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is
application, the trip command is issues at the output_point “GEN.TRIP” in Table
5.6-5.
5Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a command

- 392 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
is not identical to “IED test status”.

6Note: The function “Event suppression” can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See section
5.6.6(i)-3)
8Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘On and Off
operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch
[SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same
operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction (i.e., when on
(off) is performed sequentially). On the other hand, if On is set for the scheme
switch, the logic is not blocked.
using the connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see
10Note: To identify the input point of the other DPOS, see Table 5.6-6 for PLC#1 and
PLC#2.

- 393 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(viii) DPOS: selection signal names and numbers

each table:
“O” indicated that the signal is provided for optional use.
used.
Table 5.6-1 PLC Connection points (Input points for Command ‘On’)
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND DPOS01 PLC On-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
…. …. ….
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK DPOS01 PLC On-control without checking(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
Table 5.6-2 PLC Connection points (Input points for Command ‘Off’)
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND DPOS01 PLC Off-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
…. …. ….
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK DPOS01 PLC Off-control without checking(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
Table 5.6-3 PLC Connection points (Interlock for Command ‘On/Off’)

570001 3103021DA2 DPOS01-Close DPOS01 interlock condition for On control. N/A
… … …
570001 3103011DA0 DPOS01-Open DPOS01 interlock condition for Off control. N/A
…. …. ….

- 394 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

512001 7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M
… … …

5A0001 0008001F40 Travelling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
Table 5.6-6 PLC Connection points (Input signals for select condition logic)
512001 810301EE62 DPOS01IN_TMP_32 DPOS01 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
…. …. ….
5A0101 801016EF40 DPOS72IN_TMP_32 DPOS72 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
512001 800301EE61 DPOS01IN_TMP_31 DPOS01 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
… … …
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28 DPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
…. …. ….
Table 5.6-7 PLC Monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
512001 8003011F5A DPOS01_SC_ST_ERR DPOS01 select command mode is invalid.

…. …. ….
512001 8103011F5F DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS01)
…. …. ….
512001 8203011F60 DPOS01_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPOS01)

- 395 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

…. …. ….
Table 5.6-8 PLC Monitoring points (On/Off output-signal for BIO)

512001 8A03011DC4 DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select (Off) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
512001 8603011DC6 DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select (ON) command for Binary Output.
…. …. …..
512001 8603481DC6 DPOS72_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS72 select (On) command for Binary Output.
(ix) DPOS: selection setting names

Note: The “xx” within “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if DPOS03
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The numbers used for “xx” can be
represented from “01” to “72”.)
Table 5.6-9 Settings for select logics

DPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of DPOSxx On Off / On
DPOSxx-LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition in DPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
DPOSxx-CTRAHMI Activate local panel control in DPOSxx SBO DIR/ SBO

- 396 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel
conditions are satisfied, accordingly the function can discard the select command; finally, the
(i) DPOS: “Cancel” received from remote-end

remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel from the remote-end

Success
Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel

Signal reception in

Cancel from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function

Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

applied to the DPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as
that for the signal “Select command On (Remote-ON-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“DPOS01_CC_SS”, when the DPOS01 function has determined that the signal “Remote-cancel”
is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued at monitoring point “DPOS01_CC_FS” if
the DPOS01 function is able to determine that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.

- 397 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) To “Wait for a command”

“DPOS01_ CC_SS”
Cancel command
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ (512001_8603011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Cancel condition† & “Do nothing”
“DPOS01_CC_FS”
(512001_8703011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 5.6-15 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in DPOS01

†Note: The “cancel condition” logic shall be seen in Figure 5.6-18.
(ii) DPOS: “Cancel” received from the local-end

local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel from the remote end

Selecting On from remote-end
Selecting Off from remote-end

Cancel from the front panel
Success
Selecting On from front panel
Press cancel Cancel
Selecting Off from front panel Cancel logic Do nothing
command decision Failed
Selecting On by the PLC function
Selecting Off by the PLC function

Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

to the DPOS01 function. The signal is generated when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
“Local-cancel” signal, the logic ia able to output a result signal, provided that the “cancel
condition” checking is satisfied.

- 398 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) To “Wait for a command”

“DPOS01_ CC_SS”
Cancel command (512001_8603011E95)
& Successes of cancel
Cancel condition & “Do nothing”

“DPOS01_CC_FS”
(512001_8703011E96)
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 5.6-17, is able to issue a “Success of cancel” signal
at the monitoring point “DPOS01_CC_SS”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the
signal “Local-Cancel” is true.
(iii) DPOS: cancel condition logic

Figure 5.6-18 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria, “Unmatched condition detected”
is connected normally for the cancel logic, set Fixedlogic for the scheme switch [DPOS01-
LGCNFFCT].

& 1≥ DPOS01
[DPOS01-LGCNFFCT]
PLC#1
Fixedlogic
512001 800301EE69 DPOS01IN_TMP_44 &
Figure 5.6-18 Logic “Cancel condition” in DPOS01

the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status” as in Figure 5.6-13.
2Note: With the exception of the above ‘cancel-condition’ logic, there is an operate-
condition logic within the DPOS01 function; the operate-condition logic will
always checks conditions. That is, the user is required to set either the “operate-
condition” or the “cancel-condition” logic.
If the original logic does not meet with the requirement of the user, it can be relpced using
the connection point “User configurable condition”.
1. Connect the user-customized logic with the “DPOS01IN_TMP_44”, which is listed

in Table 5.6-10.
2. Set scheme switch [DPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.

- 399 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) DPOS: cancel signal names and numbers

each table:
otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default
settings are used.
Table 5.6-10 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition logic)
512001 800301EE69 DPOS01IN_TMP_44 DPOS01 user configurable cancel condition O
… … … O
512001 8603011E95 DPOS01_CC_SS DPOS01 cancel success
… … …
512001 8703011E96 DPOS01_CC_FS DPOS01 cancel failed
…. … …
(v) DPOS: cancel setting names

Note: The “xx” within “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if
DPOS03 is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The numbers used for “xx” can be
represented by “01” to “72”.)
Table 5.6-12 Setting for ‘Cancel’ in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition in DPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 400 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Once the operation of the select logic is complete, the operate logic start to control the device.
(i) DPOS: “Operate command On” received from remote-end

Figure 5.6-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Operate command On from the remote-end

Success
Select command On from the remote-end Operation
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Figure 5.6-19 Outline of Operate command ‘On’

Figure 5.6-20 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command On (Remote-ON-
Control)” signal is applied to the DPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”
is used for the reception of the “Operate command On (Remote-On-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 5.6-20, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the received signal “Remote-
On-Control” is true.

- 401 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7F)
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (512001 8103011E82)
[DPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.

&
DPOS01-Close R
512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
“DPOS01_OEX_BO” §§
Operate condition‡ (512001 8203011DD3)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL” ‡‡

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” &
1.0s- 100.0s Operate Failed
Figure 5.6-20 Operate On from the remote-end in DPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “On”.
Figure 5.6-31), when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [DPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If
an alternative “operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user
and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic.
The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point “#1” user configurable condition. That is set the scheme switch
[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_35”.
§§Note: The “DPOS01_OEX_BO” signal is issued when Fixedlogic is set for scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate-completed” signal can also be issued
from the logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure
5.6-20. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
completed”, hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at
the connection point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
*Note:The user can select the type of the output signal. When Fix is set for scheme
switch [DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[DPOS01-CPW]. When Var is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table

- 402 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.6-13 for PLC#1, Table 5.6-14 for PLC#2, Table 5.6-17 and Table 5.6-19 for output
signals.
the time set by the [DPOS01-RST] has been reached.
(ii) DPOS: “Operate command Off” received from remote-end

Figure 5.6-21 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Off ’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Operate command Off from the remote-end

Success
Operation
Select command Off from the remote-end decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On l from the local-end
Figure 5.6-21 Outline of Operate command ‘Off’

Figure 5.6-22 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-
Control)” signal is applied to the DPOS01 logic. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 5.6-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Remote-
Off-Control” is true.

- 403 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7E)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-Off-Control” (512001 8003011E81)
[DPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed S

&
DPOS01-Open R
512001 800301EE56 DPOS01IN_TMP_34

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
“DPOS01_FEX_BO” §§
Operate condition‡ (512001 8103011DD0)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL”

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF &
Figure 5.6-22 Operate Off from the remote-end in DPOS01††

connection point #3 “User-configurable condition”. That is set the [DPOS01-
LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_34”.
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued
from logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.6-20.
The user programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
completed”, hence this signal is now generated the user-programmed logic at
connection point #2 “User-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
*Note:The user can select a type of output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table

- 404 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
signals.
after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST].
(iii) DPOS: “Operate command On” received from local-end

Figure 5.6-23 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Operate command On from the local-end

Select command On from the local-end Success
Operation
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 5.6-24 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command signal On (Local-ON-
Control)” is applied to the DPOS01 function. The signal is generated when “Execution of On”
is keyed on the IED front panel.
Output signal to BO
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “Local-On-Control”
is true.

- 405 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
To BO connection
(512001 8003011E7F)
(512001 8103011E82)
Operate Cmd.
Command “Local-On-Control” [DPOS01-CPW]
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operate Cmd.
DPOS01-Close
S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥
R
ICB_STATE

512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35 &
[DPOS01-LGCTRCON]
(512001 8203011DD3)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
ASEQ function§” is in progress Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL” ††

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
Figure 5.6-24 Operate On on the front panel in DPOS01††

The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above using
connection point #1” user configurable condition”. That is set the [DPOS01-
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate comleted” signal can also be issued
from logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.6-20.
The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
completed”, hence this is now generated by the user-programmed logic at
connection point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch

- 406 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
signals.
(iv) DPOS: “Operate command Off” received from local-end

Figure 5.6-25 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from remote-end
Operate command Off from the local-end

Select command Off from the local-end Success
Operate
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 5.6-26 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Local-OFF-Control)”
signal is applied to the DPOS01 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution for Off” is
Output signal to BO
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Local-Off-
Control” is true.

- 407 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF”
DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001) (512001 8003011E7E)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Operate Cmd. (512001 8003011E81)
Command “Local-Off-Control” [DPOS01-CPW]
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operate Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed
DPOS01-Open
S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥
R
ICB_STATE

512001 800301EE56 DPOS01IN_TMP_34 &
[DPOS01-LGCTRCON]
“DPOS01_FEX_BO” §§
(512001 8103011DD0)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
ASEQ function§” is in progress Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” &
Figure 5.6-26 Operate Off on the front panel in DPOS01††

connection point #3 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the [DPOS01-
§§Note: The “DPOS01_OEX_BO” signal is issued when Fixedlogic is set for the scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued
5.6-20. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
connection point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table

- 408 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
signals.
(v) DPOS: “Operate command On” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.6-27 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘On’ with the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Operate command On by the PLC

Success
Select command On by the PLC function Operate
Signal generation by the Operate logic Signal output
decision
PLC function
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC

Figure 5.6-28 describes the operate logic when an “Operate command On (PLC-On-control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of the signal
“Operate command On (PLC-On-control)”: the former connection point (PLC#3) is used for the
reception of the operate-command when the interlock check is required, the later connection
point (PLC#4) is used for the reception of the operate-command when the interlock check is
not required. That is, for the DPOS01 function when the “Operate command On (PLC-On-
Control)” signal generated in the user-programmed logic and when the interlock check is
required in the operate logic, user should apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3: i.e.
DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4: i.e. DEV01_CL_COMMAND). The PLC#3 and PLC#4 are
denoted as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 5.6-1. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCTRCON].
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 5.6-28, can issue an “Operate” signal at output point
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-On-Control”
is true.

- 409 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(512001 8003011E7F)
Command “PLC-On-Control” requiring ILK† check
(512001 8103011E82)
(PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW]
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-On-Control” not requiring ILK† check 0.1 – 50.0 s
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND Operate Cmd.

&
DPOS01-Close R
512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(512001 8203011DD3)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
Figure 5.6-28 Operate On by the PLC function in DPOS01††

an alternative “operate-condition” programmed by the user is required in place of
the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic, connect the
alternative “operate-condition” to the logic shown in Figure 5.6-28 using
connection point #1 “User configurable condition”. That is set the scheme switch
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the logic
programmed by the user instead of the logic shown in Figure 5.6-20, connect the
“Operate completed” signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection
point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [DPOS01-
LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
[DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied
to [DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is
changed.

- 410 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the other DPOS logics, see Table
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected
following expiration of the setting to timer [DPOS01-RST].
(vi) DPOS: “Operate command Off” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.6-29 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Select command On by the PLC Operate command On by the PLC
Operate command Off by the PLC

Success
Select command Off by the PLC Operation
decision
by the user l
Failed Do nothing

Figure 5.6-30 depicts the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (PLC-Off-control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this
command signal, like the signal “Operate command On (PLC-On-control)”, That is, if an
interlock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3: i.e.
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). If, on the other hand an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at the other connection point (PLC#4: i.e. DEV01_OP_COMMAND). PLC#3 and PLC#4
are denoted as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 5.6-2.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 5.6-30, can issue an “Operate” signal at output-point
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-Off-Control”
is true.

- 411 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” “DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “PLC-On-Control” with ILK†
(512001 8003011E7E) (512001 8003011E81)
(PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW]
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-On-Control” without ILK† 0.1 – 50.0 s
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Open”) passed S

&
DPOS01-Open R
512001 800301EE56 DPOS01IN_TMP_34

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
PLC#1
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL”

PLC#2 [DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” 0 t
(512001 8003011E7E)
&
Figure 5.6-30 Operate ‘Off’ by the PLC function in DPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for control of the “Off”
operation.
an alternative “operate-condition” programmed by the user is required in place of
the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic, connect the
alternative “operate-condition” to the logic shown in Figure 5.6-30 using
connection point #1 “User configurable condition”. That is set the scheme switch
§§Note: The “DPOS01_OEX_BO” signal is issued when Fixedlogic is set for the scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the programmed
logic by the user in place of the logic in Figure 5.6-20, connect the signal “Operate
completed” generated in the programmed logic to the connection point #2 “User
configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to
PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
*Note:The user can select a type of the output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied
to [DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is
changed.

- 412 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
signals.
(vii) DPOS: operation condition logic

examine an operate condition; the operate condition is determined by signal
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”. If the functionality of the original logic does not meet with user-
requirements, the following alternatives are available:

connection point “User configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “DPOS01IN_TMP_39”, listed as PLC#2 in
Table 5.6-16.
2. Set scheme switch [DPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to PLC.

If the addition of another signal is required, the user can add the signal to the operate condition
logic using connection point “Additional condition”
1. Add a user-preferred signal using DPOS01IN_TMP_38, listed as PLC#1 in Table
5.6-16.
2. Set scheme switch [DPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixedlogic.

- 413 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
From SOTFSW*1 DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Operate condition
From TRC*4 = DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
General trip (512001 8103011F5F)
GEN.TRIP
= DPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(512001 8203011F60)
Command “ON-control” received &

received
DPOS01_3PH_STATE
(512001 3103011001)
Controlling Event
OFF
512001 800301EE65 DPOS01IN_TMP_38
[DPOS01- LGEXFFCT]
User configurable operate condition (PLC#2 connection point)
Fixedlogic
512001 810301EE66 DPOS01IN_TMP_39 &
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28

&
From CMNCTRL
SERI_ERR
[DPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 5.6-31 Operate condition logic for On/Off in DPOS01
1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; “Command
Blocking” is implemented as “CBK” in a software switch controller (SOTFSW).
The IEC61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more
information on “CBK”, see section 5.2. See the signal ““CBK_STATE” in Table
5.6-5.
function (DCB).
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling” signifies that other operators are changing
the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED should be
inhibited whilst ever the event is being detected. The detection signal is denoted
as “Travelling OR” in Table 5.6-5.
4Note: If an IED in the process of issuing a trip command, all control operation is blocked
until the trip operation has been completed. If the IED has a relay application, the
trip command is issued at the output point “GEN.TRIP” in Table 5.6-5.
5Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a

- 414 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

6Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See section
5.6.6(i)-3)
8Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation-
direction of logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch [SCDEN], operation of
the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction
compared with the previous operation-direction. Alternatively, if On is set for the
9Note: The user must program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The user
must connect the “Control hierarchy condition” to the select condition logic using
the connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see Chapter
General control function: Control hierarchy. See PLC#3 of Table 5.6-6.Note that
the logic outputs are generated separately for both On and Off.
(viii) DPOS: operation signal names and numbers

Note: The user should note the meaning of the following descriptions as shown in
“M” indicated that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” indicates that that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 5.6-13 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 User configurable condition)
512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35 DPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
…. …. …..
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 DPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
… … …

- 415 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
Table 5.6-16 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 and PLC#2 for additional and
operate condition)
512001 800301EE65 DPOS01IN_TMP_38 DPOS01 user additional condition(PLC#1) O
… … …
512001 810302EE66 DPOS01IN_TMP_39 DPOS01 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….

512001 8203011DD3 DPOS01_OEX_BO DPOS01 operate (ON) command for Binary Output.
… …. …
512001 8103011DD0 DPOS01_FEX_BO DPOS01 operate (OFF) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
Table 5.6-18 PLC monitoring points (Signals within operate logic)

512001 8003011E7F DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF DPOS01 On-direction execute command
…. …. ….
512001 8003011E7E DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF DPOS01 Off-direction execute command
…. …. ….
512001 8103011E82 DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS DPOS01 On-direction execute command
… …. ….
512001 8003011E81 DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS DPOS01 Off-direction execute command

- 416 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… …. ….
Table 5.6-19 PLC monitoring points (Output signals for response)

512001 8003011E93 DPOS01_EX_CMP DPOS01 completed control
… … …
512001 8603011E91 DPOS01_EX_FFL DPOS01 failed control
…. …. ….
(ix) DPOS: operation setting names

Note: The “xx” of “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if the DPOS03
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented by “01”
to “72”.)
Table 5.6-20 Setting of Operate in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-PLSM Methods of command output(DPOS1-72) Fix Fix/Var/Latch
DPOSxx-CPW Duration of command output(DPOS1-72) 1.0[sec] 0.1~50.0[sec]
DPOSxx-RST Detection time for terminating control (DPOS1-72) 30.0[sec] 0.1~100.0[sec]
DPOSxx-LGCTRCON Logic selector for operate condition (DPOS01-72) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
DPOSxx-LGCFEXOT Logic selector for command output (DPOS01-72) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
DPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxx-LGEXFFCT Logic selector for operate condition (DPOS01-72) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 417 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.6.4 Operation counter

The DPOS01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation-counter to
predict the lifespan of switchgear and other functions. The user can select a count mode using
a setting. Table 5.6-21 and Figure 5.6-32 show the modes, for which a user is required to change
a mode in response to a device signal. For instance for the DPOS01 function, a user can select
the mode using scheme switch [DPOS01-CNTS], which is set to C-On; counting-up is performed
when a switchgear signal gives rise to a change in state from “Off to On”.
Table 5.6-21 Mode of operation counter

Mode Description
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to closed (On). When the signal
C-On
is changed from “Off to On”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to open (Off). When the signal
C-Off
is changed from “On to Off”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up occurs when any state change occurs: that is, “Off to On” or “On to
C-OnOff
Off”.
NA Stop the count function
†Note:The operation-counter value is not cleared when power is removed from the IED.
The operation-counter is available in the DPOS01 to DPOS72 functions.
On state
Off state
Figure 5.6-32 Device signal
The user can change the value of the operation-counter from either the front panel or
remotely. For example, in the sub-menu for “Operation counter”, the user can set a user-
preferred value for the operation-counter. See Chapter Technical description (BU): User
Operation Counter DPOS1-CNT1

10:48 1/96 10:48 1/4
_DPOS1-CNT > DPOS_Dev1-3Ph +
DPOS2-CNT > CANCEL
0
DPOS3-CNT >
DPOS_Dev1-APh +
DPOS4-CNT >
DPOS5-CNT > 0
ENTER DPOS_Dev1-BPh +
DPOS6-CNT >
Figure 5.6-33 Operation counter sub-menu

Note: With regard to signal “DPOS01_3PH_STATE”, the sub-menu represents it as
“DPOS_Dev1-3Ph”. Analogous to the signal “DPOS01_3PH_STATE”,
“DPOS01_APH_STATE” is represented as “DPOS_Dev1-APh”. Signals
“DPOS01_BPH_STATE” and “DPOS01_CPH_STATE” are displayed in a similar
manner.

- 418 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) DPOS: “Counter value change” received from remote-end

Mapping of Input signal required
Figure 5.6-34 depicts the logic when a command “change value for counter” is received at the
DPOS01 logic. With regard to a three-phase counter, the input-point
“DEV01_3PH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. With regard to a phase-A counter, the input-point
“DEV01_APH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. For phase-B and phase-C, the input-points
“DEV01_BPH_CONTROL_REQ” and “DEV01_CPH_CONTROL_REQ” are used.
“DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(512001 8A03031F86)
Command “change value for counter”
512001_7003016D09 DEV01_3PH_REQ Operate Command
&
Figure 5.6-34 Changing counter value for three-phase† with operation from the remote-end in
DPOS01
‡Note:The “operate condition” signal is provided from the operate condition logic of
Figure 5.6-36.
†Note: The user can apply other counter change commands for phase-A, -B, and –C as
shown in Table 5.6-22. The resultant signals for the other DPOS02-72 logics are
shown in Table 5.6-23.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
(ii) DPOS: “Counter value change” received from local-end

Input signal from the front panel
Figure 5.6-35 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is provided in the
DPOS01 function. The command is provided from the sub-menu, as shown in Figure 5.6-33.

“DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(512001 8A03031F86)
Command “Change value”
Figure 5.6-35 Changing counter value by operation from the front panel in DPOS01
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.

- 419 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) DPOS: operation counter logic for the counter

Figure 5.6-36 illustrates the operate condition logic. The DPOS01 function can determine an
operate-condition using a signal received from “Control-hierarchy”. The control-hierarchy
condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic; the user must connect the control-
hierarchy with the DPOS01 function using connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28” (see Table
5.6-6).
Command blocking*1 To counter logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ Operate condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection Unmatched condition detected *4
SERI_ERR = DPOS01_SC_ST_ERR
From Control hierarchy
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28
Figure 5.6-36 Operate condition logic for changing the counter in DPOS01
1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; the “Command
Blocking” function is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch
controller (SOTFSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “Command Blocking”
function as “CmdBlk”. For more information on “CBK”, see section 5.2. See the
signal ““CBK_STATE” of Table 5.6-5.
function: Common controls (DCB).
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it indicates
that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should
inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The
detected signal is denoted by “Travelling OR” in Table 5.6-5.
4Note: If the issuing of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is
application, the trip command is issues at the output point “GEN.TRIP” in Table
5.6-5.
(iv) DPOS: operation counter signal names and numbers

Table 5.6-22 Mapping points
512001 7003016D09 DEV01_3PH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for 3-phase counter value
… … …

- 420 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

512001 7003016D0A DEV01_APH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for A-phase counter value
… … …
512001 7003016D0B DEV01_BPH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for B-phase counter value
… … ….
512001 7003016D0C DEV01_CPH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for C-phase counter value
… … …
Table 5.6-23 Results of changing counter

512001 8A03011F86 DPOS01_SLD_CSCN DPOS01 select command for Binary Output.
… … …
(v) DPOS: operation counter setting names

Table 5.6-24 Setting for operation counter in DPOSxx
DPOSxx-CNTS Mode selection of the counter in DPOSxx *user-preferred NA / C-On / C-Off / C-OnOff

- 421 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.6.5 Measurement about operation intervals

The DPOS01 function can measure operation intervals (OT1 to OT4) †; the intervals OT1 to
OT2 can represent the period of time when a switch changes from “Closed” to “open”. In the
DPOS01 function the operation period is grouped into sub-time periods, as shown in Table
5.6-25. The user should set scheme switch [DPOS01-OPETMEN] to On.
Table 5.6-25 Four intervals measured in DPOS01 function

Intervals Trigger Events for measurement
Start Signal “DPOS01_FEX_BO” sensed
OT1 End Switch status is changed from “On” to
“Intermediate”
Start Device status “Intermediate” sensed
OT2 End Switch status is changed from “Intermediate” to
“Off”
Start Signal “DPOS01_OEX_BO” sensed
OT3 End Switch status is changed from “Off” to
“Intermediate”
Start Device status “Intermediate” sensed
OT4 End Switch status is changed from “Intermediate” to
“On”
†Note:The function “operation time measurement” is available in the DPOS01 to
DPOS72 functions.
Signal “DPOS01_FEX_BO”
Sensing
intermediate state
On Intermediate Off
Device status for Off

OT1 OT2
Figure 5.6-37 Two intervals (OT1 and OT2) for Off-control
Signal POS01_FEX_BO”
Sensing
intermediate state
Off Intermediate On
Device status for On

OT3 OT4
Figure 5.6-38 Two intervals (OT3 and OT4) for On-control

- 422 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
The user can clear the intervals (OT1 to OT4) by key-operation of the “Operation time”
sub-menu Figure 5.6-39 or operation from the remote-end. See Chapter Technical description
(BU): User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Operation Time DPOS1-OT1

10:48 1/97 10:48 1/5
_DPOS1-OT > DPOS_SYN-Dev1-OT1
DPOS2-OT > CANCEL ******.*** ms
DPOS3-OT > DPOS_SYN-Dev1-OT2
DPOS4-OT >
******.*** ms
DPOS5-OT > ENTER DPOS_SYN-Dev1-OT3
DPOS6-OT >
Figure 5.6-39 Operation time sub-menu
(i) DPOS: measurement signal names and numbers

512001 7003006D0D DEV01_RESET_REQ DPOS01 operation time reset command received (Mapping Data)
(ii) DPOS: measurement setting names

Table 5.6-27 Setting of operation time function in DPOSxx
DPOSxx-OPETMEN Activation of the operation time measurement in DPOSxx On Off / On

- 423 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user should connect the DPOS input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits;
subsequently, the DPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. In order to set
up the DPOS function the user should execute the following four steps.
i DPOS: setup for BI connection for status signal
ii DPOS: setup for BO connection for “Select command On/Off”
iii DPOS: setup for BO connection for “Operate command”
iv DPOS: setup for contact health check
Note that the DPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [DPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
(i) DPOS: setup for BI connection for status signals

Figure 5.6-40 exemplifies the reception of signals at the DPOS01 function. To acquire the
status signal§ for phase-A, the user should set two input points for settings [DPOS01A-
NOPSG] and [DPOS01A-NCLSG].†
†Note:Normally an input-signal corresponding to phase-A is generated using a normally-

open contact (NO) and a normally-closed contact (NC). If a NO and a NC contact
are exchanged, the input-signal should be determined by inversion; that is, the
user is required to set On for both scheme switches [DPOS01A-NOPSGI] and
[DPOS01A-NCLSGI].
§Note: The state signal acquired can be monitored. For more information, see Chapter
Automatic supervision.
Grouping three-phase signals corresponding to a state

Suppose the status signals are acquired on the six BI circuits at IO#1 slot. The signals
corresponding to phase-A can be acquired via N/C and N/O contacts; thus, the user should set
two input-points (8001001110 and 810101110 at 200B01†) for the settings [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
and [DPOS01A-NCLSG], respectively, as shown in Figure 5.6-40. For input points
corresponding to phase-B and phase-C, the user must also apply input-points via settings. The
user sets And for both the scheme switches [DPOS01-OPC] and [DPOS01-CLC] respectively;
finally the scheme switch [DPOS01-DEVTYPE] should be set to 3-Pole.

- 424 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Signals from the

BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01
devices Output ‡
DPOS01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”
(512001 3103011001)
Phase-A signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
&
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPOS01A-NCLSG]
“DPOS01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (512001 8103011F5F)
&
Phase-B signals
BI signal selected by & Faulty
N/O contact setting [DPOS01B-NOPSG]
signal &
BI signal selected by &

N/C contact setting [DPOS01B-NCLSG]
signal & Intermediate
Phase-C signals
BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01C-NOPSG]
signal & &
Close
BI signal selected by
N/C contact setting [DPOS01C-NCLSG]
signal &
[DPOS01-EN]
On &
[DPOS01-DEVTYPE]
3-Pole
[DPOS01-OPC]
And
&
[DPOS01-CLC]
And
Figure 5.6-40 Acquisition of a state signal

†Note:The user should set the actual input-points. See Chapter Technical description
(BU): Binary IO module.
‡Note:In Figure 5.6-40 two signals can be issued: “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” and
“DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”. One is used in the select condition logic and the operate
condition logic (see Figure 5.6-13 and Figure 5.6-28). Another is used for operation
in the event suppression function. Other signals are also provided:
DPOS01_APH_STATE, DPOS01_BPH_STATE, and DPOS01_CPH_STATE.
Acquisition of a signal corresponding to a phase

Suppose that a state signal is acquired on the two BI circuits at IO#1 slot. An individual phase
signal can be taken using the N/C and the N/O contacts; thus, the user should set two input-
points (8001001110 and 810101110 in 200B01†) for the settings [DPOS01A-NOPSG] and
[DPOS01A-NCLSG]. The user should set the scheme switch [DPOS01-DEVTYPE] to 1-Pole.

- 425 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Signals from the

BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01
devices Output ‡
DPOS01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”
(512001 3103011001)
Single phase signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPOS01A-NCLSG]
“DPOS01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (512001 8103011F5F)
&
Faulty
&
Intermediate
&
Close
[DPOS01-EN]
On &
[DPOS01-DEVTYPE]
1-Pole
Figure 5.6-41 Acquisition of single-phase signal at DPOS01

‡Note:In Figure 5.6-41 two signals can be issued “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” and
“DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”, which are the same as the ones of the Figure 5.6-40.
Event suppression
If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the DPOS function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the DPOS function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce additional burden created.
The DPOS function has an event suppression detector. The user should take into account
of the scheme switches [DPOS-NELD], [DPOS-TELD] and [DPOS-TELR]†. Set On for scheme
switch [DPOS01-SPPEN].
[DPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[DPOS-TELD] [DPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E

- 426 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time ‘A’, the setting [DPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time ‘B’. The setting [DPOS-TELD] pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time ‘A’ (e.g., Time ‘A’ to Time ‘C’).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [DPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time ‘D’ to Time ‘E’).
To initiate the event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch [DPOS01-
SPPEN].
(ii) DPOS: setup for BO connection for “Select command On/Off”

Figure 5.6-43 exemplifies the connection for the select command On and Off. Suppose that
connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” and “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”†; as a result, the “Select command
On” and the “Select command Off” signals are issued at BO1 and BO2 respectively.
Terminal and
Select logic in DPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8603011DC6)
Select logic for select command On “BO1” Select
Signal captured by command
in DPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
On to the
DRIVER BO1 device
[Input signal 2]
To contact health & ≥1
check [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
Select logic for select command check
Off in DPOS01 [Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
PLC connection point on BO1
200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
Terminal and
BO2 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8A03011DC4) Select
“BO2”
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112) Off to the
device
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102011113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310201E11D BO2_SOURCE
Figure 5.6-43 Example of select commands connected with BO1 & BO2 at IO#1
†Note:Table 5.6-8 shows the remaining signals with the exception of

- 427 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” and “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
(iii) DPOS: setup for BO connection for “Operate command On/Off”

Figure 5.6-44 exemplifies the connection for operate command On/Off. Suppose that connection
with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points “DPOS01_OEX_BO” and
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”; as a result, the “Operate command On” and the “Operate command Off”
signals are issued at BO3 and BO4 respectively.
Terminal and
Operate logic in DPOS01 BO3 and BO4 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
(512001 8203011DD3)
Operate
“BO3” command
Signal captured by
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8202021112) On to the
device
“Operate command [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO3
On” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO3-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8202021113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“DPOS01_FEX_BO” 200B01 310202E11D BO3_SOURCE
(512001 8103011DD0)
Operate
“BO4” command
Signal captured by
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8302031112) Off to the
device
“Operate command [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO4
Off” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO4-RB”
Connected by (200B01_8302031113)
Off
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310203E11D BO4_SOURCE
Figure 5.6-44 Example of operate commands connected with BO3 and BO4 at IO#1
†Note:Table 5.6-17 shows the remaining signals with the exception of
“DPOS01_OEX_BO” and “DPOS01_FEX_BO”.
(iv) DPOS: setup for contact health check

The DPOS01 function has a contact health check feature for the BO circuits; hence, the user
is able to connect an output signal to the contact health check function when Fixedlogic is set
for scheme switch [DPOS01-LGXFEOT]†. Consequently, the DPOS01 function can determine
whether the signal has been successfully output from the BO. If a failure is reported, the
DPOS01 function determines that the signal has not been output successfully to the BO; then,
the command On or Off is canceled immediately and the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait
for a command” stage.
†Note:Table 5.6-33 shows settings for the health check feature in the other DPOS
functions.

- 428 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting for “Select command On”

For example, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing
of the command; the user can connect point “BO1-RB” with the contact health check function
using the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]. Do not key the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” .
Selecte logic in
DPOS01

logic in DPOS01
(512001 8603011DC6)
BO1 circuit at & Result of contact health check

IO#1
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]
Figure 5.6-45 Example connection of “Select command On” for the health check feature
Setting for “Select command Off”

Similar to “select command On”, the point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected with the BO2
circuit; the user is required to key point “BO2-RB” for the setting [DPOS01-FSLBORD]. Do not
key the point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
Selection logic in
DPOS01

logic in DPOS01
(55120018 A03011DC4)

IO#1
“BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPOS01-FSLBORD]
Figure 5.6-46 Example connection of “Select command Off” for the health check feature

- 429 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting for “Operate command On”

Similarly, the point “BO3-RB” must be applied for the setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD].
Operate logic in
DPOS01
“DPOS01_OEX_BO” Contact health check

“510001_8201011DD3” logic in DPOS01
BO3circuit at & Result of contact health check

IO#1
“BO3-RB”
“200B01_8202021113”
setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD]
Figure 5.6-47 Example connection of “Operate command On” for the health check feature
Setting for “Operate command Off”

Similarly, the point “BO4-RB” must be applied for the setting [DPOS01-FEXBORD].
Operate logic in
DPOS01

“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
logic in DPOS01
“512001 8103011DD0”

IO#1
“BO4-RB”
“200B01_8302031113”
setting [DPOS01-FEXBORD]
Figure 5.6-48 Example connection of “Operate command Off” for the health check feature

- 430 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 5.6-49 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1 to BO4 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working
correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table 5.6-28, to
demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.

Example #1 Contact health check settings for example #1
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001113(BO1-RB) set for [DPOS01-OSLORD] OK
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113 (BO2-RB) set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO3” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113(BO3-RB) set for [DPOS01-OEXBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO4” atIO#1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [DPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Plus (+)
(512001 8603011DC6) SW1 driven with
Select command On BO1 at IO#1
BO1 SW 1
On
“BO1-RB” command
(200B01_8002001113) SW 3
SW2 driven with
(512001 8A03011DC4)
BO2 at IO#1
Select command Off BO2 SW 2
Off
(200B01_8102011113) SW 4
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
SW3 driven with
(512001 8203011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
Operate command On BO3
Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0) SW4 driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command Off
“BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 5.6-49 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example #1

- 431 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Settings for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 5.6-50 shows a setting example of an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The settings
are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 5.6-29, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead BO1 is
actually chosen, which is incorrect. In this case, the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD] is
meaningless ; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.

Example #2 Contact health check setting for example #2
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001112 (BO1) set for [DPOS01-OSLORD] NG
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113 (BO2-RB) set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO4” at IO#1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [DPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Local/Remote-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB) Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
mistakenly chosen with
“200B01_8002001112”
(512001 8603011DC6) SW1 is driven with
BO1 at IO#1
Select command On BO1 SW 1
On
command
SW 3
SW2 is driven with
(512001 8A03011DC4)
BO2 at IO#1
Select command Off BO2 SW 2
Off
(200B01_8102011113) SW 4
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
SW3 is driven with
(512001 8203011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
BO3
Operate command On Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0) SW4 is driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command Off
“BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 5.6-50 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example#2

- 432 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Settings for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 5.6-51 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special setting
can issue a select command, which is called “operated by internal select function”. The user
does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there are no BIO
circuits available.

Example #3 Contact health check setting for example #3
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any “BO” “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” set for [DPOS01-OSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any “BO” “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO4” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [DPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Plus (+)
(512001 8603011DC6)
Select command On SW1 is not driven with any BO
SW 1
On
command
Physical BOs
are virtualized. SW 3
(512001 8A03011DC4) SW2 is not driven with any BO
Select command Off SW 2
Off
command
SW 4
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
SW3 is driven with
(512001 8203011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
Operate command On BO3
Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0) SW4 is driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command Off
“BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 5.6-51 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example#3

- 433 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(v) DPOS: setup signal names and numbers
Table 5.6-31 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in DPOSxx)
512001 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state
…. …. ….
…. …. ….
(vi) DPOS: setup setting names

Note: The “xx” of “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if the DPOS03
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented as “01”
to “72” for control (monitor).
Table 5.6-32 Setting for Binary input signals in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxx-CTRAHMI Activate local panel control of DPOS01-72 SBO DIR / SBO
DPOSxx-EN Activate monitoring function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxx-DEVTYPE Selection of device type 3-pole 3-pole/1-pile/ switch
DPOSxx-OPC Activate monitoring function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxx-CPC Activate monitoring function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxxA-NOPSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxA-NCLSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxB-NOPSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxB-NCLSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxC-NOPSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxC-NCLSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxx-SPPEN Activate event suppression for DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOS-NELD Number of change to lock status. 10 0~99
DPOS-TELD Time to locking state( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
DPOS-TELR Time to unlocking state (sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
Table 5.6-33 Setting for health check feature in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-OSLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred
DPOSxx-FSLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred
DPOSxx-OEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred
DPOSxx-FEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred

- 434 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user can operate the DPOS function over IEC 61850 communications following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the DPOS function is designed for the class of “Double Point
Controller (DPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
(i) DPOS: editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the DPOS01 function. Figure 5.6-52
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Common Switch controller (CSWI)” is chosen for the
DPOS01 function. After the user has defined an object “DPC”, the DPOS01 logical node can be
saved with the name “CSWI” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object “DPC” in the
DPOS01 logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing for
the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 5.6-52 Defining “DPC” object in CSWI4 logic node

- 435 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Defining SBO mode

Figure 5.6-53 exemplifies the DPOS01 logic node saved as “CSWI4”. In the SBO mode, the user
should select the following items for the “CSWI4$Pos” using GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Defining DIR mode

Figure 5.6-54 exemplifies the DPOS01 logic node saved as save as “CSWI4”. In the DIR mode,
the following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS.
 Oper
 origin

- 436 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) DPOS: mapping output data

The user should group the DPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. (Figure 5.6-55 illustrates
how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the DPOS01 function are required to map
for IEC 61850 communications.
Table 5.6-34 Mapping signals required for CSWI4 object in DPOS01 function
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$origin orCat orCategory ST 512001 3103011008 DPOS01_3PH_ORCAT
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 512001 6A03011009 DPOS01_3PH_ORIDENT
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos stVal Dbpos ST 512001 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos q Quality ST 512001 3103011005 DPOS01_3PH_QUALITY
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos t Timestamp ST 512001 9003011006 DPOS01_3PH_TIMESTAMP
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos stSeld BOOLEAN ST 512001 0003011D90 DPOS01_STD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 5.6-55 Attribute mapped into DPCSO object of CSWI4
(iii) DPOS: mapping input data

The DPOS01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
5.6-35 shows the input “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos”;
the user should map the input-point to the Object reference having attribute CO†. Figure 5.6-56
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control” in
the functional constraint (FC).

- 437 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.6-35 Mapping signals required for DPC object for CSWI4
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 5.6-56 Input-point mapped for CSWI4

- 438 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.6.8 DPOS settings

DPOS01(Function ID: 512001)
Common DPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

DPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
DPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
DPOS01-EN Off / On - DPOS01 switch for Device01 Off
Dev01 DPOS01-DEVNAME [Preferred text] - item name of DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 !
DPOS01-00NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,0)state Travelling0 !
DPOS01-01NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,1)state Off !
DPOS01-10NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (1,0)state On !
DPOS01-11NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (1,1)state Travelling1 !
DPOS01-UDFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of undefined Undefine !
DPOS01-FLTNAME [Preferred text] - state name of faulty Faulty !
1-Pole / 3-Pole /
DPOS01-DEVTYPE - Device Type 1-Pole
switch
Normally Open Signal of the single-pole or
DPOS01A-NOPSG [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
phase A
DPOS01A-NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
Normally Close Signal of the single-pole or
DPOS01A-NCLSG [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
phase A
DPOS01A-NCLSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01B-NOPSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Open Signal of phase B Not assigned
DPOS01B-NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01B-NCLSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Close Signal of phase B Not assigned
DPOS01B-NCLSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01C-NOPSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Open Signal of phase C Not assigned
DPOS01C-NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01C-NCLSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Close Signal of phase C Not assigned
DPOS01C-NCLSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01-OPC And / Or - Normally Open contact grouping And
DPOS01-CLC And / Or - Normally Close contact grouping Or
DPOS01-SPPEN Off / On - Automatic event suppression function Off
Off / On /
DPOS01-UDFEN - undefined pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
DPOS01-UDFTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette Undefined check timer 30.0
Off / On /
DPOS01-FLTEN - faulty pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
DPOS01-FLTTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette faulty check timer 30.0
DPOS01-CTREN Off / On - control mode (control enable) Off
DPOS01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
DPOS01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
select binary output read data(DataID)1 for no
DPOS01-NSLBORD1 [Preferred signal] - 5120018903011DC0
direction select command
DPOS01-NSLBORD2 [Preferred signal] - 5120018903011DC0
select binary output read data(DataID) for off
DPOS01-FSLBORD [Preferred signal] - 5120018A03011DC4
select binary output read data(DataID) for on
DPOS01-OSLBORD [Preferred signal] - 5120018603011DC6
execute binary output read data(DataID) for
DPOS01-FEXBORD [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
off direction execute command
DPOS01-OEXBORD [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
on direction execute command

- 439 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

FixedLogic /
DPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic
PLC
FixedLogic /
DPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
DPOS01-LGEXFFCT - FixedLogic
PLC factor
FixedLogic / Change logic about off direction execute
DPOS01-LGFEXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
FixedLogic / Change logic about on direction execute
DPOS01-LGOEXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
FixedLogic /
DPOS01-LGCNFFCT - Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
DPOS01-PLSM Fix / Var - pulse mode Fix
DPOS01-CPW 0.1 - 50.0 s control pulse width 1.0
DPOS01-RST 1.0 - 100.0 s response check timer 30.0
NA / C-On / C-
DPOS01-CNTS - count status NA
Off / C-OnOff
DPOS01-OPETMEN Off / On - Operation Time Measurement enable Off
DPOS01-APBD Process / Bay - status change origin Process
DPOS01-CTRDIR Off / On - Capable control direction On
Note: The DPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have
omitted the other tables because this will be the same as the table for the 1st
device with the exception of the device number.

- 440 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.6.9 DPOS signals (DataID)

 Signal monitoring points in DPOS01
8003011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL
3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state
3103011FE5 DPOS01_APH_STATE DPOS01 aph_state
3103011FEA DPOS01_BPH_STATE DPOS01 bph_state
8603011F7B DPOS01_CNT_CS07 DPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal
0003011D91 DPOS01_CNT_SEL DPOS01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D20 DPOS01_CNT_VAL DPOS01 count value
3103011FEF DPOS01_CPH_STATE DPOS01 cph_state
8B03011F79 DPOS01_CTR_SGU DPOS01 selected signal
8903011F99 DPOS01_CTR_SGUCN DPOS01 count change selected signal
8203011E8B DPOS01_EC_F_CS DPOS01 execute command fail condition signal
8103011E9A DPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS DPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
0003011D97 DPOS01_EX_BO_OPOK DPOS01 execute binary output signal for SAS
8003011E93 DPOS01_EX_CMP DPOS01 execute complete signal
8F03011F5E DPOS01_EX_CMP_TMO DPOS01 timeout after execute completion
8903011F9E DPOS01_EX_CMP_TMOCN DPOS01 count change timeout after execute completion
8603011E91 DPOS01_EX_FFL DPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8503011E8F DPOS01_EX_SFL DPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8003011E81 DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS DPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal
8103011DD0 DPOS01_FEX_BO DPOS01 off direction execute binary output signal
8403011F45 DPOS01_FLT_DET1 DPOS01 Faulty Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
8A03011DC4 DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 off direction select binary output signal
8A03011F81 DPOS01_FSL_CS19 DPOS01 select receive open signal check answer
3103011D01 DPOS01_LCD_ST DPOS01 state for LCD
3103011D00 DPOS01_MMC_ST DPOS01 state for MIMIC
8903011DC0 DPOS01_NSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select binary output signal
8603011F7E DPOS01_NSL_CS07 DPOS01 select receive signal check answer
8103011E82 DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS DPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal
8203011DD3 DPOS01_OEX_BO DPOS01 on direction execute binary output signal
8603011DC6 DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 on direction select binary output signal
8803011F73 DPOS01_OSL_CS41 DPOS01 on direction select condition signal 41
8603011F8B DPOS01_RST_CS07 DPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal
0003011F57 DPOS01_RST_SIG DPOS01 reset time signal
8503011F87 DPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTCN DPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal check
8503011F8A DPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTRT DPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal check
8003011E76 DPOS01_SLD_CS DPOS01 selected condition signal
8003011F67 DPOS01_SLD_CS04 DPOS01 selected condition signal 04
8A03011F86 DPOS01_SLD_CSCN DPOS01 count change selected condition signal
8A03011F89 DPOS01_SLD_CSRT DPOS01 reset time selected condition signal
0003011D90 DPOS01_SLD_RPT DPOS01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
8E03011F5D DPOS01_SLD_TMO DPOS01 time out after selected
8A03011F9D DPOS01_SLD_TMOCN DPOS01 count change time out after selected
8103011E7B DPOS01_SLF_CS DPOS01 no direction select fail condition signal
8703011E98 DPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS DPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8803011F9B DPOS01_SLF_FCT_F03CN DPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8703011F9C DPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04CN DPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8303011F9A DPOS01_SLF_FCT_F07CN DPOS01 count change selected timer for a check
8503011F65 DPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG05 DPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 05
8803011F6C DPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 DPOS01 selected timer for a check

- 441 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 Signal monitoring points in DPOS01

8003011E7D DPOS01_SLR_CS DPOS01 select release condition signal
8303011D02 DPOS01_ST_OFF DPOS01 Normal open state
8103011D03 DPOS01_ST_ON DPOS01 Normal close state
0003011D95 DPOS01_TMP_02 DPOS01 time reset selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3103011D80 DPOS01_TMP_06 DPOS01 control event data (selected)
3103011D81 DPOS01_TMP_07 DPOS01 control event data (select fail)
3103011D82 DPOS01_TMP_08 DPOS01 control event data (select release)
3103011D83 DPOS01_TMP_09 DPOS01 control event data (execute output on)
3103011D84 DPOS01_TMP_10 DPOS01 control event data (execute command ng)
3103011D86 DPOS01_TMP_11 DPOS01 control event data (execute fail)
0003011F53 DPOS01_TRA DPOS01 travelling info
8203011F43 DPOS01_UDF_DET1 DPOS01 Undefined Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
0003011FB6 DPOS01A_CNT_SEL DPOS01 A count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D24 DPOS01A_CNT_VAL DPOS01 A-phase count value
0003011FB7 DPOS01B_CNT_SEL DPOS01 B count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D28 DPOS01B_CNT_VAL DPOS01 B-phase count value
0003011FB8 DPOS01C_CNT_SEL DPOS01 C count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D2C DPOS01C_CNT_VAL DPOS01 C-phase count value
 Common signal monitoring points

800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND dev01 close command
800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK dev01 close command with interlock bypass
800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND dev01 open command
800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK dev01 open command with interlock bypass
820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28 DPOS01IN_TMP_28
800301EE53 DPOS01IN_TMP_29 DPOS01IN_TMP_29
820301EE5A DPOS01IN_TMP_36 DPOS01IN_TMP_36
830301EE5B DPOS01IN_TMP_37 DPOS01IN_TMP_37
800301EDDA DPOS01IN_TMP_40 DPOS01IN_TMP_40
810301EDDB DPOS01IN_TMP_41 DPOS01IN_TMP_41
820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 DPOS01IN_TMP_42
830301EE5F DPOS01IN_TMP_43 DPOS01IN_TMP_43
800301ED5A DPOS01IN_TMP_45 DPOS01IN_TMP_45
800301ED77 DPOS01IN_TMP_46 DPOS01IN_TMP_46
 Mapping points in DPOS01

DPOS(Function ID: 512001)
7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data)

- 442 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the DPOS function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device; hence, the
user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For example, when the user
wishes to find the “DPOS02A_FLT_DET” point provided for the 2nd device, use the
description of “DPOS01A_FLT_DET”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“DPOS02A_FLT_DET” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for DPOS01A_FLT_DET (i.e., “8303011F49”)
Step 2 Identify the numbers at the fifth and sixth digit from the ID. (i.e.,
“01”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for the 2nd
device)
Step 4 Replace the sixth and fifth digit numbers with the new device
number. (i.e., get new ID “8303021F49” of “DPOS02A_FLT_DET”) The
ID is expressed in hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must change
the device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.

- 443 -
CU
––––––––Three position device function (TPOS)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Three position device function (TPOS)

The three-position device function (TPOS) is used when it is required to control a device having
a triple selector (e.g., the selector has three positions: P1, P2, or P3). The user can experience
the following devices as the triple selector: A 43-switch (43S), an earth-switch (ES) with a
disconnector (DS) and others.
a. P1–control b. P2–control c. P3–control
P1 P2 P3
Operation as DS Neutral position Operation as ES
Figure 5.7-1 Example of switch positions in EDS operation
The TPOS function has “Operation counters” and “Operation time measurement”; these
features are used to examine the devices; these features are useful when the user wishes to
assess the operating time of the device; these features are performed by counting the state-
changes for the device. The BO circuits connected with the TPOS function are used for issuing
commands; the BI circuits are used for receiving responses; hence, the user should connect the
BO and BI circuits with the TPOS function†. The TPOS function includes three logic groups:
1. Select logic, 2. Cancel logic, and 3. Operate logic.
EDS devices (43-switches) can be controlled separately; i.e., the function has twenty-four
separate sets for the control (i.e., TPOS01, TPOS02, …, TPOS24). For simplicity, only the
TPOS01 function is discussed here; the features in the other TPOS functions are identical to
the TPOS01 function.
†Note:A binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits
(BOs); the user makes the connection between the TPOS01 function and the
binary IO module using a signal number (is made of a “Function_ID” and an
“Element_ID”). The signal numbers and names in the TPOS01 function are listed
later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the TPOS function quickly, go to sections 5.7.6 and
5.7.5, where settings of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signal-points
for IEC61850 communication is described.

- 444 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to TPOS01 operation. Table
5.7-10 shows all of the scheme switches in the TPOS function.
(i) TPOS: “Select command P1-control” received from remote-end

Figure 5.7-2 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Cancel command
Cancel logic
P2 control from the remote-end
P1 control from the local-end

Operate logic
Operate command
P1 control by the PLC function Operate logic
P2 control by the PLC function
Figure 5.7-2 Outline of select command ‘P1-control’

Figure 5.7-3 shows the select logic when a “Selection command (Remote-P1-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. This logic has the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” for
the reception of a select command; the input-point should be mapped for IEC 61850
discuss how to map the input-points for IEC 61850 communication in section 5.7.7.

- 445 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Selection logic in TPOS01 Output
TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001)

Command “P1-Control” from the remote
For SBO operation
513001 7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command
command”
For DIR operation
To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed
TPOS1-P1 0 t Select “success”
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operation

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.7-3 Select P1-control from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function provides the operation criteria for “P1
control”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria
is defined by the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition). For
more information, see section 5.5.
automatic control. The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being
*Note:The TPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using
IEC61850. To use this signal, the user must map for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 5.7-4,
Table 5.7-6, and Table 5.7-9.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue an signal “Select success” at the output point
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-P1-Control” received is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-
P1-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 446 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) TPOS: “Select command P2-control” received from remote-end

Figure 5.7-4 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P2-control’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P2 control from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed

IEC61850 decision Success Cancel logic

Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 5.7-4 Outline of select command ‘P2-control’
Input point mapped from the communication

Figure 5.7-5 shows the select logic when a “Select command P2 (Remote-P2-Control)” signal is
received at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.

For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC6)
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.7-5 Select P2-control from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “P2-control”.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table

- 447 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.7-4,Table 5.7-6, and Table 5.7-9.

§Note:ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. The TPOS01
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-5, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FL” when the TPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Select command (Remote-P2-Control)” is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-P2-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
(iii) TPOS: “Select command P3-control” received from remote-end

Figure 5.7-6 outlines the reception of the select command e in P3-control from the remote end.
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P2control from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic

Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 5.7-6 Outline of select command for ‘P3-control’
Input point mapped from the communication.

Figure 5.7-7 shows the select logic when a “Select command P3 (Remote-P3-Control)” signal is
received at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.

- 448 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC8)
Select command &

& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.7-7 Select ‘P3-control’ from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “P3 control”.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 5.7-4,
Table 5.7-6 and Table 5.7-9.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-7, can issue a signal “Select success” at the output point
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FL” when the TPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Select command P3 (Remote-P3-Control)” is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-P3-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.

- 449 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) TPOS: “Select command P1-control” received from local-end.

Figure 5.7-8 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
P2controlfromthe remote-end Cancel command

Cancel logic
Failed
Keying “Select Select

command” decision Success
Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 5.7-8 Outline of select command ’P1-control’

Figure 5.7-9 shows the select logic when a “Select command (Local-P1-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when a “Local-P1-control” key is
pressed on the IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850. Note
that the user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-CTRAHMI] to SBO when the operation from
the IED front panel is required, we will discuss how to set in Chapter Technical description
(BU): User interface: Control sub-menu.

- 450 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

For SBO operation
Command “Local-P1-Control” Select command
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL”
TPOS01-P1 (513001_8A04011DC4)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.7-9 Selection logic for P1-control at the IED locally in TPOS01††
information, see Figure 5.7-20
††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 5.7-5,
Table 5.7-6 and Table 5.7-9.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL”.
Note: The signal “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
5.7-3. If the input signal “Local-P1-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function
returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(v) TPOS: “Select command P2-control” received from local-end.


- 451 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P2control from the local-end

Failed

command” decision Success Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 5.7-10 Outline of select command for ‘P2-control’

Figure 5.7-11 shows the select logic when a “Select command P2 (Local-P2-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user presses a “Local-P2-
control” key on the IED front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping.

For SBO operation
ILK† condition (“P2”) passed with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”
TPOS1-P2 (513001_8A04011DC6)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.7-11 Select P2-control on the front panel in TPOS01††


- 452 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 5.7-5,
Table 5.7-6, and Table 5.7-9.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
5.7-5. If the “Local-P2-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to
(vi) TPOS: “Select command P3-control” received from local-end

Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P3control from the local-end

Failed
Operate logic
Selection logic Signal output Operate command
command” decision Success

Figure 5.7-13 shows the select logic when a “Select command (Local-P3-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user press a “Local-P3-control”
key on the IED front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping.

- 453 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

For SBO operation
Operat command To BO connection
ILK† condition (“P3”) passed with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
TPOS1-P3 (513001_8A04011DC8)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 5.7-13 Select ‘P3-control’ on the front panel in TPOS01††

††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table
5.7-5,Table 5.7-6 , and Table 5.7-9.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same signal as shown in Figure 5.7-7.
If the “Local-P3-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the
(vii) TPOS: “Select command P1-control” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.7-14 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’ by the PLC function.

- 454 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
P1control by the PLC function

Operate logic

Figure 5.7-15 shows the select logic when a “Select command P1-Control (PLC-P1-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception: the
former connection point(PLC#1) is used for the reception of the select-command when the
interlock check is required, the later connection point(PLC#2) is used for the reception of the
select-command when the interlock check is not required. That is, for the TPOS01 function,
when the signal “Select command P1-Contol (PLC-P1-Control)” generated in the user-
programmed logic is applied for the select logic, and when interlock-check is required in the
select-logic, use connection point (PLC#1:e.g.,DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK)”. Alternatively, if the
interlock check is not required, use the other connection point (PLC#2:e.g.,
DEV01_P1_COMMAND)”. PLC#1 and PLC#2 are shown in Table 5.7-1.

- 455 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in TPOS01 Output
1≥ &
P1-control command requiring ILK† check To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC connection point #1) command”
Operate command
513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK To BO connection
& “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
0.1s
P1-control command not requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC connection point #2) 0 t
513001 800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 5.7-15 Select ‘P1-control’ by the PLC function in TPOS01††

*Note:The TPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using
IEC61850. To use this signal, the user must map for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output point of the other TPOS logics, see Table 5.7-7
for the inputs PLC#1 and PLC#2, Table 5.7-9 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-15, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”1.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
5.7-13.
(viii) TPOS: “Select command P2-control” generated in PLC function


- 456 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
P2control by the PLC function

Failed
Operate logic

Figure 5.7-17 shows the select logic when a signal “Selection command P2-Control (PLC-P2-
Control)” is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception, like
in the “Select command P1-Control (PLC-P1-Control)” signal. That is, if interlock checking is
required, use connection point (PLC#1:e.g., DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the
inter-lock check is not required, use the connection point (PLC#2:e.g., DEV01_P2_COMMAND).
PLC#1 and the PLC#2 are shown in Table 5.7-2.

- 457 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
510001 7001016D08
1≥ &
P2-control command requiring ILK †check
For DIR operation
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC6)
0.1s
P2-control command not requiring ILK† check For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
513001 800401EE32 DEV01_P2_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate

510001 8601011DC6
Select condition‡
Figure 5.7-17 Select logic ‘P2-control’ using the PLC function in TPOS01††
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 5.7-2
for PLC#1 and #2, and Table 5.7-9 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
1Note: The output point “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in
Figure 5.7-5.
(ix) TPOS: “Select command P3-control” generated in PLC function


- 458 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
P3control by the PLC function Operate logic

Failed


Figure 5.7-9 shows the select logic when a “Select command P3-Control (PLC-P3-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this
signal, like in the “Select Command P1-Control (PLC-P1-Contol)” signal. That is, if interlock
checking is required, use the connection point (PLC#1; e.g., DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK).
Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required, use the connection point (PLC#2; e.g.,
DEV01_P3_COMMAND). PLC#1 and PLC#2 are shown in Table 5.7-3.

- 459 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
510001 7001016D08
1≥ &
P3-control command requiring with ILK† check
For DIR operation
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC8)
0.1s
P3-control command not requiring without ILK† check For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
513001 800401EE36 DEV01_P3_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 5.7-19 Select ‘P3-control’ using the PLC function in TPOS01††

††Note: To know the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 5.7-3 for
the input PLC#1 and PLC#2 and Table 5.7-9 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
1Note: The output point “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in
Figure 5.7-7.
(x) TPOS: selecting condition

Figure 5.7-20 shows the select condition logic in the TPOS01 function. The TPOS01 function
can check the condition for the select command using the signals “TPOS01_ST_P1”,
“TPOS01_ST_P2”, and “TPOS01_ST_P3” (see Table 5.7-34). If the original logic does not meet
with the requirements of the user, the following alternatives are available:

If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic, the user can replace it using the PLC
connection point “User configurable condition” set items:
1. Connect the user-customized logic with TPOS01IN_TMP_25, which is listed as PLC#2
in Table 5.7-7.
2. Set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to PLC.

- 460 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

If adding another condition is required, the user can add a signal to the select condition logic
using the PLC condition point “User Additional Condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using TPOS01IN_TMP_24, which is listed as PLC#1 in
Table 5.7-7.
2. Set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to Fixed logic.

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *5 Select condition
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress Event suppression detected *6

= TPOS01_QLT_SPP
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
(513001 8204011F59)
GEN. TRIP = TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR
(513001 8604011F5A)
[SCDEN]*8
Same Directional
OFF Controlling Event
P1-control command received
(513001 8304011D02) &
TPOS01_ST_P1
&
(513001 8104011D03)
TPOS01_ST_P2
“EDS” never permit to control
P3-control command received from “P1 to P3” and “P3 to P1”.
(513001 8504011D04) &
TPOS01_ST_P3
&
[TPOS01-DEVTYPE]*9
&
EDS

513001 800401EE61 TPOS01IN_TMP_24
[TPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
Fixedlogic
513001 810401EE62 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 &

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC#3 connection point) *10
513001 820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21
&
SERI_ERR
[TPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 5.7-20 Select condition logic for ‘P1–P3 control’ in TPOS01*11

*1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “Command
blocking” is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch controller
(SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”.
For more information of “CBK”, see section 5.2. See the signal “CBK_STATE” of
Table 5.7-5.
*2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used
to protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.

- 461 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
*3Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator

is changing the states of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of
denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 5.7-5.
*4Note: If the issue of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation
is blocked until the trip operation is completed. If an IED operates a relay
application, the trip command is issued at the output-point “GEN.TRIP” in Table
5.7-5.
*5Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a
*6Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See
5.7.6(i)-3)
*7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI
circuits.
*8Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test or check the P1–P3
control operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme
switch [SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the
same operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction. On the
other hand, if On is set for the scheme switch, the logic is not blocked.
*9Note: The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-DEVTYPE] to EDS when the
earth-switch(ES) is applied for the TPOS01 function.
*10Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”
The user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition
logic using the connection point “TPOS01IN_TMP_21”. For more information, see
*11Note: To identify the input points of the other TPOS, see Table 5.7-7 for PLC#1 to
#3.

- 462 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(xi) TPOS: selection signal names and numbers

Note: The user should note that the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O”
for each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for the optional usage.
user may face an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Table 5.7-1 PLC connection points (Input points for ‘P1-control’)

513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK P1-control checking with interlock in TPOS01 (for PLC#1) O
… …. ….
513001 800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND P1-control without checking in TPOS01 (for PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
Table 5.7-2 PLC connection points (Input point for ‘P2-control’)

513001 800403EE33 DEV03_P2_INTERLOCK P2-control checking with interlock in TPOS03 (for PLC#1)
… …. ….
…. …. ….
Table 5.7-3 PLC connection points (Input point for ‘P3-control’)

… …. ….
…. …. ….

- 463 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

513001 7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ TPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M
… … …

522001 000A021001 ICB_STATE Interlock bypassing switch N/A
570001 3103011DA2 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Automatic sequence control is in progress. N/A
Table 5.7-6 PLC connection points Interlock for P1, P2, and P3-control
570001 3104011DA0 TPOS1-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS01. N/A
570001 3104021DA0 TPOS2-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS02 N/A
… … …

… … …
Table 5.7-7 PLC connection points (Input signals for select condition logic)
513001 800401EE61 TPOS01IN_TMP_24 TPOS01 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
… … …
513001 810401EE62 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 TPOS01 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
… … …
513001 820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21 TPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M

- 464 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … ….
Table 5.7-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
513001 8004011F54 TPOS01_SC_ST_ERR TPOS01 select command mode is invalid.
… … …
513001 8204011F59 TPOS01_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS01)
… … …
513001 8604011F5A TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(TPOS01)
… … ….

513001 8A04011DC4 TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG Select command (P1) for Binary Output in TPOS01
… … …
513001 8A04181DC4 TPOS241SL_BO_FLG Select command (P1) for Binary Output in TPOS24
… …. ….
… …. ….
(xii) TPOS: selection setting names

Table 5.7-10 Settings for ‘SBO control in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-CTREN Activation of the control function in TPOS01–24 On Off / On

TPOSxx-LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
TPOSxx-DEVTYPE Equipment(EDS or 43SW) type selector switch switch / EDS
TPOSxx-CTRHMI Activation for the panel control locally (TPOS01–24) On Off / On
Note: The “xx” within “TPOSxx” represents the function number. If TPOS03 is
considered, “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented from 01 to 24.)

- 465 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command can be possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation
returns to the initial stage (i.e., “wait for a command”).
(i) TPOS: “Cancel” received from remote-end

remote-end.
Wait for a command
P1 control from the remote-end Cancel from remote-end

Success
P2 control from the remote-end Signal reception in Cancel



Operate logic
P1 control by the PLC function Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 5.7-21 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from remote-end

applied to the TPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as
510001 7001016D08
that for the “Selection command P1 (Remote-P1-Control)” signal.
Input Cancel logic in TPOS01 Output

Cancel command
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
& To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_ CC_SS”
(513001_8604011E95)
Cancel condition† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
“TPOS01_CC_FS”
(513001_8704011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 5.7-22 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in TPOS01

†Note: The logic “cancel condition” is shown in Figure 5.7-25.
Output signal to BO

- 466 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring, point
“TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel” signal
is true. Another “Operate failed” signal is issued at monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_FS” if the
TPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal is not true.
(ii) TPOS: “Cancel” received from local-end

Figure 5.7-23 outlines the reception of the ‘cancel’ command from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage
P1 control from remote-end
Cancel from the remote-end
Success
P1 control from front panel Keying “Cancel Cancel

command” decision Failed
P2 control from front panel
P3 control from front panel

Operate logic
P1 control by PLC function Operate command
P2 control by PLC function
Operate logic
P3 control by PLC function
Input signal
to the TPOS01 function. The signal is generated when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
“Local-cancel” signal, the logic is able to output a result signal, provided that the “cancel
510001 7001016D08
condition” checking is satisfied.
Input Cancel logic in TPOS01 Output
Cancel command
& To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_ CC_SS”
(513001_8604011E95)
Cancel condition &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
“TPOS01_CC_FS”
(513001_8704011E96)
Operation Failed

Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 5.7-24, is able to issue a “Selection to cancel” signal

- 467 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
at the monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Local-Cancel” signal is true.
(iii) TPOS: cancel condition logic

Figure 5.7-25 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria “Unmatched condition detected”
is connected normally for the cancel condition logic, set Fixedlogic for the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGCNFFCT].

& 1≥ TPOS01
[TPOS01-LGCNFFCT]
Fixedlogic
513001 800401EE69 TPOS01IN_TMP_40 &
Figure 5.7-25 Logic “Cancel condition” in TPOS01

the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status”, like in Figure 5.7-20.
2Note: With the exception of the above ‘cancel’ logic, there is an operate-condition logic
within the TPOS01 function; the operate-condition logic will always checks
conditions. That is, the user is required to set either the “Operate-condition” or the
“cancel-condition” logic.
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, it can be replaced
using the connection point “User Configurable condition”:
 Connect the user-customized logic, with the “TPOS01IN_TMP_40”, which is listed
in Table 5.7-11.
 Set scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.
(iv) TPOS: cancel signal names and numbers

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” in
each table:
otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure for the default
settings.
Table 5.7-11 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
513001 800401EE69 TPOS01IN_TMP_40 TPOS1 user configurable cancel condition O

- 468 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
513001 8604011E95 TPOS01_CC_SS Cancel succeed in TPOS01
… … …
513001 8704011E96 TPOS01_CC_FS Cancel failed in TPOS01
… … …
(v) TPOS: cancel setting names

Note: The “xx” within “TPOSxx” represents the TPOS function number. (e.g., if TPOS03
“01” to “24”.)
Table 5.7-13 Setting for ‘Cancel’ in TPOSxx

TPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition (TPOS01-24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 469 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

After the completion of the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to control the
device.
(i) TPOS: “Operate command for P1-control” received from remote-end

Figure 5.7-26 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘P1-control’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command

P1 control from the remote-end Success
Operation
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
P2 control from the remote-end P2 control from the remote-end
P1 control from the local-end P1 control from the local-end
P1 control by the PLC function P1 control by the PLC function
Figure 5.7-26 Outline of operate command ‘P1-control’

Figure 5.7-27 illustrates the operate logic when a “Operate command P1 (Remote-P1-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is used
for the reception of the “Operate command P1 (Remote-P1-Control)”.

- 470 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output
“TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-P1-Control” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed S

&
TPOS1-P1 R
513001 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”
(5130018104011DD0) §§
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥
513001 820401EE5E TPOS01IN_TMP_38 & “TPOS01_EX_FFL”

[TPOS01-RST]
“TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7E)
&
Figure 5.7-27 Operate ‘P1-control’ from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “P1” control.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic (Figure
5.7-44) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “operate-condition” signal is required, it can be programmed by the
user and used to replace the signal the signal generated by the original operate-
condition logic. The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above
logic using connection point #1 “User configurable condition” That is, set the
scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_27”.
[TPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the P1-control in the other TPOS
logics, see Table 5.7-14 for PLC#1, Table 5.7-15 for PLC#2 and Table 5.7-19 for the
outputs.
the time set by the [TPOS01-RST] has been reached.
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate-completed” signal can also be issued from

- 471 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.7-26. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”,
point#2 “User-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-27, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the received “Remote-P1-
Control” signal is true.
(ii) TPOS: “Operate command for P2-control” received from remote-end

Wait for a command
Select logics Wait for a next command.

Operation
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Input signal required mapping

Figure 5.7-19 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command P2 (Remote-P2-Control)”

- 472 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Command “Remote-P2-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P2 R
513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥

[TPOS01-RST]
(513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
“TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF”
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&

alternative “operate-condition” signal is required, it can be programmed by the
user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition
logic. The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point #3 “User configurable condition” That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
changed.
after reaching the time set by the setting [TPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “operate-completed” signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.7-26. connect
the signal “operate completed” generated in the programmed logic to the
connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch

- 473 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.

††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table
5.7-15 for PLC#2, Table 5.7-16 for PLC#3 and Table 5.7-19 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-29, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determine that the input signal “Remote-P2-
Control” is true.
(iii) TPOS: “Operate command for P3-control” received from remote-end

Wait for a command

Operation
Signal reception in Control logic Signal output
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Input signal required mapping

Figure 5.7-31 illustrate the operate logic when an “Operate command P3 (Remote-P3-Control)”

- 474 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Command “Remote-P3-Control” (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P3 R
513001 840401EE58 TPOS01IN_TMP_29

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD6) §§
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E80)
&

5.7-15 for PLC#2, Table 5.7-17 for PLC#4, and Table 5.7-19 for the outputs.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated inthe operate-condition logic (Figure
5.7-44) when Fix logic is set for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user
changed.
after reaching the time set by the setting [TPOS01-RST]
§§Note: The “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate-completed” signal can also be issued from

- 475 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the “operate completed” signal,

point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-31, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Remote-
P3-Control” is true.
(iv) TPOS: “Operate command for P1-control” received from local-end

Figure 5.7-32 depicts the operation logic of the operate command ‘P1-control’ from the local-
end.
Wait for a command
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end

P1 control from the local-end Success
Operation
Signal reception from the Operate logic Signal output
decision
front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 5.7-32 Outline of Operate command ‘P1-control’

Figure 5.7-33 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command P1 (Local-P1-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when “P1-control” is keyed on
the IED front panel.

- 476 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Command Local-P1-Control” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
S
TPOS1-P1 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥

513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
PLC#3
(5130018104011DD0) §§
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

PLC#2 [TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7E)
&
Figure 5.7-33 Operate ‘P1-control’ on the front panel TPOS01††
alternative “operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user and
alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
changed.
outputs.
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the scheme

- 477 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued

5.7-26. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the “operate
connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “Local-P1-Control”
signal is true.
(v) TPOS: “Operate command for P2-control” received from local-end

Figure 5.7-34 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘P2-control’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command

Operation
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 5.7-35 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operation command P2 (Local-P2-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The input signal is provided when “P2-control” is

- 478 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Command Local-P2-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
S
TPOS1-P2 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥

513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(513001 8004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&
Figure 5.7-35 Operate ‘P2-control’ on the front panel in TPOS01††

alternative “operate-condition is required it can be programmed by the user and
alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the to the above logic using
connection point #3 “User configurable condition” That is, set the [TPOS01-
LGCTRCON] to PLC and using “ TPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
changed.
after reaching the time set by the [TPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the [TPOS01-
LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued from the logic
programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 5.7-26 . The user-
programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”, hence
this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point#2

- 479 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
signal is true.
(vi) TPOS: “Operate command for P3-control” received from local-end

Figure 5.7-36 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘P3-control’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command

Operation
decision
front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 5.7-37 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command P3 (Local-P3-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The input signal is provided when “P3-control” is

- 480 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Command Local-P3-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
S
TPOS1-P2 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥

513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(513001 8004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&
Figure 5.7-37 Operate ‘P3-control’ on the front panel in TPOS01

‡Note:An “operate condition signal” is generated in the operate-condition logic (Figure
alternative “operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user and
alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
changed.
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued from the

- 481 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”,

point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
signal is true.
(vii) TPOS: “Operate command for P1-control” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.7-38 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘P1-control’ using the PLC
function.
Wait for a command

P1 control by the PLC function Success
Operation
decision
PLC function
Failed Do nothing

Figure 5.7-39 describes the operate logic when an “Operate command P1 (PLC-P1-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception: the
former connection point (PLC#3) is used for the reception of the operate-command when the
interlock-check is required, the latter connection point (PLC#4) is used for the reception of the
operate-command when the interlock check is not required. That is, for the TPOS01 function
“Operate command P1 (PLC-P1-Control)” signal generated in the user-programmed logic and
when the interlock check is required in the operate logic, apply the signal at connection point
(PLC#3; i.e., DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK).Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required,
apply the signal at other connection point (PLC#4; i.e., DEV01_P1_COMMAND). We should

- 482 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
assume the PLC#3 and PLC#4 as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 5.7-1. Note that the user should
set PLC for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT].
Command “PLC-P1-Control” requiring ILK check “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS”

(PLC#3 connection point) (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-P1-Control” not requiring ILK check 0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
513001 800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND

&
TPOS1-P1 R
513001 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(5130018104011DD0) §§
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7E)
&
Figure 5.7-39 Operate P1- control using the PLC function in TPOS01††
†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for “P1” control.
alternative “operate-condition” programmed by the user is required in place of the
signal generated by the original operate-condition logic, connect the alternative
“operate-condition” to the logic shown in Figure 5.7-39 using connection point #1
“User configurable condition” That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_27”.
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied
to [TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
outputs.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected
failing expiration of the setting applied to timer [TPOS01-RST]

- 483 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
§§Note: The “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. If the signal to be issued from the logic programmed by the
user instead of the logic shown in Figure 5.7-26, connect the “operate completed”
signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2 “User
configurable condition”. That is, set PLC to the scheme switch [TPOS01-
LGP1EXOT] and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-39, can issue a “Operate P1-control” signal at output point
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-P1-Control”
is true.
(viii) TPOS: “Operate command for P2-control” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.7-40 depicts the reception of the operate command “P2-control’ using the PLC function.
Wait for a command

Operation
decision
PLC function
Failed Do nothing
Figure 5.7-40 Outline of Operate command ‘P2-control’ function

Figure 5.7-41 depicts the operation logic when an “Operate command P2 (PLC-P2-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this
command signal, like in the “Operate command P2 (PLC-P2-Control)” signal. That is, if an
interlock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3:i.e.,
DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK). On the other hand, if an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4:i.e., DEV01_P2_COMMAND). PLC#3 and PLC#4 here are
to be treated as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 5.7-2. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme
switch [TPOS01-LGP2EXOT].

- 484 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Command “PLC-P2-Control” requiring ILK check “TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS”

(PLC#3 connection point) (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001 800401EE33 DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-P2-Control” not requiring ILK check 0.1 – 50.0 s
513001 800401EE32 DEV01_P2_COMMAND Operate Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P2 R
513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91 ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&
Figure 5.7-41 Operate P2-Control by the PLC function in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria foe operation for “P2” control.
alternative “operate-condition programmed by the user is required in place of the
LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
to [TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
after reaching the time set by the setting [TPOS01-RST]
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for [TPOS01-
LGP1EXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the logic programmed by the user
instead of the logic shown in Figure 5.7-26, connect the “operate completed” signal
generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2 “User configurable

- 485 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use
“TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-41, can issue a signal “Operate P2-control” at output point
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “PLC-P2-Control” signal
is true.
(ix) TPOS: “Operate command for P3-control” generated in PLC function

Figure 5.7-42 outlines the reception of the operate command P3-control by the PLC function.
Wait for a command

Operation
Signal generation by Operate logic Signal output
decision
the PLC function
Failed Do nothing

Figure 5.7-43 depicts the operate logic when an “Operate command P3 (PLC-P3-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this
command signal, like the signal “Operate command P1 (PLC-P1-Control)”. That is, if an
interlock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3:i.e.,
DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK). If, on the other hand, an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4:i.e., DEV01_P3_COMMAND). We shall assume the PLC#3
and PLC#4 as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 5.7-3. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme
switch [TPOS01-LGP3EXOT].

- 486 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Command “PLC-P3-Control”requiring ILK check (PLC#3
connection point) (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83)
[TPOS01-CPW]
Operate Cmd.
513001 800401EE37 DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-P3-Control ”not requiring ILK check 0.1 – 50.0 s
513001 800401EE36 DEV01_P3_COMMAND Operation Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P3 R
513001 840401EE58 TPOS01IN_TMP_29

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD6) §§
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E80)
&
Figure 5.7-43 Operate ‘P3-control’ using the PLC function TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for “P3” control.
alternative “operate-condition programmed by the user is required in place of the
LGCTRCON] to PLC and using “TPOS01IN_TMP_29”.
to [TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S switch or an
ES is changed.
‡‡Note: The Operate failed” signal “is issued when a state-change remains undetected
following expiration of the setting applied to timer [TPOS01-RST].
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the programmed logic by
the user instead of the logic shown in Figure 5.7-26, connect the “operate

- 487 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
completed” signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2

“User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 5.7-43, can issue a signal “Operate P3-control” at output point
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-P3-Control”
is true.
(x) TPOS: operation condition logic

examine an operate condition. The operate condition is determined by signal
“TPOS01_STATE”. If the functionality of the original logic does not meet with user-
requirements, the following alternatives are provided:

PLC connect point “User configurable operate condition”.
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “TPOS01IN_TMP_34”, listed as PLC#2 in
Table 5.7-18.
2. Set scheme switch [TPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to PLC.

If the addition of another operate condition is required, the user can add the signal to operate
condition logic using PLC connection point “Additional condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using “TPOS01IN_TMP_33”, listed as PLC#1 in Table
5.7-18.
2. Set scheme switch [TPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixed logic.

- 488 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *5 Operate condition
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress Event suppression detected *6

= TPOS01_QLT_SPP
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
(513001 8204011F59)
GEN. TRIP = TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR
(513001 8604011F5A)
[SCDEN]*8
Same Directional
OFF Controlling Event
(513001 8304011D02) &
TPOS01_ST_P1
&
(513001 8104011D03)
TPOS01_ST_P2
“EDS” never permit to control
P3-control command received from “P1 to P3” and “P3 to P1”.
(513001 8504011D04) &
TPOS01_ST_P3
&
[TPOS01-DEVTYPE]*9
&
EDS
Additional condition (PLC connection point #1)

513001 800401EE65 TPOS01IN_TMP_33
[TPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC connection point#2)
Fixedlogic
513001 810401EE66 TPOS01IN_TMP_34 &

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point#3) *10
513001 820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21
TPOS01IN_TMP_41 &
SERI_ERR
[TPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 5.7-44 Operate condition logic for P1–3 control in TPOS01*11

*1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except for itself; “Command
blocking” is implemented as “CBK” in a software switch controller (SOFTSW);.
The IEC 61850 defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more information
of “CBK”, see section 5.2. See the signal “CBK_STATE” in Table 5.7-5.
*3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling signifies that other operators are
changing the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED
should be inhibited whilst ever the event is detected. The detection signal is
*4Note: If an IED is in the process of issuing a trip command, all control operation is
blocked until the trip operation has been completed. If the IED has a relay
application, the trip command is issued at the output-point “GEN.TRIP” in Table
5.7-5.

- 489 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
*5Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a

*6Note: The Function “Event suppression” can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See
5.7.6(i)-3)
*7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI
circuits.
*8Note: The “Common control” (CMNCTRL) function can test or check the operation
– direction of logic. When the user sets off for scheme switch [SCDEN], operation
of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction
compared with the previous operation-direction. Alternatively, if On is set for the
*9Note: The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-DEVTYPE] EDS when the earth-
switch(ES) is applied for the TPOS01 function.
*10Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition” The
user must connect the “Control hierarchy” condition to the select condition logic
using the connection point TPOS01IN_TMP_21” for more information, see
Chapter General control function: Control hierarchy. see PLC#3 of Table 5.7-7.
*11Note: To identify the input points of the other TPOS, see Table 5.7-7 for PLC#1 to
#3. Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for P1, P2 and P3-
control.
(xi) TPOS: operation signal names and numbers

“O” signifies that the signal is provided for the optional use.
“M” signifies that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
“N/A” signifies that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 5.7-14 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#1 user a configurable condition)
513001 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#1) O
… … …
Table 5.7-15 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#2 user configurable condition)
513001 820401EE5E TPOS01IN_TMP_38 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#2) O

- 490 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
…. …. …
… … …
Table 5.7-18 PLC connection points (Input point additional, user configurable condition)
513001 800401EE65 TPOS01IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS01 (for PLC#1) O
… … …
… … …

513001 8104011DD0 TPOS01_P1EX_BO Operate command (P1) for Binary Output in TPOS01
… … …
…. …. ….
… … …

- 491 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

513001 8004011E7E TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P1 direction execute command
… … …
513001 8004011E7F TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P2 direction execute command
… … …
513001 8004011E80 TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P3 direction execute command
… … …
513001 8004011E81 TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS TPOS01 P1 direction execute command
… … …
… … …
… … …
513001 8004011E93 TPOS01_EX_CMP TPOS01 completed control
… … …
513001 8604011E91 TPOS01_EX_FFL TPOS01 failed control
… … …
(xii) TPOS: operation setting names

Note: The “xx” of “TPOSxx” represents the TPOS function number. (e.g., if the TPOS03
“01” to “24”.)
Table 5.7-20 Setting of Operate in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-PLSM Method of command output(TPOS01–24) Fix Fix/Var
TPOSxx-CPW Duration of command output(TPOS01–24) 1.0[sec] 0.1~50.0[sec]
TPOSxx-RST Detection time for terminating control (TPOS01–24) 30.0[sec] 0.1~100.0[sec]

- 492 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

TPOSxx-LGCTRCON Logic selector for operate condition (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
TPOSxx-LGP1EXOT Logic selector for command output (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
TPOSxx-LGEXFFCT Logic selector for operate condition (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC

- 493 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.7.4 Operation counter

The TPOS01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation counter to
predict the lifespan of an EDS. The user can select a count mode in response to a device signal.
Table 5.7-21 and Figure 5.7-45 show the mode, for which a user is required to change a mode
in response to a device signal and the signal of the device such as the EDS. For instance of the
P1-control in the TPOS01 function, a user can select the mode using scheme switch [TPOS01-
P1CNTS], which is set to C-On; counting-up is performed when a switch-gear signal gives rise
to a change in state from “Open to Closing”.
Table 5.7-21 Mode of operation counter

Mode Description
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to closed (ON). When the signal
C-On
is changed from “Open to Closed”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to open (OFF). When the signal
C-Off
is changed from “Closed to Open”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up is made when any state change occurs: “Open to Closed” and
C-OnOff
“Closed to Open”.
NA Stop the count function
†Note:The operation-counter value is not cleared when power is removed from the IED.
This counter is available in the TPOS01 to TPOS03 functions.
Closed
Open
Figure 5.7-45 Device signal
The user can change the value of the operation-counter from either the front panel or
remotely. For example, in the sub-menu for “Operation counter”, the user can set a user-
preferred value for the operation-counter. See Chapter Technical description (BU): User
Operation Counter TPOS1-CNT

10:48 73/96 10:48 1/4
_TPOS1-CNT > TPOS_Dev1 -P123 +
TPOS2-CNT > CANCEL
0
TPOS3-CNT >
TPOS_Dev1 -P1 +
TPOS4-CNT >
TPOS4-CNT > 0
ENTER TPOS_Dev1 -P2 +
TPOS5-CNT >
Figure 5.7-46 Operation counter sub-menu

Note: With regard to the signal “TPOS01_ST_P1”, the sub-menu represents it as
“TPOS_Dev1-P1”. Analogous to the signal “TPOS01_ST_P1”, the signals
“TPOS01_ST_P2” and “TPOS01_ST_P3” are represented as “TPOS_Dev1-P2” and

- 494 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“TPOS_Dev1-P3”, respectively. The “TPOS_Dev1-All” represents the net counter

of “TPOS01_ST_P1”, “TPOS01_ST_P2” and “TPOS01_ST_P3”.
(i) TPOS: “Counter value change” received from remote-end

Mapping of Input point required
Figure 5.7-47 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is received at the
TPOS01 function. With regard to the net counter, the input-point “DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ” is
used. With regard to a P1-control counter, the input-point “DEV01_P1CNT_REQ” is used. For
P2-control and P3-control, the input-points “DEV01_P2CNT_REQ” and “DEV01_P3CNT_REQ”
are used.
“TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(513001 8A04011F8B)
Command “change value for counter”
513001_7004016D09 DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ Operate Command
&
Figure 5.7-47 Change counter value in net counter† by the remote-end in TPOS01
‡Note:The “operate condition” signal is provided from the operate condition logic shown
in Figure 5.7-49.
†Note: The user can apply the other counter change commands for P1-control, P2-control
and P3-control as shown in Table 5.7-23. The resultant signals for the other
TPOS02-24 logics are shown in Table 5.7-22.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
(ii) TPOS: “Counter value change” received from local-end

Input signal from the front panel
Figure 5.7-48 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is provided in the
TPOS01 function. The command is provided from the sub-menu (see Figure 5.7-46).

“TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(513001 8A04011F8B)
Command “Change value”
Figure 5.7-48 Changing value by the operation of the front panel in TPOS01

- 495 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
(iii) TPOS: operation counter setting names

Figure 5.7-49 illustrates the operate condition logic. The TPOS01 function can determine an
operate-condition using a signal received from “Control hierarchy”. The Control hierarchy
condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic; the user must connect the control-
hierarchy with the TPOS01 function using connection point “TPOS01IN_TMP_41” (see Table
5.7-24).
Command blocking*1 To counter logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ Operate condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR
Detection of serious errors

SERI_ERR
Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point)

513001 800401ED5A TPOS01IN_TMP_41
Figure 5.7-49 Operate condition logic for changing the counter in TPOS01
*1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; the
“Command blocking” function is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software
switch controller (SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “Command
Blocking” function as “CmdBlk”. For more information on “CBK”, see section 5.2.
See the signal “CBK_STATE” of Table 5.7-5.
*3Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator
is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of
*4Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a
(iv) TPOS: operation signal names and numbers

Table 5.7-22 Results of changing counter
513001 8A04011F8B TPOS01_SLD_CSCN TPOS01 counter selected

- 496 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
513001 7004016D09 DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for summation counter value
… … …
513001 7004016D0A DEV01_P1CNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for P1 counter value
… … …
513001 7004016D0B DEV01_P2CNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for P2 counter value
… … …
513001 7004016D0C DEV01_P3CNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for P3 counter value
… … …
Table 5.7-24 PLC connection points for control hierarchy

513001 800401ED5A TPOS01IN_TMP_41 TPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#1) for counters M
… … …
(v) TPOS: operation setting names

Table 5.7-25 Setting for pulse counter in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-P1CNTS Mode selection of the counter in P1-control *user-preferred NA / C-On / C-Off / C-OnOff

- 497 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.7.5 Measurement about operation Intervals

The TPOS01 function can measure operation intervals time†, the intervals OT1 and OT2 can
represent the period of time when an earth-switch changes a position from another position.
As shown in Table 5.7-26 the eight intervals are defined as switching as shown in Figure 5.7-50
Intermediate
to Figure 5.7-53. The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-OPETMEN] On.
Signal “TPOS01_P2EX_BO”
Intermediate
Sensing intermediate state

P1
P2
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P1”
P3
P2-control
OT1 OT2
a. Switch motion (P1 to P2) b. Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion (P1 to P2)
Figure 5.7-50 Two Intervals (OT1 and OT2) for P2 control

Intermediate
Intermediate

P1
P2
P3
P1-control
OT3 OT4
Figure 5.7-51 Two Intervals (OT3 and OT4) for P1 control

Intermediate
Intermediate
Sensing Intermediate state

P1
P2
P3
P2-control
OT5 OT6
Figure 5.7-52 Two Intervals (OP5 and OP6) for P2 control

- 498 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Intermediate BU
Intermediate

P1
P2
P3
P3-control
OT5 OT6
Figure 5.7-53 Two intervals (OP7 and OP8) for P3 control
Table 5.7-26 Eight intervals measured in TPOS01 function

Intervals Trigger Events for measurement
Start Signal “TPOS01_P2EX_BO” sensed
OT1
End Signal “TPOS01_PT_P1” unsensed
Start Signal “TPOS01_PT_P1” sensed
OT2
OT3
Start Signal “TPOS01_PT_P2” is sensed
OT4
OT5
OT6
OT7
OT8
†Note:The function “operation time measurement” is also available in the TPOS02 and
TPOS03 functions.
The user can clear the operation-intervals (OT1 to OT8) by key-operation of the
“Operation time” sub-menu or operation from the remote-end. Figure 5.7-54 shows that the
user can clear the eight operation times using this screen. See Chapter Technical description
(BU): User interface: Monitoring sub-menu for the operation.

- 499 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Operation Time TPOS1-OT

10:48 73/97 10:48 1/9
_TPOS1-OT > TPOS_Dev1- OT1
TPOS2-OT > CANCEL ******.*** ms
TPOS3-OT > TPOS_Dev1- OT2
TPOS4-OT >
******.*** ms
TPOS5-OT > ENTER TPOS_Dev1- OT3
TPOS6-OT >
Figure 5.7-54 Operation time sub-menu
(i) TPOS: measurement signal names and numbers

Table 5.7-27 Mapping point for clearance of operation times
513001 7004016D0D DEV01_RESET_REQ TPOS01 operation time reset command (Mapping Data)
… … …
(ii) TPOS: measurement setting names

Table 5.7-28 Setting of operation time function in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-OPETMEN Activation of the operation time measurement in TPOSxx On Off / On

- 500 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user should connect the TPOS input /output points with the BI and the BO circuits;
subsequently, the TPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. The user should
execute the following four steps.
i TPOS: setup for BI connection for status signals
ii TPOS: setup for BO connection for “Select command”
iii TPOS: setup for BO connection for “Operate command”
iv TPOS: setup for contact health check
Note that the TPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [TPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
(i) TPOS: setup for BI connection for status signals

Figure 5.7-55 exemplifies the reception of signals at the TPOS01 function; to acquire the status
signal§, the user should set input-point for the settings [TPOS01-P1NOPSG], [TPOS01-
P2NOPSG], and [TPOS01-P3NOPSG].
†Note:Normally the input-signals (P1, P2, P3) are generated using normally-open
contacts (NOs). If the P1 signal is generated by the normal-closed contact (NC),
the user should set scheme switch [TPOS01- P1NOPSGI] to On in order that the
P1 input-signal is inverted.
§Note: The state signal acquired can be monitored. For more information, see Chapter
Automatic supervision.
Connection with Binary input circuits

For example, as shown in Figure 5.7-1, suppose three kinds of signals (P1, P2, or P3) are
provided on the first (BI1), second (BI2), and third BI (BI3) circuits at IO#1 slot. In this case,
the user should set three input-points (200B01–8001001110, 8101011110, and 8201021110†)
for the settings [TPOS01-P1NOPSG], [TPOS01-P2NOPSG], and [TPOS01-P3NOPSG].
Signals by Binary input circuits Signal acquisition logic in TPOS01 Output ‡
“TPOS01_STATE”
Event suppression detector (513001_3104011001)
BI1, BI2, and BI3 signals desig
nated by settings
[TPOS01-P1NOPSG], & 1≥
[TPOS01-P2NOPSG],
and [TPOS01-P3NOPSG] S
Status before chattering
R “TPOS01_ QLT_SPP”
(513001_8204011F59)
[TPOS01-SPPEN] Chattering detector
On
& To select and operate
condition logics
Figure 5.7-55 BI1, BI2 and BI3 signals provided into TPOS01
†Note:The user should set the actual input- points. See Chapter Technical description
(BU): Binary IO module.
‡Note:In Figure 5.7-55 two signals can be issued: “TPOS01_STATE” and

- 501 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
“TPOS01_QLT_SPP”. The former one is used in the select condition logic and the
operate condition (see Figure 5.7-20 and Figure 5.7-44). The latter is used for an
event suppression detector.
Decision by input signals

The logic in Figure 5.7-55 can give a decision in response to the reception of the signals; the
decision is of either “P1”, “P2”, “P3”, “Faulty”, and “Intermediate”. Table 5.7-29 exemplifies the
decisions in response to the BI1 - BI3 input signals; the decision can be acquired at the
monitoring point “TPOS01_STATE”.
Suppose, the BI1–BI3 circuits receive “On–Off–Off” signals when an earth-switch is

located at “P1” (see Figure 5.7-1); the value “1” is given, because the decision can be made with
the “On–Off–Off” signals.
If “On–On–Off” signals are applied to the BI1–BI3 circuits, the decision cannot be made
because the earth switch is still kinetic and is not standstill; thus, the decision is given as
“Intermediate”, the value “3” is given at the connection point ”TPOS01_STATE”.
If “On–On–On” signals are applied to the BI1–BI3 circuits, the decision cannot be made
because the earth-switch may be broken; hence, the value “7” is given.
Table 5.7-29 Decision made by the TPOS01 function
Input signals at IO#1 (200B01) Generated value
Decision by
BI1 BI2 BI3 “TPOS01_STATE”
TPOS01
(8001001110) (8101011110) (8201021110) (513001 3104011001)
Off (0) Off (0) Off (0) Intermediate 0
On (1) Off (0) Off (0) P1 1
Off (0) On (1) Off (0) P2 2
On (1) On (1) Off (0) Intermediate 3
Off (0) Off (0) On (1) P3 4
On (1) Off (0) On (1) Intermediate 5
Off (0) On (1) On (1) Intermediate 6
On (1) On (1) On (1) Faulty 7
Note: When handling the raw information other than the decision, the user can take
respective states of binary input circuits using other monitoring points. That is,
the user can take either state On (1) or state Off (0) corresponding to the BI1
circuit using the monitoring point “TOPS01_PT_P1”. Likewise, the BI2 and BI3
states can be taken using the monitoring points “TOPS01_PT_P2” and
“TOPS01_PT_P3”. (See Table 5.7-34)

- 502 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Event suppression detector

If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the TPOS function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the TPOS function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created.
[TPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[TPOS-TELD] [TPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time A, the setting [TPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time B. The setting [TPOS-TELD] is pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time A (e.g., Time A to Time C).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signal stops. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [TPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time D to E).
To initiate event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch [TPOS01-SPPEN].
(ii) TPOS: setup for BO connection for “Select commands”

Figure 5.7-57 exemplifies the connections for operate commands P1/P2/P3. Suppose that
connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” to “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”; as a result, either of the signals
“Operate command P1 to P3” is issued at one of the BOs.

- 503 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Terminal and
Selection logic in TPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
Selection logic for select “BO1” Select
command P1 in TPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
P1
To contact health & ≥1
check [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
Selection logic for select check
command P2 in TPOS01 [Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
Terminal and
Selection logic for select BO2 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
command P3 in TPOS01
(513001 8A04011DC6)
“BO2” Select
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112)
P2
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102011113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310201E11D BO2_SOURCE
Terminal and
BO3 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
(513001 8A04011DC8)
“BO3” Select
P3
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO3-RB”
(200B01_8102021113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310202E11D BO3_SOURCE
Figure 5.7-57 Example select connected with BO1-BO3
(iii) TPOS: setup for BO connection for “Operate command”

Figure 5.7-58 exemplifies the connections for operate commands P1/P2/P3; the BO4–BO6
circuits issue the operate command.

- 504 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Terminal and
Operate logic in TPOS01 BO4–BO6 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
(513001_8104011DD0)
“BO4”
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8302031112)
command
P1-control P1
in TPOS01 & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO4-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8302031113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“TPOS01_P2EX_BO” 200B01 310203E11D BO4_SOURCE
(513001_8204011DD3)
“BO5”
P2-control P2
in TPOS01 & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO5-RB”
Connected by (200B01_8402041113)
Off
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” 200B01 310204E11D BO5_SOURCE
(513001_8204011DD6)
“BO6”
P3-control P3
in TPOS01 & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO6-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8502051113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310205E11D BO6_SOURCE
Figure 5.7-58 Example of operate commands connected with BO4-BO2

†Note:Table 5.7-19 shows the remaining signals except for “TPOS01”.
(iv) TPOS: setup for contact health check

The TPOS01 function has contact health check feature for the BO circuits; hence, the user is
able to connect an output signal to the contact health check function when Fixedlogic is set for
scheme switches [TPOS01- LGP1EXOT] to [TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]†. Consequently, the TPOS01
function can determine whether the signal has been successfully output from the BO. If a
failure is reported, the TPOS01 function determines that the signal is not output successfully
to the BO; then the command is canceled immediately and the TPOS01 function returns to the
†Note:Table 5.7-20 shows settings for the health check feature in the other TPOS
functions.
Setting for “select command P1/P2/P3”

For example, the point”TPOS01_P1SL_BO” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing of

- 505 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
the command, the user can connect point “BO1-RB “ with the contact health check function
using the setting [TPOS01-P1SLBORD]. Do not key the point “TPOS01_P1SL_BO”. Likewise,
BO2-RB and BO3-RB are required to be set.
Selection logic in TPOS01 logic in TPOS01
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO” (513001 8A04011DC4)
BO1 circuit at & Result of contact health check of

IO_SLOT1 P1-select in TPOS01
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113) Signal connected by
setting [TPOS01-P1SLBORD]

“TPOS01_P2SL_BO” (513001 8A04011DC6)

“BO2-RB”
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO” (513001 8A04011DC8)

“BO3-RB”
Figure 5.7-59 Example contact health check feature for P1–P3 select commands
Setting for “Operate command P1/P2/P3”

Similarly, the points “BO4-RB” and “BO6-RB” are required to be set for the settings [TPOS01-
P1EXBORD] to [TPOS01-P3EXBORD].
Selection logic in TPOS01
Contact health check logic in TPOS01

“TPOS01_P1EX_BO” (513001 8104011DD0)

IO_SLOT1 P1-operate in TPOS01
“BO4-RB” Signal connected by

(200B01_8302031113) setting [TPOS01-P1EXBORD]
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO” (513001 8204011DD3)


“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” (513001 8204011DD6)


Figure 5.7-60 Contact health check logic for P1–P3 operate commands

- 506 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Proper setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 5.7-61 shows a setting example for 43S/EDS driving. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1–BO6 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working
correctly, the respective points of the BO (RBs) should be connected, as shown in Table 5.7-30,
to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.

Example #1 Health check settings for example #1
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001113(BO1-RB) set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] OK
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO” is connected to “BO4” at IO#1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [TPOS01-P1EXBORD] OK

- 507 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Remote/Local-end BIO module

“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” Drivers
(513001 8A04011DC4)
P1-select BO1
(200B01 8002001113)
(513001 8104011DD0)
P1-operate BO4
(200B01 8302031113)
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select BO2
(200B01 8102011113)
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
(200B01 8402041113)
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select BO3
(200B01 8202021113)
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” EDS
(513001 8204031DD3) Plus (+)
P3-operate BO6
command “BO6-RB” P1-Selection P2-Selection P3-Selection
(200B01 8502051113)
P1-Operate P2-Operate P3-Operate
Minus (−)
Figure 5.7-61 Contact health check setting and EDS scheme for example #1
Setting for erroneous in contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 5.7-62 shows a setting example for an improper setting of the 43S/EDS scheme. The
settings are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 5.7-31, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead
BO1 is actually chosen, which is incorrect. In this case, the setting [TPOS01-SLBORD] is
meaningless; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.

- 508 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Example #2 Health check setting for example #2
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” on SLOT1 200B01 8002001112 (BO1) set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] NG
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” on SLOT1 200B01 8102011113(BO2-RB) set for [TPOS01-P2SLBORD] OK
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO3” on SLOT1 200B01 8202021113(BO3-RB) set for [TPOS01-P3SLBORD] OK
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO” is connected to “BO4” on SLOT1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [TPOS01-P1EXBORD] OK
Remote/Local-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB)

BIO module
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” mistakenly chosen with
(513001 8A04011DC4) 200B01 8002001112 Drivers
P1-select BO1
command
(513001 8104011DD0)
P1-operate BO4
(200B01 8302031113)
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select BO2
(200B01 8102011113)
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
(200B01 8402041113)
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select BO3
(200B01 8202021113)
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” EDS
(513001 8204031DD3) Plus (+)
P3-operate BO6
command “BO6-RB” P1-Selection P2-Selection P3-Selection
(200B01 8502051113)
P1-Operate P2-Operate P3-Operate
Minus (−)
Figure 5.7-62 Contact health check setting and EDS diagram for example #2
Setting for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 5.7-63 shows an additional setting example for the EDS scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “SPO01_P1*SL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [TPOS01-P1*SLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special

- 509 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
example can issue a select command; which is called “operated by internal select function”.
The user does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there
are no BO circuits available.
Example #3 Setting for example #3
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any BO “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] OK

Remote/Local end
(513001 8A04011DC4)
P1-select
command
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” BOs are not connected but virtualized.
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select
command “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
EDS
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select
command
Plus (+)
SAS/Local IED
BIO module P1-Operate P2-Operate P3-Operate
(513001 8104011DD0) Drivers
P1-operate BO4
(200B01 8302031113) Minus (−)
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
(200B01 8402041113)
(513001 8204031DD3
P3-operate BO6
(200B01 8502051113)
Figure 5.7-63 Contact health check setting and EDS diagram for example #3
(v) TPOS: setup signal names and numbers

Table 5.7-33 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in TPOSxx)

- 510 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

… … …
Table 5.7-34 PLC monitoring points (P1–P3 state signals in TPOSxx)

513001 8304011D02 TPOS01_ST_P1 TPOS01 P1 On(0/1)
… … …
(vi) TPOS: setup setting names

Note: The “xx” of “TPOSxx” represents the TPOS function number. (e.g., if the TPOS03
“01” to “24”.)
Table 5.7-35 Setting for Binary input signals in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-EN Activate monitoring function of TPOS01-24 On Off / On
TPOSxx-DEVTYPE Equipment type selector. switch switch/EDS
TPOSxxP1-NOPSG BI position for TPOS01-24 *none BI signal
TPOSxx-SPPEN Activate event suppression for TPOS01-24 On Off / On
TPOS-NELD Number of change to lock status. 10 0~99
TPOS-TELD Time to locking state( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
TPOS-TELR Time to unlocking state( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
Table 5.7-36 Settings for health check function in TPOSxx

TPOSxx-P1SLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *none BO readback signal
TPOSxx-P1EXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *none BO readback signal
5.7.7 Mapped for IEC61850 commination

The user can operate the TPOS function over IEC 61850 communications† following mapping

- 511 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the TPOS function is designed for the class of “Integer Status
Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
(i) TPOS: editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the TPOS01 function. Figure 5.7-64
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Integer Status Controllable Status Output (ISCSO)”
is chosen for the TPOS01 function. After the user defined an object “ISCSO”, the TPOS01
logical node can be available with the name “GGIO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of
the object “ISCSO” in the TPOS01 logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be
chosen in the editing of the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 5.7-64 Defining “ISCSO” object in GGIO2701 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 5.7-65 exemplifies the TPOS01 logic node saved as “GGIO2701”. For the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GGIO2701$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS:

- 512 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 origin
 stSeld
Figure 5.7-65 LN editing screen for SBO (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 5.7-66 exemplifies the TPOS logic node saved as “GGIO2701”. In the DIR mode, the
following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
(ii) TPOS: mapping output data

The user should group the TPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 5.7-43 illustrates
how to map a signal; it indicates that the signals for the TPOS01 function are required to map
for IEC 61850 communication.

- 513 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.7-37 Mapping signals for ISCSO object

Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 513001 3104011008 TPOS01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 513001 6A04011009 TPOS01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 513001 3104011001 TPOS01_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO q Quality ST 513001 3104011005 TPOS01_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 513001 9004011006 TPOS01_TIMESTAMP
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 513001 0004011D90 TPOS01_SLD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 5.7-67 ocCat attribute mapped for ISCSO object of GGIO2701
(iii) TPOS: mapping input data

The TPOS01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
5.7-38 shows the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO”; the user should map the input-point to the Object references having

- 514 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.7-38 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO2701
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”

- 515 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.7.8 TPOS settings

TPOS01(FunctionID:513001)
Common TPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

TPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
TPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
TPOS01-EN Off / On - TPOS01 switch for Device01 Off
Dev01 TPOS01-DEVNAME [Preferred text] - item name of TPOS_Dev1 TPOS_Dev1 !
TPOS01-000NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,0,0)state Travelling0 !
TPOS01-001NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,0,1)state P1 !
TPOS01-UDFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of undefined Undefine !
TPOS01-FLTNAME [Preferred text] - state name of faulty Faulty !
TPOS01-DEVTYPE switch / EDS - Device Type switch
TPOS01-P1NOPSG [Preferred signal] - P1 Normally Open Signal of Dev1 Not assigned
TPOS01-P1NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
TPOS01-SPPEN Off / On - Automatic event suppression function Off
Off / On /
TPOS01-UDFEN - undefined pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
TPOS01-UDFTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette undefined check timer 30.0
Off / On /
TPOS01-FLTEN - faulty pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
TPOS01-FLTTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette faulty check timer 30.0
TPOS01-CTREN Off / On - control mode (control enable) Off
TPOS01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
TPOS01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
TPOS01-NSLBORD1 [Preferred signal] - 5130018904011DC0
direction command
direction command
direction command
select binary output read data(DataID) for P1
TPOS01-P1SLBORD [Preferred signal] - 5130018A04011DC4
direction command
direction command
direction command
TPOS01-P1EXBORD [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
P1 direction command
FixedLogic /
TPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic
PLC

- 516 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
TPOS01(FunctionID:513001)
FixedLogic /
TPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
TPOS01-LGEXFFCT - FixedLogic
PLC factor
FixedLogic / Change logic about P1 direction execute
TPOS01-LGP1EXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
PLC output
PLC output
FixedLogic /
TPOS01-LGCNFFCT - Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
TPOS01-PLSM Fix / Var - pulse mode Fix
TPOS01-CPW 0.1 - 50.0 s control pulse width 1.0
TPOS01-RST 1.0 - 100.0 s response check timer 30.0
TPOS01-CTRDIR P1 / P2 / P3 - Capable control direction P2
TPOS01-P1CNTS Off / On - P1 count status Off
TPOS01-OPETMEN Off / On - Operation Time Measurement enable Off
TPOS01-APBD Process / Bay - status change origin Process
Note: The TPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have
omitted the others because this will be the same as the 1st device with the
exception of the device number.

- 517 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.7.9 TPOS signals (DataID)

 Signal monitoring points in TPOS01
TPOS(FunctionID:513001)
8004001FA3 TPOS00_CH_EC_LCD TPOS00 count change execute command by LCD
8004001D5E TPOS00_CH_EC_OWS TPOS00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
8004001D5F TPOS00_CH_EC_RCC TPOS00 count change execute command by RCC
8004001D60 TPOS00_CH_EC_RMT TPOS00 count change execute command by Remote
8004001FA2 TPOS00_CH_SC_LCD TPOS00 count change select command by LCD
8004001D5B TPOS00_CH_SC_OWS TPOS00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
8004001D5C TPOS00_CH_SC_RCC TPOS00 count change select command by RCC
8004001D5D TPOS00_CH_SC_RMT TPOS00 count change select command by Remote
3204011D20 TPOS01_ALL_CNT_VAL TPOS01 all count value
0004011F7C TPOS01_AUTO_SIG TPOS01 Auto sequence signal
8304011E9C TPOS01_CCF_FCT_CS TEMP21
8704011E96 TPOS01_CC_FS TEMP19
8604011E95 TPOS01_CC_SS TEMP18
8804011E9B TPOS01_CC_ST_ERR TEMP39
0004011F7D TPOS01_CMNCTRL_SIG TPOS01 control receive signal
8604011F8D TPOS01_CNT_CS07 TPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal
0004011D91 TPOS01_CNT_SEL TPOS01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
0004011F7A TPOS01_CNT_SIG TPOS01 Count correction signal
8004011E9E TPOS01_CTR_SGC TPOS01 control logic stage(select command check)
8004011EA0 TPOS01_CTR_SGE TPOS01 control logic stage(execute command check)
8304011E9D TPOS01_CTR_SGN TPOS01 control logic stage(unselected)
8004011E9F TPOS01_CTR_SGS TPOS01 control logic stage(selected)
8B04011EA2 TPOS01_CTR_SGU TPOS01 control logic stage(under selection)
8904011FAB TPOS01_CTR_SGUCN TPOS01 count change selected signal
8904011FB1 TPOS01_CTR_SGURS TPOS01 reset time selected signal
8004011EA1 TPOS01_CTR_SGW TPOS01 control logic stage(wait for change)
8104011E9A TPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS TPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8004011D58 TPOS01_EC_LCD TPOS01 execute command by LCD
8004011D55 TPOS01_EC_OWS TPOS01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D59 TPOS01_EC_PLC TPOS01 execute command by PLC
8004011D56 TPOS01_EC_RCC TPOS01 execute command by RCC
8004011D57 TPOS01_EC_RMT TPOS01 execute command by Remote
8004011F55 TPOS01_EC_ST_ERR TPOS01 execute command mode err
0004011D97 TPOS01_EX_BO_OPOK TPOS01 execute binary output signal for SAS
8004011E93 TPOS01_EX_CMP TPOS01 execute complete signal
8F04011F58 TPOS01_EX_CMP_TMO TPOS01 timeout after execute completion
8904011FB0 TPOS01_EX_CMP_TMOCN TPOS01 count change timeout after execute completion
8904011FB6 TPOS01_EX_CMP_TMORS TPOS01 reset time timeout after execute completion
8904011F6F TPOS01_EX_CS01 TPOS01 response supervisory timer for P1
8A04011F70 TPOS01_EX_CS02 TPOS01 response supervisory timer for P2
8B04011F72 TPOS01_EX_CS03 TPOS01 P1 timer for under execution
8C04011F73 TPOS01_EX_CS04 TPOS01 P2 timer for under execution
8A04011F71 TPOS01_EX_CS05 TPOS01 response supervisory timer for P3
8C04011F74 TPOS01_EX_CS06 TPOS01 P3 timer for under execution
8604011E91 TPOS01_EX_FFL TPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8504011E8F TPOS01_EX_SFL TPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8404011F43 TPOS01_FLT_DET1 TPOS01 Faulty Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
8104011F42 TPOS01_FLT_STA TPOS01 Faulty Start
8204011E8B TPOS01_F_CS TPOS01 execute command fail condition signal
3104011D01 TPOS01_LCD_ST TPOS01 state for LCD
3104011D00 TPOS01_MMC_ST TPOS01 state for MIMIC

- 518 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

8904011DC0 TPOS01_NSL_BO_FLG TPOS01 no direction select binary output signal
8604011F80 TPOS01_NSL_CS07 TPOS01 select receive signal check answer
3104011F93 TPOS01_OT1_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time1 reset signal
3104011D30 TPOS01_OT1_VAL TPOS01 operation time1 value
3104011F9B TPOS01_OT5_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time5 reset signal
3104011D3C TPOS01_OT5_VAL TPOS01 operation time5 value
3104011F9D TPOS01_OT6_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time6 reset signal
3104011F9F TPOS01_OT7_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time7 reset signal
3104011FA1 TPOS01_OT8_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time8 reset signal
8104011E85 TPOS01_P1EC_F_CSF TPOS01 P1 direction execute command fail condition signal
8004011E81 TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS TPOS01 P1 direction execute command OK condition signal
8004011E7E TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P1 direction execute command OK condition signal
8104011DD0 TPOS01_P1EX_BO TPOS01 P1 direction execute binary output signal
8A04011DC4 TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG TPOS01 P1 direction select binary output signal
8A04011F83 TPOS01_P1SL_CS19 TPOS01 select receive P1 signal check answer
0004011FCB TPOS01_P1_CNT_SEL TPOS01 P1 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3204011D24 TPOS01_P1_CNT_VAL TPOS01 P1phase count value
8004011E7F TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P2 direction execute command OK condition signal
0004011FCC TPOS01_P2_CNT_SEL TPOS01 P2 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3204011D28 TPOS01_P2_CNT_VAL TPOS01 P2phase count value
8004011E80 TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P3 direction execute command OK condition signal
0004011FCD TPOS01_P3_CNT_SEL TPOS01 P3 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3204011D2C TPOS01_P3_CNT_VAL TPOS01 P3phase count value
8004011DE0 TPOS01_PLC_CTRL_FAIL TPOS01 PLC control fail
8604011F5A TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR TEMP32
8204011F59 TPOS01_QLT_SPP TEMP31
8004011FA5 TPOS01_RE_EC_LCD TPOS01 reset time execute command by LCD
8004011D7B TPOS01_RE_EC_OWS TPOS01 reset time execute command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D7C TPOS01_RE_EC_RCC TPOS01 reset time execute command by RCC
8004011D7D TPOS01_RE_EC_RMT TPOS01 reset time execute command by Remote
8004011FA4 TPOS01_RE_SC_LCD TPOS01 reset time select command by LCD
8004011D78 TPOS01_RE_SC_OWS TPOS01 reset time select command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D79 TPOS01_RE_SC_RCC TPOS01 reset time select command by RCC
8004011D7A TPOS01_RE_SC_RMT TPOS01 reset time select command by Remote

- 519 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

8604011F91 TPOS01_RST_CS07 TPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal
0004011F7B TPOS01_RST_SIG TPOS01 Reset time signal
8004011D54 TPOS01_SC_LCD TPOS01 select command by LCD
8004011D51 TPOS01_SC_OWS TPOS01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D52 TPOS01_SC_RCC TPOS01 select command by RCC
8004011D53 TPOS01_SC_RMT TPOS01 select command by Remote
8004011F54 TPOS01_SC_ST_ERR TPOS01 select command mode err
0004011F79 TPOS01_SEL_SIG TPOS01 Selected signal
8504011F8C TPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTCN TPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal check
8504011F90 TPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTRS TPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal check
8004011E76 TPOS01_SLD_CS TPOS01 selected condition signal
8004011F66 TPOS01_SLD_CS04 TPOS01 selected condition signal 04
8A04011F8B TPOS01_SLD_CSCN TPOS01 count change selected condition signal
8A04011F8F TPOS01_SLD_CSRS TPOS01 reset time selected condition signal
0004011D90 TPOS01_SLD_RPT TPOS01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
8E04011F57 TPOS01_SLD_TMO TPOS01 time out after selected
8A04011FAF TPOS01_SLD_TMOCN TPOS01 count change time out after selected
8A04011FB5 TPOS01_SLD_TMORS TPOS01 reset time out after selected
8104011E7B TPOS01_SLF_CS TPOS01 select fail condition signal
8704011E98 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS TPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8804011FAD TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F03CN TPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8804011FB3 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F03RS TPOS01 reset time select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8704011FAE TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04CN TPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8704011FB4 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04RS TPOS01 reset time select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8304011FAC TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F07CN TPOS01 count change selected timer for a check
8304011FB2 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F07RS TPOS01 reset time selected timer for a check
8604011F62 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 TPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8704011F63 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG04 TPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8804011F6E TPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 TPOS01 selected timer for a check
8004011E7D TPOS01_SLR_CS TPOS01 select release condition signal
3104011001 TPOS01_STATE TPOS01 all_state
8304011D02 TPOS01_ST_P1 TEMP36
0004011D95 TPOS01_TMP_02 TPOS01 time reset selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3104011D80 TPOS01_TMP_06 TPOS01 control event data (selected)
3104011D81 TPOS01_TMP_07 TPOS01 control event data (select fail)
3104011D82 TPOS01_TMP_08 TPOS01 control event data (select release)
3104011D83 TPOS01_TMP_09 TPOS01 control event data (execute output on)
3104011D84 TPOS01_TMP_10 TPOS01 control event data (execute command ng)
3104011D86 TPOS01_TMP_11 TPOS01 control event data (execute fail)
8204011F7E TPOS01_TMP_63 TPOS01 select bo signal check
8004011F7F TPOS01_TMP_64 TPOS01 select receive signal check
8104011F81 TPOS01_TMP_66 TPOS01 select bo P1 signal check
8504011F82 TPOS01_TMP_67 TPOS01 select receive P1 signal check
8004011F8A TPOS01_TMP_74 TPOS01 count change selected condition signal check

- 520 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

8004011F8E TPOS01_TMP_75 TPOS01 reset time selected condition signal check
0004011F77 TPOS01_TRA TPOS01 travelling info
0004011F78 TPOS01_TRA_CTR TPOS01 travelling info for control
3104011D49 TPOS01_TRST_S TPOS01 operation time reset signal
8204011F41 TPOS01_UDF_DET1 TPOS01 Undefined Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
8004011F40 TPOS01_UDF_STA TPOS01 Undefined Start

TPOS(Function ID: 513001)
800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND dev01 P1 command
800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK dev01 P1 command with interlock bypass
820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21 TPOS01IN_TMP_21
800401EE53 TPOS01IN_TMP_22 TPOS01IN_TMP_22
820401EE5A TPOS01IN_TMP_30 TPOS01IN_TMP_30
830401EE5B TPOS01IN_TMP_31 TPOS01IN_TMP_31
850401EE5C TPOS01IN_TMP_32 TPOS01IN_TMP_32
800401EDDA TPOS01IN_TMP_35 TPOS01IN_TMP_35
810401EDDB TPOS01IN_TMP_36 TPOS01IN_TMP_36
840401EDDC TPOS01IN_TMP_37 TPOS01IN_TMP_37
820401EE5E TPOS01IN_TMP_38 TPOS01IN_TMP_38
830401EE5F TPOS01IN_TMP_39 TPOS01IN_TMP_39
800401ED5A TPOS01IN_TMP_41 TPOS01IN_TMP_41
800401ED77 TPOS01IN_TMP_42 TPOS01IN_TMP_42
 Mapping points in TPOS01

7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data)
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the TPOS function. We

- 521 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
example, when the user wishes to find the “TPOS01_SC_OWS” point for
the 2nd device, use the description of “TPOS01_SC_OWS” in place of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for TPOS01_SC_OWS (i.e.,
“8001011D51”)
Step 2 identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8001021D51” of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal

- 522 -
CU
––––––––Event detection function for general BIs (GENBI)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Event detection function for general BIs (GENBI)

The general BI event detection (GENBI) function examines the signals generated on the binary
input circuits (BIs); the GENBI function verifies the signals generated in terms of time, state,
and quality. Accordingly, the GENBI function can elevate the value of the BI signals that are
generated using external devices; the GENBI function can provide the IED functions with a
variety of information. Figure 5.8-1 shows the block diagram of the GENBI function; it shows
signals from external devices received at the BI circuits. The operation of the GENBI function
is available for all BI circuits. For simplicity, hereafter, the setting and operation of the GENBI
function is discussed for binary input circuit #1 (BI1) at IO#1 slot in the IED.
IED
Output Output from BI1
signal of BI1 Acquisition
Time at state State data
Binary Output changed (current value)
input signal of BI2 Direction information Time data
circuit#1 at state changed. (time stamp)
Quality information
Suppression when (accumulated)
Binary input
appearance of
circuit#2
States on external devices
repetitive signals Output from BI2

Output
signal of BIn Process #1
Binary input Process #2
circuit #n† Output from BIn†
BIO module Process #n†

(Slot #1) GENBI for slot #1
Respective
output signals
BIO module Output from BI1 to BIn†
(Slot #2) GENBI for slot #2
Respective
BIO module output signals
Output from BI1 to BIn†
(Slot #n‡) GENBI for slot #n‡
Figure 5.8-1 Block diagram of GENBI
5.8.1 Operation features

The operation process of the GENBI function is divided into an acquisition part and a
suppression part.
(i) GENBI: signal acquisition process

The acquisition process checks for the occurrence of state changes in each BI circuit. If a state
change is detected, the acquisition process determines the direction of the state change and
observes the time that the state change occurred.
The user needs to apply a signal as a setting so that signal acquisition will be carried out.
Figure 5.8-1 outlines the settings when BI1 circuits at IO#1 are considered. For example, when
a signal is received at BI1, the GENBI function can acquire the signal when the user has set
200B001 8001001110† for the setting [SLOT1 GB01-SG]. After acquisition, the GENBI
function generates “SLOT1 GBI01_STATE (580001 0010001001)” signal in Boolean form; it

523
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
consists of “time stamp information” and “quality information”.
IED
Binary IO module (BIO) Function
IO_SLOT#1 0010001001
SLOT1 GBI01_STATE
[SLOT1 GBI01-SG]
800100111 8001001110† 8001001172
0010011001
BI1 [SLOT1 GBI02-SG SLOT1 GBI02_STATE

BI1-NC Filter BI1 CPL BI1-CPL
Binary input circuit#1

00101F1001
SLOT1 GBI32_STATE
[SLOT1 GBI32-SG] ‡
Binary input circuit#2
Binary input circuit #32
IO#1 (Function ID: 200B001) GENBI (Function ID: 580001)
Figure 5.8-2 Setting method with Data ID at BI1 at IO#1

†Note:The BI1 (200B001 8001001110) is used purely by way of explanation; the user can
select either BI1-NC, BI1, or BI1-CPL so that the GENBI function acquire the
received signal. For more information of the signal acquisition points and the
meaning of the BI logic, see Chapter Technical description (BU): Binary IO
module.
(ii) GENBI: event suppression process

When the signal switches between the “On” and “Off” state frequently over a short period of
time, the GENBI function will receive these repetitive signals. When these repetitive signals
are converted into event information, repetitive events are issued on occurrence of the
repetitive signals. The event suppression function is provided to suppress event appearance
when the GENBI function determines that the signal is being generated repetitively.
Signal
from
On On On On On On On On
device
Event No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
[GBI-TELD] [GBI-TELR]
Event suppression
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 5.8-3 Example of signals and events suppressed by setting
Figure 5.8-3 illustrates the case where a device produces repetitive signals. From this
figure, it can be seen that the start of event suppression occurs at the tenth state-change (point
B) because the GENBI function counts the number of state-changes. The GENBI function
detects the commencement of the signal repeated from the signal initiation point ‘A’. Scheme

- 524 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
switch [GBI-NELD] is provided to set the number of state-changes so that this function will
start to suppress the signal from this point. The user can set [GBI-TELD] pertaining to the
detection period of the repetitive signals (point A to point C). For example, the user can set the
value “10” for the scheme switch [GBI-NELD]; period A–C is set for the setting [GBI-TELD].
The GENBI function should remove event suppressed operation when the repetitive
signals disappear, (that is, the operation of the device is steady); event suppression operation
is cleared when no repetitive signal is found for a set period. The user can set the period using
scheme switch [GBI-TELR]; this reset operation clears the event suppression function at point
E when the last state change is confirmed at point D. Here, the period D–E is set for the Scheme
switch [GBI-TELR].
The event suppression function is provided for every device; the user should set On for
the scheme switch [SLOT1 GBI01-SPPEN], for example.
Table 5.8-1 Example of event list screened

Event Event contents screened
Off No.1 event
On No.2 event
Off No.3 event
On No.4 event
Off No.5 event
On No.6 event
Off No.7 event
On No.8 event
Off No.9 event
On No.10 event suppression SET
On Event suppression RESET
Table 5.8-1 shows the event list screen. This event list is in response to the signals shown
in Figure 5.8-3. Table 5.8-2 lists the common settings for event suppression. Table 5.8-3 shows
the settings for a particular slot.
Table 5.8-2 Common settings for event suppression

GBI-NELD 0 – 99 sec Number of Event lock detect time
GBI-TELD 1 – 99 sec Timer of detect event lock
GBI-TELR 1 – 99 sec Timer of recovery from event lock
Table 5.8-3 Sets for event suppression in each slot

SLOT1 GBI01-SPPEN Off / On SLOT#1 BI-1 Automatic event suppression function
. . .

- 525 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SLOTnGBI01-SPPEN Off / On SLOT#n BI-1 Automatic event suppression function‡
. . .
. . .
. . .
†Note:The specification and the number of binary input circuits depend upon the model
of BIO module. One of the BIO modules can provide 32 input circuits; thus, the
total number (n) for the process and the circuit is represented up to 32.
‡Note:The number of slots and the structure of the binary input circuits is influenced by
the IED model and the size of the case. For example, when a 1/1 case size is
available, eight slots are furnished within the IED. When the 1/3 case size is used,
two slots are provided in the IED. Hence, the user should distinguish these
configurations in accordance with the number of slots and the type of BIO
modules (For further information, see Chapter Technical description (BU): Binary
IO module).

- 526 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

Sending a report to the client is possible after the mapping is performed for IEC 61850
communication using GR-TIEMS. The user should proceed as follows,

(i) GENBI: editing Logical Node

The user must make a logical node (LN) for the GENBI function. Figure 5.8-4 exemplifies LN
making; LN “GGIO101” is selected for the GENBI function. After editing, the GENBI logical
node can be saved with the name “GGIO101”. Object “Ind1” is defined in the GENBI function.
Figure 5.8-4 Defining “Ind1” object in GGIO101 logic node
(ii) GENBI: mapping output data

With the IEC 61850 communications standard a GOOSE message can be used to send a signal
to a client. The user will need to collect the signals corresponding to the GENBI function and
then map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 5.8-4 shows the mapping signals that are required within the GENBI function for
IEC 61850 communications. Figure 5.8-5 shows how to map a signal.
Table 5.8-4 Mapping signals for Ind1 object in GENBI function

Ctrl/GGIO101$Ind1 stVal BOOLEAN ST 580001 0010001001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO101$Ind1 q Quality ST 580001 3110001005 SLOT1 GBI01_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO101$Ind1 t Timestamp ST 580001 9010001006 SLOT1 GBI01_TIMESTAM

- 527 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Drag and drop
Figure 5.8-5 Quality signal being mapped into Ind1 object of GGIO101

- 528 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.8.3 GENBI settings

General BI (Function ID: 580001)
GBI-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

GBI-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
GBI-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
IO#1 BI#1 SLOT1 GBI01-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit01 at Slot1 Off
SLOT1 GBI01-SPPEN Off / On - Switch to suppress events by itself at BI circuit On
BI#2 SLOT1 GBI02-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit02 at Slot1 Off
…. …. …. ….
IO#2 BI#1 SLOT2 GBI01-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit01 at SLOT2 Off
BI#2 SLOT2 GBI02-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit02 at SLOT2 Off
…. …. …. ….
…. …. …. ….
…. …. …. ….
…. …. …. ….

- 529 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.8.4 GENBI signals (DataID)

 Signal monitoring points in BI module at IO#1 slot
GENBI (Function ID: 580001)
0010001001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE Status of binary input circuit BI1 at IO#1 slot
…. …. ….
00101F1001 SLOT1 GBI32_STATE Status of binary input circuit BI32 at IO#1 slot
 Mapping points in BI module at IO#1 slot

GENBI (Function ID: 580001)
3110001005 SLOT1 GBI01_QUALITY SLOT1 GBI01 quality
… … …
31101F1005 SLOT1 GBI32_QUALITY SLOT1 GBI32 quality
0010001001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE SLOT1 GBI01 state
… … ….
00101F1001 SLOT1 GBI32_STATE SLOT1 GBI32 state
9010001006 SLOT1 GBI01_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI01 timestamp
…. …. ….
90101F1006 SLOT1 GBI32_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI32 timestamp
slot, but a 2nd and other slots are also provided in the GENBI function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every circuit;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other circuits. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “SLOT2 GBI02_STATE” point
for the 2nd circuit, use the description of SLOT1 GBI01_STATE in place of
“SLOT2 GBI02_STATE”. The user can obtain the ID value of “SLOT2
GBI02_STATE” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for SLOT1 GBI01_STATE (i.e.,
“0010001001”)
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth and sixth digits from the

- 530 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
ID. (i.e., “0”)

Step 3 Choose a new circuit number. (i.e., pick the number “1” for
the 2nd circuit)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth and sixth
digits with the new device number. (i.e., get new ID
“0010111001” of “SLOT2 GBI02_STATE”) The ID is
expressed in hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must
change the device number from decimal notation to
hexadecimal notation.

- 531 -
CU
––––––––Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ)

The function of the automatic sequence controller (ASEQ) is to control the PLC function that
is used within the automatic sequence control function, which can be coded by the user. This
control logic has software signals; the status of these software signals are changed by control
commands that are sent from upstream devices. One of the upstream devices is a SAS server.
Another is the front panel of the IED, which means that the user can operate the device locally
using the ASEQ function. The ASEQ function is divided into a couple parts, these are referred
to as “ASEQ01 etc.” functions (i.e., ASEQ01, ASEQ02 …, ASEQ15). Therefore, some PLC
functions are controlled by the ASEQ functions at the same time. For simplicity, only the
ASEQ01 function is discussed here, the features in the other ASEQ02 etc. functions are
identical to the ASEQ01 function.
5.9.1 Function setup

Figure 5.9-1 outlines the command reception in the ASEQ01 function. The ASEQ01 function
can generate a start command at the PLC monitoring point “ASEQ01_EXEC_START” (see
Table 5.9-4), when the start command is provided for the ‘ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ’. Similarly,
when a stop command is received in the ASEQ01 function, the stop command will be generated
at the PLC monitoring point “ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP” (see Table 5.9-5) †.
†Note: Create “IN1” and “IN2”points in the user programming logic; make the connection
between the ASEQ01 function and the user programing logic. Refer to chapter
PLC function. The user-programming logic is also required to have output points.
For example, if the user wishes to control a CB using the logic, the logic should
have two output points for two binary output circuits (BOs). Figure 5.9-1 shows
how two BOs are used for CB closing and CB opening.
‡Note: The ASEQ01 function does not have the responsibility to restart the programmed
logic after an emergency stop signal has been applied. Therefore, the user should
program the logic to generate an operation result signal in case of the emergency
stop signal being applied in the logic. See section 5.9.5 for the emergency
operation.
‡Note: PLC connection point “ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET” is provided for stopping the
ASEQ01 operation, as shown in Table 5.9-3.

- 532 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
IED
ASEQ01 User programming logic for

CB control
logic
In Out In Out
Binary Output Device
ASEQ01_ Circuit4
523001 700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ EXEC_START OUT1
Remote operation Xxxxxx 8xxxxxxxxx IN1 Driver Close

523001 820D10ED50 EMERSTOP_CONTROL_REQ
ASEQ01_
OUT2 Binary Output
EXEC_STOP circuit4
IED front panel
operation Xxxxxx 8xxxxxxxxx IN2
“Reply Signal” Driver
Open
EMERSTOP_
EXEC_STOP
“Emergency stop”
523001 800D01EDF2 ASEQ01-EXEC_RESET‡
Figure 5.9-1 ASEQ01 controls the user programing logic to operate a CB
Table 5.9-1 Mapping points for the r remote control commands

523001 700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ ASEQ01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M
… … …
523001 700D0F6D08 ASEQ15_CONTROL_REQ ASEQ15 control command received. (Mapping Data) M
Table 5.9-2 Mapping points for Emergency command

523001 820D10ED50 EMERSTOP_CONTROL_REQ Emergency control for stopping the operation M
Table 5.9-3 PLC connection points (Inputs for stopping ASEQ operation)
523001 800D01EDF2 ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET Instruction to stop ASEQ01 operation O
… … …
523001 800D0FEDF2 ASEQ15_EXEC_RESET Instruction to stop ASEQ15 operation O
Table 5.9-4 PLC monitoring points (Outputs to start ASEQ operation)

523001 820D011F50 ASEQ01_EXEC_START Start instruction provided for ASEQ01 operation
… … …
523001 820D0F1F50 ASEQ15_EXEC_START Start instruction provided for ASEQ15 operation

- 533 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.9-5 PLC monitoring points (Outputs to stop ASEQ operation)

523001 810D011F51 ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP Stop instruction provided for ASEQ01 operation
… … …
523001 810D0F1F51 ASEQ15_EXEC_STOP Stop instruction provided for ASEQ15 operation
Table 5.9-6 PLC monitoring points (Outputs of ASEQ operation status)

523001 000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC Status of ASEQ01 operation
… … …
523001 000D0F1001 ASEQ15_ACC_EXEC Status of ASEQ15 operation
5.9.2 Preparation of the operation

The ASEQ01 function has three scheme switches: [ASEQ01-EN], [ASEQ01-CTRMENU] and
[ASEQ01-CTRAHMI].
The scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRMENU] is used for a local operation (e.g., the front panel
operation on the IED). When On is set for the scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRMENU], the PLC
sequence #1 can be instructed locally. The scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRAHMI] is used to select
either a select-before-operation command (SBO) or a direct command (DIR) when the local
instruction is applied.
5.9.3 Example of automatic sequence operation

Figure 5.9-2 exemplifies some sequence logic programmed using the PLC function; the logic is
coded to operate two disconnector (DS1 and DS2) and a circuit breaker (CB). The logic can
provide an instruction to close DS1 (i.e., device #2), close DS2 (i.e., device #3), and then close
the CB (i.e., device #1) in a prescribed order.

- 534 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Input signals Output signals

5Reset ASEQ01 execution
t 0 4ASEQ01 in execution
1Start command for ASEQ01 S Q
1s R 5s
S Q t 0 &
Closing Command for Device #2
End of execution of ASEQ01 1s R
≧1 2s 1
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_1
≥1
Temporary signal 001
5Reset of ASEQ01 execution
Temporary signal 002
Control failure In closing switch at device #1 &

UTOSEQ01）
Travelling detection ＆ In selecting device #1 1
4ASEQ01 in execution & t 0

S Q &
Termination of ASEQ01 at level #1 Closing Command for Device #3
1s R 2s 1
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 ≥1
In closing switch at device #2 ＆

In selecting device #2 1
＆ t 0
S Q ＆
Closing Command for Device #3
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 1s R 2s
1
Complete termination of ATSQ01 ≥1

Complete termination of ATSQ01
2Stop command for ASEQ01 S Q ＆ Temporary signal 001
1s R
In selecting device #1 ＆
In selecting device #3
3Emergency stop for ASEQ01 S Q ＆ Temporary signal 002

1s R
In selecting device #3
1DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL ≥1
6Control failure
1DEV2PLCCTRLFAIL
UTOSEQ01）
1DEV3PLCCTRLFAIL
Figure 5.9-2 Example of control logic programmed for device #1 to #3

1Note: If a start command is applied to the ASEQ01 function, the control logic
commences to operate the devices. Table 5.9-4 shows start commands.
2Note: If a stop command is applied to the ASEQ01 function, the operation of the control
logic will be canceled promptly provided that the control logic is not operating the
device. Alternatively, the control logic can wait for the operation being completed,
if the control logic is able to determine to continue the operation. Table 5.9-3
shows the stop commands.
3Note: See section 5.9.5. Table 5.9-8 and Table 5.9-9 show the emergency commands.
4Note: After the reception of the start command, the execution state can be monitored.

- 535 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.9-6 shows the execution states.

5Note: The stop signal is provided for the logic. Table 5.9-5 shows the results of the stop
signals.
6Note: Following the generation of a control command by the control logic, if the control
command fails to initiate the operation of a device, the control logic determines
that the control command has failed. The control logic will generate signals in
order to express “Control failure”.
When a stop command is generated during the selection of Device #3, the control logic
will clear the operation if the control logic can determine that the operation of Device #3 is
complete. Figure 5.9-3 shows that Device #3 unable to operate following reception of the stop
command.
ON
Control logic in service.

Operating state OFF
*3The operating state turns to OFF, when the operation of Device#3 finishes
following the reception of a stop command from the ASEQ01 function.
Selection signal for Device #2

Start to close Completion of closing

Start to close Completion of closing

*4The operation of Device#3 failed.
*2The ASEQ01 function generates an operate signal for stopping the control logic.
*1The ASEQ01 function generates a select signal for stopping the control logic.
Figure 5.9-3 Timing chart for an automatic sequence when a stop command is injected during
the operation of Device#3
Figure 5.9-4 depicts the operating sequence when an emergency command is input; the
control logic will cancel the operation in accordance with the execution state given from a
device. If the operation signal is not controlling the device, the control logic will clear the
operation promptly. If the operation signal is controlling the device, the control logic will clear
the operation when the control logic function can determine that the operation of the device is
complete, in this case Device#1.
ON
OFF
Operating state
*4The operation state turns to OFF, when the control logic cancels the
selection of Device#1 following the reception of a stop command from
the ASEQ01 function.

*3The control logic turns the selection
signal to OFF when the control signal is
not sent for the device.
*2The ASEQ01 function generates an emergency

command for the control logic.
*1The ASEQ01 function generates a selection signal for

the emergency stop for the control logic.
Figure 5.9-4 Time chart of automatic sequence when emergency stop command is applied
during the operation of Device#1

- 536 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.9.4 Control hierarchy

The user should program the “Control hierarchy” for the ASEQ01 function. The user should
connect the condition with the select condition logic using the connection point
“ASEQ01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see section 3.3. Table 5.9-7 shows the respective
points in the ASEQ functions.
Table 5.9-7 Control hierarchy points on ASEQ functions
523001 820D01ED50 ASEQ01IN_TMP_28 ASEQ01 control hierarchy condition M
… … …
523001 820D0FED50 ASEQ15IN_TMP_28 ASEQ15 control hierarchy condition M
Table 5.9-8 Control hierarchy point for Emergency stop

523001 820D10ED50 EMERSTOPIN_TMP_28 Emergency control for stopping the operation M
5.9.5 Input for emergency stop

The ASEQ functions are able to receive an “EMERSTOP_EXEC_STOP” command (see Table
5.9-2); the user should program to acquire the sign so that the ASEQ logics can abandon for
controlling devices. The operation will stop instantly even if the control logic is waiting for
some condition (i.e., synchronization or others).
Table 5.9-9 PLC monitoring points (Outputs for ASEQ emergency status)
523001 000D0D1001 EMERSTOP_ACC_EXEC Reception of an emergency signal
523001 800D0D1D58 EMERSTOP_EC_LCD Emergency signal generated on the LCD scream
523001 800D0D1D55 EMERSTOP_EC_OWS Emergency signal generated from OWS(HMI)
523001 800D0D1D56 EMERSTOP_EC_RCC Emergency signal generated from RCC
523001 800D0D1D57 EMERSTOP_EC_RMT Emergency signal generated at Remote
523001 810D0D1F50 EMERSTOP_EXEC_STOP Command received for emergency stop
523001 310D0D1D01 EMERSTOP_LCD_ST State signal about LCD screen
523001 310D0D1D00 EMERSTOP_MMC_ST State signal about MIMIC screen
523001 800D0D1D54 EMERSTOP_SC_LCD Select command generated on the LCD
523001 800D0D1D51 EMERSTOP_SC_OWS Select command generated at OWS(HMI)
523001 800D0D1D52 EMERSTOP_SC_RCC Select command generated at RCC
523001 800D0D1D53 EMERSTOP_SC_RMT Select command generated at Remote

- 537 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

The user can operate the ASEQ function using IEC 61850 communications after first
completing the appropriate mapping using the GR-TIEMS software. Note that the ASEQ01
function is designed for the “Single Point Controller (SPC) class” described in the IEC 61850
communications standard. The user should follow steps:
(i) ASEQ: editing Logical Node

The user should implement a logical node (LN) for the ASEQ01 function. Figure 5.9-5
exemplifies LN editing; the LN “(GAPC1)” is chosen for the ASEQ01 function. After the user
has defined an object “SPCSO1”, the ASEQ01 logical node is saved with the name “SPCSO1”
plus “LN Instance”. A definition for the object “SPCSO1” is made in the ASEQ01 logical node.
Choose either the SBO mode or the DIR mode when editing the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 5.9-5 Defining “SPCSO1” object in GAPC1 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 5.9-6 exemplifies the settings in LN “GAPC1” when the SBO mode is required for the
ASEQ01 function. In SBO control, the user should select the following items for the object
reference “GAPC1$SPCSO1” using the GR-TIEMS software;

- 538 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down
Defining DIR mode

Figure 5.9-7exemplifies the settings in LN “GAPC1” when the DIR mode is required for the
ASEQ01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using the GR-
TIEMS software:
 Oper
 Origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns”)
(ii) ASEQ: mapping output data

The user should group the ASEQ01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 5.9-10 shows the signals in the ASEQ01 function that require mapping to the IEC
61850 communications. Figure 5.9-8 shows how to map a signal.

- 539 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.9-10 Mapping signals for SPCSO1 object

Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$origin orCat orCategory ST 523001 300D011008 ASEQ01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 523001 6A0D011009 ASEQ01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 stVal BOOLEAN ST 523001 000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 q Quality ST 523001 310D011005 ASEQ01-QUALITY
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 t Timestamp ST 523001 900D011006 ASEQ01_TIME
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN ST 523001 000D011D90 ASEQ01_STSELD
Drag and drop
Figure 5.9-8 orCat attribute mapped into SPCSO1 object of GAPC1
(iii) ASEQ: mapping input data

The ASEQ1 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 5.9-11 shows the input-point
“ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1”; the user should
map the input-point to the Object references with attributes CO and CF under FC†. Figure 5.9-9

- 540 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 5.9-11 Mapping signals required for SPCSO1 object in ASEQ01 function
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
523001 700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 5.9-9 Input-point mapped for GAPC1

- 541 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.9.7 ASEQ settings

Auto Sequence(Function ID: 523001)
ASEQ01-EN Off / On - ASEQ01 switch Off

…. …. …. …..
EMERS EMERSTOP-EN Off / On - CTRL EMERSTOP Enable Off
EMERSTOP-DEVNAME [Preferred name] - item name of Auto Control EMERSTOP EMERSTOP !
EMERSTOP-OFFNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(off) Stop !
EMERSTOP-ONNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(on) Start !
EMERSTOP-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
EMERSTOP-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
ASEQ01 ASEQ01-DEVNAME [Preferred name] - item name of Auto Control Seqence01 ASC1 !
ASEQ01-OFFNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(off) Stop !
ASEQ01-ONNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(on) Start !
ASEQ01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
…. …. …. …..
! Note: The user can enter a preferred setting name using GR-TIEMS.

- 542 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5.9.8 ASEQ signals (DataID)

 Signal monitoring points in ASEQ01
ASEQ(Function ID: 523001)
000D001F40 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Status flag to not be selected for multiple operations
000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC Reception state of the automatic sequence instruction command
000D011D90 ASEQ01_STSELD ASEQ01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
310D011D00 ASEQ01_MMC_ST ASEQ01 state for MIMIC
310D011D01 ASEQ01_LCD_ST ASEQ01 state for LCD
800D011D51 ASEQ01_SC_OWS ASEQ01 select command by OWS(HMI)
800D011D52 ASEQ01_SC_RCC ASEQ01 select command by RCC
800D011D53 ASEQ01_SC_RMT ASEQ01 select command by Remote
800D011D54 ASEQ01_SC_LCD ASEQ01 select command by LCD
800D011D55 ASEQ01_EC_OWS ASEQ01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
800D011D56 ASEQ01_EC_RCC ASEQ01 execute command by RCC
800D011D57 ASEQ01_EC_RMT ASEQ01 execute command by Remote
800D011D58 ASEQ01_EC_LCD ASEQ01 execute command by LCD
810D011F51 ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP Commencing command for automatic sequence
820D011F50 ASEQ01_EXEC_START Stop command for automatic sequence
000D0D1001 EMERSTOP_ACC_EXEC Reception state of an emergency signal to stop the operation
000D0D1D90 EMERSTOP_STSELD EMERSTOP selected signal (stSeld) for SAS
310D0D1D00 EMERSTOP_MMC_ST EMERSTOP state for MIMIC
310D0D1D01 EMERSTOP_LCD_ST EMERSTOP state for LCD
800D0D1D51 EMERSTOP_SC_OWS EMERSTOP select command from OWS(HMI)
800D0D1D52 EMERSTOP_SC_RCC EMERSTOP select command from RCC
800D0D1D53 EMERSTOP_SC_RMT EMERSTOP select command by Remote
800D0D1D54 EMERSTOP_SC_LCD EMERSTOP select command from LCD
800D0D1D55 EMERSTOP_EC_OWS EMERSTOP execute command from OWS(HMI)
800D0D1D56 EMERSTOP_EC_RCC EMERSTOP execute command from RCC
800D0D1D57 EMERSTOP_EC_RMT EMERSTOP execute command by Remote
800D0D1D58 EMERSTOP_EC_LCD EMERSTOP execute command from LCD
810D0D1F50 EMERSTOP_EXEC_STOP Commencing command for emergency stop
 Connection points in PLC logic in ASEQ01

820D01ED50 ASEQ01IN_TMP_28 Reception of control right for ASEQ01
800D01EDF2 ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET Reception of reset signal for ASEQ01 operation
820D10ED50 EMERSTOPIN_TMP_28 EMERSTOPIN_TMP_28
 Mapping point in ASEQ01

700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ ASEQ01 control command received. (Mapping Data)

- 543 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the ASEQ function. We
example, when the user wishes to find the “ASEQ01_EC_LCD” point for
the 2nd device, use the description of “ASEQ02_EC_LCD” in place of
“ASEQ01_EC_LCD”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“ASEQ02_EC_LCD” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for ASEQ01_EC_LCD (i.e.,
“800D011D58”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “800D021D58” of
“ASEQ02_EC_LCD”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal

- 544 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
6 Technical description (CU)

Hardware contents Pages Pages
Binary IO (BIO) modules 563 CU-BU com. module (FEP) 561
-BI modules 581 Clock function (Date and time) 612
-BO modules 581 -Time synchronization 613
-Binary input (BI) circuits 565 -DST(Summer time) 618
-Binary input (BI) features 564 -Time zone 617
-Binary output (BO) circuits 576 Grouping relay settings 621
-Binary output (BO) features 574 Human machine interface (HMI) 598
Communication modules 555 -Function keys with LEDs 604
-LAN 555 LED indicators 604
-RS485 559 Monitoring jacks 609
-Fiber optic 559 Operation keys 611
-IRIG-B000 559 Power supply module (PWS) 595
Case structure and slot layout 546 -FAIL contacts 595
-1/1 size case 546 -Alarm threshold 595
Contact inputs and outputs 563 VT modules for AC inputs (VCT) 548
-N/C contact 574 -VCT21B 549
-Form-C contact 574 -VT ratio setting 552
-Contact inputs 564 -Rated current setting 552
Recording function contents Pages Pages

Disturbance recorder 637 Event recorder 630
-Maximum number of recording 637 -Trigger signals 630
-Recording signals 638 -Trigger modes 635
-Recording time and capacities 637 Fault recorder 624
-Trigger settings for PLC 641 -Screen information 626
-Types of recording information 641 -Operation identifier 627
Metering function contents Pages Pages

Accumulated time 650 Metering features –
Counter features 650 -Information 647
-Information in GCNT 650 -Diminishing small value 648
-Measurement settings 648
User interface contents Pages Pages

Outline 667 Setting sub-menu 688
-Front panel 667 -Setting method 688
HMI operation 671 -Confirmation dialog 692
-General operation 671 -On/Off 695
-Main-menu and sub-menu 671 - Group setting 696
Record sub-menu 674 -Function key 698
-Fault record 674 I/O setting 702
-Event record 677 -AC analog input 702
-Disturbance record 679 -Binary input 703
Monitoring sub-menu 681 -Binary output 704
-Metering 681 Time sub-menu 708
-Binary I/O 681 Test sub-menu 715
-Communication 682 Information sub-menu 721
-Relay elements 684 Security setting sub-menu 722
-Statistics 685 Control sub-menu 724

- 545 -
CU
Chapter 6.1: Technical description (CU) 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––IED case and module slot
BU
IED case and module slot

Figure 6.1-1 shows diagrams of the IED case structure for 1/1 size case: (a) IED internal
structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c)
schematic diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 6.1-1.a)

Transformer module (VCT), Signal processing and communication module (CPU), and power
supply module (PWS) are mounted at predefined locations in the case. Binary IO modules
(BIOs) are placed in slots (IO#1 and IO#2), these slot locations are determined before factory
shipment. For detailed information on slot locations, module types and their connections for
all IEDs, see external connection figures (See Appendix: Typical external connection). The
front-end-processing module (FEP) provides the communication between CU and BUs. The
communication ports (COM) are located at the rear (section 6.4).
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 6.1-1.b)

A terminal block, designed with a pair of upper and lower terminals, is mounted on the rear of
the IED case and is labeled with alpha-numeric reference T1 or T2 with respect to BIs, BOs,
or BIOs. The numbers placed by terminal screws relate to binary circuits individually (to check
the configuration of those, see section 6.5). The user, for example, can identify that slot “IO#1”
is linked with alpha-numeric reference “T1”.
Note that PWS terminal block is placed on the left hand side, and named it “T3”. The
circuits and relevant terminal screws of that are discussed in section 6.6.
FEP provides CU-BU communications; one port on the FEP is corresponded with one BU.
COMs are used for the communication, are labeled “C11” to “C15”.
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 6.1-1.c)

Slots and terminal blocks are shown, and the user can find them the locations of VCT, BIO,
FEP, COM and PWS modules. The user has to carry setting work for IO modules using setting
tables (section 6.5).

- 546 -
CU
BU
a. Front view
T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
1 1 1
2
BU53 BU54 BU55 BU56 BU61 BU62 BU63 BU64 C11
2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
10 10 10
11
C12
11 11
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 19 19 C13
20 20 20
21 21 21
22 22
22
23 23
23
24 24
24
25 25
26
25
26 26 C24 C14
27 27 27
28 28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34
34
C15
35 35
35
FG1 FG2
36 36
36
37 37
E
37
38 38 38
39 39 39
40 40 40
BU1 BU2 BU3 BU4 BU9 BU10 BU11 BU12
FGA
FG FGB
b. Rear view
T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
C11

C12

C13

C24 C14

C15
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
c. Schematic figure
Figure 6.1-1 Slots and terminal blocks in 1/1 size case

- 547 -
CU
––––––––Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)
BU
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)

Transformer module (VCT) is used for measuring voltage quantities. The IED has VCTs, which
are used to measure zone voltages (in three-phases) on bus-bars. Four zones voltages can be
acquired with a VCT. The IED (i.e., CU) can have two VCTs so that eight zones voltages can
be acquired simultaneously.
Note: We represent respective input signals at the “AC analog input (VCT)” as “Channel
numbers (Ch*)” when we set the VCT ratios. The figure below shows the operation
screen for the AC analog input, which we shall discuss later. The term “AI#1” in
the below figure represents the VC alpha-numeric references discussed in section
6.1.
The below figures exemplify the ratio settings for respective channels on the VCT. For more
information about the operation of LCD screen, see section 6.12. The user can also set them
using GR-TIMES (see Chapter Engineering tool).
AC Analog Input AI#1 AI#1
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12 10:48 1/2
AI#1 > CH1 > AI1_Ch10Ratio +
AI#2 > CH2 > 2000
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
CH7 >
Figure 6.2-1 Setting samples about AC analog input (LCD screen)
Figure 6.2-2 Setting sample of AC analog input (GR-TIEMS)
Note: The user should set the VT ratio prior to operation. For more information, see
section 6.2.3.

- 548 -
CU
BU
6.2.1 VCT21B
VCT21B is designed to collect zone voltages. Figure 6.2-3 shows that a VCT21B can collect
zones voltages: Zone A (Ch1–Ch3), Zone B (Ch4–Ch6), Zone C (Ch7–Ch9), and Zone D( Ch10-
Ch12). Another VCT21B, shown in Figure 6.2-4, can collect Zone E to Zone H voltages.
VCT21B
AC
VaA
Type analog
Terminal Input Full
VbA Screw of Jumper input
VcA Number signal scale
input channel
VaB number
VbB 1 2 VaA Voltage NA Ch1 245.76V
VcB 3 4 VbA Voltage NA Ch2 245.76V
5 6 VcA Voltage NA Ch3 245.76V
VaC
7 8 VaB Voltage NA Ch4 245.76V
VbC
9 10 VbB Voltage NA Ch5 245.76V
VcC 11 12 VcB Voltage NA Ch6 245.76V
VaD 13 14 VaC Voltage NA Ch7 245.76V
VbD
15 16 VbC Voltage NA Ch8 245.76V
17 18 VcC Voltage NA Ch9 245.76V
VcD
19 20 VaD Voltage NA Ch10 245.76V
21 22 VbD Voltage NA Ch11 245.76V
23 24 VcD Voltage NA Ch12 245.76V
25 26 – – – – –
27 28 – – – – –
Figure 6.2-3 Transformer module for zone A to zone D (VCT21B)

- 549 -
CU
BU
VCT 21B
AC
VaE
Type analog
Terminal Input Full
VbE
Screw of Jumper input
VcE Number signal scale
input channel
VaF number
VbF 1 2 VaE Voltage NA Ch1 245.76V
VcF 3 4 VbE Voltage NA Ch2 245.76V
5 6 VcE Voltage NA Ch3 245.76V
VaG
7 8 VaF Voltage NA Ch4 245.76V
VbG
9 10 VbF Voltage NA Ch5 245.76V
VcG 11 12 VcF Voltage NA Ch6 245.76V
VaH 13 14 VaG Voltage NA Ch7 245.76V
VbH
15 16 VbG Voltage NA Ch8 245.76V
17 18 VcG Voltage NA Ch9 245.76V
VcH
19 20 VaH Voltage NA Ch10 245.76V
21 22 VbH Voltage NA Ch11 245.76V
23 24 VcH Voltage NA Ch12 245.76V
25 26 – – – – –
27 28 – – – – –
Figure 6.2-4 Transformer module for zone E to zone H (VCT21B)

- 550 -
CU
BU
6.2.2 Constitution of VCT

Figure 6.2-5 shows VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram (termed ‘VC1’);
the same terminal screw numbers are shown on both the left and the right figures. The user
should note that the last screw (No. 30) and FG terminal are connected with a short-bar by
default.
VC1
VC1
VCT Alpha-
numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
Short-bar 21
22
23
FG1
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
1
Short-bar
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 6.2-5 VC1 terminals2 (Rear view)

1Note: Short-bar between screw 30 and FG is connected by the manufacturer.
2Note: The figure is just drawn for general instruction about VCT structure. The number
of VTs and CTs on VCT is dependent on the VCT type ordered.

- 551 -
CU
BU
6.2.3 Setting VT ratios

The user should set the ratios of VTs on VCT. The table below shows the setting range for each
of the AC analog input channels. For example, when the user wishes to set the ratio of AC
analog input channel#2 at the VCT#1 slot, the user should set the value of the VCT ratio using
the setting [AI1_Ch2_Ratio]. The user can select a ratio from 1.000 to 20000.000.
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200221/200222)

Unit Default setting
Setting item Range Contents Notes
s value
VCT#1 AI1_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 1.000
AI1_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 1.000
VCT#2 AI2_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 1.000
†Note: For more information on IED operation, see Section 6.12.6.

‡Note:The number of input channels depends on the VCT configuration. The user has to
set the value of the VCT ratio corresponding to a specific auxiliary VT.

- 552 -
CU
––––––––Signal processing and communication module (CPU)
BU
Signal processing and communication module (CPU)

Signal-processing and communication module (CPU) are made up of a main circuit board
(CPM2) for processing and an optic module (COM#4) for the connection between CPU and FEP.
The other communication modules (COM#1, 2, 3, and 5) are used for the LAN, time
synchronization, and TIEMS engineering using local PC. These circuit boards are putted on
the CPU by printed circuit board (PCB) connectors. Figure 6.3-1 shows the outline.
CPU
CPM2
COM#1
CPU COM#2
COM#3
COM#4
COM#5
Figure 6.3-1 Communication modules (COM#1 to COM#5) on CPU

Note: COM#4 is used for the connection with the FEP module.

- 553 -
CU
BU
6.3.1 Signal processing

The operation of relay and control applications are achieved with the CPU on the CPM2 board.
The CPU board has SDRAM, MRAM, and NOR-Flash; the NOR-Flash is used to store setting
data and recording data; the MRAM is used to store several counter values, etc. Both are of
non-volatile memory so that the stored data will be not be erased if the power is cut off.
IED(CU)
C11
CPU COM#1 LAN network
BIO#1
C12
CPM2
COM#2
VCT#1 VCT#2
C13
BIO#2 COM#3 LAN for Local PC
C14
COM#4
C15 IRIG-B
COM#5
C24
FEP
BU1
BU1 IED(BU1)
BU2 IED(BU2)
BU2
BU3
BU3 IED(BU3)
BU4
BU4 IED(BU4)
BU64
Ch#64 IED(BU64)
Channels for BU1 to 64
Figure 6.3-2 Diagram of processing
CPU-FEP optical cable† is used to connect CPU with FEP module. The user should connect
the both modules with the optical cable at C14 and C24, as shown in Figure 6.3-2.
Figure 6.3-3 CPU and FEP connected with CPU-FEP optical cable
Note: The optical cable is enclosed in the IED package. See Chapter Installation and
setting: Unpack and inspection of hardware and software.

- 554 -
CU
BU
6.3.2 Communication modules for LAN, RS485, and IRIG

The tables below show piggyback-circuit-modules provided for the communication. They are
mounted on CPU module directly. The actual mountings depend on the user ordering; thus,
the user should locate the actual implementations by the ordering using Appendixes: Ordering
and Typical external connection.
Table 6.3-1 Communication modules for Network

Module 100Base-TX/1000Base-T 100Base-FX 1000Base-LX
Connector RJ45 type SC type LC type (Duplex)
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic Fiber optic
Substation automation Substation automation Substation automation
Usage
system and others system and others system and others
100/1000 100BASE-ＦX 1000
BASE-T BASE-LX
Symbol
TX
RX
Table 6.3-2 Communication modules for Miscellaneous

Module RS485 Fiber optic interface IRIG-B
Connector PCB connector ST type PCB connector
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic(GI) Shielded twist pair
Data transfer in Data transfer in Time

Usage
IEC103 IEC103 (2km class) synchronization
RS485 Remote IRIG-B000
A1 Comm. A1
B1 B1 SIG
COM-A
A2 A2(Disuse)
Symbol
RX
B2 B2(Disuse)
COM-B
A3 A3
B3 B3
COMM TX GND
1. 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module (RJ-45 plug)

A twisted-pair cable is required for the LAN connection. The module is used for the GR-TIEMS
operation or the LAN communication. Use a shielded twisted pair cable so that electric
magnetic compatibility is satisfied.
C11
C12
Figure 6.3-4 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module

- 555 -
CU
BU
2. 100Base-FX module (SC plug)

A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100Base-FX module is used for the LAN
communication. Dual slots space (i.e., labeled with “C11” and “C12”) is occupied when a single
(Port A) module is mounted (see Figure 6.3-5; i.e., space “C12” is not blank). Therefore, the
total number for communication ports needs to be cared.
C11 C11
C12 C12
Figure 6.3-5 100Base-FX module (left for single port; right for dual ports)
3. 1000Base-LX module (LC plug)

A pair of optic fiber cables is required. The 1000Base-LX module can be used for the GR-TIEMS
operation or the LAN communication. Use SM mode fiber when long distance is required.
C11
C12
Figure 6.3-6 1000Base-LX module
4. RS485 module
RS485 module has a PCB connector. The module should be connected with a shielded-twisted-
pair cable; it is used for communication in the IEC60870-5-103, Modbus, and DNP. The
terminal arrangement and references are shown below. The cable sheath should be connected
with the frame ground (FG) in the IED case. For the use of the a shielded-twisted-pair cable,
the user should note that the total length should be less than 1200 meter (0.75 miles); the
terminal resistor (150 ohms) should be connected when any connector is not connected. For
setting the parameters, see Chapter Communication protocol: RS485 communication.

- 556 -
CU
BU
Sheath
Top
PCB connector A1 A cable for
A1 B1 B1 an IED
COM-A(+)
A2
A2 B2 Sheath
COM-B(−) B2
A cable for
A3 B3 A3
another
Bottom
COMM(GND) B3
IED
0V
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit Frame ground (FG)
C11
C12
Figure 6.3-7 RS485 connection and module
5. Fiber optic module

Fiber optic module is used for the serial communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Figure 6.3-8 Fiber optic module
6. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used to receive the digital signal generated with an external clock; the
signal is in conformity to serial IRIG-B000 format. Note that the IRIG-B000 module is able to
receive digital signal (TTL) only (i.e., the reception of AM signal is not applicable). This module
is isolated using a photo coupler; the user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not used. The
peak value of IRIG-B000 signal should be greater than 3.5 volts; the IRIG-B000 module has
the input register (about 3k ohm). Thus, the terminal register can be required when the IRIG-
B000 signal is delivered for several devices; the value of the terminal register depends on the

- 557 -
CU
BU
number of deliveries and the performance of the external clocks. For setting of time
synchronization, see Chapter Technical Description: Clock function.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
C11
C12
Figure 6.3-9 IRIG-B000 module

- 558 -
CU
BU
6.3.3 Location for LAN, RS485, and IRIG modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the
reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external
connection)
When ‘GM†’ is ordered for the communication module, for example of Figure 6.3-10, IED can
have four modules: LAN (1000Base-LX × 2; at C11 and C12), IRIG-B (at C15), and LAN for
Local PC (at C13). C11 (i.e., Port A) and C12 (i.e., Port B) are used for SAS or other network.
Note C13 port is just used for Local PC connection; it is not allowed to use for the SAS or
IEC61850 etc. communication.
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT
VC1 VC2
VC1 VC2
C11 VCT VCT
C11 1000BASE
-LX
C12
C12 1000BASE
-LX
C13
C13
100/1000
BASE-T
C24 C14
FG1 FG2
C15 C15
485
E •A1
•B1• COM-A
•A2
FGE •B2• COM-B
•A3
• •
B3
COMM
FG1 FG2
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 6.3-10 Modules structure (‘GM code’ at E&F pos.)

†Note:The modules and their locations are dependent on actual ordering codes. In the
above example, IRIG-B is placed at C15, but the user can see the difference if
another ordering code is given. To find the actual locations with regard to the
ordering codes, refer to communication module lists in Appendix: Ordering (see

- 559 -
CU
BU
page 1089).
Figure 6.3-11 illustrates the other structure, which has 1000BASE-LX (i.e., C11 for
communication port A), 100Base-TX/1000BaseT (i.e., C12 for Local PC), and IRIG-B000 (at
C15).
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT
VC1 VC2
VC1 VC2
C11 VCT VCT
C11 1000BASE
-LX
C12
C12 100/1000
BASE-T
C13
C13
C24 C14
FG1 FG2
C15 C15
485
E •A1
•B1• COM-A
•A2
FGE •B2• COM-B
•A3
• •
B3
COMM
FG1 FG2
Figure 6.3-11 Modules structure (‘GK code’ at E&F pos.)

- 560 -
CU
––––––––CU-BU communication module (FEP module)
BU
CU-BU communication module (FEP module)

FEP module is used for the optical communication between CU and BUs. The IED can have
64 links between CU-BUs.
Figure 6.4-1 shows an example; 32 BUs are connected with CU-BU optical cables. The user
should select single-mode (SM) fiber for CU-BU optical cables. The CU-BU optical cable can
carry trip commands, sampling synchronization signals, current data, and the information for
Replica evaluation. The cable specification is shown in Table 6.4-1.
CU
BU1~32
BU1 BU2 BU32
Figure 6.4-1 Example when BUs are connected with 32 optical cables (CU-BU)
Table 6.4-1 CU-BU optical cable information

Item Specification
Fiber mode SM (1310nm wave length)
Connector Duplex LC
Note: Regarding BU connector, see Chapter Technical description (BU): Signal
processing and communication module: CU-BU communication module,
separately. The user can find the information about CU-BU optical cable.
Note: For the signals over the CU-BU communication links, see Appendix CU-BU
communication information.

- 561 -
CU
––––––––CU-BU communication module (FEP module)
BU
Figure 6.4-2 shows that there are 64 ports for CU-BU communication on the FEP module. The
user should connect them with respective BUs.
BU53 BU54 BU64

T1
C11
BU49 BU50 BU60

BU37 BU38 BU48 C12

C13
BU33 BU34 BU44
BU21 BU22 BU32
C24 C14
BU17 BU18 BU28
BU5 BU6 BU16

C15
BU12
BU1 BU2 BU12
Optical terminal block Schematic diagram
Figure 6.4-2 Port layouts

- 562 -
CU
––––––––Binary IO Module (BI, BO, and BIO)
BU
Binary IO Module (BI, BO, and BIO)

Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary
IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to
external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED. There are
standard type and variable type in Binary IO modules as shown in Table 6.5-1.
Table 6.5-1 Number of input and output circuits1

Number of Number of output circuits2
Module Module
# input Fast Semi-fast Auxiliary
name3 Type4 Hybrid Form C
circuits operating operating (Normal)
1 BI1A Standard 18 0 0 0 0 0
2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0
3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0
4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0
5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0
6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1
7 BIO2A Standard 12 0 3 0 1 1
1Note: One of two voltages is applied for the binary IO modules: 48Vdc (24 to 60)
and 220Vdc (110 to 250). The DC voltage supplied to the IED determines the
voltage type selection; hence, a combination of different voltage types is not
possible.
2Note: For the structure and the number of binary IO modules, see section 6.5.5.
3Note: For details of the output circuits, see Table 6.5-6.
4Note: For the binary input circuits in the standard type, the user can choice either
a high voltage or a low voltage with regard to the input threshold. For the
ones of the variable type, the user itself can set a threshold value with regard
to input voltage using settings.

- 563 -
CU
BU
6.5.1 Binary input feature

Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent,
but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 6.5-2.
Table 6.5-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module
Module Input features Example Symbols
type sign
1 BI1A - Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw number
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
BI1 BI1
-Sharing common
Circuit number
connections (+)
2
BI2
Circuit
number
Terminal screw
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 6.5.5.

- 564 -
CU
BU
6.5.2 Binary input circuit

The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the
threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a
function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable logic
for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with
settings. Table 6.5-3 shows the respective settings and ranges in the standard type. Table 6.5-4
shows the ones in the variable types.
Table 6.5-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
THRES_Lvl Low/High – Threshold level for input voltage Low

Common
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI1 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the off-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BIn Off

BIn2 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
1Note: Setting items are provided in each slot; see Figure 6.5-4.
2Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For
example, the user can configure 18 CPLs in the BI1A module.
3Note: Each setting item above is required to set at every IO_slots.

- 565 -
CU
BU
Table 6.5-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A module)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
BI1-3_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI1, BI2, and BI3 77

BI4-6_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI4, BI5, and BI6 77
Common BI7-9_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI7 to BI9 77
BI10-12_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI10 to BI12 77
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI2_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 2 Off
BI3_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 3 Off
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI n Off

BIn4 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
4Note: BI1_CPL~BI12_CPL settings are provided for the BI2A module.
As an example, Figure 6.5-1 shows the binary input circuit of the BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. The BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has
three settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.

- 566 -
CU
BU
From 8001001111 8001001110

External devices For Relay & and
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions
BI1-NC Filter BI1
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI1 BI1-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
BI2-NC BI2
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
[THRES_Lvl]
High
R1
R1
Figure 6.5-1 Common programmable logic for the BI1A module
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that the BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes
to see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
element ID (8001001172) and the function ID of IO#1 slot‡.

- 567 -
CU
BU
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on the BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the
function ID “200B001” and Element ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when
the signal “BI2-CPL” on the BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should
designate that signal using the function ID “200B002” and Element ID
“8001001172”. For more information with regard to the function ID and the Data
ID at IO#1, see sections 6.5.6(i), 6.5.7(i), and others.

- 568 -
CU
BU
(i) Setting threshold level

For Standard type (the BI1A module and others)
The selection switch is used to adjust the threshold of an input signal; it is designated as
[THRES_Lvl]. If an external device signal is lower than DC 110V1, the user should set Low for
scheme switch [THRES_Lvl]. Conversely if an external device signal is higher than DC 220V1,
the user should set High for the scheme switch. Note that scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is used
to control all binary input circuits. The user must ensure that the input voltage is higher than
DC 77V1 when the setting ‘Low’ is applied; the input voltage should be higher than DC 136V1
when the setting ‘High’ is applied.
For Variable type (exclusive for the BI2A)

The BI2A module has a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user
can determine the guaranteed-minimum-pick-up voltages (thresholds) as required. This
unique feature is performed with settings [BI1-3_PICKUP], [BI4-6_PICKUP], [BI7-9_PICKUP],
and [BI10-12_PICKUP]; every setting is applied to a group of three binary input circuits.
Binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting [BI1-3_PICKUP] and the user should set
the value between 18 to 222V DC2 for this setting. For the setting [BI4-6_PICKUP], the above
mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary input circuits; similarly the setting [BI7-
9_PICKUP] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits; and finally the setting [BI10-12_PICKUP]
is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
1Note: The threshold value is fixed for all types of BIO modules except the BI2A. The
user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type” influences these values
(see the 1st note in Table 6.5-1). These particular values are found when 220V dc
type is used.
2Note: In the variable type, the user can set the threshold arbitrarily between 18 to 222V
in DC, and can regulate its threshold voltage in a voltage step. Table 6.5-5 shows
the corresponding values with regard to guaranteed and typical thresholds in
response to the setting values. Note that the operation in the variable type is
segmented into ‘Operate’, ‘Intermediate’, ‘and ‘Non-operate’ areas, which are
decided by the guaranteed-pick-up, typical-pick-up, and guaranteed-drop-off
levels, as illustrated in Figure 6.5-2.

- 569 -
CU
BU
Table 6.5-5 Guaranteed and typical thresholds in the variable type

Guaranteed levels Typical levels
Setting values [V]
Pick-up voltage [V] Drop-off voltage [V] Pick-up voltage [V]
18 17.9 10.5 14.2
19 18.5 11.1 14.8
20 19.9 12.3 16.1
21 20.5 12.9 16.7
22 to 29 21.8 14.0 17.9
30 29.3 20.8 25.0
31 to 32 30.8 22.2 26.5
33 32.5 23.7 28.1
34 to 35 34.0 25.0 29.5
36 to 37 36.0 26.8 31.4
38 to 39 37.5 28.3 32.9
40 39.2 29.8 34.5
41 to 49 40.8 31.2 36.0
50 to 52 49.8 39.4 44.6
53 to 56 53.0 42.2 47.6
57 to 59 56.3 45.3 50.8
60 to 61 59.5 48.1 53.8
62 to 63 61.8 50.2 56.0
64 to 65 63.6 51.8 57.7
66 65.9 53.9 59.9
67 to 70 66.7 54.7 60.7
71 70.1 57.7 63.9
71 to 73 70.3 57.9 64.1
74 73.2 60.6 66.9
75 to 79 74.4 61.6 68.0
80 to 83 79.7 66.4 73.0
84 to 88 83.7 70.1 76.9
89 to 92 88.2 74.0 81.1
93 to 99 92.3 77.8 85.0
100 to 106 99.4 84.2 91.8
107 to 111 106.4 90.6 98.5
112 to 113 111.4 95.0 103.2
114 to 119 114.0 97.4 105.7
120 119.3 102.3 110.8
121 to 127 121.0 103.8 112.4
128 to 130 128.0 110.1 119.0
131 130.1 112.0 121.0
132 to 135 131.9 113.7 122.8
136 to 137 135.9 117.3 126.6
138 to 141 137.1 118.3 127.7
142 to 143 141.5 122.3 131.9
144 143.9 124.5 134.2
145 to 146 144.6 125.2 134.9
147 to 151 146.1 126.5 136.3
152 to 154 151.8 131.6 141.7
155 to 161 154.4 134.0 144.2
162 161.3 140.3 150.8
163 to 165 162.6 141.4 152.0
166 to 170 165.8 144.3 155.0
171 to 173 170.6 148.6 159.6
174 to 176 173.6 151.4 162.5
177 to 183 176.3 153.8 165.0
184 to 189 183.3 160.1 171.7
190 to 193 189.7 165.9 177.8
194 to 200 193.6 169.4 181.5
201 to 203 200.3 175.5 187.9
204 to 211 203.1 178.1 190.6
212 to 221 211.5 185.7 198.6
222 222.0 195.2 208.6

- 570 -
CU
BU
Input voltage
Operating area
Guaranteed pick up level

Intermediate area
Typical pick up level
Guaranteed drop off level
Non-operating area
Figure 6.5-2 Operating area in the variable type

Note: In practice, the pick-up voltages depend on respective binary circuits physically
This means the characteristics are not affected by the ambient conditions and the
applied voltages.
(ii) Comparison feature for contact chatter

The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and
this feature is configured using the setting [CMP_NUM]. Figure 6.5-3 illustrates this feature;
the comparison feature removes contact chatter. The period ‘t’ applied for the removal of contact
chatter can be configured by setting a value for [CMP_NUM]. The formula for the calculation
of ‘t’ is,
1
[CPM_NUM]×
System Frequency×12
The setting [CMP_NUM] is provided for all binary input circuits.
Actual input signal
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
Figure 6.5-3 Chattering countermeasure (e.g. [CMP_NUM] = 4)

- 571 -
CU
BU
(iii) CPL switch

If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for
scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if
CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On
or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit. The number of CPL is equal to number
of binary input circuits: that is, if BI1A is selected, the number of CPLs is 18.
(iv) Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal

Both an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for input signals, the user should set their respective time values for settings [On Delay
Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input
circuit; the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch [INVERSE-
SW]. A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required.
(vi) How to set the settings for binary input circuits

Figure 6.5-4 illustrates an example of the binary IO module arrangement for the binary input
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs); it illustrates the setting targets are on BI1A at IO#1. The
user should key the settings with regard to BI1A using the setting tables for IO_SLOT1. As
the setting points are for BI1A at IO#1, the user should take the setting table of the standard
type (in section 6.5.6(i)-1).

- 572 -
CU
BU
IO#1
IO#2
BI1A
IO_SLOT1
Setting table (input)
Setting targets: BI1–BI18 and Common.

a. Setting targets for BI1A (IO#1)
Figure 6.5-4 Binary BI module and setting tables related to IO_slot1 in the CU
The setting table of section 6.5.6(i)-1 is available for all binary IO modules except for
BI2A; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are relevant to BI1A.
That is, for BI1A the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits
#1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. The IO_SLOT1 and IO_SLOT2 setting tables for the
binary input circuits are shown sections 6.5.6(i) and 6.5.6(i)-1. The setting operation via the
IED screen is discussed later. (See section 6.12.6)

- 573 -
CU
BU
6.5.3 Binary output feature

A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types
of BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and
capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below:
(1) Fast operating
(2) Semi-fast operating
(3) Hybrid
(4) Auxiliary
(5) BO with Form-C
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 6.5-1 and Table 6.5-6. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 6.5.5.

- 574 -
CU
BU
Table 6.5-6 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A at 290Vdc
-OP Time: 3ms (typical) N/O contact
2 Semi-fast -Normally open (N/O) BO1A

-Dry contact BO1(SF)
operating BIO1A
-Closure is faster than
(SF) normal. BIO2A
Type
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 6ms (typical)
3 Hybrid -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO2A
-Polarity dependent BO1(H) number
(H) (+)
-Interruption capability for 1
(−)
high-current (up to 10A) 2
Type
-Consisting of an IGBT BO number
device and a contact
-Make and carry: 8A cont. N/O
-Break: 10A at 220/110Vdc
-OP Time: 1ms
4 Auxiliary -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO1A
-Dry contact BO1 number
BIO1A
-Normal speed closure 1
-Make and carry: 8A cont. 2 BIO2A

-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc BO number BIO3A
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/O contact
5 Form-C -Uses a N/C and a N/O Terminal screw number BIO2A

contact BO1
BIO3A
-Shares a common 35
connections 37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc N/O
0.2A at 125Vdc 38
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/C
Contact

- 575 -
CU
BU
6.5.4 Binary output circuit

Either a CPL logic or a PLC signal can drive a binary output circuit. Table 6.5-7 shows the
settings summary of CPL function.
Table 6.5-7 Setting items for binary output circuits
Setting-range or
Uni
Setting items Contents Default
t
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..

Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
…..
BOn_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off

BOn Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BOn Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs
are listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are

- 576 -
CU
BU
summarized in each slot. (See sections 6.5.8(i) and 6.5.8(ii))
Figure 6.5-5 shows the binary output circuits on BO1A in order to help understand the
settings. BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has timers and switches.
The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
[LOGIC-SW] & ≥1
t 0 0 t BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On &
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BO2
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO2
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
810201113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO2 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
820202112 Contact
& ≥1 BO3
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO3
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8202021113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO3 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
8********* Contact
& ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BOn
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BOn RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
Figure 6.5-5 Binary Output Circuit for BO1A (#1 to #n=18)
In Figure 6.5-5 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective

- 577 -
CU
BU
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, For more information with
regard to the function ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see sections 6.5.9(i)-1 and
6.5.9(i)-2 and; for IO#2 slot, see section 6.5.9(ii)-1 and 6.5.9(ii)-2.
(i) CPL switch

When the user needs to operate the CPL for binary output circuit #1, the user should set On
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since all binary output circuits have CPLs setting between
On and Off is required for every binary output circuit. The number of CPL is equal to the
number of binary output circuits: that is, if the BO1A module is selected, the number of CPLs
is 18. Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the
scheme switch.
(ii) Selection of input signals

Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions, eight
ports for input signals are provided, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user
must ensure that input-signal1 to input-signal8 are configured with eight DataIDs. That is,
the user can select input-signals that are available from other functions, these input-signals
are designated using DataIDs. The user can key the DataIDs into settings [Input signal1] to
[Input signal8]. The DataIDs are selected from the Signal monitoring point list, which is
provided for every function.
(iii) Logic gate switch

A binary input circuit has a logic scheme for the eight input signals, and can combine the eight
input signals as required using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the user should set either
AND, OR or XOR.
(iv) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

An on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in the CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for binary output circuits, the user should set their respective time values for settings
[On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].

- 578 -
CU
BU
(v) Logic level inversion

The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
(vi) Logic timer switch

In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a scheme
switch and a setting are provided. The programmable reset characteristic consists of four types
and the user can select the type required using a scheme switch: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type,
(3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type:
Instant type
When the user uses a binary output signal without the following characteristics, the user
should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting [Reset
signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should determine
the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal monitoring point for
each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
Note: When Latch is set, the state of BO circuit will be sustained during power turn-
on/off.
(vii) How to set the settings for binary output circuits
Figure 6.5-6 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary output
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output circuits, the

- 579 -
CU
BU
setting targets are on BO1A at location IO#2. The user should key the CPL settings from the
setting tables for the IO2_SLOT.
IO#2
IO#1
BO1A
IO_SLOT2
Setting table (output)
Setting targets: BO1–BO18

b. Setting targets for BO1A (IO#2)
Figure 6.5-6 BO module and setting table related to the IO_SLOT2 in the CU
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should understand
and select setting points that are relevant to BO1A. That is, for BO1A the user should choose
the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT2; these
setting tables are shown in section 6.5.8(ii).
(viii) PLC and the binary output circuits

The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output

- 580 -
CU
BU
circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly. In the
case that the binary output circuit is controlled by the PLC, the user is required to connect the
PLC to the binary output circuit. In Figure 6.5-5, the PLC logic connection points are
designated with BO1-SOURCE, BO2-SOURCE, and others. (The PLC is discussed separately.
Note that connection points on the PLC are shown with the Data IDs of BIO_SLOT. See section
6.5.9(i)-3 and 6.5.9(ii)-3. The user should notice that Off should be set for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] when the PLC is used for the BO1 circuit, for example. (For more information of
PLC function, see Chapter PLC function)
6.5.5 Structure of binary IO Module

Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types, and their arrangements of respective
input-and-output circuits are particular to respective binary IO module types, as shown in
Figure 6.5-7–Figure 6.5-9.
Figure 6.5-10 shows a diagram of how an actual terminal block connects with circuits of the
module. The use can identify the correspondence using the left side block figure and the right
side schematic figure. If the user takes account of wiring works on the BI1A, their targets are
designated with terminal screw numbers (1 to 40) that are shown next to the terminal block.
Slot number labeled by alpha-numeric reference “T*” is used to identify the location of the slot,
and the asterisk(*) is substituted for any one of the slot numbers. For the actual
implementation of a binary IO module, the user should examine the arrangement of binary IO
modules from External connection figures, which are shown separately. (See Appendix: Typical
external connection)
Polarity is shown on some input-and-output circuits, hence, the user should check the polarity
sign (+) or (−), respectively.

- 581 -
CU
BU
BI1A BI2A BI3A

(+) 1 (+) 1 (+) 1
2 BI1 2 BI1 2 BI1
(−) (−) (+) BI2
(+) 3 (+) 3
4 BI2 4 BI3
(−) (+) BI4
(+) 5 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI2 6 BI5
(−) (−) (+) BI6
(+) 7 (+) 7 (+) 7
8 BI4 8 BI3 8 BI7
(−) (−) (+)
9 9 BI8
(+) (+)
10 BI5 10 BI9
(−) (+)
11 11 11 BI10
(+) (+) (+)
12 BI6 12 BI4 12 BI11
(−) (−) (+)
13 13 13 BI12
(+) (+) (+)
14 BI7 14 BI5 14 BI13
(−) (−) (+)
15 15 BI14
(+) (+)
16 BI8 16 BI15
(−) (+)
17 17 17 BI16
(+) (+) (+)
18 BI9 18 BI6 18 BI17
(−) (−) (+) BI18
(+) 21 (+) 21 (+) 21

22 BI10 BI7 BI19
(−) (−) 22 (+) 22
BI20
(+) 23 (+) 23
24 BI11 24 BI21
(−) (+) BI22
(+) 25 (+) 25 (+) 25
26 BI12 26 BI8 26 BI23
(−) (−) (+) BI24
(+) 27 (+) 27 (+) 27
28 BI13 28 BI9 28 BI25
(−) (−) (+) BI26
(+) 29 (+) 29
30 BI14 30 BI27
(−) (+) BI28
(+) 31 (+) B31 (+) 31
32 BI15 B32 BI10 32 BI29
(−) (−) (+) BI30
(+) 33 (+) B33 (+) 33
34 BI16 B34 BI11 34 BI31
(−) (−) (+) BI32
(+) 35 (−) 35
(−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
(+) 37 (+) B37 (−) 37
38 BI18 BI12
(−) (−) B38 (−) 38
FG
Figure 6.5-7 Input arrangements for BI1A, BI2A and BI3A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 6.5-2 or Table 6.5-6. The BI2A
should be earthed to the FG of the case. See Figure 6.5-11.

- 582 -
CU
BU
BO1A BO2A
1 1
(+)
BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
(−)
3 3
(+)
BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
(−)
5 5
(+)
BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
(−)
7 7
(+)
BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
(−)
9 9
(+)
BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11
(+)
BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13
(+)
BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15
(+)
BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17
(+)
BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
21 21 (+)
BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 (+)
BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 (+)
BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 (+)
BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 (+)
BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 (+)
BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 (+)
BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35
BO17 36
37
BO18 38
Schematic figures
Figure 6.5-8 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 6.5-2 or Table 6.5-6.

- 583 -
CU
BU
BIO1A BIO2A BIO3A
(+) 1 1 (+) 1
BI1 (+) BI1 BI1
(−) 2 2 (−) 2
(−)
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
BI2 (+) BI2 BI2
(−) 4 4 (−) 4
(−)
(+) 5 5 (+) 5
BI3 (+) BI3 BI3
(−) 6 6 (−) 6
(−)
(+) 7 7 (+) 7
BI4 (+) BI4 BI4
(−) 8 8 (−) 8
(−)
(+) 9 9 (+) 9
BI5 (+) BI5 BI5
(−) 10 10 (−) 10
(−)
(+) 11 11 (+) 11
BI6 (+) BI6 BI6
(−) 12 12 (−) 12
(−)
(+) 13 13 (+) 13
BI7 (+) BI7 BI7
(−) 14 14 (−) 14
(−)
15 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) (+)
16 16 BI8 16 BI8
(−) (−)
17 17
BO2(SF) (+) BI9
18 18
(−)
21 21 21
BO3(SF) 22 (+) 22 BI10 BO1(F) 22
23 (−) 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11 BO2(F) 24
25 (−) 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12 BO3(F) 26
27 (−) 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28 BO4(F) 28
29 29 29
BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30 BO5(F) 30
31 31 31
BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
BO9 34 BO4 34 BO7 34
35 35 35
37 37 37
BO10 36 BO5 36 BO8 36
38 38 38
Schematic figures
Figure 6.5-9 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A, BIO2A and BIO3A
Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 6.5-2 or Table 6.5-6.

- 584 -
CU
BU
Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “*”

is substituted T*
for the actual slot location number.
BIO3A
T* 1
1 (+)
2 BI1
2 (−)
(+) 3
3 BI2
(−) 4
4
(+) 5
5 BI3
(−) 6
6
(+) 7
7 BI4
(−) 8
8
(+) 9
9 BI5
(−) 10
10
(+) 11
11 BI6
12 (−) 12
13 (+) 13
14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
16 BI8
16 (−)
17
18
19
20
21 21
BO1(F) 22
22
23 23
BO2(F) 24
24
25 25
BO3(F) 26
26
27 27
BO4(F) 28
28
29 29
30 BO5(F) 30
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 33
34 BO7 34
35
36 35
37 Terminal screw numbers 37
38 are denoted with the BO8 36
39 same one.
40 38
Compression plug type

terminal
Terminal blocks Schematic figure
Figure 6.5-10 IO module corresponded with compression terminal
Note: Terminal block–for Type using compression terminals– is manufactured by

PHOENIX CONTACT®; its model is described in “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF
5.08”. The user can fit a cable in the compression terminal without a cable ferrule,
when a cable thickness is AWG14 and its stripping length is 10mm. When the
cable requires a ferrule, use a ferrule made by PHOENIX CONTACT ®.

- 585 -
CU
BU
Compression plug type terminal
BI2A BI2A
T* (+) 1
1 (−) 2 BI1
2
3
4 (+) 5
5 6 BI2
(−)
6 (+) 7
7 (−) 8 BI3
8
9
10 (+) 11
11 12 BI4
(−)
12 (+) 13
13 (−) 14 BI5
14
15
16 (+) 17
17 18 BI6
(−)
18
19
20
(+) 21
BI7
(−) 22
21
22
23
24
(+) 25
25 26 BI8
26 (−)
(+) 27
27 28 BI9
28 (−)
29
30 31
(+)
31 32 BI10
32 (−)
(+) 33
33 34 BI11
34 (−)
35
36
(+) 37
37 BI12
38 (−) 38
39 40
40 FG
Short wire
FG
Figure 6.5-11 The BI2A module and its frame ground screw
Note: The BI2A is earthed to the frame’s ground screw (FG) using a short wire.

- 586 -
CU
BU
6.5.6 Settings of binary input circuits in CU

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
For the standard type being furnished
s value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
BI1 BI1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary input enable Off
On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s On delay timer value 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Binary signal inversion Normal
…… …… …… …… ……

For the variable type being furnished

s value

Threshold through BI1 to BI3
THRES_Grp1 10 - 220 V Applicable only in BI-2 module and 75
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
…… …… …… …… ……


- 587 -
CU
BU
(ii) Setting table (IO_SLOT2) at IO#2 (Function ID: 200B02)

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1)

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2)

- 588 -
CU
BU
6.5.7 Data IDs of binary input circuits in CU

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI11 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI12 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI13 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI14 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI15 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI16 signal without filter
After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8001001110 BI1 BI1 signal with filter
8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter

- 589 -
CU
BU
The ends of binary input circuits

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8001001172 BI1-CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic
(ii) Data IDs table (IO_SLOT2) at IO#2 (Function ID: 200B02)

Before the filter
Table is the same as the table in previous section (i)-1.
After the filter



- 590 -
CU
BU
6.5.8 Settings of binary output circuits in CU

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Default setting
Units
value
BO1 BO1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary output enable Off

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Operation selection in Logic gate AND
TIMER-SW Off / Delay / Dwell / Latch - Selection of Logic circuit Off
Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell"
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
Reset signal (Data-ID from other FBs) - Reset signal selection for "Latch" circuit Not assigned
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Keying Data ID#2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

……. ……. ……. …….
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit

- 591 -
CU
BU
(ii) Setting table (IO_SLOT2) at IO#2 (Function ID: 200B02)

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i))

- 592 -
CU
BU
6.5.9 Data IDs of binary output circuits in CU

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the contact-driver
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8002001112 BO1 BO1 signal
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal
After the contact-driver

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal

- 593 -
CU
BU
Connection points for the PLC

310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic
31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic
(ii) Table (IO_SLOT2) at IO#2 (Function ID: 200B02)




- 594 -
CU
––––––––Power supply module (PWS)
BU
Power supply module (PWS)

The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters. The input
range rating of the PWS is 110 to 250 V DC.
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
substituted for actual slot location number.4
Upper block
is designated
“1 to 20” T*
PWS
*
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
4
9
10 FAIL15
11 3
12 Terminal screw
1
13 number
14 Terminal
15 screw
16 number
17 8
18
19 10
20 Lower block
is FAIL25 9
designated
“21 to 40” 7
21
22
23 Terminal screw
24 number
25 29
26 Positive(+) DC
30
27 /
28
29 Negative(−) 31 DC
30 32
31
35
32
33 36
Short wire 1 34 Short wire 1
35 E 37
36
37 38
38
Short-wire 2 39 Short wire 2
40
FG
FG
E3
Fram e earth Screw M5 screw for case earthing 3
Terminal and Earthing screws Schematic diagram
Figure 6.6-1 PWS terminal block (Rear view)
PWS consists of a pair of terminal blocks4 (which are labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”; a number replaces the asterisk “*” to designate the slot numbers.) The left of
Figure 6.6-1 shows the PWS terminal blocks, and the schematic figure for PWS is also shown
on the right.
Terminal screws No. 1 to 4 (FAIL1) and No. 7 to 10 (FAIL2) are provided to output the

- 595 -
CU
BU
failure results of the automatic supervision function5. Terminal screws No. 29(+) and 31(−) are
linked to the power supply. Other terminal screws No. 30(+) and 31(–) are also provided for the
power terminal and are used when bus distribution is required or when the safety
improvement of the cable capacity is required because the power cable is thin. Terminal screw
No. 38 and FG, by default, are linked with a short-wire and also terminal screw No. 35 and
terminal screw No. 37. The user should connect the IED case to the earth with the earth screw.
The other terminal screws are not used.
The actual terminal slot location is also found in external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical External connection)
Table 6.6-1 PWS specifications

Input voltage Voltage fluctuation
Description
rating6 permissible
Input voltage (110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc) is available
DC: 110 to 250V DC: 88 to 300V where the voltage varies in ±20% of the rated voltage
(110V× 80% to 250V×120%).
CAUTION
1Note: The connection (triplet lines) between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw
No. 37 is made with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. Read
Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test carefully and follow the instructions
during testing.
2Note: The connection (double lines) between terminal screw 38 and screw labeled “FG”
is made with a short-wire by the manufacturer.
3Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its cross-
section is AWG9 or larger.
4Note:The user can connect a cable to this terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence,
the recommended cables are AWG14 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI
2.5 -10 BU” ferrule for AWG14 when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by
PHOENIX CONTACT®.
5Note: The PWS module monitors DC voltages. The supervision function can issue a power
failure when the DC voltage is less than 85V (default threshold; for more
information about the failure, see Chapter Automatic supervision function). The
user can change the 85V threshold to 170V by inserting a shunt connecter (1-2) at
JP4 on the PWS module (see Figure 6.6-2).
6Note: IED (PWS module) can run on AC power supply (100–220Vac), but the operation is
not guaranteed. Power failure (error) is issued when the supervision function is not

- 596 -
CU
BU
disabled, if the IED runs on AC power supply for testing etc.
JP4 JP4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Setting to 170V (typical) Setting to 85V (typical)

(Position ‘1-2’) (Default position ‘2-3’)
Figure 6.6-2 Alarm threshold for DC voltage dropping on the PWS module

- 597 -
CU
––––––––Human Machine Interface (HMI)
BU
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

6.7.1 Outlook
Figure 6.7-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI). The HMI has a
screen (standard LCD†), LED indicators (#1– #26), L/R and other operation keys‡, function
keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB receptacle. The LCD can display
information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data, monitoring, fault records and
others. We shall see the menus on the display in section 6.12 later. A USB receptacle in B-type
is provided for the connection to the PC. Thus, the user can connect the engineering tools (GR-
TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®) with the IED using the USB receptacle.
LED indicators
LED#1
(#1–#26)
(In service)
Indicator label
LCD screen
Operation keys
L/R key with
Function keys
LEDs
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
Standard LCD screen
Menu screen
mode
MENU| MIMIC
key
Large LCD screen
Figure 6.7-1 HMI on front panel

†Note:The user can display system components or monitoring values. To design the
screen in MIMIC screen mode, see Appendix: Engineer exercise.
‡Note:L/R LEDs is blinking for four seconds when the IED is powered up; and then
afterward, LED#1(In service) is lit; menus are screened on the LCD.

- 598 -
CU
BU
6.7.2 LED Indicators

The LED indicators #1 and #2 are used to indicate the IED statuses. The others (#3 to #26) are
provided to indicate statuses, which the user wishes to check; the settings or by the PLC
function can control to indicate the statuses. The user can make a new indicator label using
the label maker of the GR-TIEMS®. (See Chapter Engineering tool)
The LED indicators‡ (#3 to #26) are also provided as user-programmable indicators.
Figure 6.7-2 shows the schematic diagrams. Each LED indicator can be lit and controlled using
a logic-gate-switch setting and others. For simplicity, we discuss setting the LED indicator #3
only, but the user can take account that setting the other LED indicators (#4 to #26) is the
same as the #3. Table 6.7-1 shows the LED indicator settings; Table 6.7-2 shows the signal
monitoring points on all LED indicator logics.
‡Note:Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in section 6.12.6.
(i) Selection of input signals

The LED indicator (#3) is lit by entering signals from other functions; eight ports are provided
for the entering signals, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user should ensure
one or more DataIDs are set for the input-signal1 to input-signal8. Entering signals are
designated using DataIDs, respectively; the user should set respective DataIDs for the settings
[Input signal1] to [Input signal8].
(ii) Logic gate switch

In the LED indicator logic #3 a logic scheme is provide for the eight entering signals; the
entering signals are grouped by the selection using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the
user should set either AND, OR or XOR.

- 599 -
CU
BU
LED-03
3100031001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
[LOGIC-SW] Dwell & Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-04
3100041001 LED indicator #4
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer]
& ≥1
[Input signal 2]
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1
[Input signal 3] & 0 t
&
≥1 OR 0.000-300.000s
[INVERSE-SW] Normal
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-26
31001A100
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #26
& ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 6.7-2 LED indicator logics (#3 to #26)
(iii) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

For the LED indicator logic #3 the user can use an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer; both
are used to adjust the timing for lighting the LED indicator #3. The user should set their
respective time values for settings [On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(iv) Logic level inversion

On the LED indicator logic #3 the entering signal is inverted by the logic inversion function;
inverting an entering signal is carried out when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. Set Normal for the scheme switch when logic inversion is not required.

- 600 -
CU
BU
(v) Logic timer switch

The LED indicator #3 can have programmable reset characteristics using scheme switch
[TIMER-SW]. Four types are available: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type, (3) latch type, and (4)
instantaneous type:
Instant type
When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set
Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator with a delayed characteristic, the user should
set Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires lighting the LED indicator as a one shot pulse, the user
should set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using
setting [Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value
in the setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other
hand, if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width
will be equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator to be removed by a reset signal, the user should
set Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW]; the user should set the Data ID of the reset signal
for setting [Reset signal]. Since lighting the LED indicator is cleared with the Data ID, the
user should determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the
signal monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
(vi) Selection of the LED color

For the LED indicator #3, color selection of either RED/GREEN/YELLOW is possible using the
setting [Color].

- 601 -
CU
BU
Table 6.7-1 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #26 (Function ID: 201B01))

Setting items Range Contents
s value
LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW - LED#3 color selection RED

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on LED#3 AND
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of LED#3 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on LED#3 Off
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#4 (No Assigned)
……….
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#26 (No Assigned)

- 602 -
CU
BU
Table 6.7-2 Signal monitoring points on all the LED indicators (Function ID: 201B01)
3100011001 IN SERV In service LED
3100021001 ERROR Error LED
3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3
31000A1001 LED-10 Output signal of the LED indicator #10
31000B1001 LED-11 Output signal of the LED indicator #11
31000C1001 LED-12 Output signal of the LED indicator #12
31000D1001 LED-13 Output signal of the LED indicator #13
31000E1001 LED-14 Output signal of the LED indicator #14
31000F1001 LED-15 Output signal of the LED indicator #15
31001A1001 LED-26 Output signal of the LED indicator #26

- 603 -
CU
BU
6.7.3 Function keys with LEDs

The function keys (F1 to F7) are provided to jump to other menus during the LCD operation;
the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 6.7-3). However, the user
can program the F1 to F7 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally,
the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user
presses the function key.
Table 6.7-3 Function keys and jump destinations (default)
Function LED lit when
Jump destination as default
Key# pressing
F1 Metering menu Yellow

F2 Fault Record menu Yellow
F3 Event Record1 menu Yellow
F6 Diagnostics menu Yellow
F7 (Not defined) Yellow
For testing, the user can also program to generate binary signals when the user presses
the F1 to F7 keys. The F1 to F7 circuits have LEDs; accordingly, the user can also program to
light the LEDs using the settings.
(i) Screen jump pressing the function key

The user can program the F1 to F7 keys as the user-preferred jump keys. For example, when
the user wishes to use the F1 key to jump to another screen, set Screen jump for scheme switch
[Function] in the F1 key (see Table 6.7-6). We shall see the setting in section 6.12.5(v).
(ii) Binary signal generated pressing the function key

When the user wishes to generate a binary signal upon occurrence of pressing the F1 key, set
Assign Signal for scheme switch [Function] in the F1 key. For instance, if the user wishes to
send a signal generated pressing F1 to the binary output circuit (BO1‡) at the IO#1 slot, set
the Data ID of “FUNC-KEY1(240001 310001730)” for the setting [Input signal 1] of the BO1‡
circuit. Note that the user should set On for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL] when the connection
is done using the setting [Input signal 1]. Figure 6.7-3 shows that a generate signal is outputted
at the FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL. Table 6.7-7 shows the other FUNC-KEY2 to 7 points. We shall
see the setting procedure in section 6.12.5(v)-2.

- 604 -
CU
BU
Function key logic for F1 Terminal and

(Function ID: 240001) BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“BO1”
Setting Data ID “F1 Signal designated by
SIGNAL” for the Signal to the
device
“FUNC-KEY1” [Input signal 1] [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
& ≥1
Pressing the F1 key (240001_ 3100001730)
[Input signal 3]
& “BO1-RB”
F1 [Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On
Off
&
(200B01_8002001113)
[Input signal 5]
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
“F1 SIGNAL”
Setting Data ID (240001_ 3100001737) PLC connection point in BO1
“BO1_SOURCE”
&
for the [Signal]† 200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
[Logic] Instant
Toggle
Figure 6.7-3 F1 key connected with the BO1‡

‡Note:The BO1 circuit is used just for an explanation; it is discussed in section 6.5.
†Note:When the user wishes to inject the signal at the PLC connection point of the “BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D at the IO#1 slot)”, the user should set the BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D) for the setting [Signal] of the F1 key. Then, set Off
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]
The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using scheme
switch [LOGIC], as shown in Table 6.7-4. Thus, the user can substitute “F1-SIGNAL (240001
310001737)” for the “FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL (240001 310001730)”, provided the Toggle mode
is preferred. In the Table 6.7-7 the other FUNC-KEY2 to FUNC-KEY7 are shown.
Table 6.7-4 Signal mode selection using setting [LOGIC]
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Pressing Key
Toggle
Binary signal
Pressing Key
Instant
Binary signal
(iii) Lighting LEDs on F1 to F7

Figure 6.7-4 shows the F1 to F7 LED logics. Programing to light the LEDs (F1 to F7) is the
same as the programing of the LED indicators (#3 to #26) (for the programming, see section
6.7.2). As a default, e.g., the “FUNC-KEY1 (240001 310001730)” is set for the setting [Input
signal 1] of the F1 LED logic. The LED-F2 to F7 points are listed in Table 6.7-8.

- 605 -
CU
BU
31001B1001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic
& ≥1
t 0 0 t LED-F1
[Input signal 1] DRIVER
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 31001C1001 F2 LED logic
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F2
DRIVER
& AND 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
[INVERSE-SW]
&
≥1 OR Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 3100211001 F7 LED logic

& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F7
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 6.7-4 LED logics on the function keys F1 to F7
Table 6.7-5 Settings of Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
Screen Jump / Assign Signal /

Function - Operation mode for the F1 key Screen Jump
No Assign
F1
Signal (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the input on F1 key (No Assigned)
Logic Instant / Toggle - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 Instant
No Assign
F2
……….
No Assign
F7

- 606 -
CU
BU
Table 6.7-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001)

s value
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F1. (No Assigned)
F1 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F1. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F1 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F1 0.00
……….

- 607 -
CU
BU
Table 6.7-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100001730 FUNC-KEY1 Signal generated directly when pressing F1
Table 6.7-8 Signal monitoring points for function LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
31001B1001 LED-F1 Signal generated during pressing the F1 key
31001C1001 LED-F2 Signal generated during pressing the F2 key
31001D1001 LED-F3 Signal generated during pressing the F3 key
31001E1001 LED-F4 Signal generated during pressing the F4 key
31001F1001 LED-F5 Signal generated during pressing the F5 key
3100201001 LED-F6 Signal generated during pressing the F6 key
3100211001 LED-F7 Signal generated during pressing the F7 key

- 608 -
CU
BU
6.7.4 Monitoring jacks

A monitoring jack including a LED is provided so that the user can monitor a binary signal on
the logic straightforwardly. For example, when the user wishes to monitor the operating state
of a relay function, set the signal number (Data ID) that the user wishes to monitor; then the
user can see lighting the LED when the relay is operated. Using with an oscilloscope, the user
can also observe the binary signal that comes from the monitoring jack; three monitoring jacks
(Term A, B, and C) are available on the front panel.
Table 6.7-9 Output terminals for signal monitoring (No default setting)
Jack Jack name LED Color Remarks
A Term A Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number

B Term B Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
C Term C Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
When the user wishes to test the phase-A element the OC1 relay using an oscilloscope,
for example, set the phase-A monitoring point (44001 8000011C20†) for the setting [Term A],
as shown in Figure 6.7-5. Consequently, the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at
the Term A. The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal. The user can use
to monitor the phase-B and phase-C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the [Term
B] and [Term C]. We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in section 6.12.8(v).
OC function
(Function ID: 440001) Monitoring jack (Function ID: 201301) Jacks and LEDs
setting [Term A] DRIVER Term Signal to the
440001 8000011C20
A oscilloscope
A
OC1 440001 8100011C21
B “TEST-A”
440001 8200011C22 (201B01_3100221001)
C
Term A LED
setting [Term B] DRIVER Term Signal to the
B oscilloscope
“TEST-B”
(201B01_3100231001)
Term B LED
setting [Term C] DRIVER Term Signal to the
C oscilloscope
“TEST-C”
(201B01_3100241001)
Term C LED
Figure 6.7-5 Monitoring logics A, B and C

†Note:The monitoring point is just selected for the explanation; the user can select a
monitoring point from the relay applications and the general control functions.
The monitoring points is listed as PLC monitoring points in each function.

- 609 -
CU
BU
Table 6.7-10 Settings of Monitoring jacks (Function ID: 201301)

s value
Term A (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned)
Term B (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned)
Term C (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term C (No Assigned)
Table 6.7-11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100221001 TEST-A TEST-A
3100231001 TEST-B TEST-B
3100241001 TEST-C TEST-C

- 610 -
CU
BU
6.7.5 Operation keys

(i) L/R key
The IED has two LEDs on L/R key; either LEDs is lit in response to a local mode or a remote
mode. Lighting the LED is instructed by the LOCRMT function. Table 6.7-12 shows the signal
monitoring points on the L/R LEDs.
Table 6.7-12 Signal monitoring points for L/R LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100251001 LOC LED Local
3100261001 REM LED Remote
(ii) Operation keys (except L/R key)

Like in the function keys (F1 to F7), the operation keys can provide signals when pressing the
keys; the user can monitor the signals at the signal monitoring points in Table 6.7-13.
Table 6.7-13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL
31000E1730 CLEAR Key situation of CLEAR
31000D1730 CLOSE Key situation of CLOSE
31000F1730 DOWN Key situation of DOWN
3100071730 ENTER Key situation of ENTER
3100091730 HELP Key situation of HELP
3100111730 LEFT Key situation of LEFT
31000A1730 LOC/REM Key situation of LOC/REM
31000C1730 OPEN Key situation of OPEN
3100121730 RIGHT Key situation of RIGHT
3100101730 UP Key situation of UP
(iii) MIMIC key

When the large LCD is mounted on the front panel, user can change the LCD screen for MIMIC
graphic mode by pressing MENU|MIMIC key. To return menu screen, press this key again.

- 611 -
CU
––––––––Clock function (Date and time)
BU
Clock function (Date and time)

Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence
of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of
the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the
UTC is selected; the clock can run in accordance with the user’s time zone and summer
time(DST)† by referring the UTC when the time zone and the DST are set. The explanation is
also found in section 6.12.7.
†Note:In other words, it is called “daylight saving time (DST)”. For setting, see section
6.8.5.
‡Note:For example, the Internet and World Wide Web standards run in the UTC. For
more information, see section 6.8.4.
6.8.1 Clock setting

The user can set the time using the time sub-menu as shown in Figure 6.8-1. The user also can
set the time using the GR-TIEMS†.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 6.8-1 Time sub-menu in Clock menu

†Note:Make the calibration the when the clock is set using the GR-TIMES. This is
because the transmission time is required from the PC to the IED.
6.8.2 Selection of date and time formats

The user can select user-preferred date/time format; setting [Data_fmt] is provided for the
selection of the format. For example, ‘March 24th 2014 10:48’ can be displayed when the format
“DDMMYYYY” is selected.
 “2014-03-24 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “YYYYMMDD”.
 “03-24-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “MMDDYYYY”.
 “24-03-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “DDMMYYYY”.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 6.8-2 Setting screen of Display format

- 612 -
CU
BU
6.8.3 Time Synchronization

The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective
IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting
[Time_Sync_Src]:
 SNTP method
 IRIG-B method
 Binary Input (BI) method
(i) Synchronization using SNTP

Example of SNTP synchronization
The SNTP method is possible when IEDs connect with time-servers. Figure 6.8-3 exemplifies
two servers are connected with the IEDs using the LAN.
Time server1 Time server2
LAN
………….
IED_1 IED_2 IED_n
Figure 6.8-3 Two time servers connected on the LAN
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set SNTP for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [SNTP].
2) Set the address of a time server using settings [Server1]. The settings [Server2],
[Server3], and [Server4] are provided for other time-servers.
3) Check that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 6.8-4.
4) Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly (see 6.8.4 and 6.8.5).
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] > Check “SNTP” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
SNTP
Figure 6.8-4 Time setting for SNTP

Table 6.8-1 Settings for the SNTP synchronization
Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method SNTP
SNTP Off /On Operation of SNTP ()On
Server1 000.000.000.000–255.255.255.255 Setting for Time server 1 197.1.23.11

- 613 -
CU
BU
(ii) Synchronization using IRIG-B

Example of IRIG-B synchronization
The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is provided.
The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†.
IED
IRIG-B000†
Clock
10:00 1/2
Signal [Time] +
A1 2012-11-21 10:00:05
IRIG-B signal
[Format]
generator Unit GND
A3 YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
IRIG-B
Figure 6.8-5 IED connected with the signal generator unit using IRIG-B000 module
†Note:See Section 6.3.2.
Setting procedure
1) Set IRIG-B for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [IRIG-SYNC].
2) Check that the IRIG-B is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 6.8-6.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
Check “IRIG-B” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
IRIG-B
Figure 6.8-6 Time setting for IRIG-B
Setting year in IRIG-B

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the IEEE C37.118 / IRIG-B000 format, the user should
set On for setting [USE_BCDYEAR]. Conversely, when the IRIG-B data with absence the
C37.118† is generated, Off should be set for the setting [USE_BCDYEAR].
†Note: “Year” is informed from the IED clock itself when the C37.118 is absent.
Setting UTC/local time

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the UTC†, set Off for the setting [USE_LOCALTIME].
Conversely, when the IRIG-B data is generated in the local time‡, set On for setting
[USE_LOCALTIME]; set Off for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
†Note:We shall see the settings of the UTS in section 6.8.4.
‡Note:In the IRIG-B signal generator unit, the DST settings should be corresponded to
the DST settings of the IED. We shall see the DST settings in section 6.8.5.

- 614 -
CU
BU
Table 6.8-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization

Setting
example
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method IRIG-B
IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B On
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On Operation in the local time Off
(iii) Synchronization using BI signal

When accurate1Hz square-wave can be supplied as a reference clock, the clock function can
make the time synchronization. The 1Hz square-wave is transferred using a binary input
circuit (BI).
Example of time synchronization via BI circuit

Figure 6.8-7 exemplifies that the 1Hz square-wave is provided via the BI1 circuit†.
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 6.8-7 IED connected with the signal generator via BI module
†Note:The BI1 circuit is just used for the explanation; hence, an actual BI circuit should
be selected in accordance with wiring cables. For more information of the BI
circuit, see section 6.5.

- 615 -
CU
BU
Setting procedure
1) Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC].
2) Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 6.8-8.
3) Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID]. For example, as shown in the Figure 6.8-7, when
the user wishes to inject the signal at the BI1 on the IO#1 slot, the user should set
BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID].
4) Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g., −0.050s)
for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should be
synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the
operating time on the BI circuit.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
BI
Check “BI ” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 6.8-8 Time setting for BI
Table 6.8-3 Setting items for the BI Time synchronization

Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method BI
BI-SYNC Off /On Operation of BI On
BI_ID [Preferred ID] Signal monitoring point 200B01 8001001111
Time adjust factor (in −：Leading the clock
SYNC ADJ −0.050 to +0.050 0.000
sec.) +：Delaying the clock

- 616 -
CU
BU
6.8.4 Setting time zone

When the clock should run in the UTC, the user should set On for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
Additionally, the user should set the time zone† when the time should be displayed in the Local
standard time. The time zone is divided in every 15 minutes; the user can set it using 0.25
units (i.e., 15 min = 0.25 unit). For example, if the IED is used in Venezuela (UTC-04:30), the
user should set “−4.50” for the setting, as shown Figure 6.8-9.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
-4.50hour
Figure 6.8-9 Setting screen of Time zone

Table 6.8-4 Example time offsets and locations
Time offset† Example locations
UTC−10:00 United States (Hawaii)
UTC−09:00 United States (Anchorage)
UTC−08:00 United States (PST)
UTC−06:00 Canada , Costa Rica, El Salvador, Ecuador, Mexico, United States (CST)
UTC−05:00 Brazil (Acre), Colombia, Cuba, Jamaica, Panama, Peru, United States (EST)
UTC−04:30 Venezuela
UTC−04:00 Bolivia, Brazil, Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico, Barbados
UTC−03:00 Argentina, Brazil (Bahia, Pernambuco), Chile
UTC−02:00 Brazil (Fernando de Noronha)
UTC±00:00 United kingdom, Iceland, Ireland, Senegal, Saint Helena, Mali
UTC+01:00 Germany, Hungary, Italy, France, Montenegro
UTC+02:00 Egypt, Estonia, Finland, Slovenia, Greece
UTC+03:00 Ethiopia, Iraq, Kenya, Madagascar, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Turkey
UTC+04:00 Armenia, Azerbaijan, Oman, Seychelles, United Arab Emirates
UTC+05:00 Pakistan
UTC+05:30 India, Sri Lanka
UTC+06:00 Bangladesh, Bhutan, Kazakhstan
UTC+06:30 Myanmar
UTC+07:00 Western Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos
UTC+08:00 China, Malaysia, Philippines, Australia (Western Australia), Mongolia
UTC+09:00 Japan, South Korea
UTC+10:00 Australia (Queensland)
UTC+12:00 New Zealand
†Note:Time zone is expressed in the difference between UTC and the local standard time
(wintertime).
Table 6.8-5 Setting time zone

Setting
example
IS_UTC_base On / Off Selection of either the UTC or the local time On

- 617 -
CU
BU
6.8.5 DST setting (Summer time setting)

When the summer time (DST) is applied, the user should set the beginning and the ending
dates of the DST in the clock function. The user should set On for the setting [Summer time]
for DST.
Note: The clock function is not designed for particular DSTs such as they are depending
on the religious events and the astronomy.
(i) DST set by the day (Mon to Sun) of week

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fifth week in March and it
ends at 2:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fourth week in October, the user has the following settings.
Note that transposing the calendar is required, as shown in Figure 6.8-10; accordingly the first
of the month is located at the first row and the first column of the transposed calendar.
Beginning of the DST at 01:00 a.m. in Mar. 29 E nding of the DST at 02:00 a.m. in Oct. 25
March October
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30
30 31
Transposed Transposed
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 5 for the [Start_Week] Setting 4 for the [End_Week]
Setting Sun for the [Start_Wday] Setting Sun for the [End_Wday]
Setting 1 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 2 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 6.8-10 DST setting examples by the day of week
(ii) DST set by the day (1st or 15th) of month

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 p.m. on the first day in March and it ends at 3:00
p.m. on the middle day in October; the user has the following settings.

- 618 -
CU
BU
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Beginning of the DST E nding of the DST

at 01:00 p.m. in Mar. 1 at 03:00 p.m. in Oct. 15
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 1 for the [Start_Week] Setting 3 for the [End_Week]
Setting – for the [Start_Wday] Setting – for the [End_Wday]
Setting 13 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 15 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 6.8-11 DST setting examples by the day (1st or 15th) of month
(iii) Time shift

After setting the DST, the clock is forwarded by 1 hour at the DST start; the clock is backed by
1 hour at the DST end.
Table 6.8-6 DST settings
Setting
example
Summer time On / Off Enabling DST operation On
Start_Month 1 to 12 Set the beginning of DST in the month 3
Start_Week 1 to 5 Set the beginning of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
Start_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the beginning of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
Start_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 1
End_Month 1 to 12 Set the end of DST in the month 10
End_Week 1 to 5 Set the end of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
End_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the end of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
End_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 2

- 619 -
CU
BU
6.8.6 Setting
Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301)
s value
Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00
--- / SNTP / BI /
TimeSyncSrc - Time sync source SNTP
MODBUS / IRIG-B
YYYYMMDD /
Date_fmt MMDDYYYY / - YMD/MDY/DMY YYYYMMDD
DDMMYYYY
Date_delimiter -///. - - or / or . -
Time_delimiter :/. - : or period :
Sec_delimiter ./, - . or , .
SummerTime Off / On - Summer time enable Off
IS_UTC_base Off / On - Is setting value base on UTC? On
Start_Month 1 - 12 - Start month 3
Start_Week 1-5 - Start week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
Start_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - Start day of week Sun.
Sat.
Start_Hour 0 - 23 - Start hour 1
End_Month 1 - 12 - End month 10
End_Week 1-5 - End week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
End_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - End day of week Sun.
Sat.
End_Hour 0 - 23 - End hour 1
Setting of SNTP_SYNC (Function ID: 200A01)

s value
SNTP Off / On - Enabling SNTP synchronization On
Server1 0 - 255 - IP address#1 0. 0. 0. 0
Setting of BI_SYNC (Function ID: 202001)

s value
BI SYNC Off / On - BI sync switch Off
BI_ID [Preferred ID] - Source BI Data ID
SYNC ADJ -0.050 to 0.050 s Time adjust factor 0.000
Setting of IRIG_SYNC (Function ID: 202101)

s value
IRIG SYNC Off / On - IRIGB sync switch Off
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On - Use BCD year code Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On - Use local time Off

- 620 -
CU
––––––––Grouping relay settings (Group1–8)
BU
Grouping relay settings (Group1–8)

As shown in Figure 6.9-1, protection functions (i.e., DIF settings, FS settings, etc.) are
segmented into eight groups, and different setting values of the relays can be set as per
circumstances such as operation conditions and others. Note that changing the group cannot
be not carried out instantly.
Settings
Protection (Relay)
Group1 setting
DIF
FS CBF
COMTP
EFP
EF
Group2 setting
DIF OC DIF
FS EF CBF
OV FS
UV COMTP
THM EFP
TRC EF
Group8 setting
DIF OC DIF
FS EF CBF
OV FS
UV COMTP
THM EFP
TRC EF
Figure 6.9-1 Eight groups for CU relay settings
(i) Changing group number by menu operation

The user can change the group number using the menu† on the IED screen. See section
6.12.5(iv).
(ii) Changing group number by user-programming

Another changing method is provided by programing PLC logics (For more information about
PLC programing, see the Chapter PLC function.) Figure 6.9-2 exemplifies a PLC logic:
changing group2 from group1 is performed while BI1 circuit is energized. The group setting
function “Setting (Function ID 201400)” has a signal reception point ‘PLC_Group_ENUM’ in
UNIT type; thus changing the group is performed when either numbers (1 to 8) enters at the
signal reception point. The example logic, designed for changing to group2 from group1,

- 621 -
CU
BU
consists of a binary input circuit (BI1), a number generation function (‘Binary selection’
provided in basic functions of the PLC editor), and the signal reception point. That is, when
the B1 switch is closed, a signal enters the BI1 circuit and is carried to the Binary selection;
accordingly the Binary selection, which is programmed to generate a group number ‘2’ in UNIT
when signal ‘1’ is injected in BOOL(BIT), can generates and inject the group number ‘2’ at the
‘PLC_Group_ENUM’. Consequently, the Setting function (201400) starts change the group
from number ‘1’ to ‘2’. Note that changing is only performed during the BI1 is closed in the
example logic; hence, the setting number goes back to ‘1’ when the BI1 is open.
GR200 IED
Binary selection
(+) (–)
IO_SLOT1 (200B01)
BI1 8001001110 Entering → Leaving 201400 314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Operation of
BI1 changing
‘1’ in BOOL ‘2’ in UNIT
‘0’ in BOOL ‘1’ in UNIT
BI2 8101011110
BI2
PLC basic-function PLC basic-function A group number enters

Binary input circuits BI1 and BI2
(Flip-Flop) (SEL) to “Setting function (FunctionID: 201400)”
at IO#1 (IO_SLOT1)
2 3
2
SEL DOUT_UNIT
1
DIN_BOOL RS
Unit#16#201400 FID ST
DO Q1 G
FID SET Unit#16#31 DTYPE
RESET1 Unit#16#1 IN0 Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DTYPE ST
IN1 DI
DID Unit#16#2
1
DIN_BOOL
FID DO
DTYPE ST
DID
Figure 6.9-2 Example for changing a group setting4

1Note: Function block for the binary input circuit (Binary input FB) is provided in User
library of PLC editor. See the Chapter PLC editing in Basic manual
“Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor” attached the PLC software.
2Note: The SEL and Flip flop functions are the basic functions of PLC. In the logic, when
signal ‘1’ enters the SEL function, value ‘2’ is generated. For more information, see
the help menu on the PLC editor.
3Note: For your reference, changing to group3 is performed when value ‘3’ enters. In
other words, values ‘1’ to ‘8’ correspond to ‘group1’ to ‘group8’, respectively.
4Note: This example is designed to change ‘group1’ to ‘group2’ or ‘group2’ to ‘group1’.
Figure 6.9-3 exemplifies that selecting a group among eight groups is required by the
usage of three BI circuits (i.e., Group 1→Group2, Group3,… Group8).

- 622 -
CU
BU
Binary input circuits BI1 to BI3 A group number enters

at IO#3 (IO_SLOT1) PLC basic-function PLC basic-function
to “Setting function
(Ondelay) (SEL)
(Function ID: 201400)”
BI3_1
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01001111 Delay time# PT ET
DID ADD
XX ms
BI3_2
DIN_BOOL TON DOUT_UNIT_1
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT MUL
DOUT_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST Unit#16#201400 FID ST
Delay time# PT ET
UDINT#16#01011111 DID UDINT#16#2 Unit#16#31 DTYPE
XX ms
Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DI
BI3_3
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 ADD ADD
FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
MUL
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01021111 DID Delay time# PT ET
XX ms UDINT#16#4
UDINT#16#1
Figure 6.9-3 Logic for changing a group setting
(iii) Setting
Setting_PF (Function ID: 201400)
Un Default setting
its value
Active Group 1 to 8 – Selection of a setting group number 1
(iv) Data ID
 Connection point on PLC logic
314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Reception for setting group number

3200001001 ACT_GRP
3010011001 COM_CHG
3010031001 CTRL_CHG
3010021001 PRO_CHG
3010001001 SYS_CHG

- 623 -
CU
Chapter 6.10: Technical description (CU)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Recording function
The recording function consists of three recording features: (1) Fault recorder, (2) Event
recorder, and (3) Disturbance recorder. The fault recorder collects the information about the
power system quantities when a fault occurs. The event recorder groups state information
when the changes are detected. The disturbance recorder is designed to memory the various
quantities—numerical analog data and logic data (binary data)—from the monitoring function
and the BIO modules; it is possible to analyze the disturbance using the engineering tool (GR-
TIMES), which can draw several chronological waves.
6.10.1 Fault recorder

During the fault, the fault recorder can memorize reasons by equipment failures/operation
states, system information etc. It commences by injecting a signal coming from the TRC alarm-
signal generation logic in the BU, but is also started by a trigger provided by the PLC function.
The fault recorder captures the following items for each fault:
 Date and time at the fault
 Tripped phase information
 Operating mode information
 Fault and pre-fault quantities

- 624 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) Fault quantities and pre-fault-quantities

Quantities that amplitude and phase angle of voltage and current—are memorized in the fault
recorder, as shown in Table 6.10-1. Items, pre-fault quantities just before a fault (i.e., tripping),
are also captured and memorized. Default 10 seconds has been set for setting [Pre-Fault time],
but it is possible to change it to memory the times longer.
Table 6.10-1 Recording quantities at a fault ant before the fault
Abbreviations Displayed quantities
Ida, Idb, Idc for DIFCH
IdaA, IdbA, IdcA for DIFZA Magnitude of phase differential current (Id) for Check-zone-
IdaB, IdbB, IdcB for DIFZB protection (DIFCH) and Discriminating-zone-protection (DIFZA to
to DIFZH)
IdaH, IdbH, IdcH for DIFZH
Ira, Irb, Irc for DIFCH
IraA, IrbA, IrcA for DIFZA

Magnitude of restraint current (Ir) for Check-zone-protection
IraB, IrbB, IrcB for DIFZB
(DIFCH) and Discriminating-zone-protection (DIFZA to DIFZH)
to
IraH, IrbH, IrcH for DIFZH
VaA, VbA, VcA for DIFZA
VaB, VbB, VcB for DIFZB Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (V) for Discriminating-
to zone-protection (DIFZA to DIFZH)†
VaH, VbH, VcH for DIFZH
V1A, V2A, V0A for DIFZA

Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1,
V1B, V2B, V0B for DIFZB
V2, and V0) for Check-zone-protection (DIFCH) and Discriminating-
to
zone-protection (DIFZA to DIFZH)†
V1H, V2H, V0H for DIFZH
Magnitude and phase angle of phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic) for each bay
Ia, Ib, Ic
unit (BU)
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component currents (I1,

I1, I2, I0
I2, I0) for each bay unit (BU)
†‘32’ software model—shown with ordering codes at G&T position—is able to record
those quantities. See Appendix: Ordering.
The fault recorder can cyclically memory past eight faults; the oldest memory will be
erased cyclically if another fault occurs. The memorized information has 1ms accuracy. If a
fault occurs, the fault recorder is directed to operate to memory operating modes etc. about the
fault.

- 625 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Date and time at fault

The date and time at the fault is recorded. The date and time information is provided by the
clock function (see section 6.8).
(iii) Tripped phase information

Information about tripped phases (i.e., faulted phases) are recorded using the recording
identifiers (‘OPT-PHASE-A,B,C, and -N’ signals), which the TRC function provides.
(iv) Mode information

At the occurrence of a fault, the protection functions gives the fault recorder the reasons of
tripping; the reasons are brought using operation identifiers† and logical signals‡. The fault
recorder can have up to 192 of all identifiers and signals in the IED. The operation identifiers
are chosen using the settings [OP Mode ID1] to [OP Mode ID128]. The settings [OP Mode
ID201] to [OP Mode ID264] are used for general purposes to record the logical signals.
†Note:A number of the operation identifiers are provided from the BUs through the
communication function (DBP_COMRCV_CU (Function ID: 4F2A01)).
‡Note:64 logical signals are selectable for recording. For example in this purpose, the
user may choose an operation signal on the circuits of the BIO modules (BIOs).
(v) Screen information

Figure 6.10-1 illustrates the information displayed on the IED screen†, which can display up
to eight fault records (#1 to #8). Figure 6.10-2 illustrates the structure of the first fault record#1.
The line○
c indicates the tripped phase. The lines○
d show how tripping occurred. The lines○
e
have the information about evolving faults, which is able to memory up to 32 developing faults.
Quantitates when the fault occurred are shown below messages○ g .
f ○
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/1348
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 DIF
#3 2012/07/21 > 2012-07-25
13:11:29.621 10:48:22.421
List of fault records (#1 to #8) Details of #1 information
Figure 6.10-1 Information of the fault recorder displayed on the IED screen
†Note:For more screen information, see section 6.12.3.

- 626 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Fault Record#1 ○
a Record Number (#1)
11:12 1/222
2012-07-25 ○
b Date and Time at Fault (YYYY-MM-DD)
10:48:21.223
Phase AB ○
c Tripped phase information
DIF ○
d Mode information
2012-07-25 ○
e Detail information about evolving faults
Screen scroll down 10:48:22.421
DIF, CBF-RE
2012-07-25
10:48:22.835
DIF, CBF-RE, CBF
Fault values ○
f Fault quantities
Ida
1234.56kA
Idb
1234.56kA
Idc
1234.56kA
PreFault values ○
g Pre-fault quantities
Ida
1234.56kA
Idb
1234.56kA
Idc
1234.56kA
Figure 6.10-2 Screen structure about the information #1
(vi) Operation identifiers (ID1–ID128)

The user can select the operation identifies arbitrarily using the settings [OP Mode ID1] etc.
For example, when the operation result with regard to the overcurrent relay element (i.e., OC1
in each BU) shall be recorded, choose the logic-ORed signal ‘4F2A01 8500011B65” and set it
for the [OP Mode ID1]. Remember to program the displaying name using the setting [OP Mode
Name1] (e.g., “OC1”). Note that the length of the displaying name should be less than 18 letters.
The user should find blanks in the setting list, because several IDs have been already set.
(vii) Logical signals (ID201–ID264)

Wishing to record a logical level ‘1 (TRUE)’ or ‘0 (FALSE)’ on the circuits, the user can pick the
logical signal using settings the [OP Mode ID265] etc. For example, the user wishes to record
the output level of the binary output circuit#1 (BO1) at the IO#1 slot, set its PLC monitoring
point ‘200B01 8002001112’ for the setting [OP Mode ID265]; set the displaying name using the
[OP Mode Name265].
(viii) Additional triggers for the recording

Wishing to start the fault recorder except for the trip instruction, the user can use the PLC
connection points ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1’ to ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4’, respectively.

- 627 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ix) Time setting for Pre-fault

The instant before the trip is programmable using the setting [Pre-Fault Time] among 10s, 50s,
100s, 200s, 300s.
(x) Unit setting for the quantities

To change the units of power quantities, go to the metering function discussed in Section 6.11.

- 628 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 6.10-2 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in the CU

Settings in Fault recorder Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Actual PLC connection points
Data IDs Screen names Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID1] 4F2A01 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name1] DIF ORed DIF-TRIP of all BUs [OP Mode ID97] Not assigned [OP Mode Name97] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID2] 4F2A01 8000021B60 [OP Mode Name2] DIF-TR ORed DIF-TR of all BUs [OP Mode ID98] Not assigned [OP Mode Name98] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID3] 4F2A01 8100011B61 [OP Mode Name3] CBF-RE ORed CBF-RE.OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] 4F2A01 8200011B62 [OP Mode Name4] CBF ORed CBF-OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] 4F2A01 8200021B62 [OP Mode Name5] CBF-TR ORed CBF-TR of all BUs [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID6] 4F2A01 8400011B64 [OP Mode Name6] EFP ORed EFP-OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID102] Not assigned [OP Mode Name102] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID7] 4F2A01 8400021B64 [OP Mode Name7] EFP-TR ORed EFP-TR of all BUs [OP Mode ID103] Not assigned [OP Mode Name103] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID8] 4F2A01 8300011B63 [OP Mode Name8] COM ORed COM-OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID104] Not assigned [OP Mode Name104] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID9] 4F2A01 8300021B63 [OP Mode Name9] COM-TR ORed COM-TR of all BUs [OP Mode ID105] Not assigned [OP Mode Name105] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID10] 4F2A01 8500011B65 [OP Mode Name10] OC1 ORed OC1-OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID106] Not assigned [OP Mode Name106] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID11] 4F2A01 8600011B66 [OP Mode Name11] OC2 ORed OC2-OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID107] Not assigned [OP Mode Name107] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID12] 4F2A01 8700011B67 [OP Mode Name12] EF1 ORed EF1-OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID108] Not assigned [OP Mode Name108] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID13] 4F2A01 8800011B68 [OP Mode Name13] EF2 ORed EF2-OPT of all BUs [OP Mode ID109] Not assigned [OP Mode Name109] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID14] Not assigned [OP Mode Name14] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID110] Not assigned [OP Mode Name110] - Not assigned

- 629 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
6.10.2 Event recorder

Signals are generated in the logics of BIO modules etc. in the IED. The event recorder can
memory the generated signals as events. To operate the event recorder, the user should pick a
preferred signal as a trigger of the event recorder; the event recorder can have 768 triggers,
some of which have been set as a default. The user can group the triggers into three categories;
consequently, it is possible that a number of the events are divided depending on the degree of
the errors, the meaning of the operations, and the signals of relay elements, etc. The user can
also program how an event is to be detected. An event is recorded with millisecond accuracy.
The information are memorized until the number of the events reaching 1024; the oldest event
will be deleted when a new event appears.
(i) Trigger signals

The event is memorized when the event recorder detects changing the trigger signal that is
connected with the logic signal; they are defined using settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID768].
Settings [End of E.Record-1] and [End of E.Record-2] are provided for grouping†; the user can
adjust the size of the ‘Event Record1’ group using the [End of E.Record-1]. The next ‘Event
Record2’ group is set with the [End of E.Record-2]. The remains are set for the ‘Event Record3’
group. Remember that the [Trigger ID1] etc. are required to set together with the [Event
Name1] etc.; user’s preferred names should be less than 18 letters.
July 25, 2012 July 26, 2012
10:31:12 Deleting the fault record 12:34:51 Deleting the fault record
Setting [End of E.Record-1] = 256
Setting [End of E.Record-2] = 512 10:56:12 Changing system setting
Pulse train
3000001001
FR_CLR List of ‘Event record1’
FAULT RECORD (200602)
Event #3
On 2012-07-25 10:31:12
Event #3 F.Record clear ‘On’
Setting [Trigger ID14] = 200602 3000001001

Setting [Trigger Mode14] = On
Setting [Event Name14] = F.Record clear
Event #2
3010001001
Active group Active group
2012-07-25 10:56:12
SYS_CHG Set group change
‘3’ Changed to ‘4’
Setting_PF (201400)
Event #2
Setting [Trigger ID7] = 201400 3010001001 Event #1

Setting [Trigger Mode7] = Change On 2012-07-26 12:34:51
Setting [Event Name7] = Set group change
Event #1 F.Record clear ‘On’
Figure 6.10-3 Relation between function signals and triggers for Event record1
Figure 6.10-3 illustrates signals connected with triggers in the event recorder. For
example, ‘SYS_CHG’ is connected with trigger#7 using the [Trigger ID7] and ‘FR_CLR’ is

- 630 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
connected with trigger#14 using the [Trigger ID14]. Note that the both triggers (#7 and #14)
are smaller than the setting [End of E.Record-1]=256; hence, the both are listed in the ‘Event
recored1’ list. Keep in mind that the event names are set by the [Event Name7] and [Event
Name14]. All ones are tabulated in Table 6.10-3 to Table 6.10-5.
†Note:The GR-TIEMS uses terms ‘Level1’, ‘Level2’, and ‘Level3’ to represent the ‘Event
Record1’, ‘Event Record2’, and ‘Event Record3’. The scope of each level is the same
as the scope of each group. The GR-TIEMS does not show unused triggers and
Trigger ID numbers automatically when the triggers are displayed on the screen.

- 631 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 6.10-3 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 in CU

Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names
[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID181] 4F4001 8000001B63 On-Off BU4-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID2] 220001 3110211001 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID92] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID182] 4F4001 8000001B64 On-Off BU5-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID183] 4F4001 8000001B65 On-Off BU6-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID6] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID96] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID186] 4F4001 8000001B68 On-Off BU9-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] 4F4001 8000001B69 On-Off BU10-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] 4F4001 8000001B6A On-Off BU11-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] 4F4001 8000001B6B On-Off BU12-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] 4F4001 8000001B6C On-Off BU13-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] 4F4001 8000001B6D On-Off BU14-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID12] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID102] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID192] 4F4001 8000001B6E On-Off BU15-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID13] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID103] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID193] 4F4001 8000001B6F On-Off BU16-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID14] 200602 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] 4F4001 8000001B70 On-Off BU17-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID15] 200710 3001001001 On E.Record1 clear [Trigger ID105] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID195] 4F4001 8000001B71 On-Off BU18-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID18] 200401 30A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] 4F4001 8000001B74 On-Off BU21-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID24] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID114] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID204] 4F4001 8000001B7A On-Off BU27-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID25] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID115] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID205] 4F4001 8000001B7B On-Off BU28-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID26] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID116] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID206] 4F4001 8000001B7C On-Off BU29-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID27] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID117] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID207] 4F4001 8000001B7D On-Off BU30-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID39] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID129] 4F2A01 8000011B60 On-Off DIF [Trigger ID219] 4F4001 8000001B89 On-Off BU42-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID40] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID130] 4F2A01 8000021B60 On-Off DIF-TR [Trigger ID220] 4F4001 8000001B8A On-Off BU43-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID41] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID131] 4F2A01 8100011B61 On-Off CBF-RE [Trigger ID221] 4F4001 8000001B8B On-Off BU44-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID42] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID132] 4F2A01 8200011B62 On-Off CBF [Trigger ID222] 4F4001 8000001B8C On-Off BU45-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID43] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID133] 4F2A01 8200021B62 On-Off CBF-TR [Trigger ID223] 4F4001 8000001B8D On-Off BU46-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID44] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID134] 4F2A01 8400011B64 On-Off EFP [Trigger ID224] 4F4001 8000001B8E On-Off BU47-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID45] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID135] 4F2A01 8400021B64 On-Off EFP-TR [Trigger ID225] 4F4001 8000001B8F On-Off BU48-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID46] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID136] 4F2A01 8300011B63 On-Off COM [Trigger ID226] 4F4001 8000001B90 On-Off BU49-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID47] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID137] 4F2A01 8300021B63 On-Off COM-TR [Trigger ID227] 4F4001 8000001B91 On-Off BU50-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID48] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID138] 4F2A01 8500011B65 On-Off OC1 [Trigger ID228] 4F4001 8000001B92 On-Off BU51-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID49] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID139] 4F2A01 8600011B66 On-Off OC2 [Trigger ID229] 4F4001 8000001B93 On-Off BU52-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID50] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID140] 4F2A01 8700011B67 On-Off EF1 [Trigger ID230] 4F4001 8000001B94 On-Off BU53-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID51] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID141] 4F2A01 8800011B68 On-Off EF2 [Trigger ID231] 4F4001 8000001B95 On-Off BU54-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID56] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID146] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID236] 4F4001 8000001B9A On-Off BU59-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID57] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID147] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID237] 4F4001 8000001B9B On-Off BU60-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID58] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID148] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID238] 4F4001 8000001B9C On-Off BU61-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID59] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID149] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID239] 4F4001 8000001B9D On-Off BU62-EXCLUSION
[Trigger ID62] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID152] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID242] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID67] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID157] 4F2A01 8B00011B6B On-Off GEN.TRIP [Trigger ID247] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID69] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID159] 4F2A01 8000031B60 On-Off OPT.PHASE-A [Trigger ID249] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID70] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID160] 4F2A01 8000031B61 On-Off OPT.PHASE-B [Trigger ID250] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID161] 4F2A01 8000031B62 On-Off OPT.PHASE-C [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID77] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID167] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID87] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID177] 4F0101 8000001B60 On-Off BusBar Bridge
[Trigger ID88] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID178] 4F4001 8000001B60 On-Off BU1-EXCLUSION

- 632 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 6.10-4 Event2 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record-2]=512
[Trigger ID266] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID356] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID446] 530001 3109001001 Change R/L Key
[Trigger ID283] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID373] 528001 3107011EA1 On LED RST [Trigger ID463] (Not Assigned) Off -

- 633 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 6.10-5 Event3 group set with [End of E.Record-2]=512


- 634 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Trigger modes

We can simplify the trigger signals into four: ‘On’, ‘Off ’, ‘On and Off ’, and ‘Change’ modes. Thus,
the user can should set a mode for respective triggers using [Trigger Mode1] and others.
‘On’ mode
In the ‘On’ mode, the event recorder can take an action when the trigger signal is switched to
‘On’, as shown in Figure 6.10-4. For the operation, set On for the [Trigger Mode*].
On
Pulse train
Off
Triggers generated Triggers generated Triggers generated
Figure 6.10-4 Trigger generated at ‘On’ mode
‘Off’ mode
The ‘Off ’ mode is the other way of the ‘On’ mode; set Off for the operation.
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 6.10-5 Trigger generated at ‘Off’ mode
‘On-Off’ mode
In the ‘On-Off ’ mode, the trigger signal is generated when the pulse train is changed from ‘On
to Off ’ and ‘Off to On’ both, as shown in Figure 6.10-6. Set On-Off for the operation
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 6.10-6 Trigger generated at ‘On-Off’ mode
‘Change’ mode
The ‘Change mode’ is provided to detect the increment or the decrement of a number, where
the PLC logic generates. For example, this mode allows to detect the change of group settings

- 635 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(e.g., the ‘SYS_CHG’ signal; which has been connected with the trigger#9 using the setting
[Trigger ID9], as default; we have been discussed in Section: Group setting for protection
functions.)
(iii) Screen information

Figure 6.10-7 illustrates the structure about the ‘Event Recored1’ group, which can be shown
the latest event#1 at the top structure (line ○
b ). The lines ○
c and ○
d describes how an event
occurred for the event#1. Preceding event#2, event#3, etc. are shown below the event#1.
Similarly, the information about the ‘Event Record2’ and ‘Event Record3’ groups are displayed
on the IED screen.
†Note:For more information about the screen operation, see Section User interface:
Record sub-menu.
Event Record1 ○
a Event record1 list
10:48 1/4
#1 2012-07-26 ○
b The latest event#1
12:34:51.223
F.Record clear ○
c Trigger inform ation
On ○
d Trigger m ode inform ation
#2 2012-07-25
○
e Event#2
Set group change

4
#3 2012-07-25 ○
f Event#3
10:31:12.159
F.Record clear
On
#4 2012-07-23 ○
g Event#4
23:56:12.159
Figure 6.10-7 Event information grouped in the Event record1
(iv) Setup for the event recorder

Consider that GEN.TRIP command, which is denoted with Data ID ‘4F2A01 8B00011B6B’,
should be sorted into the ‘Event record1’ group. The settings [End of E.Record-1]=256 and
[End of E.Record-2]=512 have been made as default; hence, we may select it with the
trigger#156 by setting the [Trigger ID156]= ‘4F2A01 8B00011B6B’. Set On-OFF for the [Trigger
Mode156], because the pulse-train of the trip command should be recorded along the pick-up
and drop-off times. Remember that the preferred name for the Trigger ID156 should be set
using the [Event Name156].

- 636 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
6.10.3 Disturbance recorder

Disturbance recorder will record the phenomenon about the occurrences of the fault with 1ms
accuracy; it is operated with the reception of TRC trip commands. Additionally, the disturbance
recorder can accept the instruction of the PLC function using settings. The recording and
sampling times are programmable; thus, the measuring values about currents, voltage,
frequency, and logic signals are gathered in accordance with those times programmed.
Additionally, 384 logic signals are memorized during the disturbance phenomenon. The
number of recording the disturbance phenomena is limited by the recording and sampling
times.
(i) Time settings

Period of the recording is set using the [Record Time]. The disturbance recorder can operate
before the occurrence of the fault; the time before the fault occurrence can be set using the
[Pre-fault Time]. The user can choose a time among 0.1 sec. to 10.0 sec.
Setting [Record Time]
Setting [Pre-fault time]

Fault
Pre-fault information Succeeding formation
Start of recording Trip command issued End of recording
Figure 6.10-8 Period of recording time

(ii) Sampling rate setting
Sampling time is defined with setting [Sampling rate]; it can be can choose from 7.5 electrical
degree to 15.0 electrical degree. For example, if the user set 7.5 for the [Sampling rate], the
disturbance recorder starts to collect the date in the sampling rate (2400Hz) in 50Hz system.
(iii) Trip command setting

As shown in Figure 6.10-8, the disturbance recorder start when the trip command is issued,
provided On is set for the [Trip Trig.Sw]. If the disturbance recorder shall not start with the
trip command, set Off.
(iv) Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena

Note that the maximum number for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the
recording time and the sampling rate. Table 6.10-6 illustrates the maximum number. For
example, the 22 phenomena can be memorized in the disturbance recorder, when the [Record
Time] =1 and the [Sampling Rate] =7.5° elec., if the IED operates in 50Hz system. The user
can also check the maximum number on the IED screen (See Figure 6.10-9).
Table 6.10-6 Max number depending on time settings
Recording Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena

- 637 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
period set with Setting [Sampling Rate]=50Hz sys. Setting [Sampling Rate]=60 Hz sys.
[Record Time] 7.5° 15° 7.5° 15°
1 sec 62 124 51 102
3 sec 21 41 17 34
5 sec 12 25 10 21
Note: the above values are presented when 64 BUs are connected with the CU.
(v) Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance

recorder
220 analog quantities and 384 logical signals are record in a disturbance phenomenon.
Number of analog quantities

For example, when double VCT21B are used in the IED, currents and voltage in Table 6.10-7
are recorded. For more information about the VCT, see section 6.2.
Table 6.10-7 Recording number of logic signals depending on time settings

VCT types 21B
VaA VaE
VbA VbE
VcA VcE
VaB VaF
VbB VbF
VcB VcF
Voltages
VaC VaG
VbC VbG
VcC VcG
VaD VaH
VbD VbH
VcD VcH
Number of recording 220
Number of logical signals

As mentioned earlier, the disturbance recorder can hold the traces of logic signals during the
recording time. Using settings [Binary Signal*], the user can select 384 logic signal arbitrary.
The logic signals that the user has selected should be termed with user’s preferred names using
settings [Binary Sig.Name*]. Table 6.10-8 tabulates the default settings.

- 638 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 6.10-8 Setting list for logic signals (1–192)

Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name] Origins Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name] Origins
[Binary Signal1] 4F2A01 8B01001B6B GEN.TRIP_BU1 TRC [Binary Signal97] 4F2A01 8001201B60 DIF-TRIP_BU33 TRC
[Binary Signal11] 4F2A01 8B010A1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU11 TRC [Binary Signal107] 4F2A01 80012A1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU43 TRC
[Binary Signal12] 4F2A01 8B010B1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU12 TRC [Binary Signal108] 4F2A01 80012B1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU44 TRC
[Binary Signal13] 4F2A01 8B010C1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU13 TRC [Binary Signal109] 4F2A01 80012C1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU45 TRC
[Binary Signal14] 4F2A01 8B010D1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU14 TRC [Binary Signal110] 4F2A01 80012D1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU46 TRC
[Binary Signal15] 4F2A01 8B010E1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU15 TRC [Binary Signal111] 4F2A01 80012E1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU47 TRC
[Binary Signal16] 4F2A01 8B010F1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU16 TRC [Binary Signal112] 4F2A01 80012F1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU48 TRC
[Binary Signal27] 4F2A01 8B011A1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU27 TRC [Binary Signal123] 4F2A01 80013A1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU59 TRC
[Binary Signal28] 4F2A01 8B011B1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU28 TRC [Binary Signal124] 4F2A01 80013B1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU60 TRC
[Binary Signal29] 4F2A01 8B011C1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU29 TRC [Binary Signal125] 4F2A01 80013C1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU61 TRC
[Binary Signal30] 4F2A01 8B011D1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU30 TRC [Binary Signal126] 4F2A01 80013D1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU62 TRC
[Binary Signal31] 4F2A01 8B011E1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU31 TRC [Binary Signal127] 4F2A01 80013E1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU63 TRC
[Binary Signal32] 4F2A01 8B011F1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU32 TRC [Binary Signal128] 4F2A01 80013F1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU64 TRC
[Binary Signal33] 4F2A01 8B01201B6B GEN.TRIP_BU33 TRC [Binary Signal129] 4F2A01 8101001B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU1 TRC
[Binary Signal43] 4F2A01 8B012A1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU43 TRC [Binary Signal139] 4F2A01 81010A1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU11 TRC
[Binary Signal44] 4F2A01 8B012B1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU44 TRC [Binary Signal140] 4F2A01 81010B1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU12 TRC
[Binary Signal45] 4F2A01 8B012C1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU45 TRC [Binary Signal141] 4F2A01 81010C1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU13 TRC
[Binary Signal46] 4F2A01 8B012D1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU46 TRC [Binary Signal142] 4F2A01 81010D1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU14 TRC
[Binary Signal47] 4F2A01 8B012E1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU47 TRC [Binary Signal143] 4F2A01 81010E1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU15 TRC
[Binary Signal48] 4F2A01 8B012F1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU48 TRC [Binary Signal144] 4F2A01 81010F1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU16 TRC
[Binary Signal59] 4F2A01 8B013A1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU59 TRC [Binary Signal155] 4F2A01 81011A1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU27 TRC
[Binary Signal60] 4F2A01 8B013B1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU60 TRC [Binary Signal156] 4F2A01 81011B1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU28 TRC
[Binary Signal61] 4F2A01 8B013C1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU61 TRC [Binary Signal157] 4F2A01 81011C1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU29 TRC
[Binary Signal62] 4F2A01 8B013D1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU62 TRC [Binary Signal158] 4F2A01 81011D1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU30 TRC
[Binary Signal63] 4F2A01 8B013E1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU63 TRC [Binary Signal159] 4F2A01 81011E1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU31 TRC
[Binary Signal64] 4F2A01 8B013F1B6B GEN.TRIP_BU64 TRC [Binary Signal160] 4F2A01 81011F1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU32 TRC
[Binary Signal65] 4F2A01 8001001B60 DIF-TRIP_BU1 TRC [Binary Signal161] 4F2A01 8101201B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU33 TRC
[Binary Signal75] 4F2A01 80010A1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU11 TRC [Binary Signal171] 4F2A01 81012A1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU43 TRC
[Binary Signal76] 4F2A01 80010B1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU12 TRC [Binary Signal172] 4F2A01 81012B1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU44 TRC
[Binary Signal77] 4F2A01 80010C1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU13 TRC [Binary Signal173] 4F2A01 81012C1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU45 TRC
[Binary Signal78] 4F2A01 80010D1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU14 TRC [Binary Signal174] 4F2A01 81012D1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU46 TRC
[Binary Signal79] 4F2A01 80010E1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU15 TRC [Binary Signal175] 4F2A01 81012E1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU47 TRC
[Binary Signal80] 4F2A01 80010F1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU16 TRC [Binary Signal176] 4F2A01 81012F1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU48 TRC
[Binary Signal91] 4F2A01 80011A1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU27 TRC [Binary Signal187] 4F2A01 81013A1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU59 TRC
[Binary Signal92] 4F2A01 80011B1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU28 TRC [Binary Signal188] 4F2A01 81013B1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU60 TRC
[Binary Signal93] 4F2A01 80011C1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU29 TRC [Binary Signal189] 4F2A01 81013C1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU61 TRC
[Binary Signal94] 4F2A01 80011D1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU30 TRC [Binary Signal190] 4F2A01 81013D1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU62 TRC
[Binary Signal95] 4F2A01 80011E1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU31 TRC [Binary Signal191] 4F2A01 81013E1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU63 TRC
[Binary Signal96] 4F2A01 80011F1B60 DIF-TRIP_BU32 TRC [Binary Signal192] 4F2A01 81013F1B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU64 TRC

- 639 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 6.10-9 Setting list for logic signals (191–384)

Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name] Origins Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name] Origins
[Binary Signal193] 4F2A01 8201001B62 CBF-OPT_BU1 TRC [Binary Signal289] 4F2A01 8202201B62 CBF-TR_BU33 TRC
[Binary Signal203] 4F2A01 82010A1B62 CBF-OPT_BU11 TRC [Binary Signal299] 4F2A01 82022A1B62 CBF-TR_BU43 TRC
[Binary Signal204] 4F2A01 82010B1B62 CBF-OPT_BU12 TRC [Binary Signal300] 4F2A01 82022B1B62 CBF-TR_BU44 TRC
[Binary Signal205] 4F2A01 82010C1B62 CBF-OPT_BU13 TRC [Binary Signal301] 4F2A01 82022C1B62 CBF-TR_BU45 TRC
[Binary Signal206] 4F2A01 82010D1B62 CBF-OPT_BU14 TRC [Binary Signal302] 4F2A01 82022D1B62 CBF-TR_BU46 TRC
[Binary Signal207] 4F2A01 82010E1B62 CBF-OPT_BU15 TRC [Binary Signal303] 4F2A01 82022E1B62 CBF-TR_BU47 TRC
[Binary Signal208] 4F2A01 82010F1B62 CBF-OPT_BU16 TRC [Binary Signal304] 4F2A01 82022F1B62 CBF-TR_BU48 TRC
[Binary Signal219] 4F2A01 82011A1B62 CBF-OPT_BU27 TRC [Binary Signal315] 4F2A01 82023A1B62 CBF-TR_BU59 TRC
[Binary Signal220] 4F2A01 82011B1B62 CBF-OPT_BU28 TRC [Binary Signal316] 4F2A01 82023B1B62 CBF-TR_BU60 TRC
[Binary Signal221] 4F2A01 82011C1B62 CBF-OPT_BU29 TRC [Binary Signal317] 4F2A01 82023C1B62 CBF-TR_BU61 TRC
[Binary Signal222] 4F2A01 82011D1B62 CBF-OPT_BU30 TRC [Binary Signal318] 4F2A01 82023D1B62 CBF-TR_BU62 TRC
[Binary Signal223] 4F2A01 82011E1B62 CBF-OPT_BU31 TRC [Binary Signal319] 4F2A01 82023E1B62 CBF-TR_BU63 TRC
[Binary Signal224] 4F2A01 82011F1B62 CBF-OPT_BU32 TRC [Binary Signal320] 4F2A01 82023F1B62 CBF-TR_BU64 TRC
[Binary Signal225] 4F2A01 8201201B62 CBF-OPT_BU33 TRC [Binary Signal321] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal235] 4F2A01 82012A1B62 CBF-OPT_BU43 TRC [Binary Signal331] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal236] 4F2A01 82012B1B62 CBF-OPT_BU44 TRC [Binary Signal332] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal237] 4F2A01 82012C1B62 CBF-OPT_BU45 TRC [Binary Signal333] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal238] 4F2A01 82012D1B62 CBF-OPT_BU46 TRC [Binary Signal334] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal239] 4F2A01 82012E1B62 CBF-OPT_BU47 TRC [Binary Signal335] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal240] 4F2A01 82012F1B62 CBF-OPT_BU48 TRC [Binary Signal336] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal251] 4F2A01 82013A1B62 CBF-OPT_BU59 TRC [Binary Signal347] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal252] 4F2A01 82013B1B62 CBF-OPT_BU60 TRC [Binary Signal348] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal253] 4F2A01 82013C1B62 CBF-OPT_BU61 TRC [Binary Signal349] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal254] 4F2A01 82013D1B62 CBF-OPT_BU62 TRC [Binary Signal350] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal255] 4F2A01 82013E1B62 CBF-OPT_BU63 TRC [Binary Signal351] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal256] 4F2A01 82013F1B62 CBF-OPT_BU64 TRC [Binary Signal352] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal257] 4F2A01 8202001B62 CBF-TR_BU1 TRC [Binary Signal353] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal267] 4F2A01 82020A1B62 CBF-TR_BU11 TRC [Binary Signal363] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal268] 4F2A01 82020B1B62 CBF-TR_BU12 TRC [Binary Signal364] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal269] 4F2A01 82020C1B62 CBF-TR_BU13 TRC [Binary Signal365] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal270] 4F2A01 82020D1B62 CBF-TR_BU14 TRC [Binary Signal366] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal271] 4F2A01 82020E1B62 CBF-TR_BU15 TRC [Binary Signal367] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal272] 4F2A01 82020F1B62 CBF-TR_BU16 TRC [Binary Signal368] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal283] 4F2A01 82021A1B62 CBF-TR_BU27 TRC [Binary Signal379] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal284] 4F2A01 82021B1B62 CBF-TR_BU28 TRC [Binary Signal380] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal285] 4F2A01 82021C1B62 CBF-TR_BU29 TRC [Binary Signal381] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal286] 4F2A01 82021D1B62 CBF-TR_BU30 TRC [Binary Signal382] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal287] 4F2A01 82021E1B62 CBF-TR_BU31 TRC [Binary Signal383] (Not assigned) -- --
[Binary Signal288] 4F2A01 82021F1B62 CBF-TR_BU32 TRC [Binary Signal384] (Not assigned) -- --

- 640 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vi) Trigger settings for PLC programming

If the PLC program instructs the operation of the disturbance recorder, the user should set the
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]. That is, the program-output points should be set for the settings
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]; then, set On for the [Trigger SW1] to [Trigger SW4], respectively.
(vii) Screen information

Figure 6.10-9 indicates the maximum number of the recording operations as the number is
changed depending on the time settings, which are shown in Table 6.10-6. Figure 6.10-10
shows the operation time and the date for the disturbance recorder and the figure illustrates
five disturbance phenomena have been memorized in the IED.
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2
_Record List >
Number of items
6/40
Clear Records +
Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
Operating counter
Figure 6.10-9 Running counter and Max number in the disturbance recorder
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/5
#1 2012-07-25 ○
a Disturbance record#1
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 ○
b Disturbance record#2
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/21 ○
c Disturbance record#3
#4 2012-07-02 ○
d Disturbance record#4
23:32:09.015
#5 2012-06-20 ○
e Disturbance record#5
09:37:48.915
Figure 6.10-10 Detail information in the disturbance recorder
The information in the disturbance recorder are managed in the COMTRADE format,
hence, the user can transferor the disturbance recording file to the PC using the engineering
tool ‘GR-TIEMS’. Figure 6.10-11 shows the example of the GR-TIMES screen. For more
information, see Chapter Engineering tool.

- 641 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Figure 6.10-11 Screen shot from GR-TIEMS

- 642 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
6.10.4 Setting
Setting of FAULT_RECORD(Function ID: 204201)
s value
Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 Sec. Recording time before the fault 10
Op Mode Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID1 –
Op Mode ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier –
Op Mode ID2 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier2 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Setting of EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710)

s value
End of E.Record-1 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group1 256
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal1 for the operation –
Tigger Mode1 On / Off / On-Off / Change – Mode setting for the detection –
Event name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –

- 643 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting of DIST_DBP(Function ID: 2004D1)

Uni Default
ts setting value
Record Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Time for disturbance recording 3.0

Sampling Rate 7.5 - 15.0 deg Sampling rate in electrical degree 15.0
Pre-fault Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Pre-fault time 0.3
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal1 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trigger SW1 Off / On – Enabling the signal1 of user’s program Off
Trigger ID2 - – Signal2 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trip Trig.SW Off / On – Operation with the TRC trip command On
Binary Signal1 (Preferred DataID) – Logic signal1 for the operation –
Binary Sig.Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the logic signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Binary Signa384 (Preferred DataID) – Mode setting for the detection –
Binary Sig.Name384 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal384 –

- 644 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
6.10.5 Signal (Data ID)

FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 204201)
Name Element ID Description
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001 Receiving Trigger1
FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001 TRIG1 signal generated
FLTRCDING 8020101001 Data writing in the fault recorder
FR_CLR 3000001001 Data erasing in the fault recorder

ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 802000E001 Input1 for the external trigger

EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
ER1_CLR 3001001001 Clearing the data in Event group1
POWER ON 3100001001 Detection of switch On

DIST_DBP (Function ID: 2004D1)
80A0041001 DSTRING Writing the disturbance data
30A0001001 DSTR_CLR Data erased
80A0031001 DSTR_MADE Completion for writing the disturbance data
32A0011001 DSTR_MAX Maximum possible number of the operations
32A0021001 DSTR_NUM Operation counter
22A0051001 DSTR_UPDATE

- 645 -
CU
––––––––Metering function
BU
Metering function
The monitoring function is provided to measure the number of power quantities and statistics
data obtained on VCT and BI circuits. When instruments start measuring power quantities,
the data are collected through the circuits mathematically and accurately, and shown on
several monitoring screens. For current (I) and voltage (V) at their rated inputs, the analog
input data is measured with ±0.5% accuracy. For frequency, the data is measured with ±0.03%
accuracy.
6.11.1 Metering data (Metering group)

Several abbreviations are given for metering data, which is summarized below:
Table 6.11-1 Metering data

Available
Groups Abbreviations Displayed quantities software
models
Ida, Idb, Idc for DIFCH
Magnitude of phase differential current (Id) for
IdaA, IdbA, IdcA for DIFZA
Check-zone-protection (DIFCH) and
IdaB, IdbB, IdcB for DIFZB 031/032
Discriminating-zone-protection (DIFZA to
to
DIFZH)
IdaH, IdbH, IdcH for DIFZH
Idpua, Idpub, Idpuc for DIFCH
IdpuaA, IdpubA, IdpucA for DIFZA Pickup current for Check-zone-protection
IdpuaB, IdpubB, IdpucB for DIFZB (DIFCH) and Discriminating-zone-protection 031/032
(DIFZA to DIFZH)
to
IdpuaH, IdpubH,IdpucH for DIFZH
Metering Ira, Irb, Irc for DIFCH
IraA, IrbA, IrcA for DIFZA Magnitude of restraint current (Ir) for Check-
IraB, IrbB, IrcB for DIFZB zone-protection (DIFCH) and Discriminating- 031/032
zone-protection (DIFZA to DIFZH)

to
IraH, IrbH, IrcH for DIFZH
VaA, VbA, VcA for DIFZA

Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (V)
VaB, VbB, VcB for DIFZB
for Discriminating-zone-protection (DIFZA to 032
to
DIFZH)
VaH, VbH, VcH for DIFZH
V1A, V2A, V0A for DIFZA Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical
032
V1B, V2B, V0B for DIFZB component voltages (V1, V2, and V0) for Check-

- 646 -
CU
BU
Available
Groups Abbreviations Displayed quantities software
models
to zone-protection (DIFCH) and Discriminating-
zone-protection (DIFZA to DIFZH)

V1H, V2H, V0H for DIFZH
Magnitude and phase angle of phase currents (Ia,
Ia, Ib, Ic 031/032
Ib, Ic) for each bay unit (BU)
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical
I1, I2, I0 component currents (I1, I2, I0) for each bay unit 031/032
(BU)
fA, fB, to fH Frequency in each zone 032
f Frequency 031/032
6.11.2 Metering information on the screen

The user can examine the metering data on the LCD screen. Figure 6.11-1 illustrates the
information about currents. Values of differential currents, DIFCH and DIFA—DIFH, are
displayed by the percent (%) depending on the DIF percentage settings. The phase angles are
also displayed, and are shown based on voltage in positive-sequence (V1). When a signal is
leading the reference, the leading angle is displayed with a plus (+) symbol.
If there is no voltage input, the current at BU#1 in phase-A is choose the reference signal.
Therefore, it is recommended that BU#1 should be assigned at a feeder. If metering the current
of BU#1 is insufficient to be choose the reference signal, the nearest BU (that is, BU#2) is
chosen for that.
The user can examine the above data, except for the phase differential currents, based
on either the primary or secondary side on the CT. The selection of that is made by a setting.
To screen them accurately, the user should set CT ratio correctly.
Metering
10:48 1/311
Ida
12.345kA
Idb
12.345kA
Idc
12.345kA
Figure 6.11-1 Current meter on LCD screen

Note: If any quantity does not enter to the VCT, the value on the screen is displayed
such as “***.**” and “–––––”.

- 647 -
CU
BU
6.11.3 Setting for measurements

(i) Selecting either primary/secondary values
A value of the primary side is displayed in kV-unit when it is larger than 1000 volts. When
wishing to display that of the secondary side, set Secondary for setting [Display_Value]. Table
6.11-2 shows effective digits when Secondary is set.
Metering
10:48 1/8
Display Value +
Primary
I-Display Unit +
kA
V-Display Unit +
kV
Figure 6.11-2 Metering setting in the setting screen

Note: For the operation of the menu, see section 6.12.5.
Table 6.11-2 Effective digits for metering in the secondary side
Maximum number of significant
Metering digits after decimal point
Settings
screens
Current/Voltage Phase angle
Primary
Voltage 1
Secontray
1
Primary 2
Current
Secontray 3
(ii) Unit setting

The user can selct units of metering values. For example, the current unit is preferred
displaying in kA, set kA for the [I-Display Unit]. Table 6.11-3 shows the lists of metering units.
Table 6.11-3 Selection of units to display
Metering items Settings Selection of a unit to display
Voltage (V) [V-Display Unit] Volt (V) or kilo-volt (kV)
Current (I) [I-Display Unit] Ampare (A) or kilo-ampare (kA)
(iii) Diminishing a very small value to display zero

Negligible metering values will be taken into accounted zero. The user can set the level to
diminish in % using settings [I-Valid Level] and [V-Valid Level], at which values ‘4.00’ and ‘0.30’
are set, as default, respectively. Thus, zero (0) is displayed when the /applied quantities at the
VCT, which are lesser than the setting levels.

- 648 -
CU
BU
(iv) Setting for the report (Dead band feature)

Collected data can be sent to the network upward, but those may give the network a heavy
burden if those are large. Thus, dead band (SD) feature is provided not to send those
unnecessary (say, this feature regulates not to send the same one repeatedly). Since the analog
values metered can be almost the same during regular services, it makes possible to send
frequently with settings.
For example when 1A rated current is employed, and setting [ISD] has a default setting value
5.00, data can be reported when the present current value is changed beyond ±0.05A (i.e.,
5.00% of the rated 1A current).
Table 6.11-4 shows respective settings for the power quantities.

Table 6.11-4 SD settings for respective quantities
Units for
Quantities SD settings Setting ranges
settings
Voltage VSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Current ISD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Frequencty FSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Metering
10:48 6/8
ISD +
5.00 %
VSD +
0.60 %
FSD +
0.60 %

Note: VSD is applicable for 032 software model. For the operation of the menu, see
section 6.12.5.

- 649 -
CU
BU
6.11.4 Statistics data (Counter group)

The user can check on the counting numbers provided by the general counter function†. Table
6.11-5 shows the user to find the count numbers in the counter group.
Table 6.11-5 Counter data
Counter number Correspondences
Group Origin of info (default)
displayed to GCNTs†
COUNT1 (Not assigned) GCNT01

Counter
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter General control function: Counter function for the general (GCNT) .
6.11.5 Statistics data (Accumulated time)

Over all running time for which the IED has operated is provided in “Accumulated Time”. The
user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen. The time will be cleared when
the IED is switched off.
Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
ACT_TIME +
***d **h **m
Figure 6.11-4 Example of Accumulated Time screen

- 650 -
CU
BU
6.11.6 Monitoring for miscellaneous functions

Operating status of relay elements, binary IO modules, communication modules, GOOSE, and
diagnostics are displayed in the monitoring function.
(i) Relay element

(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter Technical description (CU): User
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Relay Elements. The relay functions and their characteristics
are discussed in Chapter Relay application).
(ii) Communication
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Communication. The communication features about the LAN
port is discussed in Chapter Communication protocol: LAN communication. The hardware
information is discussed in Chapter Technical description (CU): Signal processing and
communication module).
(iii) Binary IO
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Binary I/O. The structure and its operation is discussed in
Chapter Technical description (CU): Binary IO module).
(iv) Goose monitoring

interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Goose monitoring. The information about the GOOSE is
discussed in Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication).
(v) Diagnostics
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics sub-menu. The information about the diagnostics
is discussed in Chapter Automatic supervision).

- 651 -
CU
BU
6.11.7 Setting
DBP_MES_CU (Function ID: 710009)
Unit Default
s setting value
Display Value Primary/Secondary – Display selection of primary or secondary Primary
I-Display Unit A / kA – Selection of display units kA
V-Display Unit V / kV – Selection of display units kV
I-Valid Level 0.10 - 5.00 % I Valid Level 4.00
V-Valid Level 0.10 - 5.00 % V Valid Level 0.30
ISD 0.00 - 50.00 % I Sending Dead Band 5.00
VSD 0.00 - 50.00 % V Sending Dead Band 0.60
FSD 0.00 - 50.00 % F Sending Dead Band 0.50

- 652 -
CU
BU
6.11.8 Data ID
 Measuring point for Monitoring function
DBP_MES_MNG_CU (Function ID: 711009)
42B1201076 Ida DIF-CH Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1201078 Idb DIF-CH Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B120107A Idc DIF-CH Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1211076 IdaA DIF-ZA Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1211078 IdbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B121107A IdcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1221076 IdaB DIF-ZB Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1221078 IdbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B122107A IdcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1231076 IdaC DIF-ZC Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1231078 IdbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B123107A IdcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1241076 IdaD DIF-ZD Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1241078 IdbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B124107A IdcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1251076 IdaE DIF-ZE Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1251078 IdbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B125107A IdcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1261076 IdaF DIF-ZF Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1261078 IdbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B126107A IdcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1271076 IdaG DIF-ZG Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1271078 IdbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B127107A IdcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1281076 IdaH DIF-ZH Phase-A Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1281078 IdbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B128107A IdcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Id measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1301076 Ira DIF-CH Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1301078 Irb DIF-CH Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B130107A Irc DIF-CH Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1311076 IraA DIF-ZA Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1311078 IrbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B131107A IrcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1321076 IraB DIF-ZB Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1321078 IrbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B132107A IrcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1331076 IraC DIF-ZC Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1331078 IrbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B133107A IrcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1341076 IraD DIF-ZD Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1341078 IrbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B134107A IrcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1351076 IraE DIF-ZE Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)

- 653 -
CU
BU

42B1351078 IrbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B135107A IrcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1361076 IraF DIF-ZF Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1361078 IrbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B136107A IrcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1371076 IraG DIF-ZG Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1371078 IrbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B137107A IrcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1381076 IraH DIF-ZH Phase-A Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B1381078 IrbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
42B138107A IrcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Ir measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4202901076 VaA Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202901078 VbA Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
420290107A VcA Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202911076 VaB Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202911078 VbB Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
420291107A VcB Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202921076 VaC Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202921078 VbC Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
420292107A VcC Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202931076 VaD Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202931078 VbD Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
420293107A VcD Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202941076 VaE Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202941078 VbE Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
420294107A VcE Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202951076 VaF Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202951078 VbF Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
420295107A VcF Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202961076 VaG Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202961078 VbG Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
420296107A VcG Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202971076 VaH Va measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202971078 VbH Vb measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
420297107A VcH Vc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202A01076 VabA Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202A01078 VbcA Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202A0107A VcaA Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202A11076 VabB Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202A11078 VbcB Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202A1107A VcaB Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202A21076 VabC Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202A21078 VbcC Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202A2107A VcaC Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)

- 654 -
CU
BU

4202A31076 VabD Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202A31078 VbcD Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202A3107A VcaD Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202A41076 VabE Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202A41078 VbcE Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202A4107A VcaE Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202A51076 VabF Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202A51078 VbcF Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202A5107A VcaF Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202A61076 VabG Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202A61078 VbcG Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202A6107A VcaG Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202A71076 VabH Vab measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202A71078 VbcH Vbc measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202A7107A VcaH Vca measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202981076 V1A V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202981078 V2A V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
420298107A V0A V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202991076 V1B V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202991078 V2B V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
420299107A V0B V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZB)
42029A1076 V1C V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
42029A1078 V2C V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
42029A107A V0C V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZC)
42029B1076 V1D V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
42029B1078 V2D V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
42029B107A V0D V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZD)
42029C1076 V1E V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
42029C1078 V2E V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
42029C107A V0E V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZE)
42029D1076 V1F V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
42029D1078 V2F V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
42029D107A V0F V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZF)
42029E1076 V1G V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
42029E1078 V2G V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
42029E107A V0G V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZG)
42029F1076 V1H V1 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
42029F1078 V2H V2 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
42029F107A V0H V0 measurement primary(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202901051 VaA-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202901053 VbA-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202901055 VcA-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202911051 VaB-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202911053 VbB-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZB)

- 655 -
CU
BU

4202911055 VcB-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202921051 VaC-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202921053 VbC-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202921055 VcC-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202931051 VaD-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202931053 VbD-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202931055 VcD-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202941051 VaE-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202941053 VbE-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202941055 VcE-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202951051 VaF-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202951053 VbF-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202951055 VcF-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202961051 VaG-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202961053 VbG-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202961055 VcG-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202971051 VaH-Angle Va measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202971053 VbH-Angle Vb measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202971055 VcH-Angle Vc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202A01051 VabA-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202A01053 VbcA-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202A01055 VcaA-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZA)
4202A11051 VabB-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202A11053 VbcB-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202A11055 VcaB-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZB)
4202A21051 VabC-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202A21053 VbcC-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202A21055 VcaC-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZC)
4202A31051 VabD-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202A31053 VbcD-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202A31055 VcaD-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZD)
4202A41051 VabE-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202A41053 VbcE-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202A41055 VcaE-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZE)
4202A51051 VabF-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202A51053 VbcF-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202A51055 VcaF-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZF)
4202A61051 VabG-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202A61053 VbcG-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202A61055 VcaG-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZG)
4202A71051 VabH-Angle Vab measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202A71053 VbcH-Angle Vbc measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202A71055 VcaH-Angle Vca measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4202981051 V1A-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZA)

- 656 -
CU
BU

4202991051 V1B-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZB)
42029A1051 V1C-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZC)
42029B1051 V1D-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZD)
42029C1051 V1E-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZE)
42029D1051 V1F-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZF)
42029E1051 V1G-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZG)
42029F1051 V1H-Angle V1 measurement angle(for IEC61850) (ZH)
4201A01076 Ia Ia-BU1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201A01078 Ib Ib-BU1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201A0107A Ic Ic-BU1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)

- 657 -
CU
BU

4201AA1076 Ia Ia-BU11 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AA1078 Ib Ib-BU11 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AA107A Ic Ic-BU11 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AB1076 Ia Ia-BU12 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AB1078 Ib Ib-BU12 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AB107A Ic Ic-BU12 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AC1076 Ia Ia-BU13 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AC1078 Ib Ib-BU13 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AC107A Ic Ic-BU13 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AD1076 Ia Ia-BU14 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AD1078 Ib Ib-BU14 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AD107A Ic Ic-BU14 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AE1076 Ia Ia-BU15 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AE1078 Ib Ib-BU15 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AE107A Ic Ic-BU15 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AF1076 Ia Ia-BU16 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AF1078 Ib Ib-BU16 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201AF107A Ic Ic-BU16 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201B01076 Ia Ia-BU17 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201B01078 Ib Ib-BU17 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201B0107A Ic Ic-BU17 measurement primary(for IEC61850)

- 658 -
CU
BU

4201BA1076 Ia Ia-BU27 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BA1078 Ib Ib-BU27 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BA107A Ic Ic-BU27 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BB1076 Ia Ia-BU28 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BB1078 Ib Ib-BU28 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BB107A Ic Ic-BU28 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BC1076 Ia Ia-BU29 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BC1078 Ib Ib-BU29 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BC107A Ic Ic-BU29 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BD1076 Ia Ia-BU30 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BD1078 Ib Ib-BU30 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BD107A Ic Ic-BU30 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BE1076 Ia Ia-BU31 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BE1078 Ib Ib-BU31 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BE107A Ic Ic-BU31 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BF1076 Ia Ia-BU32 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BF1078 Ib Ib-BU32 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201BF107A Ic Ic-BU32 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201C01076 Ia Ia-BU33 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201C01078 Ib Ib-BU33 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201C0107A Ic Ic-BU33 measurement primary(for IEC61850)

- 659 -
CU
BU

4201CA1076 Ia Ia-BU43 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CA1078 Ib Ib-BU43 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CA107A Ic Ic-BU43 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CB1076 Ia Ia-BU44 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CB1078 Ib Ib-BU44 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CB107A Ic Ic-BU44 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CC1076 Ia Ia-BU45 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CC1078 Ib Ib-BU45 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CC107A Ic Ic-BU45 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CD1076 Ia Ia-BU46 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CD1078 Ib Ib-BU46 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CD107A Ic Ic-BU46 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CE1076 Ia Ia-BU47 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CE1078 Ib Ib-BU47 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CE107A Ic Ic-BU47 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CF1076 Ia Ia-BU48 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CF1078 Ib Ib-BU48 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201CF107A Ic Ic-BU48 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201D01076 Ia Ia-BU49 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201D01078 Ib Ib-BU49 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201D0107A Ic Ic-BU49 measurement primary(for IEC61850)

- 660 -
CU
BU

4201DA1076 Ia Ia-BU59 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DA1078 Ib Ib-BU59 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DA107A Ic Ic-BU59 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DB1076 Ia Ia-BU60 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DB1078 Ib Ib-BU60 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DB107A Ic Ic-BU60 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DC1076 Ia Ia-BU61 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DC1078 Ib Ib-BU61 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DC107A Ic Ic-BU61 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DD1076 Ia Ia-BU62 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DD1078 Ib Ib-BU62 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DD107A Ic Ic-BU62 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DE1076 Ia Ia-BU63 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DE1078 Ib Ib-BU63 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DE107A Ic Ic-BU63 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DF1076 Ia Ia-BU64 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DF1078 Ib Ib-BU64 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201DF107A Ic Ic-BU64 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201A01051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201A01053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201A01055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)

- 661 -
CU
BU

4201AA1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU11 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AA1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU11 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AA1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU11 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AB1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU12 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AB1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU12 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AB1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU12 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AC1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU13 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AC1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU13 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AC1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU13 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AD1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU14 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AD1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU14 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AD1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU14 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AE1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU15 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AE1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU15 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AE1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU15 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AF1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU16 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AF1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU16 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201AF1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU16 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201B01051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU17 measurement angle(for IEC61850)

- 662 -
CU
BU

4201B01053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU17 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201B01055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU17 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BA1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU27 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BA1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU27 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BA1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU27 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BB1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU28 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BB1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU28 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BB1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU28 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BC1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU29 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BC1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU29 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BC1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU29 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BD1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU30 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BD1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU30 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BD1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU30 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BE1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU31 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BE1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU31 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BE1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU31 measurement angle(for IEC61850)

- 663 -
CU
BU

4201BF1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU32 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BF1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU32 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201BF1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU32 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201C01051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU33 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201C01053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU33 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201C01055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU33 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CA1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU43 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CA1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU43 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CA1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU43 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CB1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU44 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CB1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU44 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CB1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU44 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CC1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU45 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CC1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU45 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CC1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU45 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CD1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU46 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CD1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU46 measurement angle(for IEC61850)

- 664 -
CU
BU

4201CD1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU46 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CE1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU47 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CE1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU47 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CE1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU47 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CF1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU48 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CF1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU48 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201CF1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU48 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201D01051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU49 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201D01053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU49 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201D01055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU49 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DA1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU59 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DA1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU59 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DA1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU59 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DB1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU60 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DB1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU60 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DB1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU60 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DC1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU61 measurement angle(for IEC61850)

- 665 -
CU
BU

4201DC1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU61 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DC1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU61 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DD1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU62 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DD1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU62 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DD1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU62 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DE1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU63 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DE1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU63 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DE1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU63 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DF1051 Ia-Angle Ia-BU64 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DF1053 Ib-Angle Ib-BU64 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201DF1055 Ic-Angle Ic-BU64 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
425600105C fA ZA Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425601105C fB ZB Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425602105C fC ZC Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425603105C fD ZD Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425604105C fE ZE Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425605105C fF ZF Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425606105C fG ZG Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425607105C fH ZH Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)
425608105C f Frequency measurement(for IEC61850)

- 666 -
CU
––––––––User interface (Front panel)
BU
User interface (Front panel)

6.12.1 Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through the USB cable. This section discusses the
configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu hierarchy of
the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
(i) Front Panel

As shown in Figure 6.12-1, the front panel is provided with a screen (LCD Screen), 26 light
emitting diodes (LEDs), 11 operation keys, seven function keys (in the later section the function
keys are referred to as F1 to F7.), monitoring jacks and a USB receptacle.
LEDs Standard LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with USB port

LEDs (A, B, and C)
Figure 6.12-1 CU front Panel with standard LCD screen
(ii) LCD screen
The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED such
as records, monitoring and settings. Normally, the LCD screen appears blank unless an
operation key is pressed, by pressing any of the operation keys, the LCD screen will display
the top menu.
If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen, the user can turn off the screen backlight
by pressing the operation key ◄. When operation is idle for some time, the screen backlight
turns off. By pressing any key except the CLEAR key, the backlight turns on, and the previous

- 667 -
CU
BU
menu will be displayed on the LCD screen.

(iii) LEDs
As shown in Table 6.12-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:
Table 6.12-1 LED labels and their color
LED User configurable
Label Color Remarks
No. setting2
Lit when the IED is in
1 IN SERVICE Green N/A
service.
Lit when an error has
2 ERROR Red N/A
occurred.
31 N/A N/A ✔
41 TRIP Red ✔ Default

51 N/A N/A ✔
61 TEST Yellow ✔ Default

71 N/A N/A ✔
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LEDs #3 to #26 are user-configurable LEDs. The user can assign a signal with or
without latch function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section 6.12.6(iv).
(iv) Monitoring jacks

There are three monitoring jacks on the front panel; the three monitoring jacks have LEDs, A,
B, and C respectively. For example, if the user wishes to undertake test work1, two monitoring-
jacks (A and B) are available for use. By selecting the Data ID of an object signal from the Data
ID list, and by keying this Data ID into the IED, the object signal can be displayed on the
selected LEDs (A and B). The user can also observe this object signal at the output of the
monitoring jacks (A and B) on an oscilloscope.
1Note: For operation of monitoring jacks, see section 6.12.6(iv)-1.

- 668 -
CU
BU
(v) Function keys

The IED provides seven function keys (F1 to F7) with the following two features; a LED is
attached on each function key. Table 6.12-2 shows the features for these keys.
 Skip to a specific screen directly, set by the user.
Used for skipping to a set page by pressing the function keys. Press again to return to the
previous page. Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page. (See section
6.12.5(v)-1)
 Operation of binary signals
A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals. Set by assigning the signal
in the settings menu. (See section 6.12.5(v)-2)
Table 6.12-2 Features of Function keys (F1 to F7)

Labels on Keys Feature and Remark
LED† Skip to a specific screen directly.

Control for the operation of pre-assigned
F1 to F7 binary signals.
†Note: Like in the LEDs of Table 6.12-1, the user can set to light the above LEDs by
itself. Setting the above LEDs are the same as the ones of the Table 6.12-1 (For
setting, see section6.12.6(iv)). Note the manufacture programs to light the
respective LEDs in default prior to shipping.

- 669 -
CU
BU
(vi) Operation keys

By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 6.12-3.
Table 6.12-3 Features of operation keys for standard LCD model
Label Functions and Remarks
Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up1
Move the cursor down / Scroll down / Count down1
Previous page / Move to the left digit.
Next page / Move to the right digit
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CANCEL Exit edit mode / Cancel operation.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
I Control key.
O Control key.
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: The pixel resolution (dot) is 240(W) × 320(H). Note that this mode is only provided
when the user programmed the feature using the engineering tool. See chapter
Engineering tool: MIMIC configuration tool.

- 670 -
CU
BU
6.12.2 HMI operation

By using LCD screen, operation keys and function keys, the user can access functions such as
recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The contents of the LCD screen depend upon the IED model.
(i) Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation

When the IED is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit. Press any key except
the key CLEAR; and then the backlight of the LCD screen is turned on1. If the IED detects a
fault, the fault message will appear in a pop-up screen. At the same time, the “TRIP”2 LED is
lit.
1Note: If another fault occurs during the period of time for which the previous fault pop-
up screen, is displayed, the previous fault information will be overwritten by the
new fault on the pop-up screen. Press the key CANCEL to remove the pop-up
screen for “Latest Fault” to return to the previous screen.
2Note: Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED.
(ii) Main-menu and Sub-menu

 Main-menu
If LCD screen is turned off, press any key, except the key CLEAR. “Main-Menu" will
appear on the LCD screen (see the left of Figure 6.12-3). To go to the next level of
hierarchy, press the key ►.
 Sub-menu
An example of setting the sub-menu screen is shown in the right of Figure 6.12-3. By
using the key ▼ and the key ▲, the user can move the cursor downward or upward
to view all of the items. By using the keys ◄ ►, the user can return to a previous
level of hierarchy or go to the next level of hierarchy.
 Screen structure
The screen is composed of a title area and a data area. The title area is fixed on the
top two lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line on the left-hand
side displays local time, whereas the right-hand side displays either the current line
number, cursor position number and the maximum page number, or the item number.
For example, the display “2/4” means the current cursor position, which is at the
second item of a maximum of four items.

- 671 -
CU
BU
Main Menu DIF

10:48 1/9 10:48 1/2
_Record > DIF-EN +>
Monitoring > On
Setting > _DIF-IdSV-EN +>
I/O Setting > Off
Control >
Time >
a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu
Figure 6.12-2 Screen for Main-Menu and Sub-menu
Figure 6.12-3 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several
Sub-menus. Table 6.12-4 shows the purposes and functions of sub-Menus.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record Main Menu
Fault Record Record List
Clear Records
Setting
Event Record1 Record List
Clear Records
Statistics Counter(GCNT01~32)
Function Key F1 Key ~ F7 Key

Disturbance Record Record List
Clear Records
Clear All Records Diagnostics Details
IO Setting AC Analog Input AI (#1~#2)
Monitoring Metering Slot#1~#2 Binary Input Slot (#1~#2)
Binary I/O Binary Output Slot (#1~#2)
Communication LAN Port Status LED LED (3~26)

61850STAT F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Control
DIF
Relay Element FS
Time Clock ActiveSyncSrc
Time Zone
Statistics Counter Time Sync SNTP
Accumulated Time BI SYNC
Display Format IRIG SYNC
Summer Time
Interlock
GOOSE Monitoring Test Test Mode Test Option
Function Test
Binary Input (Slot#n)
Diagnostics Binary Output (Slot#n)
Simultaneous Fault
Setting Record Fault Record Mode Change

Event Record
Metering Disturbance Record Signal monitoring
Communication LAN SLAVE PROTOCOL
USBCOM IEC61850
RS485 IEC103 SLV Information
Protection Common PLC-TIMER

Security Setting Change Password
Copy Group(A->B)
Group1
Security
Group2
Group3
Group4 Login / Logout
Group5
Group6
Group7
Group8
Control Common Control

Software Switch
Reset Control
Figure 6.12-3 Menu hierarchy

- 672 -
CU
BU
Table 6.12-4 Outline of Main-menu and their purposes

Sub-menu Purpose and functions
The "Record" sub-menu provides fault record, event record and disturbance
record. The user can erase each record individually or can clear all records at
Record
the same time. The user can assign event records to three distributed “Event
Record” sub-menus as required.
The "Monitoring" sub-menu displays all of the status values for the IED, such
Monitoring as Metering, Binary I/O, Communication, Relay Element, Statistics,
Interlock, GOOSE Monitoring, and Diagnostics.
The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings: Record,
Setting
Metering, Communication and Protection.
The "I/O Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings for inputs,
I/O Setting configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs, and configurable
LEDs.
The “Control” sub-menu is used to manipulate Software Switch function such
Control
as CBK, S4301, etc.
The "Time" sub-menu provides settings for calendar clock, time zone, the
Time
source of time synchronization and the display format of the calendar clock.
The "Test" sub-menu is used to set and to test the following: a trip circuit,
Test forcible operation of binary outputs from the IED, time measurement of
variable timers, and observation of the binary signals in logic circuits.
The "Information" sub-menu displays information about the IED such as
Information
hardware, software, communication, etc.
The "Security Setting" sub-menu is used to change the password and access
Security
level, providing high levels of security by assigning users different levels of
Setting
access.
When the "Security Setting” sub-menu is ON, the “Login/Logout” sub-menu
Login/Logout
is displayed.

- 673 -
CU
BU
6.12.3 Record sub-menu

The Record sub-menu is composed of several sub-menus: fault record, event record,
disturbance record, and clearance of all records. In each sub-menu, there are record lists and
clear records, with which the user can clear each kind of record separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Figure 6.12-4 Display of Record
Table 6.12-5 Operation and display in Record sub-menu

Display Operation key Remark
[>] ► Press the key ► to go to the sub-menu
[+] ENTER Press the key ENTER for executing “Clear all
records”. After executing, a confirmation dialog
screen is displayed.
(i) Fault Record

The “Fault Record” sub-menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence, fault phase,
tripping mode, and the power system quantities, as shown in Figure 6.12-5.
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/40
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 DIF
#3 2012-07-21 > 2012-07-25
13:11:29.621 10:48:22.421
Fault Record List Details of Fault Record
Figure 6.12-5 Display of Fault Record

- 674 -
CU
BU
Display fault record

Figure 6.12-6 shows how to see the screen of fault record list and the details.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6 cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
#1 2012-07-25 >
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2
4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48 1/222
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
DIF
Figure 6.12-6 Fault Record

- 675 -
CU
BU
Clear fault record

Figure 6.12-7 shows the steps to clear the fault record list.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.

Fault Record
10:48 1/2
Record List >
_Clear Records +
3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault Record”

Fault Record
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 6.12-7 Clear Record
Clear all information in Fault Record

Figure 6.12-8 shows the steps to clear all the records.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Clear all Records +
2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Record”

Clear Records
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear All records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 6.12-8 All clear

- 676 -
CU
BU
(ii) Event Record

The “Event Record” sub-menu provides three parts namely, “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”
and “Event Record3”. In each Event Record sub-menu, the data and time, device name, and
the operation of the device are displayed as shown in the example below.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Figure 6.12-9 Display of Event Record
Display of Event Record

Figure 6.12-10 shows the steps to display and erase event records. To clear all records, refer to
section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Event Record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
Figure 6.12-10 Display events

- 677 -
CU
BU
Clear of Event Records

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the Clear

Event Record1
10:48 1/2 Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of

Event Record1
Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 6.12-11 Clear Event

- 678 -
CU
BU
(iii) Disturbance Record

Disturbance Records can be displayed graphically on the PC screen by using GR-TIEMS. The
IED screen displays only the recorded date and times, which are stored in the IED as the entire
disturbance data, as shown in the following example:
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 6.12-12 Display of Disturbance Record

The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To erase all records,
refer to (i)-3.
Display of disturbance Record

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
10:48 1/2 sub menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 6.12-13 Disturbance

- 679 -
CU
BU
Clear of Disturbance Records

Figure 6.12-14 shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To clear all records,
refer to section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the

Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2 Clear Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to

Disturbance Record
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 6.12-14 Clear records

- 680 -
CU
BU
6.12.4 Monitoring sub-menu

The “Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display CU status. The data is updated every second on
the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the Monitoring sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iii. Communication sub-menu
iv. Relay Elements sub-menu
v. Statistics sub-menu
vi. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu
vii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
The value and phase-angle of voltages, currents, etc. can be displayed. The user can change
the units as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 6.12-15 shows an example of the
Metering sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/25
Ida
23.231kA 123.4%
Ib
23.200kA 123.4%
Ic
22.713kA 123.4%
Figure 6.12-15 Display for Metering
(ii) Binary I/O

“Binary I/O” sub-menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO module
circuits. Each line on the IED screen displays the binary input or output signal number, the
signal name1 assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status. The status is
shown as logic level “1” or “0” for the binary output circuit. Figure 6.12-16 provides an example
for binary IO module at IO#1 (Slot#1).
Slot#1
10:48 1/12
BI1 0 Contact1
BI2 0 Contact2
BI3 0 Comm1
BI3 0 Comm2
BI4 0 Block1
BI5 0 Reset
Figure 6.12-16 Display of Binary I/O status

1Note: The user can set the names of binary signals with GR-TIEMS.
Figure 6.12-17 shows the steps required to display the status of the binary inputs and outputs.
- 681 -
CU
BU
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting > _Binary I/O >
IO setting >
◄ ◄
Operation Time >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 Contact1 BI1 0 Contact1
BI2 0 Contact2 BI2 0 Contact2
BI3 0 Comm1
▲
BI3 0 Comm1
BI3 0 Comm2 BI3 0 Comm2
BI4 0 Block1 ▼ BI4 0 Block1
BI5 0 Reset BI5 0 Reset
Figure 6.12-17 Steps to display Binary I/O status
(iii) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 6.12-18.
Sub-menu sub-menu sub-menu

Monitoring Communication LAN
61580STAT
Figure 6.12-18 Menu hierarchy for Communication sub-menu

The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
LAN sub-menu: the communication port name and status are shown, as
shown in Figure 6.12-19.
LAN
10:48 1/1
PortStatus >
Figure 6.12-19 Display for LAN
If the status of a port is “UP”, it means that the communication link is working;
if the status is “DOWN, it means that LAN cable is not connected to the port.
- 682 -
CU
BU
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/1 10:48 1/1
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link Down
Port2_Link Down Port2_Link Down
Port3_Link Down Port3_Link Down
Port1(port A) is connected. All Ports are not connected.
Figure 6.12-20 Communication status
NetMonitor: Hot-standby operation can send PING packets for IP1 to IP12
remote devices. Accordingly, the user can see those states on the below screen.
For example, ‘OK’ will be shown at IP1 with setting [Ping_IP1], if the IED can
receive the responses. If ‘NG’ is shown, there is no response. ‘––‘ will be shown
when setting [Ping_IP*] does not have IP address.
NetMonitor
10:48 1/12
Ping_IP1 OK
Ping_IP2 NG
Ping_IP3 ––
Ping_IP4 ––
Ping_IP5 ––
Ping_IP6 ––
Figure 6.12-21 Display of NetMonitor
Redundant Packet Num: Number of commination packets regarding Port A and

Port B will be screened when PRP/HSR operation is carried out in the IED.
RedundantPacketNum
10:48 1/12
PortA_Send 1234
PortA_Recv 1234
PortA_ErrLANIED 1234
PortB_Send 9876
PortB_Recv 9876
PortB_ErrLANIED 9876
Figure 6.12-22 Display of Redundant packet number
IEC61850 sub-menu: IP addresses of the devices connecting in IEC61850 are

shown with a straight line. Configurations of those IP addresses are available
with GR-TIEMS.

- 683 -
CU
BU
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
Figure 6.12-23 Display of IEC61850
(iv) Relay Elements

In “Relay Element” sub-menu, the name of the relay element and status of operation are shown
on one line. The following figure provides an example for the DIF elements screen. In order to
view all of the relay elements, the user has to press keys ▲ and ▼.
DIF
10:48 1/27
DIFCH-A 0
DIFCH-B 0
DIFCH-C 0
DIFZA-A 0
DIFZA-B 0
DIFZA-C 0
Figure 6.12-24 Displaying Relay Elements
Figure 6.12-25 shows the steps necessary to display the status of the measuring elements
on the LCD screen.

- 684 -
CU
BU
Main Menu Monitoring Relay Element

10:48 2/9 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3
Record > ► Metering > ► DIF >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > _FS >
Setting > Communication >
IO setting >
◄ Relay Element > ◄
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
FS
10:48 1/72
UVFSZA-A 0
UVFSZA-B 0
UVFSZA-C 0
UVSFSZA-AB 0
UVSFSZA-BC 0
UVSFSZA-CA 0
Figure 6.12-25 Steps to display the status of measuring elements
(v) Statistics
“Statistics” sub-menu is provided with several sub-menus, as shown in the following figure.
Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Monitoring Statistics Counter
Accumulated Time
Figure 6.12-26 Menu hierarchy for Statistics
For each statistical item, with the exception of displaying their status, the data can be reset or
revised. The display structure of each sub-menu is shown in the following sections:
Counter sub-menu: the name and number of statistical items are shown in
two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first
line.

- 685 -
CU
BU
Counter
10:48 1/32
0
0
0
Figure 6.12-27 Display for Counter sub-menu
To change the counter number, follow the steps as shown in Figure 6.12-28.
Main Menu Monitoring Statistics

10:48 2/10 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3
Record > ► Metering > ► Power value >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > _Counter >
Setting > Communication > Accumulated Time >
◄ ◄
IO Setting > Relay Element >
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
Counter Counter Counter

10:48 1/32 10:48 1/32
Change? ENTER Count1(No Assign) + ENTER Count1(No Assign) +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 0 0
Count2 (No Assign) + Count2(No Assign) +
1 0
Count3 (No Assign) + Count3(No Assign) +
0 0
Revise the data
CANCEL Counter
ENTER 10:48 1/32
Count1(No Assign) +
0
The data has been revised. 1
0
Figure 6.12-28 Steps for changing the counter number
Accumulated Time sub-menu: Total time for which the IED has been running
is shown in “d (date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can clear the total
time value by clear operation (reset), which is shown in Figure 6.12-29.

- 686 -
CU
BU
Accumulated Time Accumulated Time

10:48 1/1
_ACT_TIME + Reset?
CANCEL
234d 23h 39m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
ENTER
Figure 6.12-29 Display for Accumulated Time
(vi) GOOSE monitoring

The status of the GOOSE subscription information is shown for each record-unit, as shown in
Figure 6.12-30. Each IED name (for example, “GRB200-11-603”) has been defined in the
GOOSE subscription information.
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRB200-11-603 OK
GRB200-21-603 OK
GRB200-31-603 NG
Figure 6.12-30 Display for GOOSE Monitoring
(vii) Diagnostics
Errors are shown for each monitoring element. If there are no errors, an error message is not
displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
PLC data error
>
Data(commslv) error >
Figure 6.12-31 Display for Diagnostics

- 687 -
CU
BU
6.12.5 Setting sub-menu

With the Setting sub-menu, the user can view and change settings about:
Record,
Metering,
Communication,
Protection (Relay) application,
Control application,
Statics,
Function key, and
Diagnostics.
We illustrate here the setting methods for the protection (relay) elements, the confirmation of
the settings. The “On/Off” function is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures here are examples only. The user should confirm setting
values when their values have been changed.
(i) Setting method

Four setting modes are provided as follows:
1. Element Setting Mode
2. Switch Setting Mode
3. List Selection Mode (item selection)
4. Signal Selection Mode (signal selection)
Element Setting Mode: The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting
numerical values. For each setting, the setting name, setting value and the
unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 6.12-32 provides an example of the
element setting mode.
DIF DIF
10:48 2/11 10:48 2/11
_DIFCH-I + *OC1-a +
2000 A 4000 A
DIFCH-Slope + DIFCH-Slope +
30 30
CTSCCH-EN + CTSCCH-EN +
On On
Before Changing Setting After Changing

Setting
Figure 6.12-32 Example of Element Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been
changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the
- 688 - Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

CU
BU
change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For
the setting of a value, follow the steps as shown in Figure 6.12-331:
:
DIF DIF DIF

10:48 2/11 10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_DIF-I + ENTER DIF-I + ◄x 5 DIF-I +
2000 A 2000 A 2000 A
DIFCH-Slope + DIFCH-Slope + DIFCH-Slope +
CANCEL ►x5
30 30 30
CTSCCH-EN + CTSCCH-EN + CTSCCH-EN +
On On On
▲ ▼
CANCEL CANCEL
DIF DIF
DIF
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*DIF-I + ▼ *DIF-I + ENTER *DIF-I +
4000 A 4000 A
4000 A
_DIFCH-Slope + ▲ DIFCH-Slope +
DIFCH-Slope +
30 30 ENTER 30
CTSCCH-EN + CTSCCH-EN +
CTSCCH-EN +
On On
On
Figure 6.12-33 Steps for setting a value

1Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figure above is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
the setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer
to “Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
2Note: The operation keys have several features enabling the user to key values for
setting items. Table 6.12-6 shows values that have been changed before and after
the user presses the operation keys.
Table 6.12-6 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9
1 2 6 8 0
▲
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 ▼ 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
◄
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
2 1 : 2 3 ► 2 1 : 2 3

CU
BU
Switch Setting Mode: The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the
selection of two modes. Figure 6.12-34 provides an example of the switch
setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the selected item is
displayed on two lines.
DIF DIF
10:48 6/11 10:48 7/11
_CTSCDZ-EN + *CTSCDZ-EN +
On On
DIFTP-FORM + DIFTP-FORM +
CH&DZ CH&DZ
DIF-CTFBlk + DIF-CTFBlk +
Non Non
Before Changing Setting After Changing
Setting
Figure 6.12-34 Display Example for Switch Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is
canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 6.12-35
shows the operation of the switch setting mode.
DIF DIF DIF

10:48 6/11 10:48 6/11 10:48 6/11
_CTSCDZ-EN + ENTER CTSCDZ-EN + ►/▼/▲/◄ *CTSCDZ-EN +
On On Off
DIFTP-FORM + DIFTP-FORM + DIFTP-FORM +
CANCEL
CH&DZ CH&DZ ►/▼/▲/◄ CH&DZ
DIF-CTFBlk + DIF-CTFBlk + DIF-CTFBlk +
Non Non Non
CANCEL
ENTER ENTER
DIF DIF
10:48 6/11 10:48 6/11
*CTSCDZ-EN + *CTSCDZ-EN +
▼ Off
Off
_DIFTP-FORM + DIFTP-FORM +
CH&DZ ▲ CH&DZ
DIF-CTFBlk + DIF-CTFBlk +
Non Non
Figure 6.12-35 Operation of Switch Setting Mode

Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The above figure is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer to
“Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.

CU
BU
The “List Selection Mode” is composed of main-setting-screens and selection-

list-screens as shown in Figure 6.12-36. In the main-setting-screen, the
setting name and the selected item are displayed. Press the key ENTER to
begin the setting process; the screen for selection list will appear. Once a
setting has been changed, [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the
setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark disappears
automatically.
DIF DIF DIF

10:48 7/11 10:48 7/11 10:48 7/11
_DIFTP-FORM + _CH&DZ ▼ CH&DZ
ENTER
CH&DZ CH _CH
DIF-CTFBlk + DZ DZ
Non CANCEL
▲
DIF-IdSVBlk +
Non
CANCEL ENTER
DIF DIF
10:48 7/11 10:48 7/11
*DIFTP-FORM + *DIFTP-FORM +
▼
CH&DZ CH&DZ
_DIF-CTFBlk + DIF-CTFBlk +
Non ▲ Non
DIF-IdSVBlk + DIF-IdSVBlk +
Non Non
Figure 6.12-36 Operation of List Selection Mode
Signal Selection Mode: Figure 6.12-37 shows the steps to select a signal.
F1 Key Select Function Select Function

10:48 1/15 10:48 1/xx 10:48 1/xx
_Input signal1 + ENTER No assign ► No assign
Assign Signal _423100 > _AF00001001
Input signal2 + 423101 > AF00002001
CANCEL
Assign Signal 423102 > ◄ AF00003001
Input signal3 + 423103 > AF00004001
Assign Signal 423104 > AF00005001
CANCEL ENTER
F1 Key
10:48 1/15
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Input signal2 +
Assign Signal
Input signal3 +
Assign Signal
Figure 6.12-37 Operation of signal selection

CU
BU
(ii) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu

In “Setting” menu, a confirmation dialog #1 and #2 appears in the sub-menu and lower-level
menu, as shown in Figure 6.12-38
Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu

Case2
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection Active Group
： Copy gr.(A->B).
Confirmation
Group 1 Dialog #1
Group 2
Confirmation ：
Case1
Group 8
Dialog #2
Trip
Figure 6.12-38 Confirmation dialog setting
 Case1: Confirmation dialog #1

When a setting within each group is changed; the confirmation dialog will
appear when returning to the screen of the “Protection” sub-menu, as shown
in Figure 6.12-39.
 Case2: Confirmation dialog #2
When a setting is changed; the confirmation dialog will appear when
returning to the “Main Menu”, as shown in Figure 6.12-40.

CU
BU
Setting Protection Group 1

10:48 4/7 10:48 3/10 10:48 1/1
Record > ► Active group > *Trip >
►
Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) >
Communication > _Group 1 >
_Protection > ◄ Group 2 > ◄
Counter > Group 3 >
Function key > Group 4 >
► ◄
DIF DIF Trip

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*DIF-EN +> ENTER *DIF-EN +> ► ODIF >
On On FS >
DIF-IdSV-EN + DIF-IdSV-EN +
Off CANCEL Off ◄
►/▼/▲]/◄ ►/▼/▲]/◄ CANCEL
DIF DIF Group1

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/1
*DIF-EN + *DIF-EN + *Trip >
►x 2
Off Off
DIF-IdSV-EN + ENTER DIF-IdSV-EN +
Off Off ◄x2
Protection Protection
ENTER
10:48 3/10 Setting change
Active group > Change setting?
confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > Setting change
Group 3 > CANCEL
Group 4 >
canceled.
Figure 6.12-39 Setting example in case #1

CU
BU
Main Menu Setting Communication

10:48 3/9 10:48 3/7 10:48 3/3
Record > ► Record > ► LAN >
Monitoring > Metering > USBCOM >
_Setting > _Communication > _IEC61850 >
◄ ◄
IO Setting > Protection >
Time > Counter >
Test > Function key >
► ◄
IEC61850 IEC61850 IEC61850

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
*850BLK + ►/▼/▲/◄ 850BLK +
ENTER _850BLK +
Block Normal Normal
GSECHK + GSECHK + GSECHK +
ON ON CANCEL ON
SI1-1 + SI1-1 + SI1-1 +
254 254 254
ENTER CANCEL
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 3/3
► Change setting?
*850BLK + ◄ LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
USBCOM >
GSECHK + *IEC61850 >
ON
►
SI1-1 +
254
Setting ENTER
Setting change
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > Setting change
Counter >
CANCEL
canceled.
Function key >
Figure 6.12-40 Setting example for case #2

CU
BU
(iii) On/Off function

When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function”
is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
DIF DIF DIF

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*DIF-EN +> ENTER *DIF-EN +> ►/◄/▲/▼
*DIF-EN +
On On Off
DIF-IdSV-EN + DIF-IdSV-EN +
CANCEL ►/◄/▲/▼ DIF-IdSV-EN +
Off Off Off
ENTER
Protection DIF
10:48 1/2
ENTER Change setting? *DIF-EN +
Setting change ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
DIF-IdSV-EN +
confirmed. ◄x3
Off
Protection DIF
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/2
Active group > *DIF-EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “DIF” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. DIF-IdSV-EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 >
Group 4 >
Figure 6.12-41 Operation of On/Off function
Table 6.12-7 Explanation of [+>] mark in the On/Off function

Display Operation Remark
[+>] ► Go to the sub-menu
ENTER Change setting.

CU
BU
(iv) Protection group setting

The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system; the user can
choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. However, it is not possible to set the protection function
in the “Protection” sub-menu.
Change active group: An example for changing the active group is shown in
the following figure.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common ▲x 4 Common ENTER Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 CANCEL 3
Copy Group (A->B) > ▼x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 2 > Group 2 >
▲x2 ▼x 2
10:48 5/11
Change Setting? ENTER Common
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
ENTER Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Active Group +
Setting change 1
Copy Group (A->B) >
confirmed. Group 1 >
Group 2 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection” sub-

menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 6.12-42 Procedure for changing the active settings group

CU
BU
Copy group setting: The user can copy an active setting from one group to
another group. As an example, in the following figure “Group3” will be copied
to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 6.12-43.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common ▲x 4 Common ENTER Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 CANCEL 3
Copy Group (A->B) > ▼x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 2 > Group 2 >
▲x2 ▼x 2
10:48 5/11
Change Setting? ENTER Common
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
ENTER Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Active Group +
Setting change 1
Copy Group (A->B) >
confirmed. Group 1 >
Group 2 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection” sub-

menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 6.12-43 Copying a group setting

CU
BU
Change group settings: Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings
are set. Therefore, in each group, the user can change the settings of the
protection functions and other features. To change the settings in each group,
refer to the setting method discussed in section 6.12.5(i).
(v) Configuration of Function keys

Function keys (F1 to F7) on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific
screen, which is configurable by the user. This key can also control a particular signal, which
turns on the LED light. The signal can be selected through operation of the LDC or GR-TIEMS.
Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6), respectively, as the default
settings shown in Table 6.7-3.
Table 6.12-8 Function keys which are configured to navigate to a menu

Function Key configured Menus
F1 Metering
F2 Fault Record
F3 Event Record1
F4 Event Record2
F5 Event Record3
F6 Diagnostics

CU
BU
Screen jump function: To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps
as shown in the figure below.
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > ► *Function + ENTER Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
◄ CANCEL _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
▲x 2 ▼x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 ENTER 10:48 1/3
◄x 2
Change Setting? *Function + *Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Screen Jump Assign Signal
Signal + No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
ENTER
An Example
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push F1
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Key?
confirmed.
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Follow the next On
OC3EN +
step to select a
Off
screen.
ENTER
The selected screen
is assigned to F1.
Figure 6.12-44 Procedure to assign screen jump setting
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu DIF

10:48 2/8 10:48 1/2
Record > F1 _DIF-EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > DIF-IdSV-EN +>
IO setting >
F1 On
Time >
Test >
Figure 6.12-45 Operation of screen jump function

CU
BU
To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure 6.12-46.
Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new
screen is configured for the same function key.
2) If a configured screen is disabled by the “On/Off Function” setting (refer to
section 6.12.5(iii)), the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
F1 Key > ► Function + ENTER *Screen Jump
F2 Key > Screen Jump Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + No Assign
[◄] CANCEL
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
◄x2 ENTER
Change Setting? *Function + Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign Assign Signal
Signal + _No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
ENTER
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on the F1 key.
Figure 6.12-46 Cancelling the screen jump function

CU
BU
Signal control function: To assign a test signal to a function key, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 6.12-47.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > ► *Function + ENTER Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
◄ CANCEL _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
▲ ▼
F1 Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 1/2 10:48 2/3
ENTER
*Function + ▼ *Function +> Screen Jump
No Assign Assign Signal *Assign Signal
*Signal + ▲ LED > CANCEL No Assign
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
[ENTER]
Select Function Select Element Select Element

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/128 10:48 3/128
_123100 >
► _AF00001001 ▼x2 AF00001001
123101 > AF00002001 AF00002001
123102 > AF00003001 _AF00003001
123103 > ◄ AF00004001 ▲x2 AF00004001
123106 > AF00005001 AF00005001
123107 > AF00006001 AF00006001
ENTER
Setting F1 Key
10:48 1/3
ENTER ◄x2
Change Setting? *Function +
Setting change ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign
confirmed. *Signal +
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
Figure 6.12-47 Assigning a signal to the function key

CU
BU
6.12.6 I/O setting sub-menu

“I/O Setting” sub-menu is used to set or change settings for the following items:
(i) AC Analog Input
(ii) Binary Input
(iii) Binary Output
(iv) LED
This section explains the details of the setting method.
(i) AC analog input

For the AC analog inputs in the VCT module, the user can configure a ratio for each AC analog
channel. The user can also configure CT polarity and the handle of a residual voltage. During
the settings, the user can enter the value of the ratio, the polarity direction, and VT selection
in the sub-menu below.
Selection of ratio: For example, Figure 6.2-1 shows how the channel selection
is made for the AC analog input on a VCT module (AI#1 = VCT#1). Move the
cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next level in
the hierarchy.
AC Analog Input AI#1

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/10
AI#1 > [►] CH1 >
AI#2 > CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
[►]
AI#1
10:48 1/1
AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
2000
Figure 6.12-48 AC analog input screen

Note: This screen is a sample. The AI numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of VCT modules in each IED.

- 702 -
CU
BU
(ii) Binary input

All binary input circuits provided in the IED are user-configurable; the user can set common
programmable logic (CPL) for each binary input circuit. (For more information of CPL, see
section 6.5.2)
The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting function.
To configure the binary input circuits, the user should follow the procedure in steps ((ii)-1 and
(ii)-2)
Selection of binary input circuit: For example, Figure 6.12-49 illustrates the
selection of a binary input circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next hierarchy.
Binary Input Slot#2

10:48 2/2 10:48 1/8
Slot#1 > [►] _Common >
_Slot#2 > BI1 >
BI2 >
BI3 >
BI4 >
BI5 >
Figure 6.12-49 Selection of slot and binary input circuit

Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed depend upon the
configuration of the binary IO module in each IED.
CPL setting: Figure 6.12-50 is an example of a “Common” setting. From this

screen, the user can set a threshold level and the number of comparisons
feature for contact chatter for all binary input circuits.
Common
10:48 1/2
Thres_Level +
Low
Cmp_Num +
4
Figure 6.12-50 Common screen
For example, Figure 6.12-51 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit (BI1).
The timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On is set for setting
[BI1_CPL]. Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or parameter.

- 703 -
CU
BU
BI1
10:48 1/2
BI1_CPL +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
SW
Inverse-SW +
Normal
Figure 6.12-51 CPL setting

Note: Setting items “On Delay timer and others” are displayed when the user sets
[BI*_CPL] On.
(iii) Binary output

All binary output circuits provided in the IED are also user-configurable; the user can configure
timers and switches using CPL settings. (For more information of CPL, see section 6.5.4(i))
Selection of binary output circuit: For example, Figure 6.12-52 illustrates the
selection of a binary output circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the hierarchy.
Binary Output Slot#2

10:48 2/2 10:48 1/10
Slot#1 > [►] _BO1 >
_Slot#2 > BO2 >
BO3 >
BO4 >
BO5 >
BO6 >
Figure 6.12-52 Selection of slot and binary output circuit

Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of the binary IO module in each IED case.
CPL Setting: For example, Figure 6.12-54 illustrates the setting of a binary
output circuit (BO1). Using setting [BI1_CPL] On, the CPL logic in BO1 is
available. Similarly, assigned signals, timers and switches can be set in this
menu. Note that detailed setting items are shown when On is keyed into
setting [BI*_CPL].

- 704 -
CU
BU
BO1
10:48 1/1
BO1_CPL +
Off
Figure 6.12-53 Binary output setting
BO1
10:48 1/17
Input signal1 +
No Assign
Input Signal2 +
No Assign
Input Signal3 +
No Assign
Input Signal4 +
No Assign
Input Signal8 +
No Assign
LOGIC-SW
AND
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
Logic Timer +
0.000 s
Reset Signal +
No Assign
Figure 6.12-54 Binary output setting
Figure 6.12-55 shows how to assign a signal:

- 705 -
CU
BU
BO1 Select Function Select Function

10:48 2/17 10:48 1/127 10:48 2/127
_Input Signal1 + [ENTER] _No Assign [▼] No Assign
No Assign ABC 412345> _ABC 412345>
Input Signal2 + DEF 454321> BCD 454321>
[CANCEL]
No Assign BIO_Slot1 200B01> BIO_Slot1 200B01>
Input Signal3 + BIO_Slot2 200B02> BIO_Slot2 200B02>
No Assign BIO_Slot3 200B03> BIO_Slot3 200B03>
[►] [CANCEL]
Select Element
10:48 2/155
No Assign
_ABC-X-A 8000001B60
ABC-Y-B 8100001B61
ABC-Z-C 8200001B62
ABC-ABC 8300001B63
ABC-EDF 8300001B64
Figure 6.12-55 Assigning a signal

Note: “No Assign” is always displayed on the first line, even when the page is changed.
(iv) Selection and setting of LED

As shown in Figure 6.12-1, the IED provides 26 LEDs and 7 function-keys. The user can
configure LEDs (“LED#3” to “LED#26”) and the function key LEDs (F1 to F7; each has a LED).
Each LED is driven via a logic gate which can be programed to be an AND gate, OR gate or
XOR gate operation. Furthermore, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable
for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. One or up to eight signals can be assigned
to a single LED with selectable LED color.
Selection of LED: Figure 6.12-56 shows the LED selection screen; the user
can select a setting item by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the
next level in the hierarchy.

- 706 -
CU
BU
LED
10:48 1/31
_LED3 >
LED4 >
LED5 >
LED6 >
LED7 >
LED8 >
LED26 >
F1 Key >
F2 Key >
:
Figure 6.12-56 LED selecting screen
LED Setting: As shown in Figure 6.12-57, the user can set the logical gate,
timer, color of LED and assign signals in this screen.
LED3
10:48 1/16
Color >
RED
Input signal1 +
No assign
Input signal 2 +
No assign
Input signal 8 +
No assign
Reset signal +
No assign
LOGIC-SW +
AND
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Logic Timer +
0.00 s
Color +
Figure 6.12-57 LED setting screen

- 707 -
CU
BU
6.12.7 Time sub-menu

In Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of Clock function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time displaying and so on. Figure below shows the Time sub-
menu. (For more information, see section 6.8)
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Figure 6.12-58 Time function screen

(i) Clock
The clock can run locally or synchronize with the external time source shown in
[ActiveSyncSrc] menu. Figure 6.12-59 shows the Clock screen:
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 6.12-59 Clock screen

The Clock sub-menu is composed of the [Time] menu, [Format] menu and [ActiveSyncSrc]
menu. Time for the IED can be set in the screen. When the active synchronizing source is SNTP,
the user can go to another sub-menu to check the current active SNTP server.
Figure 6.12-60 shows how to handle this screen.
Time menu
(1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
Clock
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.

Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 6.12-60 Clock format

- 708 -
CU
BU
ActiveSyncSrc menu
ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►.
Clock
10:00 1/2 *Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the > is
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05 not shown in the screen.
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
_[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of active

ActiveSyncSrc
10:48 SNTP server.
192. 168. 0. 100
192. 168. 0. 101
*192. 168. 0. 102
192. 168. 0. 103
Figure 6.12-61 ActiveSync
(ii) Time zone

The user can input time zone designated by UTC in Time zone screen. Time zone according as
local area for the IED should be set. Figure 6.12-62 shows the Time Zone screen:
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Figure 6.12-62 Time zone setting screen
(1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1 Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time zone
_Time zone +
0.00hour in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
Figure 6.12-63 TimeZone
(iii) Time synchronization

Time synchronization source can be selected in Time synchronization screen. The
synchronization function can be activated by configuration of the On/Off switch in this menu.
Figure 6.12-64 shows the configuration screen for the time synchronization function:

- 709 -
CU
BU
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
Figure 6.12-64 Time synchronization setting

The following shows how to operate in this screen.
TimeSyncSrc menu
Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
(2) The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of “---”, SNTP, BI, MODBUS

TimeSyncSrc
10:48 1/5 and IRIG-B.
---
_SNTP Note: When “---” is selected, it means that time synchronization
BI
MODBUS
is not operated.
IRIG-B
Figure 6.12-65 TimeSyncSrc
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the servers
can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of higher-accuracy)
and select the server with the smallest value.

- 710 -
CU
BU
SNTP menu
IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
(1) To confirm that the SNTP synchronization function has been set
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 for On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
SNTP (2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
SNTP (3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.
10:48 1/4 When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
Server1 +
0. 0. 0.176 ENTER.
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Figure 6.12-66 SNTP
BI SYNC menu
When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in BI SYNC menu, the user can choose a binary input circuit
(BI) as a synchronization standard. Adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC (1) Enter the Data ID of the BI output

10:48 1/2 (2) Set adjustment time for [SYNC ADJ]
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s
The “IRIG SYNC” setting is similar to activate by using the On/Off
switch.
Figure 6.12-67 BISYNC
(iv) Display format

Display format of time in the IED can be selected in Display format screen. All time formats
will be displayed according to Date_fmt setting. The IED provides different formats to display
the date. Figure 6.12-68 shows display format menu:

- 711 -
CU
BU
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 6.12-68 Display format menu

Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter setting
Time_delimiter setting and Sec_delimiter setting.
Date format menu

(1) Move cursor to “Date_fmt”; and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
_Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
(2) Select desired format by moving cursor.

Date_fmt
10:48 1/3
_YYYYMMDD
MMDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
Figure 6.12-69 Date Format
Date delimiter menu

r
Display Format
10:48 1/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Date_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
_Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter
10:48 1/3 (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the desired
_-
/ format type.
.
Figure 6.12-70 Date delimite

- 712 -
CU
BU
Time delimiter menu

r
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Time_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
:
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (2) The time delimiter mark is switched.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
Figure 6.12-71 Time delimite

Second delimiter menu
Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
(2) The second delimiter mark is switched.

Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
,
Figure 6.12-72 Second
(v) DST (Summer time)

When DST is On, the user is needed to set details:
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
Summer time +
Off
Figure 6.12-73 DST (Summer time) menu

- 713 -
CU
BU
Notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure If summertime is started or
ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week must be filled “5”. The IED
controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of the month on Start_Week or
End_Week automatically.
Summer Time
(1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/13 Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
_Summer time +
Off After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer time
in detail.
Summer Time (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
10:48 1/9
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
Figure 6.12-74 DST setting
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time. The following procedure is a
case of starting weekday setting.
Summer Time
(1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Start_SM(Wday)
(2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
10:48
1/8
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time (3) Starting weekday is set.

10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Figure 6.12-75 DST setting

- 714 -
CU
BU
6.12.8 Test sub-menu

Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen
The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Figure 6.12-76 Test screen

(ii) Test mode screen
The Test Mode screen is shown in Figure 6.12-77. The Test Mode screen has four functions,
Test Option, Function Test, Binary Input and Binary Output.
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Figure 6.12-77 Test Mode screen

Test option screen: The Test Option screen, shown in Figure 6.12-78, is used
to select the following functions and perform a Test flag forced reset.
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Figure 6.12-78 Test Option screen

 Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)
This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication
packet. The Test flag is set to OFF by default. The Test flag is used in
combination with another device in the Test mode. When this option is
selected, the Test flag in the communication packet is reset temporarily to

- 715 -
CU
BU
reproduce a pseudo-operation condition.
 GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

This function is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending
information in Test mode. This function is used when there is a conflict in
communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
 GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription
information from another IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing
in case of bad reception (For example, Validation of Interlock determination).
The user can simulate a bad reception condition passively by using two
GOOSE Sending Blocks.
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid that the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED
under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
Function test screen: Function test screen is provided for testing; the use can
program test operations, which can be implemented in protection and control
functions. Figure 6.12-79 exemplifies the Test screen. Automatic supervision
will stop when the user sets Off for A.M.F (for more information about the
automatic supervision, see Chapter Automatic supervision).
Function Test
10:48 1/65
A.M.F. +
On
BU1_Exclusion +
Off
BU2_Exclusion +
Off
Figure 6.12-79 Function test menu (an example)
Binary input test screen: The user can have a virtual signal to a binary input
circuit using the binary input test screen. Figure 6.12-80 shows an example;
the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content displayed will differ
depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to section 6.5)

- 716 -
CU
BU
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 6.12-80 Binary input menu

Figure 6.12-81 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected.
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Figure 6.12-81 Setting menu for Slot #3 module

For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI1) on the
BIO1A module at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown
in Figure 6.12-81).
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 6.12-82 Setting menu after selecting “Slot #3-BIO1-SET”
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the
items required for simulation.
 ON: BI1 output is set forcibly to ON(Logic level=high(1)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 OFF: BI1 output is set forcibly to OFF(Logic level=low(0)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Use the screen shown in Figure 6.12-82 only to configure the BI signals for the
simulation test. This does not start the simulation.

- 717 -
CU
BU
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 6.12-82,
if the user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the
screen shown in Figure 6.12-81); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner
similar to that described for BI01.
After selecting OP in Figure 6.12-81, use the following screen to start the simulation
test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Figure 6.12-83 Execution menu of BI test

If key ENTER is pressed in Figure 6.12-83, the status will change to test status. The
following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER. Figure 6.12-84
shows that the IED is in simulation test mode.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Press <- to return

To previous page
Figure 6.12-84 Running test menu

Note: The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during
the simulation test period. The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is
not pressed.
Binary output test screen: The user is able to test a binary output circuit.
Figure 6.12-85 is an example of how to select a binary output from the Test
Mode screen.

- 718 -
CU
BU
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 6.12-85 Binary output menu

Figure 6.12-86 shows selection of IO#2 (Slot #2).
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 6.12-86 Setting menu for Slot #2 module
Figure 6.12-87 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2).
The procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit.
(Refer to Figure 6.12-82 to Figure 6.12-84)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 6.12-87 Setting menu after selecting “SLOT2-BO01-SET”
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary
output circuit.
 ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
 OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
(iii) TestFlag-EN screen

This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode. The user should select
TestFlag-EN in Figure 6.12-76 and select On or Off.

- 719 -
CU
BU
(iv) Mode change screen

When the user selects “Mode Change” from the Test sub-menu shown in Figure 6.12-76, the
following Mode change screen is displayed (Figure 6.12-88). This allows control from a remote
device (For example, SAS server) by configuring the MDCTRL-EN setting.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Figure 6.12-88 Mode Change sub-menu
(v) Signal monitoring screen

Figure 6.12-89 shows that the user can assign signal-monitoring points to the monitoring jacks
(A, B, and C) on the IED front panel. Incidentally, points have not been assigned for the
monitoring jacks in the menu below.
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
Figure 6.12-89 Signal monitoring sub-menu
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 6.12-90). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Figure 6.12-90 Selection menu

- 720 -
CU
BU
6.12.9 Information sub-menu

In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory, and not changed by the user. Figure 6.12-91 shows the
Information sub-menu. Table 6.12-9 shows detail of information that is displayed in this screen.
Information
10:48 1/10
[IED TYPE]
GRB200
__-00-111-22-33-44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
Figure 6.12-91 Information screen
Table 6.12-9 Information details

Display item Remark
[IED TYPE]
GRB200 Product information
-**-***-**-**-**-*** Ordering number in Hardware selection†
-****-***-** Ordering number in Software selection†
[Serial No.]
********** Product serial number
[Plant Name]
Preferred name The user can key preferred IED name using the GR-TIEMS
[Description]
Preferred contents The user can key preferred information using the GR-TIEMS
[CP1M Software]
GS2RBBM1**** Name and version number about the CPU Software
[FP1M Software]
GS2RBCK1**** Name and version number about the FEP Software
[IEC61850 eng]
G2M8500** Name and version number of IEC61850 engine
[IEC61850 Support]
Ed1/Ed1op/Ed2 Numbers of supporting 61850 edition in IED
[IEC61850 Date Model]
W2GRB00**** Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model
[IEC61850 SCL Ver.]
Edition ***(****) Version information at IED
[IEC61850 Mapping]
X2GRB200**** Name and version number of IEC61850 Mapping
[GOOSE Subscribe]
***** GOOSE Subscript information
[PLC Data]
P2GRB200**** PLC Data name and version number

CU
BU
6.12.10 Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords, active
or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID. Table 6.12-10 shows the
settings of the configurable access control function. Table 6.12-11 shows the allowed operation
items.
Table 6.12-10 Access control function settings

Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security
N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Setting
Control N.A N.A N.A ✔ ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔

Functions
Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(function
Monitoring
keys) N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(Reset/Revise)
allowed
F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
to operate
F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in
the Security setting.

- 722 -
CU
BU
Table 6.12-11 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
An operator can control a device. An operator can also change the mode
Control
between “Remote” and “Local”.
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.

- 723 -
CU
BU
6.12.11 Control sub-menu

The user can control Software switch with the LCD screen. Control sub-menu is provided to
operate; the user can turn On/Off a software switch by pressing Operation keys. Note that
Control sub-menus are only available when the IED is in “LOCAL” mode†. When the IED is in
“REMOTE” mode, an error message will be shown on the screen. Remember that the IED will
change to “REMOTE” mode if there is no operation for a while; then the IED can be monitored
remotely. Figure 6.12-92 shows “Control” sub-menu.
Control
10:48 1/1
_Software Switch >
Figure 6.12-92 Control sub-menu on LCD screen

†Note: The IED will have “Local” mode automatically when the following menus are
displayed on the LCD screen: “Main Menu”, “Control sub-menu”, “Selection
Executing”, “Operating completed”, “Operating canceled” or “Operating failed”.
Table 6.12-12 shows how to operate by the IED front panel. The IED can have several
control functions, which are dependent on the ordering code. For more information, see
Chapter Control and monitoring application (CU) or Appendix: Ordering for more information).
Table 6.12-12 Control step in DIR mode or SBO mode

Control Scheme Operation step
Direct Control 1) Set DIR mode in each control function.
Operation Mode‡ 2) Select a device and choose DIR, and press ENTER.
3) Press I (On) or O (Off)
4) A signal of control command is issued; control operation is
performed.
Select Before 1) Set SBO mode in each control function.
Control 2) Select a device and choose SBO, and press ENTER.
Operation 3) Verify that the selection is performed correctly and normally.
Mode‡ 4) Press I (On) or O (Off); controlling command is issued.
5) Control operation is carried out.
‡Note: We shall discuss about DIR and SBO modes in Chapter General control function:
Control mode.

6F2S1933 (0.04)
7 Technical description (BU)

Hardware contents Pages Pages
Binary IO (BIO) modules 743 Contact inputs and outputs 743
-Binary input (BI) circuits 743 -N/C contact 743
-Binary input (BI) features 743 -Form-C contact 743
-Binary output (BO) circuits 743 -Contact inputs 743
-Binary output (BO) features 743 Clock function (Date and time) 752
Communication modules 739 Human machine interface (HMI) 751
-for maintenance local PC 739 Group setting for relays 753
-for CU 742 Power supply module (PWS) 750
-for LAN 739 VT/CT modules for AC inputs (VCT) 730
Case structure and slot layout 726 -VCT22B 731
-1/2 size case 726 -VCT32B 732
-1/3 size case 728 -CT and VT ratio setting 734
-Changing rated current 735
Recording function contents Pages Pages

Disturbance recorder 761 Event recorder 757
-Maximum number of recording 761 Fault recorder 755
-Recording signals 761
Metering function contents Pages Pages

Accumulated time 769 Metering features 767
Counter features 769 -Information 767
-Information in GCNT 769 -Diminishing small value 768
-Measurement settings 767
-Information on the screen 767
User interface contents Pages Pages

Control sub-menu 777 Outline 773
Information sub-menu 777 Record sub-menu 775
I/O setting 776 Setting sub-menu 776
Monitoring sub-menu 775 Security setting sub-menu 777
-Metering 775 Time sub-menu 777
-Binary I/O 775 Test sub-menu 777
-Communication 775
-Relay elements 775
-Statistics 775

- 725 -
CU
Chapter 7.1: Technical description (BU)
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
IED case and module slot

7.1.1 1/2 size case
Figure 7.1-1 shows diagrams of the 1/2 size case constructed with type using compression
terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen
from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.

Slots are provided for mounting modules. A transformer module (VCT), a signal processing and
communication module (CPU), and a power supply module (PWS) are mounted at predefined
locations in the case. Binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are placed in slots (IO#1 to IO#3),
these slot locations are determined before factory shipment. For detailed information on slot
locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs, see external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical external connection).

The group of terminal blocks viewed from the rear is shown. With respect to BIs, BOs, and
BIOs, their terminal blocks are designed with upper terminal and lower one and they are
labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T1”, “T2” and “T3”. The upper and lower terminals are
provided in the form of one terminal block for respective BIs, BOs, or BIOs. Terminal screw
numbers for each terminal block relate to individual binary circuits. The user should check
respective configuration circuit. Each slot for the BIOs is identified with its alpha-numeric
reference (or slot reference) on an IED case. For example, the user can identify that slot “IO#1”
is linked with alpha-numeric reference “T1”.
PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side; hence, the user finds it with alpha-
numeric reference “T4”, and that is discussed later
Communication modules, which are placed between VCT and BIOs, are labeled with “C11”
to “C15”. Those are provided for LAN, IEC61850 communication, etc.

A schematic figure illustrates the location of slots and terminals: VCT, BIOs, and PWS. It is
useful when the user need to set BIO modules using their setting tables. (See Appendix: Typical
external connection).

- 726 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
a. View from front side

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 C11
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 C12
12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18
C13
19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24
C14
25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 FG1
35 35 35 35 C15
E
36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 7.1-1 Type using compression terminals (1/2 size case)

- 727 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.1.2 1/3 size case

Figure 7.1-2 shows diagrams of the 1/3 size case constructed with type using compression
terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen
from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.

Slots are provided: the transformer module (VCT), the signal processing and communication
module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) and binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO)
are placed into slots. The binary IO module is located at slot “IO#1”.

With respect to the binary IO modules, the terminal block is designed with both upper and
lower terminals; they are labeled with the alpha-numeric reference “T1”. Users should note
that the upper terminal and the lower terminal are provided as a single terminal block. The
terminal screw numbers relate to the binary IO module circuits; thus the user should check
the configuration of each circuit.
Note that the PWS is labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T2”.

The user can find the location of VCT, BIO, and PWS modules form the schematic diagram. It
is useful when the user wishes to set binary IO modules using their setting tables The user
can see the modules at the slot locations respectively from external connection figures (See
Appendix: Typical external connection).

- 728 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
a. View from front side

T2 T1
1
2
1
2
C11
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9 VC1
10
11
10
11
C12
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
C13
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25
26
25
26
C14
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
32 32
33 33
34 34
C15 FG1
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 38
E
39 39
40 40
FG FGA
b. View from rear side
T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 7.1-2 Slots and terminal blocks in 1/3 case

- 729 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)

The transformer module (VCT) is used to acquire the power system quantities in the BU; the
VCT is used to measure the three-phase currents in a feeder. It can measure three-phase
currents and the zero-sequence current. A safety feature is available such that all of the VCT
current inputs are shorted when a VCT module is removed from the IED case; the user should
short circuit all AC current inputs.
Note: We represent respective input signals at the “AC analog input (VCT)” as “Channel
numbers (Ch*)” when settings as to the ratio and others are required. The figure
below shows the operation screen for the AC analog input, which we shall discuss
later. The term “AI#1” in the below figure represents the VC alpha-numeric
references discussed in section 7.1.
The blow figures exemplify the ratio settings for respective channels on the VCT. For more
information about the operation of LCD screen, see section 7.11. The user can also set them
using GR-TIMES (see chapter Engineering tool).
AC Analog Input AI#1 AI#1
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12 10:48 1/2
AI#1 > CH10 > AI1_Ch10Ratio +
CH11 > 2000
CH12 >
CH13 >
Figure 7.2-1 Setting samples about AC analog input (LCD screen)
Figure 7.2-2 Setting sample of AC analog input (GR-TIEMS)
Note: The user should set the CT ratio and verify rated current prior to operation. For
more information, see section 7.2.4 and 7.2.5.

CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.2.1 VCT22B
VCT22B is designed with inputs for a single three-phase current and a zero-sequence current.
Input terminals are provided for these currents, as shown in Figure 7.2-3. The currents are fed
to the internal circuits within the IED.
VCT22B AC
Full scale
analog
Terminal Input Type of Jum multiplied by
Screw input
Number signal input per rated current
channel
(Ir‡)
number
1 2 – – – – –
3 4 – – – – –
5 6 – – – – –
7 8 – – – – –
9 10 – – – – –
11 12 – – – – –
Ia
13 14 – – – – –
Ib
15 16 – – – – –
Ic
17 18 – – – – –
Ie
19 20 Ia Current W10 ch10 65.536×Ir (A)
21 22 Ib Current W11 ch11 65.536×Ir (A)
23 24 Ic Current W12 ch12 65.536×Ir (A)
25 26 Ie† Current W13 ch13 1.024 (A)
27 28 – – – – –
29 30 – – – – –
Figure 7.2-3 Transformer module (VCT22B)
†Note: Zero-sequence current (Ie) is used in the metering function. When the monitoring
of Ie is not required in the metering function, the user should not connect
Terminals 25 and 26; the user should lock the metering function. (For more
information, see chapter Automatic supervision)
‡Note:“Rated current (Ir)” is discussed in section 7.2.5.

- 731 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.2.2 VCT32B
VCT32B is designed with inputs for a single three-phase current and zero-sequence currents.
The VCT32B is used only in the 1/3 case. It has 20 input terminal screws, but some of them
are not used, as shown in Figure 7.2-4.
VCT32B
AC analog Full scale
Ju
Termina Input Type of input multiplied by
l Screw mp
Number Signal input channel rated current
er
number (Ir‡)
1 2 – – – – –
3 4 – – – – –
Ia
5 6 – – – – –
Ib
7 8 Ia Current W4 ch4 65.536×Ir (A)
Ic
9 10 Ib Current W5 ch5 65.536×Ir (A)
(Not used) 11 12 Ic Current W6 ch6 65.536×Ir (A)
Ie 13 14 Not used NA NA NA NA
(Not used)
15 16 Ie Current W8 Ch8 4.096×Ir (A)
17 18 Not used NA NA NA NA
19 20 – – – – –
Figure 7.2-4 Transformer module (VCT32B)
†Note: Zero-sequence current (Ie) is used in the metering function. When the monitoring
of Ie is not required in the metering function, the user should not connect
Terminals 15 and 16; the user should lock the metering function. (For more
information, see chapter Automatic supervision)
‡Note:“Rated current (Ir)” is discussed in section 7.2.5.

- 732 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.2.3 Constitution of VCT

Figure 7.2-5 shows VCT terminal block and its schematic diagram for VCT22B and VCT32B.
Terminal screw numbers are shown on both the terminal block and the schematic diagram.
The user should note that the last terminal screw2 and FG terminal are connected with a short-
wire by default.
VC1
VC1
VCT Alpha-
numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
Short-bar 21
22
23
FG1
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
1
Short-bar
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 7.2-5 VC1 terminals2 (Rear view)

1Note: Short-wire between the last screw (30 at VCT22B; 20 at VCT32B) and FG is
connected by the manufacturer.
2Note: The figure is just drawn for general instruction about VCT structure.

- 733 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.2.4 Setting VCT ratio

As input sources are transformed with various VTs and CTs in the power system, the user shall
set each VT or CT ratio at each VCT terminal.
(i) Setting ratios regarding CTs

When the CT quantity flows into the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary current to the
secondary current should be set. For example, the user is required to set a value ‘4000’ for the
[AI1_Ch10_Ratio] when the primary is 4000A and the secondary is 1A (i.e., 4000/1=4000).
(ii) Setting list

Setting of AC analog input for VCT22B (Function ID: 200211)
s value
VC1 AI1_Ch10_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#10 at VCT#1 1.000
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch11_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#11 at VCT#1 1.000
reference AI1_Ch12_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#12 at VCT#1 1.000
Setting of AC analog input for VCT32B (Function ID: 200211)

s value
VC1 AI1_Ch4_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#4 at VCT#1 1.000
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch5_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#5 at VCT#1 1.000
reference AI1_Ch6_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#6 at VCT#1 1.000

- 734 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.2.5 Sifting VCT rated current

In accordance with the ordering code, a rated current (either 1 or 5A) has been set previously
in the manufacture. If the user wishes to alter to other rated current, the user can do it by
using jumpers† on the VCT‡. This section illustrates the locations of the jumpers. To see the
actual workflows, jump to Chapter Installation and setting: Changing rated current.
†Note:The user needs optional jumpers for altering. To get the optional ones, order them
the sales representative with ‘EP-221 optional code’.
‡Note:Remind that the user needs to alter the CPU configuration. See page 740. One of
EP-221 jumpers is required to use for the initialization.
(i) Rating jumpers

Rating jumpers are provided to determine the CT rated current (1 or 5A) on the VCT circuit.
Figure 7.2-6 shows the locations of the rating jumpers. They are identified with marks “W1”
to “W14” on the VCT circuit board. “W*” letters correspond to the AC analog input channel
numbers, which have been discussed previously.
Front Rear
Tr.1 Tr.2
Rating jumper locations
W1
W2
Connector
W3 Tr.3 Tr.4
Rating jumpers
W4
W5
Tr.5 Tr.6
W6
W7
W8
W9 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12 Tr.9
W13 Tr.10
W14
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
Layout of VCT components VCT Photograph

receptacle
header header
5 A rated setting (Jumper closed) 1 A rated setting (Jumper open)

Figure 7.2-6 Rating jumpers and locations
(ii) DEP settings

All [AI1_Ch*_Rating] settings are need to have DEP in order that VCT rated current will follow
the CPU configuration. The “DEP” will be set unconditionally when the IED is initialized by
the GR-TIEMS; thereby, the user need not have [AI1_Ch*_Rating] settings respectively,

- 735 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201)

U Default setting
Range n value
Setting item i Contents Notes
1A 5A t 1A 5A
rating rating s rating rating
VC1 AI1_Ch1_Rating DEP / (1A) / (5A) – Rated current at CH#1 DEP
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Rating DEP / (1A) / (5A) – Rated current at CH#2 DEP
references AI1_Ch3_Rating DEP / (1A) / (5A) – Rated current at CH#3 DEP
AI1_Ch4_Rating DEP / (1A) / (5A) – Rated current at CH#4 DEP
Note: Channel numbers for rated settings are dependent on VCT type.
1A and 5A are shown above, but neglect them. They are invalid here. Confirm
that all have DEP setting from LCD menu or GR-TIEMS screen.
(iii) Rated current shift example on VCT

Figure 7.2-7 shows the setting items and corresponding rating jumpers about VCT22B.
VCT32B is shown in .Figure 7.2-8.
VCT jumper: Close or open the circuits named W* numbers corresponding to the
currents. The hatched areas are required to close or open.
For changing to 5A rated, insert jumpers at W10, 11, 12.
For changing to 1A rated, remove jumper at W10, 11, 12.

- 736 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
LCD screen
AC
Terminal I/O setting sub-menu
Input Type of Jumper analog
Screw AI#1
signal input position input
Number 10:48 1/2
channel
AI1_Ch110Ratio +
1 2 – – – – 2000
3 4 – – – – AI1_Ch110_Rating +
DEP
5 6 – – – –
7 8 – – – –
9 10 – – – –
11 12 – – – – VCT circuit board Rear
Front
13 14 – – – –
15 16 – – – – W1

Tr.1 Tr.2
W2
17 18
W3
19 20 Current W10
Connector
Ia Ch10 W4 Tr.3 Tr.4
21 22 Ib Current W11 Ch11 W5
W6
23 24 Ic Current W12 Ch12 W7 Tr.5
W8
25 26 – – – – W9
27 28 – – – – W10
W11
W12
W13
W14 Tr.9 Tr.10
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
Figure 7.2-7 Rating jumpers for VCT22B
Configuration switch: Change the CPU to constrained mode (see Section 7.3.2).
Writing settings: [AI1_Ch10/11/12_Rating] settings, corresponding to the CTs,

shall have DEP absolutely. Rewriting the setting items is required with GR-
TIEMS. Confirm that DEP has been set definitely after the rewrite (for more
detail, see Chapter Installation and setting: Changing rated current).

- 737 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
LCD screen
AC
Terminal I/O setting sub-menu
Screw AI#1
Number signal input position input
channel 10:48 1/2
AI1_Ch5Ratio +
1 2 – – – – 2000
3 4 – – – – AI1_Ch5_Rating +
DEP
5 6 – – – –
7 8 Ia Current W5 Ch5
9 10 Ib Current W6 Ch6
11 12 Ic Current W7 Ch7 VCT circuit board Rear
Front
13 14 – – – –
Tr.3 Tr.1 Tr.2
15 16 Ie Current W8 Ch8

17 18 – – – –
Tr.5
19 20 – – – –
Connector
W5
W6 Tr.6
W7
W8
W13
Tr.7 Tr.8
W14
Tr.13 Tr.14
Figure 7.2-8 Rating jumpers for VCT32B

- 738 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Signal processing and communication module (CPU)

Signal-processing and communication module (CPU) consists of CPM2 board and COM boards.
The boards are layout on the CPU by PCB connectors as shown in Figure 7.3-1.
CPU
CPM2
COM#1
CPU COM#2
COM#3
Figure 7.3-1 Communication modules (COM#1, #2, #3) on CPU at BU

Note: BU can have three COM modules: for example, #1 for SAS, #2 for Local PC, and
#3 for BU–CU communication.
7.3.1 Signal processing

The operation of relay and control applications are achieved with the CPU on the CPM2 board.
The CPU board has SDRAM, MRAM, and NOR-Flash; the NOR-Flash is used to store setting
data and recording data; the MRAM is used to store several counter values, etc. Both are of
non-volatile memory so that the stored data will be not be erased if the power is cut off.
IED
CPU COM#1 LAN network

BIO#1
CPM2
VCT#1
LAN for Local PC
BIO#2
BIO#3
COM#3 IED (CU)
Figure 7.3-2 Diagram of processing

- 739 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.3.2 Configuration switch

The CPU module has a jumper to change configuration mode (Jumper W6). Figure 7.3-3 shows
the location. For default mode (normal), Pins 1-2 and 3-4 are open (i.e., default configuration
has been set by the manufacture in accordance with the order code). When the user wishes to
alter the other mode particularly, close either Pin 1-2 or Pin 3-4 using a jumper (Optional EP-
221).
CPU
W5
COM#1
2-1
4-3
COM#2
CPM2
W6
2-1
4-3 COM#3
W7 CPU
2-1
4-3
COM#4
W8
2-1 COM#5
4-3
W6 W6
Jumper Configuration mode
(1-2) (3-4)
2-1 Default (normal) mode(i.e.,
Open Open
4-3 manufacture setting mode )
2-1
Closed Open Constrained mode (1A rated)
4-3
2-1
Open Closed Constrained mode (5A rated)
4-3
Figure 7.3-3 Configuration switch

Note: Alter the configuration mode before VCT setting. Using GR-TIEMS, the user
needs to rewrite the settings. See Chapter Installation and setting: Changing
rated current for more detail.

- 740 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.3.3 Communication module for maintenance PC

100Base-TX/1000BaseT, 100Base-FX, or 1000Base-LX module is provided for SAS
communication or maintenance local PC, as shown in Table 7.3-1.
Table 7.3-1 Communication modules
Module 100Base-TX/1000Base-T 100Base-FX 1000Base-LX
Connector RJ45 type SC type LC type (Duplex)
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic Fiber optic
Usage Substation automation system or LAN for Local PC
100/1000 100BASE-ＦX 1000
BASE-T BASE-LX
Symbol
TX
RX
7.3.4 CU-BU communication module

For communication between a CU and a BU, a remote communication board is used. The
module is placed at C13, as shown in Figure 7.3-4. Table 7.3-2 describes its specification. The
user can also find the information in Chapter Technical description (CU): CU-BU
communication module.
Table 7.3-2 CU-BU optical cable information
I/F CU communication
Connector Duplex LC
Medium SM (1310nm wave length)
Usage CU and BU communication
CU
communication
Symbol

- 741 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.3.5 Location of communication modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. The user should understand the referencing, when the
user examines the connection diagrams. Figure 7.3-4 shows 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
module placed at C11.
Location number of
100BASE-TX Com. Port VCT SLOT
communication module
/1000BASE-T
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100/1000
C11 Blank panel BASE-T
CU–BU
C12
communication
C12 (BLANK)
Blank panel C13

C13 CU
Communi
cation
C14
C14 (BLANK)
Blank panel
FG1
E C15
C15
(BLANK)
FGE
FG1
Figure 7.3-4 Communication module in BU (Ordering ‘1J’ at E&F positions)

- 742 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Binary IO Module (BI, BO, and BIO)

7.4.1 Features and circuits
Binary IO module in BU is the same as the one in CU. Therefore, user can find the BIO
descriptions in Chapter Technical description (CU): Binary IO module. Note that BU can have
up to three binary IO modules (See section 7.1).
For the lists of setting and Data IDs about BU’s BIO module, see section 7.4.2 and 7.4.3.

- 743 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.4.2 Setting
(i) Input settings of IO_SLOT1 to IO_SLOT3 (Function ID: 200B01 to
200B03)
s value

…… …… …… …… ……


s value

BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
…… …… …… …… ……


- 744 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Output settings of IO_SLOT1 to IO_SLOT3 (Function ID: 200B01 to

200B03)
Default setting
Unit
s
value

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

……. ……. ……. …….
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit

- 745 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.4.3 Data ID
(i) Data IDs for binary input IO_SLOT1 to IO_SLOT3 (Function ID: 200B01 to
200B03)
Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI11 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI12 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI13 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI14 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI15 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI16 signal without filter
After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter

- 746 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic

- 747 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Data IDs for binary output IO_SLOT1 to IO_SLOT3 (Function ID: 200B01 to
200B03)
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal

- 748 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic

- 749 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Power supply module (PWS)

Power supply module in BU is the same as the one in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
PWS descriptions in Chapter Technical description (CU): Power supply module.

750
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

Figure 7.6-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI†) on the front panel.
The HMI has screen (standard LCD‡), LED indicators (#1– #26), L/R and other operation keys*,
function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB receptacle. The user can find
the display menus in section 7.11.
LED#1
LED indicators (In service)
(#1–#26)
LCD screen MIMIC screen

Indicator label mode
MENU|MIMIC
key
Operation keys
L/R LEDs
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
Standard LCD screen Large LCD screen
Figure 7.6-1 IED front panel with Standard or large LCD screen
†Note:The same structure (i.e., LED, keys, and jacks & ports) is provided for both CU
and BU. For more information about the HMI, see Chapter Technical description
(CU): Human machine interface.
‡Note:If large LCD screen is mounted on the IED, the user can control the control
devices (SPOS, etc.) by touching symbols on the LCD screen, when the user has
pressed MIMIC key (MIMIC screen mode). To display system outline or
measurement values in the Large LCD screen, the user should design the screen
by MIMIC engineering. For more information, see Appendix: Engineer exercise.
*Note:L/R LEDs is blinking for four seconds when the IED is powered up; and then
afterward, LED#1(In service) is lit; menus are screened on the LCD.

751
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Clock function (Date and time)

The clock function is provided in the BU. It is same as the CU’s clock function. The user can
set DST (summer time) or time zone with settings (see Chapter Technical description (CU):
Clock function, for more details). BU’s clock can be synchronized using SNTP or BI method
with setting [Time_Sync_Src].
The clock can be synchronized if the following synchronization methods are taken in the IED
(BU) with the setting [Time_Sync_Src]:
 SNTP method (Figure 6.8-3)
 Binary Input (BI) method (Figure 6.8-7)
Time server1 Time server2
LAN
………….
IED-1 IED-2 IED-64
(BU1) (BU2) (BU64)
Figure 7.7-1 BU1 to BU64 connected with Time servers via LAN
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 7.7-2 BU connected with signal generator via BI module

- 752 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Grouping relay settings (Group1–8)

Grouping relay settings in BU is the same as the one in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
grouping settings in Chapter Technical description (CU): Grouping relay settings. The BU can
have eight groups regarding CBF, COMTP, EFP, OC, EF and PROT-COMMON, as shown in
Figure 7.8-1. Note that changing the group cannot be not carried out instantly.
Settings
Protection (Relay)
Group1 setting
CBF
COMTP
EFP
OC
TRC
Group2 setting
CBF
COMTP
EFP
OC
TRC
Group8 setting
CBF
COMTP
EFP
OC
TRC
Figure 7.8-1 Eight groups for BU relay settings
(i) Changing group number by menu operation

The user can change the group number using the menu† on the IED screen. See Section 7.11.4.
(ii) Changing group number by user-programming

Another changing method is provided by programing PLC logics
(iii) Setting
Un Default setting
its value
Active Group 1 to 8 – Selection of a setting group number 1

- 753 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) Data ID
314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Reception for setting group number

3200001001 ACT_GRP
3010011001 COM_CHG
3010031001 CTRL_CHG
3010021001 PRO_CHG
3010001001 SYS_CHG

- 754 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Recording function
7.9.1 Fault recorder
Several quantity items (amplitude and phase angle of current, etc.) are memorized in the fault
recorder, as shown in Table 7.9-1. Quantities just before the fault are also memorized. The pre-
fault quantities are captured 10 seconds before tripping, but it is possible to take back longer
using the setting [Pre-Fault time]. The user can also select the operation identifies arbitrarily
using the settings [OP Mode ID1] etc. For example, if the user needs to record the operation
output relating the overcurrent relay element (i.e., OC1), the user has to choose its operation
signal ‘458A01 8000011B23” and set it for the setting [OP Mode ID1]. Remember to program
the displaying name using the setting [OP Mode Name1] (e.g., “OC1-OPT”). Note that the
length of the displaying name should be less than 18 letters. The user should find blanks in
the setting list, because several IDs have been already set.
Table 7.9-1 Recording quantities at the pre-fault ant the fault

Abbreviations Displayed quantities
Magnitude and phase angle of phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic) for each bay
Ia, Ib, Ic
unit (BU)
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component currents (I1,

I1, I2, I0
I2, I0) for each bay unit (BU)
f Frequency

- 755 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 7.9-2 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in the BU

Settings in Fault recorder Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Actual PLC connection points
Data IDs Screen names Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID1] 412A01 8000001B65 [OP Mode Name1] DIFZA DIFZA-TRIP [OP Mode ID97] Not assigned [OP Mode Name97] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID2] 412A01 8100001B66 [OP Mode Name2] DIFZB DIFZB-TRIP [OP Mode ID98] Not assigned [OP Mode Name98] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID3] 412A01 8200001B67 [OP Mode Name3] DIFZC DIFZC-TRIP [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] 412A01 8300001B68 [OP Mode Name4] DIFZD DIFZD-TRIP [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] 412A01 8400001B69 [OP Mode Name5] DIFZE DIFZE-TRIP [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID6] 412A01 8500001B6A [OP Mode Name6] DIFZF DIFZF-TRIP [OP Mode ID102] Not assigned [OP Mode Name102] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID7] 412A01 8600001B6B [OP Mode Name7] DIFZG DIFZG-TRIP [OP Mode ID103] Not assigned [OP Mode Name103] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID8] 412A01 8700001B6C [OP Mode Name8] DIFZH DIFZH-TRIP [OP Mode ID104] Not assigned [OP Mode Name104] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID9] 412A01 8E00001B6D [OP Mode Name9] DIFCH DIFCH-TRIP [OP Mode ID105] Not assigned [OP Mode Name105] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID10] 412A01 8600001B61 [OP Mode Name10] DIF-TR DIF-OPT-TR [OP Mode ID106] Not assigned [OP Mode Name106] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID11] 456A01 8300001B6F [OP Mode Name11] CBF-RE CBF_RE.OPT [OP Mode ID107] Not assigned [OP Mode Name107] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID12] 456A01 8400001B23 [OP Mode Name12] CBF CBF-ZONE.OPT [OP Mode ID108] Not assigned [OP Mode Name108] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID13] 456A01 8600001B76 [OP Mode Name13] CBF-TR CBF-TR.TRIP [OP Mode ID109] Not assigned [OP Mode Name109] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID14] 457A01 8400001B23 [OP Mode Name14] EFP EFP_ZONE.OPT [OP Mode ID110] Not assigned [OP Mode Name110] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID15] 457A01 8600001B6A [OP Mode Name15] EFP-TR EFP-TR.TRIP [OP Mode ID111] Not assigned [OP Mode Name111] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID16] 486A01 8400001B23 [OP Mode Name16] COM COM.OPT [OP Mode ID112] Not assigned [OP Mode Name112] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID17] 486A01 8600001B63 [OP Mode Name17] COM-TR COM-OPT-TR [OP Mode ID113] Not assigned [OP Mode Name113] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID18] 458A01 8000011B23 [OP Mode Name18] OC1 OC1-OPT [OP Mode ID114] Not assigned [OP Mode Name114] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID19] 458A01 8100021B23 [OP Mode Name19] OC2 OC2-OPT [OP Mode ID115] Not assigned [OP Mode Name115] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID20] 459A01 8000011B23 [OP Mode Name20] EF1 EF1-OPT [OP Mode ID116] Not assigned [OP Mode Name116] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID21] 459A01 8100021B23 [OP Mode Name21] EF2 EF2-OPT [OP Mode ID117] Not assigned [OP Mode Name117] - Not assigned

- 756 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.9.2 Event recorder

The event is memorized when the event recorder detects changing the trigger signal that is
connected with the logic signal; they are defined using settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID768].
Settings [End of E.Record-1] and [End of E.Record-2] are provided for grouping†. All are
tabulated in Table 7.9-3 to Table 7.9-5.
†Note:The GR-TIEMS uses terms ‘Level1’, ‘Level2’, and ‘Level3’ to represent the ‘Event
Record1’, ‘Event Record2’, and ‘Event Record3’. The scope of each level is the same
as the scope of each group. The GR-TIEMS does not show unused triggers and
Trigger ID numbers automatically when the triggers are displayed on the screen.

- 757 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID2] 220001 3110211001 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID92] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID182] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID183] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID14] 200602 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID15] 200710 3001001001 On E.Record1 clear [Trigger ID105] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID195] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID18] 200401 30A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID39] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID129] 4F0A01 8000011B60 On-Off DS11_CLOSE [Trigger ID219] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID49] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID139] 4F0A01 8F00011B6F On-Off CB_CLOSE [Trigger ID229] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID50] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID140] 4F0A01 8000001B6B On-Off LOCAL-BRIDGE [Trigger ID230] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID67] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID157] 4A2A01 8300101B67 On-Off GEN.TRIP1 [Trigger ID247] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID68] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID158] 4A2A01 8000101B64 On-Off GEN.TRIP1-A [Trigger ID248] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID69] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID159] 4A2A01 8100101B65 On-Off GEN.TRIP1-B [Trigger ID249] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID70] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID160] 4A2A01 8200101B66 On-Off GEN.TRIP1-C [Trigger ID250] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID161] 4A2A01 8300201B67 On-Off GEN.TRIP2 [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID72] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID162] 4A2A01 8000201B64 On-Off GEN.TRIP2-A [Trigger ID252] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID73] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID163] 4A2A01 8100201B65 On-Off GEN.TRIP2-B [Trigger ID253] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID74] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID164] 4A2A01 8200201B66 On-Off GEN.TRIP2-C [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID75] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID165] 4A2A01 8600001B64 On-Off GEN.TR.TRIP [Trigger ID255] (Not Assigned) Off -

- 758 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 7.9-4 Event2 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record-2]=512
[Trigger ID266] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID356] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID446] 530001 3109001001 Change R/L Key
[Trigger ID283] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID373] 528001 3107011EA1 On LED RST [Trigger ID463] (Not Assigned) Off -

- 759 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 760 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.9.3 Disturbance recorder

Note that the maximum number for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the
recording time and the sampling rate. Table 7.9-6 illustrates the maximum number.. Ten
analog quantities and 256 logical signals are record in a disturbance phenomenon.
Table 7.9-6 Max number depending on time settings
Recording Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
period set with Setting [Sampling Rate] in 50Hz sys. Setting [Sampling Rate] in 60Hz sys.
[Record Time] 7.5º 15º 7.5º 15º
1 sec 255 255 204 255
3 sec 93 170 78 146
5 sec 56 102 46 93
(i) Number of analog quantities

For example, when VCT22B is used in the IED, currents and voltage in Table 7.9-7 are
recorded. For more information about the VCT, see section 7.2.
Table 7.9-7 Recording number of logic signals depending on time settings

VCT types 22B
Ia
Ib
Currents
Ic
Ie
Number of recordings 10
(ii) Number of logical signals

Using settings [Binary Signal*], the user can select 256 logic signal arbitrary. The logic signals
that the user has selected should be termed with user’s preferred names using settings [Binary
Sig.Name*]. Table 7.9-8 tabulates the default settings.

- 761 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 7.9-8 Setting list for logic signals

[Binary Sig. [Binary Sig. [Binary Sig.
Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins
Name] Name] Name]
[Binary Signal1] 4F0A01 8000011B60 DS11_CLOSE REPLICA_BU [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal11] 4F0A01 8F00011B6F CB_CLOSE REPLICA_BU [Binary Signal101] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal201] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal12] 4F0A01 8000001B6B LOCAL-BRIDGE REPLICA_BU [Binary Signal102] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal202] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal13] 4A2A01 8300101B67 GEN.TRIP1 TRC_BU [Binary Signal103] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal203] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal14] 4A2A01 8000101B64 GEN.TRIP1-A TRC_BU [Binary Signal104] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal204] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal15] 4A2A01 8100101B65 GEN.TRIP1-B TRC_BU [Binary Signal105] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal205] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal16] 4A2A01 8200101B66 GEN.TRIP1-C TRC_BU [Binary Signal106] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal206] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal17] 4A2A01 8300201B67 GEN.TRIP2 TRC_BU [Binary Signal107] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal207] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal18] 4A2A01 8000201B64 GEN.TRIP2-A TRC_BU [Binary Signal108] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal208] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal19] 4A2A01 8100201B65 GEN.TRIP2-B TRC_BU [Binary Signal109] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal209] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal20] 4A2A01 8200201B66 GEN.TRIP2-C TRC_BU [Binary Signal110] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal210] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal21] 4A2A01 8600001B64 GEN.TR.TRIP TRC_BU [Binary Signal111] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal211] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal22] 412A01 8000001B65 DIFZA-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal112] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal212] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal23] 412A01 8100001B66 DIFZB-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal113] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal213] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal24] 412A01 8200001B67 DIFZC-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal114] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal214] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal25] 412A01 8300001B68 DIFZD-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal115] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal215] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal26] 412A01 8400001B69 DIFZE-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal116] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal216] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal27] 412A01 8500001B6A DIFZF-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal117] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal217] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal28] 412A01 8600001B6B DIFZG-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal118] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal218] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal29] 412A01 8700001B6C DIFZH-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal119] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal219] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal30] 412A01 8E00001B6D DIFCH-TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal120] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal220] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal31] 412A01 8600001B61 DIF-TR.TRIP DIF_BU [Binary Signal121] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal221] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal32] 456A01 8300001B6F CBF-RE-OPT CBF [Binary Signal122] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal222] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal33] 456A01 8400001B23 CBF CBF [Binary Signal123] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal223] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal34] 456A01 8600001B76 CBF-TR.TRIP CBF [Binary Signal124] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal224] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal35] 457A01 8400001B23 EFP-OPT EFP [Binary Signal125] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal225] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal36] 457A01 8600001B6A EFP-TR.TRIP EFP [Binary Signal126] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal226] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal37] 486A01 8400001B23 COM-OPT COMTP [Binary Signal127] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal227] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal38] 486A01 8600001B63 COM-TR.TRIP COMTP [Binary Signal128] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal228] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal39] 458A01 8000011B23 OC1-OPT OC [Binary Signal129] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal229] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal40] 458A01 8100021B23 OC2-OPT OC [Binary Signal130] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal230] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal41] 459A01 8000011B23 EF1-OPT EF [Binary Signal131] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal231] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal42] 459A01 8100021B23 EF2-OPT EF [Binary Signal132] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal232] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal43] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal133] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal233] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal57] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal157] (Not Assigned) - ….

- 762 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
7.9.4 Setting
Setting of FAULT_RECORD(Function ID: 200602)
s value
Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 Sec. Recording time before the fault 10
Op Mode ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Setting of EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710)

s value
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –

- 763 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting of DRT_LP(Function ID: 4B0001)

Default
Range Uni
Setting item Contents setting value Notes
ts
OC-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-DRT enable Off
OC-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OC-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
Setting of DISTURB_REC(Function ID: 200401)

Uni Default
ts setting value
Record Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Time for disturbance recording 3.0

Sampling Rate 7.5 - 15.0 deg Sampling rate in electrical degree 7.5
Pre-fault Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Pre-fault time 0.3
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal1 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trip Trig.SW Off / On – Operation with the TRC trip command On
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Binary Signal256 (Preferred DataID) – Mode setting for the detection –
Binary
(Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal768 –
Sig.Name256

- 764 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

FLTRCDING 8020101001 Data writing in the fault recorder
FR_CLR 3000001001 Data erasing in the fault recorder


EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
POWER ON 3100001001 Detection of switch On

DRT_LP (Function ID: 4B0001)
8000001C20 DRT-LP DRT-LP protection operated
8000011C20 OC-DRT-A OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OC-DRT-B OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OC-DRT-C OC-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)

DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
80A0041001 DSTRING Writing the disturbance data
30A0001001 DSTR_CLR Data erased
80A0031001 DSTR_MADE Completion for writing the disturbance data
32A0011001 DSTR_MAX Maximum possible number of the operations

- 765 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
32A0021001 DSTR_NUM Operation counter

- 766 -
CU
Chapter 7.10: Technical description (BU) 6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Metering function
The monitoring function is provided to measure the number of power quantities and statistics
data obtained on VCT and BI circuits. When instruments start measuring power quantities,
the data are collected through the circuits mathematically and accurately, and shown on
several monitoring screens. The current data (I) will be measured with ±0.5% accuracy. The
frequency data will be measured with ±0.03% accuracy.
7.10.1 Metering data (Metering group)

Several abbreviations are screened for metering data, which shown in the below Table.
Table 7.10-1 Metering data

Groups Abbreviations Displayed quantities
Ia, Ib, Ic Magnitude and phase angle of phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic) at each BU
Metering I1, I2, I0 Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component (I1, I2, I0) at each BU
f Frequency
7.10.2 Metering screen

The user can see current data on the LCD screen. Figure 7.10-1 shows the sample information
about currents at BU. The current data is shown with its phase values, which are referenced
with positive-sequence current (I1) is measured at BU.
Metering
10:48 1/8
Ia
12.345kA 123.5deg
Ib
12.345kA 123.5deg
Ic
12.345kA 123.5deg
Figure 7.10-1 Current metering on LCD screen at BU

Note: If VCT does not have any quantity, it is displayed such as “***.**” and “–––––”.
(i) Setting for measurements

Selecting either primary/secondary values
A value of the primary side is displayed normally, but that of the secondary side can be
displayed when Secondary is set for setting [Display_Value]. Table 7.10-2 shows effective
digits when Secondary is set.

- 767 -
CU
BU
Metering
10:48 1/5
Display Value +
Primary
I-Display Unit +
kA
I-Valid level +
4.00 %

Note: For the operation of the menu, see section 7.11.3.
Table 7.10-2 Effective digits for metering in the secondary side
Maximum number of significant
Metering digits after decimal point
Settings
screens
Current/Voltage Phase angle
Primary
Voltage 1
Secontray
1
Primary 2
Current
Secontray 3
Unit setting
The user can selct units of metering values. For example, the current unit is preferred
displaying in kA, set kA for the [I-Display Unit]. Table 6.11-3 shows the list of metering unit.
Table 7.10-3 Display unit
Metering item Setting Selection of a unit to display
Current (I) [I-Display Unit] Ampare (A) or kilo-ampare (kA)
(ii) Diminishing a very small value to display zero

Negligible metering values will be taken into account zero. The user can set the level to
diminish in % using setting [I-Valid Level], at which default ‘4.00’ are set for that. Thus, zero
(0) will be displayed when the applied quantities at the VCT, which are lesser than the setting
levels.

- 768 -
CU
BU
7.10.3 Statistics data (Counter group)

The user can check on the counting numbers provided by the general counter function†. Table
7.10-4 shows the user to find the count numbers in the counter group.
Table 7.10-4 Counter data
Counter number Correspondences
Group Origin of info (default)
displayed to GCNTs†

Counter
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter General control function: Counter function for the general (GCNT) .
7.10.4 Statistics data (Accumulated time)

Over all running time for which the IED has operated is provided in “Accumulated Time”. The
user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen. The time will be cleared when
the IED is switched off.
Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
ACT_TIME +
***d **h **m
Figure 7.10-3 Example of Accumulated Time screen
7.10.5 Statistics data (Total time group)

Total times are provided by the total time measurement function†, as shown in Table 7.10-5.
Table 7.10-5 Total time data
Correspondences
Group Displayed quantities Origin of time data
to TOTALTIM†
TOTAL TIME 1 TOTALTIM01 function TT1
Total time TOTAL TIME 3 TOTALTIM03 function TT3
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter Control and monitoring application: Total time measurement

function

- 769 -
CU
BU
(i) Time information on the screen

The user can see the total times on the IED screen.
Total Time
10:48 1/12
TOTAL TIME 1 +
****d **h **m
TOTAL TIME 2 +
****d **h **m
TOTAL TIME 3 +
****d **h **m
Figure 7.10-4 Example of Total Time screen

Note: See section 7.10.5.
(ii) Report setting for TOTALTIM (Dead band feature)

The data collected with the TOTALTIM function will be sent to the network; thus, the user
should set a regulation value using the SD feature in the TOTALTIME function. See Chapter
Control and monitoring application (BU): Total time measurement: Setting for the report
(Dead band).

- 770 -
CU
BU
7.10.6 Monitoring for miscellaneous functions

Operating status of relay elements, control operation (SPOS, DPOS, TPOS), binary IO modules,
communication modules, GOOSE, and diagnostics are displayed in the monitoring function.
(i) Relay element

(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter Technical description (BU): User
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Relay Elements. The relay functions and their characteristics
are discussed in Chapter Relay application).
(ii) Control operation counter

(For more information about the counter of SPOS, DPOS, TPOS operations, see the respective
functions about SPOS, DPOS, and TPOS of Chapter Control and monitoring application (BU).
(iii) Communication
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Communication. The communication features about the LAN
port is discussed in Chapter Communication protocol: LAN communication. The hardware
information is discussed in Chapter Technical description (BU): Signal processing and
communication module).
(iv) Binary IO
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Binary I/O. The structure and its operation is discussed in
Chapter Technical description (BU): Binary IO module).
(v) Goose monitoring

interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Goose monitoring. The information about the GOOSE is
discussed in Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication).
(vi) Diagnostics
interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics sub-menu. The information about the diagnostics
is discussed in Chapter Automatic supervision).

- 771 -
CU
BU
7.10.7 Setting
Metering settings in DBP_MES_MANAGEMENT_BU (Function ID: 710004)
Unit Default
s setting value
Display Value Primary/Secondary – Display selection of primary or secondary Primary
I-Valid Level 0.10 to 5.00 % Cutting off small entering current 4.00
I-Display Unit A/kA – Current shown in Ampere or Kilo-Ampere kA
7.10.8 Data ID
DBP_MES_MNG_BU (Function ID: 711004)
4201601076 Ia Ia measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201601051 Ia-Angle Ia measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201601078 Ib Ib measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201601053 Ib-Angle Ib measurement angle(for IEC61850)
420160107A Ic Ic measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201601055 Ic-Angle Ic measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201611076 I1 I1 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201611051 I1-Angle I1 measurement angle(for IEC61850)
4201611078 I2 I2 measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420161107C I0 I0 measurement primary(for IEC61850)

- 772 -
CU
BU
User interface (Front panel)

7.11.1 Outline
User interface on BU’s front panel is the same as the one on CU’s front panel. Therefore, the
user can find the descriptions about the LCD screen, LEDs, Keys, jacks, etc. in Chapter
Technical description (CU): User interface.
Large LCD screen

LEDs
(Menu screen mode)
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with

LEDs (A, B, and C) USB port
Figure 7.11-1 BU front Panel with large LCD screen
When the IED has large LCD screen, the user can change the screen for MIMIC mode. MIMIC
key is only available when a large LCD screen is mounted on the front panel
Table 7.11-1 Features of operation keys for large LCD model
Label Functions and Remarks
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2.
2Note: MIMIC pixel resolution (dot) is 240(W) × 320(H). Note that MIMIC mode is only
screened when the user configured the outline using MIMIC configuration tool,
which is discussed in chapter Engineering tool.
The BU menu hierarchy is shown in Figure 7.11-3 Figure 7.11-2 shows the menu hierarchy.
The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several Sub-menus.

- 773 -
CU
BU
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record Fault Record Record List Main Menu
Clear Records
Clear Records Setting
Clear Records
Statistics Counter(GCNT01~32)
Clear Records F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Disturbance Record Record List
Function Key
Clear Records Diagnostics Details
Clear All Records
Monitoring Metering IO Setting AC Analog Input AI (#1)
Binary I/O Slot#1~#3 Binary Input Slot (#1~#3)
Communication LAN Port Status Binary Output Slot (#1~#3)
LED LED (3~26)

F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Relay Element CBF

Control
EFP
OCOSTV
EF
Time Clock ActiveSyncSrc
Statistics Counter Time Zone

Accumulated Time
Operation Time Time Sync SNTP
Operation Counter BI SYNC
Total Time Display Format IRIG SYNC
Interlock Summer Time

GOOSE Monitoring
Diagnostics Test Test Mode Test Option
Function Test
Binary Input (Slot#n)
Binary Output (Slot#n)
Simultaneous Fault
Setting Record Fault Record Mode Change

Event Record
Metering Disturbance Record Signal monitoring
Communication LAN
USBCOM
Information
Security Setting Change Password

Protection Common PLC-TIMER
Active Group Security
Copy Group(A->B)
Group1
Group2
Group3 Login / Logout
Group4
Group5
Group6
Group7
Group8
Control Common Control

Change Over Switch
Software Switch
Reset Control
Auto Sequence
Total Time Msr
General BI
Figure 7.11-2 BU menu hierarchy
Main Menu OC
10:48 1/9 10:48 1/2
_Record > OC1-EN +>
Monitoring > On
Setting > _OC2-EN +>
I/O Setting > On
Control >
Time >
a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu
Figure 7.11-3 Screen for Main-Menu and Sub-menu

- 774 -
CU
BU
7.11.2 Record sub-menu

Record sub-menus in BU are the same as the ones in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
menus and key operations in Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface: Record sub-
menu.
7.11.3 Monitoring sub-menu

The BU has eight “Monitoring” sub-menus, which are the same as the sub-menus of CU.
Therefore, the user can find the same descriptions in Chapter Technical description (CU): User
interface: Monitoring sub-menu, except the below submenus:
(v) Statistics
(vi) Interlock
(i) Metering
(ii) Binary I/O
(iii) Communication
(iv) Relay Elements
(v) Statistics
“Statistics” sub-menu has Counter, Accumulated time and other sub-menus. The counter and
assimilated sub-menus are the same as the menus of CU. Therefore, Operation time, Operation
counter, and Total Time sub-menus are only discussed here.
Operation Time sub-menu: Time intervals of DPOS and TOPS operation are
shown in the monitoring sub-menu, as shown in Figure 7.11-4.
Operation Time DPOS1-OT

10:48 1/97 10:48 1/5
_DPOS1-OT > DPOS_Dev1-OP1
CANCEL
DPOS2-OT > 123.456 ms
DPOS3-OT > DPOS_DEV1-OP2
DPOS4-OT > ENTER
678.901 ms
DPOS5-OT > DPOS_DEV1-OP3
DPOS6-OT > 234.567 ms
Figure 7.11-4 Display for Operation Time
Operation Counter: Operation counter menus are provided for DPOS and TOPS
functions, as shown in Figure 7.11-5.
Operation Time DPOS1-CNT

10:48 1/96 10:48 1/5
_DPOS1-CNT > DPOS_Dev1-OP1
CANCEL
DPOS2-CNT > 123.456 ms
DPOS3-CNT > DPOS_DEV1-OP2
DPOS4-CNT > ENTER
678.901 ms
DPOS5-CNT > DPOS_DEV1-OP3
DPOS6-CNT > 234.567 ms
Figure 7.11-5 Display for Operation counter

- 775 -
CU
BU
Total Time: Total time menus are provided for TOTALTIM functions
Total Time Total Time

10:48 1/12
_TOTAL TIME 1 + Reset?
CANCEL
1234d 56h 01m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
TOTAL TIME 2 +
4321d 01h 23m ENTER
TOTAL TIME 2 +
4567d 12h 34m
Figure 7.11-6 Display for Total Time
(vi) Interlock
Interlock submenu can display the results of interlock judgements of SPOS, DPOS, TPOS
functions, as shown in Figure 7.11-7. When interlock database has the interlock formula
regarding SPOS, DPOS, and TPOS functions, if logical “True” is determined with the interlock
formula, control functions are allowed to operate, respectively (i.e., “OK” is displayed on the
menu). If logical “False” is determined, the control functions are not allowed to operate (i.e.
“NG” is displayed). Incidentally, if there is not formula in the ILK database, “NoCond” is
displayed.
Interlock
10:48 1/256
_SPOS1-Off NoCond
SPOS1-On NoCond
SPOS2-Off NG
SPOS2-On NG
SPOS3-Off OK
SPOS4-On OK
Figure 7.11-7 Display for Interlock

(vii) GOOSE monitoring
(viii) Diagnostics
7.11.4 Setting sub-menu

Setting sub-menus in BU are the same as the ones in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
descriptions and key operations in Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface: Setting
sub-menu.
7.11.5 I/O setting sub-menu

The BU has “I/O setting” sub-menus, which are the same as the sub-menus of CU. The user
can find the same descriptions in Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface: I/O
setting sub-menu.

- 776 -
CU
BU
7.11.6 Time sub-menu

Time sub-menus in BU are the same as the ones in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
descriptions and key operations in Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface: Time
sub-menu.
7.11.7 Test sub-menu

Test sub-menus in BU are the same as the ones in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
descriptions and key operations in Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface: Test
sub-menu.
7.11.8 Information sub-menu

Information sub-menus in BU are the same as the ones in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
descriptions and key operations in Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface:
Information sub-menu.
7.11.9 Security setting sub-menu

Security sub-menus in BU are the same as the ones in CU. Therefore, the user can find the
descriptions and key operations in Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface:
Security sub-menu.
7.11.10 Control sub-menu

The user can control external devices using the IED front panel. Control sub-menus are
provided to operate; the user can operate the devices by pressing Operation keys. Note that
Control sub-menus are only available when the IED is in “LOCAL” mode†. When the IED is in
“REMOTE” mode, an error message will be shown on the screen. Remember that the IED will
change to “REMOTE” mode if there is no operation for a while; then the IED can be monitored
remotely. Figure 7.11-8 shows “Control” sub-menu.
Control
10:48 1/5
_SPOS >
DPOS >
TPOS >
Software Switch >
Auto Sequence >
Figure 7.11-8 Control sub-menu on LCD screen

†Note: The IED will have “Local” mode automatically when the following menus are
displayed on the LCD screen: “Main Menu”, “Control sub-menu”, “Selection
Executing”, “Operating completed”, “Operating canceled” or “Operating failed”.
Table 7.11-2 shows how to operate by the IED front panel.

- 777 -
CU
BU
Table 7.11-2 Control step in DIR mode or SBO mode

Control Scheme Operation step
Direct Control 1) Set DIR mode in each control function.
Operation Mode‡ 2) Select a device and choose DIR, and press ENTER.
3) Press I (Close) or O (Open)
4) A signal of control command is issued; control operation is
performed.
Select Before 1) Set SBO mode in each control function.
Control 2) Select a device and choose SBO, and press ENTER.
Operation 3) Verify that the selection is performed correctly and normally.
Mode‡ 4) Press I (Close) or O (Open); controlling command is issued.
5) Control operation is carried out.
‡Note: We shall discuss about DIR and SBO modes in Chapter General control function:
Control mode.
(i) DPOS operation

Figure 7.11-9 shows how to switch to Off position.
Control
10:48 1/5
_SPOS >
Double DIR mode
DPOS >
TPOS >
responses?
Software Switch >
Auto Sequence > SBO mode
Executing screen
Output the command DPOS_Dev1

[ENTER]
10:48
Control Control execution
10:48 1/72 Push O button [CANCEL]
Waiting for the Select control POS:
_DPOS_Dev1 >
On
second response On
DPOS_Dev2 >
On DPOS_Dev1 CANCEL:Operation stop
DPOS_Dev3 > 10:48
On Selecting...
O Open
Selecting succeeded.
[ENTER]
DPOS_Dev1
DPOS_Dev1 10:48
10:48 Controlling... [CANCEL]
Current status:
On
Select control POS:
_Off
Change start? CANCEL: Operation stop Cancel succeeded.
Controlling failed Cancel failed
ENTER:Yes CANCEL:No
[ENTER] Selecting failed. Time out1
DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1

10:48 10:48 10:48 10:48 10:48
Operation failed. Operation completed. Operation failed. Operation failed. Operation canceled.
CAUSE: CAUSE: CAUSE:

Select failed. Time limit over. Select failed.
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Control Control Control

10:48 1/5 10:48 1/5 10:48 1/5
_SPOS > _SPOS > _SPOS >
DPOS > DPOS > DPOS >
TPOS > TPOS > TPOS >
Software Switch > Software Switch > Software Switch >
Auto Sequence > Auto Sequence > Auto Sequence >
Figure 7.11-9 Operation for opening Dev1

1Note: Time out will occur if no responses come from Dev1.
2Note: For control ‘Dev1 (i.e., Circuit breaker)’, the user should connect ‘DPOS01’
function with circuit breakers using binary IO modules. See chapter Control and
monitoring application: Double position device function (DPOS).

6F2S1933 (0.04)
8 Engineering tool
Busbar configuration tools 784 Tool for Fault recorder 782
Common tools 781 Tool for Disturbance recorder 782
Configuration tools 783 Tool for Event recorder 782
Comparison of settings 781 Label creator 781
Configuration in IEC 61850 783 Logging management 781
Configuration in IEC 60870-5-103 783 MIMIC configurator 784
Connection with PC 781 Project management 781
Settings for Relay and control functions 783
Settings for Input and output signals 783
Settings for Event recorder 783
Signal monitor 782
Status monitor 782

→Control and monitoring application (BU) 250 →Ordering 1089
→Technical description (CU) 545 →Engineering exercise 1146
→Technical description (BU) 725 →IEC 60870-5-103 1069
→PLC function 785
Reference separate manuals:

→Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)
→Replica setting procedure (6F2S1902)

- 779 -
CU
Chapter 8.1: Engineering tool 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Overview of GR-TIEMS
BU
Overview of GR-TIEMS
When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed
into a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states (Table 8.1-1) on a
PC screen connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using the GR-TIEMS.
Figure 8.1-1 GR-TIEMS® screen on PC
Table 8.1-1 Information on the GR-TIEMS

Information Displaying format
Display of voltage and current waveform Oscillograph, vector display
Symmetrical component analysis On arbitrary time span
Harmonic analysis On arbitrary time span
Frequency analysis On arbitrary time span
The GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and
event records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is
connected with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in the GR-TIEMS
operations, see separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.

- 780 -
CU
––––––––Connection
BU
Connection
The user can connect the GR-TIEMS with the IED using either the LAN or the USB, as shown
in Figure 8.2-1.
IED
LAN
USB Cable
Personal Computer
Figure 8.2-1 GR-TIEMS connected with IED
Common tools
(i) Project management
Project files are required to engage sub-engineering tools. The user can manage to read/write
the project file of the IED using the project management function. The user can also see the
contents of the project files.
(ii) Comparison
When the user wishes to get the comparison between respective IEDs, using the compare
function the user can get the comparison data for Setting, Setting I/O, Setting Event List,
Disturbance record binary signal, PLC, Busbar Replica, IEC61850, and IEC60870-5-103 data.
(iii) Pocket label creator

The user can create the name label of LEDs and Function keys for the IED front panel using
a pocket label sheet, which is provided together with the IED. For more information with
regard the LEDs and Function keys, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine
interface.
(iv) Logging
The user can view the recorded data with regard to the logging date/time. As the user can also
find operation recorded when an operator/engineer logs into the IED, analyzing a problem is
possible when an error is detected during the IED operations.

- 781 -
CU
––––––––Monitoring tools
BU
(v) Double command block

For controlling, there is a principle that a first receiving-command shall be carried out
primarily. In other words, succeeding receiving-commands cannot have the right to run until
the first receiving-command is not completed to operate (that is, the principle of double
command blocking (DCB) is established). The principle is significant for the device protections;
hence, the user should DCB setting. For more information with regard to set the DCB, see the
“Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082): Double Command Block” and Chapter General
control function: Common controls: Double command blocking.
Monitoring tools
The user can monitor status and measurement value obtained in the IED using the monitoring
tools. All signals monitored are tabulated in the monitoring list dialog. When the user wishes
to monitor a signal, select a signal in the monitoring list dialog after the operation of the drag-
drop on the monitoring window. The monitoring tools can generate an exporting layout file in
the CSV; it also can obtain the layout file in the CSV.
Record tools
(i) Fault record
Fault records are including measuring information before and after the occurrence of the faults.
Accordingly, the user can see information before the fault so that the user can analyze the fault
more precisely. The user can select a fault from the recorded lists; the user can save it into the
fault information file in the CSV. The user can also view the fault records when the exported
data file in the CSV are retrieved into the IED.
(ii) Disturbance record

Disturbance record is a kind of module information. The user can see disturbance records when
the disturbance records file in COMTRADE are provided. The user can also save disturbance
records into the COMTRADE file.
(iii) Event list

The event list is recorded events information in the IED. The user can generate events
information file in the CSV; the user can retrieve events data file into the IED to view when
the file is in the CSV.
Note: In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time (UTC)
when the clock is selected to operate in UTC. In the record tools within the PC the
date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted
for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock
operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving

- 782 -
CU
––––––––Generic configuration tools
BU
time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED
and the PC. For more information about the clock and time, see Chapter Technical
description: Clock function.
Generic configuration tools

(i) Setting (general setting for the relay and controlling functions)
The user can make the IED settings on the GR-TIEMS; the IED settings are transferred into
the IED by the connection between the IED and the GR-TIEMS.
(ii) Setting I/O

The user can see and make the setting with regard to binary input/output circuits (BIO†),
LEDs using the setting I/O function. For more information about the BIO, and the LED, see
Chapter Technical description.
(iii) Setting event list

The user can set information with regard to the event of an IED using the event list function.
(iv) Interlock configurator

The user can program conditions for executing to control the primary equipment using the
interlock (ILK) configurator. For example, controlling a circuit breaker (open and closing) is
significant; note not induce mal-operations caused by improper conditions; otherwise a severe
fault/blackout results in. The ILK configurator can provide the user to program conditions
concerning the status of the power system. For more information of the ILK, see chapter
Control and monitoring application.
IEC 61850 configuration tool

The user can configure conversion data for the IEC61850 communication†, provided the IED
exchanges the data with the SAS. The user also configures a logical device, a logical node,
Goose publish information, and Goose subscribe information. For setting and configuration for
the IEC61850 communication see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication”.
†Note:The configuration is possible when the IED software has the IEC61850 protocol.
To confirmed the implementation of IEC61850 protocol, the user needs to check
the IED ordering code (for more information, see Appendix: Ordering).
IEC 60870-5-103 configuration tool

The user can edit the data of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol† to perform communications
between IEDs. The IEC 60870-5-103 data consists of the IEC 60870-5-103 Slave and the
IEC60870-5-103 Master data; the user can edit either the Slave Data or the Master Data‡ at

- 783 -
CU
––––––––Busbar configuration tools
BU
a time.
†Note:The configuration is possible when the IED software has the IEC 60870-5-103. To
confirmed the implementation of IEC61850 protocol, the user needs to check the
IED ordering code (for more information, see Appendix: Ordering). The tool is not
shown when the IED software does not have the IEC 60870-5-103.
‡Note:Editing the master data is not available at present.
Busbar configuration tools

When the busbar protection functions† are accommodated in the IED, the user should program
the replica depending a busbar configuration. For the programing the busbar configuration,
see the instruction manual “Replica setting procedure for Distributed Busbar protection IED
(6F2S1902)”.
†Note:The operations of the GR-TIEMS depend on the software and the hardware
configurations in the IED; the above features have been explained for the general
introduction for the GR-TIEMS. Thereby, the user should understand that the
operations of the GR-TIEMS are in response to hardware/software configurations
(i.e., the configurations has been determined when the IED model is selected
using the ordering code, which is described in Appendix: Ordering)
MIMIC configuration tool

When the IED has a large LCD, the user can create user-preferred screens using the MIMIC
configurator. The large LCD will be able to display measurement values, diagrams and others
after the configuration. Note that the MIMIC is not available when the standard LCD is
equipped for the IED.

- 784 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
9 PLC function
Contents Pages
Error check 786 PLC driver 787
Driver monitoring point 787
BIT (Boolean) type 787
USINT (Unsigned short integer) type 789
UINT (Unsigned integer) type 789
UDINT (Unsigned double integer) type 790
SINT (Short integer) type 790
INT (Integer) type 790
DINT (Double integer) type 790
Timer variable setting 791
Setting [UTM1] ~ [UTM24] 793
Reference chapters: Reference separate manual:

→Automatic supervision 900 →Basic manual (PLC) (6F2S1904)

- 785 -
CU
Chapter 9.1: PLC function 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Overview of PLC function
BU
Overview of PLC function

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) software is used for configuring the Inputs/outputs
(I/Os), alarms, indications, recording and others. PLC logic consist of “timers”, “flip-flops”, and
logic gates “AND, OR, XOR, NOT”. The user can configure PLC-logic using the PLC editor
(MULTIPROG®), which should be installed in the user’s PC. Figure 9.1-1 shows the screen for
the PLC editor.
Figure 9.1-1 PC screen of MULTIPROG®

Note: To handle the PLC editor on the PC, the user shall purchase a software license
(EP-261; see Appendix: Ordering) from Toshiba sales representative. For more
information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Basic manual:
Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor (6F2S1904)).
PLC data error

The Automatic supervision reports the error information when an error occurs in PLC logic.
The error information† is shown in the Monitoring sub-menu on the IED screen. See Chapter
Automatic supervision: Supervision tasks: Supervision of data in PLC function.
PLC data error 1/1
10:48
[Minor error]
[00000006] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
PLC error code†
Figure 9.2-1 Error code at 1st row and 1st column on Monitoring sub-menu

- 786 -
CU
––––––––PLC driver
BU
PLC driver
The PLC driver is provided for the user-programmed logic.
9.3.1 Monitoring point for PLC driver

The user can assign several values for the operation. Three-hundred-and-twenty PLC drivers
are grouped for 128 BITs, 32 USINTs, 32 UINTs, 32 UDINTs, 32 SINTs, 32 INTs, and 32 DINTs
in the function “PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230302)”.
(i) BIT type
 Monitoring point at PLC Driver
PLC_DRV in BIT type (Function ID: 230302)
8010101BB0 BIT_00_0 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8A10101BBA BIT_01_2 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8F10101BBF BIT_01_7 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8B10111BBB BIT_03_3 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………

- 787 -
CU
BU

…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………

- 788 -
CU
BU

…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
(ii) USINT type

PLC_DRV in USINT type (Function ID: 230302)
3011001BB0 U08_00 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
(iii) UINT type

PLC_DRV in UINT type (Function ID: 230302)
3112001BB0 U16_00 Reserved: Monitoring point for quality of IEC61850
3112011BB0 U16_01 Reserved: Monitoring point for quality of IEC61850
…….. ……….. ………

- 789 -
CU
BU
(iv) UDINT type

PLC_DRV in UDINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………
(v) SINT type

PLC_DRV in USINT type (Function ID: 230302)
2014001BB0 S08_00 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
(vi) INT type

PLC_DRV in UINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………
(vii) DINT type

PLC_DRV in DINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………

- 790 -
CU
––––––––Timer variable settings using PLC drivers
BU
Timer variable settings using PLC drivers

The user can set variable timers of user’s PLC logics using settings of PLC drivers (FB:
PLC_DRV 230302). The LCD screen menu provides settings [UTM1] ~ [UTM24], and the user
can set those timer values through the LCD screen.
Figure 9.4-1 shows that a delay timer “TON1” has been set 500ms in the PLC logic, but the
user can set new value using the setting [UTM1] (e.g., the user can change 500ms to 200ms on
the LCD). Since an internal IED memory is able to access the [UTM1], the IED can operate
with new value of the [UTM1] when new one is set.
IED memory PLC function
PLC editor
Timer FB
Constant value set
Fixed PLC = 500ms
Input Output
A timer value inputted

PLC driver FB ( 500 [ms] or 200 [ms] )
Function ID: 230302
Element ID: 3200013001
Variable value set

Setting [UTM1] = 200 ms
= 5000ms
User PLC logic
Figure 9.4-1 Time delay FB is adjusted by setting [UTM1] (example)

- 791 -
CU
BU
Example of timer action1

Supposed that the timer was set the [UTM1]=30 and the TON1 timer counter has
started. When the counter counts 15 ms, and if the user sets 10 for the [UTM1],
the FB output is yielded instantly.
On
FB output Off
On
FB input Off
Run
Counter Stop
0 15 30 45 60
Timer counter
(millisecond)
[UTM1] = 30 ms [UTM1] = 10 ms
Figure 9.4-2 Input and output time chart on TON1 delay timer
Note: Entering new value for the setting [UTM1] does not make the timer counter reset,
if the timer counter is running.
Example of timer action2

Supposed that the timer was set the [UTM2]=30. Signal is inputted in the FB for
45 ms, so the timer counter is running at 45 ms. However, if the user changes the
setting [UTM2] to 60 at 45 ms, the FB output still remain (i.e., the counter is not
reset).
On
FB output Off
On
FB input Off
Run
Counter Stop Timer counter

(millisecond)
0 15 30 45 60
[UTM2] = 30 ms [UTM2] = 60 ms
Figure 9.4-3 Input and output time chart onTON2 delay timer
Note: If the FB output has be yielded already, when new value is set for the timer and
that new value is longer input signal duration, the timer counter is not reset.

- 792 -
CU
BU
(i) Setting value

The [UTMxx] value is selected among 0 to 10,000,000 [ms] (see Table 9.4-1). Figure 9.4-4 and
Figure 9.4-5 illustrates how to see a value for the [UTMxx].
PLC timer settings: [UTM1]~ [UTM24]
Figure 9.4-4 [UTMxx] timer setting menu (GR-TIMES operation)
Setting Setting Common PLC Timer

10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/24
Record > Common + CLP > UTM1 +
Metering > Active Group Fault Locator > 0 ms
Communication > Copy Group (A->B) + PLC Timer > UTM2 +
Protection > Group1 + 0 ms
Control > Group2 + UTM3 +
Statistic > Group3 + 0 ms
UTM24 +
0 ms
Figure 9.4-5 Timer setting menu (LCD operation)

- 793 -
CU
BU
Table 9.4-1 UTM setting table

PLC timer (Function ID: 230302)
UTM1 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer ##1 0

UTM2 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer #2 0

- 794 -
CU
BU
Table 9.4-2 Inputs for driving the timers

PLC timer (Function ID: 230302)
Function ID + Element ID Setting name Description
230302 3200013001 UTM1 Input point for the delay timer(UTM1)
230302 32000A3001 UTM10 Input point for the delay timer(UTM10)
230302 32000B3001 UTM11 Input point for the delay timer(UTM11)
230302 32000C3001 UTM12 Input point for the delay timer(UTM12)
230302 32000D3001 UTM13 Input point for the delay timer(UTM13)
230302 32000E3001 UTM14 Input point for the delay timer(UTM14)
230302 32000F3001 UTM15 Input point for the delay timer(UTM15)

- 795 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
10 Communication protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 operation 868 LAN operation –
-Interoperability 871 -IP address 798
-Operation 894 -Hot standby operation 799
IEC 61850 operation 816 -PRP/HSR operation 806
-About protocol 818 -RSTP operation 810
-Communication service 821 -Monitoring (Hot standby) 801
-Engineering work 824 -Monitoring (PRP/HSR) 808
-Goose monitoring status 848 Protocol selection 797
-Protocol selection 845 RS485operation 899
-Quality signal 846 USB operation 898
-Setting 843
-Supervise 845
-61850 Editon1 option 820
-61850 Editon2 820

→General control function 156 →Ordering 1089
→Control application (CU) 220 →IEC 61850 1017
→Control and monitoring application (BU) 250 →IEC 60870-5-103 1069
→Commissioning and maintenance 989
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such protocols depends on the selection of protocols. Several
IED models do not have the protocols. To determine whether the protocols are implemented in
the IED, locate the IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “U position”
Ordering No. at “U”
Sec. Feature
1 2
10.2.1 TCP/IP ✓ ✓
10.2.2 Hot-standby ✓ ✓
10.2.3 PRP/HSR NA ✓1
10.2.4 RSTP NA ✓1
10.3 IEC 61850 ✓2 ✓
10.4 IEC 60870-5-103 ✓2 NA
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
1 LAN modules, designed for PRP/HSR/RSTP marked with “L or N” code at position “E”, shall
be mounted in IED, if network operation in PRP/HSR/RSTP is required.
2 Either 61850 or 103 shall be selected during the operation.

- 796 -
CU
Chapter 10.1: Communication protocol
6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Interface setting and protocol selection
BU
Interface setting and protocol selection

Ethernet and Serial ports can be provided in the IED for the communication. The protocol is
selectable† using settings§. The IEC 61850 standard is conventional choice for the substation
communication. Additionally, the IEC 60870-5-103 legacy† can be provided in IEDs if those
IED has to communicate with legacy apparatuses. Several communication modules, such as
LAN, USB, or RS485 interfaces‡, are provided in IEDs, hence, the user has to specify the
transmission specifications (i.e., speed and error check parity).
Figure 10.1-1 illustrates the LAN and USBCOM sub-menus are provided for the
connection to the LAN, whereas the SLAVE PROTOCOL sub-menu is for the selection of either
the IEC61850 or the IEC103 protocols. The IEC61850 sub-menu has its own settings, so does
the IEC103 menu. The RS485 sub-menu is screened when the IED has the one used for the
IEC103 in the serial communication.
Communication
10:48 1/6
LAN >
USBCOM >
RS485 >
SLAVE PROTOCOL >
IEC61850 >
IEC103 SLV >
Figure 10.1-1 Example of Setting menu ‘IEC61850, IEC103, RS485 and USB’
†Note:Selection and operation is dependent on the IED configurations, which the
customer has determined with the ordering code. Accordingly, the selection and
operation can be unavailable if the protocol is not provided in the IED. To examine
the IED configuration, check your ordering code referring Appendix: Ordering.
‡Note:We have discussed the specifications regarding the communication interface. See
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
§Note:The setting function is provided with the function ‘CNN_SLAVE’. The setting list
and Signal monitoring point (in Data ID) are shown below:
CNN_SLAVE (Function ID: 300001)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value
Slave Protocol IEC61850 / IEC103 Protocol selection IEC61850
S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Canceling Test-flag in the slave communication Off

3100013406 ProcType Selected a type in the protocol

- 797 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––LAN operation
BU
LAN operation
10.2.1 LAN address (IP address)
When LAN module(s) are provided, the IED can communicate using the “Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”. The user can set IP addresses and other information in
accordance with the requirements of TCP/IP. Table 10.2-1 shows the setting items provided for
the LAN†.
Table 10.2-1 TCP/IP settings of LAN modules
Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value
IPADDRESS1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 First IP address 192.l68.1.11
LAN for
SUBNETMASK1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Port A
GATEWAY1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
LAN for IPADDRESS2 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Second IP address 192.l68.1.11
Port B‡ SUBNETMASK2 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
IPADDRESS3 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Third IP address 192.l68.1.13
LAN for
SUBNETMASK3 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Local PC§
When the wishing to change addresses, the user can use this setting menu. Figure 10.2-1
shows the setting menu provided to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192. 168. 1. 11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255. 255. 255. 1
GATEWAY1 +
192. 168. 1. 1
Figure 10.2-1 Local LAN setting menu (on IED screen)

†Note:For more information with regard to the communication modules, see Chapter
Technical description (CU or BU): Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:Second LAN module can be mounted at C12 when the user selected “Hot-standby”
or “PRP/HSR/RSTP” in the ordering. Hence, the user should assign the LAN
address. (Just for the record, subscript ‘1’ of “IPADDRESS1, SUBNETMASK1, and
GATEWAY1” is for first LAN module.)
§Note:The LAN for Local PC is used to connect with PC engineering tool (i.e., GR-
TEIMS, PLC editor). It is not designed for the network such as IEC61850, Hot-
standby, IEC62439-3(PRP) etc. Note the layout of the LAN modules in the IED
will be dependent on the ordering codes. To find the locations about the LAN
modules, see Appendix: Ordering (→ page 1089).

- 798 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.2.2 Redundant LAN (Hot-standby)

Hot-standby is designed to change to another LAN path if an error occurs on the LAN
communication; accordingly, the LAN communication can have more security (i.e. “Redundant
communication”). The “Hot-standby (HOTST)” operation is possible when the IED has dual
communication modules for the LAN network. The Hot-standby runs when the user sets
Hot_Standby for scheme switch [RedundantMode]†.
†Note: When the user wishes not to operate Hot-standby, or the network is not ready for
the redundant, set Fixed for the [RedundantMode]. Port B (located at C12 if
provided) can only operate for the connection with the engineering tool (GR-
TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®).
‡Note: See Chapter Technical description (CU or BU): Signal processing and
(i) Overview
For the Hot-standby communication, the first communication module for Network is used as
the primary port, (i.e. Port A at C11) while a second communication module for Network, (i.e.
Port B at C12) is used as the secondary port; the IED will communicate using Port A for normal
operation. If a communications failure occurs at Port A, the IED can automatically switch
communication from Port A to Port B.
When the IED detects the occurrence of a communications failure, for which the LAN
module is unable to respond to the IED (i.e. a communications link is down), the IED starts a
timer. When the timer exceeds a setting [DownTime], the IED will switch ports. Thus, Port B
is then used for communications. (Note that Port A can be determined to be the secondary port
on the occurrence of the failure. If Port B is unable to continue to operate, then Port A will be
re-switched to run after a predetermined setting [UpTime]. Then, Port B will be discriminated
as the secondary port.)
(ii) Primary port selection

The user can select any one of the ports to be the primary port although the Port A is normally
used as the primary port. For example, provided that both Port A and Port B are physically
connected to the LAN, when the user wishes to use Port B as the primary port, the user should
set Port2(i.e., Port B) for the [PrimaryPort]. If the user wishes not to select the primary port,
set None for the [PrimaryPort].
(iii) Llink-down timer

As mentioned earlier, the occurrence of a communication failure is determined when the timer
exceeds the setting [DownTime]. Thus, the user should set a time setting for this decision.

- 799 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) Link-up timer

Another timer is provided in the Hot-standby function. Let us assume that the communication
on Port A is changed to Port B. If the failure of Port A is removed after changing to Port B, the
IED will try to re-start using Port A as the primary port. In this case, the user can define a
time to revert to the original port and re-start communication on the original port by applying
a re-start time for setting [UpTime].
Table 10.2-2 Summary of Hot-standby communication setting

Setting Items Range Meaning Default
Fixed / Fixed: Hot-standby is not activated..
RedundantMode Fixed
Hot_Standby Hot_Standby: Hot-standby activated.
A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication
DownTime 0–10000ms failure (link down). The standby port commences 5ms
communication in the DownTime.
Selection of priority port
None / Port1 / None: No selection for the priority port.
PrimaryPort None
Port2 Port1: Port A selected as the priority port.
Port2: Port B selected as the priority port.
A timer starts when the primary port is ready to commence
UpTime 0–10000ms 5ms
communication after switching port.
The user should be aware of the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of Port A for the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of Port B is not used even if communication is carried out on Port
B.
2 The user should ensure that an optical fiber is correctly connected when a 100Base-
FX module is used, otherwise a repeat communication failure (link-down) will be
experienced continuously. If the period for which the link-down is shorter than the
setting [DownTime], another port cannot be switched as the primary port. Thus,
the user should determine the setting value to be applied for [DownTime] on the
basis of the system requirement. It is allowable for the user to apply a setting of
zero for [DownTime] so that the switching of the ports will be performed
immediately; conversely, the user can set any value less than 3000ms in order that
the system need not experience chattering failures if the optical fiber were not
connected securely. Switching between the primary and the secondary ports is not
carried out during a value is setting for the [DownTime]. The user should consider
the setting approach for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting [DownTime].
3 The auto-negotiation function is executed when the 100Base-TX modules establish
communication over the communications network. The auto-negotiation function
selects a mode for communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the
communication speed. In the case of a link-down condition, the auto-negotiation

- 800 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
function will run again immediately. The link-down condition continues until auto-
negotiation has been completed (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user can
apply a setting for [DownTime] for any value of time less than that required by the
auto-negotiation function in response to the system requirement (i.e. the user can
set [DownTime] to be zero milliseconds). In this case, switching between the
primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i.e. prior to the auto-
negotiation function running. If switching between ports is not required before the
completion of the auto-negotiation function, the user can set the setting
[DownTime] longer than the time required by the auto-negotiation function. The
user can consider the setting for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
(v) PLC switching

Compulsory signals may be used to switch the ports. For example, if a compulsory signal is
issued via PLC connection point “CH1_CH_CHG”, communication is switched from Port A to
Port B. On the other hand, changing from Port B to Port A can be executed upon the reception
of a signal via PLC signal “CH2_CH_CHG”.
(vi) Monitor
LCD screen: The user can examine the statuses about the communion modules by
the monitoring function. Figure 10.2-2 shows the port status about the modules;
terms ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ mean running and stopping, respectively. For menus operations,
see Chapter Technical description (CU or BU): User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
Port 1 (i.e., Port A) is connected. Ports 1&2 (i.e., Port A&B) are connected.
Port 2 (i.e., Port B) is not connected.
Figure 10.2-2 Communication status
Status signals for Port A and Port B: The user can also examine the LAN status
using PLC signal monitoring points ‘Port1_Link (3100061001)’ and ‘Port2_Link
(3100061001)’ of the HOTST function. For example, when the user wishes to monitor
the status of the Prot1_Link, use the ‘Port1_Link’. Consequently, the user can get the
physical information about the Port A: the value ‘1’ is issued when the communication

- 801 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
is made (Linkup), whereas value ‘0’ is issued when the communication is not made
(Linkdown).
When Hot_Standby is set for the [RedundantMode], the user can find a running port
using the PLC signal monitoring point ‘Using_CH (3100081001)’ of the HOTST
function. Value ‘1’ is provided when the Port A is running, whereas value ‘2’ is
provided when the Port B is running.
Monitor setting: The Hot-standby (HOTST) function can send PING packets to
remote devices thus enabling the Hot-standby function to monitor the state of the
network. The Hot-standby function checks for a response signal from the remote
device. If the Hot-standby function does not receive a response signal, the Hot-
standby function will switch to the other port. The operation is performed when
the user sets the [RedundantMode]= Hot_Standby and [NetMonitor_EN] = On.
Settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are provided in the Hot-standby function for the
monitoring of remote devices on the network. When the user sets plural remote IP
addresses for the settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function does not receive
a response from any one of these remote devices, the Hot-standby function determines
that a communication failure has occurred. Table 10.2-3 shows the network
monitoring settings for Hot-standby operation.
Table 10.2-3 Settings network monitoring on Hot-standby

Setting items Range Meaning Default
NetMonitor_EN Off/On Enabling switch for monitoring Off
The user can set twelve IP addresses at 12 remote
Ping_IP1 0.0.0.0
terminals.
to to 0.0.0.0
Value “0.0.0.0”should be set respectively when
Ping_IP12 255.255.255.255
the remote IP addresses are not provided.
Waiting time to PING response; if any one of the
responses is not received, after the setting time
Ping_Wait 1–10 (sec) 1
has elapsed, the function will determine that there
has been no-response.
Interval of PING send; a PING packet is sent
Ping_Interval 1–120 (sec) 5
sequentially in accordance with this setting.
Number of PING packets for checking; the “no-
response “condition is determined when the IED is
unable to obtain a number of responses from the
Chk_Count 1–10 3
same IP address. The user can set the number of
responses required to determine the “no-response”
condition using the setting [Chk_Count].
The user should note that the use of network monitoring could increase the burden
on the network. This is because a number of PING packets are repeatedly transmitted
over the network. Thus, the user should choose the setting values carefully in

- 802 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
accordance with the network capacity, the burden, and the required time. Examples
1 and 2 below show the respective results using the network monitoring function with
for different settings.
Example1: There is a remote device on the network with the address Ping_IP1.
The Hot-standby function sends ping packets to the remote device every five
seconds; then the Hot-standby function waits for one second until the Hot-
standby function receives a response signal from the remote device. The Hot-
standby function will determine that a communication failure has occurred if two
sequential response signals are not received from the remote device. Subsequently,
the Hot-Standby function will switch from one port to the other port (See Figure
10.2-3). The following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for setting [Ping_IP1]. (the setting of
IP addresses in the other remote devices is not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Local IED Remote device with
Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 1sec Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
OK: Response received
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.

1sec
5sec NG: due to delayed response

1sec
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports is
performed if a response signal is
not received for setting
[Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Figure 10.2-3 Time chart for Example 1
Example2: It is assumed that there are three remote devices on the network:

- 803 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Ping_IP1, Ping_IP2, and Ping_IP3. The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet to
every remote device every 10 second (i.e., the IED sends a ping packet to a remote
device every 30 second). Suppose that “1” is set for [Check_Count]. The Hot-standby
function can determine a communication failure after 30 seconds if one of the remote
devices is unable to send a response. Figure 10.2-4 shows the operation. Switching is
not executed, because the IED cannot confirm all no-responses from the remote
addresses in the milled of the figure. Switching is performed after no-response is
confirmed from all remote devices.
・ The IP addresses of the remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP3].
(Setting IP addresses for other remote devices is not required.)
・ 10seconds is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “1” is set for [Check_Count].
Device with Ping_IP3

IED
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 10sec
OK: Response received
5sec
10sec OK: Response received
5sec
10sec
LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed a response from the IP3.
5sec NG: due to no response

10sec

5sec
10sec NG: due to no response

5sec
10sec
LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response.
Figure 10.2-4 Time chart for Example 2

- 804 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vii) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=Hot_standby

When Hot_standby is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply single IP
address in the IED. The table shows that Port A and B have the same IP address.
Table 10.2-4 Default IP address for Hot standby operation
GR-TIEMS® /
Protocol IEC61850(GOOSE) SNTP
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
Port A†
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
IP address at
Port B†
IP address
Not applicable Not applicable 192.168.1.13‡
for Local PC
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default. Setting [IPADDRESS2] will be neglected.
‡Note: ‘192.168.1.13’ etc. can be set for the local engineering PC, if LAN for Local PC is
ready at C13.
(viii) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=Fixed

If Fixed is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply IP addresses in the IED.
The table below shows that Port A, B, and C can have different IP addresses.
Table 10.2-5 Default IP address for Fix operation
GR-TIEMS® /
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
Port A†
IP address at
Not applicable 192.168.1.12‡ 192.168.1.12§
Port B
IP address at
Not applicable Not applicable 192.168.1.13§
for Local PC
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default.
‡Note: An address can be set for SNTP, but it should not operate Time synchronization
with Port A and Port B, which have different IP addresses.
§Note: ‘192.168.1.13’ can be set for the local PC, if LAN for Local PC is ready at C13.

- 805 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.2.3 Redundant LAN (PRP/HSR operation)

The user can allow the IED operate in the redundant LAN communication (IEC 62439-3). To
operate, the user should set either PRP or HSR for scheme switch [RedundantMode].
(i) Overview
‘Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP)’ is designed for double LAN networks in order to construct
high availability automation networks. Figure 10.2-5 shows an IED (i.e., Source, IED1 with
Port A and Port B†) and a server (i.e., Destination, Substation computer with Port A and Port
B). They are connected through LAN_A and LAN_B. For duplicating data, the IED have Link
redundancy entity (LRE) so that the IED can transfer data with A-Frame packet and B-Frame
packet at the same time. At the destination, either frames being arrived later is removed.
Substation computer
CPU
Operator
workstation
Data
Port A Port B
Rx Tx Rx Tx
Destination RedBox‡
A-Frame
LAN_A
B-Frame
LAN_B
TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
E R R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
RedBox‡
Port A Port B TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
LAN module LAN module Rx Rx
E R R OR
(C11) (C12) Tx Tx
Port A Port B
TOSHIBA
LAN module LAN module IN SE R VICE
Data (C11) (C12) Rx
E R R OR
Tx
I Port A
R Data LAN module
L (C11)
CPU I
O Help Cancel ENTER
R
IED1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 L Data
CPU
Source O Help Cancel ENTER
I
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
F3
IED3 F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 10.2-5 PRP example for redundant LAN_A and LAN_B with DANP
†Note:For the locations about the LAN module, see Chapter Technical description (CU):
Signal processing and communication modules.
‡Note: IED3 and Operator workstation (connected with singly attached node) can join
the network with Redundancy boxes (RedBox).
‘High-availability Seamless redundancy (HSR)’, for the ring topology, is designed to achieve
high reliability communication. Figure 10.2-6 illustrates IEDs connected over the ring LAN.
As doubly ports (Port A and Port B) are embedded in an IED, the IED can transfer the data
packet (A-Frame and B-Frame) for the destination over the ring LAN.

- 806 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Source Destination
TOSHIBA
IED1 IN SE R VICE
E R R OR Substation Computer Operator Workstation
CPU CPU
CPU
Data Data
Data
I Port B Port A Port B Port A
R
L Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Port B Port A
O Help Cancel ENTER
Rx Tx Rx Tx
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
B-Frame B-Frame
A-Frame A-Frame A-Frame
Ring LAN1
A-Frame A-Frame
B-Frame B-Frame B-Frame
TOSHIBA TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
IN SE R VICE
E R R OR
E R R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Port A Port B QuadBox QuadBox Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12) (C11) (C12)
Data Data
I I
R R
L Ring LAN2 L
CPU CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 IED4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
A-Frame
B-Frame
TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
E R R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12)
Data
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 10.2-6 HSR example for ring-LAN with DANH

Note: Prohibition symbol () shows the frame is removed by the next terminals.
(ii) LRE switches

The user should set On for both settings [LRE_PortA_EN] and [LRE_PortB_EN] so that the
LRE can duplicate the data for A-Frame and B-Frame.
(iii) Entry Forget Time

Packets are transferred in A-Frame and B-Frame over the LAN. The user should set the
[EntryForgetTime] to delete a duplicated frame listed in the duplicating table. The duplicated
frame will be erased when it stays longer than the setting time.
For Figure 10.2-5 example, the IED1 (Source) duplicates data by the LRE. The duplicated
data (in A and B-Frames) are transferred simultaneously over the LAN_A and LAN_B. In the
meantime, both frames cannot arrive at Substation computer (Destination). If the duplicated
frame is older than the setting [EntryForgetTime], the duplicated frame will be removed.
The [EntryForgetTime] has default 400ms setting, but the user can change it for an
appropriate value among 100 to 10,000ms. The setting value should be taken account of the

- 807 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
time after the entry removed from the duplicate table. The setting value also should be taken
account of the differences of the communication speeds between LANs.
(iv) Supervision
The communication supervisor function is available in PRP and HSR. The user can have
following settings:
Setting [LineCheckInterval]: is the setting of the interval time to send supervision frames
cyclically. The user is able to choice the time among 100ms to 100,000ms, but the
setting has default 2000ms values.
Setting [SV_Dst_MACAddr]: is for a reserved multicast address ’01-15-4E-00-01-xx’. By
default, ‘00’ is set for the ‘xx’. However, if conflict arises, the use can configure to
set any value between 0x00 and 0xFF for the ‘xx’.
Setting [SV_VLAN_EN]: can have On setting when the supervision frame is used in VLAN.
Additionally, the user can set identification specifying the VLAN to which the
supervision frame belongs and the priority of the supervision frame. Use the
settings [SV_VLAN_ID] and [SV_VLAN_Priority]. By default, Off is set for the
[SV_LAN_EN].
(v) Monitor
It is possible for the user to watch the communion statuses about Port A and Port B. Figure
10.2-7 shows the numbers of transferred packets via ports.
RedundantPacketNum
10:48 1/6
PortA_Send 12345
PortA_Recv 12345
PortA_ErrLANID 12345
PortB_Send 12345
PortB_Recv 12345
PortB_ErrLANID 12345
Figure 10.2-7 PRP/HSR status

Note: For the operations, see Chapter Technical description (CU): User interface:
Monitoring sub-menu.
Note: PortA_ErrLANID and PortB_ErrLANID do not increase in HSR, because the both
can receive A-frame and B-frame.
PortA_Send: is the number of sending packets for ‘LAN_A’.
PortA_Recv: is the actual number of receiving packets from ‘LAN_A’.
PortA_ErrLANID: is the number of errors that receives packets coming from ‘LAN_B’
PortB_Send: is the number of sending packets for ‘LAN_B’.
PortB_Recv: is the actual number of receiving packets from ‘LAN_B’.
PortB_ErrLANID: is the number of errors that packets coming from ‘LAN_A’.

- 808 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vi) IP setting example [RedundantMode] =PRP or HSR

When PRP or HSR is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply single IP address
in the IED. The table shows that Port A and B have the same IP address.
Table 10.2-6 Default IP address for PRP or HSR
GR-TIEMS® /
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
Port A†
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
IP address at
Port B†
IP address
Not applicable Not applicable 192.168.1.13‡
for Local PC
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default. Either port A or B is allowed to operate.
‡Note: ‘192.168.1.13’ can be set for the local engineering PC, if LAN for Local PC is
mounted at C13.

- 809 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.2.4 Redundant LAN (RSTP operation)

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), defined in the IEEE 802.1D, is ready to operate in the
IED, when the user set RSTP for scheme switch [RedundantMode].
(i) Overview
‘Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)’ is designed to achieve LAN bridge connections in stable.
The RSTP choose one of bridges as the root and BPDU data (called ‘Bridge Protocol Data Unit)
is exchanged periodically over RPST network. Each bridge can listen and learn the BPDU data
so that all bridges in the network can find the shortest path for the root location (we call it
“Path-cost”). Consequently, the RTSP operation clear and recover the network failure if
occurred; no temporary loop will not occur in the network (that is, all terminals can have loop-
free LAN).
(ii) Parameters
When RSTP is set for the [RedundantMode], the user should enter several PSTP parameters
so that the IED is able to enjoy the Spanning Tree topology by the RSTP:
Setting [BridgeHelloTime]: is used to set a BPDU transferring cycle for other terminals
(i.e., BPDU sending interval; they are sent for IEDs, Network bridges, etc.)
Setting [BridgeMaxAge]: instructs the terminal (IED) to listen to a BPDU cyclically. When
a terminal (IED) cannot listen to BPDUs within the setting, the terminal (IED) starts the
computation to make new spanning tree.
Setting [BridgePrioriy]: is allowed for the user to make priority tables in the IEDs. When
a terminal has the smallest number, the terminal can become the root bridge with high
possibility Note that a number can be set in 4096 steps.
Setting [BridgeFedDelay]: is the time to wait for Listening and Learning.
Note: the user shall take the above settings based on the IEEE 802.1D equations below:
2× [BridgeFwdDelay] − 1.0𝑠𝑒𝑐. ≥ [BridgeMaxAge] (10.2-1)
[BridgeMaxAge] ≥ 2 × ([BridgeHellowTime] + 1.0𝑠𝑒𝑐. (10.2-2)

- 810 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Settings [PortA_AdminEdge] and [PortA_AutoEdge] †: are provided for a port, which is

able to operate as ‘Edge’. Edge will not be joined for the spanning tree computation, so
Edge port is able to have the communication immediately when the LAN connection is
started (link-up; Notice that the user has to know that no loop will occur in the network,
in advance). When On is set for the [PortA_AdminEdge], the Port A unconditionally
operates as Edge. PortA can detect Edge port itself, when On is set for the
[PortA_AutoEdge].
Setting [PortA_PathCost]: is used to set the distance for the root bridge (path cost), when
the port is used in the LAN network, actually. As a rule, the setting value depends on the
communication bandwidth.
Setting [PortA_Priority]: is set a priority value for the port. Similar to the setting
[BridgePrioriy], a port having the smallest number can have the highest priority. Note
that a number can be set in 16 steps
†Note: Port A (connection for LAN_A) is located at C11 of IED. The second Port B
(connection for Port B) is located at C12 and has similar settings. See Table 10.2-6
for the IP addresses examples. The user can find the contents about LAN
communication module in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and

- 811 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.2.5 Settings
Setting of TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
Un Default setting
its value
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First IP address 192.168. 1. 11
LAN1
SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – Subnet mask 255.255.255. 0
(Port A)
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168. 1. 1
IPADDRESS2 0 – 255 – Second IP address 192.168. 1. 12
LAN2
(Port B)
GATEWAY2 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168. 1. 1
IPADDRESS3 0 – 255 – IP address provided for the engineering PC 192.168. 1. 13
LAN3 for
Local PC
GATEWAY3 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168. 1. 1
Setting of PRP_HSR(Function ID: 342001)

Setting item Range Units Contents Default setting value Notes
RedundantMode PRP/HSR/RSTP – Selection of either PRP/HSR/RSTP PRP
LRE_PortA_EN Off / On – Administrative action at PortA On
LRE_PortB_EN Off / On – Administrative action at PortB On
P LifeCheckInterval 100-100000 ms How often the node sends PRP_Supervision 2000ms
R 01-15-4E-00-01-00
P SV_Dst_MACAddr to – Destination Mac address of supervision frame 01-15-4E-00-01-00
& 01-15-4E-00-01-FF
H SV_VLAN_EN Off / On – Enable or Disable VLAN of supervision frame Off
S SV_VLAN_ID A 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the
0-4094 – 0
R frame belongs
SV_VLAN_Priority 0-7 – VLAN Priority of supervision frame 0
EntryForgetTime 100-10000 ms Entry is removed from the duplicate table 400
BridgeHelloTime 1 - 10 s Sending interval of BPUD from Root Bridge 2
BridgeMaxAge 6 - 40 s Receiving interval of BPUD 20
BridgeFwdDelay 4 - 30 S Waiting times for Listening and Learning 15
BridgePriority 0-61440 (4096steps) - Priority number in Bridge 32768
R PortA_AdminEdge Off / On - Operation of ‘Edge port’ at PortA Off
S PortA_AutoEdge Off / On - Auto detection for ‘Edge port’ at PortA On
T PortA_PathCost 1–200000000 - Root Path Cost at PortA 20000
P PortA_Priority 0 – 240 (16steps) - Priority number at PortA 128
PortB_AdminEdge Off / On - Operation of ‘Edge port’ at PortB Off
PortB_AutoEdge Off / On - Auto detection for ‘Edge port’ at PortB On
PortB_PathCost 1–200000000 - Root Path Cost at PortB 20000
PortB_Priority 0 – 240 (16steps) - Priority number at PortB 128
Setting of REDLAN(Function ID: 340001)

Fixed / Enabling Hot-standby operation
RedundantMode – Fixed
Hot_Standby
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

None / Port1 (Port
PrimaryPort – Selection of the primary port None
A) / Port2 (Port B)
DownTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-down 5

- 812 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

UpTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-up 5
Setting of Net_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)

NetMonitor_EN Off / On – Enable switch for net monitoring Off

Ping_IP1 0 – 255 – Ping address of first target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP2 0 – 255 – Ping address of second target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP3 0 – 255 – Ping address of third target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP4 0 – 255 – Ping address of forth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP5 0 – 255 – Ping address of fifth target 0.0.0.0
Net Ping_IP6 0 – 255 – Ping address of sixth target 0.0.0.0
Monitor Ping_IP7 0 – 255 – Ping address of seventh target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP8 0 – 255 – Ping address of eighth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP9 0 – 255 – Ping address of ninth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP10 0 – 255 – Ping address of tenth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP11 0 – 255 – Ping address of eleventh target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP12 0 – 255 – Ping address of twelfth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_Wait 1 – 10 sec Ping packet waiting time 1
Ping Ping_Interval 1 – 120 sec Ping packet interval time 5
Chk_Count 1 – 10 sec Number of ping check count 3

- 813 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.2.6 Signals (DataID)

TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
3130001001 CH1_USING Port A is operating
3130011001 CH2_USING Port B is operating
3010001150 MAC1_OCT1 MAC1 address octet 1
3110101001 RX1_CNT receive packet counter
3110111001 RX1ER_CNT receive error counter
3111101001 RX2_CNT
3111111001 RX2ER_CNT
3110201001 TX1_CNT send packet counter
3110211001 TX1ER_CNT send error counter
3111201001 TX2_CNT
3111211001 TX2ER_CNT

PRP_HSR (Function ID: 342001)
3211011001 PortA_Send frames sent over A(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211021001 PortB_Send frames sent over B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211041001 PortA_ErrLANID frames with wrong LAN id received on Port A
3211051001 PortB_ErrLANID frames with wrong LAN id received on Port B

- 814 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

PRP_HSR (Function ID: 342001)
3211061001 PortA_Recv frames received over Port A(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211071001 PortB_Recv frames received over Port B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
3100061001 Port1_Link LAN_A (Port A) Link Status
3100071001 Port2_Link LAN_B (Port B) Link Status
3100081001 Using_CH LAN (port) information in used

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
310000E001 CH1_CH_CHG Change to LAN_A (Port A) from LAN_B (Port B)
310001E001 CH2_CH_CHG Change to LAN_B (Port B) from LAN_A (Port A)

NET_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)
3121001001 NETMONITOR Change to Network monitoring function
3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w.r.t IP1 address
31200A1460 Ping_IP11 Decision output of PING11 response w.r.t IP11 address
31200B1460 Ping_IP12 Decision output of PING12 response w.r.t IP12 address

- 815 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––IEC 61850 communication
BU
IEC 61850 communication

Figure 10.3-1 shows a substation automation system (SAS) and a number of IEDs connected
via a Ring LAN (100BASE-FX). The IEDs can have communication with other devices using
the international standard protocol (IEC 61850 standard‡); additionally, the ring network
topology is used to achieve network redundancy in the system. The user should use the GR-
TIEMS to configure the protocol in the IEC 61850 standard. That is, the functions for the
protection, the measurement, monitoring at local and remote, controlling and logging the data
are required to program in the IEC 61850 standard.
Remote
Monitoring
GPS
Communication Substation
Operator Network
Workstation Computer
Engineering
Workstation Printer Router/
Modem
SNTP Ethernet LAN (TCP/IP)
Fiber Optic Ring: 100BASE-FX

CONTROL
MEASUREMENT
GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL
GOOSE
Figure 10.3-1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol
†Note:When applying IEC 61850 communications, the user should map application
signals with the required logical-nodes (LNs) within the IED. In this manual, we
show the application signals as Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the
Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided
by Toshiba. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
‡Note:Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the
user should verify its IEC 61850 capability by reviewing both the protocol-
implementation-conformance-statement (PICS) and the model-implementation-

- 816 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
conformance-statement (MICS). The MICS provides the user with information for
the LNs provided within the IED; the PICS provides the user with information to
enable the IED to communicate with both SAS and other devices. See
Appendix:IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS. It explains how the user can
obtain this information.
When TCP/IP operates, the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer, operator
workstation (OWS), engineering workstation (EWS), remote monitoring system, SNTP server.
In the SAS, the communication is served with the method of data transfer:
 Report method of sending event messages like measurement, status, alarm and so on
 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) method of communication
between IEDs like interlock
 Control method like controlling the circuit breaker (CB), the disconnector (DS), the
selector device (43), the transformer tap (TAP) and so on

- 817 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.3.1 About protocol

The IED dynamically generates Logical Nodes, Data sets and control blocks defined in CID file
upon boot-up. We shall discuss the configuration procedure to set the data in CID files later.
For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and logical
nodes. The user should configure the 61850 Data Model to perform a required function for the
protection and control.
Modular approach achieves data transfer between devices in the IEC 61850 standard. All
function in the IEC 61850 network are grouped into smaller objects called Logical Nodes (LNs),
which contains process objects related data and attributes of a logical device protection and
control function. Logical Node Zero (LLN0) represents specific information of the logical device.
Logical Node Physical Device (LPHD) represents specific information of a physical device. A
generic device is called Physical device (PD). The LPHD contains the properties of the PD. A
specific function in the IED is represented as domain specific LN. The domain specific LN
contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network.
LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged
between PDs. The relation between data object classes, data types, data attributes and
abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model. The LN data model is mapped to
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) functions. Table 10.3-1shows the description of LNs.
Table 10.3-1 LN descripion

Actual device
LN Description
corresponding to LN
Logical node zero represents logical device specific Operation state of BCU
LLNO
information State of 43 switch
Logical node physical device represents physical
LPHD BCU,BCPU
device specific information
Domain Domain specific LN represents protection relay
XCBR,CSWI
specific LN specific function
Generic input output logical node is used if essential Based on client
GGIO
signals are not defined in the extended logical nodes. requirements
All LN classes (LLN0 and domain specific LN) receive the mandatory data of the common LN
except LPHD. Table 10.3-2 exemplifies Function, Logical node and Communication service
used in the IEC 61850 communication.

- 818 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 10.3-2 Function groups in 61850

Examples of IED applications Logical
Functions grouped in to provide protection/control node Communication methods
61850 functions for the power defined in serviced in 61850
system 61850
Overvoltage relay (OV) PTOV Buffered Report
Overcurrent relay (OC) PTOC Buffered Report
Monitor
Trip circuit (TRC) XCBR GOOSE
Generic functions SIMG GOOSE
Control SPOS etc. CSWI Enhanced-security Control
Measurement MMXU Unbuffered Report
Measurement
Harmonics MHAI Unbuffered Report
Time Simple Network Time
NA SNTP
Synchronization Protocol
Figure 10.3-2 shows Physical Model, which is equivalent to the IEC 61850 Model. The Physical
Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with the SAS using
the Ethernet. The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at LNs in both the
PD using different Communication services, which we shall discuss in section 10.3.2.
Monitoring
x Control IED SAS
×
Over current Server / Work
CB Open/Close relay station
CB Status
Measuring
Monitoring Under voltage

relay Ethernet
Substation
Harmonics
measurement
Measuring
Control / Monitoring Protection function
Physical Model
“Logical Node” “Communication Service”
IEC 61850 Model Physical Device
LN Physical Device
LN LPHD LN
GOOSE
CB XCBR CALH
LN Enhanced-security Control
LN
CSWI
IHMI
LN Buffered Report
LN
CT PTOC
LN IARC
GOOSE
PTRC
LN
Buffered Report
VT PTUV
LN Unbuffered Report
MHAI
LN GOOSE
Binary
SIMG
Input
Figure 10.3-2 Example of Physical model and its equivalent IEC 61850 model

- 819 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) Legacy IEC61850 (i.e., 61850 Editon1)

It is early edition for the IEC61850 standard. This edition is bundled in all 61850 software.
(ii) 61850 Edition1 with option

When the IED has the IEC61850 Edition1 with Option, the IED can have private object, which
can handle DataUpdate Trigger. For more information, see section 10.3.9.
(iii) 61850 Edition2

When the 61850 edition2 is available in the IED, the IED has LN LGOS, which shall be used
monitoring of GOOSE message. Note that there shall be one instance of LGOS per GOOSE
subscription for a given GOOSE source.
The user can handle LGOS with signals shown in Table 10.3-3. The signals are provided for
mapping in the 61850 Editon2. Figure 10.3-3 shows an example that they are mapped for the
LGOS.
Table 10.3-3 GOOSE message for the monitor or the diagnostic

Signals (Data ID) Signal names Descriptions
305101 7400006470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR #0 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
… … …
Figure 10.3-3 Example of Editon2 LGOS mapping

- 820 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.3.2 Communication service

All essential data transmission methods are summarized in Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI); the IED application from communication stack is separated by the ACSI. The
user can map an interface to a communication stack using Specific communication service
mapping (SCSM).
The LN contains data list with their attributes based on their functionality in SAS. A
data has a well-defined structure and information of SAS. The data and attributes of the LN
in a logical device are exchanged by the communication services according to IEC 61850
protocol. The communication services are implemented by SCSM using Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol.
(i) Report for SAS

In the IED, ‘report’ is a method of sending status data, alarm data, measurement data and so
on. Using server-client communication, ‘Report’ is a ‘data set’ transferred from the IED to the
SAS. The ‘reports’ generated by the predefined ‘triggers’ are issued regularly in interval; the
‘reports’ are also generated upon a change in the event. The ‘reports’ are grouped into two
types: (1) Buffered-report-control-block and (2) Unbuffered-report-control-block. Note that the
system achieved by the unbuffered-report-service cannot start an event recover function
during the communication failure.
(ii) GOOSE for peer-to-peer communication

‘Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) ’ is a faster method to transfer the data
in ‘Generic substation event (GSE)’ between IEDs. In all IEDs, multicast GOOSE message is
published from the ‘GOOSE_control_block (GCB)’. The GOOSE communication methods are
grouped into two: (1) GOOSE publish and (2) GOOSE subscribe.
The data structures of the GOOSE are illustrated in Table 10.3-4; they are grouped for
the system (say, SAS) and other logical devices (say, a relay); they are used in the applications
in the SAS and the IED.

- 821 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 10.3-4 Data structures in the GOOSE

Logical Device
Category “System” Other Logical device (e.g., “Relay”)
Data Model System Relay
DataSet “GOOSEDS” LLN0
GGIO1 Ind1..16 GoCB
LLN0 LPHD1
GoCB PTRC
The DataSet “GOOSEDS” is fixed ….
LPHD1
GGIO
Data set Fixed (Not configurable) Configurable
Performance GOOSE data sent communication time GOOSE data sent, communication
is < 3msec time is around 10msec
(iii) System
The data model in the LN named “System” is not allowed to modify (that is, a data model is
fixed; other LN data models are configurable to meet the system requirement). Mapping
signals to the GGIO1 is required when the GOOSE should send data faster.
(iv) Control mode using GOOSE

In the IED, signals generated on the binary output circuit (BO) can be controlled by the SAS,
if the user makes the link between a reviving control message and a control function block that
changes the state of the output element. Four control modes are provided:
DOes: Direct control with normal security (direct-operate)
SBOns: SBO control with normal security (operate-once or operate-many)
DOes: Direct control with enhanced security (direct-operate)
SBOes: SBO control with enhanced security (operate-once or operate-many)
(v) Time synchronization using IEC 61850 protocol / SNTP

SNTP (Simple network time protocol) is used to synchronize clocks of all IEDs in SAS. Time
synchronization is required to maintain common time across all IEDs in the network. This
makes it easier to analyze the Time stamped event data generated by the IEDs in chronological
order. In the system, IEDs are synchronized with the device having precision time source (for
example, GPS).
(vi) File transfer (COMTRADE)

To send data of the disturbance records, file transfer service is used, which is the operated in
COMTRADE format.

- 822 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vii) Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS)

MMS is an application layer protocol that provides data transmission between IEDs, which
performs monitoring and controlling; it can provide reliability for the data transmission. The
MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP/IP
and Ethernet.
(viii) Generic Substation Events (GSE)

GSE is a control model defined in the IEC 61850 standard; it provides a fast and reliable
method for transferring the event data over the SAS. The GSE provides facility to transfer the
same event message to multiple physical devices using multicast or broadcast service.

- 823 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.3.3 How to manage engineering work

An IED can have multiple logical devices, which represents protection and control functions.
Each logical device has Logical Nodes (LN), Datasets, Report Control Block (RCB), GOOSE
Control Block (GCB), GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe function. Figure 10.3-4
illustrates the data structure in the IED.
IED
*IEC 61850-7-4
Logical device1 CONTROL
Logical Node
*Set of LN variables REPORT

Logical Node (Event,
VCT Report Measurement)

DataSet
Voltage Control Block
Logical Node
Input / Output Signals
Current
Application
Data Logical device2
BIO ・・・ GOOSE GOOSE
DataSet
Binary
Control Block (outgoing)
Logical Node
Input
Binary
Input
2. Mapping 1. icd(cid)
data
GOOSE
GOOSE subscribe function
(incoming)
3. GOOSE subscribe
Figure 10.3-4 IED Data Structure

To configure an IED data structure, the user should edit the following items using GR-TIEMS.
Figure 10.3-5 shows the flow diagram for IEC 61850 configuration.
 Edit Signal mapping
 Edit Logical Node
 Edit DataSet
 Edit Report Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Publish
 Edit GOOSE Subscribe
 Edit Control function

- 824 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Connect PC to IED via LAN or USB
Start GR-TIEMS engineering tool
Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree
(→cf. sec. 10.3.3(i))
Select an IED to manage IEC61850 configuration file

(→cf. sec. 10.3.3(i))
Choose a required 61850 edition from the pull-down list

(→cf. sec. 10.3.3(ii))
Import ICD/CID file from the selected IED

(→cf. sec.10.3.3(iii))
Map the signals to Logical Nodes

(→cf. sec.10.3.3(iv))
Edit Data set, RCB and GCB

(→cf. sec. 10.3.3(iv))
Edit signals for GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe

(→cf. sec. 10.3.3(iv))
Write configured data to IED

(→cf. sec.10.3.3(v))
Figure 10.3-5 Flow diagram

- 825 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) Creating and opening project

Creation of project file
If the user has an existing project, it can be found in user’s project folder. If the
user does not have the project, create a new project. Figure 10.3-6 shows how to
open an existing project or create a new project.
Figure 10.3-6 File menu
Selection of IED
When user’s project has been created or is opened, the user can add new IEDs.
Figure 10.3-7 illustrates new IED has been added on the project tree.
Figure 10.3-7 Adding IED

- 826 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Choice of 61850 edition number

Select IEC 61850 tool from the menu of Configuration tool, as shown in Figure 10.3-8. When
the user can see the edition list†, select a required one from the list‡. Then, the user can see
the edition number at the header on IEC61850 tool screen, or the bottom of the GR-TIEMS
main screen.
Selection of IEC61850 tool
Edition list
Edition 1
Edition1 display
Edition 1-Opetion
Edition1_Option display
Edition 2
Edition2 display
Figure 10.3-8 Choice of IEC61850 edition number

†Note:When the user has purchased the products supporting for Editon1-Option or later
edition, the GR-TIEMS can display the Edition list menu, as shown in Figure
10.3-8; thus, the user should select one from the edition list. However, if neither is
supported in your products, then the menu is not displayed, and default Edition1
will be selected directly. The user can check it through the IED screen if the IED
has Edition1_Option or later edition. See sec 10.3.3(vi) for the confirmation.
Regarding ‘Edition1_Option’, see section 10.3.1(ii) and 10.3.9.
‡Note:Be aware that your edition selection cannot be undone. If you fail to select a
correct one, make the project again. You are not able to change the edition after
the choice.

- 827 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Check to see that four engineering screens are appeared:

 Logical Node Screen
 Signal List Screen
 GOOSE Publish Screen
 GOOSE Subscribe Screen
Figure 10.3-9 IEC 61850 screens

- 828 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) IEC 61850 configuration files

Substation configuration language (SCL) files are generated by the configuration in the IEC
61850 protocol. The SCL files are used to exchange the configuration data in different
manufacture tools. Two types of files are used for exchanging data in Table 10.3-5.
Table 10.3-5 Types of SCL files

SCL file Description
.ICD This file describes the capabilities of an IED. It contains the
IED Capability Description communication data and function of LN in an IED.
.CID Every device configured for IEC 61850 in the GR-TIEMS tool
Configured IED Description generates a CID file. This file is then written to the IED. This
file contains configuration information of the IED to which it is
connected.
Exporting and Importing CID/ICD file

The user can export or / import a CID/ICD file as a CSV file. The user can edit
the exported CSV file using the MS-EXCEL®; the user can import the edited CSV
file back to the GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.3-10 shows the options available to
import/export CID/ICD file. The user can either click the icons on the menu bar
or select the required option form the File menu drop down list.
Import CID/ICD
Export CID
Export ICD
Figure 10.3-10 Export / Import of CID / ICD file
Manage third party CID file

The GR-TIEMS can have third party CID file. In the project tree of the GR-TIEMS,
the user can use the device information for creating a third Party IED. To
configure dataset, RCB, GCB, GOOSE publish and GOOSE subscribe settings
and so on, the data attributes are used after the creation of the data.
Mapping application data in IEC 61850

For any IED, the IEC61850 configuration* is available by default. The user

- 829 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
should check whether the required signals are mapped in the default
configuration.
*Note: There is no default configuration for GOOSE subscription. If GOOSE subscribe

function is required, then a new configuration has to be done.
To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check
the mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list. If they have existed, the signals
in the signal list should be matched with the attributes of LNs.
Figure 10.3-11 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default
configuration. For example, to check for mapping of the primary element signal
in earth fault protection (EF1), follow the steps below:
1. To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN, key ‘EF1’ under Signal
Name in the Signal List screen.
Mapped data
“EF1” in signal list
Figure 10.3-11 Signal mapping

As shown in the above figure, the “EF1” signal is already mapped to LN
attribute Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general.
2. To check if “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already added in Dataset. Right

click on “LLN0” and select Edit DataSet, then DataSet List screen appears as

- 830 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Figure 10.3-12 DataSet list
As shown in the above figure, “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already

mapped in the Dataset “STAT1”.
3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and
select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in
Figure 10.3-13.
Figure 10.3-13 Report Control List

As shown in the above figure, the DataSet “STAT1” is already assigned to
RCB “brcbST-A”.

- 831 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iv) Mapping signals in signal list to Logical Nodes

The user can add or modify signal mapping to the LN variable. The following section describes
how to modify the mapped data if the user wants to add signals, which are sent using Report
or GOOSE.
Edit Mapping Data

1. Search the signal to be sent from the Signal List window as shown in Figure
10.3-14.
2. Drag and Drop the selected signal to the logical node variable.
Mapped data
Drop
Drag
Signals
Figure 10.3-14 Signal mapping

Note: To optimize the performance of the IED, “Period” should be 100 if the signal is not
required to be sent immediately.
“301001 3110041005 (Qual_Validity)” should be mapped to “q” with Period=100.
“200301 9010001006 (SYS_TIME)” should be mapped to “t”.
Export / Import Mapping Data

The user can export mapped data in the CSV file; the user can edit the exported
CSV file by the MS-Excel® and import back into the GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.3-15
shows the export / import options.
Export Mapping Data

Import Mapping Data
Figure 10.3-15 Export / Import mapping data

- 832 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Edit Logical Node

If the required LN or variable is not available in the IED, the user should follow the
steps below to add or modify the Logical Node:
1. To add new LN or to edit the variable of an existing LN, Right click Prot and
select Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node.
2. In the Edit Logical Node screen, select LN Class, Prefix and LN Instance and
check the required variable check boxes as shown in Figure 10.3-16 below.
To Add Logical Node
To add optional variable

To choose a proper Logical Node*
Figure 10.3-16 Add or Edit Logical Node
*Note: Refer to IEC 61850-7-4 to choose a proper Logical Node.

- 833 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Edit DataSet
Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in
Figure 10.3-17. For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below:
1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as
2. Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK.
Users can choose the existing

Dataset*, or enter a new
DataSet name.
Figure 10.3-17 Edit DataSet screen
*Note: 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have
maximum of 32 elements.

- 834 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Edit Report Control Block (RCB)

Report Control Block (RCB) is used to send report from IEDs to client. If the user
wishes to assign the DataSet to Report Control Block, follow the steps below:
1. Under the LN tree structure, select Prot, Right click LLN0 and select Edit
Report Control. Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 10.3-18.
2. Click Add or Edit to add a new dataset or to edit the existing dataset in the
Report Control List window as shown in Figure 10.3-18.
Figure 10.3-18 Edit Report Control screen

- 835 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Edit GOOSE Control Block

GOOSE control block is used to exchange information between IEDs. GOOSE
messages are used for interlock operation between IEDs in order to protect the
electrical system. GGIO1 is used for sending high-speed GOOSE messages. The
DataID assigned to GGIO1 is sent within 3ms.
If the user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation, follow the steps
below:
1. Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 10.3-19.
2. Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE.
Note: The user can assign any signal to GGIO1->Ind1~16 for high-speed GOOSE, as
required.
Drop
Drag
Figure 10.3-19 Signal mapping for high speed GOOSE
As shown in the above figure, signals are assigned to “System/GGIO1$Ind1”. The

user can assign signals to other GGIOs (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3 and so on)
which are not meant for high-speed GOOSE operation.

- 836 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Edit GOOSE Publish

The signals assigned to GGIO1 variables are published automatically by default.
The GGIO1 data set is fixed and is pre-configured in GOOSE Publish screen. If
the user assign signals to other GGIO variables (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3) for
GOOSE publish operation, then the user needs to add those variables in the
GOOSE Publish screen.
Figure 10.3-20 shows the GOOSE Publish screen, where “System” is fixed and is
not configurable for GGIO1, whereas “Ctrl” (Control) and “Prot” (Protection) are
configurable. The user can add new variables from the “Logical Node” screen to
the GOOSE Publish screen using drag & drop* method. Figure 10.3-20 shows an
example for GOOSE Publish, where “System/GGIO2$Ind1$stVal” is added to the
GOOSE Publish screen.
*Note: Only “stVal” and “q” variables can be added to GOOSE Publish screen.
Drag
Fixed
Drop
Figure 10.3-20 GOOSE Publish

- 837 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Edit GOOSE subscribe

GOOSE subscribe function is configured to receive GOOSE messages published
by other IEDs. Figure 10.3-21 exemplifies the GOOSE Subscribe screen; the user
can select the necessary signals to be added. For example, “Bay1 GBU200” is the
current IED; “Bay2 GRZ200” is the other IED. “List 1” is GOOSE publisher of
GRZ200; “List 2” is GOOSE subscriber for GBU200. The user can select the
GOOSE publisher from GRZ200 and add to the GOOSE subscriber of GBU200.
In the example shown below, select the required variable and click Add. Similarly,
the user can delete the variables.
When the user adds a signal to the GOOSE subscribe list from the other IED,
then the same signal is automatically added in the Signal List of the current
IED.
List 2
List 1 List 2
Figure 10.3-21 GOOSE Subscribe

Note: The user can monitor about the GOOSE message on the LCD screen. See sec.
10.3.8.
Edit Control function

The Data IDs (i.e., Signal Number) starting with “5” is used for control function
when the IED has the control function by default. The user should check whether
the required signals are mapped in the default configuration. The user can edit
and add the control signals to the LN as described in section 10.3.3(iv).
In an IED, usually an output Data ID of a protection function is assigned to LN

variable. However, for the control application, the IED is capable of receiving
command from the SAS server. To control a device (such as a circuit breaker), the
input point* (Data ID) in the control application should be configured to receive
commands from the SAS sever (that is, selecting, operating or cancel command).

- 838 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands
from the sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user
should map an input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure
10.3-22). Mapping period for Control shall be 100.
*Note: For more information of the input points, see chapter General control function or
Control and monitoring application (BU).
SBOW
Mapping Input DataID
Oper
DE V01_ CONTROL_ RE Q
Cancel
Figure 10.3-22 Control function mapping

To complete the setting for control function, after mapping data, the user needs
to set BI, BO† in the GR-TIEMS ->Setting.
†Note:For more information for the BI, BO, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module.

- 839 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(v) Writing the configuration file to IED

When the user has completed editing the configuration files, the user can write the
IEC61850 configuration files, as shown in
Figure 10.3-23 Write to IED

Follow the below steps to write the file in the IED.
1. Save the current project in the PC.
2. Right click on the target IED and select “Write to IED”.
3. Click items to write: Signal list†, GOOSE Subscribe†, CID, and
Mapping Data.
4. Click Write to transfer the files to the IED.
Figure 10.3-24 Selection of CFD writing items

†Note:If GOOSE subscribe operation is required, the user shall select Signal List and
GOOSE Subscribe.

- 840 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
5. Set communication parameters, if needed.
Figure 10.3-25 Communication parameter settings
6. Confirm the edition number written in the IED.
Note: The user can check the edition number through on the LCD screen. Therefore, the
user should confirm the edition number written in the IED too. See sec. 10.3.3(vi)
to show the LCD screen.

- 841 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(vi) Confirmation of the edition number of IEC61850

Figure 10.3-26 shows how to confirm the edition number, if the IED is supporting several
editions of IEC61850. The user can also confirm the version, when the IED is running in
IEC61850 configuration file. For example, in accordance with on the below information of LCD
screen, the IED can handle three editions and the IED is running on the Edition2 (Ed2).
Main Menu Information

10:48 8/10 10:48 1/xx
Record [IED TYPE]
Monitoring G**
Setting -**-***-**-**-**-***
I/O setting -****-***-**
Control [Serial No.]
Time 1234567890
Test [Plant name]
0Information ABCD station
Security Setting [Description]
Login/Logout ABCDEFG
[CP1M Software]
ABCD***
[IEC61850 eng]
G2M8500**
[IEC61850 Support] Information about the IED is
Ed1/Ed1op/Ed2
[IEC61850 Data Model] supporting 61850 editions.
W2GR_200.***
[IEC61850 SCL Ver.] The IED is running based on the
Edition 2(2007B)
[IEC61850 Mapping] edition of 61850 SCL version.
X2GR_00****
[GOOSE Subscribe]
No data
Scroll downward
Figure 10.3-26 Display sample of 61850 edition information

Note: The edition information will be displayed when the IED has several edition
numbers. If the IED does not have Edition 2 or later, the above texts will not be
screened.

- 842 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.3.4 Settings for 61850 communications

(i) Setting time for re-sending GOOSE subscribe information
The user can configure the maximum duration time for the case when the IED fails to re-send
GOOSE subscribe information. Set the time in seconds using setting [GOINT].
(ii) Setting for 61850 authentication

When the IED is to be authenticated for starting the IEC 61850 communications, the user
should set scheme switch [850AUT] On.
(iii) Blocking 61850 communication

If the user does not want the IED to start the IEC 61850 communications, the user should set
scheme switch [850BLK] On.
(iv) Setting ‘keep-alive’ time for TCP

When applying IEC 61850 communications with TCP/IP, the user should set a time for the
‘keep-alive’ signal. The user should set the time in seconds using the setting [850KEEPALIVE].
(v) Setting ‘CommTerm’

If the user wishes to receive a ‘CommTerm’ signal carrying an actual operation time from a
device outside the IED, the user should set scheme switch [TCMD] On. Note that the
‘CommTerm’ signal† will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this
function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication provided by
TOSHIBA.
†Note:For example, Figure 10.3-27 shows the signal flow between a substation computer
(SC), an IED and a target device (e.g. CB). If the requirement is to close the CB on
request of the SC, the SC will send the operation command “Operate” to the IED;
the time information (T) is also sent along with the operation command. When
receiving the operation command and observing that the CB has closed, the IED
will send a response signal “CommTerm” to the SC along with the time
information. However, this time information is not the actual operation time of the
CB, but the same time information originally sent with the operation command.
The IEC 61850 standard defines this rule; hence, general operations in the IEC
61850 standard are subject to this rule. However, the server communication
provided by Toshiba is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting
‘CommTerm’ is required in the Toshiba communication. The user should also note
that Off is set for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.

- 843 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Station computer (SC) IED Target device (e.g. CB)
Command “CB closed” Operate+(T)
Command Open
Response
Process Closed
CommTerm+(T) Response
Figure 10.3-27 Example of CB operation flow
(vi) Setting test mode

With regard to the reception test for GOOSE subscribe information, the user can simulate a
bad condition passively by using both GOSNDBLK and GOSUBBLK functions†.
GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

For the test using the GOOSE sending block function (GOSNDBLK), the user can disable the
IED so that it does not send the GOOSE message. The GOSNDBLK function is useful when
there is a conflict in the communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal.
To block the sending of the GOOSE message, the user should set On for scheme switch
[GOSNDBLK].
GOOSE receive block (GOSUBBLK)

Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE
signal, the user can apply a setting that will prevent an IED from receiving the GOOSE
message from another IED using this test. The user can perform this test using the test setting
On for scheme switch [GOSUBBLK]. Consequently, the IED rejects the GOOSE messages from
other IEDs. The GOOSE receive block function (GOSUBBLK) is also useful for the validation
of switchgear interlocking determination.
†Note:The user may wish to perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using
the GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular
IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the
particular IED under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the

- 844 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
tests.
10.3.5 Selection of IEC61850 protocol among IED embedded protocols

Figure 10.3-28 shows the selection menu for the IEC61850 communication protocol. The user
should set IEC61850 for the [Slave Protocol] so that the IED communication is carried out in
in the IEC61850 standard. Note that the user shall restart the IED (i.e., the IED power should
be cut off and turned on) if the user has switched to the IEC61850 protocol from the others†.
SLAVE PROTOCOL
10:48 1/1
Slave protocol +
IEC61850
Figure 10.3-28 Slave protection for the IEC61850 protocol (on IED setting menu)
†Note:The menu is just screened when the IED has IEC61850 and other communication
protocols ((e.g., IEC60870-5-103 protocol, etc.). The above one will not screened
when the IED has only the IEC61850 protocol.
10.3.6 How to supervise in 61850 communications

The IED can monitor the status of the IEC 61850 communications. Discussions on IEC 61850
communications status monitoring are provided separately. (See Chapter Automatic
supervision)

- 845 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.3.7 Quality signal of IEC 61850 communication

Quality information and its attributes are defined in the IEC 61850. Table 10.3-6 shows that
the relations between the definitions in the standard and signals prepared in the IED. The
quality attributes are influenced by the errors and alarms occurred in the IED, and the degree
of those errors are standardized by settings ‘Error level’ (see Chapter Automatic supervision).
The quality information is also affected by the test mode during the test is running in the IED
(see Chapter Commissioning and maintenance).
Table 10.3-6 Quality signal defined in IEC 61850-7-3
IED signal3
Quality components definition in IEC 61850-7-3
Qual_Validity
M/ Default
Attribute Name Attribute value O/
C1 value
Validity good / invalid / reserved / questionable M Y

detailQual —
overflow2 Undecided N
outOfRange2 (shall be N
badReference determined N
Packed
oscillatory2 (packed value) M depending N

Failure on an error N
oldData2 condition) N
inconsistent2 N
Inaccurate N
source2 process / substituted M process N
Test True / False M False Y
operatorBlocked 2 True / False M False N
1Note: M/N/O means rules of attributions. If it is Mandatory (M), it shall be used in the
IED. Optionally (O), or conditional mandatory(C) are used depending on the
environment states.
2Note: The IEDs of GR200 series do not carry those attributes—overflow, out Of Range,
oscillatory, old Data, inconsistent, source, and operator Blocked.
3Note: Detail quality attributes (e.g., overflow, outOfRange, etc. marked with “N”) are not
included in the Qual_Validity.

- 846 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(i) Qual_validity
Qual_validity (61850: Signal No. 301001 3110041005) is a signal provided for a common quality
information. It can be useful if some ‘q’ attributes (it’s defined in Quality type) should belong
to a common quality. Both severe and non-severe errors are included; therefore, that signal
value will be changed whenever errors (including alarm and warning incidents) are detected.
In this quality signal, the Detail quality information—defined in the standard—is not set at
all.
Detail quality
operatorblocked
badReference
questionable
outOfRange
inconsistent
inaccurate
oscillatory
overflow
oldData
source
invalid
failure
test
301001 3110041005
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Qual_Validity
220001 3110111001
SERI_ERR
≥1
220001 3110121001
MINR_ERR
201301 3100001190
Test Mode
Figure 10.3-29 Structure of Qual_validity signal

Note:
 If non-severe incidents—such as Minor, Alarm, or Warning error are detected in
the automatic supervisions, the IEC61850 interrupts the Qual_Validity as
‘questionable (i.e., the string of Qual_Validity is 1100000000000)’.
 If severe incidents—such as Serious or Serious (comm) error are detect, the
IEC61850 interrupts the Qual_Validity as ‘invalid (i.e., it is 0100000000000)’.
 If non-severe and sever incidents occur at the same time, the output of the
Qual_Validiy is ‘invalid (i.e., it is 0100000000000)’.
 The test mode will be expressed if the Qual_Validiy has a test-bit (that is,
‘0000000000010’).
 The outputs of MINR_ERR and SERI_ERR come from the MNT_LOGIC function
block (see Chapter Automatic supervision: Supervision of task operation ).
 Test function block can output the Test Mode signal (see Chapter Commissioning
and maintenance: Test operations).

- 847 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.3.8 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication

IEDs are able to monitor the communication using GOOSE packets, which other IEDs have
sent their information via the network. If the IED can receive the GOOSE packets, the IED
can display them on the information list. Figure 6.12-30 illustrates an example of the GOOSE
monitoring list; it shows all IEDs have reported good status (OK) message, except one IED.
GOOSE Monitoring
11:12 1/320 Signal nam es
GRZ200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#0
GRT200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#1
GRD200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#2
GRL200_Bay1 NG SUB_ QUAL#3
Screen scroll down GRT200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#5
GRL200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#7

Figure 10.3-30 Screen example of GOOSE Monitoring

Note: The IED shall be managed with own subscription information to receive the
GOOSE packets regarding the other IEDs. Thus, the user should edit the
subscription contents (see Figure 10.3-21). The LCD displays the statuses based
on that the user has edited the list of the subscription contents.
Note: Jump to Monitoring sub-menu (see Chapter Technical description (CU or BU):
User interface) to display the GOOSE mentoring screen. The user can also find
the GOOSE information on the test screen on GR-TIEMS.
On the LCD screen, the user can find either OK or NG message regarding other IEDs. The
OK/NG message is generated with the information of the GOOSE packet received. Table 10.3-7
illustrates the messages displayed on LCD screen and GR-TIEMS screen.

- 848 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 10.3-7 GOOSE statutes and signal outputs

Signal values LCD screen messages GR-TIEMS screen messages
0x0000 OK GOOD
0xC000 NG QUESTIONABLE
0xC010 NG QUESTIONABLE | TEST
0xC040 NG QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE
0xC080 NG QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
When the user wishes to see GOOSE outputs†, the user can see them by user’s PLC logic, but
the user should build its logic using the PLC function. Table 10.3-8 shows the GOOSE signals,
which the user can select. For example, in order to get the GRL200_Bay1_4 information, the
user should take the GOOSE content using SUB_QUAL#3 output.
Table 10.3-8 GOOSE output signals

Data ID Signal names Descriptions
301101 3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality status
~~~ ~~~ ~~~
301101 31013E1001 SUB_QUAL#318 GOOSE subscription quality status
301101 31013F1001 SUB_QUAL#319 GOOSE subscription quality status
†Note: The user cannot view GOOSEs signal lists on the GR-TIMES engineering.
10.3.9 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option

The IED can have Private logical nodes, which are provided in Editon1_option, which are
designed in Toshiba private specification exclusively. The user can select and add the following
Data object:
Table 10.3-9 LD class in Editon1 option
LD Class DO Content
GGIO AnInDatUpd DataUpdate Trigger is provided for general Data
Object. The structure is the same as AnIn.
Note: The option1 is designed to transfer the metering values during the fault on the
IEC61850 Edition1.

- 849 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
10.3.10 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
s value
GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2

850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable Off
850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC 61850 association Off
850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec. TCP ‘KeepAlive’ time for IEC 61850 20
TCMD Off/On Set ‘T’ in ‘CommTerm’ as actual Time Off

- 850 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

 Monitoring point (for Edition 1 and Edition 2)
61850 (Function ID: 301001)
0010001001 61850STAT Status of IEC 61850(T:Running, F:Stop)
3100001440 INCOMINGPKT#0 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0
3100001441 OUTGOINGPKT#0 Outgoing packet number to IEC 61850 client#0
3100001001 REMOTEPORTNUM#0 Port number of IEC 61850 client #0
3110041005 Qual_Validity IEC 61850 validity of quality
 Monitoring point (for Edition 1 and Editon2)

GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Note: The GR-TIEMS cannot display SUB_QUAL# signals
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE being subscribed are not subscribed.
3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000A1001 SUB_QUAL#10 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000B1001 SUB_QUAL#11 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000C1001 SUB_QUAL#12 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000D1001 SUB_QUAL#13 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000E1001 SUB_QUAL#14 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000F1001 SUB_QUAL#15 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 851 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 852 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 853 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 854 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

3100AA1001 SUB_QUAL#170 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AB1001 SUB_QUAL#171 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AC1001 SUB_QUAL#172 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AD1001 SUB_QUAL#173 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AE1001 SUB_QUAL#174 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AF1001 SUB_QUAL#175 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 855 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

3100BA1001 SUB_QUAL#186 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BB1001 SUB_QUAL#187 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BC1001 SUB_QUAL#188 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BD1001 SUB_QUAL#189 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BE1001 SUB_QUAL#190 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BF1001 SUB_QUAL#191 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CA1001 SUB_QUAL#202 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CB1001 SUB_QUAL#203 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CC1001 SUB_QUAL#204 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CD1001 SUB_QUAL#205 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CE1001 SUB_QUAL#206 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CF1001 SUB_QUAL#207 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DA1001 SUB_QUAL#218 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DB1001 SUB_QUAL#219 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DC1001 SUB_QUAL#220 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DD1001 SUB_QUAL#221 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DE1001 SUB_QUAL#222 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DF1001 SUB_QUAL#223 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 856 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

3100EA1001 SUB_QUAL#234 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EB1001 SUB_QUAL#235 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EC1001 SUB_QUAL#236 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100ED1001 SUB_QUAL#237 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EE1001 SUB_QUAL#238 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EF1001 SUB_QUAL#239 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FA1001 SUB_QUAL#250 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FB1001 SUB_QUAL#251 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FC1001 SUB_QUAL#252 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FD1001 SUB_QUAL#253 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FE1001 SUB_QUAL#254 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FF1001 SUB_QUAL#255 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 857 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 858 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

 Monitoring point (for Edition 2)

GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101)
7400006470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#0 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#10 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#11 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#12 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000D6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#13 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000E6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#14 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000F6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#15 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 859 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 860 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 861 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 862 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

7400AA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#170 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#171 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#172 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#173 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#174 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#175 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#186 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#187 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#188 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#189 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#190 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#191 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 863 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

7400CA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#202 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#203 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#204 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#205 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#206 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#207 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#218 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#219 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#220 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#221 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#222 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#223 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#234 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#235 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#236 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400ED6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#237 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 864 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

7400EE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#238 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#239 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#250 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#251 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#252 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#253 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#254 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#255 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 865 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU


- 866 -
CU
Chapter 10.4: Communication protocol 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––IEC 60870-5-103 communication BU
IEC 60870-5-103 communication

The IEC 60870-5-103 standard† is one of the communication protocols when measuring data
is required to communicate between the control system and the IED; the communication is
carried out with the RS485 or the Fiber optic interface‡. The following data are transferred by
the IEC 60870-5-103 communication; the user is required create the configuration using the
GR-TIEMS, as cited in the previous section:
• Measured data: current, voltage, active power, reactive power, frequency
• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
†Note:IEC 60870-5-103 communication is embedded in the IED when the 103 has been
selected in the ordering code of the software selection. For the selection, see
Appendix: Ordering.
‡Note:The selection concerning to the communication module (interface) is dependent on
the ordering in the hardware selection. We shall see the description with regard to
the communication specification in Chapter Technical description (CU): Signal
processing and communication module.

- 867 -
CU
10.4.1 Overview
For the communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the user should create the data with
regard the protocol, which is grouped into a slave and a master. The user can edit the slave
Data or the master Data using the GR-TIEMS.
(i) Management
As cited earlier, the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is grouped into the slave and the master. In an
IED the user should select either the master mode or the slave mode; the user should edit
either the master data or the slave Data. The both modes can provide the same functions
equally. The GR-TIEMS can provide the user the management means for the following data.
Data management
Import data are provided in the CSV file. The data are categorized as “adding items”,
“editing items”, “deleting items”, and “arranging items”.
Process management
Creation of the new data
Registration, clear, and change name of a slave IED
Registration and clear of signals
Edition of the dialog prototype
External Interfaces
Logging and Access Security
Manage IEC 60870-5-103 display

Tree view style
List view style
(ii) Configuration†
Table 10.4-1 and Table 10.4-2 show that the items should be programmed using the GR-TIEMS.
We shall see how to set and edit data of the IEC 60870-5-103 configuration in section 10.4.5
†Note:Configuration for the master Data is not available in the GR200-serises.

- 868 -
CU
Table 10.4-1 Configuration items in IEC 60870-5-103

Items Contents
Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN,
Time-tagged message
Transmission condition(Data ID), COT
INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Data ID),
Time-tagged measurands
COT, Type of measurands quantities
General command INF, FUN, Control condition(Data ID)
Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurands,
Measurands
Type of measurands quantities
Table 10.4-2 Common settings in IEC 60870-5-103

Items Notice
Transmission cycle of
To perform to write the settings in the IED effectively, the
Measurands frame
user should turn off the DC supplying to the IED; then turn
FUN of System function
on the DC again.
Test mode

- 869 -
CU
10.4.2 Requirements in the Master station

In the master station of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the following specifications should be
followed in the respective IEDs:
1) Polling cycle: 150ms or longer
2) Timeout time (time to re-sending the request frame to the IED): 100ms
IEC103 master IED
Data request
Polling cycle: Response frame

150ms or more
Data request
Response frame
Figure 10.4-1 Ping cycles between the master station and the IED

- 870 -
CU
10.4.3 Interoperability
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol provides a physical layer and an application layer for the
communication to secure the interoperability.
(i) Physical layer

Either an electrical or an optical interface† is defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Electrical interface in the RS-485

A maximum number of 32 relays is possible in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Optic interface
Several optic communication modules are available
†Note:Either interface is provided with a communication module in the IED; the

specification is discussed separately. See chapter Technical description (CU):
Signal processing and communication module.
(ii) Application Layer

The following layers are provided on the application layer:
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

- 871 -
CU
10.4.4 Communication interface in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard

(i) Spontaneous events
When events are generated in the IED, they are transferred to the master station. The event
transferred is grouped into the Function-type (FUN) and the Information numbers (INF).
(ii) General interrogation1

“GI request” is used when it is required to read the IED status, the Function-types (FUNs),
and the Information numbers (INFs). The status and others are reported during the GI cycle.
(iii) Cyclic measurements

Measured values are cyclically generated using Type ID=3 or 9; they are read in the IED using
a Class 2 poll. The generating rate of new measured values is possible to program.
(iv) Commands2
The user can customize the supported commands. The IED can replay for unsupported
commands using the cause of transmission (COT) negative acknowledgement of a command.
(v) Test mode3

For the process in the control system, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values
are designated by the means in the ‘test mode’ of “CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION”. The means
denoted the ‘test mode’ of “CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7” is normally used for the messages
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
(vi) Blocking of monitor direction4

If blocking the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and
measurands are never transmitted.
1Note: With regard to the GI list, see Appendix IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability. When
the user wishes to understand the details, refer to the section 7.4.3 of the IEC
60870-5-103 standard.
2Note: For details, refer to Section 7.4.4 in IEC 60870-5-103 standard document.

- 872 -
CU
10.4.5 Editing data of the configuration

(i) Common setting
When the “Common setting” item is selected on the start screen of the IEC 60870-5-103
configuration, the “Common setting” setting screen is displayed. Settings common to each
frame can be performed in this screen.
Setting file remark

The remark of the setting file is used for managing the version of the configuration data file. A
comment with the maximum of 12 characters can be entered in the box. The comment can be
viewed on the IED screen.
Remote operation valid time

When “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged measured” occurs during the period from the
receiving any command (which is provided by “General command” setting) to the setting time
of “Remote Operation valid time”, its COT is set to COT=12 (Remote operation). This setting
for the event is enabled when the COT=12 and COT=1 or 11 are checked in “Time-tagged
message” or “Time-tagged measurand” setting. The setting range of “Remote Operation valid
time” is 0 to 60000ms. The default setting is 4000ms. In the following case, the “Time-tagged
measurand” with COT=12 occurs.
Remote operation valid time = TR[ms]
Command Time tagged measurand with

receive COT=11, 12 checked occurs.
Figure 10.4-2 Time setting for the remote operation

Local operation valid time
When “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged measurand” occurs during the period from the
start of local operation (described in 10.4.5(ii)-7) to the setting time of “Local Operation valid
time”, its COT is set to COT=11 (Local operation). This setting for the event is enabled when
the COT=11 and COT=1 or 12 are checked in “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged
measurand” setting. The setting range of “Remote Operation valid time” is 0 to 60000ms. The
default setting is 4000ms. In the following case, the “Time-tagged message” with COT=11
occurs.
Local operation valid time = TL[ms]
(Off-delay time after finish of local operation)
Start of Finish of Time tagged measurand with

local operation local operation COT=1, 11, 12 checked occurs.
Figure 10.4-3 Time setting for the local operation

- 873 -
CU
Measurand period
This setting is used to set the transmission cycle (s) of Measurand frame. The setting range is
0 to 60s. If no Measurand frame is provided by measurand setting, this setting is disabled.
Function type of system functions

This setting is used to set Function type (FUN) of System functions† (INF=0 to 5). The FUN
can be set individually per the frame provided. When clicking the “Change all FUNs”,
confirmation dialog box appears. When clicking “OK”, FUNs of all frames are changed to these
setting values.
†Note:We mean the following frames: end of general interrogation, time synchronization,
reset FCB, reset CU, start/restart, power on.
Signal No. of test mode

This setting is used to set a Data ID in the test mode. The relevant Data ID should be selected
from the signal list, which can be found in Chapters Relay application or Control and
monitoring” application. Usually, the default setting is not changed.
The test mode in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is enabled by the operation on the IED screen
or the GR-TIEMS. When the set signal changes “ON” and Time-tagged message or Time-tagged
measured of spontaneous cause (COT=1) or measurand frame or cyclic transmission (Type
ID=3 or 9) occurs, its COT shifts COT=7 (Test mode).
Signal No. for relative time and fault number

This setting is used to set the trigger signal which is attached the frame of Type ID=2 or 4. The
trigger signal is selected from the signal list. (This setting is not related to the frame of Type
ID=1.)
The time (ms), which is from the establishment of a set signal to the detection of a status
change, is added the set frame as RET value. FAN (Fault number), attached the frame of Type
ID=2 or 4, has the same number during the set signal ON. (Whenever the set signal is ON, the
FAN increases.) When setting to “0”, RET value is always “0” (RET=0). The default setting is
set to the OR signal of elements operation. When Type ID=2 frame is provided with OC trip as
send condition, for example, the time from OC element operation to OC tripping is attached to
the frame as RET. Though, the RET of GI frame is always “0” in spite of this setting.
In the following case, T1[ms] is attached to i as RET, T2[ms] is attached to ii , and T3[ms]
is attached to iii , as shown in Figure 10.4-4.

- 874 -
CU
T1
T2
T3 t
Signal “ON” Type ID=2 Type ID=4 Signal “OFF” Type ID=2
i occurs ii occurs iii occurs
Figure 10.4-4 Occurrences after the signal “ON”

- 875 -
CU
(ii) Setting of time-tagged messages

In Time-tagged message frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information and status
information are responded for Class 1 request from the upper system (station). The GR-series
relay can provide event information and status information by Time-tagged message frame
about the signal assigned to a Data ID of the signal list.
When the “Time-tagged message” tab is selected, the “Time-tagged message” setting screen is
displayed on the start screen.
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative time) can
be set in this screen. In one frame of Time-tagged message, the Type ID, INF, FUN, DPI and
COT must be set and the maximum 256 frames of Time-tagged message can be set. The
information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item “No.” is
only serial number and can be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard†.
In the transmission format of Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) and Type ID=2 (Time-tagged
message with relative time), customized items are shown in Table 10.4-3 and Table 10.4-4.
Figure 10.4-5 Time-tagged message in the GR-TIEMS

†Note:For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.
Table 10.4-3 Time-tagged message (Type ID=1)

Oct. Item Value Remarks
1 Start 68H
2 Length 14
3 Length 14
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 08H+ACD+DFC

- 876 -
CU

6 Address 1-254 Setting from the relay
7 Type identification (Type ID) 1 Customized by GR-TIEMS
8 Variable structure qualifier 81H
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 1/9/11/12 Customized by GR-TIEMS
10 Common address of ASDU 1-254 Linked with Address setting
11 Function type (FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
13 Double point information (DPI) -/(0)/1/2/(3)/DP Customized by GR-TIEMS
14 Millisecond (low)
0-59999
15 Millisecond (high)
16 Minutes + Invalid flag (MSB) 0-59+80H
17 Hours + Summer time flag (MSB) 0-23+80H
18 Supplementary information (SIN) 0-255
19 Checksum
20 End 16H
Table 10.4-4Time-tagged message with relative time (Type ID=2)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 18
3 Length 18
4 Start 68H
13 Double point information (DPI) -/(0)/1/2/(3)/DP Customized by GR-TIEMS
Trigger condition to calculate RET
14 Relative time (RET) 0-65535
is customized by GR-TIEMS.
Trigger condition of FAN increment is
16 Fault number (FAN) 0-65535
customized by GR-TIEMS.
18 Millisecond 0-59999
23 Checksum
24 End 16H
Description
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
function of IEC 60870-5-103 communication.

- 877 -
CU
Signal name / signal description

The Data ID† (Sig. No.) showing the status of the frame is set from the signal list of the relay.
If the setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related events are disable and the frame
is not provided.
†Note:A relevant Data ID is required to select; the description is obtained automatically.
Type ID
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative time) is
selected to set the frame type. It is recommended that the frame related to status is set to Type
ID=1 and the frame related to faults is set to Type ID=2. In Type ID=2, the trigger signal for
the relative time should be set. For the setting, see section 10.4.5(i).
INF
Information number (INF) of the frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255. When the
standard frame is provided, the INF according to the Appendix† is recommended. If the frame
out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring to Table 10.4-5.
Table 10.4-5 INF category of Monitor direction
INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 Status
32 to 47 Supervision
48 to 63 earth fault
64 to 127 short circuit
128 to 143 auto-reclosure
144 to 159 Measurands
160 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions
†Note:See Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability: Semantics of Information
number.

- 878 -
CU
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to Table 10.4-6. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When
clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the
setting values at Common setting.
Table 10.4-6 Semantics of Function type
0 - 127 private range
128 distance protection
129 not used
144 not used
145 not used
160 overcurrent protection
161 not used
176 transformer differential protection
177 not used
192 Line differential protection
193 not used
208 not used
209 not used
224 not used
225 not used
240 not used
241 not used
254 Generic function type
255 Global function type
DPI/Off, DPI/On
Double-point information (DPI) is set using the menu as follows:
DPI/Off: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is OFF.
DPI/On: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is ON.
Note: If selecting “-”(=don’t care), the frame is not transmitted even though the
DPI/Sig.No. signal set change to the set status. In general, the frames related to
tripping such as “Time-tagged message” and Time-tagged measurand”, etc., which
are not an object of GI (General Interrogation), are not transmitted when the DPI
changes “On” to “Off”. In this case, set the “DPI/Off” to “-”(=don’t care).
Note: When selecting “DP” for both “DPI/Off” and “DPI/On”, the DPI number is
transmitted as the number (=0/1/2/3) using the same information number (INF).
Regarding the frame related to a device control, the “undefined/failed” status may
be required in addition to the “close/open” status for the extension. When selecting
“DP”, “undefined(00)/close(01)/open(10)/failed(11)” status is applied in the same
information number (INF).

- 879 -
CU
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but also two or more COT
can be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the frame are
as follows:
(1) If two or all of COT=1, 11 and 12 are checked per No., each frame of the No.
become the following conditions.
Table 10.4-7 COT
COT Conditions
COT=12
TR[ms] after receiving any command of the IEC 60870-5-1031
(remote operation)
COT=11
TL[ms] after Key operation on the relay front panel1
(local operation)
COT=1 Conditions except above COT=11 and 12

(spontaneous) The relay is in test mode2, the COT=1(Spontaneous) is shifted to 7(Test mode)
1Note: TR and TL are set in Common setting.
2Note: Settings of the test mode is described later.
(2) If one of COT is specified per No., the frame is always supplemented with the
specified COT regardless of cause of transmission.
(3) If COT=9 is specified, the frame become the object of GI and is sent back when
the GI request frame is received. Time-tagged message is sent back in order of
No. instead of order of INF.
Table 10.4-8 shows the summary of (1), (2) and (3) above.

- 880 -
CU
Table 10.4-8 COT setting pattern and COT supplemented frame

COT setting
pattern COT supplemented frame when status changes GI
1 9 11 12
 Always “1” No
 Events don’t occur. Yes
  Always “1” Yes
  “11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) No
  “12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) No
“11” (cause at local) or “12” (cause at remote) or “1”
  (other causes) No
   “11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) Yes
   “12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) Yes
   (other causes) No
   (other causes) Yes
    (other causes) Yes
Always “1” in spite of cause of event occurrence No
Note: When being in the test mode, the COT=1(Spontaneous) is shifted to 7(Test mode)

- 881 -
CU
(iii) Setting for time-tagged measurands

For Time-tagged measurand frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information
supplemented with numerical information are responded for Class 1 request from upper
system (station). GR200-series relay can provide event information, which is converted the
numerical information in metering table according to user setting weight, by using Time-
tagged measurand frame about the signal assigned (i.e., Data ID).
When the “Time-tagged measurand” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting screen is
displayed.
Figure 10.4-6 Time-tagged measurands
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time) can be set in this screen. In one frame
of Time-tagged measurand, the INF, FUN, Sig No., Rev, COT and SCL must be set and the
maximum eight frames of Time-tagged measurand can be set. The information number of the
frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item “No.” is only serial number and can
be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† of the relay application.
†For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.

- 882 -
CU
In the transmission format of Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time),
customized items are shown in Table 10.4-9.
Table 10.4-9 Time-tagged measurand with relative time (Type ID=4)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 20
3 Length 20
4 Start 68H
7 Type identification (Type ID) 4
13 Short-circuit location (SCL) Customized by GR-TIEMS
Trigger condition to calculate RET is
17 Relative time (RET) 0-65535
Trigger condition of FAN increment is
19 Fault number (FAN) 0-65535
21 Millisecond 0-59999
25 Checksum
26 End 16H
Description
function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Signal name / signal description

The signal† (i.e., Data ID) showing the trigger of the frame is set from the signal list. If the
setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related the “Time-tagged measurand” are
disable and the frame is not provided.
The frame cannot be set to the object of GI and cannot be transmitted even though the status
of set signal changes from ON to OFF. If the metering values at the newest fault record are
transmitted as the status change frame, select the Data ID of “F.Record_DONE” or “FAULT
RECORD DONE” in the signal list of the relay.
†Note:A relevant signal (Data ID) is required to select in the signal list. The description
of the Data ID is obtained automatically on the setting.

- 883 -
CU
Inverse
This setting is used to invert the logic of the signal assigned to the Data ID above. If the frame
is transmitted when the signal assigned to the Data ID is ON, leave the Inverse check box
blank. If the frame is transmitted when the signal is OFF, click the inverse check box to be
marked with “”.
Type ID
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with Relative time) is fixed. In Type ID=4, the trigger
signal for the relative time should be set. For the setting, see Section 10.4.5(i).
INF
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the fame
out of the standard is provided, the INF should be set referring to Table 10.4-3†.
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to Table 10.4-4. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When
clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the
setting values at Common setting.
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but two or more COT can
be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the frame are
according to Table 10.4-5. Though, the COT=9 (General Interrogation) cannot be selected.
SCL Measurement Name/Measurement Description

The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using floating-point
number. The SCL is a value which the power system quantity specified as above is multiplied
by this setting value.

- 884 -
CU
(iv) Setting for General commands

Using General command frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, relay applications can be
performed by the remote control. For GR200-series relay, a signal (i.e., Data ID in the signal
list) is controlled when receiving general command frame.
When the “General command” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting screen is
displayed.
Figure 10.4-7 “General command” setting screen
The frame of Type ID=20 (General command) and Command ACK/NACK can be set in this
screen. In one command of General command, the INF, FUN and DCO must be set. The
Command ACK/NACK is for detail setting and must not be set usually. (If do not check the Ext
check box, the setting of Command ACK/NACK is disabled and the Command ACK and
Command NACK respond according to the default response.)
The maximum 32 frames of General command and Command ACK/NACK can be set. The
information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item “No.” is
only serial number and can be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† of relay applications.

In this setting screen, if a Data ID except “0” is set to “Sig Off” and “Sig On”, the command at
INF setting value is provided and Command ACK or Command NACK is sent back when
receiving the command from upper station. If both “Sig Off” and “Sig On” have “0”, the fixed
length NACK is always sent back then and the command is not provided.
Though the command is provided, however, Command NACK is always sent back and no
control is performed in the following cases:
(1): When receiving any General command from the upper station before Command

- 885 -
CU
ACK/NACK is sending back from the relay.

(2): Under Monitor direction block condition (“IECBLK” setting is “blocked”.) when
receiving General command.
(3): When receiving an incorrect value of DCO of General command, that is DCO is neither
“1” nor “2”.
General command receiving sequence is as follows:
Primary Secondary
station station
General
Command
ACK
Class 1
Command
ACK/NACK
Figure 10.4-8 Command receiving sequence

In the transmission format of General command (Type ID=20), customized items are shown in
Table 10.4-10.
Table 10.4-10 General command format (Type ID=20)
1 Start 68H
2 Length 10
3 Length 10
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 73H/53H
7 Type identification (Type ID) 20
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 20
11 Function type (FUN) 0-255
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized by the GR-TIEMS
13 Double command (DCO) 1/2
14 Return Information identifier (RII) 0-65535
15 Checksum
16 End 16H
In the transmission format of Command ACK/NACK (Type ID=1), customized items are shown
in Table 10.4-11. The frame type of Command ACK/NACK is Time-tagged message.

- 886 -
CU
Table 10.4-11 Time-tagged message format(Type ID=1)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 14
3 Length 14
4 Start 68H
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 20/21 Customized by GR-TIEMS
Customized by GR-TIEMS.
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Answer back of receiving
command INF
Answer back of receiving
13 Double point information (DPI) 1/2
command DCO
14 Millisecond (low)
0-59999
15 Millisecond (high)
Answer back of receiving
command RII
19 Checksum
20 End 16H
Description
Type ID
Type ID=20 (General command) is fixed.
INF
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the frame
out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring to Table 10.4-12†.

- 887 -
CU
Table 10.4-12 INF category of Monitor direction

INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 status
32 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions
FUN
Function type (FUN) applied to a command response frame is set referring to Table 10.4-13.
The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting
screen, all FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting.
DCO/Sig Off Name, Signal Off Desc., DCO Signal On Name, Signal On Desc.,
Inverse
“Sig off” and “Sig On” are used to set the Data ID of control object in General command.
(Hereafter, these are described as “command output signal”.) “Inverse” is used to reverse the
logic when controlling the command output signal.
When the command output signal is treated as two signals (Sig Off ≠ Sig On), the control
scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving command DCO and
Inverse setting.
For example, when the DCO=Off command is received under “Inverse” no-checked, the
command output signal of “Sig Off” is controlled to “1”. “Sig On” is not controlled.
Table 10.4-13 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off ≠ Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified to
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off Sig.on
command DCO
Off Controlled to “1” Not controlled Controlled to “0” Not controlled
On Not controlled Controlled to “1” Not controlled Controlled to “0”
When the command output signal is treated as one signal (Sig Off Sig On), the control scheme
is shown in Table 10.4-14. For example, when the DCO=On command is received under
“Inverse” checked, the command output signals of “Sig On” and “Sig Off” are controlled to “0”.
“Sig On” is not controlled.

- 888 -
CU
Table 10.4-14 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off = Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off to Sig.on
command DCO
Off Controlled to “0” Controlled to ”1”
On Controlled to ”1” Controlled to “0”
When setting the “Sig Off”, “Sig On” and “Inverse”, check the specifications of the command
output signals of communication and others, and then set them.
Valid time
Valid time is used to set the time (ms) to control the command output signal. The command
output signal is controlled based on the control scheme described in section 10.4.5(iv)-5 for the
setting time after receiving General command, and is reset by communication side after the
set time. However, if the time is set to “0”, the control is not reset and is continued. Set the
time with a margin for interface of other applications.
ACK/NACK / Ext
This setting is used to enable the extension setting of Command ACK/NACK response scheme
or not. If “Ext” is not specified (Ext check box is not checked.), Command NACK (in cases of
(1)–(3) of section 10.4.5(iii) and Command ACK (in case of others) respond according to the
default response. If “Ext” is specified, the setting of Command ACK/NACK described later is
enabled and the response scheme can be customized. When required the stricter handshake
by using Command ACK/NACK, it is better to specify the “Ext”. This setting is not influenced
by the control scheme of the command output signal.
Signal ACK Name/Signal ACK Desc./Signal NACK Name/Signal NACK

Desc./Inverse
“ACK Sig” and “NACK Sig” are used to set the Data ID for judgment of command response.
(Hereafter, these are described as “command response signal”.) “Inverse” is used to reverse the
logic of the command response signal, and “Timeout” is used to set the timeout time for
judgment of command response. Under specified “Ext” (Ext check box is checked.), Command
ACK or Command NACK responds based on the logic of command response signal against
General command.

- 889 -
CU
When the command response signal is treated as two signals (ACK Sig NACK Sig), the
judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving command
DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is when (1), (2), (3) or (4) in Table 10.4-15 is
established. If the neither (1), (2), (3) nor (4) is established (that is ACK sig = NACK Sig = 1 or
ACK sig = NACK Sig = 0) for the period from the command receiving to the timeout setting
time, Command NACK responds at that time.
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” no-checked, Command
ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = 0” and NACK Sig = 1”.
Table 10.4-15 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig  NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
Command response signal

(1)NACK Sig=1 (2)NACK Sig=0 (3)NACK Sig=1 (4) NACK Sig=0
Receiving
ACK Sig=0 ACK Sig=1 ACK Sig=0 ACK Sig=1
command DCO
Command NACK Command ACK Command ACK Command NACK

Off
responds. responds. responds. responds.

On
When the command response signal is treated as one signal (ACK Sig = NACK Sig), the
judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving command
DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is after the timeout setting time from the
command receiving.
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” checked, Command
ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = NACK Sig = 1” after the timeout setting time.
Table 10.4-16 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig = NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
Command response signal

(1)NACK Sig= (2)NACK Sig = (3) NACK Sig = (4) NACK Sig =
Receiving
ACK Sig = 0 ACK Sig = 1 ACK Sig = 0 ACK Sig = 1
command DCO
Command ACK Command NACK Command NACK Command ACK

Off

On

- 890 -
CU
(v) Setting of Measurands

In Measurand frame of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, numerical information such as power
system quantities are responded for Class 2 cyclic request from upper system (station). GR200-
series relay can provide numerical information, which is converted the numerical information
in metering table according to user setting weight.
When the “Measurands” item is selected on the start screen of the GR-TIEMS, the setting
screen is displayed.
Figure 10.4-9 “Measurands” setting screen
Figure 10.4-10 “Measurand1” setting screen
In one frame of Measurand, the Type ID, INF, FUN settings, and its position setting
(Measurement Name/Measurement Description/Lower Limit/Upper Limit/Coefficient) must
be set. “No.” shows the position of power system quantity. (For details, describe later.) The
maximum 16 items of Measurands and the maximum 32 power system quantities per one
frame can be set.

- 891 -
CU
Common address is linked with the address setting† of relay applications.

In the transmission format of Measurand I (Type ID=3) and Measurand II (Type ID=9),
customized items are shown in Table 10.4-17.
Table 10.4-17 Measurand I／Measurand II (Type ID=3／9)
1 Start 68H
2 Length 8+2N
3 Length 8+2N
4 Start 68H
08H+ACD+
5 Control field
DFC
7 Type identification(Type ID) 3/9 Customized by GR-TIEMS
9 Cause of transmission(COT) 2/7
11 Function type(FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
12 Information number(INF) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
Measurand with quality
13+2(N-1) Customized by GR-TIEMS
descriptor(MEA) + IV + OV
15+2(N-1) Checksum
16+2(N-1) End 16H
Description
function of the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Type ID
Type ID=3 (Measurands I) or Type ID=9 (Measurands II) can be selected to set the frame type
of Measurand frame. In general, the maximum MEA number of Type ID=3 uses 1 or 2 or 4 and
that of Type ID=9 uses 9. (However, the maximum MEA number of both types can extend up
to 32 in the GR-TIEMS. In this case, there are no difference between the transmission format
of Type ID=3 and that of Type ID=9.)
INF
Information number (INF) of the Measurand frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255. When
the standard frame† is provided, the INF according to the standard is recommended.
If the fame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring to Table 10.4-3 and the
appendix†.

- 892 -
CU
FUN
Function type (FUN) of the Measurand frame is set referring to Table 10.4-4. The FUN can be
set to 0 to 255. If click the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are
changed to the setting values at Common setting.
Name
Any comment with maximum eight characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
Measurement Name/Measurement Description

The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select.
Lower Limit/Upper Limit

The established condition of IV flag is set per MEA. IV flag is established when MEA value
exceeds a Lower limit or an Upper limit. If Lower limit = Upper limit =0 is set, The IV flag is
always established and it becomes MEA=0.
Table 10.4-18 MEA Bit Arrangement

High Octet Low Octet
Sign B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 RES IV OV
If MEA value exceeds the full scale (if the value expressed as B1 to B12 is less than –4096 or
more than 4095), the MEA is clamped at –4096 or 4095 and OV flag is established. However,
if IV flag is established, OV flag is not established.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using floating-point
number. The MEA is a value which the power system quantity specified as above is multiplied
by this setting value.

- 893 -
CU
10.4.6 Protocol selection

As shown in the setting menu for the Communication (Figure 10.4-11), the user should set
IEC103 for the [Slave Protocol] so that the communication in the IEC60870-5-103 standard is
carried out in the IED. Note that the restarting the IED (i.e., resetting the IED power) is
required after the user turns to the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.
SLAVE PROTOCOL
10:48 1/1
Slave protocol +
IEC103
Figure 10.4-11 Slave protection for the IEC103 protocol (on IED setting menu)
Note: The menu is just screened when a couple of communication protocols are
embedded in the IED.

- 894 -
CU
10.4.7 Tips for settings

During the GR-TIEMS operation, we recommend the user to choose an appropriate file-name
for the setting-file. That is, for example, when the user creates the setting file for an IED at
the first time, the user is required to make it with the name “IED#1-model_01.map”. Likewise,
the user can create the other setting file with the name “IED#2-model_01.map” for the other
IED. If the user is required to modify the “IED#1-model_01.map”, the user should replace the
name by new name “IED#1-model_02.map”. Consequently, the user can easily discriminate the
setting files in the IED model2 (i.e., IED#1-model or IED#2-model) and the revision number
(i.e., 01 or 02).
Figure 10.4-12 shows the editing screen of the GR-TIEMS; the screen has a remark field
concerning to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication. Note the available length of the remark
field is up to 12 in the one-byte character. The remark field is utilized for the control of the
setting data.
Figure 10.4-12 Common setting screen in the GR-TIEMS

Note: We recommend to make the backup file of the setting data.

- 895 -
CU
10.4.8 Setting
Setting of 103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001)
s value
103ADDR 0 to 254 Slave address 2

103TST Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 test mode Off
103BLK Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 slave block Off

- 896 -
CU

 Monitoring point
103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001)
3100011001 103SLV STAT 103SLV STATUS
8020011001 AG1STAT Active Group 1 status
3120001001 AGNUM Active Group Number
8030001001 GPCMD00STAT General Purpose Command 0 status
8A300A1001 GPCMD10STAT General Purpose Command 10 status
8B300B1001 GPCMD11STAT General Purpose Command 11 status
8C300C1001 GPCMD12STAT General Purpose Command 12 status
8D300D1001 GPCMD13STAT General Purpose Command 13 status
8E300E1001 GPCMD14STAT General Purpose Command 14 status
8F300F1001 GPCMD15STAT General Purpose Command 15 status
8A301A1001 GPCMD26STAT General Purpose Command 26 status
8B301B1001 GPCMD27STAT General Purpose Command 27 status
8C301C1001 GPCMD28STAT General Purpose Command 28 status
8D301D1001 GPCMD29STAT General Purpose Command 29 status
8E301E1001 GPCMD30STAT General Purpose Command 30 status
8F301F1001 GPCMD31STAT General Purpose Command 31 status
3110001001 LEDRST_STAT LED Reset status

- 897 -
CU
––––––––USB communication
BU
USB communication
The IED front panel has an USB receptacle in a B-type to connect with a local PC for
engineering. The user can select a transmission speed, which is shown below, by the operation
of the setting menu, as shown in Figure 10.5-1.
USBCOM
10:48 1/1
USBCOM_BRATE_SW +
921.6kbps
Figure 10.5-1 USB setting menu (on IED screen)
Setting of USB (Function ID: 231701)

s value
USBCOM_BRATE_SW 115.2 / 921.6 kbps Baud rate Switch for USB Com port 921.6

- 898 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––RS485 communication
BU
RS485 communication
When the IED has an RS485 module for the communication, the user can select and set its
transmission and error check parity codes. Figure 10.6-1 shows the setting screen when the
RS485 module (#1) operates.
RS485
10:48 1/2
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
19.2kbps
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
NONE
Figure 10.6-1 RS485 setting menu (on IED screen)
Setting of RS485 (Function ID: 232201)

s value
Module RS485_1_BRATE_SW 9.6 / 19.2 / 38.4 /57.6 / 115.2 kbps Transmission speed 19.2
#1 RS485_1_PAR_SW NONE / ODD /EVEN – Parity check code NONE

- 899 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11 Automatic supervision
61850 irregular data 943 LAN error 940
A/D accuracy error (BU) 924 LAN pinging problem 941
A/D accuracy error (CU) 923 LRE error 942
BIO module error 929 NMI error 919
BU failure 950 Program code error 917
BU alarm 951 Power supply failure 933
BU address error 952 PLC Data error 934
Bridge monitoring 957 ROM and RAM mismatch 906
Check-sum error 907 RAM error 908
Clock error 922 RUN error 918
Currents flowing error 937 Signal reception error (CU) 948
CT failure 925 Signal reception fatal error (CU) 955
CB failure 938 Signal reception minor error (CU) 956
DIF-Id error 936 Signal transmission error (CU) 949
DS failure 939 Sampling error 920
ECC memory error 909 Setting error 921
FPGA problem 911 V0 error 927
FEP errors 912 V2 error 926
GOOSE publishing error 945
HMI malfunction 932
I0 error 928
Reference chapters:
→Relay application 20

- 900 -
CU
Chapter 11.1: Automatic supervision
––––––––Outline of automatic supervision
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Outline of automatic supervision

In power system, the protection function is not required to operate during normal conditions.
That is, the protection function should stay silent for the unfaulty conditions, but it has to start
respond immediately upon the occurrence of the fault. Therefore, as for the operation of the
protection system, the detection of an unhealthy condition, such as malfunction or errors in
the hardware or in the software, is requisite within the IED. The automatic supervision
function is designed to detect the unhealthy condition within the IED; the following concepts
are taken into account:
 The operating performance of the protection system should not be distorted.
 Supervision should be carried out by itself without any failure whenever
possible.
 The protection system should identify the fault instantly upon its occurrence.
Tips: The alarms can be blocked when Off is set for the switch [A.M.F]. The switch can
be used to remove alarms during testing. See Chapter Technical description (CU
or BU): User interface: Test sub-menu for more information.
(i) Error levels

In the applications and the hardware, the number of items are supervised for detecting the
operation failure; hence, the results of the supervision functions are grouped and they are
classified into five error-levels to identify the error degree directly: warning (level 5=the minor
error) to the serious error (level 1=the critical error). Incidentally, zero (level 0) can be
identified as no error. Table 11.1-1 shows the errors grouped by the error degree. The grouping
is provided, for setting the degree of error, the user can select an user-defined degree for each
error occurs randomly. If a number of failures occur on several levels at same time, the
automatic supervision function selects the critical error among them to represent the error
inside the IED.
Table 11.1-1 Meanings and error degree in the supervision function
Levels Degree of error Example failures and errors
0 No error No error exists
1‡ Serious Fatal failures such as the memory errors within the IED
2†‡ Serious (Comm.) Failures on tele-communication
3†‡ Minor Failure on LAN (Ethernet) communication
4 Alarm Minor errors such as invalid errors by the user using settings
5 Warning Detection of warnings classified by the user using settings
†Note:Level 2 and level 3 are shown, but the difference between the level 2 and the level
3 not given; thus, we can take the both having the same degree.
‡Note: The IEC 61850quality value is also changed depending on the error level. For
more information, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication: Quality signal.

- 901 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Error LED and LCD error message

The IED has LEDs and LCD screen† so that the automatic supervision function issues a result
for the LEDs and the LCD screen. When the IED is linked with the SAS, it is possible to
transfer the result for the LED and LCD screen using the communication system. Table 11.1-2
shows that which indicators are used for result generation in the function.
Table 11.1-2 Displays on LEDs, LCD, and SAS
Levels “In service” LED “Error” LED Error message on LCD
0: No error On Off (Not displayed)
1: Serious Off On Displayed
2: Serious (Comm.)‡ On On Displayed
3: Minor On (Off§) On Displayed
4: Alarm On Off Displayed
5: Warning On Off Displayed
†Note:For more information, see Chapter Technical description (CU or BU): Human
machine interface.
‡Note:It depends on the degree of the communication failure.
§Note:If the “In service” has to be turned off while a minor error (level:3) is occurring, set
On for the setting [ErrorLED_cond].
The user can see a current error information in Monitoring sub-menu† on the LCD screen†
(see Figure 11.1-1); Table 11.1-3 shows the six detail information, which the user can examine
carefully using the hexadecimal number. When two or more errors occur at the same time, an
error code is given by the summation of the error codes. That is, when X and Y errors (e.g., X-
error-code ‘00000002’ and Y-error-code ‘00000004’) occur, the sum value ‘00000006’ is screened.
CP1M(ROM/RAM) error 1/1 Current error indicated by Supervision
10:48 Current local time (Not Error occurring time)
[Serious error] Error degree (level) displayed
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[00000011]
[01234567]
[01234567]
[01234567] [ “Top left” ][ “Top right” ]
[ ][ ]
[01234567] [00000000]
“Middle left” “Middle right”
[ ][ ]
Detailed information in
Hexadecimal dump “Bottom left” “Bottom right”
Figure 11.1-1 Example error codes and detailed information on Diagnostics sub-menu
†Note:See Chapter Technical description (CU or BU): User interface: Monitoring sub-
menu: Diagnostics. It will not be updated automatically. If new information is
required, refresh the LED screen again.
Table 11.1-3 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in the ROM and the RAM error (example)
Display Meaning of the detailed information
area Left column Right column
00000001: ROM read error
Top row ROM address
00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle row RAM address ROM value
Bottom row RAM value (No information displayed)

- 902 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(iii) Error outputs with contacts and binary output circuits

Automatic supervision function drives a contact of the power supply module (PWS)† when an
error occurs without warning; additionally, binary output circuits (BOs‡) will be locked out to
drive when serious error (Level 1=Critical error) is detected.
Table 11.1-4 FAIL contact, BO, LED outputs depending on levels
PWS† contact outputs
Error FAIL1 terminal FAIL2 terminal Error
BO‡ locked out
Levels Screw No. 1 Screw No. 3 Screw No. 7 Screw No. 9 LED
(N/C) (N/O) (N/C) (N/O)
0: No error Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
1:Serious Closed Open Closed Open Locked out On
2:Serious(Comm.) Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
3:Minor Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
4:Alarm Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
5:Warning Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
Error output by PWS contact†

If serious error (Level1) is detected by Automatic supervision function, normally-closed-contact
(N/C) on FAIL1 and FAIL2 terminals is closed. On the other hand, the N/O contact is open on
the serious error, as shown in Table 11.1-4.
Locking out of BO circuit operation‡

BO is locked out to operate, when serious error (Level1) occurs. Serious error stops trip signal
generations to the BO circuit. When serious error is removed, the operation will be recovered.
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Power supply module. FAIL1 (FAIL2) contact
is in Form-C; terminal-screw No. 2 & 4 (8 &10) are provided with the common.
‡Note:BO is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Binary output circuit.
(iv) Affection of application operation by error levels

The error levels influence the operation of relays and control and monitoring functions.
Table 11.1-5 Operation states in the IED applications affected by the error levels
Levels Relay applications Control applications Notes
0: No error – –
1: Serious Stopped Stopped
2: Serious (Comm.) Not affected† Not affected
3: Minor Not affected Stopped
4: Alarm Not affected Not affected
5: Warning Not affected Not affected
†Note: Serious (Comm.) is mentioning that the BU has CU-BU communication errors.

- 903 -
CU
Chapter 11.2: Automatic supervision 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Supervision tasks BU
Supervision tasks
Displaying errors regarding to common problems are summarized in Table 11.2-1; the error is
cleared when recovered
Table 11.2-1 Supervision items and error levels for generic
Work in Detailed Error Sec.
Supervision items (Screen message) CU BU Info. Lvl. LED No.
Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.1
Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.2
Supervision of RAM (RAM error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.3
Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.4
Supervision of MRAM (MRAM)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.5
Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.6
Monitoring FEP running (FEP stopped error)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.7
Monitoring FEP interface (FEP_IF error)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.8
Monitoring FEP I/O interface (FEPIO error)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.9
Monitoring fatal error in FEP (FEP FAIL)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.10
Monitoring minor error in FEP (FEP ALM)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.11
Supervision of program codes (CPU error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.12
Supervision of task operation (RUN error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.13
Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.14
Supervision of sampling period (SMP error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.15
Supervision of setting data (Setting error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.16
Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error)   Displayed 3 On 11.2.17
Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.18
Supervision of the A/D accuracy of BU (BUACC)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.19
Current transformer failure (CT fail)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.20
Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (V2 error)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.21
Supervision of voltage in zero-sequence (V0 error)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.22
Supervision of current in zero-sequence (I0 error)  N/A 3 On 11.2.23
Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.24
Supervision of binary IO module#2 (BIO#2 error)   Displayed 1 On 11.2.25
Supervision of binary IO module#3 (BIO#3 error)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.26
Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error)   Displayed 3 On 11.2.27
Supervision of power supply module (Power error)   Displayed 3 On 11.2.28
Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)   Displayed 3 On 11.2.29
Supervision of error differential current with DIF (Id error)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.30
Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error)  N/A 3 On 11.2.31
Supervision of circuit breaker contacts (CB1 fail)  N/A 3 On 11.2.32

- 904 -
CU
Work in Detailed Error Sec.

Supervision items (Screen message) CU BU Info. Lvl. LED No.
Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.33
Supervision of LAN status (LAN error)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.34
Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.35
Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.36
Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error)   Displayed 3 On 11.2.37
Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error)   Displayed 3 On 11.2.38
Aux. contacts monitoring (DOPS/TOPS faulty or undefined)   Displayed 4/3 On 11.2.39
Loss of receiving signal (CURX error)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.40
Transmission failure (CUTX error)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.41
Operation failure (BUFAIL)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.42
Warning in BU (BUALM)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.43
Irregular BU address (BUADR erro-r)  Displayed 1 On 11.2.44
Loss of BU receiving signal (BURX error)   Displayed 2 On 11.2.45
Transmission BU failure (BUTX error)  Displayed 2 On 11.2.46
Information of CU fatal error (Recv CUFAIL)  Displayed 2 On 11.2.47
Information of CU minor error (Recv CUALM)  Displayed 3 On 11.2.48
Check for BU bridge condition (Bridge alarm)  N/A 3 On 11.2.49

- 905 -
CU
––––––––Supervision tasks
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error)

The ROM and RAM on the CPU module are verified every two minutes; when the error is
found, an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, checking error on
the RAM and the ROM is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1.
1Note: The CPU module is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing
and communication module: Processing module.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 11.2-2 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ROMRAM

Message and level Meaning of the information
Mismatch between the RAM and ROM detected on the following
CP*_ (ROM/RAM) error module instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Error level Serious error (Level 1)
Table 11.2-3 Detailed information in CHK_ROMRAM

Top 00000001: Read error in ROM
ROM address
row 00000002: Mismatch between ROM and RAM
Middle
RAM address ROM value
row
Bottom
RAM value (No information displayed)
row

- 906 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error)

The check sum in the memory on the CPU module is verified every four minutes; when the
error is found the error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, the check-sum error
on the memory is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error message
is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-4 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUM

Sum error in the memory detected on the following module:
CP*_ (SUM) error
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-5 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUM

Top 00000001: Read error in ROM
Sum value calculated
row 00000002: Sum incorrect in ROM RAM
Middle Address information that read error occurs
Sum value pre-programmed
row in the ROM
Bottom
(No information displayed) (No information displayed)
row

- 907 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error)

The read-write operation on RAM circuit of the CPU module is verified at any time; when the
error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the RAM is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-6 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RAM

Error detection in the RAM located on the following module
CP*_(RAM) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-7 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_RAM

Top
Read value Write value
row
Middle
Error address (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row

- 908 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error)

The error-correcting code memory (ECC memory), in the CPU module, is verified at any time.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking error on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
is made promptly when the error is solved.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-8 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ECC

Error in the ECC is detected on the following module instructed
CP*_ (ECC) error with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-9 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ECC

Top
err_cnt value Error address
row
Middle Address for rewriting failure occurred after
Number of detections of bit errors
row the correction of single bit error
ECC status
00000001: Completion of correction
Bottom Number of rewriting failure occurred 00000002: Failure of correction
row after the correction of single bit error 00000004: Detection of single error
00000008: Detection of several errors
00000010: Writing failure of data correction

- 909 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM)

The error detection on the Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory (MRAM memory) of the
CPU module is verified every 1 second; when the error is found, an error message is displayed
by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The function supervise for the MRAM on the CPU module1. Clearing the error
message is made in 1 second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-10 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_MRAM

Error detection in the MRAM located on the following module:
CP*_(MRAM) error
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-11 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_MRAM

Top 00000001: Error detected with 0xaaaaaaaa
Address at error occurs
row 00000002: Error detected with 0x555555555
Middle
(No information is displayed) (No information is displayed)
row
Bottom
row

- 910 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.6 Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error)

Detecting the error in the FPGA is achieved when the CPU module detects fatal failures.
(i) Error level

The error level is set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on the
FPGA is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED begins to restart its operation
automatically. Clearing the error message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-12 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FPGA

Problem detected in the FPGA on the following module
CP*_ (FPAG) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-13 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_FPGA

Top
00000004: FPGA mode 00000008: FPAG interruption process
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 911 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.7 Monitoring FEP running (FEP stopped error)

The IED monitors FEP1 operation. Error message is displayed if the FEP can be stopped three
times for 2 seconds.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error), but the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_FEPRUN:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_FEPRUN:Sw]. The FEP operation status is monitored periodically. If the FEP is stopped,
the IED tries to restart the FEP operation, but the error message can be shown if the
supervision function has counted three FEP non-operation statuses within 2 minutes.
1Note:FEP module are discussed in Chapter Technical description (CU): CU-BU
commination module.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-14 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FEPRUN

FPE stopped error FEP operation is stopped
Table 11.2-15 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_FEPRUN

Top Counting number that has been counted Counting number that has been counted
row last time at the time before the last time
Middle Detailed information at the last time Detailed information at the time before
row the last time
Bottom
row

- 912 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.8 Monitoring FEP interface (FEP_IF error)

The IED monitors the communication between FEP1 and CPU. FEP interface error message
can be displayed when the communication is not established between FEP and CPU.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_FEPIF:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_FEPIF:Sw]. The FEP interface is monitored every second.
commination module.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-16 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FEPIF

FPE_IF error The communication between CPU and FEP is not established
Table 11.2-17 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_FEPIF

00000001 : CRC determined in FPGA
00000002 : SA error number in FPGA
Top
00000100 : Checksum error about packet SA number if SA error has been detected
row
00000200 : packet number error
00000400 : Counter suspended
Middle
Sum value calculated (upper 32 bits) Sum value calculated (lower 32 bits)
row
Bottom
Sum value being set (upper 32 bits) Sum value being set (lower 32 bits)
row

- 913 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.9 Monitoring FEP I/O interface (FEPIO error)

The IED monitors the bus-communication between FEP and CPU. I/O interface error message
can be displayed when the bus communication is not linked between FEP and CPU.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_FEPIO:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_FEPIO:Sw]. The FEP interface is monitored every second.
commination module.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-18 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FEPIO

FPE_IO error The bus communication is not established
Table 11.2-19 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_FEPIO

00000001 : CRC determined in FPGA
Top
00000100 : Checksum error about packet SA number if SA error has been detected
row
00001000 : Return data is wrong
Supervision info. in the return data
Middle Upper 16 bits: Sum value calculated
Upper 16 bits: Written value
row Lower 16 bits: Sum value being set
Lower 16 bits: Read value
Bottom
row

- 914 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.10 Monitoring fatal error in FEP (FEP FAIL)

Errors in FEP1 are monitored in the IED. If a fatal error is detected in the FEP, the IED can
display the error and the detailed information.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_FEPFAIL:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_FEPFAIL:Sw]. The FEP interface is monitored every second.
1Note:FEP module is discussed in Chapter Technical description (CU): CU-BU
commination module.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-20 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FEPFAIL

FPE FAIL Fatal fault occurred in FEP
Table 11.2-21 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_FEPFAIL

00010401 : NMI error in FPGA
00020001 : MNT_LOGIC error in FPGA
00040101 : ROM/RAM error in FPGA
00080201 : SUM error in FPGA Detailed information screened. For
00100301 : PROGRAM error in FPGA example, if MNT_LOGIC error occurs in
Top 00200601 : RAM error in FPGA FPGA, LCD screen displays detailed
row 00400602 : ECC error in FPGA information, which is the same as the
00800701 : SMP error in FPGA MNT_LOGIC error info. in Table
01000B01 : FPGA error in FPGA 11.2-27.
02000F01 : MRAM error in FPGA
0400D101 : MAIN-FEP I/F error
0800D301 : MAIN-FEP I/O error
Middle
(the same as the right column of Top row) (ditto)
row
Bottom
(ditto) (ditto)
row

- 915 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.11 Monitoring minor error in FEP (FEP ALM)

Errors in FEP1 are monitored in the IED. If a minor error is detected in the FEP, the IED can
display the error and the detailed information.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program
the level using setting [CHK _FEPALM:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_FEPALM:Sw].
The FEP interface is monitored every second.
1Note:FEP module is discussed in Chapter Technical description (CU): CU-BU
commination module.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-22 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ CHK_FEPALM

FPE ALM Minor error occurred in FEP
Error level Minor error (Level 3)
Table 11.2-23 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_FEPFAIL

00010401 : NMI error in FPGA
00020001 : MNT_LOGIC error in FPGA
00040101 : ROM/RAM error in FPGA
00080201 : SUM error in FPGA
Detailed information screened. For
00100301 : PROGRAM error in FPGA
example, if MNT_LOGIC error occurs in
Top 00200601 : RAM error in FPGA
FPGA, LCD screen displays detailed
row 00400602 : ECC error in FPGA
information, which is the same as the
00800701 : SMP error in FPGA
MNT_LOGIC error info. in Table 11.2-27
01000B01 : FPGA error in FPGA
02000F01 : MRAM error in FPGA
0400D101 : MAIN-FEP I/F error
0800D301 : MAIN-FEP I/O error
Middle
(the same as the right column of Top row) (ditto)
row
Bottom
(ditto) (ditto)
row

- 916 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.12 Supervision of program codes (CPU error)

The program code in the ROM and RAM on the CPU module is verified every time; when the
error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, detecting Program
errors on the RAM and the ROM are carried out every second. If the error is detected, the IED
restarts its operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1.
Clearing the error message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-24 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PROGRAM

Error detection in the RAM and ROM located on the following
CP*_(CPU) error module:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-25 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PROGRAM

00000000: Add error
Top 00000002: Sub error
00000004: Mul error Task number causing overflow
row 00000008: Div error
00010000: Detection of overflow in Task stack
Middle
Head address of overflowing task (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row

- 917 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.13 Supervision of task operation (RUN error)

Task operations in the IED are monitored every two minutes. Error messages can be screened
when the tasks stop. The tasks are supervised every 15 minutes if they are idling.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) unconditionally.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, the error message can be shown on the LCD and the LED is lit.
Table 11.2-26 Error messages provided by the supervisor in MNT_LOGIC

CP1M(RUN) error Detection of the stopped task in the IED
Table 11.2-27 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in MNT_LOGIC

WW XX YY ZZ
Top 10000000: Supervision function itself
WW: FB index in SSP2(2)
20000000: Idle task (1)
row XX: FB index in SSP2(1)
40000000: Idle task (2)
YY: FB index in SSP1(2)
YY: FB index in SSP1(1)
WW XX YY ZZ WW XX YY ZZ
Middle WW: FB index in PCM(2) WW: FB index in 100MS(2)
row XX: FB index in PCM(1) XX: FB index in 100MS(1)
YY: FB index in SSP3(2) YY: FB index in 10MS
YY: FB index in SSP3(1) YY: FB index in 5MS
WW XX YY ZZ WW XX YY ZZ
Bottom WW: FB index in CONVSET WW: FB index in SUB4
row XX: FB index in NMT XX: FB index in SUB3
YY: FB index in 200MS(2) YY: FB index in SUB2
YY: FB index in 200MS(1) YY: FB index in SUB1

- 918 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.14 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error)

The occurrences of non-maskable-interruptions (NMIs) on the CPU module are examined
every time; when the interruption is triggered, an interruption message is detected and
displayed.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision; detecting the
interruption carried out at any time. If the interruption is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error
message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-28 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_NMI

Interruptions occurs on the following module instructed with
CP*_(NMI) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-29 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in NMI

Top
NMI code LR register
row
Middle
SRR0 resister SPP1 resister
row
Bottom
Stack pointer FRSCR register
row

- 919 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.15 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error)

The sampling error is verified at any time; when the error is found an error message is
displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; sampling errors are
checked every seconds. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation automatically.
The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error message is made in a
second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-30 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CHK_SAMPLING

Sampling error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (SMP) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-31 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CHK_SAMPLING

Top
00000001: Occurrence of error Diff time
row
Middle
Current timing Pervious timing
row
Bottom
row

- 920 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.16 Supervision of setting data (Setting error)

The values of the Settings are checked every second; the error message is displayed when the
erroneous value is found.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; the detection is
carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not try to restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the saved settings in the CPU module1. When the
erroneous setting is removed, the error messages will be cleared in a second.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-32 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SETTING

Setting error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (Setting) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-33 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SETTING

Top 00000001: Failure exists in the common settings Offset address corresponding to
00000002: Failure exists in the group setting
row 00000004: Error data found in the setting table the failure in the common settings
Middle Offset address corresponding to the failure in Error information about the
row the group setting setting table
Bottom
row

- 921 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.17 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error)

The state of the real time clock (RTC) is checked every five minutes; the error message is
displayed when the clock stops.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_RTC:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_RTC:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets five (5) minutes is set to detect the failure; it is reset within five minutes
when the clock starts to operate again.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-34 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RTC

Error detection is performed on the RTC on the following
CP*_(RTC) error module:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-35 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_RTC

Top 00000001: shows that the error exists in
Time in the second when the RTC stopped
row the RTC
Middle Time in the minute when the RTC
(No information displayed)
row stopped
Bottom
row

- 922 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.18 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error)

It is possible to detect the failure of the analog to digital conversion in the VCT module†.
†Note:For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input. The function can operate for respective
VCTs.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1). For example, the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_ACC1:LVl] when the VCT module at the VCT#12
slot should be supervised. Set On for the settings [CHK_ACC1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one
(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: When the error is detected, the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
2Note: The location of the VCT is discussed in Alpha-numerical references. See chapter
Technical description: IED case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-36 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ACC

AI#x(ACC) error Detection of the conversion deterioration at VCx slot
Table 11.2-37 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ACC

00000001: P error
00000002: N error
Top 00000004: Neg error
Plus value / Minus value
row 00000010: P(H) error
00000020: N(H) error
00000040: Neg(H) error
Middle
Plus rev value / (none) Plus value / Minus value
row
Bottom
Plus rev value (No message displayed)
row

- 923 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.19 Supervision of the A/D accuracy of BU (BUACC)

The central IED (CU) can detect the VCT failures† at bays through CU-BU communication.
†Note:For more information about respective VCT modules at BUs, see Chapter
Technical description (BU): Transformer module for AC analog input module.
(i) Error level

The default error level is set at level 1 (Serious error1). The user can program the level using
setting [CHK_BUACC:LVl]. Set On for the setting [CHK_BUACC:Sw]. One (1) second is set to
detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: The entire operations in the IED are stopped forcibly when the error is detected.
(ii) Error message

The CU collects some BU error information, which can be combined for the LCD screen. If
there are errors at BU1, BU32, BU33 and BU64, the LCD screen displays the number of errors
in decimal at top row and right column (i.e., 00000004 at ○
2 , for example). The smallest BU
number (i.e., BU1) and the largest BU number (BU64) are displayed at Top row and Light
column (i.e., 00010064; at ○
1 ).
All information (i.e., w.r.t. BU1, BU32, BU33 and BU64) is displayed at middle area in
hexadecimal, which is converted from binary information. For example, regarding BU1 and
BU32, the bit information is generated; it is converted in hexadecimal (‘1000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0001’ → “80000001” at ○
3 ). Similarly, for BU33 and BU35, it is generated
“80000001” at ○
4 (→1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001).
Table 11.2-38 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BUACC

BUACC error VCT deterioration at IED of BU
Table 11.2-39 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BUACC

Top
(Example: 00010064; ○
1 ) (Example: 00000004; ○
2 )
row
Middle
(Example: 80000001; ○
3 ) (Example: 80000001; ○
4 )
row
Bottom
row

- 924 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.20 Current transformer failure (CT fail)

Detecting the open-circuit in CT is achieved by the operation of the CT failure detection
function†. Thus, the failure signal in the CTF is transferred to the automatic supervision
function and it is grouped into the error level together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the CT failure function, see Chapter Relay
application: Current differential protection: CT circuit failure detection.
(i) Error level

The default error level is set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program the level using
setting [CHK_CTF:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_CTF:Sw]. The manufacture sets ten
(10) seconds detect the failure; it is reset instantly when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-40 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CTF_CBP

CT fail Detection of the open circuit in the CT
Table 11.2-41 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CTF_CBP

10000000: ZoneA
01000000: ZoneB
00100000: ZoneC
Top 00010000: ZoneD
00000010: Checkzone
row 00001000: ZoneE
00000100: ZoneF
00000010: ZoneG
00000001: ZoneH
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 925 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.21 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (V2 error)

Applying the voltage in negative-sequence is calculated regularly using three-phase voltages
measured in the IED. If Equation (11.2-1) is satisfied over 10 seconds, the supervision function
determines that a failure occurs in the input circuit.
The voltage in negative sequence can be used to detect a failure within the voltage input
circuit in high sensitivity. It facilitates the detection of the incorrect phase sequence if cables
are connected irregularly.
|Va + 𝑎2 Vb + aVc |
1. ≥ 6.35 (V) (11.2-1)
3
where,
a = Phase shift operator of 120
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program the
level using setting [CHK_V2:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_V2:Sw]. The time for the
detection can be set using [CHK_V2:Timer], which is set for 15 seconds as default. After the
error is cleared, it is reset in the time that is the same as the setting time to the detection.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-42 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_V2_CU

V2 error Detection of the negative-sequence voltage
Table 11.2-43 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_V2_CU

10000000: ZoneA
01000000: ZoneB
00100000: ZoneC
Top 00010000: ZoneD
(No information is displayed)
row 00001000: ZoneE
00000100: ZoneF
00000010: ZoneG
00000001: ZoneH
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 926 -
CU
11.2.22 Supervision of voltage in zero-sequence (V0 error)

Zero-sequence voltage is automatically calculated using three-phase voltages measured in the
relay. If Equation (11.2-2) is made up, the supervision function can determine that a voltage in
zero-sequence is being applied erroneously.
|Va + Vb + Vc |
1. ≥ 6.35 (V) (11.2-2)
3
(i) Error level

The default error level is set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program the level using
setting [CHK_VZ:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_VZ:Sw]. The time for the detection
can be set using [CHK_VZ:Timer] , which is set for 15 seconds as default. After the error is
cleared, it is reset in the time that is the same as the setting time to the detection.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-44 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_VZ_CU

V0 error Detection of the zero-sequence voltage
Table 11.2-45 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_VZ_CU

10000000: ZoneA
01000000: ZoneB
00100000: ZoneC
Top 00010000: ZoneD
Information in the whole zones
row 00001000: ZoneE
00000100: ZoneF
00000010: ZoneG
00000001: ZoneH
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 927 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.23 Supervision of current in zero-sequence (I0 error)

The zero-phase-sequence current entering to the input circuit is monitored; it is possible to
provide a high sensitivity to detect the failure using the residual circuit current. Equation
(11.2-3) is represented for the supervision:
|Ia + Ib + Ic − Ie |
1. ≥ 0.1 × Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) + k 0 (11.2-3)
3
where,
Ie Residual current
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0: 5% of the rated current†
†Note:The rated current above the equation is defined with the setting of the VCT. For
more information regarding the VCT, see Chapter Technical description (BU):
Transformer module for AC analog input.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_IZ:LVl].; then, set On for the settings [CHK_IZ:Sw]. The time to
detect can be set using [CHK_IZ:Timer], which is set for 15 seconds as default. If the error is
cleared, resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-46 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_IZ
I0 error Detection of flowing the zero-sequence current
Table 11.2-47 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_IZ

Display area Meaning of the detailed information
N/A (No information is displayed)

- 928 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.24 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the first binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
†Note:The function can operate for respective BIO modules mounted in the IED; the user
should have settings in them, which are located at the IO slot identified with the
number.
(i) Error level

can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO1:LVl] when the BIO module at the IO#12 slot
should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one
(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared.
2Note: The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description: IED case
and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-48 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO1

BIO#1 error Detection of the BIO failure at IO slot#1
Table 11.2-49 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BIO1

Top 00000001: CRC error
00000002: Connection error Count number by the CRC error
row 00000004: Read back error
Middle
Count number by the connection error Count number by the read-back error
row
Bottom
(No message displayed) (No message displayed)
row

- 929 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the second binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-50 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO2


Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 930 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the third binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-52 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO


Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 931 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.27 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error)

Supervising the failure in the human machine interface (HMI) is provided.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error1). However, the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_HMI:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_HMI:Sw].
The manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset within 10 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
2Note: The functions of the HMI is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-54 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_HMI
HMI error Detection of the HMI failure
Table 11.2-55 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_HMI

Top 00000001: Timeout of LCD communication Culminated value for the
00000002: Format error in LCD communication
row 00000004: Communication error in MIMIC LCD timeout
Middle Counter of the MIMIC
Counted value for the format error
row communication
Bottom (No information is
row displayed)

- 932 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.28 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)

A power error is issued when the DC voltage generated in the power supply module (PWS†) is
less than a threshold. The user can select either 85V or 170V thresholds for issuing the power
error; it is determined by inserting a shut connector (JP4) on the PWS.
†Note:For more information about the PWS, see Chapter Technical description, Power
supply module. When the AC supply—however, the manufacture does not
guarantee the operation in the AC power—is connected with the PWS module, the
user shall set Off for the setting [CHK_POWER:Sw] (that is, the supervision
function concerning to the PWS module are stopped). Remember that the state of
the binary input circuit (BI) will be latched when the Power error occurs anytime.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), as default, but the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_POWER:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_POWER:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with
in a second when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-56 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_POWER
Power error Detection of the failure in the PWS
Table 11.2-57 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_POWER

Top
00000001: PWS failure (No information displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 933 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.29 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)

Error in the PLC function is detected because the data coded by PLC editor1 has an error.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw].
The manufacturer sets one-hundred-twenty (120) second to detect the failure; it is reset within
60 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message will be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 11.2-58 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PLC_DAT

PLC data error Detection of the failure in the PLC function
1For more information about the task and its kind, see Chapter PLC editing in PLC editor
(6F2S1904) separately.

- 934 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
Table 11.2-59 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ PLC_DAT

00000001 No PLC data exists in the 00000001 Watch dog error
IED. 00000002 CPU load exceeded
00000002 Error in input Data2 00000003 File error
00000004 Error in output Data3 00000004 Test info string error
00000008 Time over in computation4 00000010 PLC stopped
00000010 PLC stopped by the editor5 00000011 No PLC stop Identifier
00010000 Watch dog error 00000012 Output string is too short
00020000 CPU load exceeded 00000013 Input string is too short
00040000 File error 00000014 Invalid input parameter
Top 00080000 Divided by zero 00000015 2nd is of the output string
00100000 Array index out of range 00000016 Invalid string comparison
row 00200000 Stack over flow 00000017 Unsupported type in conversion
00400000 System error 00000018 Error in the format string
00800000 Working memory over flow 00000019 Invalid input for format string
01000000 Internal error 0000001A Error during string conversion
0000001B Mismatch in Flash memory
000003E8 Division by zero
000003E9 Array index out of range
000003EA Stack over flow
000003EB System error
000003EC Working memory over flow
Middle
(No information) (No information)
row
Bottom
(No information) (No information)
row
2It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DIN function.
3It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DOUT function.
4The kind of tasks (Main_1, Main_2, or Main_3) may be too large.
5The PLC stops manually by the PLC editor.

- 935 -
CU
11.2.30 Supervision of error differential current with DIF (Id error)

Error operations are monitored by the operation of DIF-IdSV element† in the current
differential function (DIF); the automatic supervision function can alarm its erroneous
operation with the notification from the DIF function.
†Note:The DIF function has the supervision feature itself; hence, the user can program
the criteria for the supervision using settings [DIF-IdSV] and [TDIF-IdSV]; then set
On for the scheme switch [DIF-IdSV-EN]. For more information about the DIF
supervision, see Chapter Relay application: Current differential protection:
Supervision of differential current.
(i) Error level

level using setting [CHK_ID:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_ID:Sw]. The time for the
detection can be set using [TDIF-IdSV], which is set for 10 seconds as default. After the error is
cleared, it is reset instantly.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-60 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ID
Id error Detection of the erroneous differential current
Table 11.2-61 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ID

10000000: ZoneA
01000000: ZoneB
00100000: ZoneC
Top 00010000: ZoneD
Information in the whole zones
row 00001000: ZoneE
00000100: ZoneF
00000010: ZoneG
00000001: ZoneH
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 936 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.31 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error)

CT supervision is to examine whether the three-phase currents are balanced and the current
in zero-sequence is minimum. It secures the operation of the CT circuits†. By monitoring the
currents flowing in the AC analog input circuits, it is also applicable to detect the failure in the
CT circuit. The failure is determined as Equation (11.2-4) is satisfied.
1. Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) − 4 × Min(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) ≥ k 0 (11.2-4)
where,
Max (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
Min (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The smallest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
k0: 20% of rated current†
†Note: The value of the rated current is defined in the VCT. For more information
regarding the rated current, see Chapter Technical description (BU): Transformer
module for AC analog input.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_CT:LVl] and the others; then, set On for the setting [CHK_CT:Sw]
or whatever required. The time to detect can be programmed using [CHK_CT:Timer], etc.,
which can be set for 15 seconds as default. After the error is cleared, resetting will be performed
after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-62 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CT

CT error the extraordinary current flowing located at CT
Table 11.2-63 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CT


- 937 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.32 Supervision of circuit breaker contacts (CB1 fail)

Detecting the operation failure in the CB is achieved by the operation of the protection common
function (PROT_COMM†). Thus, the failure signal in the PROT_COMM is transferred to the
automatic supervision function and it is grouped into the error level together with other error
signals.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), as default, but the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_CB1:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_CB1:Sw]. The time to detect can be set using [TCBSV], which is provided in the
PROT_COMM function. It is resets instantly, if the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-64 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CB
CB1 fail Detection of the failure in the first CB
Table 11.2-65 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CB


- 938 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.33 Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail)

The operation failure in the DS is detected with the results of the protection common function
(PROT_COMM†) of the bay units (BU). That is, the failure signal of the PROT_COMM is
signified to the automatic supervision function in the BU.
†Note:For more information about the PROT_COMM function, see Chapter Relay
application: Protection common.
(i) Error level

level using settings [CHK_DS:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_DS:Sw]. The time for the
detection can be set using [TDSSV], which is provided in the PROT_COMM function. If the
error is cleared, it is reset instantly.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-66 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DS_BU
DS fail Detection of the failure in the DS
Table 11.2-67 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_DS_BU

10000000: DS11
01000000: DS12
00100000: DS13
Top 00010000: DS14 10000000: DS31
row 00001000: DS21 01000000: DS41
00000100: DS22
00000010: DS23
00000001: DS24
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 939 -
CU
11.2.34 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error)

Network communication module is monitored every 60 seconds; the error message is screened
if the one does not operate correctly.
†Note:For more information about the modules with regard to the LAN network, see
Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN communication or Chapter Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_LAN*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_LAN*:Sw].
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-68 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_LAN
Detection of the failure on the module instructed with
“LAN*” as follows:
LAN* error LAN1: Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2: Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
LAN3: Communication module (COM#3 at C13)
Table 11.2-69 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LAN

00000001: LAN does not exist
00000008: MAC address error
Top 00000080: Connection failure in 10Mbps
00000800: Double IP addresses First MAC address in four Octets
row 00008000: Internal error occurs
00080000: LAN driver error
00800000: Descriptor error
XXXX YYYY
Middle Number of responses from double IP
row addresses YYYY: Counter of full receptions
XXXX: No. of write-error in reception
Descriptor being in error:
00000001: Sending error
00000004: Error in top address
XXXX YYYY
Bottom 00000008: Reception error
00000010: Error in size definition
row YYYY: Counter for reception halted
00000020: Error in top address
XXXX: Counter for sending halted
Driver being in error:
Interruption state indicated

- 940 -
CU
BU
11.2.35 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error)

Communication error on the LAN† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed.
†Note:For more information about the LAN, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
communication. For the information about the LAN hardware, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module. When
network modules operate, the message is provided for the network modules.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_PING*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_PING*:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets one-hundred (100) second to detect the failure; it is reset in 20 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 11.2-70 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING

Detection of the pinging failure instructed with “LAN*” as
follows:
LAN* (ping) error LAN1 (ping): Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2 (ping): Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
LAN3 (ping): Communication module (COM#3 at C13)
Table 11.2-71 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PING

Top
Destination address for pinging (No information is displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 941 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.36 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error)

Operation of the LRE is checked and the error message is screened when the LRE does not
operate correctly or wrong data is written in the FPGA.
†Note:For more information about the LRE, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
operation.
(i) Error level

program the level using settings [CHK_LRE:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_LRE:Sw].
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-72 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_LRE

Detection of the failure in the LRE instructed with “CP*_” as
CP*_(LRE) error follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 11.2-73 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LRE

Top 00000001: Type error in FPGA
00000002: Port state error in redundant module FPGA type number in CPM2
row 00000004: Mode error in redundant module
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 942 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.37 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error)

A setting error can be detected if contradictory data has been set in the memory. Error
messages are shown depending on a kind of the communication protocols.
(i) Error level

The default error level has set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can change it using setting
[CHK_CMLV:LVl]; and then, set On for the setting [CHK_CMLV:Sw]. Errors can be detected in
two minutes after the IED switches on.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED turns
on.
Table 11.2-74 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Data(cmmslv) error Detection of the failure in the settings
(iii) Setting error information

If a signal mapping has not been performed correctly, error messages be shown in Hexadecimal
codes.
Table 11.2-75 61850 setting error information in CHK_CMLV
0001xxxx: IEC61850 error Number (high-order) of Data ID
Top row
0010xxxx: IEC60870-5-103 error mistakenly be mapped in the IED
Number (low-order) of Data ID
Middle row Internal information
mistakenly be mapped in the IED
Bottom
Internal information Internal information
row
Data(cmmslv) error
10:48 1/1
[Minor error]
[00010004] [51200131]
[03011001] [4747494F]
[32245354] [7456616C]
Figure 11.2-1 Sample error message

Note: Figure 11.2-1 is an example of 61850 error; and the content of that can be different
depends on degree errors; hence, this is just an example:
 The first of the top left part (i.e., “0001”) is showing the error belongs to

- 943 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
the IEC61850 protocol.

 The second of that (i.e., “0004”) is a reason (see Table 11.2-76), and it turns
out the 61850 initialization.
 The top right and the middle left parts are the Data ID of the reason (i.e.,
“51200131” and “03011001”; the user can combine them into “512001
3103011001”).
 The others are used to show the name of the 61850 logical data. Figure
11.2-1 has “4747494F, 32245354, 7456616C” codes, so the user can convert
the codes to the “GGIO2$STtVal” message using Hexadecimal to ASCII
conversion method.
Table 11.2-76 Detailed error information of 61850error

Reasons of errors
Error# messages Error# Messages
Erroneous index being used in the data
0002 Function error found 000D
for the protocol stack designated
Failure occurred on going through the
0003 000E Time out
selection process with regard to the protocol
Failure occurred during initialization of
0004 000F Going through the process
protocol process
0005 Failure for opening file 0010 Found invalid arguments
0006 Failure of access 0011 Found the data type not being supported
Failure of the acquisition of the authority
0007 No buffer space 0012
right
No space left in the buffer provided for the
0008 0013 Failure occurred on the setting process
SSP mapping
Failure of memory allocation in the memory
0009 0014 Failure of the event registration
dynamically
000A Check sum errors 0015 No event occurred
000B Failure of object search 0016 Restarting
000C Failure of the defining of data type 0017 Communication error

- 944 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.38 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error)

Publishing error in the IEC 61850 communication† is detected when a GOOSE message is not
received.
†Note:For more information about GOOSE, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC
61850 communication.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw]. Detecting the error is expressed in five-minutes when the IED detects
no reception of the GOOSE. When the GOOSE is started to receive, it is reset in one-minute.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 11.2-77 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_GOOSERCV

LAN(GOOSE) error Detection of the failure in GOOSE
Table 11.2-78 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_GOOSERCV

Top Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
row subscribe information#1† subscribe information#2†
Middle Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
Bottom Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
†Note:“c000” is shown when no reception.

- 945 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.39 Aux. contacts monitoring (DOPS/TOPS faulty or undefined)

When signals of an external device (i.e., a circuit breaker) are provided in a pair of auxiliary
contacts1, the signals may be grouped into four states: Open, Fault, Undefined, and Closed.
This is because, two different kinds of N/C and N/O contacts operates in the other way around;
hence, there is a possibility that the generated signal may have an incorrect condition (Faulty)
or an intermediate condition (Undefined). When receiving the signal by the BI circuit1 of the
IED, a preliminary logic2 starts to group the receiving signals into Open and the other states.
Consequently, the control function is able to operate securely not being affected by improper
signals (i.e., Fault, Undefined). In the supervision function, the received signals are sorted
with the definition of the error levels programmed by the manufacture, but the user can
program the sorting procedure arbitrarily using the settings in CHK functions (CHK_DPOS,
and CHK_TPOS).
1Note: The BI circuit is discussed in the Binary IO module. For more information, see
Chapter Technical description.
2Note: The preliminary logic is designed to acquire a signal coming from the BI circuit
and to sort the signal into the ‘Open’, ‘Fault’, ‘Undefined’, and ‘Closed’ states. The
preliminary logic is furnished in every control functions. For example, we can find
the logic in section “Setup for BIO module” in Chapter Control and monitoring
application: Double position device function.
(i) Correspondence between CHK functions and applications

There are a number of CHK operations in the automatic supervision function; hence, the user
is required so that the control applications correspond with the CHK functions, as shown in
Table 11.2-79.
Table 11.2-79 Correspondence table for the control applications
CHK functions Control applications
Function ID Names Function ID Names
DPOS01 function
DPOS02 function
229101 CHK_DPOS 512001 DPOS03 function
….
DPOS72 function
TPOS01 function
TPOS02 function
229201 CHK_TPOS 513001
….
TPOS24 function
†Note:To detect the “Faulty” and “Undefined” states in the DPOS01 function, the user
can adjust the time for supervision using settings [DPOS01-FLTTIM] and
[DPOS01-UDFTIM], each of which is accommodated in the DPOS1 function. Then,
set [DPOS01-FLTEN] On for the operation. Likewise, settings are available in the
DPOS02 and others.

- 946 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
(ii) Error level

For the operation, the user can set the error level when the function detects the error
concerning the operation. Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error)
and level 4 (Alarm) for the faulty state and the undefined state, respectively. However, the user
can program them using settings. For example, when the user wish to program the fault and
undefined states in the DPOS01 function, use the settings [CHK_DPOS1:FLvl] and
[CHK_DPOS1:ULvl], respectively; then, set On for the setting [CHK_DPOS1:Sw].
(iii) Error message

When the function operates and detects error, an error message can be shown at the LED and
the LCD screen.
Table 11.2-80 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DPOS/_TPOS
XXXX* undefine ‘Undefine” detected at * of the XXXX function
Minor error (Level 3) for ‘Faulty’; Alarm (Level 4) for
Error level
‘Undefine’
Table 11.2-81 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_DPOS/_TPOS

Top 00000001: Detecting ‘Alarm’
row 00000002: Detecting ‘Minor error’
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 947 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.40 Loss of receiving signal (CURX error)

When the CU fails to receive the signal coming from the BU, the supervision function can issue
an alarm.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 1 (Serious error), but the user can program the
level using setting [CHK_CURX:Lvl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_RX:Sw]. One (1) second
is set to detect the failure; it is reset in one (1) second if the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

column (i.e., 00010064; at ○
1 ).
0000 0000 0000 0001’ → “80000001” at ○
“80000001” at ○
4 (→1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001).
Table 11.2-82 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CURX

CURX error Detection for improper BU signal reception
Table 11.2-83 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CURX
Top
(Example: 00010064; ○
1 ) (Example: 00000004; ○
2 )
row
Middle
(Example: 80000001; ○
3 ) (Example: 80000001; ○
4 )
row
00000001 : CRC error
00000002 : SA error
00000100 : SUM error
Bottom 00000200 : SA mismatched
row 00000400 : Counter stopped
00000800 : Frequency mismatched
00001000 : Redundancy mode mismatched
00008000 : Frag for wrong expansion

- 948 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.41 Transmission failure (CUTX error)

When the CU fails to transmit the signal for the BU, the supervision function can issue an
alarm.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 1 (Serious error), but the user can program the
level using setting [CHK_CUTX:Lvl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_RX:Sw]. One (1) second
is set to detect the failure; it is reset in one (1) second if the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

column (i.e., 00010064; at ○
1 ).
0000 0000 0000 0001’ → “80000001” at ○
“80000001” at ○
4 (→1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001).
Table 11.2-84 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CUTX

CUTX error Detection for improper sending at x module
Table 11.2-85 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CUTX

Top
(Example: 00010064; ○
1 ) (Example: 00000004; ○
2 )
row
Middle
(Example: 80000001; ○
3 ) (Example: 80000001; ○
4 )
row
Bottom
row

- 949 -
CU
BU
11.2.42 Operation failure (BUFAIL)

The supervision function at the CU is able to detect the failure within the bay unit (BU).
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 1 (Serious error1). However, the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_BUFAIL:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_BUFAIL:Sw]. One (1) second is set to detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the
failure is cleared.
1Note: The entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected.
(ii) Error message

column (i.e., 00010064; at ○
1 ).
0000 0000 0000 0001’ → “80000001” at ○
“80000001” at ○
4 (→1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001).
Table 11.2-86 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BUFAIL

BUFAIL error Detection of the failure occurred at the BU
Table 11.2-87 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BUFAIL

Top
(Example: 00010064; ○
1 ) (Example: 00000004; ○
2 )
row
Middle
(Example: 80000001; ○
3 ) (Example: 80000001; ○
4 )
row
Bottom
row

- 950 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.43 Warning in BU (BUALM)

The supervision function at the CU is able to detect the alarm within the bay unit (BU).
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 3 (Minor error). However, the user can program
the level using setting [CHK_BUALM:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BUALM:Sw]. One
(1) second is defined to detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

column (i.e., 00010064; at ○
1 ).
0000 0000 0000 0001’ → “80000001” at ○
“80000001” at ○
4 (→1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001).
Table 11.2-88 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BUALM

BUALM error Detection of the alarm occurred at the BU
Table 11.2-89 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BUALM

Top
(Example: 00010064; ○
1 ) (Example: 00000004; ○
2 )
row
Middle
(Example: 80000001; ○
3 ) (Example: 80000001; ○
4 )
row
Bottom
row

- 951 -
CU
11.2.44 Irregular BU address (BUADR erro-r)

The supervision function at the CU is able to monitor the address arrangement of the bay unit
(BU).
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 1 (Serious error). However, the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_BUADR1:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_BUADR1:Sw]. One (1) second is set to detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the
failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

column (i.e., 00010064; at ○
1 ).
0000 0000 0000 0001’ → “80000001” at ○
“80000001” at ○
4 (→1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001).
Table 11.2-90 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BUADR

BUADR error Detection of the erroneous address set at the BU
Table 11.2-91 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BUADR

Top
(Example: 00010064; ○
1 ) (Example: 00000004; ○
2 )
row
Middle
(Example: 80000001; ○
3 ) (Example: 80000001; ○
4 )
row
Bottom
row

- 952 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.45 Loss of BU receiving signal (BURX error)

When the BU fails to receive the signal coming from the CU, BU supervision function can issue
an alarm.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level is set at level 2 (Serious error(Comm)), but the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_BURX:Lvl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BURX:Sw].
One (1) second is set to detect the failure; it is reset in one (1) second if the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-92 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BURX
BURX error Detection for improper reception at BU
Error level Serious error (Comm.) (Level 2)
Table 11.2-93 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BURX

00000001 : CRC error
00000002 : No data received
Upper 16 bit:
00000004 : Time out occurred in reception
Sum value calculated
Top 00000100 : Sum error
Lower 16 bit:
row 00000200 : SA number error
Sum value being set
00000400 : Stopping data refresh
00000800 : Frequency mismatched
00008000 : Flag for wrong expansion
Upper 16 bit: Upper 16 bit:
Middle Detection of no data SA received
row Lower 16 bit: Lower 16 bit:
Time out occurred SA expected
Upper 16 bit: Upper 16 bit:
Bottom Counter value Frequency at BU
row Lower 16 bit: Lower 16 bit:
Last counter value Frequency at CU

- 953 -
CU
BU
11.2.46 Transmission BU failure (BUTX error)

When the BU fails to transmit the signal for the CU, the BU function can issue an alarm.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_BUTX:Lvl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BUTX:Sw].
One (1) second is set to detect the failure; it is reset in one (1) second if the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-94 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BUTX
BUTX error Detection for improper sending at BU
Table 11.2-95 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BUTX

00000001 : CRC error Upper 16 bit:
00000002 : SA (Hardware) error Redundancy setting value being placed
Top 00000100 : Sum error in CU
row 00000200 : SA refresh failed Lower 16 bit:
00001000 : Redundancy mode unmatched Redundancy setting value being placed
00008000 : Frag for wrong expansion in BU
Middle
row
Bottom
Supervision outputs about BU1–BU32 Supervision outputs about BU33–BU64
row

- 954 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.47 Information of CU fatal error (Recv CUFAIL)

When CU issues fatal error, the error information is also displayed on LCD screen at BU.
(i) Error level

program the level using setting [CHK_CUFAIL:Lvl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_CUFAIL:Sw]. One (1) second is set to detect the failure; it is reset in one (1) second if the
failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-96 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CUFAIL
Recv CUFAIL Detection for operation failure within CU
Table 11.2-97 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CUFAIL

Top Error information occurred in CU Error information occurred in CU

row (CU supervision items from No.1 to 32) (CU supervision items from No.33 to 64)
Middle CU’s supervision function ID that is CU’s supervision function ID that is

row detecting error. detecting another error.
Bottom Error information, which the CU is being Error information, which the CU is being
row reported from BU1–BU32 reported from BU33–BU64

- 955 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11.2.48 Information of CU minor error (Recv CUALM)

When CU issues an alarm, the alarm information is displayed on LCD screen at BU.
(i) Error level

level using setting [CHK_CUALM:Lvl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_CUALM:Sw]. One (1)
second is set to detect the failure; it is reset in one (1) second if the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-98 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CUALM
Recv CUALM Detection for an alarm at CU
Table 11.2-99 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CUALM

Top Error information occurred in CU Error information occurred in CU

row (CU supervision items from No.1 to 32) (CU supervision items from No.33 to 64)
Middle CU’s supervision function ID that is CU’s supervision function ID that is

row detecting error. detecting another error.
Bottom Error information, which the CU is being Error information, which the CU is being
row reported from BU1–BU32 reported from BU33–BU64

- 956 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.49 Check for BU bridge condition (Bridge alarm)

The bridge condition in the busbar can be detected by the replica evaluation in the bay unit
(BU). For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Protection common.
(i) Error level

level using settings [CHK_BRIDGE:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BRIDGE:Sw]. The
time for the detection can be set using [TBRSV], which is provided in the PROT_COMM
function of the BU. If the bridge condition is cleared, it is reset instantly.
(ii) Error message

Table 11.2-100 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BRIDGE
Bridge alarm Detection of the bridge
Table 11.2-101 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ BRIDGE

N/A (No information displayed)

- 957 -
CU
BU
11.2.50 Settings
Setting of CHK_FEPRUN (Function ID: 2209D1)

Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
CHK_FEPRUN:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
--- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) /

CHK_FEPRUN:Lvl Error level Serious error
Minor error / Alarm/ Warning
Setting of CHK_FEPIF (Function ID: 22D001)

CHK_FEPIF:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_FEPIF:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_FEPIO (Function ID: 22D201)

CHK_FEPIO:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_FEPIO:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_FEPFAIL (Function ID: 22D401)

CHK_FEPFAIL:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_FEPFAIL:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_FEPALM (Function ID: 22D501)

CHK_FEPALM:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_FEPALM:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01)

Note
s
CHK_ACC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC 1:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BUACC (Function ID: 2263D1)

CHK_BUACC:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_BUACC:Lvl Error level Serious error

- 958 -
CU
BU
Setting of CHK_CTF_CBP (Function ID: 221EC1)

CHK_CTF:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CTF:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_V2_CBP (Function ID: 221AC1)

CHK_V2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_V2:Lvl Error level Minor error
Minor error / Alarm / Warning
CHK_V2:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_VZ_CU (Function ID: 221B21)

CHK_VZ:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_VZ:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_VZ:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_IZ (Function ID: 221901)

CHK_IZ:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_IZ:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_IZ:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221103)

Note
s
CHK_BIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#1 On

CHK_ BIO 1:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
CHK_ BIO2:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#2 On

CHK_ BIO2:Lvl Error level at BIO#2 Serious error
CHK_ BIO3:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#3 On

CHK_ BIO3:Lvl Error level at BIO#3 Serious error
Setting of CHK_HMI (Function ID: 221301)

CHK_HMI:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ HMI:Lvl Error level Minor error

- 959 -
CU
BU
Setting of CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801)

Note
s
CHK_CT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CT:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
Setting of CHK_CB (Function ID: 222001)

CHK_CB1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CB1 1:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_DS_BU (Function ID: 221121)

CHK_DS:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_DS:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PING1/2/3 (Function ID: 223601, 223602, and 223603)

CHK_PING1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for LAN1 Off

CHK_PING1:Lvl Error level for LAN1 Minor error
Target IP address for

PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192.168.1.1
LAN1


PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192.168.1.1
LAN2


PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192.168.1.1
LAN3
Setting of CHK_LAN1/2/3 (Function ID: 220D01, 220D02 and 220D03)

CHK_LAN1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ LAN1:Lvl Error level Minor error

- 960 -
CU
BU
Setting of CHK_LAN1/2/3 (Function ID: 220D01, 220D02 and 220D03)



Setting of PRP_HSR (Function ID: 224101)

CHK_LRE:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_LRE:Lvl Error level Serious error (Comm)
Setting of CHK_CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)

CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_GOOSERCV:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_DPOS (Function ID: 229101)

Default setting
value
CHK_DPOS1:Sw Off / On Enable switch to supervising the DPOS01 On
CHK_DPOS1:ULvl Error level for undefined error at DPOS01 Alarm
CHK_DPOS1:FLvl Error level for faulty error at DPOS01 Minor error
… …. … ….

- 961 -
CU
BU
Setting of CHK_TPOS (Function ID: 229201)

Default setting
value
CHK_TPOS1:Sw Off / On Enable switch to supervising the TPOS01 On
CHK_TPOS1:ULvl Error level for undefined error at TPOS01 Alarm
CHK_TPOS1:FLvl Error level for faulty error at TPOS01 Minor error
… …. … ….
Setting of CHK_CURX (Function ID: 2260D1)

CHK_CURX:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CURX:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_CUTX (Function ID: 2261D1)

CHK_CUTX1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CUTX1:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BUFAIL (Function ID: 2264D1)

CHK_BUFAIL:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_BUFAIL:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BUALM (Function ID: 2265D1)

CHK_BUALM:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_BUALM:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_BUADR (Function ID: 2266D1)

CHK_BUADR:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

- 962 -
CU
BU
Setting of CHK_BUADR (Function ID: 2266D1)


CHK_BUADR:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BURX (Function ID: 2270D1)

CHK_BURX:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ BURX:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_BUTX (Function ID: 2271D1)

CHK_BUTX:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_BUTX:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_CUFAIL (Function ID: 2274D1)

CHK_CUFAIL:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CUFAIL:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_CUALM (Function ID: 2275D1)

CHK_CUALM:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CUALM:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_BRIDGE (Function ID: 222401)

CHK_BRIDGE:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ BRIDGE:Lvl Error level Minor error

- 963 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU
11.2.51 Data ID
CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220101)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201)
3210101001 CHECKSUM
3210111001 CHECKSUMC
32E0001001 CHK_POINT
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210201001 LOADERSUM
3210121001 PROG_SIZE
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point
3210021001 ECC_SECNT ECC single error cnt
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter
3210001001 RESULT check result
3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant)

CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602)

CHK_MRAM (Function ID: 220F01)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point

- 964 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

CHK_FPGA (Function ID: 220B01)

CHK_FEPRUN (Function ID: 2209D14)
3210001001 CFPRNRES check result
3210011001 CFPRNREI check result(instant)
32FFFF1001 CFPRNCNT executing counter

CHK_FEPIF (Function ID: 22D001)

CHK_FEPIO (Function ID: 22D201)

CHK_FEPFAIL (Function ID: 22D401)

CHK_FEPALM (Function ID: 22D501)

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
30E0001001 CHKPOINT test point1
30E0011001 CHKPOINT2 test point2

- 965 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)

CHK_ SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)

CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501)

CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT Test point

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01)
3210021001 RES_FAST check result(fast)

- 966 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

CHK_BUACC (Function ID: 2263D1)

CHK_CTF_CBP (Function ID: 221EC1)
32100011BF CCTFCNT executing counter
32100011B1 CCTFREI check result(instant)
32100011B0 CCTFRES check result

CHK_V2_CBP (Function ID: 221AC1)
32100011BF CV2CNT executing counter
32100011B1 CV2REI check result(instant)
32100011B0 CV2RES check result

CHK_VZ_CU (Function ID: 221B21)

CHK_IZ (Function ID: 221901)

CHK_ BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221103)

- 967 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

CHK_ HMI (Function ID: 2201301)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223201)

CHK_ID_CBP (Function ID: 2214C1)
32100011BF CIDCNT executing counter
32100011B1 CIDREI check result(instant)
32100011B0 CIDRES check result

CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801)

CHK_CB (Function ID: 222001)

- 968 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

CHK_DS_BU (Function ID: 221121)

CHK_PING1/2/3 (Function ID: 223601, 223602, and 223603)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 execute counter
RESULT 3210001001 check result
RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant)

CHK_LAN1/2/3 (Function ID: 220D01, 220D02, and 220D03)

PRP_LER (Function ID: 224101)

CHK_ CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_DPOS (Function ID: 229101)
32110111B0 CDP1_RES CHK_DPOS1 result
… … …

- 969 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

CHK_TPOS (Function ID: 229201)
32110111B0 CTP1_RES CHK_TPOS1 result
… … …

CHK_CURX (Function ID: 2260D1)
3210001001 CBRXRES check result
3210011001 CBRXREI check result(instant)
3210021001 CBRXDET check result(detail)
32FFFF1001 CBRXCNT executing counter

CHK_CUTX (Function ID: 2261D1)
3210001001 CBTXRES check result
3210011001 CBTXREI check result(instant)
3210021001 CBTXDET check result(detail)
32FFFF1001 CBTXCNT executing counter

CHK_BUFAIL (Function ID: 2264D1)
3210001001 CBFARES check result
3210011001 CBFAREI check result(instant)
3210021001 CBFADET check result(detail)
32FFFF1001 CBFACNT executing counter

CHK_BUALM (Function ID: 2265D1)
3210001001 CBALRES check result
3210011001 CBALREI check result(instant)
3210021001 CBALDET check result(detail)
32FFFF1001 CBALCNT executing counter

- 970 -
CU
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU

CHK_BUADR (Function ID: 2266D1)
3210001001 CBADRES check result
3210011001 CBADREI check result(instant)
3210021001 CBADDET check result(detail)
32FFFF1001 CBADCNT executing counter

CHK_BURX (Function ID: 2270D1)
3210001001 CBURXRES check result
3210011001 CBURXREI check result(instant)
32FFFF1001 CBURXCNT executing counter

CHK_BUTX (Function ID: 2271D1)
3210001001 CBUTXRES check result
3210011001 CBUTXREI check result(instant)
32FFFF1001 CBUTXCNT executing counter

CHK_CUFAIL (Function ID: 2274D1)
3210001001 CCUFALRES check result
3210011001 CCUFALREI check result(instant)
32FFFF1001 CCUFALCNT executing counter

CHK_CUALM (Function ID: 2275D1)
3210001001 CCUALMRES check result
3210011001 CCUALMREI check result(instant)
32FFFF1001 CCUALMCNT executing counter

CHK_BRIDGE (Function ID: 222401)

- 971 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
12 Installation and setting

Caution for storage 973 Unpacking 974
Changing rated current (BU) 983
Handling precautions 973

→Technical description (CU) 545 →Case outline 1007
→Technical description (BU) 725 →Ordering 1089
→Engineering tool 779 →Note for dielectric voltage test 1116
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
 For rack mounting, cable and electrical wiring, see the service manual entitled Installation
handbook for rack mounting, cable work, etc., separately.
 See the service manual entitled Guide for replacement of inner modules depending on the
situation. (Document No. 6F2S1955).

- 972 -
CU
Chapter 12.1: Installation and setting
6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Caution for storage
BU
Caution for storage

You have to pack an IED in the original box after the IED is inspected, if the IED is not required
to be installed now; and you have to store it in dry and clean condition.
Recommended storage condition:
- Temperature: 0 degree Celsius to +40 degree Celsius
- No condensation
Handling precautions
Modules of the IED should be handled in the electro static charge free environment. That is,
the user shall use an anti-electrostatic-wrist-band; and it is grounded.
CAUTION
 Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
 Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
 Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface connected to
the earth.
You have to check carefully the electronic circuitry for your handling area, which is defined in
the IEC 60747 standard.

- 973 -
CU
Chapter 12.3: Installation and setting 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Unpack and inspection of hardware and software (CU) BU
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software (CU)

The user should unpack and check the IED case before use. Be in touch with Toshiba at email
(www.toshiba-relays.com) for any issues.
(i) Opening and inspecting CU package

Open the package and inspect physical damage if any. Ensure that the following items are
included in the package. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the above items
are missing, contact your agent.
- IED (CU) unit
- Test record: One report sheet
- Installation guide: One guide sheet
- Instruction manuals: Provided within a CD-ROM
- Flange cover: Left and right covers
- Function keys label: One label sheet
- LEDs Label: One label sheet
- Optical cable (CPU-FEP) One cable†
†Note: It is used for CPU-FEP communication. See section 12.3(vi) for more information.
(ii) Manufacture settings (Vn, fn, Vdc)

Find the hardware nameplate. The user can know the IED has been produced correctly in
terms of rated voltage (Vn), frequency (fn), and DC rating (Vdc). The user can read the same
on Factory settings (Figure 12.4-2).
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 2 1 - 4 2 1 - C 8 - 3 J - 3 0 - 2 0 0
CU
VCT type (VCT21B)
Busbar Protection IED

GRB200 -21-421-C1-3J-30-200
(N/A) 50 / 60 Month, Year
100-120 110-250
****** ** ***
DC rating (Vdc)
Rated frequency (fn)
Rated voltage (Vn)
Rated current (In)
Figure 12.3-1 Hardware nameplate example (CU)

- 974 -
CU
(iii) Combination of VCT and BIOs

The transformer module (VCT) is located at the far right slot (e.g., at ‘VC1’ in Figure 12.3-2).
Identify the codes at Position ‘7’ to know the VCT types (e.g., VCT21B lies in the CU).
The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules (BI, BO, or BIO)
using the ordering codes. For example, the user can find BI3A and BO1A modules, the ordering
cord “21” at Positions A&B. The user can also read the same on the IO configuration label.
Additionally, the user can check a terminal block type by seeing a code at Positon ‘H’.
Ordering positions
- 2 1 - 4 2 1 - C 8 - 3 J - 3 0 - 2 0 0
H Terminal block for BIO and PWS
0 Compression plug type terminal
Figure 12.3-2 IO configuration in CU (example viewing from the back in 1/1 size case)
Note: See Chapter Technical description(CU features) to refer the structure of CU and
their terminals.
(iv) Communication modules (LAN and others)

As shown in Figure 12.4-3, in CU, communication modules (LAN at C11; IRIG at C15). The
layouts are matched with Ordering code at Positions ‘E and F’. Optical ports for 64 BUs are
located in FEP, which is instructed with the code at Positions ‘D’.
Ordering positions
- 2 1 - 4 2 1 - C 8 - 3 J - 3 0 - 2 0 0
Selected LAN and IR IG

64 Opt. ports provided in FEP
Figure 12.3-3 Communication modules selected in CU

- 975 -
CU
‡Note: See Chapter Communication protocol, for more information.
(v) Relay and communication software

Verifying relay software is possible to check the codes at Positons ‘S, G, and T’ on Software
nameplate. For example, ’031’’ software†, the CU can operate in the IEC61850 protocol‡, as
Positions
7 S G T E F U 9 V
- 2 0 3 1 - 6 J 2 - 4 E
GRB200- --
Selected language
Selected protocol
Selected software in CU
Figure 12.3-4 CU software nameplate example

†Note:For more information, see Chapter Relay application
(vi) CPU-FEP optical cable for FEP (C14 and C24)

Figure 12.3-5 illustrates a CPU and FEP optical cable, which is included in the CU. The user
should connect the CPU with the FEP using it.
Figure 12.3-5 CPU-FEP optical cable

- 976 -
CU
––––––––Unpack and inspection of hardware and software (BU) BU
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software (BU)

The user should unpack and check the IED before use. Be in touch with Toshiba at email
(www.toshiba-relays.com) for any issues.
(i) Opening and inspecting BU package

Open the package and inspect physical damage if any. Ensure that the following items are
included in the package. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the above items
are missing, contact your agent.
- IED (BU) unit
- Test record: One report sheet
- Installation guide: One guide sheet
- Instruction manuals: Provided within a CD-ROM
- Flange cover: Left and right covers
- Function keys label: One label sheet
- LEDs Label: One label sheet
- White-plastic-sheets: Two sheets‡
‡Note:The white ones are provided to lock the flange screws. They are not bundled when
the BU case is made with the type of flush-mounting.
(ii) Manufacture settings (In, fn, Vdc)

Find the hardware nameplate. The user can know the IED has been produced correctly in
terms of rated current (In), frequency (fn), and DC rating (Vdc). The user can read the same
on Factory settings (Figure 12.4-2).
Ordering positions
- 1 1 - 2 3 K - B 0 - 1 J - 3 0 - 2 2 0
VCT type (VCT32B) BU

GRB200 -11-23K-B0-1J-30-220
1A / 5A 50 / 60 Month, Year
(N/A) 110-250
****** ** ***
DC rating (Vdc)
Rated frequency (fn)
Rated voltage (Vn)
Rated current (In)
Figure 12.4-1 Hardware nameplate example on Bay Unit (BU)

- 977 -
CU
Ordering positions
- 1 1 - 2 3 K - B 0 - 1 J - 3 0 - 2 2 0
System frequency (fn) = 60Hz
AC rating (In) = 5A
Figure 12.4-2 Factory setting example on Bay Unit (BU)

Note: The user can also change a rated current (In). To change it, see the succeeding
section Changing rated current.
The user is not able to change the system frequency (fn).
(iii) Combination of VCT and BIOs

The transformer module (VCT) is located at the far right slot (e.g., at ‘VC1’ in Figure 12.4-3).
Identify the codes at Position ‘7’ to know the VCT types (e.g., VCT32B is mounted when Figure
12.4-2 is true.
The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules (BI, BO, or BIO)
using the ordering codes. For example, the user can find BI3A and BO1A modules, the ordering
cord “3K” at Positions A&B. The user can also know the configuration with IO configuration
label. Additionally, the user can check a terminal block type by seeing a code at Positon ‘H’.

- 978 -
CU
Ordering positions
- 1 1 - 2 3 K - B 0 - 1 J - 3 0 - 2 2 0
H Terminal block for BIO and PWS
0 Compression plug type terminal
Figure 12.4-3 IO configuration in BU (example viewing from the back in 1/2 size case)
Note: See Chapter Technical description (BU features) to find the structure of BU cases
and their terminals.
(iv) Communication modules (LAN and others)

Figure 12.4-4 illustrates the LAN (100Base-TX/1000Base-T at C11) is provided to connect with
PC engineering tool.
Ordering positions
- 1 1 - 2 3 K - B 0 - 1 J - 3 0 - 2 2 0
100Base-TX/1000Base-T connection with PC
Figure 12.4-4 Communication modules selected in BU

(v) Relay and communication software

Verifying relay software is possible to check the codes at Positons ‘S, G, and T’ on Software
nameplate. For example, ‘032’ software†, the BU can operate in the IEC61850 protocol‡, as

- 979 -
CU
Positions
7 S G T E F U 9 V
- 1 0 3 2 - 1 J 9 - 2 E
GRB200- --
Selected language
Selected protocol
Selected software in BU
Figure 12.4-5 BU software nameplate example

†Note:For more information, see Chapter Relay application
(vi) Flange covers and labels

Two flange covers (blue ones in Figure 12.4-6) are included in the package. The user can attach
them on the IED when mounting into the rack (see succeeding section Rack mounting).
LEDs label
Pockets for labels
Function keys label
Flange covers
Figure 12.4-6 Flange covers and labels attached on IED

- 980 -
CU
(vii) White-plastic-sheets for IED case sides

When the user wishes to mount a BU case, 1/2 or 1/3 case size, in the 19-inch rack, the user
should have arrangements and preparations of that in advance. There are two types with
regard to the structures of BU cases.
Rack mounting type: flanges have to be screwed and fixed on the BU case, and countersunk
screws are provided for a BU. When wishing to place it in a 19-inch rack, put white-plastics-
sheets on the countersunk screws to cover up (see Figure 12.4-7); they are bundled in its
package. Detach the flange from the case if combining BU cases is required with a mounting
kit. Remind that the user needs to put the white-plastic-sheet over the countersunk screws on
each side.
Left silver-flange Right silver-flange
White White
plastic Countersunk plastic
sheet Relay case sheet
screws
Figure 12.4-7 Covering the screw holes with white plastic sheets
Note: For more information about how to mount a case in a rack, see Installation
handbook for rack mounting, cable work, etc. (6F2S1954). The user can get a
mounting kit by ordering (see Appendix: Ordering).
Flush-mounting type: flanges are integrated at the both sides of the BU case. Thus, the white-
plastics-sheets are not bundled.

- 981 -
CU
(viii) CU-BU optical cables for each BU (BU1–BU64 and C13)

Figure 12.4-8 illustrates that the user should make the connections between CU and BUs
using CU-BU optical cables. For more information, see Chapter Technical description (CU):
CU-BU communication module and Chapter Technical description (BU): Signal processing and
CU
BU33~64
BU1~32
CU-BU optical cable
BU1 BU2 BU32
Figure 12.4-8 CU-BU optical cables for the connection between CU and BUs

- 982 -
CU
––––––––Changing rated current (BU) BU
Changing rated current (BU)

A rated current (In) has been set by the manufacture†, but the user can change it to the other
(either 1A or 5A) by yourself. Follow the steps below, as shown in the table:
Table 12.5-1 Change rated current workflow
Check
Index Workflow Note it out
yourself
Step1 Power-off the IED BO circuits are locked after power-off.
Step2 Change CPU mode An optional jumper required
Step3 Change rated currents Optional jumpers required
Step4 Take back to the original Restoring the modules
Step5 Check altered ordering code Confirm it has been changed
Step6 Write settings with altered code Choose the altered ordering code
Step7 DEP setting confirmation Check DEP settings for Ch*
Step8 Memo for change rated current (Keep it for your future reference)
†Note:To confirm, see Factory setting label on the case side. For more detail, see
Preceding Section Unpack and inspection of hardware and software .
Step1: Turn off the IED.

Note that all outputs are locked-out when powered-off†.
Then, open the IED panel. Remove a flat cable and lateral beams in the IED case‡.
†Note:For alarm outputs, refer to Chapter Automatic supervision: Error outputs

with contacts and binary output circuits. Remind that alarms are dependent
on the alarm degree. See Table ‘FAIL contact, BO, LED outputs depending
on levels’
‡Note:For removal and restoration of inner modules, see Guide for replacement of
inner modules, separately:
—For type using compression terminals (6F2S1955)
Step2: Change CPU mode (Default  Constrained mode)

To change a CPU mode†, the user shall close a CPU-W6 circuit with a jumper. The
user can get jumpers from an optional-kit (EP-221). Insert the jumper on either W6(1-
2) or W6(3-4) for changing.
†Note:To find the CPU location, go to Chapter Technical description: Signal

processing and communication module, and see Figure Configuration switch
about the mode.

- 983 -
CU
Step3: Change rated current (1A  5A)

Pull out VCT module from the IED case†.
To shift the rated current to 1A, remove jumpers shown in Table 12.5-2.
To shift the rated current to 5A, insert jumpers shown in Table 12.5-2.
To identify the VCT type, see the code at Position 7; look up the VCT type in Table 12.5-2.
For example, the IED below has VCT32B because the code at Positon 7 is printed “1”.
XXXXXXX protection IED

GR_200 -2*-***-00-**-3*-*2* Original code
5A 50 / 60 Month, Year
100-120 110-250
****** ** ***
VCT32B is mounted in the case
Table 12.5-2 CT rating jumpers on VCTs

Code at
Structure‡ Jumper poisons
Positon 7
1 Transformer module (VCT32B) W4,5,6 and W8
2 Transformer module (VCT22B) W10,11,12 and W13
†Note:For removal, refer to the Succeeding section Removing and installation of inside
modules.
‡Note:About the structure, refer to Chapter Technical description: Transformer
module for AC analog input (VCT).
Step4: Take back to the original.

Connect inner flat cable and the power cable†
†Note:For connection about the power cable, refer to Chapter Technical description:
Power supply module.

- 984 -
CU
Step5: Check altered ordering code, which is set on Step 2†.

The user needs to confirm the rated current changed by checking the altered ordering
code (at Position K)‡. Figure 12.5-1 illustrates how to confirm the altered ordering code
from the nameplate and LCD screen.
GRB200 -21-23K-B0-1J-30-120 Original code
5A 50 / 60 Month, Year
100-120 110-250
****** ** ***
Rated current (In) on the nameplate: 5A rated set in the Manufacture
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE] Altered code
GRB200
-21-23K-B0-1J-30-110 Code at Rated
__-1032-1J9-2E Positon K current
[Serial No.] 1 1A
No XXXXXXX123 2 5A
Rated current (In) in the IED: 1A rated changed by the user
Figure 12.5-1 How to check the new rated current with the altered code
†Note: For the LCD screen operation, see Chapter User interface: Information sub-menu.
‡Note: To know how to read the code, refer to the preceding section Unpack and
inspection of hardware and software.
Step6: Write settings with altered code

To write the settings corresponding to the altered code, use the GR-TIEMS. For
example, after rated current has been changed to 1A, rewrite the setting items into
the IED using the altered ordering code (see Figure 12.5-1 about the altered code; in
this example: GRB200-21-23K-B0-1J-30-110-1032-1J9-2E). Figure 12.5-2 shows how
to write the settings.

- 985 -
CU
Select the code for the rate

current corresponded.
Open Write to IED menu
Click Setting in Writing items
Figure 12.5-2 How to initialize the IED with GR-TIEMS
Step7 Confirmation of DEP setting after rewriting

For example for VCT22B, after the initialization (rewriting), the user shall check that
DEP are set for Ch10, 11, 12, and 13 entirely. (see Figure 12.5-3).

- 986 -
CU
Rear
Front
AC
Terminal
Screw W1
Number signal input position input

Tr.1 Tr.2
W2
channel
W3
– –
Connector
1 2 – – W4 Tr.3 Tr.4
3 4 – – – – W5
W6
5 6 – – – – W7 Tr.5
W8
7 8 – – – – W9
9 10 – – – – W10
W11
11 12 – – – – W12
W13
13 14 – – – – W14 Tr.9 Tr.10
15 16 – – – –
Tr.11
17 18 – – – –
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
19 20 Ia Current W10 Ch10
21 22 Ib Current W11 Ch11
23 24 Ic Current W12 Ch12
25 26 Ie Current W13 Ch13
27 28 – – – –
Figure 12.5-3 DEP setting checking in GR-TIEMS for VCT22B
Step8: Memo for change rated current

There is Factory setting label on the IED. Marking the altered rated current on it is a
good example.
Ordering positions
- 2 1 - 2 3 K - B 0 - 1 J - 3 0 - 1 2 0
Original factory setting

Rated current changed by the user
Figure 12.5-4 Change rated current marking by yourself

- 987 -
CU
––––––––PWS alarm threshold setting (CU and BU) BU
PWS alarm threshold setting (CU and BU)

Both of CU and BU have power supply module (PWS) at the far left slot. The user can confirm
DC rated voltage on the hardware nameplate by checking the cord at Positions ‘8’, but the user
should select either alarm thresholds for dropping DC voltage by inserting a jumper on the
PWS (Figure 12.6-1). See Section Power supply module in Chapter Technical description.
Ordering positions
- x 1 - x x x - x x - x x - x x - x x x
DC rated voltage, e.g., 1=’110 to 250Vdc’, selected by the ordering
Figure 12.6-1 Alarm threshold set on PWS module
CAUTION
Note: A short-wire is connected between terminal screws No. 35–37; and that is done by
the manufacturer. The user shall remove that when the user undertakes the
dielectric voltage test for the IED; and the user shall connect again the terminals
with that after the test (See Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test).
29
30
31
32
33
Short wire 34
35
36
37
38
39
40
FG
Type using compression terminals
Figure 12.6-2 PWS terminal labels

- 988 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
13 Commissioning and maintenance

Required test 990 Test operations –
Cautions 991 -Binary output circuit test (BO) 995
Preparations 991 -Binary input circuit test (BI) 995
Test sub-menu structure 993 -Canceling supervision function (AMF) 995
-CB and DS test 995
-Exclusion of zone evaluation 995
-GOOSE test (61850) 994
-LED light test 996
-Logic single monitor 996
-Mode change (MDCTRL) 996
Reference chapters: Reference separate manuals:

→General control function 156 →Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)
→Technical description (CU) 545 →Replica setting procedure (6F2S1902)

- 989 -
CU
Chapter 13.1: Commissioning and maintenance 6F2S1933 (0.04)
––––––––Scope of required test
BU
Scope of required test

Commissioning tests should be a minimum; it may be required hardware and conjunctive tests.
Tests regarding relay and control function may be carried out at the user’s discretion. During
the tests, the user can access IED functions through the front panel or using the GR-TIEMS
engineering tool. The user is generally required to be familiar with the functions regarding the
testing practices; the user shall understand the safety precautions to avoid personal injuries
or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
Hardware tests should be carried out to ensure that there is no hardware defect in the IED.
Defects of hardware circuits can be detected in automatic supervision function when the DC
power is supplied.
Function tests
Function tests are software-based testing. Dynamic test set can be required in several
protection tests.
Conjunctive tests
After the hardware and function test in the IED, conjunctive tests can be carried out with
primary equipment, telecommunication and other external equipment. On-load test, Signal
test, and tripping CB test may be required.

- 990 -
CU
––––––––Cautions
BU
Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
 Class 1 laser.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
(ii) Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the
printed circuit board (PCB).
 While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
 Before the power is on, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
 Transformer module is damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 Clear test settings after the test; then, set original settings again.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
3 Phase angle meters
2 AC ammeters

- 991 -
CU
––––––––Preparations
BU
1 Time counter, precision timer

1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
To examine the IED with a PC locally, connect the PC with the IED using a USB cable. The
GR-TIEMS software is required to install in the PC.
During commissioning and maintenance, check wire connection and observe relay output
signals. The user can see the signals whether the relay operations are appropriate or not.

- 992 -
CU
––––––––Test operations
BU
Test operations
The user can change IED to for Test mode by the operations on the IED front panel with
Main/Sub menus, as shown in Figure 13.4-1(CU) and Figure 13.4-2(BU).
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record
Monitoring
Setting
IO Setting
Control
Time
Test Test Mode Test Option S-TestFlagCancel

GOSNDBLK
GOSBUBLK
Function Test A.M.F.

BU1_Exclusion
BU2_Exclusion
BU3_Exclusion
BU4_Exclusion
BU5_Exclusion
TestFlag-EN BU6_Exclusion
BU7_Exclusion
BU8_Exclusion
BU9_Exclusion
BU10_Exclusion
BU64_Exclusion
Binary Input (Slot#n) BI*F OP

SLOT*-BI01-SET
SLOT*-BI02-SET
SLOT*-BI03-SET
…..
Binary Output (Slot#n) BO*F OP

SLOT*-BO01-SET
SLOT*-BO02-SET
Simultaneous Fault SLOT*-BO03-SET
…..
Mode Change MDCTRL-EN

MDCTRL-SELRST
MDCTRL-EXERST
Signal Monitoring Term A

Term B
Term C
Information
Security Setting
Login/Logout
Figure 13.4-1 Structure of test menu (CU)

- 993 -
CU
BU
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Main Menu Record
Monitoring
Setting
IO Setting
Control
Time
Test Test Mode Test Option S-TestFlagCancel

GOSNDBLK
GOSBUBLK
Function Test A.M.F.

CB-Test
DS11-Test
DS12-Test
DS13-Test
DS14-Test
TestFlag-EN DS21-Test
DS22-Test
DS23-Test
DS31-Test
DS41-Test
BU_Exclusion
SYNC01-Test
SYNC02-Test
Binary Input (Slot#n) BI*F OP

SLOT*-BI01-SET
SLOT*-BI02-SET
SLOT*-BI03-SET
…..
Binary Output (Slot#n) BO*F OP

SLOT*-BO01-SET
SLOT*-BO02-SET
Simultaneous Fault SLOT*-BO03-SET
…..
Mode Change MDCTRL-EN

MDCTRL-SELRST
MDCTRL-EXERST
Signal Monitoring Term A

Term B
Term C
Information
Security Setting
Login/Logout
Figure 13.4-2 Structure of test menu (BU)
Note: The structure and the contents about sub-menus depend on the hardware.
13.4.1 Test for communication

(i) GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)
This is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending information where there is a conflict
in communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
(ii) GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription information from another IED for
testing bad reception. See Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication.

- 994 -
CU
BU
(iii) Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)

Test flag in the communication packet will be removed unconditionally, when On is set for
setting [Test flag].
(iv) Test for all communication (TestFlag-EN)

Setting [TestFlag-EN]=On allows to set test flags at all communication protocol (see Chapter
Technical description (CU or BU): User interface : Test-submenu).
13.4.2 Test for relay application

(i) Auto monitoring function (A.M.F)
Issuing alarms will be blocked when Off is set for [A.M.F]. For the content about the monitoring
function, see Chapter Automatic supervision function.
(ii) Test for CB and DS

If the user wishes to close/open CB and DSs temporarily for testing at BU, the user can
close/open them hypothetically with settings [CB-Test], [DS11-Test], [DS12-Test], [DS13-Test],
[DS14-Test], [DS21-Test], [DS22-Test], [DS23-Test], [DS24-Test], [DS31-Test], and [DS41-
Test]. The CB and DS11, etc. are defined on the busbar configuration. For the definitions, see
the instruction manual “Replica setting procedure for decentralized busbar protection IED”
(6F2S1902), separately.
(iii) Excusing zone evaluation (CU/BU_Exclusion)

The user can have stop zone evaluation using settings [CU_Exclusion] and [BU*_Exclusion].
When On is set for settings at BUs and the CU, the BUs are excluded from the zone evaluation.
The settings is used for the maintenance, etc. For more information, see Chapter Relay
application: BU out of service.
13.4.3 Test for BI and BO circuits

(i) Binary input circuit test (SLOT*BIxx-SET)
Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual input at a binary input circuit.
(ii) Binary output circuit test (SLOT*BOxx-SET)

Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual output at a binary input circuit.
Note: For the BI and BO test operation, see Chapter Technical description (CU or BU):
User interface: Test sub-menu, separately.

- 995 -
CU
BU
13.4.4 Test for mode change (MDCTRL)

The function is provided to detect a test mode. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Mode control function, separately.
13.4.5 Signal monitor

The function is provided in order that the user can observe IED internal signals. For more
information, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine interface: Monitoring jacks,
separately.
13.4.6 LED light test

The user can perform LED lighting test by pressing the keys ◄ and ►. Press the both keys on
the front panel for a few seconds. If there is no problem, all LEDs will be lit.

- 996 -
CU
––––––––Setting
BU
Setting
(i) CU
Setting of DBP_BUOUT_CU (Function ID: 4F4001)
BU1_Exclusion Off / On - To exclude BU1 Off

BU2_Exclusion To exclude BU2 Off
BU3_Exclusion To exclude BU3 Off
…. ….
BU64_Exclusion Off / On To exclude BU64 Off

TestFlag-EN Off / On – Change test flag on Protocol On

A.M.F. Off / On Supervisor function use or not On
Setting of CMMSLV (Function ID: 300001)

S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Cancelling test flag of slave communication Off

GOSNDBLK Off / On GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off / On GOOSE subscription block Off
Setting of BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)

SLOT*-BIxx-SET Normal / Off / On Test switch for BI circuit xx at slot “IO#*” Normal
SLOT*-BOxx-SET Normal / Off / On Test switch for BO circuit xx at slot “IO#*” Normal

- 997 -
CU
––––––––Setting
BU
(ii) BU
TestFlag-EN Off / On – Change test flag on Protocol On

A.M.F. Off / On - Supervisor function use or not On
CB-Test Normal / Open / Close - Forcibly making condition of CB Normal
DS11-Test Normal / Open / Close - Forcibly making condition of DS11 Normal
BU_Exclusion Off / On - To exclude this BU by itself Off
Setting of CMMSLV (Function ID: 300001)

S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Cancelling test flag of slave communication Off

GOSNDBLK Off / On GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off / On GOOSE subscription block Off
Setting of BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)

SLOT*-BIxx-SET Normal / Off / On Test switch for BI circuit xx at slot “IO#*” Normal
SLOT*-BOxx-SET Normal / Off / On Test switch for BO circuit xx at slot “IO#*” Normal

- 998 -
CU
––––––––Signal
BU
Signal
TEST (Function ID: 201301)
3100051197 SIM FAULT OUTPUT for Sim.Fault Display
3100001190 TEST MODE Mode of test

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
3110001198 BI1F OP BI1 forced operate start
311A001198 BI11F OP BI11 forced operate start
311B001198 BI12F OP BI12 forced operate start
311C001198 BI13F OP BI13 forced operate start
311D001198 BI14F OP BI14 forced operate start
311E001198 BI15F OP BI15 forced operate start
311F001198 BI16F OP BI16 forced operate start
3110201198 BO1F OP BO1 forced operate start
311A201198 BO11F OP BO11 forced operate start
311B201198 BO12F OP BO12 forced operate start
311C201198 BO13F OP BO13 forced operate start
311D201198 BO14F OP BO14 forced operate start
311E201198 BO15F OP BO15 forced operate start
311F201198 BO16F OP BO16 forced operate start

- 999 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function

Functions Function ID Pages
CONST_VALUE 100001 1001—1006

- 1000 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)
C0_BIT 8000001220 Constant value 0 expressed with binary in BIT type
C1_BIT 8000011220 Constant value 1 expressed with binary in BIT type
C0_N8 2000001128 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C0_N32 220000112A Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C1_N32 220001112A Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C0_N64 230000112B Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C1_N64 230001112B Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C0_S8 2000001120 Constant value 0 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C10_S8 20000A1120 Constant value 10 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C11_S8 20000B1120 Constant value 11 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C12_S8 20000C1120 Constant value 12 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C13_S8 20000D1120 Constant value 13 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C14_S8 20000E1120 Constant value 14 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C15_S8 20000F1120 Constant value 15 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit

- 1001 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)


- 1002 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)



- 1003 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

C0_U8 3000001124 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C10_U8 30000A1124 Constant value 10 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C11_U8 30000B1124 Constant value 11 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C12_U8 30000C1124 Constant value 12 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C13_U8 30000D1124 Constant value 13 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C14_U8 30000E1124 Constant value 14 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C15_U8 30000F1124 Constant value 15 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit

- 1004 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)


- 1005 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)


- 1006 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 2 Case outline

Types Case figures Figures (pages)
1 / 1 size case Figure 2-1.1 (1008)
Type using compression
terminals
Panel cutout† 1 / 2 size case Figure 2-2.2 (1011)

- 1007 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Type using compression terminals
† The (38) means the

height of the VCT terminal.
Unit: mm
CU; 1/1 size case & Type using compression terminals

Figure 2-1.1 Trihedral figure (CU case)

- 1008 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Unit: mm
1/2 size case & Type using compression terminals

Figure 2-1.2 Trihedral figure (BU, 1/2 size case)

- 1009 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Unit: mm
1/3 case size with Compression plug type terminal

Figure 2-1.3 Trihedral figure (BU, 1/3 size case)

- 1010 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Panel cutout
Unit: mm
Panel cut out for 1/1 case size
Figure 2.2-1 Panel cutout (1/1 size case)
Unit: mm
Panel cut out for 1/2 case size
Figure 2.2-2 Panel cutout figure (1/2 size case)

- 1011 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Unit: mm
1/3 case sizel

Figure 2.2-3 Panel cutout figure (1/3 size case)

- 1012 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 3 Typical external connection

Case and terminal
Size case Examples of hardware codes Figures (pages)
types
Type using 1 / 1 size case GRB200-21-424-C8-1J-30-100 Figure 3-1 (1014)
compression terminals 1 / 2 size case GRB200-21-231-B8-1J-30-110 Figure 3-2 (1015)

- 1013 -
Central Unit (1/1 size case) (GRB200-21-424-C8-1J-30-100)
[IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1] [VCT#2]
T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
FEP C11
PWS1 A BO1 A BI1 A VCT21B VCT21B
100BASE-TX
1 (+) 1 BU53 BU54 BU55 BU56 BU61 BU62 BU63 BU64 1000BASE-T 1 1
2 BO1(*2) BI1 VaA VaE
2 (-) 2 2 2
4
3 (+) 3 3 3
3
FAIL1 BO2(*2) BI2 VbA VbE
4 (-) 4 4 4
1
(+) 5
BU49 BU50 BU51 BU52 BU57 BU58 BU59 BU60 5 5
5
BO3(*2) BI3 VcA VcE
6 (-) 6 6 6
8
10 7 (+) 7 C12 7 7
BO4(*2) BI4 VaB VaF

9 8 (-) 8 8 8
FAIL2
7 9 (+) 9 9 9
BO5(*2) BI5 BU37 BU38 BU39 BU40 BU45 BU46 BU47 BU48 VbB VbF
10 (-) 10 10 10
11 (+) 11 11 11
BO6(*2) BI6 VcB VcF

12 (-) 12 12 12
13 (+) 13 13 13
BO7(*4) BI7 BU33 BU34 BU35 BU36 BU41 BU42 BU43 BU44 VaC VaG
14 (-) 14 14 14
C13
15 (+) 15 15 15
BO8(*4) BI8 VbC VbG

16 (-) 16 16 16
17 (+) 17 17 17
BO9(*4) BI9 VcC VcG

18 (-) 18 18 18
21 (+) 21 19 19
BO10(*4) BI10 VaD VaH
22 (-) 22 20 20
2¥¥
23 (+) 23 21 21
BO11(*4) BI11 22
VbD
22
VbH
24 (-) 24 C24 C14
CPU-FEP CPU-FEP
25 (+) 25 BU17 BU18 BU19 BU20 BU25 BU26 BU27 BU28 23 23
BO12(*4) BI12 TX TX VcD VcH

26 (-) 26 24 24
27 (+) 27
BO13(*4) BI13 RX RX
28 (-) 28
(+) 29 (+) 29
29
30
DC/DC BO14(*4) BI14
30 (-) 30
(-) 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO15(*4) BI15
(-) 32 30 30
32
35
(+) 33
33
36 BI16
BO16(*4) (-) 34 BU1 BU2 BU3 BU4 BU9 BU10 BU11 BU12
34
37
(+) 35
38 35
BO17(*4) BI17
(-) 36
36
(+) 37
37
BI18
BO18(*4) (-) 38
38
GRB (1.0) GRB(1.0)
●FG ●FGE ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
Figure 3-1 GRB200 CU (2×VCT21B, BO1A, BI1A) & Type using compression terminals

6F2S1933 (0.04)
- 1014 -
Bay Unit (1/2 case size) (GRB200-21-231-B8-1J-30-110)
[IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
PWS1 A 100BASE-TX VCT22B
BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A
1000BASE-T
(+) 1 1 (+) 1
2 BI1
BI1 BO1(SF)
(-) 2 2 (-) 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
3
FAIL1 BI2
BI2 BO2(SF) (-) 4
(-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5
BI3 BO3(SF) BI3
(-) 6 6 (-) 6
8
10 (+) 7
C12
(+) 7 7
9 BI4 BO4(SF) BI4

FAIL2 (-) 8 8 (-) 8
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9
BI5 BO5(SF) BI5

(-) 10 10 (-) 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11
BI6 BO6(SF) BI6

(-) 12 12 (-) 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13
BI7 BO7 BI7 C13

(-) 14 14 (-) 14
(+) 15 CU
(+) 15 15
communication
BI8 BO8 BI8
(-) 16 16 (-) 16
17 (+) 17
BO9 BI9
18 (-) 18
(+) 21 19
21 21
BO1(F) BO10 BI10 20
Ia
22 22 (-) 22
2¥¥
(+) 23 21
23 23 C14
BO2(F) BO11 BI11 22
Ib
24 24 (-) 24
23
25 25 (+) 25
Ic
BO3(F) BO12 BI12 24
26 26 (-) 26
25
27 27 (+) 27
BI13 26
Ie
BO4(F) BO13 (-) 28
28 28
(+) 29
29 29 (+) 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 BI14
30 30 (-) 30
(-) 31 (+) 31
C15
31 31
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15 30
32 32 (-) 32
35
33 (+) 33
33
36 BI16
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34
37
(+) 35
38 35 35
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36
36
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRB(1.0)
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
Figure 3-2 GRB200-BU (VCT22B, BIO3A+BO1A, BI1A, 100Base-TX/1000Base-T)

6F2S1933 (0.04)
- 1015 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BI1A BI2A BI3A BO1A BO2A

1 1 1
(+)
BI1
(+) (+) BI1 1 1
2 2 BI1 2 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI2 BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
3 3 (−)
(+)
BI2 (+) BI3 3 3
4 4 (+)
(−) (+) BI4 BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
5 5 5 (−)
(+)
BI3
(+) (+) BI5 5 5
6 6 BI2 6 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI6 BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
7 7 7 (−)
(+)
BI4
(+) (+) BI7 7 7
8 8 BI3 8 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI8 BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
9 9 (−)
(+)
BI5 (+) BI9 9 9
10 10 (+)
(−) (+) BI10 BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
11 11 11 (−)
(+)
BI6
(+) (+) BI11 11 11
12 12 BI4 12 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI12 BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
13 13 13 (−)
(+)
BI7
(+) (+) BI13 13 13
14 14 BI5 14 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI14 BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
15 15 (−)
(+)
BI8 (+) BI15 15 15
16 16 (+)
(−) (+) BI16 BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
17 17 17 (−)
(+)
BI9
(+) (+) BI17 17 17
18 18 BI6 18 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI18 BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
21 21
(+)
BI10 (+) 21 (+) BI19 21 21 (+)
22 BI7 22
(−) (−) 22 (+) BI20 BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
(+) 23 23
BI11
(+) BI21 23 23 (+)
(−) 24 24 BO11 BO11(H)
(+) BI22 24 24 (−)
(+) 25 25 25
BI12 (+) (+) BI23 25 25
(−) 26 26 BI8 26 BO12 BO12(H)
(+)
(−) (+) BI24 26 26 (−)
(+) 27 27 27
BI13 (+) (+) BI25 27 27 (+)
(−) 28 28 BI9 28 BO13 BO13(H)
(−) (+) BI26 28 28 (−)
(+) 29 29
BI14
(+) BI27 29 29 (+)
(−) 30 30 BO14 BO14(H)
(+) BI28 30 30 (−)
(+) 31 31 31
BI15 (+) (+) BI29 31 31
(−) 32 32 BI10 32 BO15 BO15(H)
(+)
(−) (+) BI30 32 32 (−)
(+) 33 33 33
BI16 (+) (+) BI31 33 33 (+)
(−) 34 34 BI11 34 BO16 BO16(H)
(−) (+) BI32 34 34 (−)
(+) 35 35
BI17
(−) 35
(−) 36 36 BO17
(−) 36
37 37
(+)
BI18 (+) 37 (−) 37
38 BI12 38
(−) (−) 38 (−) BO18 38
40 FG†
Figure 3-3 In/Output arrangements for BI1A, BI2A, BI3A, BO1A and BO2A
BIO1A BIO2A BIO3A
(+) 1 1 (+) 1
BI1 (+) BI1 BI1
(−) 2 2 (−) 2
(−)
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
BI2 (+) BI2 BI2
(−) 4 4 (−) 4
(−)
(+) 5 5 (+) 5
BI3 (+) BI3 BI3
(−) 6 6 (−) 6
(−)
(+) 7 7 (+) 7
BI4 (+) BI4 BI4
(−) 8 8 (−) 8
(−)
(+) 9 9 (+) 9
BI5 (+) BI5 BI5
(−) 10 10 (−) 10
(−)
(+) 11 11 (+) 11
BI6 (+) BI6 BI6
(−) 12 12 (−) 12
(−)
(+) 13 13 (+) 13
BI7 (+) BI7 BI7
(−) 14 14 (−) 14
(−)
15 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) (+)
16 16 BI8 16 BI8
(−) (−)
17 17
BO2(SF) (+) BI9
18 18
(−)
21 21 21
BO3(SF) 22 (+) 22 BI10 BO1(F) 22
23 (−) 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11 BO2(F) 24
25 (−) 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12 BO3(F) 26
27 (−) 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28 BO4(F) 28
29 29 29
BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30 BO5(F) 30
31 31 31
BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
BO9 34 BO4 34 BO7 34
35 35 35
37 37 37
BO10 36 BO5 36 BO8 36
38 38 38
Figure 3-4 In/Output arrangements for BIO1A, BIO2A, and BIO3A

†Note:The BI2A is earthed to the case’s frame ground screw. See Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module (Page 586).

- 1016 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS

# Document names Pages Provisions
MICS Model implementation conformance statement 1018 For Edition 1 only
PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement 1039 For Edition 1 & 2
PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing 1046 For Edition 1 & 2
TICS Tissues conformance statement 1063 For Edition 1 & 2

- 1017 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Edition 1)
IEC61850 Edition 1 Model Implementation

Conformance Statement (MICS)
GRB200 (Busbar protection IED)
(Original document#: 6F2S1894 Ver. 0.0)

- 1018 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
The GRB200 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4

Logical Nodes GRB200 ITCI ---
L: System Logical Nodes ITMI ---
LPHD Yes A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
Common Logical Node Yes ANCR ---
LLN0 Yes ARCO ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions ATCC ---
PDIF Yes AVCO ---
PDIR --- M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PDIS --- MDIF ---
PDOP --- MHAI ---
PDUP --- MHAN ---
PFRC --- MMTR ---
PHAR --- MMXN ---
PHIZ --- MMXU Yes
PIOC --- MSQI Yes
PMRI --- MSTA ---
PMSS --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
POPE --- SARC ---
PPAM --- SIMG ---
PSCH --- SIML ---
PSDE --- SPDC ---
PTEF --- X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTOC Yes XCBR Yes
PTOF --- XSWI ---
PTOV --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PTRC Yes TCTR ---
PTTR --- TVTR ---
PTUC --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
PTUV --- YEFN ---
PUPF --- YLTC ---
PTUF --- YPSH ---
PVOC --- YPTR ---
PVPH --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment
PZSU --- ZAXN ---
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions ZBAT ---
RDRE Yes ZCAB ---
RADR --- ZCAP ---
RBDR --- ZCON ---
RDRS --- ZGEN ---
RBRF Yes ZGIL ---
RDIR --- ZLIN ---
RFLO --- ZMOT ---
RPSB --- ZREA ---
RREC --- ZRRC ---
RSYN --- ZSAR ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZTCF ---
CALH --- ZTCR ---
CCGR ---
CILO ---
CPOW ---
CSWI ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references
GAPC Yes
GGIO Yes
GSAL ---
Nodes GRB200
I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
IARC ---
IHMI ---

- 1019 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRB200 Analogue settings
Status information ASG ---
SPS Yes CURVE ---
DPS --- Description information
INS Yes DPL Yes
ACT Yes LPL Yes
ACD Yes CSD ---
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV Yes
CMV ---
SAV ---
WYE Yes
DEL ---
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC ---
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING ---

- 1020 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRB200
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and specialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O N
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y

- 1021 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
PDIF class
Data
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start O Y
Str2 ACD Start O Y
・
・
Str9 ACD Start O Y
Op1 ACT Operate T M Y
・
・
TmAst CSD Active curve charactristic O N
Measured Values
DifAClc1 WYE Differential Current O Y
・
・
RstA1 WYE Restraint Current O Y
・
・
Settings
LinCapac ASG Line capacitance (for load currents) O N
LoSet ING Low operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
HiSet ING High operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
RstMod ING Restraint Mode O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N

- 1022 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
PTOC class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
・
・
Str64 ACD Start M Y
・
・
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O N
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
PTRC class
Data
Status Information
Tr1 ACT Trip CH1 C Y
・
・
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.

- 1023 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
RDRE class
Data
Controls
RcdTrg SPC Trigger recorder O N
MemRs SPC Reset recorder memory T O N
MemClr SPC Clear Memory T O N
Status Information
RcdMade SPS Recording made M Y
FltNum INS Fault Number M Y
GriFltNum INS Grid Fault Number O N
RcdStr SPS Recording started O N
MemUsed INS Memory used in % O N
Setting
TrgMod ING Trigger Mode (internal trigger, external or both) O N
LevMod ING Level Trigger Mode O N
PreTmms ING Pre-trigger time O N
PstTmms ING Post-trigger time O N
MemFull ING amemory full level O N
MaxNumRcd ING Maximum number of records O N
ReTrgMod ING Retrigger Mode O N
PerTrgMod ING Periodic trigger time in s O N
ExclTmms ING Exclusion time O N
OpMod ING Operation mode (Saturation, Overwrite ) O N

- 1024 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
RBRF class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start, timer running O N
OpEx1 ACT Breaker failure trip (“external trip”) T C Y
・
・
OpIn1 ACT Operate, retrip (“internal trip”) T C Y
・
・
Setting
Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both,
FailMod ING O N
other)
FailTmms ING Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip O N
SPlTrTmms ING Single Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
TPTrTmms ING Three Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
DetValA ASG Current Detector Value O N
ReTrMod ING Retrip Mode O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.

- 1025 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
GAPC class
Data
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic operation O N
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
・
・
Str64 ACD Start M Y
・
・
Setting
StrVal ASG Start Value O N

- 1026 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
GGIO class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
・
・

- 1027 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
MMXU class
Data
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O Y
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O N
PhV1 WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y
・
・
A1 WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O Y
・
・
W WYE Phase active power (P) O N
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N
PF WYE Phase power factor O N
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N

- 1028 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
MSQI class
Data
Measured values
SeqA1 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C Y
・
・
SeqV1 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
・
・
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.

- 1029 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
XCBR class
Data
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O N
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N

- 1030 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRB200
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.

- 1031 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
ACT class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
ACD class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) N
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) N
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) N
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services

- 1032 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
MV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services

- 1033 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
WYE class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 N
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
Services
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B |C |… O N
Services

- 1034 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services

- 1035 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services

- 1036 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(MICS Ed.1)
DPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
Services
LPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only; AC_LN0_EX N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
Services

- 1037 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(This page is intentionally blank)

- 1038 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PICS Editon1 and 2)
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement

for GR200 series IED

- 1039 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
Introduction
The template of this document is “Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the
IEC 61850 interface in <device>” version 1.6 published by UCA International Users Group in
Nov 19, 2015.
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the
IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series version
equal to or upper than F (G2M850-01-F). Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-
7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance statement”.
— ASCI basic conformance statement,
— ACSI models conformance statement,
— ACSI service conformance statement
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
Note: Term “Ed” is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850. Editon2 (Ed2) provides
backward compatibility for legacy Edition 1 (Ed1).

- 1040 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ASCI basic conformance statement
The basic conformance statement is defined in Table A.1.
Table A.1 – Basic conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
Client-Server roles
Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B11  Y
ASSOCIATION)
Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B12 N 
ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
Client/Subscrib
er side is only
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y
GOOSE and
SNTP.
Deprecated
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used
Ed2
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other
Generic substation event model (GSE)

B31 Publisher side  Y
B32 Subscriber side Y 
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

B41 Publisher side  N
B42 Subscriber side N 
- = not applicable
Y = supported
N or empty = not supported

- 1041 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ACSI models conformance statement
The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table A.2.
Table A.2 – ACSI models conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
If Server or Client side (B11/12) supported
M1 Logical device N Y
M2 Logical node N Y
M3 Data N Y
M4 Data set N Y
M5 Substitution N N
M6 Setting group control N Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control N Y
M7-1 sequence-number N Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M7-4 data-set-name N Y
M7-5 data-reference N Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow N Y
M7-7 entryID N Y
M7-8 BufTm N Y
M7-9 IntgPd N Y
M7-10 GI N Y
M7-11 conf-revision N Y
M8 Unbuffered report control N Y
M8-1 sequence-number N Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M8-4 data-set-name N Y
M8-5 data-reference N Y
M8-6 BufTm N Y
M8-7 IntgPd N Y
M8-8 GI N Y
M8-8 conf-revision N Y
Logging N N
M9 Log control N N
M9-1 IntgPd N N
M10 Log N N
M11 Control N Y
M17 File Transfer N Y
M18 Application Association N Y
M19 GOOSE Control Block N Y
M20 Sampled Value Control Block N N
If GSE (B31/32) is supported
M12 GOOSE Y Y
M13 GSSE N N Deprecated Ed2
If SVC (41/42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC N N
M15 Unicast SVC N N
For all IEDs
SNTP client functions
M16 Time Y N
are supported.
Y = service is supported
N or empty = service is not supported

- 1042 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ACSI service conformance statement
The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in Table A.3 (depending on the statements
in Table A.1).
Table A.3 – ACSI service Conformance statement(1/3)
Ed Services AA: Client Server Comments
TP/MC (C) (S)
Server
S1 1 GetServerDirectory (LOGICAL-DEVICE) TP N Y
Application association
S2 1 Associate TP N Y
S3 1 Abort TP N Y
S4 1 Release TP N Y
Logical device
S5 1 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP N Y
Logical node
S6 1 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP N Y
S7 1 GetAllDataValues TP N Y
Data
S8 1 GetDataValues TP N Y
S9 1 SetDataValues TP N Y
S10 1 GetDataDirectory TP N Y
S11 1 GetDataDefinition TP N Y
Data set
S12 1 GetDataSetValues TP N Y
S13 1 SetDataSetValues TP N N
S14 1 CreateDataSet TP N N
S15 1 DeleteDataSet TP N N
S16 1 GetDataSetDirectory TP N Y
Substitution
S17 1 SetDataValues TP N N
Setting group control

S18 1 SelectActiveSG TP N Y
S19 1 SelectEditSG TP N N
S20 1 SetSGValues TP N N
S21 1 ConfirmEditSGValues TP N N
S22 1 GetSGValues TP N N
S23 1 GetSGCBValues TP N Y

- 1043 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)

Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 1 Report TP N Y
S24-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S24-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S24- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S25 1 GetBRCBValues TP N Y
S26 1 SetBRCBValues TP N Y
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27 1 Report TP N Y
S27-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S27-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S27- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S28 1 GetURCBValues TP N Y
S29 1 SetURCBValues TP N Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 1 GetLCBValues TP N N
S31 1 SetLCBValues TP N N
Log
S32 1 QueryLogByTime TP N N
S33 1 QueryLogAfter TP N N
S34 1 GetLogStatusValues TP N N
Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE
S35 1 SendGOOSEMessage MC Y Y
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S36 1 GetGoReference TP N N
S37 1 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP N N
S38 1 GetGoCBValues TP N Y
S39 1 SetGoCBValues TP N Y
GSSE
S40 1 SendGSSEMessage MC N N Deprecated in Ed2
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S41 1 GetReference TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S42 1 GetGSSEElementNumber TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S43 1 GetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S44 1 SetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2

- 1044 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)

Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SV
S45 1 SendMSVMessage MC N N
Multicast Sampled Value Control Block
S46 1 GetMSVCBValues TP N N
S47 1 SetMSVCBValues TP N N
Unicast SV
S48 1 SendUSVMessage TP N N
Unicast Sampled Value Control Block
S49 1 GetUSVCBValues TP N N
S50 1 SetUSVCBValues TP N N
Control
S51 1 Select N Y
S52 1 SelectWithValue TP N Y
S53 1 Cancel TP N Y
S54 1 Operate TP N Y
S55 1 CommandTermination TP N Y
S56 1 TimeActivatedOperate TP N N
File transfer
S57 1 GetFile TP N Y
S58 1 SetFile TP N N
S59 1 DeleteFile TP N N
S60 1 GetFileAttributeValues TP N Y
S61 1 GetServerDirectory (FILE-SYSTEM) TP N Y
Time
T1 1 Time resolution of internal clock 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds
T2 1 Time accuracy of internal clock T1 T0 (10ms)
T1 (1ms)
T2 (100µs)
T3 (25µs)
T4 (4µs)
T5 (1µs)
T3 1 Supported TimeStamp resolution 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds

- 1045 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Edition1&2)
Protocol implementation extra information

for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850
communication interface in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “PIXIT template extracted from server test
procedures version 1.0 and updated according to TPCL version 1.2.6” published by
UCA International Using Group.

- 1046 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
1. Introduction
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of
the IEC 61850 interface in G2 Series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series
version equal & upper than A(G2M850-02-A).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10. The PIXIT entries contain information which is not available in the
PICS, MICS, TICS documents or SCL file.
Each table specifies the PIXIT for applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850-
10.
Note: Term “Ed” mentions the edition number of the IEC 61850. The editon2 (Ed2)
provides backward compatibility for legacy the Edition 1 (Ed1).
2. CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
3. PIXIT FOR DOCUMENTATION

ID Ed Description Value / Clarification
How to expose required firmware versions not
Do1 2 NA
present in the data model

- 1047 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
4. PIXIT FOR ASSOCIATION MODEL
Maximum number of clients that can set-up an
As1 1 6
association simultaneously
TCP_KEEPALIVE value. Configurable from 1 to 20 seconds

As2 1,2
The recommended range is 1..20s (default is 20 seconds)
From 10 to 30 seconds
As3 1,2 Lost connection detection time
(TCP_KEEPALIVE + 10sec.)
As4 - Authentication is not supported yet N
Transport selector N
Session selector N
What association parameters are necessary for
As5 1,2 Presentation selector N
successful association
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
If association parameters are necessary for

As6 1,2 N.A.
association, describe the correct values e.g.
Max MMS PDU size 16384

What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU Min MMS PDU size Not
As7 1,2
size limited. It depends
on a request.
Typically about 130 seconds
Please check LCD

Monitoring -> Communication
What is the maximum start up time after a
As8 1,2 -> 61850STAT as “Active”
power supply interrupt
(Note) The startup time depends
on the type of IED and
Its configuration/setting.
Does this device function only as test equipment?

(test equipment need not have a non-volatile
As9 1,2 N
configuration; but it cannot be part of the
substation automation system)

- 1048 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
5. PIXIT FOR SERVER MODEL
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
Y* Overflow
Y* OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are
Sr1 1,2 Y* Failure
supported (can be set by server)
N OldData
Y* Inconsistent
N Inaccurate (OnlyHz)
Source:
Y Process
* Supports only for GBU DCAI

Model
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
Y Oscillatory
Which status value (ST) quality bits are
Y Failure
Sr2 1,2 supported
Y OldData
(can be set by server)
Y Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
What is the maximum number of data object

Sr3 - Deprecated
references in one GetDataValues request
What is the maximum number of data object

Sr4 - Deprecated
references in one SetDataValues request
On Y
Blocked N
Sr5 1 Which Mode values are supported Test Y
Test/Blocked N
Off N
<additional items>
Front-to-back order. This might
The order of interpretation of write requests influence on write request
involving a list of variables. involving RptEna and other
variables in the same RCB.

- 1049 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
6. PIXIT for Data set model
Not limited by an internal
configuration parameter.
This IED does not have

What is the maximum number of data elements
Ds1 1 CreateDataSet service. But any
in one data set (compare ICD setting)
DataSet can be defined by using
engineering tool. The maximum
number depends on the memory
size of IED.
How many persistent data sets can be created by
Ds2 1 one or more clients N.A.
(this number includes predefined datasets)
How many non-persistent data sets can be
Ds3 1 N.A.
created by one or more clients
7. PIXIT FOR SUBSTITUTION MODEL

Not applicable
8. PIXIT FOR SETTING GROUP CONTROL MODEL

What is the number of supported setting groups 8
Sg1 1
for each logical device
Just SelectActiveSG service will be
supported according to PICS.
When an IED receives correct

SelectActiveSG request, the IED
returns Response+ within 10
seconds. And the ActSG and
LActTm variable are updated
What is the effect of when and how the non- within 10 seconds after the
Sg2 1,2 volatile storage is updated Response+. (These times are
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4) typical values, and they depend on
IED types and its
configurations/settings.)
After changing setting group

number with LED panel, you can
see new setting group with
GetSGCBValue service.
Sg3 1 Can multiple clients edit the same setting group N.A.
What happens if the association is lost while
Sg4 1 N.A.
editing a setting group
Sg5 1 Is EditSG value 0 allowed N.A.
When ResvTms is not present how long is an edit
Sg6 2 N.A.
setting group locked
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)

- 1050 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model

The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
Rp1 1
quality change Y
data update Y
The supported optional fields are sequence-numberY
general interrogation Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y data-
set-name Y data-
Rp2 1 reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y conf-
rev Y
segmentation Y
Can the server send segmented reports
(when not supported it is allowed to refuse an
Rp3 1,2 association with a smaller than minimum PDU Y
size)
Mechanism on second internal data change

notification of the same analogue data value Send report immediately
Rp4 1,2 within buffer period (Compare IEC 61850-7-2
$14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach

Rp5 1 (compare IEC 61850-7-2:2003 $14.2.1) Each URCB is visible to all clients
Rp6 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated

- 1051 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model (continued)
What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how For example, LLN0$ST$Health
many reports can be buffered can be stored 408 events.
Rp7 1,2
Pre-configured RCB attributes that are

Rp8 - dynamic, compare SCL report settings Deprecated
May the reported data set contain:

- structured data objects Y
Rp9 1 - data attributes Y
What is the scan cycle for binary events More than 1.6 milliseconds
Rp10 1,2
Is this fixed, configurable Configurable
Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a
Rp11 1 specific client in the SCL N
After restart of the server is the value of ConfRev Restored from original
restored from the original configuration or configuration
Rp12 2 retained prior to restart
Does the server accepts any client to

configure/enable a BRCB with ResvTms=‐1? N
Rp13 1,2 What fields are used to do the identification? AP‐Title N
AE‐Qualifier N
<other field> N
When BRCB.ResvTms is exposed, what is
default value for BRCB.ResvTms if client does N/A
not write (must be > 0)
Rp14 2 Or
When BRCB.ResvTms is not exposed, what is

the internal reservation time (must be >= 0) 60 seconds
<additional items>
Is it supported to change LLN0.Mod online? N
10. PIXIT FOR LOGGING MODEL
Not applicable

- 1052 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
11. PIXIT FOR GOOSE PUBLISH MODEL
Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the
Gp1 1,2 N
published GOOSE be set
What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish If the configuration is incorrect,
Gp2 1
configuration is incorrect the GOOSE isn’t published.
Published FCD supported common data classes All CDC/data types can be
Gp3 1,2
are published.
What is the slow retransmission time 60 seconds with TAL = 120sec.

Gp4 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
What is the fastest retransmission time 10 milli-sec. with TAL=30 milli-sec.

Gp5 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
Can the GOOSE publish be turned on / off by Deprecated

Gp6 -
using SetGoCBValues(GoEna) See PICS - SetGoCBValues
The device starts sending

Gp7 1,2 What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart GOOSE from stNum=1 and
sqNum=1.
May the GOOSE data set contain:

Gp8 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes Y
Y
Does Server or ICT refuse GOOSE payload
Gp9 1,2 Server Refuses the
dataset length greater than SCSM supports?
Configuration.
<additional items>
1,2 Is the DUT a test equipment N

- 1053 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL
What elements of a subscribed GOOSE Y destination MAC address
message are checked to decide the message is = as configured
valid and the allData values are accepted? If Y APPID
yes, describe the conditions. Y gocbRef
N timeAllowedtoLive
Notes: N datSet
the VLAN tag may be removed by a Y goID
ethernet switch and shall not be =as configured
Gs1 1,2 checked N t
the simulation flag shall always be N stNum
checked (Ed2) Y sqNum
Y simulation / test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
N numDatSetEntries
N out-of-order dataset
members
When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost [message does not arrive prior to
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last TAL]
received GOOSE message) GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE (=1100 0000
0000 0).
GOOSE status change is

accepted . The behavior can be
Gs2 1,2 changed by modifying PLC
logic.
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
* Supports only for GBU DCAI

Model
What is the behaviour when one or more [stNum is out-of-order, or missed]
subscribed GOOSE messages isn’t received or No fail will be detected.
syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE)
[sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
1000 0). After receiving message
with correct sqNum order, the
Gs3 1,2 quality information is set to
GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
You can assign the information to

any data attribute using our
configuration tool.
GOOSE status change is ignored

The behavior can be changed by
modifying PLC logic.

- 1054 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
What is the behavior when a subscribed Refer to Gs3
Gs4 1,2 GOOSE message is out-of-order
What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE subscribe quality

GOOSE message is duplicated information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
Gs5 1,2 1000 0).
GOOSE status change is accepted.

Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages Y, with the VLAN tag
Gs6 1 with/without the VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag
May the GOOSE data set contain:
Gs7 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes N
Subscribed FCD supported common data [Supported CDC]
classes are All, excepts measurand CDC (MV,
CMV, SAV, WYE, DEL, SEQ, HMV,
HWYE and HDEL)
[Supported data type]

Boolean
BitString
Integer
Unsigned Integer
Gs8 1,2
Other types
(TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will
be ignored by IED.
(NOTE)
But each data size shall be less
than 32 bits.
Dataset including measurand
CDC listed above cannot be
subscribed.
Are subscribed GOOSE with test=T (Ed1) / GOOSE subscribe quality

simulation=T (Ed2) accepted in test/simulation information will become
mode QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100
0000 0001 0).
Gs9 1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.

- 1055 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
Gs10 1,2 Max number of dataset members 64
<additional items>
Are subscribed GOOSE with ndsCom=T GOOSE subscribe quality
Accepted. information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INACCURATE (=1100 0000 0100 0).
1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.
13. PIXIT for GOOSE performance

Performance class P1(Ed.2) for
Gf1 1,2 System/LLN0$GO$goST
P3(Ed.2) for all other GOOSE
GOOSE ping-pong processing method Scan cycle based
Gf2 1,2
Application logic scan cycle (ms) Max. …. 200ms

Gf3 1,2
Min. 1.38ms in 60Hz
Maximum number of data attributes in The dataset for
GOOSE dataset (value and quality has to be System/LLN0$GO$goST is fixed,
counted as separate attributes) and it contains 32 data attributes.
All other dataset for GOOSE can be

configurable, and there is no
Gf4 1 particular limitation about the
maximum number of data
attributes. However, the dataset
definition shares the same dynamic
memory area as other data model
definitions such as LN, RCB, etc., so
it is affected by them.

- 1056 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL
What control models are supported DOns: Y
(compare ICD file enums for Ed2) SBOns: Y
Ct1 - DOes: Y
SBOes: Y
Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or Fixed
Ct2 1,2 dynamic
Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (compare Deprecated
Ct3 - PICS or SCL)
Is “operate-many” supported (compare Deprecated
Ct4 - sboClass)
Will the DUT activate the control output when Y
the test attribute is set in the SelectWithValue
Ct5 1 and/or Operate request (when N test procedure
Ctl2 is applicable)
What are the conditions for the time (T) Deprecated

attribute in the SelectWithValue and/or
Ct6 - Operate request
Is pulse configuration supported (compare Deprecated

Ct7 - pulseConfig)
What is the behaviour of the DUT when the Y synchrocheck

check conditions are set Y interlock-check
Both bits are checked.
(NOTE) The result of Opening

operation (ctval = F) is
Ct8 1 not Influenced by
SynchroCheck bit.
Is this behavior fixed, configurable, online This behavior is fixed.

changeable

- 1057 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL(Continued)
Which additional cause diagnosis are Y Unknown
supported Y Not-supported
Y Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
Y Blocked-by-synchrocheck
Y Command-already-in-execution
Y Blocked-by-health
Y 1-of-n-control
Y Abortion-by-cancel
Y Time-limit-over
Y Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-not-selected
Ct9 1,2
Edition 1 specific values:
Y Parameter-change-in-execution
Edition 2 specific values:

Y Object-already-selected
N No-access-authority
N Ended-with-overshoot
N Abortion-due-to-deviation
N Abortion-by-communication-loss
N Blocked-by-command
N None
Y Inconsistent-parameters
Y Locked-by-other-client
N Parameter-change-in-execution*
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Set orCat with unsupported value.
SelectWithValue request See below “Which origin categories
Ct10 1,2
are supported?”
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Send SELECT request to the control
Ct11 1,2 Select request object which is not mapped to
control application.

- 1058 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with DOns, SBOns, DOes:
Operate request [Example1]
Set orCat as unsupported value
-> Cause AddCause as “Not-
supported(1)”
[Example2]
Set ctlCat same as stVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Position-
reached(5)”
Ct12 1,2
SBOes: (Only Ed1)
Same as above. Or,
[Example3]
Set Oper parameters as different
parameter from the parameter of
SelectWithVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Parameter-
change-in-execution (6)”
Which origin categories are supported / N bay-control

accepted Y station-control
Y remote-control
N automatic-bay
Y automatic-station
Ct13 1,2 Y automatic-remote
N maintenance
N process
maintenance (7): N
process (8): N
What happens if the orCat value is not DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes:
Ct14 1,2 supported or invalid “test-not-ok” IED respond
Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue /DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes: N

Operate with the same control value as the
current status value
Ct15 1,2
Is this behavior configurable Fixed

Does the IED accept a select/operate on the DOns: N
same control object from 2 different clients at SBOns: N
the same time DOes: N
SBOes: N
Ct16 1,2
Note:
Commands are refused until
the new position is not reached
or a timeout does not occur.

- 1059 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue SBOns: N
from the same client when the control object is SBOes: N
Ct17 1 already selected (Tissue #334)
Is for SBOes the internal validation performed Yes for both SelectWithValue and
Ct18 1,2 during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate Operate
step
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off Deprecated

Ct19 - or [On-]Blocked (Compare PIXIT-Sr5)
Does the IED support local / remote operation

Ct20 1,2 Y
Does the IED send an InformationReport with SBOns: N
Ct21 1,2 LastApplError as part of the Operate response- DOns: N
for control with normal security
How to force a “parameter-change-in-
Ct22 2 execution” N.A.
How many SBOns/SBOes control objects can be SBOns: n=1

Ct23 1,2 selected at the same time? SBOes: n=1
Can a controllable object be forced to keep its Y

old state e.g. Internal Controllable Objects mayNeed PLC Logic customization.
Ct24 1,2 not be accessible to force this, whereas a switch
like Circuit Breaker outside the DUT can?
When CDC=DPC is supported, is it possible to

have DPC (Controllable Double Point) go to the
Ct25 1,2 Y
intermediate state? (00)
Name a DOes point (if any) with a finite The timeout time is setting.
operate timeout and specify the timeout One example,
Ct26 1,2 (in milliseconds) DPSY01-RST
Default value is 300[ms]
(10[ms]-1000[ms])
Does the IED support control objects with DOns: N
external signals? SBOns: N
Ct27 2 DOes: N
SBOes: N

- 1060 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
15. PIXIT FOR TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION MODEL
What time quality bits are supported (may be Y LeapSecondsKnown
set by the IED) N ClockFailure
Tm1 1 Y ClockNotSynchronized
Describe the behavior when the time server(s) On one time server: IED tries to
ceases to respond synchronize with another time
server.
On all time servers:

Tm2 1,2 The quality attribute
“ClockNotSynchronized” will be set
to TRUE.
What is the time server lost detection time The lost detection time depends on
the network condition.
How long does it take to take over the new time 10 seconds
Tm3 1,2 from time server
Tm4 1,2 When is the time quality bit “ClockFailure” set RTC is out-of-order
When is the time quality bit “Clock not It depends on the condition of
Tm5 1,2 Synchronized” set synchronization. Typically from 1 to
10 minutes.
Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to Deprecated
Tm6 - the configured scan cycle
Does the device support time zone and daylight Yes for both.
Tm7 1
saving
Which attributes of the SNTP response packet Y Leap indicator not equal
are validated to 3?
N Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is
equal to value sent by the
SNTP client as Transmit
Tm8 1,2 Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields
are checked for
reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
Do the COMTRADE files have local time or UTC
Tm9 1,2 UTC time and is this configurable Not Configurable

- 1061 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
16. PIXIT FOR FILE TRANSFER MODEL

What is structure of files and directories Support tree structure
Where are the COMTRADE files stored “/COMTRADE/” directory
(NOTE)
Ft1 1 At root directory in IED, the
directory “/COMTRADE/” is
Hidden. Therefore a client
shall directly access this
directory.
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are Not zipped
included in each zip file
Directory names are separated from the file
Ft2 1,2 name by “/”
The maximum file name size including path
Ft3 1 (recommended 64 chars) 64 chars
Ft4 1,2 Are directory/file name case sensitive N

Maximum file size for SetFile
Ft5 1,2 N.A
Is the requested file path included in the MMS N

Ft6 1 fileDirectory respond file name (Ed2: always complete path)
Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory

Ft7 1 request No
Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same

Ft8 1,2 time Y
Ft9 1,2 Which files can be deleted N.A.
17. PIXIT FOR SERVICE TRACKING MODEL

Which ACSI services are tracked by
Tr1 2 LTRK.GenTrk N.A

- 1062 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(TICS Edition2)
Tissues conformance statement (TICS)

of the IEC 61850 Ed.2 communication interface
in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “Test Procedures Change List (TPCL) version
1.2.6 for IEC 61850 Edition 2 server test procedures revision 1.0” published by
UCA International Users Group Testing Sub Committee in April 3, 2018.

- 1063 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(TICS Ed.2)
1. Introduction
This document provides a template for the Tissues conformance statement. According to the
UCA IUG QAP the Tissue conformance statement is required to perform a conformance test
and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series
version equal & upper than A (G2M850-02-A).
Note: Term “Ed” is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850. Editon2 (Ed2) provides
backward compatibility for legacy Edition 1 (Ed1).

- 1064 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(TICS Ed.2)
2. Mandatory Edition2 Tissues
Below tables give an overview of the applicable mandatory Tissues.
Part 6 Implemented
Description
Tissue Y/na
658 Tracking related features na
FCDA element cannot be a "functionally constrained
663 Y
logical node"
668 Autotransformer modeling na
687 SGCB ResvTms na
719 ConfDataSet - maxAttributes definition is confusing na
721 Log element name na
768 bType VisString65 is missing Y
779 object references na
788 SICS S56 from optional to mandatory na
789 ConfLdName as services applies to both server and client na
804 valKind and IED versus System configuration na
806 Max length of log name inconsistent between -6 and -7-2 na
807 Need a way to indicate if "Owner" present in RCB na
823 ValKind for structured data attributes na

824 Short addresses on structured data attributes na
825 Floating point value Y
845 SGCB ResvTms na
853 SBO and ProtNs na
855 Recursive SubFunction na
856 VoltageLevel frequency and phases na
857 Function/SubFunction for ConductingEquipment na
886 Missing 8-1 P-types na
901 tServices as AP or as IED element Y
936 SupSubscription parameter usage is difficult na

- 1065 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(TICS Ed.2)
2. Mandatory Edition2 Tissues (continued)
Part 7-1 Implemented
Description
Tissue Y/na
828 Data model namespace revision IEC 61850-7-4:2007[A] na
simulated GOOSE disappears after 1st appearance when
1151 na
LPHD.Sim = TRUE
1468 Re-use DO from other LN na

Description
Tissue Y/na
778 AddCause values – add value not-supported Y
780 What are unsupported trigger option at a control block? Y
783 TimOper Resp- ; add Authorization check na
786 AddCause values 26 and 27 are switched Y
820 Mandatory ACSI services (use for PICS template) Y
858 typo in enumeration ServiceType na
861 dchg of ConfRev attribute Y
876 GenLogiclNodeClass and SGCB, GoCB, MsvCB, UsvCB na
1038 Loss of Info Detection After Resynch Y
1050 GTS Phycomaddr definition in SCL Y
1062 Entrytime not used in CDC na
1071 Length of DO name Y

The sentence "The initial value of EditSG shall be 0", has to
1091 na
be stated in part 7.2 not in 8.1
1127 Missing owner attribute in BTS and UTS Y
1202 GI not optional na

Description
Tissue Y/na
697 persistent command / PulseConfig Y
698 Wrong case is BAC.dB attribute na

722 Units for 'h' and 'min' not in UnitKind enumeration. na
919 Presence Condition for sVC na
925 Presence of i or f attribute - Problem with writing na
926 Presence Conditions within RangeConfig na

- 1066 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(TICS Ed.2)
Description
Tissue Y/na
671 mistake in definition of Mod & Beh Y
674 CDC of ZRRC.LocSta is wrong na
676 Same data object name used with different CDC na
677 MotStr is used with different CDC in PMMS and SOPM LN classes na
679 Remove CycTrMod Enum na
680 SI unit for MHYD.Cndct na
681 Enum PIDAlg na
682 ANCR.ParColMod na
683 Enum QVVR.IntrDetMth na
685 Enum ParTraMod na
686 New annex H - enums types in XML na
694 Data object CmdBlk na
696 LSVS.St (Status of subscription) na
712 interpretation of quality operatorBlocked na
713 DO Naming of time constants in FFIL na
724 ANCR.Auto na
725 Loc in LN A-group na
734 LLN0.OpTmh vs. LPHD.OpTmh na
736 PFSign na
742 GAPC.Str, GAPC.Op and GAPC.StrVal na
743 CCGR.PmpCtl and CCGR.FanCtl na
744 LN STMP, EEHealth and EEName na
773 Loc, LocKey and LocSta YPSH and YLTC na
774 ITCI.LocKey na
800 Misspelling in CSYN na
802 CCGR and Harmonized control authority na
808 Presence condition of ZMoT.DExt and new DOs na
831 Setting of ConfRevNum in LGOS na
838 Testing in Beh=Blocked na
844 MFLK.PhPiMax, MFLK.PhPiLoFil, MFLK.PhPiRoot DEL->WYE na
Presence conditions re-assessing in case of derived
849 na
statistical calculation
877 QVUB -settings should be optional na
909 Remove ANCR.ColOpR and ColOpL na
920 Resetable Counter is NOT resetable na
932 Rename AVCO.SptVol to AVCO.VolSpt na
939 Change CDC for ANCR.FixCol na
991 LGOS: GoCBRef (as well as LSVS.SvCBRef) should be mandatory Y
1007 PTRC as fault indicator - Update of description required na
1044 TapChg in AVCO na
1077 Rename DOnames within LTIM na
Note: Tissues 675, 735, 772, 775, 776, 878 are not relevant for conformance testing

- 1067 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(TICS Ed.2)
Description
Tissue Y/na
784 Tracking of control (CTS) na
817 Fixed-length GOOSE float encoding Y
834 File dir name length 64 Y
951 Encoding of Owner attribute Y
1040 More associate error codes Y
1178 Select Response+ is non-null value Y

- 1068 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 5 IEC60870-5-103 interoperability

# Document names Pages
1 List of information (Time tagged Measurand) 1070
1.1 General information 1070
1.2 Events 1071
1.3 General command 1075
1.4 Measurand 1076
1.5 Legend 1077
2 Troubleshooting 1078
3 Semantics of information number 1081
3.1 In monitor direction 1081
3.2 In control direction 1083
4 Data ID information 1084

- 1069 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
1. Information lists
1.1 General information
Table 5-1.1
No. Descriptions Default values About defaults
The name of mapping file
Remark for setting
1 screened on LCD information I2GRB200C280
files
screen
Applicable time for the remote
Remote operation
2 operation after the reception of 4000
valid time [ms]
commands
Local operation valid Applicable time to operate the
3 4000
time [ms] IED using LCD panel
Cycle of transmission frame
4 Measurand period [s] 2
about measurement
Function type of Function type in system frame
5 220 It depends on IED models
System functions (FUN)
Signal No. for Used for a trigger about relative It is selected as a common one, which
4120018000001B6D
6 Relative time and time (RET) and calculations of is generated by ORed logics with start
(DIF.OPPH-ABC)
Fault number fault number and pick-up signals.

- 1070 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
1.2 Events
Table 5-1.2
GRB200
Type
INF Semantics Contents GI COT Function_ID Data_ID
ID
Auto-reclose Not applicable in

16 OK 1 1, 9 Not supported in GRB200 IED
active GRB
11 Not supported in GRB200 IED
Tele-protection Not applicable in

active GRB
OK status for the
Protection
18 operation of the OK 1 1, 9 No default setting.
active
relays
12 No default setting.
201B013100041001
'Trip LED reset' 0x201B0
19 LED reset NA 1 1 (LED-04); inverted signal
signal is sent. (LED)
; DPI Off: On=2: –
11
12 Issued by the general commands described later.
Forbidding to
Monitor 304001 3100003602
send the IED 0x304001
20 direction OK 1 9,11 (103BLK)
message for the (103SLV)
blocked ; DPI Off: On=1: 2
upper level
304001 3100003601
Available of test 0x304001
21 Test mode OK 1 9,11 (103TST)
mode (103SLV)
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
Local parameter
22 OK 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
setting
304001 8020011001
Available for 0x304001
23 Characteristic1 OK 1 1, 9 (AG1STAT)
group setting #1 (103SLV)
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
11
304001 8120021001
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
11
304001 8220031001
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
11
304001 8220031001
; DPI Off: On=1: 2

- 1071 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
GRB200
Type
ID
11
Reception of the
signal#1
27 Auxiliary input1 OK 1 1, 9 No default setting.
generated at an
Aux. contact
Reception of the
signal#2
generated at an
Aux. contact
Reception of the
signal#3
generated at an
Aux. contact
Reception of the
signal#4
generated at an
Aux. contact
Supervision of the
Measurand current of the
32 OK 1 1, 9 No default setting.
supervision I zero-sequence and
the CT error
Supervision of the
Measurand
33 voltage of the OK 1 1, 9 No default setting.
supervision V
zero-sequence
Supervision of the
Phase sequence
35 voltage of the OK 1 1, 9 No default setting.
supervision
negative-sequence
Trip circuit Supervision of a
36 OK 1 1, 9 No default setting.
supervision trip circuit
Status on the OC
I>> back-up
37 relay being in DT OK 1 1, 9 No default setting.
operation
mode
38 VT fuse failure VTF OK 1 1, 9 Not supported in GRB200 IED
Tele-protection Communication
disturbed fail
220001 3110121001
0x220001
46 Group warning minor error OK 1 1,9 (MINR_ERR)
(MNT_LOGIC)
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
220001 3110111001
0x220001
47 Group alarm serious error OK 1 1, 9 (SERI_ERR)
(MNT_LOGIC)
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
Earth fault in
48 Earth Fault L1 OK 1 1, 9 Not supported in GRB200 IED
phase-A
Earth fault in
phase-B
Earth fault in
phase-C
Earth Fault Earth fault in the
Fwd, i.e. line forward direction
Earth Fault Earth fault in the
Rev, i.e. busbar reverse direction

- 1072 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
GRB200
Type
ID
4F2A01 8000031B60
Relay operation in 0x4F2A01
64 Start/pick-up L1 OK 1 1, 9 (OPT.PHASE-A)
phase-A (DBP_TRC_BU)
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
4F2A01 8000031B61
65 Start/pick-up L2 OK 1 1, 9 (OPT.PHASE-B)
phase-B (DBP_TRC_BU)
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
4F2A01 8000031B62
66 Start/pick-up L3 OK 1 1, 9 (OPT.PHASE-C)
phase-C (DBP_TRC_BU)
; DPI Off: On=1: 2
Relay operation in
67 Start/pick-up N OK 1 1, 9 Not supported in GRB200 IED
phase-N
Trip operation 4F2A01 8B00011B6B
0x4F2A01
68 General trip performed in the NA 2 1 (GEN.TRIP)
(DBP_TRC_BU)
three-phase ; DPI Off: On=1: 2
Trip operation in
69 Trip L1 NA 2 1 No default setting.
phase-A
Trip operation in
phase-B
Trip operation in
phase-C
Status on the OC
Trip I>>(back-
72 relay being in NA 2 1 No default setting.
up operation)
IDMT mode
Fault location
determined (the
Fault location X condition of
73 NA 4 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
in ohms sending events
are the same as
the FMR)
Fault occurred in
Fault forward/
74 the forward NA 2 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
line
direction
Fault occurred in
Fault reverse/
75 the reverse NA 2 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
busbar
direction
Tele-protection
Sending a carrier
76 Signal NA 2 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
signal
transmitted
Tele-protection Reception of a
Signal received carrier signal
78 Zone1 Zone1 trip NA 2 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
The OR signal
General
84 generated by OK 2 1,9 No default setting.
start/pick-up
operated relays
85 Breaker failure CBF relay trip NA 2 1 No default setting.
Trip measuring
system L1

- 1073 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
GRB200
Type
ID
Trip measuring
system L2
Trip measuring
88 NA 2 1 No default setting.
system L3
Trip measuring
89 NA 2 1 No default setting.
system E
OC trip in the
90 Trip I> NA 2 1 No default setting.
IDMT mode
OC trip in the DT
91 Trip I>> NA 2 1 No default setting.
mode
EF trip in the
92 Trip IN> NA 2 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
IDMT mode
EF trip in the DT
93 Trip IN>> NA 2 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
mode
128 CB ‘on’ by AR NA 1 1 Not supported in GRB200 IED
CB ‘on’ by long-
time AR
130 AR blocked OK 1 1, 9 Not supported in GRB200 IED

- 1074 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
1.3 General commands

Table 5-1.3
GRB200
Valid time Time Out
Interpretation Type ID INF Function_ID Data_ID
[ms] [ms]
On/Off switch for protection functions 20 18 NA NA No default setting.
0x304001 (304001 8010006422)
Resetting Trip LED 20 19 1000 1200
(103slave) LEDRST_CMD
0x304001 （304001 8020016422）
Change for the group setting #1 20 23 1000 1200
(103slave) AG1CMD
0x304001 (304001 8120026422)
(103slave) AG2CMD
0x304001 (304001 8220036422)
(103slave) AG3CMD
0x304001 (304001 8320046422)
(103slave) AG4CMD

- 1075 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
1.4 Measurands
Table 5-1.4
Type Lower Upper Coefficient

INF Semantics DataID Remarks
ID Limit Limit ‡
144 I 3
I 3
145
V 3
I 3 These values aren’t assigned here because
V 3 Not supported in GRB200 IED there aren’t appropriate definitions at
146
P 3 INF144–INF147 for measurement.
Q 3
IN 3
147
VEN 3
I L1 9 711009 4301101050 Ia-BU1 0 4096 1706.666667
‘Ia’, ‘Ib’, or ‘Ic’ are termed for respective
I L2 9 711009 4301101052 Ib-BU1 0 4096 1706.666667
BUs. See page 1084.
I L3 9 711009 4301101054 Ic-BU1 0 4096 1706.666667
V L1 9 Not set This Data ID has not been set because a
V L2 9 Not set unique metering item is dependent on a
148
V L3 9 Not set model.
P 9 Not supported in GRB200 IED
Q 9 Not supported in GRB200 IED
This Data ID is assigned commonly for the
f 9 7110094 30608105C f 0 4096 68.26666667
calculation of frequency functions.
†Applicable to change or improvement.
‡Coefficients are derived with the following equations, and measurement values are
transferred by the multiplication of Data ID values (w.r.t secondary value) by the coefficients:
(1) Coefficients for currents (IL1, IL2, IL3 or I1, I2, I0):
4096
Coefficient=
In×2.4
where, In: Rated secondary current
For example—in In=1A—we can have a coefficient: 1706.666667.
(2) Coefficients for voltages (VL1, VL2, VL3 or V1, V2, V0):
4096
Coefficient=
Vn⁄ ×1.2
√3
where, Vn: Rated line voltage (secondary; phase-phase)
For example—in Vn=110V—we can have a coefficient: 53.74606142.
(3) Coefficients for a frequency (f):
4096
Coefficient=
fr×1.2
where, fr: Rated frequency
For example—in fr=50Hz—we can have a coefficient: 68.26666667.

- 1076 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation
Type ID: Type IDentification
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type
DPI: Double-point Information
DCO: Double Command

- 1077 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
2. Troubleshooting
Table 5-2.1
No Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation
.
Object† Procedure
1 Communicati Address setting is incorrect. Match address setting between BCU

on trouble BCU and relay.
(IEC103 RY Avoid duplication of address with
communicati other relay.
on is not
available.) Transmission baud rate BCU Match transmission baud rate
setting is incorrect. RY setting between BCU and relay.
Start bit, stop bit and parity Go over the following settings via
settings of data that BCU
transmits to relay is incorrect. the BCU. Relay setting is fixed in
accordance with the following
BCU settings.
- Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even‡
RS485 or optic cable - Check the connection port.

interconnection is incorrect. - Check the interconnection for
Cable RS485 A/B/COM
- Check the send and received
interconnection for the optic cable.
The setting of converter is In the event of using G1IF2, change

incorrect. (RS485/optic the DIPSW setting in reference to
Conver
conversion is executed with INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ter
the transmission channel, (6F2S0794).
etc.)
The relationship between Check the following;

logical “0/1” of the signal and Logical0 : Sig.on
BCU
Sig.on/off is incorrect. (In the
Logical1:Sig.off
event of using optic cable)
Terminal resistor is not Add terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to

provided. (Especially when cable both ends of RS 485 cable.
the RS485 cable is long.)

- 1078 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

.
Object† Procedure
Relay cannot receive the Check to ensure that there is a

requirement frame from margin of more than 15ms between
BCU. receiving the reply frame from the
(The timing coordination of BCU relay and transmitting the next
sending and receiving switch requirement frame from the BCU.
control is irregular in half-
duplex communication.)
The requirement frame from Check to set the time-out for the
the BCU and the reply frame reply frame from the relay.
from relay contend. Time-out setting: more than 100ms
(The sending and receiving BCU (acceptable value of response time
timing coordination is 50ms plus margin)
irregular in half-duplex
communication.)
2 HMI does not The relevant event sending Change the event sending condition
display condition is not valid. (signal number) of the IEC103
IEC103 event configurator if there is a setting
RY
on the SAS error. When the setting is correct,
side. check the signal condition using the
programmable LED, etc.
The relevant event Match the relevant event

Information Number (INF) Information Number (INF) or
RY
and/or Function Type (FUN) Function Type (FUN) between the
SAS
may be different between the relay and SAS.
relay and SAS.
The relay is not initialised Check the sum value of the IEC103
after writing the IEC103 setting data on the LCD screen.
configurator setting. RY When differing from the sum value
on the IEC103 configurator,
initialise the relay.
It changes to blocked mode. Change the setting

RY
[RS485_1_BRATE_SW] to Normal.

- 1079 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

.
Object† Procedure
3 Time can be BCU does not transmit the Transmit the time synchronisation
BCU
not time synchronisation frame. frame.
synchronised
The settling of the time Change the settling of time
with IEC103
synchronisation source is set synchronisation source to IEC.
RY
communicati
to other than IEC.
on.
†Note:BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay

‡Note:The user should set “even” for the parity setting. Not allowed to set except “even”.

- 1080 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
3.3. Semantics of information number in IEC 60870-5-103

3.3.1 In monitor direction
Table 5-3.1 Status indications in monitor direction
INF Description GI TYP COT FUN (typical)
<16> : auto-recloser active x 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 t(z), I, IL
<17> : teleprotection x 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 t(z), I
<18> : protection active x 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 t(z), I, IT, IL
<19> : LED reset  1 1,7,11,12,20,21 t(z), I, IT, IL
<20> : monitor direction blocked x 1 9,11 t(z), I, IT, IL
<21> : test mode x 1 9,11 t(z), I, IT, IL
<22> : local parameter setting x 1 9,11 t(z), I, IT, IL
<23> : characteristic 1 x 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 t(z)
<27> : auxiliary input 1 x 1 1,7,9,11 t(z), I, IT, IL
Table 5-3.2 Supervision indications in monitor direction

<32> : measurand supervision I x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I
<33> : measurand supervision V x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I
<35> : phase sequence supervision x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I
<36> : trip circuit supervision x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I, IT, IL
<37> : I back-up operation x 1 1,7,9 t(z)
<38> : VT fuse failure x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I
<39> : teleprotection disturbed x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I, IL
<46> : group warning x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I, IT, IL
<47> : group alarm x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I, IT, IL
VT:voltage transformer
Table 5-3.3 Earth fault indications in monitor direction

INF Description GI TYP COT FUN(typical)
<48> : earth fault L1 x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I
<51> : earth fault forward, i.e. line x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I
<52> : earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I

- 1081 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 5-3.4 Fault indications in monitor direction

INF Description GI TYP COT FUN(typical)
<64> : start /pick-up L1 x 2 1,7,9 t(z), I, IL
<67> : start /pick-up N  2 1,7,9 t(z), I, IL
<68> : general trip  2 1,7 t(z), I, IT, IL
<69> : trip L1  2 1,7 t(z), I, IT, IL
<70> : trip L2  2 1,7 t(z), I, IT, IL
<71> : trip L3  2 1,7 t(z), I, IT, IL
<72> : trip I (back-up operation)  2 1,7 t(z)
<73> : fault location X in ohms  4 1,7 t(z), I
<74> : fault forward/line  2 1,7 t(z), I
<75> : fault reverse/busbar  2 1,7 t(z), I
teleprotection signal
<76> :  2 1,7 t(z), I
transmitted
<77> : teleprotection signal received  2 1,7 t(z), I
<78> : zone 1  2 1,7 t(z)
<79> : zone 2  2 1,7 t(z)
<80> : zone 3  2 1,7 t(z)
<81> : zone 4  2 1,7 t(z)
<82> : zone 5  2 1,7 t(z)
<83> : zone 6  2 1,7 t(z)
<84> : general start/pick-up x 2 1,7,9 t(z), I, IT, IL
<85> : breaker failure  2 1,7 t(z), I
<86> : trip measuring system L1  2 1,7 IT
<89> : trip measuring system E  2 1,7 IT
<90> : trip I  2 1,7 I
<91> : trip I  2 1,7 I
<92> : trip IN  2 1,7 I
<93> : trip IN  2 1,7 I
Table 5-3.5 Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction

<128> : CB ‘on’ by AR*  1 1,7 t(z), I, IL
<129> : CB ‘on’ by long-time AR*  1 1,7 t(z), I, IL
<130> : AR blocked* x 1 1,7,9 t(z), I, IL
*CB:circuit breaker; AR:auto-recloser

- 1082 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 5-3.6 Measurands in monitor direction

<144> : measurand I  3.1 2,7 t(z), I
<145> : measurand I, V  3.2 2,7 t(z), I
<146> : measurand I, V, P, Q  3.3 2,7 t(z)
<147> : measurand IN, VEN  3.4 2,7 t(z), I
measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P,
<148> :  9 2,7 t(z)
Q, f
3.3.2 In control direction

Table 5-3.7 Status indications in monitor direction
INF Description COM TYP COT FUN (typical)
<16> : auto-recloser on/off ON/OFF 20 20 t(z), I, IL
<17> : Teleprotection on/off ON/OFF 20 20 t(z), I
<18> : protection on/off ON/OFF 20 20 t(z), I, IT, IL
<19> : LED reset ON 20 20 t(z), I, IT, IL
<23> : active characteristic 1 ON 20 20 t(z)

- 1083 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
4. Data ID information for IEC 60870-5-103


4302001050 VaA Va measurement secondary (ZoneA)
4302001052 VbA Vb measurement secondary (ZoneA)
4302001054 VcA Vc measurement secondary (ZoneA)
4302011050 VaB Va measurement secondary (ZoneB)
4302011052 VbB Vb measurement secondary (ZoneB)
4302011054 VcB Vc measurement secondary (ZoneB)
4302021050 VaC Va measurement secondary (ZoneC)
4302021052 VbC Vb measurement secondary (ZoneC)
4302021054 VcC Vc measurement secondary (ZoneC)
4302031050 VaD Va measurement secondary (ZoneD)
4302031052 VbD Vb measurement secondary (ZoneD)
4302031054 VcD Vc measurement secondary (ZoneD)
4302041050 VaE Va measurement secondary (ZoneE)
4302041052 VbE Vb measurement secondary (ZoneE)
4302041054 VcE Vc measurement secondary (ZoneE)
4302051050 VaF Va measurement secondary (ZoneF)
4302051052 VbF Vb measurement secondary (ZoneF)
4302051054 VcF Vc measurement secondary (ZoneF)
4302061050 VaG Va measurement secondary (ZoneG)
4302061052 VbG Vb measurement secondary (ZoneG)
4302061054 VcG Vc measurement secondary (ZoneG)
4302071050 VaH Va measurement secondary (ZoneH)
4302071052 VbH Vb measurement secondary (ZoneH)
4302071054 VcH Vc measurement secondary (ZoneH)
4301101050 Ia Ia-BU1 measurement secondary
4301101052 Ib Ib-BU1 measurement secondary
4301101054 Ic Ic-BU1 measurement secondary

- 1084 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

43011a1050 Ia Ia-BU11 measurement secondary
43011a1052 Ib Ib-BU11 measurement secondary
43011a1054 Ic Ic-BU11 measurement secondary
43011b1050 Ia Ia-BU12 measurement secondary
43011b1052 Ib Ib-BU12 measurement secondary
43011b1054 Ic Ic-BU12 measurement secondary
43011c1050 Ia Ia-BU13 measurement secondary
43011c1052 Ib Ib-BU13 measurement secondary
43011c1054 Ic Ic-BU13 measurement secondary
43011d1050 Ia Ia-BU14 measurement secondary
43011d1052 Ib Ib-BU14 measurement secondary
43011d1054 Ic Ic-BU14 measurement secondary
43011e1050 Ia Ia-BU15 measurement secondary
43011e1052 Ib Ib-BU15 measurement secondary
43011e1054 Ic Ic-BU15 measurement secondary
43011f1050 Ia Ia-BU16 measurement secondary
43011f1052 Ib Ib-BU16 measurement secondary
43011f1054 Ic Ic-BU16 measurement secondary

- 1085 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)


- 1086 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)


- 1087 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)


- 1088 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 6 Ordering

- 1089 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
CU (Central Unit)
Positions
[Hardware selection] 7 8 - 9 A B - C D - E F - G H - J K L
Configurations G R B 2 0 0 - - - C - - 3 0 - 0 0
Central Unit C
Application of power system†1

Without Voltage inputs (VCT unmounted) 0
With Voltage inputs for 4 Zones (VCT21B× 1) 1
With Voltage inputs for 8 Zones (VCT21B ×2) 2
System Frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
DC rated voltage
110-250Vdc†2 1
24-60Vdc 3
Outline
Standard LCD,1/1case×19”rack;flush/rack mount 4
Large LCD,1/1case×19”rack;flush/rack mount 8
BI/BO module
To select modules, see Page 1097, or 1098
BI/BO terminal Type

Compression plug type terminal 0
Max. numbers of CU-BU communication ports
8 ports 1
16 ports 2
24 ports 3
32 ports 4
40 ports 5
48 ports 6
56 ports 7
64 ports 8
Network / Time Sync. module†3

To select modules, see Page 1091 or 1092
Software functions
See Page 1101 3
Note:
†1 Selection of VCT is dependent on Software. If ‘Without Voltage input’ is chosen, software ‘31’
is only possible to select (see Page 1101).
†2 Binary inputs circuits (BI) are intended to use with DC power source only. So is the supervision
function of power supply module. Accordingly, when AC power supply (100–220Vac) is applied
on the PSW, disable the supervision function of power supply in order that it will not issue
spurious alarms.
† It can be selected using the table on Page 1091 or 1092.
3
Tips:
The user can find an actual ordering number from LCD information menu. (See Chapter Technical
description (CU or BU): User interface: Information sub-menu)

- 1090 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
CU (Central Unit)
Positions
Configurations G R B 2 0 0 - C
Pos. Number (and Location†1) of communication modules

Fiber LAN for Communication
100Base- 100Base-TX 1000base- redundancy†2
EF RS485 optic for /1000Base-T
Local IRIG-B
IEC103 FX LX PC†3
14 1(C11)
34 1(C11) 1(C15)
46 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
66 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
4C 1(C13) 1(C11)
6C 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
7D 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
9D 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
4G 1(C13) 1(C11)
6G 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
7H 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
9H 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
1J 1(C11)
3J 1(C11) 1(C15)
1K 1(C11)
3K 1(C11) 1(C15)
4L 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
6L 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
4M 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
6M 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
4N 1(C13) 1(C11)
6N 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
7P 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
9P 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
4Q 1(C13) 1(C11)
6Q 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
7R 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
9R 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
4S 1(C13) 1(C11)
6S 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
7T 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
9T 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
4U 1(C13) 1(C11)
6U 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
7V 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
9V 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
E1 1(C13) 1(C11)
E2 1(C13) 1(C11)
E4 1(C11) 1(C13)
E6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
EC 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C13)
ED 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
EG 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C13)
EH 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
EJ 1(C11) 1(C12)
EK 1(C11) 1(C12)
EL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
EM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
EN 1(C15) 1(C11)
EP 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby

- 1091 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Pos. Number (and Location†1) of communication modules

Fiber LAN for Communication
100Base- 100Base-TX 1000base- redundancy†2
EF RS485 optic for /1000Base-T
Local IRIG-B
IEC103 FX LX PC†3
EQ 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C12)
ER 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
ES 1(C15) 1(C11)
ET 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
EU 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C12)
EV 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For Hot-standby
G1 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
G2 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
G4 1(C11) 1(C13) 1(C15)
G6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
GJ 1(C11) 1(C12) 1(C15)
GK 1(C11) 1(C12) 1(C15)
GL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
GM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) For Hot-standby
L6 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
N6 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LD 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
ND 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LH 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
NH 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LL 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
NL 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LM 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
NM 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LP 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
NP 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LR 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
NR 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LT 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
NT 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LV 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
NV 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
S6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
U6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
SD 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
SH 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
SL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
UL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
SM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
UM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
SP 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
SR 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
ST 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
SV 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
{end of table}
†1Note: Module locations can be identified with a positon codes in brackets. For example,
single 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module is mounted at C11 when “14” code is chosen
at Positon E&F. To identify the locations C11—C15 in IED, see page 559.
†2Note: Communication redundancy, PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby, is applicable when a
dedicated LAN module is ordered.
†3Note: ‘LAN for Local PC’ is fixed in 100Base-TX/1000-Base-T, and is designed for local
PC engineering tool. It is not designed for the network such as IEC61850, Hot-
Standby, PRP, etc.

- 1092 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
CU (Central Unit)
Positions
[Software selection] 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R B 2 0 0 - 0 3 - -
Application of power system
Assignment at ‘7’ position†1
Function block
See Function table†2
Network / Time Sync. module
Assignment at ‘E’ position†3
Assignment at ‘F’ position†3
Protocol†4
IEC 60870-5-103+IEC 61850 1
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Language
English E
†1 A code has to be chosen at ‘7’ positon in ‘Hardware selection’ (see Page 1090).
†2 A code has to be chosen by seeing ‘Functional tables’ (see Page 1101).
†3 A code has to be chosen at ‘E’ and ‘F’ positons in ‘Hardware selection’ (see Page 1091 or 1092).
†4 If the user requires PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby operation, choose a dedicated LAN module
for PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby (see Page 1091 and 1092).
†5 Choice has been made at ‘9’ positon of ‘Hardware selection’ on Page 1090.

- 1093 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU (Bay Unit)
Positions
Configurations G R B 2 0 0 - - - B 0 - - 3 0 - 0
Bay Unit B

With four Current inputs(VCT32B× 1)†1 1
With four Current inputs(VCT22B× 1)†2 2
Network module
See Page 1097, 1098, or 1099
System Frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
AC rated current
1A 1
5A 2
DC rated voltage
110-250 Vdc†3 1
24-60 Vdc 3
Outline
Standard LCD,1/3case×19”rack; flush mounting 1
Standard LCD,1/2case×19”rack; flush mounting 2
LargeLCD,1/2 case×19”rack; flush mounting 6
Standard LCD,1/3case×19”rack; rack mounting†4 E
Standard LCD,1/2case×19”rack; rack mounting†4 F
Large LCD,1/3 case×19”rack; rack mounting†4 H
Large LCD,1/2 case×19”rack; rack mounting†4 J
BI/BO modules
See Page 1097, 1098 or 1099
BI/BO terminal type

Compression plug type terminal 0
Software function
See Page 1101 3
Note
†1VCT32 can be chosen when 1, E, or H is selected at Position ‘9’. It is for 1/3 case.
†2VCT22 can be chosen when 2, 6, F, or J is selected at Position ‘9’. It is for 1/2 case.
†3Operation of PWS module is not guaranteed in AC power source (100 –220Vac).
†4Mounting kits can be supplied if EP-201–206 optional accessories have been ordered.

- 1094 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU (Bay Unit)
Positions
Configurations G R B 2 0 0 - B
Pos. Number (and Location†1) of communication modules Communication

EF 100Base-FX 100Base-TX/1000Base-T 1000base- LX LAN for Local PC†3 redundancy†2
14 1(C11)
46 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
1J 1(C11)
1K 1(C11)
4L 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
4M 2(C11,C12) For Hot-standby
EJ 1(C11) 1(C12)
EK 1(C11) 1(C12)
L6 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LL 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
LM 2(C11,C12) For PRP/HSR/RSTP
†1Note: Module locations can be identified with the positon codes in brackets. For
example, single 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module is mounted at C11 when “14”
code is chosen at Positon E&F. To identify the locations C11—C15 in IED, see
page 726.
†2Note: When the user requires PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby, choice a dedicated LAN
module for PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby.
†3Note: ‘LAN for Local PC’ is ruled in 100Base-TX/1000-Base-T, and is designed for PC
engineering tools. It is not designed for Network such as IEC61850, Hot-Standby,
PRP, etc.

- 1095 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU (Bay Unit)
Positions
[Software selection] 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R B 2 0 0 - 0 3 - 2 -

Function block
See Function table†2
Communication for Remote/Time Synch.
Assignment at ‘E’ position†3
Assignment at ‘F’ position†3
Protocol†4
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Language
English E
†1Choice has been made at ‘7’ positon in ‘Hardware selection’ on Page 1094
†2Choice can be made by seeing ‘Functional tables’ on Page 1101.
†3Choice has been made at ‘E’ and ‘F’ positons of ‘Hardware selection’ on Page 1094.
†4 If the user requires PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby operation, choose a dedicated LAN module
for PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby (see Page 1095).
†5Choice has been made at ‘9’ positon of ‘Hardware selection’ on Page 1094.

- 1096 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Number of BI/BO
1 x I/O module for BU (1/3 size case and 1/2 size case)
1 x I/O module for CU (1/1 size case)
Number of BI/BO
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Ordering No.
Hybrid BO
Common Configuration
(Position “A” & “B”)
Fast-BO
BO
BI
BI
7 - - - 6 4 - 11 1xBIO1A
12 - - - 3 2 - 12 1xBIO2A
8 - - 6 - 2 - 13 1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) Not applicable
18 - - - - - - 15 1xBI1A
- 12 - - - - - 16 1xBI2A
- - 32 - - - - 17 1xBI3A
- - - - 6 12 - 18 1xBO1A

- 1097 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
2 x I/O modules for BU (1/2 size case)

2 x I/O modules for CU (1/1 size case)
Number of BI/BO
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Ordering No.
Hybrid BO
Configuration
Common
Fast-BO
BO
BI
BI
- - 32 - 6 12 - 21 1xBI3A+1xBO1A
7 - 32 - 6 4 - 22 1xBI3A+1xBIO1A
12 - 32 - 3 2 - 23 1xBI3A+1xBIO2A
18 - - - 6 12 - 24 1xBI1A+1xBO1A
25 - - - 6 4 - 25 1xBI1A+1xBIO1A
30 - - - 3 2 - 26 1xBI1A+1xBIO2A
8 - - 6 6 14 - 27 1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
15 - - 6 6 6 - 28 1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
7 - - - 12 16 - 29 1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
16 - - 12 - 4 - 2A 2xBIO3A
- - 32 - - - 16 2B 1xBI3A+1xBO2A
- 12 - - 6 12 - 2C 1xBI2A +1xBO1A
20 - - 6 3 4 - 2E 1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
12 - - - 9 14 - 2F 1xBO1A+1xBIO2A
8 12 - 6 - 2 - 2G 1xBI2A+1xBIO3A

- 1098 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
3 x I/O modules for BU (1/2 size case)

Number of BI/BO
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable) Ordering No.
Hybrid BO
Common
Configuration
Fast-BO
BO
BI
BI
15 - - 6 12 18 - 31 1xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
20 - - 6 9 16 - 32 1xBO1A+1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
23 - - 12 6 8 - 33 1xBIO1A+2xBIO3A
26 - - 6 6 14 - 34 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
8 - 32 6 6 14 - 35 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
24 - - 18 - 6 - 36 3xBIO3A
25 - - - 12 16 - 37 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
36 - - - 6 12 - 39 2xBI1A+1xBO1A
- 24 - - 6 12 - 3A 2xBI2A+1xBO1A
7 - 32 - 6 4 16 3C 1xBI3A+1xBIO1A+1xBO2A
7 - 32 - 12 16 - 3D 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - 32 - 6 12 16 3E 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
16 - - 12 6 16 - 3G 1xBO1A+2xBIO3A
26 - - 6 6 14 – 3J 1xBO1A+1xBIO3A+1xBI1A
- - 64 - 6 12 - 3K 2xBI3A+1xBO1A
14 - 32 - 12 8 - 3L 1xBI3A+2xBIO1A
- - 96 - - - - 3M 3xBI3A
8 12 - 6 6 14 - 3N 1xBI2A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 32 - 12 24 - 3P 1xBI3A + 2xBO1A
36 - - - - - 16 3Q 2xBI1A+ 1xBO2A
16 12 - 12 - 4 - 3S 1xBI2A+2xBIO3A
18 12 - - 6 12 - 3T 1xBI1A+1xBI2A+1xBO1A

- 1099 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Optional accessories
[Label sheet]
Accessory names Quantity per order Codes
Pocket sheet label for LEDs(White) 10 EP-211-00
Pocket sheet label for function keys(White) 10 EP-212-00
[Rating jumpers]
Jumpers to change rated current 20 EP-221
[Monitoring plugs]
Plugs for monitoring jacks on the front 4 EP-222
[Rear terminal remover]

Hook tool for detaching rear terminal 1 EP-235
[Engineering tools]
GR-TIEMS 1 license EP-251
PLC-EDITOR 1 license EP-261
[Mounting kits for 19” size rack]

Joint kits for single 1/3 case 1 set EP-201
Joint kits for two 1/3 cases 1 set EP-202
Joint kits for three 1/3 cases 1 set EP-203
Joint kits for single 1/2 case 1 set EP-204
Joint kits for two 1/2 case 1 set EP-205

- 1100 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
[Functional table]
CU (Central Unit)
Ordering No.
Function
Protection function/ Control function (Position “G & T”)
Block
31†1 32†2
87 Phase-segregated current differential protection ● ●
DIF CTF CT failure detection by Id – ●
– Differential current monitoring ● ●
CBF 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection ● ●
EFP – End fault protection ● ●
COMTP – Command trip function ● ●
FS FS Fail-safe function (Voltage check function) – ●
LEDR LED reset ● ●
Gen.
GCNT Counter function ● ●
control
MDCTRL Mode control function ● ●
Control
SOFTSW Software switch controller ● ●
app.
†1Note: ’31’ is selectable when the customer has chosen ‘0 at Position’7’ (see page 1090).
†2Note: ’32’ is selectable when the customer has chosen ‘1’ or ‘2’ at Position ‘7’ (see page 1090).
BU (Bay Unit)
Ordering No.
Function
Protection function (Position “G & T”)
Block
32†3 34†4
87 Phase-segregated current differential protection ● ●
DIF CTF CT failure detection by Id – ●
– Differential current monitoring ● ●
CBF 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection ● ●
EFP – End fault protection ● ●
COMTP – Command trip function ● ●
50 Non-directional definite time over-current protection ● ●
OC
51 Non-directional inverse time over-current protection ● ●
50N Non-directional definite time earth fault over-current protection ● ●
EF
51N Non-directional inverse time earth fault over-current protection ● ●
FS FS Fail-safe function (Voltage check function) – ●
LEDR LED reset ● ●
Gen.
GCNT Counter function ● ●
control
MDCTRL Mode control function ● ●
SPOS Single position device function ● ●
SOFTSW Software switch controller ● ●
OPTR Operation time reset ● ●
Ctrl and TOTALTIM Total time measurement ● ●
monitori INTERLOCK Software interlock ● ●
ng app. DPOS Double position device function ● ●
TPOS Three position device function ● ●
GENBI Event detection function for general BIs ● ●
ASEQ Automatic sequence control function ● ●
†3Note: 32 has to be selected for BU, when 31†1 has been selected at G&T for CU.
†4Note: 34 has to be selected for BU, when 32†2 has been selected at G&T for CU.

- 1101 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 7 Technical data

- 1102 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Technical data
Analog Inputs
Rated current In 1A or 5A (selectable)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency Either 50Hz or 60Hz (specified when the ordering)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 minutes
6 times rated current for 2 minutes
30 times rated current for 10 seconds
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs  0.1VA at In = 1A,  0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs  0.3VA at In = 1A,  0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs  0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 72.0Vdc)
48/125Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 150.0Vdc)
110/250Vdc (Operative range: 88.0 – 300.0Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply  15%
Power Supply Interruption Withstand Period 110/250Vdc rating : 50ms
(IEC60255-11)
Power consumption  15W (quiescent)
 25W (maximum)

- 1103 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Note: Pick-up setting is available in BI2 (range: 18V – 222V)
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged
into the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an
external resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption  0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 3 ms
Semi-fast operating contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Auxiliary contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Hybrid contacts (10 A breaking)
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=5ms)
Break 10A, 220Vdc (L/R=20ms)
10A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 1 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
Measuring input capability

Full scale
Standard current input ≥ 60A (1A rating) or 300A (5A rating)
Voltage input ≥ 200V
Sampling rate 48 samples / cycle
Frequency response < 5% deviation over range 16.7Hz to 600Hz

- 1104 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 10kg (1/3 size), 12kg (1/2 size), 15kg (3/4 size), 25kg
(1/1 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
Function keys
Number 7
Local PC Interface (front port)
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2 meters (less than)
Terminal block structure
VCT Ring type terminal
Wire thickness: 2.5mm2 through 5.5 mm2
Termination: M3.5 ring tongue insulated
BI / BO / PWS Compression plug type terminal

Wire thickness: 1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2 or AWG14
Termination: Stripping length = 10 mm (typical)
VCT BI / BO / PWS
VC* T*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Ring type Compression plug type

terminal terminal
Communication for Network (rear port)

100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
Connector type RJ-45
Cable type CAT5e STP cable

- 1105 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
-enhanced category 5 with Shielded Twisted Pair cable

100BASE-FX
Connector type SC type
Wave length 50/125 or 62.5/125m fibre, SC connector
1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC duplex connector
Wave length 1310nm fibre
Communication for Miscellaneous (serial communication; rear port)

RS485 Protocol: IEC 60870-5-103
Connector type Push-in spring terminal
Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable
Fiber optic Protocol: IEC 60870-5-103

Connector type ST connector
Cable type 820nm
CU to BU communication
Cable type: Single mode optical fibre (SMF: size 9/125 µm)
Connector: Duplex LC
Laser transmitter 1310 nm output (Output power: –15 ~ –-8 dBm)
Laser receiver (sensitivity) Min –28dBm, Max –-8dBm

- 1106 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range:–25C to +55C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit:–25C to +70C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC 60068-2-
14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per
IEC 60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals
and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent
circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-27 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50s, 0.5J between all
terminals and between all terminals and
earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:
60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:
1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage
and discharged into the input terminals with
an external resistance

- 1107 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Environmental performance
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4
Electromagnetic GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850 and
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
25MHz to 1GHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential
IEC 61000-4-5 modes:
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes†
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
†For differential mode, ‘CMP_NUM’ setting utilized.

- 1108 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
European Commission Directives
European Commission Directives

2014/30/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 60255-26:2013
2014/35/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Low Voltage Directive for electrical safety is
demonstrated according EN 60255-27:2014.

- 1109 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Functional data
Current Differential Protection
Minimum operating current (DIFCH, DIFDZ): 10 to 20000A in 1A steps (CT primary amps)
% slope (DIFCH, DIFDZ): 0 to 90% in 1% steps
CT ratio: 1.000 to 20000.000 in 0.001 steps
Operating time: Typical 1 cycle (300% of DIFI)
Accuracy: 5%(7% at I < 0.3×In)
Breaker Failure Protection
Overcurrent element (OCB): 0.10 to 5.00 in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.50 to 25.00 in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
BF timer for retrip of failed breaker: 0.000 to 300.000s in 0.001s steps
BF timer for related breaker trip: 0.000 to 300.000s in 0.001s steps
BF timer for transfer trip 0.000 to 300.000s in 0.001s steps
Operating time of overcurrent element less than 20ms at 50Hz or less than 17ms at 60Hz
Resetting time of overcurrent element less than 15ms at 50Hz or less than 13ms at 60Hz
Accuracy of overcurrent element: 5% (10% at I < 0.5×In)
DO/PU ratio: 0.8
Voltage Check Function
Undervoltage element (UVGF): 20 to 60V in 1V steps
Undervoltage element (UVSF): 60 to 100V in 1V steps
Zero-phase overvoltage element (OVGF): 0.1 to 10.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage change detection element (UVDF) 0.07 times voltage before fault
Phase Overcurrent Protection
Definite time overcurrent element
Pick up level (OC) 0.02 to 50.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Delay time (TOC) 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Operating time typical 30ms (without delay time)
Inverse time overcurrent element

Pick up level (OCI) 0.02 to 5.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Time multiplier (TOCI) 0.010 to 50.00 in 0.01 steps
Characteristic IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /

IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 / Original
Definite Time or Dependent Time
Reset type
0.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Reset Definite delay
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
Earth Fault Protection
Definite time overcurrent element
Pick up level (EF) 0.02 to 50.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Delay time (TEF) 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Operating time typical 30ms (without delay time)
Inverse time overcurrent element
Pick up level (EFI) 0.02 to 5.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Time multiplier (TEFI) 0.010 to 50.00 in 0.01 steps
Characteristic IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI /
Reset type US-CO2 / US-CO8 / Original
Reset Definite delay Definite Time or Dependent Time
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS 0.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps

6F2S1933 (0.04)
Metering Function
AC current Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
AC voltage Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
Frequency Accuracy  0.03Hz
Time Synchronisation
Protocol SNTP

- 1111 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Cabling
The table below shows the recommended cables in the cross-section and rated-voltage for the
connection with the transformer module (VCT), the binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and
the power supply module (PWS). Rated-voltage required for the cable is 600Vac.
Table Cables for the connection with module
Connecting for Wire termination Wire thickness
1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2

BI / BO / PWS Stripping length = 10 mm (typical)
or AWG14
2.5 mm2 through 5.5
VCT M3.5 ring tongue with insulation
mm2
Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue with insulation 5.5 mm2 or larger
Fuses
The table below shows the required fuse in the PWS. DO NOT change the fuse by the user.
The fuse is complies with IEC60127-2 Sheet 5.
Table Fuse specification in PWS
Specification Description
Rated current 3.15A
Rated voltage 500Vac & 400Vdc
Cutoff velocity Type “T”
Manufacture Littelfuse, Inc.
Type 04773.15XP
Safety and environment

The table below shows the safety category of the insulation resistance and the environment.
Table Safety and environment requirement
Safety requirement Definition in IEC Specification
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 More than 100 M-ohm at 500V d.c.
Protection bonding continuity test IEC 60255-27 Test current: 10 A a.c.
Resistance: less than 0.1 ohm
Protective bonding resistance test IEC 60255-27 Resistance: less than 0.2 ohm
Creepage distance and clearance IEC 60255-27 Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III
Protective class IEC 60255-27 Class I

- 1112 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 8 Manufacture setting

- 1113 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
LED in CU
Standard1(minimum protection)
LED No
Logic Attribute
Remarks
Label Fixed Color Blink Fixed
1 IN SERVICE x Green - x Lit when IED is in service.
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
4 TRIP Red Lit when trip command issued.
6 TEST Yellow Lit when test mode changed.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

- 1114 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
LED in BU
Standard1(minimum protection)
LED No
Logic Attribute
Remarks
Label Fixed Color Blink Fixed
1 IN SERVICE x Green - x Lit when IED is in service.
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
4 TRIP Red Lit when trip command issued.
6 TEST Yellow Lit when test mode changed.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
PF-Key
PF-Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Model
Fault Event Event Event
GRB200(CU) Metering ― ―
Record Record1 Record2 Record3
Fault Event Event Event
GRB200(BU) Metering ― ―
Record Record1 Record2 Record3

- 1115 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 9 Notes for the dielectric voltage test

- 1116 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Dielectric voltage testing shall be carried out after reading the below notices carefully.
Cable connections
Figure-9.A illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, two short-wires attached on PSW shall be carefully handled; follow the below
instructions (1) and (2).
(1) Short-wire between terminal screw No.35 and No.37

 Remove this short-wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test. If this short-wire is not
removed, the IED will be damaged.
 After the test, reconnect this short-wire to the original positons.
(2) Short-wire between terminal screw No.38 and FG

 Never remove this short wire. If this short-wire is removed, the IED will be damaged.
[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS T*
BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1)
(+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG
Figure-9.A Short-wires shall be handled with Cautions

- 1117 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 10 CU-BU communication information

- 1118 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
11-1 CU-BU data transmission overview

Figure 11-1 illustrates physical connection between the CU and BUs. CU and Bu’s binary data
can be transmitted between them.
CU BU1
BU2
CU—BU1 connection
BU3
CU—BU2 connection
CU—BU3 connection
Figure 11-1 CU—BU connections
Figure 11-2 illustrates CU and BU’s data transmission flow.
From CU to BU
BU1
CU DBP_COMRCV_BU
DBP_COMSEND_CU (Function ID:4F3A01)
(Function ID: 4F2001)
PLC connection points Binary
signals
…….
…….
#######
Binary ************
signals to
####### from CU
…….
…….
************
BUs
####### DBP_COMSEND_BU
************
(Function ID:4F3001)
DBP_COMRCV_CU ####### Binary

(Function ID:4F2A01) ************
####### signals to
…….
…….
************
PLC monitoring ≥1 CU
……….
points #######
…….
************
BU2
Binary DBP_COMRCV_BU
signals (Function ID:4F3A01)
Same as the BU1
from BUs DBP_COMSEND_BU
………………
…….
……….
BU64
DBP_COMRCV_BU
(Function ID:4F3A01)
Same as the BU1
DBP_COMSEND_BU
From BU to CU
Figure 11-2 CU—BU Data Transmission Flow
11-2 Transmission from CU to BU

Binary data can be sent from CU to BU by function block DBP_COMSEND_CU. Users can
make a PLC logic to connect to the PLC connection points of DBP_COMSEND_CU.

- 1119 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Each BU receive the binary data sent from CU by function block DBP_COMRCV_BU. Users
can use the output signals of DBP_COMRCV_BU as a monitoring points or to make a PLC
Logic.
Table 11-1 shows points for the PLC connections (data inputs at CU) and the monitors (data
outputs at BU). For example, when the user wishes to send a binary signal for the BUs, select
a PLC connection point (e.g., COMF00_CUBU_13S). Then, in all BUs, the signal will be
outputted as an output signal (e.g., COMF00_CUBU_13R).
11-3 Transmission from BU to CU

Similarly, in BU, there is a function block DBP_COMSEND_BU, which can be used to send
binary data to CU. In CU, there is a function block DBP_COMRCV_CU, which can receive
binary data from BU.
Users can make a PLC logic to connect to the PLC connection points of DBP_COMSEND_BU,
and receive the binary data in CU. So users can use the output signals of DBP_COMRCV_BU
as a monitoring points or to make a PLC Logic.
Table 11-2 shows points for the PLC connections (data inputs at BU) and the monitors (data
outputs at CU). For example, when the user wishes to send a binary signal of BUs to the CU,
select a connection point (e.g., COMF00_BUCU_13S). In CU, it will be outputted as an output
signal (e.g., COMF00_BUCU_13R). If the user wishes to get each BU signal individually, use
another (i.e., COMF01_BUCU_13S), the opposite can output respective BU signals through
the monitoring points: COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU1 ~ COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU64 (see Table
11-3).
Note: some binary signals are sent from BU to CU fixed, such as DIF-TRIP, CBF-RE.OPT (see
Table 11-2). Those signals have been set as default for recording function (see Table 6.10-2 and
Table 6.10-3 in Chapter Technical description (CU): Recording function).

- 1120 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-1 Transmission From CU to BU (CU: 4F2001→BU: 4F3A01)

CU: 4F2001_ DBP_COMSEND_CU BU: 4F3A01_ DBP_COMRCV_BU
Input signals (PLC connection points) Output signals
Data ID Data ID
COMF00_CUBU_13S 4F2001 8C0000EBB0 COMF00_CUBU_13R 4F3A01 8C00001B60
COMF00_CUBU_14S 4F2001 8D0000EBB1 COMF00_CUBU_14R 4F3A01 8D00001B61
COMF00_CUBU_15S 4F2001 8E0000EBB2 COMF00_CUBU_15R 4F3A01 8E00001B62
COMF00_CUBU_16S 4F2001 8F0000EBB3 COMF00_CUBU_16R 4F3A01 8F00001B63

Free for user’s engineering

COMSE0_CUBU_1S 4F2001 80001EEBB0 COMSE0_CUBU_1R 4F3A01 80001E1B60
COMSE0_CUBU_11S 4F2001 8A001EEBBA COMSE0_CUBU_11R 4F3A01 8A001E1B6A
COMSE0_CUBU_12S 4F2001 8B001EEBBB COMSE0_CUBU_12R 4F3A01 8B001E1B6B
COMSE0_CUBU_13S 4F2001 8C001EEBBC COMSE0_CUBU_13R 4F3A01 8C001E1B6C
COMSE0_CUBU_14S 4F2001 8D001EEBBD COMSE0_CUBU_14R 4F3A01 8D001E1B6D
COMSE0_CUBU_15S 4F2001 8E001EEBBE COMSE0_CUBU_15R 4F3A01 8E001E1B6E
COMSE0_CUBU_16S 4F2001 8F001EEBBF COMSE0_CUBU_16R 4F3A01 8F001E1B6F

COMSF0_CUBU_1S 4F2001 80001FEBB0 COMSF0_CUBU_1R 4F3A01 80001F1B60
COMSF0_CUBU_11S 4F2001 8A001FEBBA COMSF0_CUBU_11R 4F3A01 8A001F1B6A
COMSF0_CUBU_12S 4F2001 8B001FEBBB COMSF0_CUBU_12R 4F3A01 8B001F1B6B
COMSF0_CUBU_13S 4F2001 8C001FEBBC COMSF0_CUBU_13R 4F3A01 8C001F1B6C
COMSF0_CUBU_14S 4F2001 8D001FEBBD COMSF0_CUBU_14R 4F3A01 8D001F1B6D
COMSF0_CUBU_15S 4F2001 8E001FEBBE COMSF0_CUBU_15R 4F3A01 8E001F1B6E
COMSF0_CUBU_16S 4F2001 8F001FEBBF COMSF0_CUBU_16R 4F3A01 8F001F1B6F

- 1121 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-2 Transmission From BU to CU (BU: 4F3001→CU: 4F2A01)

BU: 4F3001_ DBP_COMSEND_BU CU: 4F2A01_ DBP_COMRCV_CU
PLC connection points Output signals (OR of all BUs) Individual
Data ID Data ID Signals from BU
Transmitter for relay application (DIF) DIF-TRIP 4F2A01 8000011B60 Table 11-11
“ (CBF) CBF-RE.OPT 4F2A01 8100011B61 Table 11-12
“ (CBF) CBF-OPT 4F2A01 8200011B62 Table 11-13
“ (COMTP) COM-OPT 4F2A01 8300011B63 Table 11-14
Fixed Transmission Data
“ (EFP) EFP-OPT 4F2A01 8400011B64 Table 11-15

“ (OC) OC1-OPT 4F2A01 8500011B65 Table 11-16
“ (OC) OC2-OPT 4F2A01 8600011B66 Table 11-17
“ (EF) EF1-OPT 4F2A01 8700011B67 Table 11-18
“ (EF) EF2-OPT 4F2A01 8800011B68 Table 11-19

“ (TRC) GEN.TRIP 4F2A01 8B00011B6B Table 11-20
“ (CBF DIF-TR 4F2A01 8000021B60 Table 11-21
“ (CBF) CBF-TR 4F2A01 8200021B62 Table 11-22
“ (COMTP) COM-TR 4F2A01 8300021B63 Table 11-23
“ (EFP) EFP-TR 4F2A01 8400021B64 Table 11-24
“ (TRC) GEN.TR.TRIP 4F2A01 8B00021B6B Table 11-25
“ (TRC) OPT.PHASE-A 4F2A01 8000031B60
“ (TRC) OPT.PHASE-B 4F2A01 8100031B61
“ (TRC) OPT.PHASE-C 4F2A01 8200031B62
COMF00_BUCU_13S 4F3001 8C0000EB6C COMF00_BUCU_13R 4F2A01 8C00001B6C
COMF00_BUCU_14S 4F3001 8D0000EB6D COMF00_BUCU_14R 4F2A01 8D00001B6D
COMF00_BUCU_15S 4F3001 8E0000EB6E COMF00_BUCU_15R 4F2A01 8E00001B6E
COMF00_BUCU_16S 4F3001 8F0000EB6F COMF00_BUCU_16R 4F2A01 8F00001B6F
COMF01_BUCU_13S 4F3001 8C0001EB6C COMF01_BUCU_13R 4F2A01 8C00011B6C Table 11-3
COMF01_BUCU_14S 4F3001 8D0001EB6D COMF01_BUCU_14R 4F2A01 8D00011B6D Table 11-4
COMF01_BUCU_15S 4F3001 8E0001EB6E COMF01_BUCU_15R 4F2A01 8E00011B6E Table 11-5
COMF01_BUCU_16S 4F3001 8F0001EB6F COMF01_BUCU_16R 4F2A01 8F00011B6F Table 11-6
COMF10_BUCU_13S 4F3001 8C0002EB6C COMF10_BUCU_13R 4F2A01 8C00021B6C Table 11-7
COMF10_BUCU_14S 4F3001 8D0002EB6D COMF10_BUCU_14R 4F2A01 8D00021B6D Table 11-8
COMF10_BUCU_15S 4F3001 8E0002EB6E COMF10_BUCU_15R 4F2A01 8E00021B6E Table 11-9
COMF10_BUCU_16S 4F3001 8F0002EB6F COMF10_BUCU_16R 4F2A01 8F00021B6F Table 11-10

COMF20_BUCU_9S 4F3001 880004EB68 COMF20_BUCU_9R 4F2A01 8800041B68
COMF20_BUCU_11S 4F3001 8A0004EB6A COMF20_BUCU_11R 4F2A01 8A00041B6A
COMF20_BUCU_12S 4F3001 8B0004EB6B COMF20_BUCU_12R 4F2A01 8B00041B6B
COMF21_BUCU_11S 4F3001 8A0005EB6A COMF21_BUCU_11R 4F2A01 8A00051B6A
Free for user’s engineering
COMF21_BUCU_12S 4F3001 8B0005EB6B COMF21_BUCU_12R 4F2A01 8B00051B6B

COMSE0_BUCU_1S 4F3001 80001EEB60 COMSE0_BUCU_1R 4F2A01 80001E1B60
COMSE0_BUCU_11S 4F3001 8A001EEB6A COMSE0_BUCU_11R 4F2A01 8A001E1B6A
COMSE0_BUCU_12S 4F3001 8B001EEB6B COMSE0_BUCU_12R 4F2A01 8B001E1B6B
COMSE0_BUCU_13S 4F3001 8C001EEB6C COMSE0_BUCU_13R 4F2A01 8C001E1B6C
COMSE0_BUCU_14S 4F3001 8D001EEB6D COMSE0_BUCU_14R 4F2A01 8D001E1B6D
COMSE0_BUCU_15S 4F3001 8E001EEB6E COMSE0_BUCU_15R 4F2A01 8E001E1B6E
COMSE0_BUCU_16S 4F3001 8F001EEB6F COMSE0_BUCU_16R 4F2A01 8F001E1B6F

COMSF0_BUCU_1S 4F3001 80001FEB60 COMSF0_BUCU_1R 4F2A01 80001F1B60
COMSF0_BUCU_11S 4F3001 8A001FEB6A COMSF0_BUCU_11R 4F2A01 8A001F1B6A
COMSF0_BUCU_12S 4F3001 8B001FEB6B COMSF0_BUCU_12R 4F2A01 8B001F1B6B
COMSF0_BUCU_13S 4F3001 8C001FEB6C COMSF0_BUCU_13R 4F2A01 8C001F1B6C
COMSF0_BUCU_14S 4F3001 8D001FEB6D COMSF0_BUCU_14R 4F2A01 8D001F1B6D
COMSF0_BUCU_15S 4F3001 8E001FEB6E COMSF0_BUCU_15R 4F2A01 8E001F1B6E
COMSF0_BUCU_16S 4F3001 8F001FEB6F COMSF0_BUCU_16R 4F2A01 8F001F1B6F

- 1122 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-3 Individual signals from each BU: COMF01_BUCU_13R

Output signals (OR of all BUs) Individual signals from BUs
Data ID Data ID
COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU1 4F2A01 8C01001B6C
COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU11 4F2A01 8C010A1B6C
COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU12 4F2A01 8C010B1B6C
COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU13 4F2A01 8C010C1B6C
COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU14 4F2A01 8C010D1B6C
COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU15 4F2A01 8C010E1B6C
COMF01_BUCU_13R_BU16 4F2A01 8C010F1B6C
COMF01_BUCU_13R 4F2A018C 8C00011B6C

- 1123 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Data ID Data ID
COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU1 4F2A01 8D01001B6D
COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU11 4F2A01 8D010A1B6D
COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU12 4F2A01 8D010B1B6D
COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU13 4F2A01 8D010C1B6D
COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU14 4F2A01 8D010D1B6D
COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU15 4F2A01 8D010E1B6D
COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU16 4F2A01 8D010F1B6D
COMF01_BUCU_14R 4F2A018D 8D00011B6D COMF01_BUCU_14R_BU33 4F2A01 8D01201B6D

- 1124 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Data ID Data ID
COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU1 4F2A01 8E01001B6E
COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU11 4F2A01 8E010A1B6E
COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU12 4F2A01 8E010B1B6E
COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU13 4F2A01 8E010C1B6E
COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU14 4F2A01 8E010D1B6E
COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU15 4F2A01 8E010E1B6E
COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU16 4F2A01 8E010F1B6E
COMF01_BUCU_15R 4F2A018E 8E00011B6E COMF01_BUCU_15R_BU33 4F2A01 8E01201B6E

- 1125 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Data ID Data ID
COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU1 4F2A01 8F01001B6F
COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU11 4F2A01 8F010A1B6F
COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU12 4F2A01 8F010B1B6F
COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU13 4F2A01 8F010C1B6F
COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU14 4F2A01 8F010D1B6F
COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU15 4F2A01 8F010E1B6F
COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU16 4F2A01 8F010F1B6F
COMF01_BUCU_16R 4F2A018F 8F00011B6F COMF01_BUCU_16R_BU33 4F2A01 8F01201B6F

- 1126 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Data ID Data ID
COMF10_BUCU_13R 4F2A018C 8C00021B6C COMF10_BUCU_13R_BU33 4F2A01 8C02201B6C

- 1127 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Data ID Data ID Data ID
COMF10_BUCU_14R 4F2A018D 8D00021B6D COMF10_BUCU_14R_BU33 4F2A01 8D02201B6D

- 1128 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-9 Individual signals from each BU:COMF10_BUCU_15R

Data ID Data ID
COMF10_BUCU_15R 4F2A018E 8E00021B6E COMF10_BUCU_15R_BU33 4F2A01 8E02201B6E

- 1129 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

Data ID Data ID
COMF10_BUCU_16R 4F2A018F 8F00021B6F COMF10_BUCU_16R_BU33 4F2A01 8F02201B6F

- 1130 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-11 Individual signals from each BU: DIF-TRIP

Data ID Data ID
DIF-TRIP_BU1 4F2A0180 8001001B60
DIF-TRIP_BU2 4F2A0180 8001011B60
DIF-TRIP_BU3 4F2A0180 8001021B60
DIF-TRIP_BU4 4F2A0180 8001031B60
DIF-TRIP_BU5 4F2A0180 8001041B60
DIF-TRIP_BU6 4F2A0180 8001051B60
DIF-TRIP_BU7 4F2A0180 8001061B60
DIF-TRIP_BU8 4F2A0180 8001071B60
DIF-TRIP_BU9 4F2A0180 8001081B60
DIF-TRIP_BU10 4F2A0180 8001091B60
DIF-TRIP_BU11 4F2A0180 80010A1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU12 4F2A0180 80010B1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU13 4F2A0180 80010C1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU14 4F2A0180 80010D1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU15 4F2A0180 80010E1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU16 4F2A0180 80010F1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU17 4F2A0180 8001101B60
DIF-TRIP_BU18 4F2A0180 8001111B60
DIF-TRIP_BU19 4F2A0180 8001121B60
DIF-TRIP_BU20 4F2A0180 8001131B60
DIF-TRIP_BU21 4F2A0180 8001141B60
DIF-TRIP_BU22 4F2A0180 8001151B60
DIF-TRIP_BU23 4F2A0180 8001161B60
DIF-TRIP_BU24 4F2A0180 8001171B60
DIF-TRIP_BU25 4F2A0180 8001181B60
DIF-TRIP_BU26 4F2A0180 8001191B60
DIF-TRIP_BU27 4F2A0180 80011A1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU28 4F2A0180 80011B1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU29 4F2A0180 80011C1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU30 4F2A0180 80011D1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU31 4F2A0180 80011E1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU32 4F2A0180 80011F1B60
DIF-TRIP 4F2A0180 8000011B60 DIF-TRIP_BU33 4F2A0180 8001201B60
DIF-TRIP_BU34 4F2A0180 8001211B60
DIF-TRIP_BU35 4F2A0180 8001221B60
DIF-TRIP_BU36 4F2A0180 8001231B60
DIF-TRIP_BU37 4F2A0180 8001241B60
DIF-TRIP_BU38 4F2A0180 8001251B60
DIF-TRIP_BU39 4F2A0180 8001261B60
DIF-TRIP_BU40 4F2A0180 8001271B60
DIF-TRIP_BU41 4F2A0180 8001281B60
DIF-TRIP_BU42 4F2A0180 8001291B60
DIF-TRIP_BU43 4F2A0180 80012A1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU44 4F2A0180 80012B1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU45 4F2A0180 80012C1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU46 4F2A0180 80012D1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU47 4F2A0180 80012E1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU48 4F2A0180 80012F1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU49 4F2A0180 8001301B60
DIF-TRIP_BU50 4F2A0180 8001311B60
DIF-TRIP_BU51 4F2A0180 8001321B60
DIF-TRIP_BU52 4F2A0180 8001331B60
DIF-TRIP_BU53 4F2A0180 8001341B60
DIF-TRIP_BU54 4F2A0180 8001351B60
DIF-TRIP_BU55 4F2A0180 8001361B60
DIF-TRIP_BU56 4F2A0180 8001371B60
DIF-TRIP_BU57 4F2A0180 8001381B60
DIF-TRIP_BU58 4F2A0180 8001391B60
DIF-TRIP_BU59 4F2A0180 80013A1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU60 4F2A0180 80013B1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU61 4F2A0180 80013C1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU62 4F2A0180 80013D1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU63 4F2A0180 80013E1B60
DIF-TRIP_BU64 4F2A0180 80013F1B60

- 1131 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-12 Individual signals from each BU: CBF-RE.OPT

Data ID Data ID
CBF-RE.OPT_BU1 4F2A0181 8101001B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU2 4F2A0181 8101011B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU3 4F2A0181 8101021B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU4 4F2A0181 8101031B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU5 4F2A0181 8101041B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU6 4F2A0181 8101051B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU7 4F2A0181 8101061B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU8 4F2A0181 8101071B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU9 4F2A0181 8101081B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU10 4F2A0181 8101091B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU11 4F2A0181 81010A1B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU12 4F2A0181 81010B1B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU13 4F2A0181 81010C1B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU14 4F2A0181 81010D1B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU15 4F2A0181 81010E1B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU16 4F2A0181 81010F1B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU17 4F2A0181 8101101B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU18 4F2A0181 8101111B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU19 4F2A0181 8101121B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU20 4F2A0181 8101131B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU21 4F2A0181 8101141B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU22 4F2A0181 8101151B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU23 4F2A0181 8101161B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU24 4F2A0181 8101171B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU25 4F2A0181 8101181B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU26 4F2A0181 8101191B61
CBF-RE.OPT 4F2A0181 8100011B61 CBF-RE.OPT_BU33 4F2A0181 8101201B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU34 4F2A0181 8101211B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU35 4F2A0181 8101221B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU36 4F2A0181 8101231B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU37 4F2A0181 8101241B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU38 4F2A0181 8101251B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU39 4F2A0181 8101261B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU40 4F2A0181 8101271B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU41 4F2A0181 8101281B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU42 4F2A0181 8101291B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU49 4F2A0181 8101301B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU50 4F2A0181 8101311B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU51 4F2A0181 8101321B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU52 4F2A0181 8101331B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU53 4F2A0181 8101341B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU54 4F2A0181 8101351B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU55 4F2A0181 8101361B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU56 4F2A0181 8101371B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU57 4F2A0181 8101381B61
CBF-RE.OPT_BU58 4F2A0181 8101391B61

- 1132 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-13 Individual signals from each BU: CBF-OPT

Data ID Data ID
CBF-OPT_BU1 4F2A0182 8201001B62
CBF-OPT_BU2 4F2A0182 8201011B62
CBF-OPT_BU3 4F2A0182 8201021B62
CBF-OPT_BU4 4F2A0182 8201031B62
CBF-OPT_BU5 4F2A0182 8201041B62
CBF-OPT_BU6 4F2A0182 8201051B62
CBF-OPT_BU7 4F2A0182 8201061B62
CBF-OPT_BU8 4F2A0182 8201071B62
CBF-OPT_BU9 4F2A0182 8201081B62
CBF-OPT_BU10 4F2A0182 8201091B62
CBF-OPT_BU11 4F2A0182 82010A1B62
CBF-OPT_BU12 4F2A0182 82010B1B62
CBF-OPT_BU13 4F2A0182 82010C1B62
CBF-OPT_BU14 4F2A0182 82010D1B62
CBF-OPT_BU15 4F2A0182 82010E1B62
CBF-OPT_BU16 4F2A0182 82010F1B62
CBF-OPT_BU17 4F2A0182 8201101B62
CBF-OPT_BU18 4F2A0182 8201111B62
CBF-OPT_BU19 4F2A0182 8201121B62
CBF-OPT_BU20 4F2A0182 8201131B62
CBF-OPT_BU21 4F2A0182 8201141B62
CBF-OPT_BU22 4F2A0182 8201151B62
CBF-OPT_BU23 4F2A0182 8201161B62
CBF-OPT_BU24 4F2A0182 8201171B62
CBF-OPT_BU25 4F2A0182 8201181B62
CBF-OPT_BU26 4F2A0182 8201191B62
CBF-OPT_BU27 4F2A0182 82011A1B62
CBF-OPT_BU28 4F2A0182 82011B1B62
CBF-OPT_BU29 4F2A0182 82011C1B62
CBF-OPT_BU30 4F2A0182 82011D1B62
CBF-OPT_BU31 4F2A0182 82011E1B62
CBF-OPT_BU32 4F2A0182 82011F1B62
CBF-OPT 4F2A0182 8200011B62 CBF-OPT_BU33 4F2A0182 8201201B62
CBF-OPT_BU34 4F2A0182 8201211B62
CBF-OPT_BU35 4F2A0182 8201221B62
CBF-OPT_BU36 4F2A0182 8201231B62
CBF-OPT_BU37 4F2A0182 8201241B62
CBF-OPT_BU38 4F2A0182 8201251B62
CBF-OPT_BU39 4F2A0182 8201261B62
CBF-OPT_BU40 4F2A0182 8201271B62
CBF-OPT_BU41 4F2A0182 8201281B62
CBF-OPT_BU42 4F2A0182 8201291B62
CBF-OPT_BU43 4F2A0182 82012A1B62
CBF-OPT_BU44 4F2A0182 82012B1B62
CBF-OPT_BU45 4F2A0182 82012C1B62
CBF-OPT_BU46 4F2A0182 82012D1B62
CBF-OPT_BU47 4F2A0182 82012E1B62
CBF-OPT_BU48 4F2A0182 82012F1B62
CBF-OPT_BU49 4F2A0182 8201301B62
CBF-OPT_BU50 4F2A0182 8201311B62
CBF-OPT_BU51 4F2A0182 8201321B62
CBF-OPT_BU52 4F2A0182 8201331B62
CBF-OPT_BU53 4F2A0182 8201341B62
CBF-OPT_BU54 4F2A0182 8201351B62
CBF-OPT_BU55 4F2A0182 8201361B62
CBF-OPT_BU56 4F2A0182 8201371B62
CBF-OPT_BU57 4F2A0182 8201381B62
CBF-OPT_BU58 4F2A0182 8201391B62
CBF-OPT_BU59 4F2A0182 82013A1B62
CBF-OPT_BU60 4F2A0182 82013B1B62
CBF-OPT_BU61 4F2A0182 82013C1B62
CBF-OPT_BU62 4F2A0182 82013D1B62
CBF-OPT_BU63 4F2A0182 82013E1B62
CBF-OPT_BU64 4F2A0182 82013F1B62

- 1133 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-14 Individual signals from each BU: COM-OPT

Data ID Data ID
COM-OPT_BU1 4F2A0183 8301001B63
COM-OPT_BU2 4F2A0183 8301011B63
COM-OPT_BU3 4F2A0183 8301021B63
COM-OPT_BU4 4F2A0183 8301031B63
COM-OPT_BU5 4F2A0183 8301041B63
COM-OPT_BU6 4F2A0183 8301051B63
COM-OPT_BU7 4F2A0183 8301061B63
COM-OPT_BU8 4F2A0183 8301071B63
COM-OPT_BU9 4F2A0183 8301081B63
COM-OPT_BU10 4F2A0183 8301091B63
COM-OPT_BU11 4F2A0183 83010A1B63
COM-OPT_BU12 4F2A0183 83010B1B63
COM-OPT_BU13 4F2A0183 83010C1B63
COM-OPT_BU14 4F2A0183 83010D1B63
COM-OPT_BU15 4F2A0183 83010E1B63
COM-OPT_BU16 4F2A0183 83010F1B63
COM-OPT_BU17 4F2A0183 8301101B63
COM-OPT_BU18 4F2A0183 8301111B63
COM-OPT_BU19 4F2A0183 8301121B63
COM-OPT_BU20 4F2A0183 8301131B63
COM-OPT_BU21 4F2A0183 8301141B63
COM-OPT_BU22 4F2A0183 8301151B63
COM-OPT_BU23 4F2A0183 8301161B63
COM-OPT_BU24 4F2A0183 8301171B63
COM-OPT_BU25 4F2A0183 8301181B63
COM-OPT_BU26 4F2A0183 8301191B63
COM-OPT_BU27 4F2A0183 83011A1B63
COM-OPT_BU28 4F2A0183 83011B1B63
COM-OPT_BU29 4F2A0183 83011C1B63
COM-OPT_BU30 4F2A0183 83011D1B63
COM-OPT_BU31 4F2A0183 83011E1B63
COM-OPT_BU32 4F2A0183 83011F1B63
COM-OPT 4F2A0183 8300011B63 COM-OPT_BU33 4F2A0183 8301201B63
COM-OPT_BU34 4F2A0183 8301211B63
COM-OPT_BU35 4F2A0183 8301221B63
COM-OPT_BU36 4F2A0183 8301231B63
COM-OPT_BU37 4F2A0183 8301241B63
COM-OPT_BU38 4F2A0183 8301251B63
COM-OPT_BU39 4F2A0183 8301261B63
COM-OPT_BU40 4F2A0183 8301271B63
COM-OPT_BU41 4F2A0183 8301281B63
COM-OPT_BU42 4F2A0183 8301291B63
COM-OPT_BU43 4F2A0183 83012A1B63
COM-OPT_BU44 4F2A0183 83012B1B63
COM-OPT_BU45 4F2A0183 83012C1B63
COM-OPT_BU46 4F2A0183 83012D1B63
COM-OPT_BU47 4F2A0183 83012E1B63
COM-OPT_BU48 4F2A0183 83012F1B63
COM-OPT_BU49 4F2A0183 8301301B63
COM-OPT_BU50 4F2A0183 8301311B63
COM-OPT_BU51 4F2A0183 8301321B63
COM-OPT_BU52 4F2A0183 8301331B63
COM-OPT_BU53 4F2A0183 8301341B63
COM-OPT_BU54 4F2A0183 8301351B63
COM-OPT_BU55 4F2A0183 8301361B63
COM-OPT_BU56 4F2A0183 8301371B63
COM-OPT_BU57 4F2A0183 8301381B63
COM-OPT_BU58 4F2A0183 8301391B63
COM-OPT_BU59 4F2A0183 83013A1B63
COM-OPT_BU60 4F2A0183 83013B1B63
COM-OPT_BU61 4F2A0183 83013C1B63
COM-OPT_BU62 4F2A0183 83013D1B63
COM-OPT_BU63 4F2A0183 83013E1B63
COM-OPT_BU64 4F2A0183 83013F1B63

- 1134 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-15 Individual signals from each BU: EFP-OPT

Data ID Data ID
EFP-OPT_BU1 4F2A0184 8401001B64
EFP-OPT_BU2 4F2A0184 8401011B64
EFP-OPT_BU3 4F2A0184 8401021B64
EFP-OPT_BU4 4F2A0184 8401031B64
EFP-OPT_BU5 4F2A0184 8401041B64
EFP-OPT_BU6 4F2A0184 8401051B64
EFP-OPT_BU7 4F2A0184 8401061B64
EFP-OPT_BU8 4F2A0184 8401071B64
EFP-OPT_BU9 4F2A0184 8401081B64
EFP-OPT_BU10 4F2A0184 8401091B64
EFP-OPT_BU11 4F2A0184 84010A1B64
EFP-OPT_BU12 4F2A0184 84010B1B64
EFP-OPT_BU13 4F2A0184 84010C1B64
EFP-OPT_BU14 4F2A0184 84010D1B64
EFP-OPT_BU15 4F2A0184 84010E1B64
EFP-OPT_BU16 4F2A0184 84010F1B64
EFP-OPT_BU17 4F2A0184 8401101B64
EFP-OPT_BU18 4F2A0184 8401111B64
EFP-OPT_BU19 4F2A0184 8401121B64
EFP-OPT_BU20 4F2A0184 8401131B64
EFP-OPT_BU21 4F2A0184 8401141B64
EFP-OPT_BU22 4F2A0184 8401151B64
EFP-OPT_BU23 4F2A0184 8401161B64
EFP-OPT_BU24 4F2A0184 8401171B64
EFP-OPT_BU25 4F2A0184 8401181B64
EFP-OPT_BU26 4F2A0184 8401191B64
EFP-OPT_BU27 4F2A0184 84011A1B64
EFP-OPT_BU28 4F2A0184 84011B1B64
EFP-OPT_BU29 4F2A0184 84011C1B64
EFP-OPT_BU30 4F2A0184 84011D1B64
EFP-OPT_BU31 4F2A0184 84011E1B64
EFP-OPT_BU32 4F2A0184 84011F1B64
EFP-OPT 4F2A0184 8400011B64 EFP-OPT_BU33 4F2A0184 8401201B64
EFP-OPT_BU34 4F2A0184 8401211B64
EFP-OPT_BU35 4F2A0184 8401221B64
EFP-OPT_BU36 4F2A0184 8401231B64
EFP-OPT_BU37 4F2A0184 8401241B64
EFP-OPT_BU38 4F2A0184 8401251B64
EFP-OPT_BU39 4F2A0184 8401261B64
EFP-OPT_BU40 4F2A0184 8401271B64
EFP-OPT_BU41 4F2A0184 8401281B64
EFP-OPT_BU42 4F2A0184 8401291B64
EFP-OPT_BU43 4F2A0184 84012A1B64
EFP-OPT_BU44 4F2A0184 84012B1B64
EFP-OPT_BU45 4F2A0184 84012C1B64
EFP-OPT_BU46 4F2A0184 84012D1B64
EFP-OPT_BU47 4F2A0184 84012E1B64
EFP-OPT_BU48 4F2A0184 84012F1B64
EFP-OPT_BU49 4F2A0184 8401301B64
EFP-OPT_BU50 4F2A0184 8401311B64
EFP-OPT_BU51 4F2A0184 8401321B64
EFP-OPT_BU52 4F2A0184 8401331B64
EFP-OPT_BU53 4F2A0184 8401341B64
EFP-OPT_BU54 4F2A0184 8401351B64
EFP-OPT_BU55 4F2A0184 8401361B64
EFP-OPT_BU56 4F2A0184 8401371B64
EFP-OPT_BU57 4F2A0184 8401381B64
EFP-OPT_BU58 4F2A0184 8401391B64
EFP-OPT_BU59 4F2A0184 84013A1B64
EFP-OPT_BU60 4F2A0184 84013B1B64
EFP-OPT_BU61 4F2A0184 84013C1B64
EFP-OPT_BU62 4F2A0184 84013D1B64
EFP-OPT_BU63 4F2A0184 84013E1B64
EFP-OPT_BU64 4F2A0184 84013F1B64

- 1135 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-16 Individual signals from each BU: OC1-OPT

Data ID Data ID
OC1-OPT_BU1 4F2A0185 8501001B65
OC1-OPT_BU2 4F2A0185 8501011B65
OC1-OPT_BU3 4F2A0185 8501021B65
OC1-OPT_BU4 4F2A0185 8501031B65
OC1-OPT_BU5 4F2A0185 8501041B65
OC1-OPT_BU6 4F2A0185 8501051B65
OC1-OPT_BU7 4F2A0185 8501061B65
OC1-OPT_BU8 4F2A0185 8501071B65
OC1-OPT_BU9 4F2A0185 8501081B65
OC1-OPT_BU10 4F2A0185 8501091B65
OC1-OPT_BU11 4F2A0185 85010A1B65
OC1-OPT_BU12 4F2A0185 85010B1B65
OC1-OPT_BU13 4F2A0185 85010C1B65
OC1-OPT_BU14 4F2A0185 85010D1B65
OC1-OPT_BU15 4F2A0185 85010E1B65
OC1-OPT_BU16 4F2A0185 85010F1B65
OC1-OPT_BU17 4F2A0185 8501101B65
OC1-OPT_BU18 4F2A0185 8501111B65
OC1-OPT_BU19 4F2A0185 8501121B65
OC1-OPT_BU20 4F2A0185 8501131B65
OC1-OPT_BU21 4F2A0185 8501141B65
OC1-OPT_BU22 4F2A0185 8501151B65
OC1-OPT_BU23 4F2A0185 8501161B65
OC1-OPT_BU24 4F2A0185 8501171B65
OC1-OPT_BU25 4F2A0185 8501181B65
OC1-OPT_BU26 4F2A0185 8501191B65
OC1-OPT_BU27 4F2A0185 85011A1B65
OC1-OPT_BU28 4F2A0185 85011B1B65
OC1-OPT_BU29 4F2A0185 85011C1B65
OC1-OPT_BU30 4F2A0185 85011D1B65
OC1-OPT_BU31 4F2A0185 85011E1B65
OC1-OPT_BU32 4F2A0185 85011F1B65
OC1-OPT 4F2A0185 8500011B65 OC1-OPT_BU33 4F2A0185 8501201B65
OC1-OPT_BU34 4F2A0185 8501211B65
OC1-OPT_BU35 4F2A0185 8501221B65
OC1-OPT_BU36 4F2A0185 8501231B65
OC1-OPT_BU37 4F2A0185 8501241B65
OC1-OPT_BU38 4F2A0185 8501251B65
OC1-OPT_BU39 4F2A0185 8501261B65
OC1-OPT_BU40 4F2A0185 8501271B65
OC1-OPT_BU41 4F2A0185 8501281B65
OC1-OPT_BU42 4F2A0185 8501291B65
OC1-OPT_BU43 4F2A0185 85012A1B65
OC1-OPT_BU44 4F2A0185 85012B1B65
OC1-OPT_BU45 4F2A0185 85012C1B65
OC1-OPT_BU46 4F2A0185 85012D1B65
OC1-OPT_BU47 4F2A0185 85012E1B65
OC1-OPT_BU48 4F2A0185 85012F1B65
OC1-OPT_BU49 4F2A0185 8501301B65
OC1-OPT_BU50 4F2A0185 8501311B65
OC1-OPT_BU51 4F2A0185 8501321B65
OC1-OPT_BU52 4F2A0185 8501331B65
OC1-OPT_BU53 4F2A0185 8501341B65
OC1-OPT_BU54 4F2A0185 8501351B65
OC1-OPT_BU55 4F2A0185 8501361B65
OC1-OPT_BU56 4F2A0185 8501371B65
OC1-OPT_BU57 4F2A0185 8501381B65
OC1-OPT_BU58 4F2A0185 8501391B65
OC1-OPT_BU59 4F2A0185 85013A1B65
OC1-OPT_BU60 4F2A0185 85013B1B65
OC1-OPT_BU61 4F2A0185 85013C1B65
OC1-OPT_BU62 4F2A0185 85013D1B65
OC1-OPT_BU63 4F2A0185 85013E1B65
OC1-OPT_BU64 4F2A0185 85013F1B65

- 1136 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-17 Individual signals from each BU: OC2-OPT

Data ID Data ID
OC2-OPT_BU1 4F2A0186 8601001B66
OC2-OPT_BU2 4F2A0186 8601011B66
OC2-OPT_BU3 4F2A0186 8601021B66
OC2-OPT_BU4 4F2A0186 8601031B66
OC2-OPT_BU5 4F2A0186 8601041B66
OC2-OPT_BU6 4F2A0186 8601051B66
OC2-OPT_BU7 4F2A0186 8601061B66
OC2-OPT_BU8 4F2A0186 8601071B66
OC2-OPT_BU9 4F2A0186 8601081B66
OC2-OPT_BU10 4F2A0186 8601091B66
OC2-OPT_BU11 4F2A0186 86010A1B66
OC2-OPT_BU12 4F2A0186 86010B1B66
OC2-OPT_BU13 4F2A0186 86010C1B66
OC2-OPT_BU14 4F2A0186 86010D1B66
OC2-OPT_BU15 4F2A0186 86010E1B66
OC2-OPT_BU16 4F2A0186 86010F1B66
OC2-OPT_BU17 4F2A0186 8601101B66
OC2-OPT_BU18 4F2A0186 8601111B66
OC2-OPT_BU19 4F2A0186 8601121B66
OC2-OPT_BU20 4F2A0186 8601131B66
OC2-OPT_BU21 4F2A0186 8601141B66
OC2-OPT_BU22 4F2A0186 8601151B66
OC2-OPT_BU23 4F2A0186 8601161B66
OC2-OPT_BU24 4F2A0186 8601171B66
OC2-OPT_BU25 4F2A0186 8601181B66
OC2-OPT_BU26 4F2A0186 8601191B66
OC2-OPT_BU27 4F2A0186 86011A1B66
OC2-OPT_BU28 4F2A0186 86011B1B66
OC2-OPT_BU29 4F2A0186 86011C1B66
OC2-OPT_BU30 4F2A0186 86011D1B66
OC2-OPT_BU31 4F2A0186 86011E1B66
OC2-OPT_BU32 4F2A0186 86011F1B66
OC2-OPT 4F2A0186 8600011B66 OC2-OPT_BU33 4F2A0186 8601201B66
OC2-OPT_BU34 4F2A0186 8601211B66
OC2-OPT_BU35 4F2A0186 8601221B66
OC2-OPT_BU36 4F2A0186 8601231B66
OC2-OPT_BU37 4F2A0186 8601241B66
OC2-OPT_BU38 4F2A0186 8601251B66
OC2-OPT_BU39 4F2A0186 8601261B66
OC2-OPT_BU40 4F2A0186 8601271B66
OC2-OPT_BU41 4F2A0186 8601281B66
OC2-OPT_BU42 4F2A0186 8601291B66
OC2-OPT_BU43 4F2A0186 86012A1B66
OC2-OPT_BU44 4F2A0186 86012B1B66
OC2-OPT_BU45 4F2A0186 86012C1B66
OC2-OPT_BU46 4F2A0186 86012D1B66
OC2-OPT_BU47 4F2A0186 86012E1B66
OC2-OPT_BU48 4F2A0186 86012F1B66
OC2-OPT_BU49 4F2A0186 8601301B66
OC2-OPT_BU50 4F2A0186 8601311B66
OC2-OPT_BU51 4F2A0186 8601321B66
OC2-OPT_BU52 4F2A0186 8601331B66
OC2-OPT_BU53 4F2A0186 8601341B66
OC2-OPT_BU54 4F2A0186 8601351B66
OC2-OPT_BU55 4F2A0186 8601361B66
OC2-OPT_BU56 4F2A0186 8601371B66
OC2-OPT_BU57 4F2A0186 8601381B66
OC2-OPT_BU58 4F2A0186 8601391B66
OC2-OPT_BU59 4F2A0186 86013A1B66
OC2-OPT_BU60 4F2A0186 86013B1B66
OC2-OPT_BU61 4F2A0186 86013C1B66
OC2-OPT_BU62 4F2A0186 86013D1B66
OC2-OPT_BU63 4F2A0186 86013E1B66
OC2-OPT_BU64 4F2A0186 86013F1B66

- 1137 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-18 Individual signals from each BU: EF1-OPT

Data ID Data ID
EF1-OPT_BU1 4F2A0187 8701001B67
EF1-OPT_BU2 4F2A0187 8701011B67
EF1-OPT_BU3 4F2A0187 8701021B67
EF1-OPT_BU4 4F2A0187 8701031B67
EF1-OPT_BU5 4F2A0187 8701041B67
EF1-OPT_BU6 4F2A0187 8701051B67
EF1-OPT_BU7 4F2A0187 8701061B67
EF1-OPT_BU8 4F2A0187 8701071B67
EF1-OPT_BU9 4F2A0187 8701081B67
EF1-OPT_BU10 4F2A0187 8701091B67
EF1-OPT_BU11 4F2A0187 87010A1B67
EF1-OPT_BU12 4F2A0187 87010B1B67
EF1-OPT_BU13 4F2A0187 87010C1B67
EF1-OPT_BU14 4F2A0187 87010D1B67
EF1-OPT_BU15 4F2A0187 87010E1B67
EF1-OPT_BU16 4F2A0187 87010F1B67
EF1-OPT_BU17 4F2A0187 8701101B67
EF1-OPT_BU18 4F2A0187 8701111B67
EF1-OPT_BU19 4F2A0187 8701121B67
EF1-OPT_BU20 4F2A0187 8701131B67
EF1-OPT_BU21 4F2A0187 8701141B67
EF1-OPT_BU22 4F2A0187 8701151B67
EF1-OPT_BU23 4F2A0187 8701161B67
EF1-OPT_BU24 4F2A0187 8701171B67
EF1-OPT_BU25 4F2A0187 8701181B67
EF1-OPT_BU26 4F2A0187 8701191B67
EF1-OPT_BU27 4F2A0187 87011A1B67
EF1-OPT_BU28 4F2A0187 87011B1B67
EF1-OPT_BU29 4F2A0187 87011C1B67
EF1-OPT_BU30 4F2A0187 87011D1B67
EF1-OPT_BU31 4F2A0187 87011E1B67
EF1-OPT_BU32 4F2A0187 87011F1B67
EF1-OPT 4F2A0187 8700011B67 EF1-OPT_BU33 4F2A0187 8701201B67
EF1-OPT_BU34 4F2A0187 8701211B67
EF1-OPT_BU35 4F2A0187 8701221B67
EF1-OPT_BU36 4F2A0187 8701231B67
EF1-OPT_BU37 4F2A0187 8701241B67
EF1-OPT_BU38 4F2A0187 8701251B67
EF1-OPT_BU39 4F2A0187 8701261B67
EF1-OPT_BU40 4F2A0187 8701271B67
EF1-OPT_BU41 4F2A0187 8701281B67
EF1-OPT_BU42 4F2A0187 8701291B67
EF1-OPT_BU43 4F2A0187 87012A1B67
EF1-OPT_BU44 4F2A0187 87012B1B67
EF1-OPT_BU45 4F2A0187 87012C1B67
EF1-OPT_BU46 4F2A0187 87012D1B67
EF1-OPT_BU47 4F2A0187 87012E1B67
EF1-OPT_BU48 4F2A0187 87012F1B67
EF1-OPT_BU49 4F2A0187 8701301B67
EF1-OPT_BU50 4F2A0187 8701311B67
EF1-OPT_BU51 4F2A0187 8701321B67
EF1-OPT_BU52 4F2A0187 8701331B67
EF1-OPT_BU53 4F2A0187 8701341B67
EF1-OPT_BU54 4F2A0187 8701351B67
EF1-OPT_BU55 4F2A0187 8701361B67
EF1-OPT_BU56 4F2A0187 8701371B67
EF1-OPT_BU57 4F2A0187 8701381B67
EF1-OPT_BU58 4F2A0187 8701391B67
EF1-OPT_BU59 4F2A0187 87013A1B67
EF1-OPT_BU60 4F2A0187 87013B1B67
EF1-OPT_BU61 4F2A0187 87013C1B67
EF1-OPT_BU62 4F2A0187 87013D1B67
EF1-OPT_BU63 4F2A0187 87013E1B67
EF1-OPT_BU64 4F2A0187 87013F1B67

- 1138 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-19 Individual signals from each BU: EF2-OPT

Data ID Data ID
EF2-OPT_BU1 4F2A0188 8801001B68
EF2-OPT_BU2 4F2A0188 8801011B68
EF2-OPT_BU3 4F2A0188 8801021B68
EF2-OPT_BU4 4F2A0188 8801031B68
EF2-OPT_BU5 4F2A0188 8801041B68
EF2-OPT_BU6 4F2A0188 8801051B68
EF2-OPT_BU7 4F2A0188 8801061B68
EF2-OPT_BU8 4F2A0188 8801071B68
EF2-OPT_BU9 4F2A0188 8801081B68
EF2-OPT_BU10 4F2A0188 8801091B68
EF2-OPT_BU11 4F2A0188 88010A1B68
EF2-OPT_BU12 4F2A0188 88010B1B68
EF2-OPT_BU13 4F2A0188 88010C1B68
EF2-OPT_BU14 4F2A0188 88010D1B68
EF2-OPT_BU15 4F2A0188 88010E1B68
EF2-OPT_BU16 4F2A0188 88010F1B68
EF2-OPT_BU17 4F2A0188 8801101B68
EF2-OPT_BU18 4F2A0188 8801111B68
EF2-OPT_BU19 4F2A0188 8801121B68
EF2-OPT_BU20 4F2A0188 8801131B68
EF2-OPT_BU21 4F2A0188 8801141B68
EF2-OPT_BU22 4F2A0188 8801151B68
EF2-OPT_BU23 4F2A0188 8801161B68
EF2-OPT_BU24 4F2A0188 8801171B68
EF2-OPT_BU25 4F2A0188 8801181B68
EF2-OPT_BU26 4F2A0188 8801191B68
EF2-OPT_BU27 4F2A0188 88011A1B68
EF2-OPT_BU28 4F2A0188 88011B1B68
EF2-OPT_BU29 4F2A0188 88011C1B68
EF2-OPT_BU30 4F2A0188 88011D1B68
EF2-OPT_BU31 4F2A0188 88011E1B68
EF2-OPT_BU32 4F2A0188 88011F1B68
EF2-OPT 4F2A0188 8800011B68 EF2-OPT_BU33 4F2A0188 8801201B68
EF2-OPT_BU34 4F2A0188 8801211B68
EF2-OPT_BU35 4F2A0188 8801221B68
EF2-OPT_BU36 4F2A0188 8801231B68
EF2-OPT_BU37 4F2A0188 8801241B68
EF2-OPT_BU38 4F2A0188 8801251B68
EF2-OPT_BU39 4F2A0188 8801261B68
EF2-OPT_BU40 4F2A0188 8801271B68
EF2-OPT_BU41 4F2A0188 8801281B68
EF2-OPT_BU42 4F2A0188 8801291B68
EF2-OPT_BU43 4F2A0188 88012A1B68
EF2-OPT_BU44 4F2A0188 88012B1B68
EF2-OPT_BU45 4F2A0188 88012C1B68
EF2-OPT_BU46 4F2A0188 88012D1B68
EF2-OPT_BU47 4F2A0188 88012E1B68
EF2-OPT_BU48 4F2A0188 88012F1B68
EF2-OPT_BU49 4F2A0188 8801301B68
EF2-OPT_BU50 4F2A0188 8801311B68
EF2-OPT_BU51 4F2A0188 8801321B68
EF2-OPT_BU52 4F2A0188 8801331B68
EF2-OPT_BU53 4F2A0188 8801341B68
EF2-OPT_BU54 4F2A0188 8801351B68
EF2-OPT_BU55 4F2A0188 8801361B68
EF2-OPT_BU56 4F2A0188 8801371B68
EF2-OPT_BU57 4F2A0188 8801381B68
EF2-OPT_BU58 4F2A0188 8801391B68
EF2-OPT_BU59 4F2A0188 88013A1B68
EF2-OPT_BU60 4F2A0188 88013B1B68
EF2-OPT_BU61 4F2A0188 88013C1B68
EF2-OPT_BU62 4F2A0188 88013D1B68
EF2-OPT_BU63 4F2A0188 88013E1B68
EF2-OPT_BU64 4F2A0188 88013F1B68

- 1139 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-20 Individual signals from each BU: GEN.TRIP

Data ID Data ID
GEN.TRIP_BU1 4F2A018B 8B01001B6B
GEN.TRIP_BU11 4F2A018B 8B010A1B6B
GEN.TRIP_BU12 4F2A018B 8B010B1B6B
GEN.TRIP_BU13 4F2A018B 8B010C1B6B
GEN.TRIP_BU14 4F2A018B 8B010D1B6B
GEN.TRIP_BU15 4F2A018B 8B010E1B6B
GEN.TRIP_BU16 4F2A018B 8B010F1B6B
GEN.TRIP 4F2A018B 8B00011B6B GEN.TRIP_BU33 4F2A018B 8B01201B6B

- 1140 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-21 Individual signals from each BU: DIF-TR

Data ID Data ID
DIF-TR_BU1 4F2A0180 8002001B60
DIF-TR_BU2 4F2A0180 8002011B60
DIF-TR_BU3 4F2A0180 8002021B60
DIF-TR_BU4 4F2A0180 8002031B60
DIF-TR_BU5 4F2A0180 8002041B60
DIF-TR_BU6 4F2A0180 8002051B60
DIF-TR_BU7 4F2A0180 8002061B60
DIF-TR_BU8 4F2A0180 8002071B60
DIF-TR_BU9 4F2A0180 8002081B60
DIF-TR_BU10 4F2A0180 8002091B60
DIF-TR_BU11 4F2A0180 80020A1B60
DIF-TR_BU12 4F2A0180 80020B1B60
DIF-TR_BU13 4F2A0180 80020C1B60
DIF-TR_BU14 4F2A0180 80020D1B60
DIF-TR_BU15 4F2A0180 80020E1B60
DIF-TR_BU16 4F2A0180 80020F1B60
DIF-TR_BU17 4F2A0180 8002101B60
DIF-TR_BU18 4F2A0180 8002111B60
DIF-TR_BU19 4F2A0180 8002121B60
DIF-TR_BU20 4F2A0180 8002131B60
DIF-TR_BU21 4F2A0180 8002141B60
DIF-TR_BU22 4F2A0180 8002151B60
DIF-TR_BU23 4F2A0180 8002161B60
DIF-TR_BU24 4F2A0180 8002171B60
DIF-TR_BU25 4F2A0180 8002181B60
DIF-TR_BU26 4F2A0180 8002191B60
DIF-TR_BU27 4F2A0180 80021A1B60
DIF-TR_BU28 4F2A0180 80021B1B60
DIF-TR_BU29 4F2A0180 80021C1B60
DIF-TR_BU30 4F2A0180 80021D1B60
DIF-TR_BU31 4F2A0180 80021E1B60
DIF-TR_BU32 4F2A0180 80021F1B60
DIF-TR 4F2A0180 8000021B60 DIF-TR_BU33 4F2A0180 8002201B60
DIF-TR_BU34 4F2A0180 8002211B60
DIF-TR_BU35 4F2A0180 8002221B60
DIF-TR_BU36 4F2A0180 8002231B60
DIF-TR_BU37 4F2A0180 8002241B60
DIF-TR_BU38 4F2A0180 8002251B60
DIF-TR_BU39 4F2A0180 8002261B60
DIF-TR_BU40 4F2A0180 8002271B60
DIF-TR_BU41 4F2A0180 8002281B60
DIF-TR_BU42 4F2A0180 8002291B60
DIF-TR_BU43 4F2A0180 80022A1B60
DIF-TR_BU44 4F2A0180 80022B1B60
DIF-TR_BU45 4F2A0180 80022C1B60
DIF-TR_BU46 4F2A0180 80022D1B60
DIF-TR_BU47 4F2A0180 80022E1B60
DIF-TR_BU48 4F2A0180 80022F1B60
DIF-TR_BU49 4F2A0180 8002301B60
DIF-TR_BU50 4F2A0180 8002311B60
DIF-TR_BU51 4F2A0180 8002321B60
DIF-TR_BU52 4F2A0180 8002331B60
DIF-TR_BU53 4F2A0180 8002341B60
DIF-TR_BU54 4F2A0180 8002351B60
DIF-TR_BU55 4F2A0180 8002361B60
DIF-TR_BU56 4F2A0180 8002371B60
DIF-TR_BU57 4F2A0180 8002381B60
DIF-TR_BU58 4F2A0180 8002391B60
DIF-TR_BU59 4F2A0180 80023A1B60
DIF-TR_BU60 4F2A0180 80023B1B60
DIF-TR_BU61 4F2A0180 80023C1B60
DIF-TR_BU62 4F2A0180 80023D1B60
DIF-TR_BU63 4F2A0180 80023E1B60
DIF-TR_BU64 4F2A0180 80023F1B60

- 1141 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-22 Individual signals from each BU: CBF-TR

Data ID Data ID
CBF-TR_BU1 4F2A0182 8202001B62
CBF-TR_BU2 4F2A0182 8202011B62
CBF-TR_BU3 4F2A0182 8202021B62
CBF-TR_BU4 4F2A0182 8202031B62
CBF-TR_BU5 4F2A0182 8202041B62
CBF-TR_BU6 4F2A0182 8202051B62
CBF-TR_BU7 4F2A0182 8202061B62
CBF-TR_BU8 4F2A0182 8202071B62
CBF-TR_BU9 4F2A0182 8202081B62
CBF-TR_BU10 4F2A0182 8202091B62
CBF-TR_BU11 4F2A0182 82020A1B62
CBF-TR_BU12 4F2A0182 82020B1B62
CBF-TR_BU13 4F2A0182 82020C1B62
CBF-TR_BU14 4F2A0182 82020D1B62
CBF-TR_BU15 4F2A0182 82020E1B62
CBF-TR_BU16 4F2A0182 82020F1B62
CBF-TR_BU17 4F2A0182 8202101B62
CBF-TR_BU18 4F2A0182 8202111B62
CBF-TR_BU19 4F2A0182 8202121B62
CBF-TR_BU20 4F2A0182 8202131B62
CBF-TR_BU21 4F2A0182 8202141B62
CBF-TR_BU22 4F2A0182 8202151B62
CBF-TR_BU23 4F2A0182 8202161B62
CBF-TR_BU24 4F2A0182 8202171B62
CBF-TR_BU25 4F2A0182 8202181B62
CBF-TR_BU26 4F2A0182 8202191B62
CBF-TR_BU27 4F2A0182 82021A1B62
CBF-TR_BU28 4F2A0182 82021B1B62
CBF-TR_BU29 4F2A0182 82021C1B62
CBF-TR_BU30 4F2A0182 82021D1B62
CBF-TR_BU31 4F2A0182 82021E1B62
CBF-TR_BU32 4F2A0182 82021F1B62
CBF-TR 4F2A0182 8200021B62 CBF-TR_BU33 4F2A0182 8202201B62
CBF-TR_BU34 4F2A0182 8202211B62
CBF-TR_BU35 4F2A0182 8202221B62
CBF-TR_BU36 4F2A0182 8202231B62
CBF-TR_BU37 4F2A0182 8202241B62
CBF-TR_BU38 4F2A0182 8202251B62
CBF-TR_BU39 4F2A0182 8202261B62
CBF-TR_BU40 4F2A0182 8202271B62
CBF-TR_BU41 4F2A0182 8202281B62
CBF-TR_BU42 4F2A0182 8202291B62
CBF-TR_BU43 4F2A0182 82022A1B62
CBF-TR_BU44 4F2A0182 82022B1B62
CBF-TR_BU45 4F2A0182 82022C1B62
CBF-TR_BU46 4F2A0182 82022D1B62
CBF-TR_BU47 4F2A0182 82022E1B62
CBF-TR_BU48 4F2A0182 82022F1B62
CBF-TR_BU49 4F2A0182 8202301B62
CBF-TR_BU50 4F2A0182 8202311B62
CBF-TR_BU51 4F2A0182 8202321B62
CBF-TR_BU52 4F2A0182 8202331B62
CBF-TR_BU53 4F2A0182 8202341B62
CBF-TR_BU54 4F2A0182 8202351B62
CBF-TR_BU55 4F2A0182 8202361B62
CBF-TR_BU56 4F2A0182 8202371B62
CBF-TR_BU57 4F2A0182 8202381B62
CBF-TR_BU58 4F2A0182 8202391B62
CBF-TR_BU59 4F2A0182 82023A1B62
CBF-TR_BU60 4F2A0182 82023B1B62
CBF-TR_BU61 4F2A0182 82023C1B62
CBF-TR_BU62 4F2A0182 82023D1B62
CBF-TR_BU63 4F2A0182 82023E1B62
CBF-TR_BU64 4F2A0182 82023F1B62

- 1142 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-23 Individual signals from each BU: COM-TR

Data ID Data ID
COM-TR_BU1 4F2A0183 8302001B63
COM-TR_BU2 4F2A0183 8302011B63
COM-TR_BU3 4F2A0183 8302021B63
COM-TR_BU4 4F2A0183 8302031B63
COM-TR_BU5 4F2A0183 8302041B63
COM-TR_BU6 4F2A0183 8302051B63
COM-TR_BU7 4F2A0183 8302061B63
COM-TR_BU8 4F2A0183 8302071B63
COM-TR_BU9 4F2A0183 8302081B63
COM-TR_BU10 4F2A0183 8302091B63
COM-TR_BU11 4F2A0183 83020A1B63
COM-TR_BU12 4F2A0183 83020B1B63
COM-TR_BU13 4F2A0183 83020C1B63
COM-TR_BU14 4F2A0183 83020D1B63
COM-TR_BU15 4F2A0183 83020E1B63
COM-TR_BU16 4F2A0183 83020F1B63
COM-TR_BU17 4F2A0183 8302101B63
COM-TR_BU18 4F2A0183 8302111B63
COM-TR_BU19 4F2A0183 8302121B63
COM-TR_BU20 4F2A0183 8302131B63
COM-TR_BU21 4F2A0183 8302141B63
COM-TR_BU22 4F2A0183 8302151B63
COM-TR_BU23 4F2A0183 8302161B63
COM-TR_BU24 4F2A0183 8302171B63
COM-TR_BU25 4F2A0183 8302181B63
COM-TR_BU26 4F2A0183 8302191B63
COM-TR_BU27 4F2A0183 83021A1B63
COM-TR_BU28 4F2A0183 83021B1B63
COM-TR_BU29 4F2A0183 83021C1B63
COM-TR_BU30 4F2A0183 83021D1B63
COM-TR_BU31 4F2A0183 83021E1B63
COM-TR_BU32 4F2A0183 83021F1B63
COM-TR 4F2A0183 8300021B63 COM-TR_BU33 4F2A0183 8302201B63
COM-TR_BU34 4F2A0183 8302211B63
COM-TR_BU35 4F2A0183 8302221B63
COM-TR_BU36 4F2A0183 8302231B63
COM-TR_BU37 4F2A0183 8302241B63
COM-TR_BU38 4F2A0183 8302251B63
COM-TR_BU39 4F2A0183 8302261B63
COM-TR_BU40 4F2A0183 8302271B63
COM-TR_BU41 4F2A0183 8302281B63
COM-TR_BU42 4F2A0183 8302291B63
COM-TR_BU43 4F2A0183 83022A1B63
COM-TR_BU44 4F2A0183 83022B1B63
COM-TR_BU45 4F2A0183 83022C1B63
COM-TR_BU46 4F2A0183 83022D1B63
COM-TR_BU47 4F2A0183 83022E1B63
COM-TR_BU48 4F2A0183 83022F1B63
COM-TR_BU49 4F2A0183 8302301B63
COM-TR_BU50 4F2A0183 8302311B63
COM-TR_BU51 4F2A0183 8302321B63
COM-TR_BU52 4F2A0183 8302331B63
COM-TR_BU53 4F2A0183 8302341B63
COM-TR_BU54 4F2A0183 8302351B63
COM-TR_BU55 4F2A0183 8302361B63
COM-TR_BU56 4F2A0183 8302371B63
COM-TR_BU57 4F2A0183 8302381B63
COM-TR_BU58 4F2A0183 8302391B63
COM-TR_BU59 4F2A0183 83023A1B63
COM-TR_BU60 4F2A0183 83023B1B63
COM-TR_BU61 4F2A0183 83023C1B63
COM-TR_BU62 4F2A0183 83023D1B63
COM-TR_BU63 4F2A0183 83023E1B63
COM-TR_BU64 4F2A0183 83023F1B63

- 1143 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-24 Individual signals from each BU: EFP-TR

Data ID Data ID
EFP-TR_BU1 4F2A0184 8402001B64
EFP-TR_BU2 4F2A0184 8402011B64
EFP-TR_BU3 4F2A0184 8402021B64
EFP-TR_BU4 4F2A0184 8402031B64
EFP-TR_BU5 4F2A0184 8402041B64
EFP-TR_BU6 4F2A0184 8402051B64
EFP-TR_BU7 4F2A0184 8402061B64
EFP-TR_BU8 4F2A0184 8402071B64
EFP-TR_BU9 4F2A0184 8402081B64
EFP-TR_BU10 4F2A0184 8402091B64
EFP-TR_BU11 4F2A0184 84020A1B64
EFP-TR_BU12 4F2A0184 84020B1B64
EFP-TR_BU13 4F2A0184 84020C1B64
EFP-TR_BU14 4F2A0184 84020D1B64
EFP-TR_BU15 4F2A0184 84020E1B64
EFP-TR_BU16 4F2A0184 84020F1B64
EFP-TR_BU17 4F2A0184 8402101B64
EFP-TR_BU18 4F2A0184 8402111B64
EFP-TR_BU19 4F2A0184 8402121B64
EFP-TR_BU20 4F2A0184 8402131B64
EFP-TR_BU21 4F2A0184 8402141B64
EFP-TR_BU22 4F2A0184 8402151B64
EFP-TR_BU23 4F2A0184 8402161B64
EFP-TR_BU24 4F2A0184 8402171B64
EFP-TR_BU25 4F2A0184 8402181B64
EFP-TR_BU26 4F2A0184 8402191B64
EFP-TR_BU27 4F2A0184 84021A1B64
EFP-TR_BU28 4F2A0184 84021B1B64
EFP-TR_BU29 4F2A0184 84021C1B64
EFP-TR_BU30 4F2A0184 84021D1B64
EFP-TR_BU31 4F2A0184 84021E1B64
EFP-TR_BU32 4F2A0184 84021F1B64
EFP-TR 4F2A0184 8400021B64 EFP-TR_BU33 4F2A0184 8402201B64
EFP-TR_BU34 4F2A0184 8402211B64
EFP-TR_BU35 4F2A0184 8402221B64
EFP-TR_BU36 4F2A0184 8402231B64
EFP-TR_BU37 4F2A0184 8402241B64
EFP-TR_BU38 4F2A0184 8402251B64
EFP-TR_BU39 4F2A0184 8402261B64
EFP-TR_BU40 4F2A0184 8402271B64
EFP-TR_BU41 4F2A0184 8402281B64
EFP-TR_BU42 4F2A0184 8402291B64
EFP-TR_BU43 4F2A0184 84022A1B64
EFP-TR_BU44 4F2A0184 84022B1B64
EFP-TR_BU45 4F2A0184 84022C1B64
EFP-TR_BU46 4F2A0184 84022D1B64
EFP-TR_BU47 4F2A0184 84022E1B64
EFP-TR_BU48 4F2A0184 84022F1B64
EFP-TR_BU49 4F2A0184 8402301B64
EFP-TR_BU50 4F2A0184 8402311B64
EFP-TR_BU51 4F2A0184 8402321B64
EFP-TR_BU52 4F2A0184 8402331B64
EFP-TR_BU53 4F2A0184 8402341B64
EFP-TR_BU54 4F2A0184 8402351B64
EFP-TR_BU55 4F2A0184 8402361B64
EFP-TR_BU56 4F2A0184 8402371B64
EFP-TR_BU57 4F2A0184 8402381B64
EFP-TR_BU58 4F2A0184 8402391B64
EFP-TR_BU59 4F2A0184 84023A1B64
EFP-TR_BU60 4F2A0184 84023B1B64
EFP-TR_BU61 4F2A0184 84023C1B64
EFP-TR_BU62 4F2A0184 84023D1B64
EFP-TR_BU63 4F2A0184 84023E1B64
EFP-TR_BU64 4F2A0184 84023F1B64

- 1144 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Table 11-25 Individual signals from each BU: GEN.TR.TRIP

Data ID Data ID
GEN.TR.TRIP_BU1 4F2A018B 8B02001B6B
GEN.TR.TRIP_BU11 4F2A018B 8B020A1B6B
GEN.TR.TRIP_BU12 4F2A018B 8B020B1B6B
GEN.TR.TRIP_BU13 4F2A018B 8B020C1B6B
GEN.TR.TRIP_BU14 4F2A018B 8B020D1B6B
GEN.TR.TRIP_BU15 4F2A018B 8B020E1B6B
GEN.TR.TRIP_BU16 4F2A018B 8B020F1B6B
GEN.TR.TRIP 4F2A018B 8B00021B6B GEN.TR.TRIP_BU33 4F2A018B 8B02201B6B

- 1145 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Appendix 11 Engineering exercise

- 1146 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(i) CB operation on MIMIC

The following figure is a MIMIC configuration example using DPOS function for CB control.
In the exercise, we have a configuration with DPOS, BIO, interlock (ILK), and MIMIC symbol.
Circuit breakers IED
Monitor
Control
CB auxiliary contacts BIO setting MIMIC setting DPOS setting

Output circuits Open
Open/closed
CB main contact N/O states Open signal CB open/close control on
BI1 IED front panel
Closed
N/C Closed signal (Local-end operation)
BI2
Opening Closing (+) (–)

Closing key
Input circuits Pushing Close OK-decision
CLOSE command
Input BO3 ILK setting
OPEN command Pushing Open
Opening key Checking CB
Input BO4
Control commands operation
Figure 3 Exercise: CB controlled with DPOS plus MIMIC
The example here shows how a CB

symbol is created on MIMIC.
Figure 4 Exercise: CB symbol created with GR-TIEMS
The setting steps will be discussed in the exercise:

Setting DPOS01 for the control
Setting BI1 and BI2 circuits (at IO#1 slot) for monitoring
Setting BO3 and BO4 circuits (at IO#2 slot) for commands
Setting ILK to get a operation permission
Setting CB symbol on MIMIC
Creation of a test CB for the exercise (if required)

- 1147 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Preparation: Materials (exercise)

We will have an exercise using the materials shown in Table 3 in order that an example MIMIC
(Figure 3) will be achieved.
Table 3 Example: materials for CB control on MIMIC
Examples Usages Function (ID) Ref. (Pages)
Binary inputs (BI) Monitoring IO_SLOT1(200B01) 746
Binary outputs(BO) Commands IO_SLOT2(200B02) 748
Control operation(DPOS01) OPEN/CLOSE DPOS(512001) 378
Interlock (ILK) Checking ILK(570001) 361
Note: The above materials are provided just for the exercise and explanation here.
Figure 5 shows control and monitor signal flows. Figure 6 illustrates the corresponding signals
for the commands. States of CB main contact will present with N/O and NC contacts in
accordance with OPEN/CLOSE commands generated in DPOS01.
DPOS Commands CB main contact Aux. contacts DPOS monitors
Output signals
Aux CB main contact
Output. CLOSED OPEN Traveling
N/O Closed Open Open
(On) (Off ) (Off )
N/C Open Closed Open
(Off) (On) (Off)
CLOSED
CLOSE CB state
BO3 Phase A,B,C judgements
OPEN (+) (–)
OPEN
BO4
N/O States
BI1
CB state Command
Traveling N/C health
acquisition logic
BI2 check
BO4 RE
BO3 RE
Figure 5 Commands and signals in DPOS01 control
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT2
Close signal 512001 8203011DD3
DPOS01_OEX_BO BO3 CLOSE BO3 200B02 8202021113
RE Setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD]
512001 8103011DD0 BO3 RE
Open signal
DPOS01_FEX_BO 200B02 8302031113
BO4 OPEN BO4
BO4 RE Setting [DPOS01-FEXBORD]
RE
CB main contact Travelling Travelling Entering signals
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
IO_SLOT1
CB aux. contact 200B01 8001001110
Closed (On)
N/O BI1 Setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
Open(Off)
Closed (On) 200B01 8101011110

N/C BI2 Setting [DPOS01A-NCLSG]
Open (Off)
Setting [DPOS01B-NOPSG]
Setting [DPOS01B-NCLSG]
Setting [DPOS01B-NOPSG]
Setting [DPOS01B-NCLSG]
Figure 6 Output and input signals in DPOS01 operations

- 1148 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
DPOS01 setting (exercise)

We need to set [DPOS01-EN]=On for DPOS01 in order that we can control the CB by MIMIC
at local-end. Table 4 and Figure 7 show the setting items in the DPOS01 controlling.
DPOS inputs
When [DPOS01-CTRN]=On is set for general CB controls (#1), we can make settings NOPSG
(N/O) and NCLSG (N/C) to get CB aux. contact signals in DPOS01.
[DPOS01A-NOPSG]=BI1 and [DPOS01A-NCLSG]=BI2 (#2, #3)
[DPOS01B-NOPSG]=BI1 and [DPOS01B-NCLSG]=BI2 (#4, #5)
[DPOS01C-NOPSG]=BI1 and [DPOS01C-NCLSG]=BI2 (#6, #7)
DPOS outputs
When [DPOS01-PLSM]= Var is set, OPEN or CLOSE command will be issued if Closing or
Opening keys are pushed (#8).
We need have setting [DPOS01-FEXBORD]=BO3 RE (#9) in order that the command has been
issued without discrepancy (see Figure 6). Similarly, we have the setting [DPOS01-
OEXBORD]=BO4 RE (#10).
Table 4 Exercise in DPOS01 (Function ID: 512001)

Step Signals/ [Settings] Signal/[Setting] contents
0 [DPOS01-EN] DPOS01 ready switch
1 [DPOS01-CTRN] DPOS01 switch
[DPOS01A-NOPSG] N/O setting at phase-A
2
BI1 BI1 circuit output
[DPOS01A-NCLSG] N/C setting at phase-A
3
[DPOS01B-NOPSG] N/O setting at phase-B
4
[DPOS01B-NCLSG] N/C signal at phase-B
5
[DPOS01C-NOPSG] N/O setting at phase-C
6
[DPOS01C-NCLSG] N/C setting at phase-C
7
8 [DPOS01-PLSM] OPEN/CLOSE pulse adjustment
[DPOS01-FEXBORD] OPEN validity setting
9
BO4 RE Read-back signal on BO4 circuit
[DPOS01-OEXBORD] CLOSE validity setting
10
BO3 RE Read-back signal on BO3 circuit

- 1149 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Step: #0
Step: #2
Step: #3
Step: #4
Step: #5
Step: #6
Step: #7
Step: #1
Step: #9
Step:#10
Step: #8
Figure 7 DPOS01-EN etc., settings

- 1150 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BIO setting (exercise)

Issuing CLOSE and OPEN commands will be done on BO3 and BO4 circuits, as shown in
Figure 5.
We can make [BO3_CPL]=On and DPOS01_OEX_BO settings on BO3 circuit in order that BO3
driver can issue CLOSE command (#11, #13; see Figure 8). Similarly, for issuing OPEN,
[BO4_CPL]=On and DPOS01_FEX_BO settings can be made (#12, #14), as shown in Table 5.
Table 5 Exercise materials in DPOS01, IO_SLOT1/2 (ID: 512001, 200B01/200B02)

11 [BO3_CPL] CPL switch on BO3 circuit
12 [BO4_CPL] CPL switch on BO4 circuit
13 DPOS01_OEX_BO Signal for CLOSE
14 DPOS01_FEX_BO Signal for OPEN
Step: #11 Step: #13

Step: #12 Step: #14
Figure 8 BIO settings

- 1151 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
ILK setting (exercise)

CLOSE/OPEN commands can be issued if operation criteria are passed in ILK function. In the
ILK, either OK or NG-decisions will be published for DPOS01. Generally, we shall make an
interlock-check formula in ILK to generate OK-decision, but we will skip making the formula
in the exercise, for the simplicity. Thus, we will make the formula such that constant_1
(C1_BIT) is injected at the formula always so that OK-decision will be issued unconditionally.
Table 6 Exercise materials in CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)

16 C1_BIT Constant value = 1 in bit type
Step: #15
Step: #16
Step: #17
Step: #18
Step: #19
Figure 9 ILK formula setting

- 1152 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
MIMIC editing (exercise)

To show CB symbol on Large LCD, we will have MIMIC setting (#21 to #24), as shown in Table
7. MMC state signal (#21) is provided in DPOS01 function so we can drag and drop it on the
MIMIC, as shown in Figure 10. Preferred name for the symbol can be entered on the screen
(#24).
Table 7 Exercise materials in DPOS01 (FB: 512001)

21 DPOS01_MMC_ST Information signal about DPOS01 state
Step: #20
Step: #21
Step: #22
Step: #23
Step: #24
Figure 10 Setting CB symbol on MIMIC

- 1153 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Writing setting data (exercise)

MIMIC setting data generated (#0–#24) will be transferred to the IED, when the below
operations are carried out on the GR-TIEMS.
Step: #25
Settings in #0–14
Settings in #15–19
Step: #26
Figure 11 Data write
Operation (exercise)
Table 6.12-3 shows the keys for the exercise. We can manipulate the CB by touching keys and
symbols.
Table 8 MIMIC operations
Keys, Symbols CB control operation on MIMIC
L
R
Push L/R key to switch for Local mode
MENU
MIMIC
Screen the MIMIC.
Select CB symbol on MIMIC screen
I Push CLOSE key (I) for closing
O Push OPEN key (O) for opening

- 1154 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Tips (exercise)
If we have to have MIMIC exercise without actual breaker, a test CB can be possible for the
exercise. Figure 12 exemplifies a test CB made by PLC function. To create a test CB, see
Chapter PLC function for more detail. Note that the test CB below is just an example.
Test CB made with PLC logic for exercise
Time = 100ms or longer
BI3 at IO_SLOT1 Flip-flop On delay timer BO1 at IO_SLOT2
S1_BI3 RS TON S2_BO1

OUT SET Q1 IN Q IN Stat
Stat RESET1 PT ET
BI4 at IO_SLOT1 Flip-flop BO2 at IO_SLOT2

S1_BI4 RS TON S2_BO1
OUT SET Q1 IN Q IN Stat
Stat RESET1 PT ET
Wiring diagram for test CB made with PLC function

Plus(+)
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT1
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT2
BO3 BO1
BO4 Test CB for the BO2

Short
wires exercise Short
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT1 wires
Made with PLC
BI3 BI1
BI4 BI2
Minus(-)
Figure 12 Test CB made with PLC function (example)

Note: In the example, spare BI3&4 and BO1&2 circuits (in red boxes) are used for
testing.

- 1155 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
(ii) Signal monitor and meter displayed on MIMIC

Figure 13 illustrates how metering signal (Ia) and state (SPOS01) are screened on Large LCD
(MIMIC). Figure 4 shows that the GR-TIEMS editor can configure the metering and state
symbols on the MIMIC screen.
IED (MIMIC) screen
Display (SPOS01) Manual

Data ID:
Device01 (SPOS01) 510001 3101011D00
State: On
SPOS01_MMC_ On
Display (Ia)
Metering value(Ia) Data ID:
Value: 999.9A 711001 4301001076
Ia: 999.9A
Meterin
Data ID
Figure 13 Exercise: screen metering signal and state on MIMIC
On
The example here shows how meter

symbols are created on MIMIC editor.
Figure 14 Exercise: two symbols are configured with MIMIC editor
Preparation: Materials (exercise)

We will have an exercise using the materials shown in Table 3 in order that MIMIC example
should be achieved in Figure 4.
Table 9 Example: materials
Examples Usages Function (ID) Ref. (Pages)
S43 device switch at BU On/Off monitor SPOS01(510001) Page 251
Current meter at CU Metering MES_MANAGEMENT(711004) Page 1160
Current meter at BU Metering MES_MANAGEMENT(711004) Page 1160
Note: The above materials are provided just for the exercise and explanation. All signals
for Large LCD(MIMIC) at BU are summarized in sec. (ii)-6. SPOS01 is available
only in BU.

- 1156 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Configuration: SPOS symbol editing (exercise)

We can have a configuration of SPOS01-MMC signal to show SPOS01 symbol on Large LCD,
as shown in Table 7. SPOS01MMC_ST signal is served as an intermediator between the
SPOS01 function and MIMIC screen. Open Signal lists and select it from them. During the
drag and drop operation, the user can select a symbol from the symbol options.
Table 10 Exercise materials in SPOS01 (FB: 510001)
2 SPOS01_MMC_ST SPOS01 state for MIMIC
Step: #1
Step: #2 Step: #3
Step: #4
Figure 15 Setting SPOS01 symbol on MIMIC

- 1157 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Configuration: Metering symbol editing (exercise)

Similarly, we can have a configuration of Ia metering signal on Large LCD. Ia metering signal
is provided as an intermediator between the metering function and MIMIC screen. Its data is
a raw from the function, so we need to weigh it with the multiplier setting. We can give a
unit(#8) for the data.
Table 11 Exercise materials in MES_MANAGEMENT (FB: 711003)
7 Ia Ia measurement primary
Step: #5
Step: #6
Step: #7 Step: #8
Figure 16 Setting Ia symbol on MIMIC

- 1158 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Writing setting data (exercise)

MIMIC setting data generated (#1–#8) will be transferred to the IED, when the below
operations are carried out on the GR-TIEMS.
Step: #25
Settings in #0–14
Step: #26
Figure 17 Data write
Operation (exercise)
Table 6.12-3 shows the keys for the exercise. We can manipulate the CB by touching keys and
symbols.
Table 12 MIMIC operations
Keys, Symbols CB control operation on MIMIC
L
R
Push L/R key to switch for Local mode
MENU
MIMIC
Screen the MIMIC.

- 1159 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
Available signals displayed on MIMIC

SPOS (FunctionID:510001)
Element IDs Names Contents Note Element IDs Names Contents Note
3101011D00 SPOS01_MMC_ST SPOS01 state for MIMIC 31010B1D00 SPOS11_MMC_ST SPOS11 state for MIMIC
3101021D00 SPOS02_MMC_ST SPOS02 state for MIMIC 31010C1D00 SPOS12_MMC_ST SPOS12 state for MIMIC
3101031D00 SPOS03_MMC_ST SPOS03 state for MIMIC 31010D1D00 SPOS13_MMC_ST SPOS13 state for MIMIC
3101041D00 SPOS04_MMC_ST SPOS04 state for MIMIC 31010E1D00 SPOS14_MMC_ST SPOS14 state for MIMIC
3101051D00 SPOS05_MMC_ST SPOS05 state for MIMIC 31010F1D00 SPOS15_MMC_ST SPOS15 state for MIMIC
3101061D00 SPOS06_MMC_ST SPOS06 state for MIMIC 3101101D00 SPOS16_MMC_ST SPOS16 state for MIMIC
31010A1D00 SPOS10_MMC_ST SPOS10 state for MIMIC 3101141D00 SPOS20_MMC_ST SPOS20 state for MIMIC
TPOS (FunctionID:513001)
3104011D00 TPOS01_MMC_ST TPOS01 state for MIMIC 31040D1D00 TPOS13_MMC_ST TPOS13 state for MIMIC
3104021D00 TPOS02_MMC_ST TPOS02 state for MIMIC 31040E1D00 TPOS14_MMC_ST TPOS14 state for MIMIC
3104031D00 TPOS03_MMC_ST TPOS03 state for MIMIC 31040F1D00 TPOS15_MMC_ST TPOS15 state for MIMIC
3104041D00 TPOS04_MMC_ST TPOS04 state for MIMIC 3104101D00 TPOS16_MMC_ST TPOS16 state for MIMIC
31040A1D00 TPOS10_MMC_ST TPOS10 state for MIMIC 3104161D00 TPOS22_MMC_ST TPOS22 state for MIMIC
31040B1D00 TPOS11_MMC_ST TPOS11 state for MIMIC 3104171D00 TPOS23_MMC_ST TPOS23 state for MIMIC
31040C1D00 TPOS12_MMC_ST TPOS12 state for MIMIC 3104181D00 TPOS24_MMC_ST TPOS24 state for MIMIC

- 1160 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
DPOS (FunctionID:512001)
3103011D00 DPOS01_MMC_ST DPOS01 state for MIMIC 3103251D00 DPOS37_MMC_ST DPOS37 state for MIMIC
3103061D00 DPOS06_MMC_ST DPOS06 state for MIMIC 31032A1D00 DPOS42_MMC_ST DPOS42 state for MIMIC
3103071D00 DPOS07_MMC_ST DPOS07 state for MIMIC 31032B1D00 DPOS43_MMC_ST DPOS43 state for MIMIC
3103081D00 DPOS08_MMC_ST DPOS08 state for MIMIC 31032C1D00 DPOS44_MMC_ST DPOS44 state for MIMIC
3103091D00 DPOS09_MMC_ST DPOS09 state for MIMIC 31032D1D00 DPOS45_MMC_ST DPOS45 state for MIMIC
31030A1D00 DPOS10_MMC_ST DPOS10 state for MIMIC 31032E1D00 DPOS46_MMC_ST DPOS46 state for MIMIC
31030B1D00 DPOS11_MMC_ST DPOS11 state for MIMIC 31032F1D00 DPOS47_MMC_ST DPOS47 state for MIMIC
31030C1D00 DPOS12_MMC_ST DPOS12 state for MIMIC 3103301D00 DPOS48_MMC_ST DPOS48 state for MIMIC
31030D1D00 DPOS13_MMC_ST DPOS13 state for MIMIC 3103311D00 DPOS49_MMC_ST DPOS49 state for MIMIC
31030E1D00 DPOS14_MMC_ST DPOS14 state for MIMIC 3103321D00 DPOS50_MMC_ST DPOS50 state for MIMIC
31030F1D00 DPOS15_MMC_ST DPOS15 state for MIMIC 3103331D00 DPOS51_MMC_ST DPOS51 state for MIMIC
3103161D00 DPOS22_MMC_ST DPOS22 state for MIMIC 31033A1D00 DPOS58_MMC_ST DPOS58 state for MIMIC
3103171D00 DPOS23_MMC_ST DPOS23 state for MIMIC 31033B1D00 DPOS59_MMC_ST DPOS59 state for MIMIC
3103181D00 DPOS24_MMC_ST DPOS24 state for MIMIC 31033C1D00 DPOS60_MMC_ST DPOS60 state for MIMIC
3103191D00 DPOS25_MMC_ST DPOS25 state for MIMIC 31033D1D00 DPOS61_MMC_ST DPOS61 state for MIMIC
31031A1D00 DPOS26_MMC_ST DPOS26 state for MIMIC 31033E1D00 DPOS62_MMC_ST DPOS62 state for MIMIC
31031B1D00 DPOS27_MMC_ST DPOS27 state for MIMIC 31033F1D00 DPOS63_MMC_ST DPOS63 state for MIMIC
31031C1D00 DPOS28_MMC_ST DPOS28 state for MIMIC 3103401D00 DPOS64_MMC_ST DPOS64 state for MIMIC
31031D1D00 DPOS29_MMC_ST DPOS29 state for MIMIC 3103411D00 DPOS65_MMC_ST DPOS65 state for MIMIC
31031E1D00 DPOS30_MMC_ST DPOS30 state for MIMIC 3103421D00 DPOS66_MMC_ST DPOS66 state for MIMIC
31031F1D00 DPOS31_MMC_ST DPOS31 state for MIMIC 3103431D00 DPOS67_MMC_ST DPOS67 state for MIMIC

- 1161 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
CU : MES_MANAGEMENT(FunctionID: 711003)
4302001076 VaA Va measurement primary 4302001051 VaA-Angle Va measurement angle
4302001078 VbA Vb measurement primary 4302001053 VbA-Angle Vb measurement angle
430200107A VcA Vc measurement primary 4302001055 VcA-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302011076 VaB Va measurement primary 4302011051 VaB-Angle Va measurement angle
4302011078 VbB Vb measurement primary 4302011053 VbB-Angle Vb measurement angle
430201107A VcB Vc measurement primary 4302011055 VcB-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302021076 VaC Va measurement primary 4302021051 VaC-Angle Va measurement angle
4302021078 VbC Vb measurement primary 4302021053 VbC-Angle Vb measurement angle
430202107A VcC Vc measurement primary 4302021055 VcC-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302031076 VaD Va measurement primary 4302031051 VaD-Angle Va measurement angle
4302031078 VbD Vb measurement primary 4302031053 VbD-Angle Vb measurement angle
430203107A VcD Vc measurement primary 4302031055 VcD-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302041076 VaE Va measurement primary 4302041051 VaE-Angle Va measurement angle
4302041078 VbE Vb measurement primary 4302041053 VbE-Angle Vb measurement angle
430204107A VcE Vc measurement primary 4302041055 VcE-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302051076 VaF Va measurement primary 4302051051 VaF-Angle Va measurement angle
4302051078 VbF Vb measurement primary 4302051053 VbF-Angle Vb measurement angle
430205107A VcF Vc measurement primary 4302051055 VcF-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302061076 VaG Va measurement primary 4302061051 VaG-Angle Va measurement angle
4302061078 VbG Vb measurement primary 4302061053 VbG-Angle Vb measurement angle
430206107A VcG Vc measurement primary 4302061055 VcG-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302071076 VaH Va measurement primary 4302071051 VaH-Angle Va measurement angle
4302071078 VbH Vb measurement primary 4302071053 VbH-Angle Vb measurement angle
430207107A VcH Vc measurement primary 4302071055 VcH-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302081076 V1A V1 measurement primary 4302081051 V1A-Angle V1 measurement angle
4302081078 V2A V2 measurement primary 4302081053 V2A-Angle V2 measurement angle
430208107A V0A V0 measurement primary 4302081055 V0A-Angle V0 measurement angle
4302091076 V1B V1 measurement primary 4302091051 V1B-Angle V1 measurement angle
4302091078 V2B V2 measurement primary 4302091053 V2B-Angle V2 measurement angle
430209107A V0B V0 measurement primary 4302091055 V0B-Angle V0 measurement angle
43020A1076 V1C V1 measurement primary 43020A1051 V1C-Angle V1 measurement angle
43020A1078 V2C V2 measurement primary 43020A1053 V2C-Angle V2 measurement angle
43020A107A V0C V0 measurement primary 43020A1055 V0C-Angle V0 measurement angle
43020B1076 V1D V1 measurement primary 43020B1051 V1D-Angle V1 measurement angle
43020B1078 V2D V2 measurement primary 43020B1053 V2D-Angle V2 measurement angle
43020B107A V0D V0 measurement primary 43020B1055 V0D-Angle V0 measurement angle
43020C1076 V1E V1 measurement primary 43020C1051 V1E-Angle V1 measurement angle
43020C1078 V2E V2 measurement primary 43020C1053 V2E-Angle V2 measurement angle
43020C107A V0E V0 measurement primary 43020C1055 V0E-Angle V0 measurement angle
43020D1076 V1F V1 measurement primary 43020D1051 V1F-Angle V1 measurement angle
43020D1078 V2F V2 measurement primary 43020D1053 V2F-Angle V2 measurement angle
43020D107A V0F V0 measurement primary 43020D1055 V0F-Angle V0 measurement angle
43020E1076 V1G V1 measurement primary 43020E1051 V1G-Angle V1 measurement angle
43020E1078 V2G V2 measurement primary 43020E1053 V2G-Angle V2 measurement angle
43020E107A V0G V0 measurement primary 43020E1055 V0G-Angle V0 measurement angle
43020F1076 V1H V1 measurement primary 43020F1051 V1H-Angle V1 measurement angle
43020F1078 V2H V2 measurement primary 43020F1053 V2H-Angle V2 measurement angle
43020F107A V0H V0 measurement primary 43020F1055 V0H-Angle V0 measurement angle
4301101076 Ia Ia-BU1 measurement primary 4301101051 Ia Ia-BU1 measurement angle
4301101078 Ib Ib-BU1 measurement primary 4301101053 Ib Ib-BU1 measurement angle
430110107A Ic Ic-BU1 measurement primary 4301101055 Ic Ic-BU1 measurement angle
43011A1076 Ia Ia-BU11 measurement primary 43011A1051 Ia Ia-BU11 measurement angle
43011A1078 Ib Ib-BU11 measurement primary 43011A1053 Ib Ib-BU11 measurement angle
43011A107A Ic Ic-BU11 measurement primary 43011A1055 Ic Ic-BU11 measurement angle
43011B1076 Ia Ia-BU12 measurement primary 43011B1051 Ia Ia-BU12 measurement angle
43011B1078 Ib Ib-BU12 measurement primary 43011B1053 Ib Ib-BU12 measurement angle
43011B107A Ic Ic-BU12 measurement primary 43011B1055 Ic Ic-BU12 measurement angle
43011C1076 Ia Ia-BU13 measurement primary 43011C1051 Ia Ia-BU13 measurement angle
43011C1078 Ib Ib-BU13 measurement primary 43011C1053 Ib Ib-BU13 measurement angle
43011C107A Ic Ic-BU13 measurement primary 43011C1055 Ic Ic-BU13 measurement angle
43011D1076 Ia Ia-BU14 measurement primary 43011D1051 Ia Ia-BU14 measurement angle
43011D1078 Ib Ib-BU14 measurement primary 43011D1053 Ib Ib-BU14 measurement angle
43011D107A Ic Ic-BU14 measurement primary 43011D1055 Ic Ic-BU14 measurement angle
43011E1076 Ia Ia-BU15 measurement primary 43011E1051 Ia Ia-BU15 measurement angle
43011E1078 Ib Ib-BU15 measurement primary 43011E1053 Ib Ib-BU15 measurement angle
43011E107A Ic Ic-BU15 measurement primary 43011E1055 Ic Ic-BU15 measurement angle
43011F1076 Ia Ia-BU16 measurement primary 43011F1051 Ia Ia-BU16 measurement angle
43011F1078 Ib Ib-BU16 measurement primary 43011F1053 Ib Ib-BU16 measurement angle
43011F107A Ic Ic-BU16 measurement primary 43011F1055 Ic Ic-BU16 measurement angle

- 1162 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)

- 1163 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
4302001050 VaA Va measurement secondary 31A0001060 V0-ERR ZoneA V0 Monitoring Result
4302001052 VbA Vb measurement secondary 31A0011060 V2-ERR ZoneA V2 Monitoring Result
4302001054 VcA Vc measurement secondary 31A0021060 V0-ERR ZoneB V0 Monitoring Result
4302011050 VaB Va measurement secondary 31A0031060 V2-ERR ZoneB V2 Monitoring Result
4302011052 VbB Vb measurement secondary 31A0041060 V0-ERR ZoneC V0 Monitoring Result
4302011054 VcB Vc measurement secondary 31A0051060 V2-ERR ZoneC V2 Monitoring Result
4302021050 VaC Va measurement secondary 31A0061060 V0-ERR ZoneD V0 Monitoring Result
4302021052 VbC Vb measurement secondary 31A0071060 V2-ERR ZoneD V2 Monitoring Result
4302021054 VcC Vc measurement secondary 31A0081060 V0-ERR ZoneE V0 Monitoring Result
4302031050 VaD Va measurement secondary 31A0091060 V2-ERR ZoneE V2 Monitoring Result
4302031052 VbD Vb measurement secondary 31A00A1060 V0-ERR ZoneF V0 Monitoring Result
4302031054 VcD Vc measurement secondary 31A00B1060 V2-ERR ZoneF V2 Monitoring Result
4302041050 VaE Va measurement secondary 31A00C1060 V0-ERR ZoneG V0 Monitoring Result
4302041052 VbE Vb measurement secondary 31A00D1060 V2-ERR ZoneG V2 Monitoring Result
4302041054 VcE Vc measurement secondary 31A00E1060 V0-ERR ZoneH V0 Monitoring Result
4302051050 VaF Va measurement secondary 31A00F1060 V2-ERR ZoneH V2 Monitoring Result
4302051052 VbF Vb measurement secondary 430600105C f Frequency measurement
4302051054 VcF Vc measurement secondary 43B10010C0 Ida DIF-CH Phase-A Id measurement primary
4302061050 VaG Va measurement secondary 43B10010C3 Idb DIF-CH Phase-B Id measurement primary
4302061052 VbG Vb measurement secondary 43B10010C6 Idc DIF-CH Phase-C Id measurement primary
4302061054 VcG Vc measurement secondary 43B10110C0 IdaA DIF-ZA Phase-A Id measurement primary
4302071050 VaH Va measurement secondary 43B10110C3 IdbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Id measurement primary
4302071052 VbH Vb measurement secondary 43B10110C6 IdcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Id measurement primary
4302071054 VcH Vc measurement secondary 43B10210C0 IdaB DIF-ZB Phase-A Id measurement primary
4302081050 V1A V1 measurement secondary 43B10210C3 IdbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Id measurement primary
4302081052 V2A V2 measurement secondary 43B10210C6 IdcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Id measurement primary
4302081054 V0A V0 measurement secondary 43B10310C0 IdaC DIF-ZC Phase-A Id measurement primary
4302091050 V1B V1 measurement secondary 43B10310C3 IdbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Id measurement primary
4302091052 V2B V2 measurement secondary 43B10310C6 IdcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Id measurement primary
4302091054 V0B V0 measurement secondary 43B10410C0 IdaD DIF-ZD Phase-A Id measurement primary
43020A1050 V1C V1 measurement secondary 43B10410C3 IdbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Id measurement primary
43020A1052 V2C V2 measurement secondary 43B10410C6 IdcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Id measurement primary
43020A1054 V0C V0 measurement secondary 43B10510C0 IdaE DIF-ZE Phase-A Id measurement primary
43020B1050 V1D V1 measurement secondary 43B10510C3 IdbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Id measurement primary
43020B1052 V2D V2 measurement secondary 43B10510C6 IdcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Id measurement primary
43020B1054 V0D V0 measurement secondary 43B10610C0 IdaF DIF-ZF Phase-A Id measurement primary
43020C1050 V1E V1 measurement secondary 43B10610C3 IdbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Id measurement primary
43020C1052 V2E V2 measurement secondary 43B10610C6 IdcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Id measurement primary
43020C1054 V0E V0 measurement secondary 43B10710C0 IdaG DIF-ZG Phase-A Id measurement primary
43020D1050 V1F V1 measurement secondary 43B10710C3 IdbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Id measurement primary
43020D1052 V2F V2 measurement secondary 43B10710C6 IdcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Id measurement primary
43020D1054 V0F V0 measurement secondary 43B10810C0 IdaH DIF-ZH Phase-A Id measurement primary
43020E1050 V1G V1 measurement secondary 43B10810C3 IdbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Id measurement primary
43020E1052 V2G V2 measurement secondary 43B10810C6 IdcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Id measurement primary
43020E1054 V0G V0 measurement secondary 43B10010C2 Ida DIF-CH Phase-A Id measurement percent
43020F1050 V1H V1 measurement secondary 43B10010C5 Idb DIF-CH Phase-B Id measurement percent
43020F1052 V2H V2 measurement secondary 43B10010C8 Idc DIF-CH Phase-C Id measurement percent
43020F1054 V0H V0 measurement secondary 43B10110C2 IdaA DIF-ZA Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301101050 Ia Ia-BU1 measurement secondary 43B10110C5 IdbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301101052 Ib Ib-BU1 measurement secondary 43B10110C8 IdcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Id measurement percent
4301101054 Ic Ic-BU1 measurement secondary 43B10210C2 IdaB DIF-ZB Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301111050 Ia Ia-BU2 measurement secondary 43B10210C5 IdbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301111052 Ib Ib-BU2 measurement secondary 43B10210C8 IdcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Id measurement percent
4301111054 Ic Ic-BU2 measurement secondary 43B10310C2 IdaC DIF-ZC Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301121050 Ia Ia-BU3 measurement secondary 43B10310C5 IdbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301121052 Ib Ib-BU3 measurement secondary 43B10310C8 IdcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Id measurement percent
4301121054 Ic Ic-BU3 measurement secondary 43B10410C2 IdaD DIF-ZD Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301131050 Ia Ia-BU4 measurement secondary 43B10410C5 IdbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301131052 Ib Ib-BU4 measurement secondary 43B10410C8 IdcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Id measurement percent
4301131054 Ic Ic-BU4 measurement secondary 43B10510C2 IdaE DIF-ZE Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301141050 Ia Ia-BU5 measurement secondary 43B10510C5 IdbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301141052 Ib Ib-BU5 measurement secondary 43B10510C8 IdcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Id measurement percent
4301141054 Ic Ic-BU5 measurement secondary 43B10610C2 IdaF DIF-ZF Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301151050 Ia Ia-BU6 measurement secondary 43B10610C5 IdbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301151052 Ib Ib-BU6 measurement secondary 43B10610C8 IdcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Id measurement percent
4301151054 Ic Ic-BU6 measurement secondary 43B10710C2 IdaG DIF-ZG Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301161050 Ia Ia-BU7 measurement secondary 43B10710C5 IdbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301161052 Ib Ib-BU7 measurement secondary 43B10710C8 IdcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Id measurement percent

- 1164 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
4301161054 Ic Ic-BU7 measurement secondary 43B10810C2 IdaH DIF-ZH Phase-A Id measurement percent
4301171050 Ia Ia-BU8 measurement secondary 43B10810C5 IdbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Id measurement percent
4301171052 Ib Ib-BU8 measurement secondary 43B10810C8 IdcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Id measurement percent
4301171054 Ic Ic-BU8 measurement secondary 43B11010C0 Ira DIF-CH Phase-A Ir measurement primary
4301181050 Ia Ia-BU9 measurement secondary 43B11010C3 Irb DIF-CH Phase-B Ir measurement primary
4301181052 Ib Ib-BU9 measurement secondary 43B11010C6 Irc DIF-CH Phase-C Ir measurement primary
4301181054 Ic Ic-BU9 measurement secondary 43B11110C0 IraA DIF-ZA Phase-A Ir measurement primary
4301191050 Ia Ia-BU10 measurement secondary 43B11110C3 IrbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Ir measurement primary
4301191052 Ib Ib-BU10 measurement secondary 43B11110C6 IrcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Ir measurement primary
4301191054 Ic Ic-BU10 measurement secondary 43B11210C0 IraB DIF-ZB Phase-A Ir measurement primary
43011A1050 Ia Ia-BU11 measurement secondary 43B11210C3 IrbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Ir measurement primary
43011A1052 Ib Ib-BU11 measurement secondary 43B11210C6 IrcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Ir measurement primary
43011A1054 Ic Ic-BU11 measurement secondary 43B11310C0 IraC DIF-ZC Phase-A Ir measurement primary
43011B1050 Ia Ia-BU12 measurement secondary 43B11310C3 IrbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Ir measurement primary
43011B1052 Ib Ib-BU12 measurement secondary 43B11310C6 IrcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Ir measurement primary
43011B1054 Ic Ic-BU12 measurement secondary 43B11410C0 IraD DIF-ZD Phase-A Ir measurement primary
43011C1050 Ia Ia-BU13 measurement secondary 43B11410C3 IrbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Ir measurement primary
43011C1052 Ib Ib-BU13 measurement secondary 43B11410C6 IrcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Ir measurement primary
43011C1054 Ic Ic-BU13 measurement secondary 43B11510C0 IraE DIF-ZE Phase-A Ir measurement primary
43011D1050 Ia Ia-BU14 measurement secondary 43B11510C3 IrbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Ir measurement primary
43011D1052 Ib Ib-BU14 measurement secondary 43B11510C6 IrcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Ir measurement primary
43011D1054 Ic Ic-BU14 measurement secondary 43B11610C0 IraF DIF-ZF Phase-A Ir measurement primary
43011E1050 Ia Ia-BU15 measurement secondary 43B11610C3 IrbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Ir measurement primary
43011E1052 Ib Ib-BU15 measurement secondary 43B11610C6 IrcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Ir measurement primary
43011E1054 Ic Ic-BU15 measurement secondary 43B11710C0 IraG DIF-ZG Phase-A Ir measurement primary
43011F1050 Ia Ia-BU16 measurement secondary 43B11710C3 IrbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Ir measurement primary
43011F1052 Ib Ib-BU16 measurement secondary 43B11710C6 IrcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Ir measurement primary
43011F1054 Ic Ic-BU16 measurement secondary 43B11810C0 IraH DIF-ZH Phase-A Ir measurement primary
4301201050 Ia Ia-BU17 measurement secondary 43B11810C3 IrbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Ir measurement primary
4301201052 Ib Ib-BU17 measurement secondary 43B11810C6 IrcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Ir measurement primary
4301201054 Ic Ic-BU17 measurement secondary 43B11010C2 Ira DIF-CH Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301211050 Ia Ia-BU18 measurement secondary 43B11010C5 Irb DIF-CH Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301211052 Ib Ib-BU18 measurement secondary 43B11010C8 Irc DIF-CH Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301211054 Ic Ic-BU18 measurement secondary 43B11110C2 IraA DIF-ZA Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301221050 Ia Ia-BU19 measurement secondary 43B11110C5 IrbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301221052 Ib Ib-BU19 measurement secondary 43B11110C8 IrcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301221054 Ic Ic-BU19 measurement secondary 43B11210C2 IraB DIF-ZB Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301231050 Ia Ia-BU20 measurement secondary 43B11210C5 IrbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301231052 Ib Ib-BU20 measurement secondary 43B11210C8 IrcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301231054 Ic Ic-BU20 measurement secondary 43B11310C2 IraC DIF-ZC Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301241050 Ia Ia-BU21 measurement secondary 43B11310C5 IrbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301241052 Ib Ib-BU21 measurement secondary 43B11310C8 IrcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301241054 Ic Ic-BU21 measurement secondary 43B11410C2 IraD DIF-ZD Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301251050 Ia Ia-BU22 measurement secondary 43B11410C5 IrbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301251052 Ib Ib-BU22 measurement secondary 43B11410C8 IrcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301251054 Ic Ic-BU22 measurement secondary 43B11510C2 IraE DIF-ZE Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301261050 Ia Ia-BU23 measurement secondary 43B11510C5 IrbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301261052 Ib Ib-BU23 measurement secondary 43B11510C8 IrcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301261054 Ic Ic-BU23 measurement secondary 43B11610C2 IraF DIF-ZF Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301271050 Ia Ia-BU24 measurement secondary 43B11610C5 IrbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301271052 Ib Ib-BU24 measurement secondary 43B11610C8 IrcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301271054 Ic Ic-BU24 measurement secondary 43B11710C2 IraG DIF-ZG Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301281050 Ia Ia-BU25 measurement secondary 43B11710C5 IrbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301281052 Ib Ib-BU25 measurement secondary 43B11710C8 IrcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301281054 Ic Ic-BU25 measurement secondary 43B11810C2 IraH DIF-ZH Phase-A Ir measurement percent
4301291050 Ia Ia-BU26 measurement secondary 43B11810C5 IrbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Ir measurement percent
4301291052 Ib Ib-BU26 measurement secondary 43B11810C8 IrcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Ir measurement percent
4301291054 Ic Ic-BU26 measurement secondary 43C10010C0 Ida DIF-CH Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
43012A1050 Ia Ia-BU27 measurement secondary 43C10010C3 Idb DIF-CH Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
43012A1052 Ib Ib-BU27 measurement secondary 43C10010C6 Idc DIF-CH Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
43012A1054 Ic Ic-BU27 measurement secondary 43C10110C0 IdaA DIF-ZA Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
43012B1050 Ia Ia-BU28 measurement secondary 43C10110C3 IdbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
43012B1052 Ib Ib-BU28 measurement secondary 43C10110C6 IdcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
43012B1054 Ic Ic-BU28 measurement secondary 43C10210C0 IdaB DIF-ZB Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
43012C1050 Ia Ia-BU29 measurement secondary 43C10210C3 IdbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
43012C1052 Ib Ib-BU29 measurement secondary 43C10210C6 IdcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
43012C1054 Ic Ic-BU29 measurement secondary 43C10310C0 IdaC DIF-ZC Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
43012D1050 Ia Ia-BU30 measurement secondary 43C10310C3 IdbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
43012D1052 Ib Ib-BU30 measurement secondary 43C10310C6 IdcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
43012D1054 Ic Ic-BU30 measurement secondary 43C10410C0 IdaD DIF-ZD Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
43012E1050 Ia Ia-BU31 measurement secondary 43C10410C3 IdbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
43012E1052 Ib Ib-BU31 measurement secondary 43C10410C6 IdcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
43012E1054 Ic Ic-BU31 measurement secondary 43C10510C0 IdaE DIF-ZE Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
43012F1050 Ia Ia-BU32 measurement secondary 43C10510C3 IdbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
43012F1052 Ib Ib-BU32 measurement secondary 43C10510C6 IdcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
43012F1054 Ic Ic-BU32 measurement secondary 43C10610C0 IdaF DIF-ZF Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
4301301050 Ia Ia-BU33 measurement secondary 43C10610C3 IdbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
4301301052 Ib Ib-BU33 measurement secondary 43C10610C6 IdcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
4301301054 Ic Ic-BU33 measurement secondary 43C10710C0 IdaG DIF-ZG Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
4301311050 Ia Ia-BU34 measurement secondary 43C10710C3 IdbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
4301311052 Ib Ib-BU34 measurement secondary 43C10710C6 IdcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
4301311054 Ic Ic-BU34 measurement secondary 43C10810C0 IdaH DIF-ZH Phase-A Id measurement primary for fault record
4301321050 Ia Ia-BU35 measurement secondary 43C10810C3 IdbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Id measurement primary for fault record
4301321052 Ib Ib-BU35 measurement secondary 43C10810C6 IdcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Id measurement primary for fault record
4301321054 Ic Ic-BU35 measurement secondary 43C10010C2 Ida DIF-CH Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
4301331050 Ia Ia-BU36 measurement secondary 43C10010C5 Idb DIF-CH Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
4301331052 Ib Ib-BU36 measurement secondary 43C10010C8 Idc DIF-CH Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
4301331054 Ic Ic-BU36 measurement secondary 43C10110C2 IdaA DIF-ZA Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
4301341050 Ia Ia-BU37 measurement secondary 43C10110C5 IdbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
4301341052 Ib Ib-BU37 measurement secondary 43C10110C8 IdcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
4301341054 Ic Ic-BU37 measurement secondary 43C10210C2 IdaB DIF-ZB Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
4301351050 Ia Ia-BU38 measurement secondary 43C10210C5 IdbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
4301351052 Ib Ib-BU38 measurement secondary 43C10210C8 IdcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
4301351054 Ic Ic-BU38 measurement secondary 43C10310C2 IdaC DIF-ZC Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
4301361050 Ia Ia-BU39 measurement secondary 43C10310C5 IdbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
4301361052 Ib Ib-BU39 measurement secondary 43C10310C8 IdcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
4301361054 Ic Ic-BU39 measurement secondary 43C10410C2 IdaD DIF-ZD Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
4301371050 Ia Ia-BU40 measurement secondary 43C10410C5 IdbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
4301371052 Ib Ib-BU40 measurement secondary 43C10410C8 IdcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
4301371054 Ic Ic-BU40 measurement secondary 43C10510C2 IdaE DIF-ZE Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
4301381050 Ia Ia-BU41 measurement secondary 43C10510C5 IdbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
4301381052 Ib Ib-BU41 measurement secondary 43C10510C8 IdcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
4301381054 Ic Ic-BU41 measurement secondary 43C10610C2 IdaF DIF-ZF Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record

- 1165 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
4301391050 Ia Ia-BU42 measurement secondary 43C10610C5 IdbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
4301391052 Ib Ib-BU42 measurement secondary 43C10610C8 IdcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
4301391054 Ic Ic-BU42 measurement secondary 43C10710C2 IdaG DIF-ZG Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
43013A1050 Ia Ia-BU43 measurement secondary 43C10710C5 IdbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
43013A1052 Ib Ib-BU43 measurement secondary 43C10710C8 IdcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
43013A1054 Ic Ic-BU43 measurement secondary 43C10810C2 IdaH DIF-ZH Phase-A Id measurement percent for fault record
43013B1050 Ia Ia-BU44 measurement secondary 43C10810C5 IdbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Id measurement percent for fault record
43013B1052 Ib Ib-BU44 measurement secondary 43C10810C8 IdcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Id measurement percent for fault record
43013B1054 Ic Ic-BU44 measurement secondary 43C11010C0 Ira DIF-CH Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013C1050 Ia Ia-BU45 measurement secondary 43C11010C3 Irb DIF-CH Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013C1052 Ib Ib-BU45 measurement secondary 43C11010C6 Irc DIF-CH Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013C1054 Ic Ic-BU45 measurement secondary 43C11110C0 IraA DIF-ZA Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013D1050 Ia Ia-BU46 measurement secondary 43C11110C3 IrbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013D1052 Ib Ib-BU46 measurement secondary 43C11110C6 IrcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013D1054 Ic Ic-BU46 measurement secondary 43C11210C0 IraB DIF-ZB Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013E1050 Ia Ia-BU47 measurement secondary 43C11210C3 IrbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013E1052 Ib Ib-BU47 measurement secondary 43C11210C6 IrcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013E1054 Ic Ic-BU47 measurement secondary 43C11310C0 IraC DIF-ZC Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013F1050 Ia Ia-BU48 measurement secondary 43C11310C3 IrbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013F1052 Ib Ib-BU48 measurement secondary 43C11310C6 IrcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
43013F1054 Ic Ic-BU48 measurement secondary 43C11410C0 IraD DIF-ZD Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301401050 Ia Ia-BU49 measurement secondary 43C11410C3 IrbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301401052 Ib Ib-BU49 measurement secondary 43C11410C6 IrcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301401054 Ic Ic-BU49 measurement secondary 43C11510C0 IraE DIF-ZE Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301411050 Ia Ia-BU50 measurement secondary 43C11510C3 IrbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301411052 Ib Ib-BU50 measurement secondary 43C11510C6 IrcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301411054 Ic Ic-BU50 measurement secondary 43C11610C0 IraF DIF-ZF Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301421050 Ia Ia-BU51 measurement secondary 43C11610C3 IrbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301421052 Ib Ib-BU51 measurement secondary 43C11610C6 IrcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301421054 Ic Ic-BU51 measurement secondary 43C11710C0 IraG DIF-ZG Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301431050 Ia Ia-BU52 measurement secondary 43C11710C3 IrbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301431052 Ib Ib-BU52 measurement secondary 43C11710C6 IrcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301431054 Ic Ic-BU52 measurement secondary 43C11810C0 IraH DIF-ZH Phase-A Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301441050 Ia Ia-BU53 measurement secondary 43C11810C3 IrbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301441052 Ib Ib-BU53 measurement secondary 43C11810C6 IrcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Ir measurement primary for fault record
4301441054 Ic Ic-BU53 measurement secondary 43C11010C2 Ira DIF-CH Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301451050 Ia Ia-BU54 measurement secondary 43C11010C5 Irb DIF-CH Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301451052 Ib Ib-BU54 measurement secondary 43C11010C8 Irc DIF-CH Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301451054 Ic Ic-BU54 measurement secondary 43C11110C2 IraA DIF-ZA Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301461050 Ia Ia-BU55 measurement secondary 43C11110C5 IrbA DIF-ZA Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301461052 Ib Ib-BU55 measurement secondary 43C11110C8 IrcA DIF-ZA Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301461054 Ic Ic-BU55 measurement secondary 43C11210C2 IraB DIF-ZB Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301471050 Ia Ia-BU56 measurement secondary 43C11210C5 IrbB DIF-ZB Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301471052 Ib Ib-BU56 measurement secondary 43C11210C8 IrcB DIF-ZB Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301471054 Ic Ic-BU56 measurement secondary 43C11310C2 IraC DIF-ZC Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301481050 Ia Ia-BU57 measurement secondary 43C11310C5 IrbC DIF-ZC Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301481052 Ib Ib-BU57 measurement secondary 43C11310C8 IrcC DIF-ZC Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301481054 Ic Ic-BU57 measurement secondary 43C11410C2 IraD DIF-ZD Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301491050 Ia Ia-BU58 measurement secondary 43C11410C5 IrbD DIF-ZD Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301491052 Ib Ib-BU58 measurement secondary 43C11410C8 IrcD DIF-ZD Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
4301491054 Ic Ic-BU58 measurement secondary 43C11510C2 IraE DIF-ZE Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014A1050 Ia Ia-BU59 measurement secondary 43C11510C5 IrbE DIF-ZE Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014A1052 Ib Ib-BU59 measurement secondary 43C11510C8 IrcE DIF-ZE Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014A1054 Ic Ic-BU59 measurement secondary 43C11610C2 IraF DIF-ZF Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014B1050 Ia Ia-BU60 measurement secondary 43C11610C5 IrbF DIF-ZF Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014B1052 Ib Ib-BU60 measurement secondary 43C11610C8 IrcF DIF-ZF Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014B1054 Ic Ic-BU60 measurement secondary 43C11710C2 IraG DIF-ZG Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014C1050 Ia Ia-BU61 measurement secondary 43C11710C5 IrbG DIF-ZG Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014C1052 Ib Ib-BU61 measurement secondary 43C11710C8 IrcG DIF-ZG Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014C1054 Ic Ic-BU61 measurement secondary 43C11810C2 IraH DIF-ZH Phase-A Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014D1050 Ia Ia-BU62 measurement secondary 43C11810C5 IrbH DIF-ZH Phase-B Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014D1052 Ib Ib-BU62 measurement secondary 43C11810C8 IrcH DIF-ZH Phase-C Ir measurement percent for fault record
43014D1054 Ic Ic-BU62 measurement secondary
43014E1050 Ia Ia-BU63 measurement secondary
43014E1052 Ib Ib-BU63 measurement secondary
43014E1054 Ic Ic-BU63 measurement secondary
43014F1050 Ia Ia-BU64 measurement secondary
43014F1052 Ib Ib-BU64 measurement secondary
43014F1054 Ic Ic-BU64 measurement secondary
4302001051 VaA-Angle Va measurement angle
4302001053 VbA-Angle Vb measurement angle
4302001055 VcA-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302011051 VaB-Angle Va measurement angle
4302011053 VbB-Angle Vb measurement angle
4302011055 VcB-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302021051 VaC-Angle Va measurement angle
4302021053 VbC-Angle Vb measurement angle
4302021055 VcC-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302031051 VaD-Angle Va measurement angle
4302031053 VbD-Angle Vb measurement angle
4302031055 VcD-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302041051 VaE-Angle Va measurement angle
4302041053 VbE-Angle Vb measurement angle
4302041055 VcE-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302051051 VaF-Angle Va measurement angle
4302051053 VbF-Angle Vb measurement angle
4302051055 VcF-Angle Vc measurement angle
4302061051 VaG-Angle Va measurement angle
4302061053 VbG-Angle Vb measurement angle

- 1166 -
6F2S1933 (0.04)
BU : MES_MANAGEMENT(FunctionID: 711004)
4301001076 Ia Ia measurement primary 430102107C Ie Ie measurement primary
4301001050 Ia Ia measurement secondary 4301021056 Ie Ie measurement secondary
4301001051 Ia-Angle Ia measurement angle 4301021057 Ie-Angle Ie measurement angle
4301001078 Ib Ib measurement primary 430103107C Ie Ie measurement primary
4301001052 Ib Ib measurement secondary 4301031056 Ie Ie measurement secondary
4301001053 Ib-Angle Ib measurement angle 4301031057 Ie-Angle Ie measurement angle
430100107A Ic Ic measurement primary 430604105C f Frequency measurement
4301001054 Ic Ic measurement secondary 420662105C f Frequency measurement
4301001055 Ic-Angle Ic measurement angle 3100901060 CT-ERR CT Monitoring Result
4301011076 I1 I1 measurement primary 3100911060 I0-ERR I0 Monitoring Result
4301011050 I1 I1 measurement secondary
4301011051 I1-Angle I1 measurement angle
4301011078 I2 I2 measurement primary
430101107C I0 I0 measurement primary

- 1167 -
Revision-up Records
Rev. and Section Approved Prepared
Change place and contents Checked by
Date (page) by by
0.00 First edition issued Y. Sonobe X. Tang T. Kaneko
–
Mar.30,2018 Mar 30 Mar 30 Mar 29
0.01 Contents renewal H. Amoh X. Tang T. Kaneko
–
Sep.30, 2019 Sep. 27 Sep. 26 Sep. 25
Appendix 4 Revised the contents of PIXIT based on 6F2S1875 H. Amoh M. Okai T. Kaneko
rev 0.11 Oct. 10 Jul. 12 Jul. 11
0.02 Appendix 6 Deleted ordering codes including BIO4A, whilst H. Amoh M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Oct. 31,2019 added new BIO codes: 18, 2G, 3T, 3S Oct. 10 Sep. 5 Sep. 5
(Appendix 11) Removed rack mount information; transferred H. Amoh K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
them for maintenance manuals Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 3.5 Corrected the information at signal monitoring H. Amoh T. Utsumi T. Kaneko
point of LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT in Table 3.5-5 Jan. 31 Nov. 25 Nov. 25
Chap. 5.5 Corrected Total time (TTIM) setting names at No. H. Amoh T. Utsumi T. Kaneko
10, 11, and 12 items (010, 011, 012 -> 10, 11, 12) Dec. 11 Dec. 11 Dec. 11
Chap. 6.12 Revised the setting menu hierarchy to include PLC H. Amoh K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
timer settings in Figure 6.12-3 Feb. 18 Feb. 17 Jan. 30
0.03 Chap. 7.11 Revised the setting menu hierarchy to include PLC H. Amoh K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Mar. 2,2020 timer settings in Figure 7.11-3 Feb. 18 Feb. 17 Jan. 30
Chap. 9.3 Added delay timer settings [UTM] in PLC function H. Amoh N. Iizuka T. Kaneko
Jan. 30 Dec. 5 Dec. 2
Chap. 11.1 Added new information about [ErrorLED_cond] to H. Amoh K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
turn off In-service for the occurrence of minor error Feb. 14 Feb. 13 Sep. 27
Chap. 11.2 Revised the contents about Commslv error H. Amoh M. Okai T. Kaneko
information in Automatic supervision function Dec. 13 Dec. 11 Dec. 11
Chap. 9.3 Revised information about U16_00 and U16_01 H. Amoh K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
0.04 information Mar. 27 Mar. 19 Mar. 17
Mar 27,2020 Chap. 10.3 Revised information about quality signals in H. Amoh K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
IEC61850 Mar. 27 Mar. 19 Mar. 17
Archive: G2 manuals' word files (all) 20200319rev0

GRB200D (6F2S1933 G2A De-Centralized) 0.04 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

GRB200D (6F2S1933 G2A De-Centralized) 0.04 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

6F2S1933 (Rev. 0.

Decentralized Busbar Protection IED

GR200 series (GRB200)

Notice: This GRB200 manual is issued for 031

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

Equipment installation and operation

Protective conductor terminal

Caution, risk of electric shock

Liability, copyright and others

2.3.6 FS signals (Data ID) .............................................................................................................. 90

2.9.1 Operation mode and scheme logic ...................................................................................... 147

3.7.2 Canceling logic (SBO mode) ................................................................................................ 200

5.3.3 Operating logic (SBO/DIR modes) ...................................................................................... 341

5.8.3 GENBI settings .................................................................................................................... 529

Clock function (Date and time) .................................................................................................. 612

Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)....................................................................... 730

7.11.4 Setting sub-menu ................................................................................................................. 776

10.3.6 How to supervise in 61850 communications ...................................................................... 845

11.2.19 Supervision of the A/D accuracy of BU (BUACC) .......................................................... 924

PWS alarm threshold setting (CU and BU) .............................................................................. 988

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

Figure 1.1-1 Example of system configuration

Optical fibers are used to connect the CU to each BU.

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

MPU LAN Network

Figure 1.1-3 CU Hardware Block Diagram

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

VCT CPU Binary IO modules PWS

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

USB Binary input

Figure 1.1-6 BU Hardware Block Diagram

(iii) Common hardware

Module circuits and others:

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

General control and Control & monitoring applications

[L/R] Remote/Local control function

[SPOS] Single position device function

[DPOS] Double position device function

[TPOS] Triple position device function

[SOFTSW] Software switch function

[ASEQ] Automatic sequence control function

[LRST] LED reset function

[OPTR] Operation time reset controller

[L/R] Remote/Local control function

[GCNT] General pulse counter function

[TOTALTIM] Total time measurement function

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

[MDCTRL] Mode control function

[ILK] Software interlock function

[GENBI] Event detection function with a binary input signal

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

Table 1.6-1 CU and BUs structure and their module configuration

Two COM ports: One COM port:

PWS One module can be used One module can be used

Decentralized GRB200 (Soft 03x)

Symbols used in logical diagrams

(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number

Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

An alternative point (discussed in Chapter PLC function) is provided in place of the